AA(\R H^SCn

HARVARD UNIVERSITY.

LIBRARY

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

\V

^^

Ji

(J) /^uJUxXyvv^^ajL

Ou^A 3., \c^0M - Cll^^<>V>_ :ib - V^gT

\

Uv.

.n?

?i

Q<\ ^ yif)

3fournal

OF THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

OF

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

1^^-- "^'i^'^^S^^^

VOLUME VII (N.S.).

1904-06.

i

PLYMOUTH:
PUBLISHED BY THE ASSOCLVTION.

Agents in London :— Messrs. Dui.au h. Co., 37, Soho Square, W.

llic Council of the Marine Biological Association wish it to he
understood that they do not accept respooisibiliti/ for the accuracy of
statements published in this Jo2irnaI, excepting when those statements
are contained in an official report of the Council.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME VII.

(NEW SERIES.)

List of Governors, Founders, and Members-
March, 1904 . . . .
May, 1906 . . . . .

PAGE

147
408

First Report of the Council of the Marine Biological Association
of the United Kingdom on work carried out in connection
with the International Fishery Investigations 383

Report of the Council—

1903-1904 .....

. 310

1904-1905 .....

. 391

1905-1906 .....

. 415

Balance Sheet, 1903-1904

. 326

ditto 1904-1905

. 406

ditto 1905-1906

. 434

Allen, E. J.

Pallasia miirata, n. sp. : A new British Sabellarian . . 299

Eliot, C.

Notes on some British Nudibranchs . ... 333

Johnstone, Jas.

Some Results of the International Fishery Investigations . . . 437

Pace, S.

Note on two species of Cticumcn-ia from Plymouth, hitherto confused
as C. Montayni (Fleming) ; G. Normani, n. sp., and G. mxicola, Brady
and Robertson . . . . ... 305

Plymouth Marine Invertebrate Fauna : Being Notes of the Local Distribution
of Species occurring in the Neighbourhood. Compiled from the Records
of the Laboratory of the Marine Biological Association . . .155

Thomson, J. Stuart.

The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gadidse as an Index of Age . . 1

WOLFENDEN, R. NORRIS.

Notes on the C'opepoda of the North Atlantic Sea and the Faroe Channel 110

Notes and Memoranda
Professor W. F. R. Weldon, f.r.s.

436
331

New Series. — Vol. VII., No. 1— issued April, 1904.]

[Price 3s. 6d.

vv^-Al

3fciurnal

OF THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

OF

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

•'— - -t

THE PLYMOUTH LABORATORY.

i

PLYMOUTH:

PRINTED FOR THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION BY W. BRENDON & SON,

AND

PUBLISHED I'.Y THE ASSOCIATION AT ITS OFFICES ON THE CITADEL HILL.

SKNT FREE BY POST TO ALL MEMBERS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :
ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION FOR MEMBEIISHIP, ONE GUINEA.

Agents in London :— Messrs. Dulau k. Co., 37, Soho Square, \\ .

HIS

PATRON.

MAJESTY THP: KING.

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL.

Presideiit.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, ll.d., f.r.s.

Vice-Presuie7its.

The Duke of Abercorn, k.g., c.b.
The Earl of St. Germans.
The Earl of MoRLEY.
The Earl of Ducie, f.u.s.
Lord AvEBCRY, f.r.s.

Lord TWEEDMOUTH, P.C.

Lord Walsingham, f.r.s.

The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, m.p.,

F.R.S.

The Right Hon. Jcseph Chamber-
lain, M.p.

Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.

Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., m.p., f.r.s.

A. C. L. Gunther, Esq., f.r.s.

Sir John Murray, f.r.s.

Prof, Alfred Newton, f.r.s.

Rev. Canon Norman, d.c.l., f.r.s.

Admiral Sir Erasmus Ommanney,

K.C.B., F.R.S.

Sir Henry Thompson, Bart.
Rear- Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton,
K.C.B., f.r.s.

G. L. Alward, Esq.
G. P. Bidder, Esq.
G. C. Bourne, Esq.

F. Darwin, Esq., f.r.s.

G. Herbert Fowler, Esq.
S. F. Harmer, Esq., f.r.s.
Prof. W. A. Herdman, f.r.s.

J. P. Thomasson, Esq.

The Prime Warden of the Fish-
mongers' Company.

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'
Company).

COUNCIL.

Elected Members.

Prof. G. B. Howes, f.r.s.

J. J. Lister, Es(j., f.r.s.

H. R. Mill, Esq.

Prof. E. A. MiNCHiN.

Prof. Charles Stewart, f.r.s.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, c.b.

R. N. Wolfenden, Esq., m.d.

Governors.

Prof. Sir J. Burdon Sanderson, Bart^
F.R.S. (O.xford University).

A. E. Shipley, Esq. (Cambridge
University).

Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, f.r.s.
(British Association for the Advancement of Science).

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, E.sq., Tortington, Arundel.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

PERMANENT STAFF.
Directm- — E. J. Allen, Esq., D.Sc.

Naturalist in rhanje of Fishery Investiyahons.
W. Garstang, Esq., M.A.

Assistant Naturalist — S. Pace, Esq.

A.^sistant Naturalists for the International Investigations —
W. Wallace, Esq., b.sc I J. 0. Borley, Es<i., m.a.

R. A. Todd, Esq., b.sc ( L. H. Gough, Esq., ph.d,

Hydrofjrajyher (International Investigations) — D. J. Matthews, Esq.

WAV 3 1904

The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gadidae
as an Index of Age.

By
J. Stuart Thomson, F.L.S.

(With Plates I.-VIII., and one Figure in the text.)

TABLE

OF CONTENTS.

PAOE

I. Introduction

• • •

1

II. Summary of Literature

■ • •

2

III. Statistics

■ • •

56

General Statements relating to Statistics

56

The Pollack.

General Statements relating to

Statistical Tables

58

Mode of Scale Measurement (with fig.)

61

Detailed Statistical Tables

62

Summarised Statistical Tables

. 74

The Poor Cod.

Detailed Statistical Tables

79

Summarised Statistical Tables

85

The Whiting.

General Statement

85

Detailed Statistical Tables

86

Summarised Statistical Tallies

96

The Haddock.

Detailed Statistical Table

. 101

Summarised Statistical Table

. 102

The Cod.

Brief Table of Age

. 103

The Eel .

. 103

IV. Conclusion

. 104

Literature

. 106

Explanation of Plates .

. 108

I. iNTrvODUCTION.

Tins work is a continuation of my preliminary paper on the same
subject, which was pubhshed in a former number of the Journal of the
Association (vol. vi., p. 373, January, 1902).

I must firstly express my indebtedness to those who have aided mo
in my work. I am signally indebted to Mr. Garstang, wlio, about two

NEW aEKIE.S. — VOL. VII. NO. 1. Al'llIL, 1904. A

2 THE TERIODIC GRO'WTII OF SCALES IN GADID^

years ago, suggested that I should endeavour to extend to marine fishes
this newly revived though really old hypothesis, that the age of certain
fislies might be determined by means of annual rings on their scales,
an hypothesis which Dr. Hofi'bauer had previously shown to be true
for some fresh-water fishes, such as the carp. To Dr. E. J. Allen I am
indebted, not only for placing all the possible facilities of the Plymouth
Laboratory at my disposal, but also for reading the manuscript and
proof-sheets. For the latter I am all the more indebted to Dr. Allen,
in that, as I WTite, I am just on the point of leaving this country to
take up a new biological appointment at Cape Town. I would further
express my obligations to Professor Mcintosh, Dr. T. Wemyss Fulton,
and Dr. H. M. Kyle, who generously lielped me in securing additional
specimens. I must add that without the aid of a Government Grant,
awarded through the Koyal Society, this work could not have been
accomplished in its present form.

This paper consists of two parts : the first part contains a review of
the literature on fish- scales, more especially so far as that bears on the
subject of my investigation ; the second part is composed of statistics
dealing with the size, the number of growth-lines and annual rings in
scales from fish of all sizes, and captured at the various seasons of the
year. The accumulation of the necessary statistics for this second
portion of my work has been an arduous and lengthy task, involving,
as it has done, exact measurements of hundreds of scales and a more
superficial observation of thousands of others.

II. Summary of Literature.

I may firstly notice tliat, shortly after the invention of the microscope,
Borello wrote a brief description of the microscopic appearance of a fish
scale, and added a diagrammatic figure of the same.*

About a hundred years later, Ilooke, in his Micrograpliia, gave a very brief
description, but a fairly exact figure, of the scales of the sole.f

We are indebted to'Leuwenhoeck for several interesting notes on the de-
velopment and structure of scales. J In regard to the growth of scales, his
first idea was that each year the scales increased in size by adding a new zone
or circle to the pre-existing scale. Later, however, he abandoned this view,
as in examining certain scales lie observed that those of old fishes are very
thick, much thicker than they would necessarily be if their mode of increase
was simply by the addition of a new circle or zone each year.

He came to the conclusion that the portion which he had at first taken for
a new zone disposed round the jn-imitive scale was simply the most external
])art of a new scale, the part which exceeded tlie old scale in size, and that
all these scales were intimately welded together.

* Borello, 1566. [For detailed references see Literature, p. 106.]
t Hcoke, 1667. X Leuwenhoeck, 1696.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 3

In order to explain the formation of superimposed scales, Leuwenhoeck
believed tliat the growth of scales, as that of hair, feathers, horns, and trees,
ceases for a very short period at the end of the first year, and that scales are
afterwards formed beneath and add themselves to the lirst. As the scales of a
two-year-old fish exceed those of a one-year-old fish in size and dimensions, it
follows that the scale of a two-year-old fish is partly covered by the first-year
scale and extends beyond it. The same takes place for the following years,
and thus the scales of a ten-year-old fish are composed of ten scales, secondarily
superimposed the one upon the other, and fused so intimately with one
another that they cannot be easily separated without tearing the scale into
pieces. If, in the scales of fishes, new scales did not weld themselves each
year to the old scales, tlien the scales of very large fish would of necessity be
very thin and fragile. Leuwenhoeck restated these views in a later paper.*

Iieaumur made a study of the silvery substance of scales, sometimes known
as "Tessence d'Orient."! He stated that this substance consists of a
mass of an infinite number of small and very irregular bodies. These bodies
are extremely thin, but of great solidity. He found this substance present
almost solely on the internal surface, not on the external surface, of the scale.
He held that this substance is covered over by membrane, and contained
in vessels or tubes which extend in a direction transversely perpendicular
to the length of the scale. Ec'aumur affirmed that this silvery matter con-
tributed directly to the growth of scales. He agreed with Leuwenhoeck that
each scale is composed of an indefinite number of layers, of which the largest
are those nearest the body of the fish. Speaking of the concentric lines,
Reaumur Avrote "that they occupy the border of each layer, of which they
mark the limit, and that they indicate the different degrees of growth in
scales, just as the analogous markings indicate the growth of shells."

As to the radiating grooves in scales, Reaumur believed that they lodged
blood-vessels. He also gave a good description of the scales of the lateral
line, pointing out that scales from that region have a small canal on their
external surface. These small canals abut end to end, thus forming a continu-
ous channel, which apparently serves to carry away the mucus formed on the
bodies of various fishes.

Roberg reproduced a figure of the scale of the eel, previously given by
Leuwenhoeck. I

In his Memoir on the Carp, Petit dealt with the following points in connec-
tion with their scales, but only in a very brief manner : the mode in which
scales overlap each other, the dimensions of scales in different regions of the
body, the mode in which scales are enclosed in the skin, the furrows (sillo)is)
on the upper surface of the scale, the silvery matter on the lower surface,
etc. He, however, gave a mucli more detailed description of the scales of the
lateral line. §

A few observations on scales are found in the writings of Schaeffer. He

also gives figures of scales from five difi'erent species of perch. He notes the

external characters of scales, and their variation in different parts of the body,

but does not go into their detailed structure nor development. ||

* Leuwenhoeck, 1716. t Reaumur, 1716 and 1718. X Roberg, 1717.

^ Petit, 1733. ll.^Schaeffer, 1761.

y

4 THE TERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GAUID^

Broussonet demonstrated the presence of scales in a number of genera of
fish in which their existence had either previously been denied or held in
doubt, for example Cepola, Remora, Ammodytes, Anguilla, Scomber. His
descriptions are very brief, and the paper is not of great importance.*

We osve to Heusinger the first attempt at a classification of fish by means of
their scales. t He divided fishes provided with scales into five groups: —

I. Fish with small scales entirely hidden in skin (Anguilla, Muraena,
Elennius, ^Muraenophis).

II. Fish with scales properly so called (Carp, Esox, Salmo).

III. Fish with scales strongly toothed at their free margins (Chsetodon).

IV. Fish provided with osseous scales (Knochenschuppen). These scales
resemble those of Group II,; but they have so much calcareous matter as to
resemble hard teeth. They are not usually imbricated, but are isolated or
simply contiguous ; their surface is frequently furnished with spines
(Lepidosteus and several species of the genera Trigla, Cottus, Silurus,
Gasterosteus, etc.).

V. Fish with osseous plates (Knoclienplatten). These plates form a solid
cuirass round the fish (Ostracion, Diodon, Syngnathus, Hippocampus,
Accipenser, etc.).

Selachians are not comprised in the preceding five groups. Heusinger
places them in a separate division characterised by the "mode of conformation
of the spiny formation," whose structure approaches to that of teeth.

Heusinger also gives a succinct description of true scales, and in regard to
their structure agrees with Agassiz in regarding each scale as composed of
superimposed lamelke or la^'ers.

Kuntzmann's paper | is of importance chiefly because it contains the germ of
an idea which Agassiz later developed more fully in his Classijication des
Poissons. In his paper Kuntzmann opposes the views of Schaeffer, who had
enipliasised the differences between scales of the same fish. Kuntzmann held
" that though one does not easily find absolutely similar scales on the same
species of fish, yet the scale of each species has some characteristic feature,
and that an examination of scales may enable one to acquire a more exact
knowledge of species, and that one may identify some genera and even some
species simply by an examination of their scales." He compares scales to the
leaves on plants, in whicli, altliough there is frequently quite a degree of
variation among the leaves of the same species, still one may often recognise
the species of plant by means of its leaves.

Kuntzmann experimented witli scales in regard to their indestructibility in
water, and showed that after prolonged immersion in water they were not
softened to any marked degree.

He opposed the opinion of Leuwenhoeck as to the concentric lines on the
upper surface of the scale indicating the age of the fish. He maintained that
the scales of an old carp do not show a larger number of concentric lines than
tliose of the young carp (see lioffbauer). As to the mode of scale growth,
Kuntzmann agreed in the main with tlie views of Reaumur. He regarded the
small quadrangular plates (described by Reaumur) on the internal surface of

* Broussonet, 1787. i Heusinger, 1823. + Kuntziuann, 1824.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 5

the scale as a precipitate, a deposit of mucus, which contributed directly to
the formation of scales. He differed, however, from Reaumur as to the
situation of these quadrangular plates later, affirming that they were contained
between two membranes on the internal surface of the scale, and not in vessels.
He held that growth does not take place at the edge, but over the entire scale,
and that this mode of growth is a consequence of the structure which the scale
shows at the time of its first formation, for the scales of a young fish and those
of an old fish are not essentially different except in size. He thinks that this
mode of formation allows one to explain the difference between scales of
different species, especially the difference of the concentric lines, which may be
wide or narrow, straight or curved, entire or interrupted in the different species.
Kuntzmann worked out a classification of scales into seven classes, remark-
ing at the same time that quite gradual transitions existed between these
classes, and that certain scales might equally well be placed in one class as in
another. His classes are the following : —

I. Memhranoxis scales {IiauHgen Scliuppen). Scales which do not show
concentric lines (Gadus Iota).

II. Semi-memhranous scales (halhhautu/en). Scales with a membranous
posterior portion, but with the anterior portion marked out by incomplete
concentric lines, crossed over by other lines running longitudinally {Clupea
harengus).

III. Simj^le scales {einfachen). Scales with concentric lines covering their
entire surface without those lines forming any definite design by other lines
crossing over them (Sahno salar).

IV. Scales icith a design {gezeichneten). Scales in which the concentric lines
on the scale surface form a regular design due to the arrangement of the same
(Murwna anguUla).

V. Scales divided into several regions (gefelderten). Scales on which there
exist numerous ornaments which parcel out the scale into four well-defined
fields. These diverse fields, usually triangular in shape, meet at a point, which
is usually at the same time the centre of the concentric lines {Cyprinus
carpio).

YI. Scales icith prickles. These scales are also frequently divided into four
fields. The posterior field bears spines on a more or less extended portion of
its surface, or sometimes only at its free border. These spines fall oft' on pro-
longed maceration, showing that they are not really portions of the scale, but
arise from the skin which covers the scales. These spines also fall oft" natur-
ally at certain seasons, and others take their place. "This fact seems to
establish a kind of moulting, such as occurs in Amphibia." Examples — The
scales of Scorpcena.

VII. Spinous scales (gedornte) are also divided up into several areas or fields.
The spines are in this case, however, true prolongations of the scale, and do
not become detached on maceration. Example : — Perca lucioperca.

Kuntzmann gives a short description of each type of scale with a corre-
sponding figure. Although the preceding classification is interesting, yet it
leads to an artificial comparison.

Ehrenberg described the crystals of silvery matter previously described liy

6 THE TERIODIC GliOWTIl OF SCALES IN GADID^E

Reaumur. Along with his description there is an analysis of this substance
by Rose.*

Agassiz expressed himself in the following manner in regard to the structure
and development of scales : — f

"Scales are contained in mucous cavities or in small sacs formed by the
' chorion,' to which, however, they do not adhere by vessels. They are
formed of lamellce, of hornj' or calcareous layers, superimposed the one on the
other, which are secreted at the surface of the chorion ; these layers attach
themselves successively to the inferior surface of the preceding, to which they
weld themselves by layers of hardened mucus. In order to obtain a true idea
of this development, it is necessary firstly to observe it in those genera of fish
in which the scales appear to show these arrangements in the simplest state,
for example, in the Eels, the Blennies, Cobitis, and Leuciscus. It is easy to
assure oneself that the concentric lines of the anterior border and those of the
posterior border are continuous the one with the other."

In order to support his theory, which after all is none other than that
of Leuwenhoeck, Agassiz appealed to the following : —

"After having macerated scales for some time in water, one can easily," he
says, " divide them up in a large number of layers or plates of greater or less
thickness, and of difiereut size, but all of which have the form of the scale.
These plates are superimposed in such a manner that the smallest occupy the
centre of the scale, and form its interior part, while the largest, bordering the
preceding, are successively welded to their inferior face. Thus one sees that
the concentric lines which are visible on the exterior surface of scales are
simply the borders of plates which compose them."

The radiating grooves (sUlofis rayonnani^) Agassiz regarded as channels at
the margin of the external surface, which connect one layer with another, and
multiply during the growth of the scale. In this work Agassiz introduced
his well-known classification of fish into four orders according to the nature of
their scales, the Placoid, Ganoid, Ctenoid, and Cycloid orders.

Mandl, J well known as the opponent of Agassiz, held widely different views
in regard to scale structure and development from those of all the authors
previously mentioned.

He attempted to establish the existence of an internal life and true
organisation within the scale. According to him, most scales are composed of
two superimposed layers, superior and inferior. The superior layer shows the
structure of cartilage with corpuscles, the inferior layer consists of lamellae
which recall the structure of fibrous cartilage.

In the superior layer he describes longitudinal canals, cellular lines, and
corpuscles.

Loivjitudinal Canals. Under the term ^Hoyigitudinal canals" he describes
the grooves which radiate out from the centre to the periphery of the scale.
According to Mandl, these lines show all stages of formation, from that of a
simple groove to that of a perfectly formed canal. These canals lead to a
common point, the focus, which is a centre of nutrition, a point where tissue

• Ehrenberg, 1833. t Agassiz, 1834. t Mandl, 1839.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 7

is found developing. Mandl thought that these canals serve for the transport
of nutritive material from the skin towards the centre of nutrition, in other
Avords, that they fill the role of true vessels containing nourishment.

The Cellular lines. Under this term iNIandl discusses the concentric lines
or ridges parallel to the contour of the scale. He does not agree with previous
authors in regarding these lines as the projections of secreted and super-
imposed la3'ers. According to him, these lines owe their origin to special
cells which originally form themselves on the superior surface of the scale ;
gradually these cells amplify and elongate, and finally come to represent
cellular lines.

Corpuscles. ^Mandl is the first author to describe definite corpuscles in the
tissue of scales. He describes those corpuscles as of a yellowish colour, and
of an oblong, more or less elliptical form. They diminish in size towards the.
edge of the scale, showing there only a granulated appearance similar to that
which one notices sometimes in the vicinity of the longitudinal canals.
These corpuscles are usually arranged in a very regular way, sometimes
crossing one another in such a manner as to form a cross. Under the action
of acids they become transparent.

These corpuscles are contained in a definite tissue which is situated above
the inferior surface of the scale. This tissue is an amorphous tissue like that
in which the corpuscles of bone are deposited. The tissue constituting the
superior layer of scales thus approaches that of cartilage with non-ossified
corpuscles.

Inferior layer of scale. Beneath the layer with corpuscles is found the
inferior layer, which is a fibrous layer built up of fibrous lamellae, in which
the fibres cross one another at regular angles, but in which the fibres all
follow the same direction in the same lamella. This arrangement approaches
that of fibrous cartilage. This inferior layer is thickest at the focus (foyer) of
the scale, and thinnest at the borders ; it is this which forms the foundation
of the longitudinal canals in the vicinity of the border of the scales.

Mode of scale formation. Mandl endeavours firstly to establish a dis-
tinction between the formation of the superior and inferior layers of scales.
According to him, the superior layer, composed of cells, corpuscles, and of the
fundamental substance which contains them, develops by growth, which takes
place at the periphery round the cellular lines.

The inferior lamellcB increase by the formation of new lamellse beneath the
preceding. The elements necessary for the formation of these lamelhe are
brought by the longitudinal canals. The old lamelliB being the smallest, this
explaijis why the thickness of the scale ought to increase in degree as one
approaches the focus (foyer).

"Si nous voulons appliquer les resultats que nous avons obtenus dans
I'etude de la structure intime des ccailles, ii I'explication de la maniere dont
elles se forment, nous verrons tout d'abord qu'il importe de bien distinguer la
formation de la couche superieure, et celle de la coiiche infurieure. La
premiere, composue de cellules et de leurs bases avcc le tissue qui contient les
corpuscles, prend son developement par des accroissements qui ont lieu dans
la peripheric, autour des lignes cellulaires ; au moyen, de pareits accroisse-

8 THE PERIODIC GKOWTII OF SCALES IN GADID.E

inents, ils forment, non-seulement plusieurs ligncs cellulaires, mais les
canaux longituJinaux eux-memes se trouvent allonges. II est trus probable
que ces lignes collulaires ne se forment pas, seulement, I'une aprcs I'autre,
mais que plusieurs lignes sont produites simultanunient ; nous en trouvons una
preuve clans les ccailles, qui dans leurs accroissement successifs, conservent les
espaces marginaux, et dont les lignes cellulaires ou les cellules sont ainsi
separees en plusieurs groupes, nous citerons par exemple les c'cailles de cobitis
fossilis. Mais cet accroissement dans la pe'ripherie n'expliquerait nullement,
la grande t'paisseur du milieu ; nous en trouverons la cause dans la formation
de la couclie infurieure. Nous avons vu que celle-ci est composee de
plusieurs lanielles. A chaque accroissement se forment toujours des nouvelles
lamelles : les canaux longitudinaux, qui parcourent toute rccaille, apportent
les sues necessaires pour qu'une formation uniforme d'une nouvelle lamelle
puisse s'opcrer dans toute I'etendre de Tccaille. II s'ensuit, que les anciennes
lamelles rtant plus petites, IV'paisseur doit s'augmenter, a mesure que I'ou se
rapproche du foyer."

As to the use of scales for purposes of classification, Mandl says that up to
the present " we have found definite and characteristic forms for each family,"
and that further research on a sufficient number of individuals would decide
whether this might also be applied to genera and species. Mandl's views
were thus totally at variance with those of Agassiz, and the latter answered
in a letter addressed to 1' Academic des sciences,* in which he attacks the
results announced by his opponent. Agassiz concludes this letter by saying
that the description which he had previously given of the structure of scales
was correct, and that Mandl's method of viewing the subject was altogether
wrong.

Mandl replied to Agassiz's letter by a counter letter, also addressed to
PAcademie.-]- He reiterated that scales are organised bodies, and consist of true
living tissue capable of nourishing itself and growing by intussusception. He
replied to each of Agassiz's criticisms by a new affirmation to the opposite
effect, and accused Agassiz of having badly understood or misinterpreted
some of his points.

In the same year Agassiz published a fairly extended memoir, | in
which he takes up the facts as stated by Mandl, one by one, and subjects
them to the severest criticism.

After some points relating to the structure of the skin, Agassiz deals with
the following : —

(a) Longitudinal canals, (b) cellular lines, (c) the corpuscles, (d) the fibrous
layer, (e) the focus, (/) the teeth.

Firstly, Agassiz denied the existence of true longitudinal canals, and the
role of these so-called canals as having the function of nourishing the scale.

As to the cellular lines, Agassiz emphatically denied the presence of cells,
and wrote that Mandl had been deceived by an optical illusion. As to the
corpuscles, Agassiz maintained that they are not situated in the thickness of
the scale, as stated by ]\Iandl ; but on the contrary, close to the superior and
inferior surfaces, for if one slightly scrapes one of these surfaces or, after a slight

• Agassiz, 1840. i Mandl, 1840. t Agassiz, 1840.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 9

maceration, raises some of the lamellre, the corpuscles disappear. Agassiz
thought that the corpuscles beneath are lamellre incompletely formed, and
those above are lamellcTe which have been broken down through the friction of
scales against one another. As to the fibrous layer, Agassiz believed that this
layer, which Mandl described as serving for the foundation of the cellular
substance of scales, has as little existence as the cells themselves ; in other
words, that its supposed existence was founded on an error of observation,
as all fibrous tissues (tendons, cellular tissue, etc.) produce gluten on boiling,
yet well-cleaned scales never produce that substance. Agassiz maintained
that scales do not show two distinct layers, but that the superior and inferior
layers have the same composition. He thought that the fibres described by
Mandl were due to a tearing of the younger and less consistent inferior
lamellae, which gave rise to the appearance of fibres ; but which was none the
less an optical illusion. According to Agassiz, the focus is simply the oldest
part of the scale, in which the superior lamellre have been worn away by
friction or exfoliation. Altogether, Agassiz maintained that the material
which IMandl had brought forward as to the detailed structure of scales was
(juite erroneous. Agassiz's idea as to the mode of scale formation may be
summarised as follows : —

" The scales of fishes are epidermic secretions, analogous to that of nails.
As in nails, the scales are composed of exceedingly thin lamellae of a horny
nature, superimposed the one on the other in the order of their formation.
The secreting organ is the epidermic pouch, in which the scales are ensconced
at their anterior borders. The newdy formed lamellae are very soft, but of
the same composition as the oldest lamellae. The pouch increases in such a
manner that the newly formed lamellce are always larger than the older. The
concentric lines are reflexed parts of the borders of su]:)erimposed lamellae,
and these lines are more numerous in old than in young fish. Scales disinte-
grate or waste chiefly round the focus by friction of the scales among them-
selves or by exfoliation. The focus and corpuscles on the external surface are
simply results of this wearing down ; one does not find them in non-imbri-
cated scales, as in those of the eel, for example. By means of sections one
sees that scales are composed of lamellae, and that there are marks which
correspond to concentric lines. The so-called teeth or notches are simply
indentations of the posterior border of the lamella."

In the following year, Peters* gave a critical review and summary of the
observations of Mandl and Agassiz. This author firstly gave some general
considerations on the structure of the skin of fishes. In a fresh-water fish,
one finds the following layers in the skin covering the scales : —

1. An epidermis composed of squamous cells (the latter being very
abundant in the mucus of fishes).

2. A layer of pigmented cells.

3. The skin proper, a layer composed of fibrous connective tissue containing
fatty globules.

4. An exceedingly thin membrane immediately on the external surface of
the scale, but distinct from the skin. On this membrane are seen concentric

* Peters, 1841.

10 THE TERIODIC GltOWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

grooves ami longitudinal ridges corresponding to tlie concentric ridges and
longitudinal grooves on the scale. Tliis membrane consists of thin crossed
fibres, the intercrossing of which results in the indentations of the concentric
ridges. The constituent fibres swell strongly under the action of acetic
acid, a character which evidently belongs to fibres of connective tissue. The
superior or external portion of the scale shows, moreover, a very fine in-
separable layer, which shows the presence of fibres under the action of acetic
acid, and which it is difficult to destroy by combustion. Tlicse intimate con-
nections between skin and scale enable one to see how, during growth, the
appearance of the scale surface may be modified without exfoliation taking
place.

According to Peters, the scale is not formed in the epidermis, but in the
skin itself ; in that case the scale cannot be simply a horny secretion of the
epidermis.

Peters agrees with Mandl in admitting the existence in all scales of a very
soft lamellated inferior layer consisting of fibrous cartilage ; he disagrees with
Agassiz as to the number of lamella? corresponding to the number of concentric
striae on the upper surface. He held that Agassiz had not sufiicient proof of
the non-existence of cartilage in scales, and did not believe in his statement
as to the horny nature of scales.

As to the corpuscles, he maintained that these were found, not on both
surfaces of the scale, as stated by Agassiz, but only on the inferior surface.
He regards the corpuscles as special elements, and not as being due to incom-
pletely formed lamellte or to the wearing down of these thin layers. Corpuscles
of some solidity show a granular appearance towards the border of the scale,
and give rise to the asperities existing on the posterior border of many scales
(Perch). Towards the centre of the scale one finds beneath the elliptical
forms quadrangular corpuscles which are arranged in regular series, and give
rise to spines. These spines are not, as Mandl supposed, comparable to true
teeth. Peters believed that scales could not afford a proper basis for a rational
classification, showing that two kinds of scales, cycloid and ctenoid, occur in
the same fish {Pelamys sarda).

As to the superior or external layer of the scale, Peters realised much
difficulty, especially in attempting to explain the origin and meaning of the
concentric lines and radiating canals.

The superior layer, he said, does not usually show any distinct elements,
though sometimes one can recognise in it the same fibres and the same corpuscles
as in the inferior layer ; but never with the same degree of distinctness and
clearness. He did not believe that the concentric stri.T? represented the borders
of superimposed lamelkB or plates of the scale, in as much as the striic are not
always i)arallel to the free border, but are sometimes perpendicular to it.
For example, in Alepocephalus rosfratus the stria? are only disposed con-
centrically in the posterior third of the scale, while in the remainder of their
extent they run straight forward, parallel the one to the other. He agrees
with Agassiz in refuting the statement of Mandl in regarding the radiating
canals as serving for the nutrition of scales, and regards them rather as
sutures rendering growth possible in all directions. He adds that these
sutures are not only found running out from the centre in the direction of the

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 11

periphery, but sutures are sometimes disposed concentrically (Ophidium,
Sudis, Rypticus, Heterotis, etc.).

Peters denies the existence of osseous corpuscles in ordinary scales, but
admits the fact of their presence in Polypterus and Lepisosteus.

In his paper on the embryology of the salmon, Vogt brings forward some
facts relating to the development of scales.* He states that the scales do not
show themselves till three months after hatching ; that the concentric plates,
so numerous in the scales of the adult salmon, are relatively few in number
in the young fish; but that the lines which indicate the borders of different
plates are just as continuous in the young as in the old scale, and thus in
no way indicate formation from isolated cells. lie notes that the central
focus is frequently smaller in the young as contrasted with the adult worn scale.

Mliller issued a paper on Ganoids and natural classification of fishes. f In
part of this paper the author deals with some points relating to the taxonomic
value of the characters of scales. He held that the differences between the
scales of Cycloids and Ctenoids is of little importance, and can only be useful
for purposes of classification in a very limited way. | Later Vogt issued
another paper, § in Avhich he discusses the value of the characters of scales
in distinguishing different orders of Ganoids.

In the Manual of Comparative Atiatomy, by Siebold and Stannius, || the
latter makes some statements regarding scales. He writes that scales cannot
be regarded as horny epidermic formations, and that it is impossible to ignore
the presence of a substance on the lower scale surface possessing a fibro-
cartilaginous texture and the existence of osseous corpuscles in some scales.
He does not admit that scale growth takes place only by means of super-
imposed layers, and regards it as doubtful whether it would be right to
take the different forms of scales exclusively as a basis for classification.

In a paper by Dareste on the classification of Plectognathes, we find some
observations on the scales of fishes belonging to this order.^ In regard to the
integuments of Diodons and Tetrodons, he writes that in these we have not
scales, but spines, which are fixed in the skin by roots of a horny nature. The
spinous portion is very closely analogous to the ivory of teeth, and contains as
in these tubules which radiate out in all directions. The integument of
Triodons differs from that of Diodons and Tetrodons in possessing true scales,
comparable on the whole to those of osseous fishes. The external border shows
indentations similar to the ctenoid condition as described by Agassiz. The
cuirass of Ostracions results from the union of rhomboidal plates placed side
by side, and which possess an inferior layer of a horny nature and a superior
layer of osseous substance possessing calciferous tul)es Avhich recall the struc-
ture of teeth.

Dareste, in another paper on Blochius longirostris** gives some considera-
tions on the value of scales as characters in classification. He would not
give them the role of dominating characters.

Williamson pul)lished an important paper on the structure and develop-
ment of the scales and bones of fishes. ft Writing in 1873, Baudelot claims

* Vogt, 1842. t Mlillcr, 1844. % MiiUer, 1843. § Vogt, 1845.

II Siet)old and Stannius, 1849. II Dareste, 1850.

** Dareste, 1850. ft Williamson, 1851.

v/

12 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

tliat the latter paper is " one of the most important which has been published
on the scales of osseous fishes."

Williamson brought forwanl important general vieAvs relating to the mode
of composition of the scales and of the other hard parts in fishes. He en-
deavoured to show that scales, teeth, chondrified and membranous bones,
etc., are not really formed of tissues of an entirely different nature, but
of tissues which pass the one into the other by gradual transitions. AVilliam-
son commences his paper by a critical review of Mandl and Agassiz's work.
He regarded Mandl's view of scale formation as given on page 7 as being
more correct in some respects than that of other writers, but as being built
upon a false foundation on account of his having mistaken solid calcareous
granules for cells. He regarded Mandl's description of the inferior layer as
correct, but denied the existence of longitudinal canals as described by him.

Williamson points out that although Agassiz at first refuted Mandl's state-
ment as to their being two layers in scales, he subsequently acknowledged
that each scale really consisted of two different strata. Williamson regarded
Agassiz's views to be as little tenable as those of Mandl. He says that while
Agassiz regarded the lower layer of the scale "as a horny substance, an
exuded secretion from the sac into which he considers the lower and anterior
portions of the scale to be fitted," it is really a fibrous substance.

He says that Agassiz has failed " to detect the existence of two distinct
structures in the upper or calcified part of the scale," and that in regarding
the corpuscles in the middle of the scale not as true corpuscles, but rather as
due to some solution of continuity between the upper and lower tissue, he
has quite mistaken their character. According to Williamson, cycloid and
ctenoid scales consist of three layers, inferior, median, and superior.

The inferior layer consists of numerous membranous laminae arranged in
parallel horizontal lines. These laminse are most numerous in the centre of
the scale, and decrease in number as we approach the periphery, until finally
only one is present. Each of these membranous laminae is composed of
numerous fine fibres, all of which run parallel with one another in the
same lamina. Numerous isolated lenticular calcareous bodies are to be
observed imbedded amongst these membranous laminae. These calcareous
bodies arise as a result of the calcification of the membranous laminas, and
appear firstly as small calcareous atoms, which grow in size by the addition
of successive concentric laminae to their external borders. "The growth
in size of cycloid and ctenoid scales takes place by the successive addition
of membranous lamellae on the inferior face of those which have been
previously formed, each new plate being larger than the preceding."

The median layer of the scale is mainly built up of a mass of similar
lenticular calcareous bodies which unite with one another as they increase in
size, frequently also losing their original lenticular shape during this process
of coalescence.

This median layer of the scale decreases in thickness as one proceeds from
the centre to the periphery until at last it disappears altogether, the calcareous
layer being not only thicker, but now consolidated towards the centre of the
scale. After the calcareous granules have become fused and consolidated
together, the median layer thus formed is split up into horizontal laminae

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 13

which agree in their direction with the membranous laminae previous to
calcification. The laminae also exhibit a number of vertical cleavages or
fissures. " Tlie middle layer then is produced by the formation and coal-
escence of the small lenticular bodies, through the agency of which the
calcification of the membranous laminae is effected. This calcification per-
meates the entire extent of the upper and earlier-formed lamellae, whilst,
with the exception of a few isolated granules, it has been confined to the
margins of those which are inferior and of more recent growth."

The superior layer of the scale differs both in structure and in mode of
origin from the median and inferior layer. This superior layer is the one by
various modifications of which all the ridges and tubercles seen on the
surfaces of scales are produced. In vertical section it frequently shows an
undulating outline and has traces of a lamellar formation (the lamellae
being homogeneous and devoid of structure), the more external being parallel
with tlie upper surface of the section. The radiating lines (nutrient canals
of Mandl) are produced simply by the absence of superficial tissue along
their course. While these radiating lines are not nutrient canals, as was
supposed by Mandl, neither do they pass through the entire calcareous
portion of the scale and reach the underlying soft tissues, as was maintained
by Agassiz : they only do so at the margin of the scale, where the median
layer is not yet developed ; but towards the centre, where the median layer
exists, these grooves do not pass through it. The ridges intervening between
these radiating lines are of some thickness, and are transversely subdivided by
a large number of small ridges. These ridges are really the concentric lines
seen on the surfaces of most cycloid and ctenoid scales. The superior layer of
the scale covers the entire surface of the scale even to its extreme periphery,
but the median ceases to exist at some little distance from the margin. The
growth of the superior layer is effected at its upper surface by the calcifica-
tion of a thin superficial membrane which covers the scale at the same time
that the corresponding though different process is adding to the lower surface
of the median layer. He says "it thus becomes manifest that these concen-
tric ridges are not lines of growth, as thought by M. Mandl, but the result of
a peculiar arrangement of the superficial tissue of the scale, a conclusion
which accords with that arrived at by M. Agassiz." After a description of
the scales of the carp, pike, salmon, perch, he says, " The question which now
suggests itself is, what relation does the superior investing membrane bear to
the inferior fibrous portion 1 "

To this question, however, he is unable to give anything more than
hypothetical answers (see page 654, Williamson) and continues, "Be the
process of its genesis what it may, we have here demonstrative evidence of
the existence of such a superficial film of soft membrane as is essential to my
hypothesis, accounting for the peculiar structure and growth of tlie upper-
most layer." He further regarded the substance of the superior layer as
probably identical with the ganoin existing in Lepidosteus, Lepidotus, and
their allies.

Leydig gives a description of the structure of scales,-" in which his reference
to the corpuscles of Mandl is the most important point raised. Tiiese are

* Leydig, 1851.

14 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADIDiE

sometimes situated freely side by side, or the one above the other, sometimes
they increase directly to form the asperities and teeth on the posterior border
of scales {Perca jluviatili$, Acerina cernua), sometimes they fuse together at
their margins, forming a united mass, a layer of the scale. Leydig asks of
what nature these corpuscles are which vn fusing come to produce scales. In
considering the role of these corpuscles in the production of scales, he con-
siders them as analogous to the free globules of Czermak, wliich on fusing
together produce dentary substance.

According to him, the grooves on the scales of the lateral line show
a different texture from the rest of the scales. They are rather true osseous
products superadded to tlie scales. In another j^aper Leydig gives observa-
tions on the structure of scales in Pohjptenis bichir* which does not
specially deserve attention in a })aper dealing mainly with cycloid scales. In
a later work Leydig deals with the sulyect of the corpuscles in scales of
various genera;! but this consists in the main of a reproduction of his
previous work in the first paper mentioned.

Hollard issued a monograph on the family Balistidff.t The disposition of
tubercles and spines on the scales, their grouping and mode of formation,
have chiefly engagetl his attention so far as he takes up the subject of scales in
this monograph, Hollard § published a second monograph on the Ostracions,
in which he gave a detailed description of the tegumentary and scale systems
in this family. He held that the spines on scales are of value for purposes of
specific classification.

Steenstrup issued a paper in Avhich there is an interesting note in direct
connection with the main subject of my paper. || He says, "The scales of
osseus fishes, Cycloid, Ctenoid, and Ganoid, persist during the entire life of the
fish. They grow with the growth of the animal. The scaly covering of lish
is consequently composed of the same number of scales during the entire life
of the animal. This is so true, that allied species may be distinguished with
certainty by the number of scales in each longitudinal line." Steenstrup
states that the case is very different in cartilaginous fishes, that placoid scales
do not grow with the fish. Their size never exceeds certain limits, and their
existence is only temporary. They fall off continually and give place to others.

Owen gives a brief note regarding the scales of the tunny, and a description
accompanied by a figure of the scales of the eel. H

Blanchard published a work on the fresh-water fishes of France.** Li this
work he does not give any detailed description of the internal structure of
scales, but he gives figures and descriptions of their external appearance for
a number of species. He finds it difticult to agree with Agassiz's idea of the
mode of scale growth by the successive addition of new plates or laminae to the
inferior face of previously existing ones, and in regarding the concentric lines
as the edges of those plates, as, according to Blanchard, the number of
concentric striaj is as great in very small as in very large fish of the same
species. Blanchard brought forward a novel idea as to the function of scales,
namely, that they fulfil a role in the respiratory function, varying in degree in

* Leydig, 1854. f Leydig, 1866. t Hollard, 1853, 1854.

§ Hollard, 1857. |1 Steenstrup, 1861. 1[ Owen, 1866.

Blanchard, 1866.

• »

AS AX IXDEX OF AGE. 15

different types, but notably developed in the Cyprinidae, for example, in which
the scales are penetrated by canals through which water may easily percolate.
We are indebted to Dr. Salbey for an interesting paper on the structure and
mode of growth of fish scales.* In this work Dr. Salbey commences with
some points on the structure of the skin, in which he reviews facts already
known, then he gives a brief description of the four types of scales (Placoid,
Ganoid, Ctenoid, and Cycloid) established by Agassiz, and lastly he deals with
the external characters, internal structure, and mode of growth in the Cycloid
and Ctentoid types. According to Salbey, there are two layers in scales,
(1) an external or superior layer and (2) an internal or inferior layer. The
superior layer develops at the expense of the superficial layer of the skin by
the deposition of calcareous salts at the interior of this layer. The inferior
layer is composed of superimposed lamella;, indefinite in number. These
lamella?, are not homogeneous but are of two kinds. They are arranged in
such a manner that a comparatively thin lamella is found ])etween every two
thicker lamelhie. These thin and thick lamellae difter in character. The
thick lamellae are colourless and calcareous in their nature, the thin lamellae
are yellowish and composed of a conjunctive substance, a kind of cement
(Kifffuhsfan:^. Thus the arrangement of lamellae is that of a conjunctive layer
disposed between every two calcareous layers. In making sections the con-
junctive layer resolves itself into fibrous elements, the individual elements of
which appear to follow tlie same direction. The number of superimposed
lamellaj has no definite relation to the age of the fish, as seen by a comparison
of the number of lamellae on fish of the same species, but of very diflerent ages.
He thinks, however, that as the lamellcB of older fish are thicker, and as the
dillerence in colour between lamellae does not appear, it is probable that con-
junctive lamellae calcify during progressing years and fuse with adjoining
calcareous lamellae. From this occurrence, it would result that the number of
lamellae, while really being greater in the older fish, does not appear to be so,
on account of the lines of separation between the old lamellae having dis-
appeared. On the preceding characters Dr. Salbey builds the following
interpretation of scale growth. In the membrane situated at the inferior \mvt
of the scale there takes place a periodic deposit of calcareous matter. This
membrane, impregnated with calcareous salts, represents the inferior lamella of
the scale. Between this calcified inferior lamella and the skin there appears
a new layer of conjunctive substance. After a varying lapse of time, this
new layer calcifies itself in its turn and so on. This mode of growth may
serve to explain, says the author, how it comes about tliat the inferior layer of
the scale is the largest, and why there is a softer layer present at the inferior
part of the scale. This softer layer is merely a layer of conjunctive substance,
which has been deposited upon the most inferior layer between that and the
skin. Besides these facts relating to the layers of scales, Salbey deals with the
concentric lines, the grooves, the focus, and corpuscles.

Conceidric lines. The concentric lines have not any connection with the
lamellae which compose the scale, as one may easily show by vertical sections.
These lines or ridges only belong to the superficial layer, and thus one under-

* Salbey, 1868.

10 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IX GADID.-E

stands how tliey may abruptly disappear, and how new striae may interpose
tlieniselves between previously existing striae.

The grooves. These represent channels carved out of the surface of the
superior layer ; and the conjunctive substance mentioned above constitutes
their foundation. Besides the grooves directed from the periphery towards
the centre of the scale, there e.xist in Ophidiuiu and other fishes grooves
concentrically arranged. "These varied grooves may contribute to the en-
large uient of the scale at the surface, and permit through the intermediation of
the conjunctive substance, which calcifies slowly, a continued deposition of
calcareous salts in the lamellae, which are not in direct connection with the
skin, and in the conjunctive substance of the scale,"

The focus. Regarding the focus of the scale, Salbey agrees with Peters in
rejecting Agassiz's idea as to its formation by a process of exfoliation or
wearing down of the oldest layers of the scale. It is natural, he says, that
the projections which are nearest the centre of the scale should be smaller and
less apparent than those which are situated nearer the periphery, because at
the central point, where the superior layer of the scale is thinnest, as it was
formed at a period in the early life of the fish, the projections or crests would
not be so distinct and pronounced as those in peripheral parts formed during
the later life of the fish. The presence of skin at the surface of the scale does
not allow of any other explanation, and in order to believe that a wearing
down has there taken place, it is necessary to suppose that a destruction of the
ejiidermis and of the skin has taken place at this part. The focus is nothing
else than the oldest part of the scale. It is also the thickest part of the
scale, because there we have the greatest number of lamellae at the internal
face of the scale.

Corpuscles. Salbey does not bring forward any important facts as to the
corpuscles of scales. He agrees with Leydig in regarding them as ossified
clobular bodies.

Teeth. Regarding the teeth of scales, Salbey rebuff's the opinion of Peters,
according to whom these parts develop from the corpuscles of scales. He also
disagrees with Mandl, who regarded these appendages as true teeth. He
considers these small teeth as integral parts of the superior layer. These
minute teeth appear successively at the posterior border of the scale as that
grows ; it is because of this mode of growth that the points formed in the last
part appear perfectly preserved, while those which during the progress of
growth become carried further forward are very small and much broken by
external friction.

Carpenter devotes several pages to the structure of scales in osseous, ganoid,
and placoid fishes.* On the subject of osseous fishes, he deals in a very
concise manner with the scales of the eel, carp, and sole.

Regarding the cycloid and ctenoid divisions established by Agassiz, he
considers this sharp division as having little harmony with the general
organisation of the types which it has the aim of separating.

Yaillant also takes up the question of the value of cycloid and ctenoid
characters as propounded by Agassiz for purposes of classification.! He shows
the great variation which occurs in the scales of Percidae, not only in different
* Carpenter, 1868. t Vaillant, 1872.

G

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 17

individuals of the same species, but on different regions of the body on the
same individual Owing to this variation he regards Agassiz's division into
cycloid and ctenoid as of little value.

The next work which I have to notice is a lengthened and interesting paper
by Baudelot, in three parts.*

Part I. is concerned with a historical review of the literature relating to
scales previous to the year 1873, of which I have made ample use in the
foregoing pages. Part II. contains a detailed study of a certain number of
types of scales, considered from the point of view of structure and develop-
ment. Part III. has a number of facts on the value of the characters found
in scales in relation to classification.

Part II. consists of two sections, of which the second section gives a
synthetic summary of the facts propounded in the first section.

In Section I. he treats of the following : —

Analytical study of types of scales.

1. Perca Jftiviatilis, with eight figures.

2. Phoxinus Icevis, with one figure.

3. Esox lucius, with two figures.

4. Clupea harengus, with one figure.

5. Anguilla vnhjaris, with five figures.

6. Ophidium harhatum, with two figures.

7. Gadus merlayigus.

8. Cyprinus carpio, with eight figures.

9. Pleuronectes solea, with five figures.

10. Tliynnus vulgaris, with seven figures.

11. Mugil capito, with eleven figures.

12. Hypostomum, with fourteen figures.

In this analytical study of the foregoing types of scales, he devotes much
attention to the corpuscles of scales.

In the second and synthetic section of Part II. he treats of the following: —

1. The connection between the scales and integument.

2. The form of scales and their mode of orientation.

3. The size of scales.

4. The ridges on scales.

5. The spines on scales.

6. The grooves on scales.

7. The perforating canals in scales.

8. The internal lacunae of scales.

9. The focus or centre of growth.

10. The tissue of scales.

11. The formation and growth of scales.

1. The connection bettveen the scales and integument. The scales of
cycloid and ctenoid fishes are usually contained in small dermic sacs,
and are more or less visible to the exterior; but in some cases they are
not so, being deeply buried in the skin (Anguilla, Oi)hidium, Lota, etc.).

* Baudelot, 1873.

NEW SERIES.— VOL. VII. No. 1. B

18 THE rERlODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

When scales are provided with spines, as in Ctenoids, the points of tliese may
be seen piercing the epidermis, and so appearing freely at the surface. The
derrree with which scales adhere to the skin is snl)ject to great variation in
dilFerent fish. In the herring, for instance, scales are very easily detached ;
but in Dactijlopterus volitans, etc., they are only separated from the skin with
much difticulty. Scales are never entirely free in the dermic pouch, as they
are always connected with its walls by fibrils of connected tissue, usually of
extreme fineness. In imbricated scales the free jjortion has a more or less
intimate connection with the skin, and so in extracting scales from the body
of the fish, the free portion carries with it debris of the skin, from which it
is frequently difiicult to separate it. In certain varieties of carp (mirror carp,
leather carp), in which, as one knows, scales may disappear on more or less
extended parts of the body, the scales show very varied connections with the
skin. On certain parts one meets with very large scales much imbricated, on
other parts the scales are still larger, but scarcely covered over, or even
entirely isolated. Extremely small scales are also found, which are completely
enclosed in the depths of the skin. The imbrication of scales ought to be
considered so far as a phenomenon of mechanical arrangement intimately con-
nected with the greater or lesser development of scales and with the degree of
their separation.

2. The form of scales and their mode of orient at ion. The form of scales is
extremely variable. These variations occur not only in different species, but
in different regions of the body of the same fish. In each fish the large
scales covering the median region of the flank may be considered typical, that
is to say, they possess in the largest measure and with most constancy all the
proper characters of the species. Scales from the dorsal and ventral surface,
from the head and fins, frequently show more or less marked deformations, and
seem to lose some of their characteristic features. Scales oval at one place
may change into a circular form at another place, polygonal scales to circular
ones, elliptical to a more or less irregular form.

Lobes at the margins of scales, spines, concentric ridges, and grooves may
vary considerably in number, and even disappear altogether in different parts
of the body. " Nothing is more variable than the external characters of scales,
and as in a tree one does not find two leaves exactly identical, so is it in
regard to the scales of fishes ; but the particular features of scales, as of leaves,
do not all vary at the same time, and thus there generally remain several
general characters of resemblance which scarcely allow us to confound the
scales of one species with those of another." The simultaneous presence of
cycloid and ctenoid scales was pointed out by Baudelot in the following : —
TrigJa lineata, Sargus Ilondeletti, Perca Jluviatilis, Pleuronedes solea,
Pleuronedes flesus, etc.

The form of scales appears somewhat to depend upon their connection with
one another, their juxtaposition; thus scales isolated in the skin tend to have
a rounded or circular form (Lota, Anguilla, Ophidium). On the contrary, where
scales are large and much pressed the one against the other, they most fre-
quently take a polygonal form. The orientation of the long axes of scales in
relation to the axis of the body is usually fairly constant in those fish in which
there is a regiilar and distinct imbrication of scales. In fishes in which the

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 19

scales are isolated and completely enclosed in the skin (Anguilla, Ophidium
harhatum, etc.) the long axis of the scale does not usually show any fixed
jiosition as regards its direction.

It appears probable that the reciprocal pressure exercised by scales the one
upon the other, contributes so far in bringing about a similar mode of orienta-
tion anion" them.

3. The she of scales. The size of scales is extremely variable. They even
show varying dimensions on different parts of the body of the same fish. For
instance, the scales on the flanks are larger than those near the caudal fins.
Scales gradually diminish in size from the median region of the side towards
the tail or anus. Scales are also reduced in size in various parts of the head,
in the opercular and preopercular regions and in the suborbital region.
Baudelot gives tables sliowing the variation in size in different regions of the
body for the perch, pike, and mullet. These tables show in what proportions
the size of scales varies with the age and size of the fish mentioned. Growth is
continuous but unequal in scales from different regions of the body. One finds
very great variation in the size of scales in different species of the same family
of fish, and certain varieties of the same species show extreme differences in
the relative sizes of their scales. For example, the so-called mirror carp has
very much larger scales than those of the ordinary carp. In another variety,
the leather carp, the scales have become very rudimentary or have entirely
disappeared.

4. The ridges on scales (cretes de I'ecaille). In cycloid and ctenoid fishes the
surfaces of the scales show linear projections which are usually parallel to the
external contour of the scale. Baudelot describes the arrangement of these
under the term " cretes de recaille." Though these ridges are almost con-
stantly present, yet in several types of fishes they disappear more or less
completely, for example, in Dadijlopterus volitans and the tunny. In the
tunny one finds some scales provided with as many ridges as usual, others
with ridges only at the margins, and others in which these ridges are com-
pletely wanting. In the eel, scales do not show ordinary ridges on their
surfaces ; these are replaced by reliefs of a quite distinct appearance, but
really of the same nature as the ridges.

In regard to the disposition of ridges on the scale surface there is consider-
able variation in different fishes. In certain types of scales, those of the
salmon for exami)le, the ridges run parallel to the contour of the scale in a
perfectly regular manner, thus forming a series of continuous reliefs which may
truly be termed " concentric ridges." In other types of scales, those of the
pike, some Cyprinidse and Pleuronectidaj, for example, the concentric ridges
show some degree of regularity in the peripheral portion of the scale, but as
they approach the centre of growth they lose their uniformity, become inter-
rupted at various points, bent in various directions, intersected by secondary
ridges, and finally appear like a " veritable labyrintli." In regard to this
point there are the greatest differences between scales of the same fish.

In many scales the characters of the concentric ridges undergo a greater or
less change in the posterior region of the field ; sometimes they may entirely
disappear (herring, shad), sometimes they become very rare, they separate the

20 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IX GADID.E

one from the other, lose their regularit}', enlarge at certain points, or become
covered by tul)ercular projections (carp and other Cyprinids).

In some fishes these ridges assume a peculiar mode of orientation. Instead
of following a course parallel to the contour of the scale, they take a direction
more or less perpendicular to this line, remaining, however, parallel to one
another (Alepocephalus, herring, shad). The particular disposition observed in
the herring, etc., is not an isolated fact, but the expression of a more or less
general fact which appears in various degrees. The number of concentric
ridges is not the same in the different regions of the scale. It is usuall}' much
greater in the anterior than in the lateral field, and in the lateral than in the
posterior field (perch, pike, minnow); this fact helps to prove that all the
ridges do not originate round the circumference of the scale. The number of
ridges may show the greatest variations in scales of the same fish ; the
number appears to be in proportion to the extent of the scale. Thus in large
scales from the flanks the ridges are relatively numerous, in very small and
rudimentary scales from other regions of the body (caudal fin, opercular
region) these ridges are extremely reduced in number. " Variations in the
number of ridges are not usualli/ great in scales front the same region. In
fishes of the same species, hut of different age, the numher of ridges increases
2n'oportio7iatelij with age, and consequently also loitli the dimensions of scales."
It ^■^.■ easg to verify this fact hy comparing scales from the sa)ne region in fish of
very different size.

From this point of view, Baudelot made observations on scales of the pike,
perch, and minnow to determine the differences in number from simple to
double, triple, quadruple, and so onwards.

New ridges are formed successively at a very sliglit distance from the
border of the scale by a partial calcification of the external layer. This
calcification shows itself firstly as a simple track of calcareous molecules in
the membranous zone which exists at the margin of the scale. This track of
molecules represents a calcigenous centre round which the calcareous substance
accumulates.

From the thickening of this calcareous track there results firstly a slight
projecting part, wliich in raising itself soon constitutes a ridge. This enlarges
little by little at its base by the addition of calcareous molecules and finally
unites with adjoining ridges, so as to form a continuous calcareous invest-
ment on the surface of the scale. This mode of formation of ridges may be
easily followed in the scales of the sole, in the membranous zone which
constitutes the border of each of the lateral fields ; and it is also obvious in
the scales of many other types of fishes.

The ridges of the scale surface examined under a very high power show
their free borders to be sometimes smooth, but in other cases crenated in such a
manner as to present fine denticulations. These denticulations may be seen in
the scales of the mullet, perch, and burbot, but the asperities are not uniformly
present on all the ridges of the same scale, and they may be completely absent
in the marginal ridges. In many scales (burbot, mullet) the concentric ridges
aopear to offer a marked inclination towards the centre of the scale. This
inclination shows itself by a more or less pronounced difference in the degree
of obliquity of the two planes corresponding to the two oi)posed faces of the

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 21

concentric ridge. Tranveree sections, that is to say, sections perpendicular to
the surface of the scale, also show this point. The separation of the ridges
is not great, and does not appear to vary witli age ; the latter point evidently
proves that the scale does not grow at all points on its surface. The distance
separating the ridges from one another may remain the same in the different
regions of the scale ; but this is by no means constantly the case. In the
sole, for example, the ridges are much closer in the anterior than in the
lateral part of the scale ; and in most cycloid scales the ridges of the posterior
region show a greater degree of separation than those of the lateral and
anterior regions (minnow, Cyprinus, etc.).

^^ It is also not uncommo7i to find in the same area of the scale successive
zones in the extent of tchich the ridges show different degrees of separation."
(See figures of carp scales.)

From the following facts, Baudelot concludes that the ridges do not
represent by any means the borders of superimposed plates or lamellae, as
many zoologists had supposed ; but that these ridges, whether they be con-
centric lines or not, are nothing else than reliefs corresponding to lines of
calcification at the external layer of the scale.

(1) The ridges only very rarely affect a complete arrangement in the form of
concentric lines.

(2) These ridges may be perpendicular to the contour of the scale.

(.3) These ridges may show the most irregular arrangement, become folded up
against one another, entangled in all directions, or even form a sort of network
of irregular meshes.

(4) The ridges are appendages to the superficial layer of the scale,

(5) They originate at the margin of the scale as points of isolated calci-
fication.

(6) They show a marked inclination towards the centre of the scale.

5. The spines (spinula). Under this heading Baudelot discusses the small
spinous projections seen in the posterior portion of ctenoid scales. The
variation in the form of those appendages is very great, affording transitions
from simple denticulations to true teeth. In the tunny, for example, we find
quite simple denticulations or cuttings in the posterior border of the scale
which cannot be regarded as distinct organs, but simply as projecting lobes of
the free border of the scale. At a further stage (some species of Sargus)
denticulations prcjject from the concentric ridges of the posterior field. This
is really only a more marked phase of the microscopic denticulations already
mentioned in connection with the concentric ridges. In a still further
developed stage the spines cover the entire surface of the posterior field, and
are conical, pointed, or truncated. Notable variations of this form are seen in
different fishes ; for instance, in the mullet the spines are plates, with the
external surface raised in slightly projecting cones; but on the other hand, in
the perch the spines are much elongated, and appear as true spines much
tapered at their extremities.

In a fourth case, as in the sole and some other Pleuronectids, the spines are
long, rounded, and drawn out at their extremities as in the last case ; but
they are not solid, but hollowed out internally into a more or less spacious

22 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.^

cavity. In the fifth degree, the spines have the same external form as in the
last case ; but they are not composed of homogeneous tissue similar to that of
the scale, but of dentine, in which canaliculi extend from the central canal to
near the surface. Such a structure is found, for example, in the spine of
Hypostoma. As to the dimensions of spines on scales and their growth, he
says that in passing from tlie free border to the centre of the scale they
gradually lose their volume, but in a transitional manner. The dimensions of
spines increase with the age of the fish in a marked degree. The number
of spines also varies in different regions of the body and with age. By a com-
parison of scales from the same fish one finds that the number of spines varies
only slightly in points from the same or adjoining regions of the body ; but
those scales from different regions show considerable variations as to the
number of spines. There are, however, exceptions to this rule (dab). The
number of spines as of concentric ridges is usually greatest in scales from the
median region of the side.

In those regions in Avliich scales tend to be rudimentary, they also tend to
lose their spines, and thus become cycloid. The fact seems almost certain,
that there does not appear to be a single ctenoid fish in which one would not
meet cycloid scales on certain points of its body. Baudelot brings forward
some facts to show that new spines form themselves behind those already
existing on the posterior border. The spines and concentric ridges are homo-
logous productions, and growth of both takes place in the same direction.
According to Baudelot, then, spines are products of the same nature as the
concentric ridges ; they are ridges which have become very prominent, and cut
into transversely in such a manner as to constitute a series of prolonged
spines, each with a distinct base. In support of this hypothesis he brings
forward the following facts : —

In many scales, such as those of the perch and mullet, the edge of the
concentric ridges presents a series of very distinct microscopic indentations,
and in some ctenoid scales the spines are so small as to represent only stronger
indentations of the ridges of the posterior region which have become very
prominent. In many cycloid scales, such as those of the carp, the posterior
region shows a series of tubercles arranged with as much regularity as spines,
and which present the greatest analogy to these structures. These tubercles
are, however, only partial thickenings of concentric ridges. In the same fish
scales become altered and pass from the ctenoid to the cycloid condition, and
in that case it frequently happens that the spines become replaced by simple
ridges, a substitution which is a clear proof of the homology of spines and
concentric ridges. Among Pleuronectidae, in which some are ctenoid (sole,
dab), and others are cycloid (brill, flounder), the scales of cycloid forms
frequently show in the posterior area, instead of rows of spines, distinct islets
of calcareous matter, each supporting a fragment of concentric ridge. When
these islets of calcareous matter become straitened and more regular, they
evidently result in spines.

6. The grooves (sillons) on scales. This term has been given to very
narrow grooves or trenches which are supposed to have been excavated at the
expense of the superficial layer of the scale. These grooves are not present in

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 23

all scales; those of the salmon and lote, for example, do not possess them.
They may be limited to one region of the scale, or be present over the
entire surface. From a general point of view, they may be divided into two
categories: — (1) Those which radiate from the centre of growth towards the
periphery are termed radial or radiating grooves (carp, perch). (2) Those
which have a direction parallel to the contour of the scale, and therefore
perpendicular to the radiating canals, are termed iransverse or cojicentric
grooves (Ophidium, whiting). Those two kinds (radiating and concentric
grooves) may be present simultaneously in the same scale ; but in the
majority of scales only the radiating or radial grooves are found. In most
cases they only occupy the anterior region of the scale (perch, pike), but
they may occupy the posterior as well as the anterior areas (carp), or they
may be present over the entire surface of the scale, anterior, posterior, and
lateral (loach, minnow, whiting). When the concentric grooves and radiating
grooves are present in the same scale, two cases present themselves : firstly,
that in which the two kinds of grooves are found in two different areas of
the scale (several Pleuronectids), in which case the radiating grooves exist in
the anterior and posterior area, and the concentric or transverse grooves in
the lateral areas ; or secondly, that in which the radiating and concentric
grooves exist in the same area of the scale, by which means the scale surface
is divided up into numerous ^Aates or divisions, which occasionalhj form a
regtdar series of plates radiatiiig from the centre to the periphery (Ophidium,
whiting, eel).

While in a general way one may separate the grooves into these two
categories, namely, radiating and transverse grooves, there are many scales in
which the grooves lose their usual symmetry and affect a more or less
irregular arrangement. Sometimes the grooves show up to a certain point
the usual radiating arrangement and then anastomose with each other, thus
forming on the scale surface a species of plexus of irregular webs (Labridir,
Mormyridse). The grooves of the anterior area also frequently anastomose
Avith those of the posterior area in the region of the centre of gi'owth
(Cyprinus, Labrus). In the herring and shad there are grooves in the anterior
part of the scale which originate on the lateral border, and extend across the
anterior area, keeping more or less parallel with one another.

As regards form, the grooves show extremely varied characters : sometimes
they take the form of a simple line, resembling a fissure or line of break on
the external surface of the scale (herring, shad, transverse grooves of
Ophidium, whiting) ; sometimes they appear as a species of ravine, narrowed
at the base and cut out perpendicularly at the sides ; at other times they have
the appearance of a wide trench of little depth and flat at the base ; some-
times the grooves lose their regularity, become narrowed at some points and
enlarged at others, constituting species of small depressions (lacules) with
sinuous and irregular contours ; sometimes a groove may be interrupted at
certain places, and then one has a series of small cavities or depressions
(lacules) lying in the same straight line and in the same direction. The
edges of grooves are usually irregular and jagged, but they also frequently
show rounded lobes, due to the presence of calcareous globules.

The radiating grooves do not usually extend over the entire distance from

24 THE PEKIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

the border of the scale to the centre of growth ; a certain number of them do
extend over all this distance, but the others usually only run over a portion
of the radius. Some of the radiating grooves commence at the periphery and
stop almost immediately, others extend a little further, and others still further
without reaching the centre of growth. Ridges may also be seen commencing
at only a short distance from the margin of the scale, sometimes terminat-
ing at the centre of the scale, and at other times terminating after a short
passage. It is clear that there occur grooves whose course is reduced, as they
only extend over a minimum portion of the radius. Grooves occupying the
median portion of the anterior area are, as a rule, longer than those at the
sides or lateral areas of the scale. This also holds true for the grooves in the
posterior region of the scale. When the radiating grooves are wide, regular,
and very close together, the scale surface appears as if it had been cut into a
series of bands or triangular tongues, with the apices turned towards the
centre of growth (see anterior region of scale of sole).

The concentric or transverse grooves are situated between the concentric
ridges, and are more or less parallel to them. These grooves are, as a rule, only
found on a limited part of the scale surface, and they occur more frequently
in the periphery than in the part surrounding the centre of growth. These
concentric grooves may be very narrow (whiting, Ophidium) or very wide
(lateral areas in various Pleuronectids). When very wide concentric grooves
co-exist with radiating grooves equally wide, the surface of the scale becomes
divided up into calcareous areas of varying size. These areas may be irregular
(posterior area of various Pleuronectids, scales of Gadus molva), or they may be
regularly rounded and in the form of small medallions (scales of eel). The
number of radiating grooves varies much in different scales from the same fish ;
these variations become very apparent in comparing scales from different
regions of the body, rudimentary with well-developed scales. In extremely
rudimentary scales grooves may not exist. In scales from the same region of
the body the number of radiating grooves does not vary to nearly the same
extent. The number of grooves of an individual scale is capable of varying
with age. As regards the transverse or concentric grooves, there does not
appear to be any doubt that these grooves, Avhich are situated between the
concentric crests, are formed at the same time as the latter. In regard to
the radiating grooves, it appears that they multiply during the growth of
the scale, at least in a very large number of cases.

If the number of grooves in scales increases with age, it may also become
reduced. This fact appears true for the transverse grooves, as in scales in
which these grooves are found (whiting, Ophidium) one usually finds them
much more pronounced towards the periphery than towards the centre, where
they may completely disappear. As to reduction in the number of radiating
grooves, !Mandl observed that they disappeared in old fish belonging to the
genus Abramis, and in other old scales they evidently disappear in the area
round the centre of growth. Baudelot remarks that " up to the present time
(1873) the grooves on scales have not been explained in a satisfactory manner."
Mandl regarded them as canals serving for purposes of nutrition of the scale ;
Peters as suture lines which rendered possible the growth of scales. William-
son held that they were erosions effected at the expense of the superior layer

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 25

of the scale. Vogt thought the radiating lines as difficult to explain in young
as in adult scales, and Blanchard regarded them as canals which had connec-
tion with the supposed respiratory function of scales. Dr. Salbey thought
that they Avere excavations of the superior layer aiding the growth of the
scale in surface extent. It appeared necessary to Baudelot to abandon all
these interpretations of the grooves on scales. From his observations he held
the following view : " The grooves of scales ought to be considered as lines or
zones of non-calcification, that is to say, as lines to the level of which the
calcification of the exterior layer of the scale has not taken place." The
exterior layer has centres of calcification which later unite with each other as
these centres extend. " When the union of the centres of calcification takes
place from the centre of growth towards the periphery and occurs at the same
time in the transverse direction, that is to say, parallel to the external contour
of the scale, there result radiating grooves ; when, on the contrary^, the union
of calcigenous centres takes place parallel to the contour of the scale, without
having taken place at the same time in the radial direction, transverse or con-
centric grooves result. "When the union of calcigenous centres fails to take
place both in the radial direction and transversal direction (parallel to the
external contour of the scale) at the same time, there results the simultaneous
existence of radiating and concentric grooves. Lastly, when the union of
calcigenous centres takes place without order and symmetry, the surface of the
scale shows grooves arranged in a more or less irregular manner. It is hardly
necessary' to add that when the union of centres of calcification takes place
completely in all directions, there is no further trace of grooves at the
surface of the scale."

7. The perforating canaliculi. Under this term Baudelot described for the
first time extremely small canals which traverse the scale through and through
from the upper to the under side. Baudelot firstly observed these perforat-
ing canaliculi in the carp ; but found them later in many other fish scales,
both cycloid and ctenoid. These perforating canaliculi are only found in the
posterior area of the scale. In some types of scales they are easily observed,
in others only with difficulty. In the scales of the carp the perforating
canaliculi open externally in connection with the radiating canals of the
posterior area, and traverse the scale through to the under side in a slightly
ol)lique direction, and terminate internally on the inferior surface of the scale.
This internal opening or ostiole is usually nearer the posterior border than the
external ostiole, and further, if one takes a line down the middle of the scale,
one finds that the internal ostiole is further from this axis than the external
ostiole. In Mwjil cephalus the canaliculi round the centre of growth present
certain peculiarities which are notevvorthy. They traverse the scale more
obliquely, and have a larger diameter. At the external surface these canali-
culi open into grooves or trenches and pass on towards the large canal, which
in Mugil occupies the centre of each scale. The grooves in connection there-
with anastomose with each other, and gradually enlarge as they approach the
median canal, where tliey terminate by bending into a spout-like or canali-
cular orifice. The large canal in the centre of the scale should be considered
as a species of collector in connection with the nearest adjacent canaliculi.

-6 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADIDvE

As to the mode of formation of these canaliculi, Eaudelot remarks that he has
not a sufficiently large number of facts to give a satisfactory answer to this
question. He says, however, that where radiating canals exist, the canaliculi
form themselves on their course, at their free extremities on the posterior
border of the scale. At the extremity of the radiating groove there firstly
appears a small depression ; later by the mode of growth of the surrounding
tissue this depression deepens more and more, and finally closes in at the
posterior end, forming an aperture like a minute pierced gap across the lamina
of the scale, which is very thin at this point. As the scale increases by the
addition of new layers to its internal face, each gap become gradually con-
verted into a narrow canal, in which the length varies with the thickness of
the scale and with the distance of the canaliculi from the posterior border.

As to the nature and function of the perforating canaliculi, Baudelot throws
out certain hints. He believes that the canaliculi give passage to a fila-
mentous cord, Avhich is either of the nature of connective tissue or a nerve-
fibre. He is inclined to believe that it is of the latter nature, and if this is
true, that there might be grounds for establishing a connection between the
perforating canaliculi and the canals which traverse the scales of the lateral
line. The scales of the lateral line receive nerve-fibres on their deep surface,
and in their interior nervous structures have been demonstrated.

In Mugil, in all those scales showing similar passages to those of the lateral
line, a certain number of perforating canaliculi anastomose with the median
canal of each scale.

In the pike, many of the scales have a similar trench to those of the lateral-
line scales. This trench, hollowed out at first, may be considered as analo-
gous to the depressions which represent the first stage in the formation of
the perforating canaliculi. In a sparoid fish showing a disjointed and equilant
lateral line he found a scale which showed at its centre of growth a duct which
penetrated obliquely from the internal to the external face of the scale. This
duct, while much narrower than the median canal of the lateral line, was at the
same time very mucli larger than the perforating canaliculi of adjoining parts,
that is to say, a kind of transition between the two kinds of canals. From the
preceding facts, which he throws out in passing, Eaudelot thinks that if they
are confirmed by later researches, a clear resemblance between scales of the
lateral line and other scales would become apparent. This would also explain
why in certain types all scales or a large number of them may revert to the
characteristic features of scales from the lateral line.

8. The internal laacna; of scales. Certain scales possess lacunar developed
in their interior. In Holocentrum longipenne, for example, some of the perfo-
rating canaliculi show lateral diverticula which spread out horizontally in the
scale substance. These diverticula constitute a system of lacunae. In the
scales of Hypostoma internal lacunar are well developed, and constitute a
vast system of anastomosing canals, in which the cavity communicates with
those of the spines. In Daclijloi>teriis volitans the scales arc hollowed out in
their central portions by large irregular lacunae which communicate with each
other. In the tunny the scales present remarkable lacunae. In this case
these lacunae, which occupy all the median portion of the scale, form a species

AS AN INDEX OF ACxE. 27

of spongy tissue, limited at each side, namely, on the external and internal
faces, by a thin plate of compact tissue. As to the mode of development of
these lacuna?, Baudelot admits the absence of all knoAvledge ; but he thinks
that the " presence of these lacuna) in the tissue of certain scales establishes
a clear analogy between the structure of these productions and that of osseous
tissue." The lacunro of the scales of the tunny and of Dactylopterus, for
example, resemble very completely the lacunae seen in the ossified connective
tissue of the rays in the fins of various fishes (Gasterosteus, etc.). Kamifying
lacunae, such as are found in the scales of Holocentrum, can be observed with
exactly similar characters in the operculum and suboperculum of the same
fish, and as in the scales, the lacunae of the opercular bones communicate
with the exterior by ducts analogous to the perforating canaliculi. " These
facts seem to show that the phylogeny of scales and that of osseous tissue
should be associated."

9. The focus or centre of growth. Under this term one understands that
more or less central part of the scale around which growth first takes place.
In the rigorous meaning of the word the focus ought to be represented by a
point which corresponds to the exact spot of origin of the scale ; but in using
this term zoologists have given this word a wider meaning, namely, that
region of the scale in which formation first takes place in the life of the
fish, and which is characterised by the absence of or irregularity of the con-
centric ridges. In some scales the focus is smooth or only very slightly
roughened ; in others its surface is marked by projecting calcareous reliefs,
granulations, or tubercles, either laid down in lines or without any definite
order; in others, again, ridges analogous to concentric ridges occur, which by
their indefinite arrangement form an inextricable netAvork, or a network of
irregular meshes. The focus, as a rule, shows no grooves ; but in some cases
the radiating grooves are prolonged to the focus, sometimes retaining their
original characters, sometimes, however, becoming interrupted from point to
point, and thus forming small superficial lacunae which are not disposed in
any regular order. When these grooves reach the centre of growth (focus)
they frequently anastomose with those of the opposed border. It is frequently
difficult to define the precise limits of the focus, owing to the fact that an
insensible transition is effected to the surrounding parts. The dimensions of
the focus, however, show very great variations, not only in scales of difi'erent
types of fish, but in scales from the same fish.

In the perch, minnow, and pike, liaudelot has shown how the dimensions of
the focus may vary in the scales of the same fish : by the side of scales in which
the focus is almost nil, one may meet with others in which the focus attains the
size of one-half to two-thirds the total diameter of the scale. This fact alone is
sufficient to demonstrate that the size of the focus is not proportioned to that of
the scale. Some scales possess a very large focus, those of Labrus and Crenilabrus
for example; others, on the contrary, possess a very small focus. The position
of the focus in relation to the centre of the scale is very variable from one type
to another. In some fish the focus occupies nearly the centre of the scale ;
this is the case, for example, in the lote, minnow, and eel ; this fact appears
more especially true when scales are small, rounded and concealed in the

28 THE TERIODIC GROAVTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

deptlis of the skin. In tlie majority of scales the focus is carried backwards
a greater or less distance from the centre of the scale, for example, in the
perch, sole, brill, carp. In some cases the focus has been carried so far back-
wards that it is situated at the posterior border of the scales, as in several
species of gobies. It is much more rare to find the focus carried forward
from the centre of the figure ; this is met with in the scales of the tench
(Cyprinus tinea). Baudelot states that the scale increases at its periphery,
and that there is not any true growth at the focus by intussusception ; but
only a process of simple repair, which may modify the configuration of the
calcareous reliefs or cause their disappearance by transforming, for example, a
surface primitively covered with regular concentric ridges into a granular
surface with tubercles or with vermiform ridges.

Agassiz and Vogt regarded the focus as the result of the wearing down of
the central portion of the scale. Peters successfully refuted this interpretation
by observing that the frictional or wearing-down process could not take place
owing to the fact that the scales are contained in pouches of the dermis, which
would protect them. In order to explain the existence of the focus, Baudelot
points out that scales frequently show zones with irregular ridges alternating
with zones with normal and regular concentric ridges, and he concludes that
the cause which produces this regularity or irregularity of the disposition of
the ridges is itself very unstable, and he holds that it is some such cause which
produces the focal region ; in short, this hypothesis supposes a change in the
mode of distribution of reliefs during successive epochs of the life. Baudelot
held, however, that he had not a sufficient number of facts either to confirm
or negative this hypothesis, and left the matter in abeyance.

10. TJie tissues of scales. Scales are composed of two substances : {\) funda-
mental organic substance; (2) inorganic substance. The fundamental organic
substance belongs to the group of connective tissues (dermal) ; the inorganic
substance consists of calcareous concretions of phosphate and carbonate of
lime. The fundamental organic substance is more or less transparent and
homogeneous in appearance, and is readily broken up into folia which are com-
posed of elementary fibrils. By dissection or through the action of reagents,
such as soda or potash, it is easy to separate the component folia of scales from
one another. These folia are extremely thin, are superimposed the one upon
the other like the leaves of a book, which become smaller as they approach
the external face of the scale. The scale is more or less like a cone with a
large base, and in which plates or folia are piled the one on the top of the
other from base to summit. These folia separate from one another most
readily in the median portion of the scale, but not so readily at the periphery,
at which region, indeed, they adhere to one another so intimately that it
becomes difficult to isolate them without tearing them and getting fragments
of several adjoining folia. Isolated folia are somewhat transparent, flexible,
and membranous. They are not entirely homogeneous, as Avith a high power
they show in their thickness a fine striated appearance. At the perii)liery of
the lamellae, where rents have been made, the tissue shows itself decomposed
into fibrils or into bundles of fibrous tissue. The striae of adjoining lamellae
do not follow the same direction, but cross at angles to one another. At the

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 29

focus the strise of adjacent folia cross each other usually at right angles ; but
this is not the case at the periphery, where they cross at very varied angles,
sometimes forming vortices in which it is difficult to follow tlie direction of
the stria?.

The inorganic substance of scales consists of corpuscles of carbonate and
phosphate of lime scattered in the depths of the folia of the organic funda-
mental substance.

There has been much difference of opinion as to the distribution of these
calcareous corpuscles. Mandl maintained that the corpuscles were contained
in a special tissue situated above the inferior surface of the scale. Agassiz
held that these corpuscles are lodged near the superior and inferior surfaces of
the scale. Peters believed that the corpuscles are found on tlie inferior
surface of the scale, but never on the superior surface, as Agassiz had main-
tained. Williamson made use of sections, and was the first to recognise the
presence of corpuscles in the entire thickness of the scale.

Baudelot agreed with Williamson in the main points, and after an analysis of
the scale, layer by layer, enunciated the following more detailed points : —

" (1) In the most internal folia of scales the corpuscles are few in number or
entirely absent.

" (2) In the folia following the most internal the corpuscles become rapidly
very numerous, and their number increases as one proceeds from the internal
to the external surface of the scale.

" (3) Xear the external surface of the scale, the corpuscles are so numerous
that they form a sort of compact web in the thickness of the fundamental
organic substance.

" (-i) The external calcareous investment of scales is simply a conglomera-
tion of fused calcareous corpuscles."

In other words, calcification of the folia of scales is more advanced as one
approaches the external surface of the scale, and this one can readily under-
stand, as it is on the internal surface that the formation of new tissue takes
place. In each of the more internal folia of the scale calcification is more
pronounced towards the periphery than in the focal region. In the focal
region the corpuscles are less numerous, usually isolated and separated from
one another by spaces completely deprived of calcareous deposits. Towards
the periphery of the folia, on the other hand, the corpuscles are very abundant
and become massed together throughout the fundamental substance. In the
most external folia of the scale, in which the calcification is much more
advanced, the corpuscles are seen to be numerous throughout the entire extent
of the folia.

The corpuscles are not of the same volume at all points of the same lamella.
In the focal region they are relatively large ; but as one proceeds from the
focus to the periphery they gradually diminish in size until they become of
extreme delicacy. The volume of the corpuscles is not the same in the various
folia of the scale ; thus in the most recent and internal folia the corpuscles,
where they exist, are usually much smaller than in the more external folia.
The size of corpuscles seems to vary with the age of tlie scale ; for example, in

o

0 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

the scale of a young fish tlie largest corpuscles are much smaller as compared
with the largest corpuscles of a scale from an older fish.

The long axis of corpuscles does not present a uniform direction throughout
the extent of the scale. The direction of the long axis generally agrees with
the direction of the fibres of the folia to which the corpuscle belongs. It has
already been noticed that fibres of consecutive folia of the scale cross one
another frequently at right angles, and the same thing has taken place for the
corpuscles which belong to these folia. Corpuscles of one, two, or several con.
secutive folia frequently become fused together. Corpuscles represent products
of a crystalline nature, and exhibit a series of concentric lines which succeed
one another from the centre to the periphery. This is not true for all
corpuscles, as some have the appearance of vitreous substances, are perfectly
homogeneous, and show no trace of concentric lines.

Baudelot concludes from his observations that the corpuscles are crystalline
deposits effected in the tissues of the scales, and more or less modified by this
tissue. They are of the same nature as the artificial products, studied firstly
by Rainey* and then by Harting.f

11. The formation and groicth of scales. Scales only appear subsequently
to hatching, sometimes a long time after this has taken place ; for example, in
young eels measuring 7-8 centimetres in length they have not yet appeared.
The scale originates as a spot of dermal calcification, which extends little by
little, and thus comes to constitute a small solid lamella, which represents the
primitive scale. The first lamella, once formed, sometimes remains closely
united to the surrounding tissue, sometimes acquires a certain mobility ; but
this mobility is never complete, and the scale always retains intimate connec-
tions with the dermis by its internal surface and by its margins, and the
external surface itself frequently shows adhesions at the free margin. The
young scale grows by the addition of new layers of increasing size, which add
themselves successively to its internal face. This mode of growth explains
how it is that the scale is considerably thicker towards the centre, and much
thinner and less calcified at the periphery. At the internal surface of the
scale, and at its margins, tracts of connective tissue are found, l)y means of
which the scale adheres to the pouch in which it is contained ; but at the
external border, on the other hand, the line of demarcation between scale and
dermal pouch becomes more and more marked. As to the subsequent pro-
gress of calcification, one can establish that it extends from the exterior
towards the interior, and from the periphery of the scale towards the centre.
In each layer the calcification is more comj^lete on the border than in the
central portion. These calcifications unite with each other, and constitute
the calcareous crust of the scale surface.

As to the concentric ridges and spines, these appear successively on the
borders of the scale as that gradually extends itself. One has to admit that

* "On the mode of formation of tlie shells of animals, of bone, and of several other
structures, by a process of molecular coalescence, demonstrable in certain artificially
formed products." Rainey, 1858.

t Harting, "Further Experiments and Observations." Quart. Journal of Microscop.
Science, n.s., vol. i. (1861) p. 23.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE, 31

all ctenoid scales are cycloid at the beginning of their formation. Growth
does not take place equally in all scales of the same fish, as one may observe
scales of different sizes in different parts of the body. Although scales, as a
rule, form themselves by the successive addition of new layers to their
internal surface, there are some scales, such as those of the tunny and
Dadylnptenis volifans, which present difficulties. These scales show inter-
nally a spongy tissue, hollowed out into lacun?e of varying size. The
structure of these scales affords, according to Baudelot, a connecting liidc
between the tissue of scales and osseus tissue with internal lacuna3, such
as one observes in the opercular skeleton of various fishes (Gasterosteus).

In the third part of his monograph, Baudelot takes up the question of
*' scales considered from the point of view of classification." He considers
this question in relation to the following points: — (1) Connection of scales
Avith the integument. (2) The form of scales. (3) The dimensions of scales.
(4) The presence or absence of scales. (5) The ridges on scales. (6) The
spines on scales. (7) The grooves on scales. (8) The perforating canaliculi
and interior lacuniB of scales. (9) The focus of scales. (10) The tissue of
scales. In summarising the results derived from a consideration of these
points, he concludes that none of these characters of scales taken by them-
selves can serve as a basis for the classification of fishes, that the most im-
portant of all of them, the cycloid and ctenoid character, does not possess the
degree of importance which many zoologists have attached to it, and that the
other characters noticed are of still less value. Although each character by
itself is of little value, yet the characters of scales as a Avhole ought not to be
neglected in establishing natural groups. He recognises that in order to put
such a programme into execution a much more precise knowledge is necessary
of the external characters, structure, and mode of development of scales in
a large number of types of fishes. In this connection he refers to Steeg's
paper as a useful essay on scales from the point of view of classification. *

The next paper which I must notice is that by Ryder on the mechanical
genesis of the scales of fishes. f He says in his introduction "that fourteen
years previously he had suggested that the slow metamorphosis of the forms of
the crowns of the teeth in man, in the course of a vast number of successive
generations, might be ascribed to the continuous, slow, and cumulative action
of mechanical strains and pressures in definite directions, resulting in the pro-
duction of permanent stresses and consequent changes in the forms of the
crowns, especially of the molar series. . . . The present paper is an attempt to
apply somewhat analogous reasoning to a somewhat simpler, but no less
interesting problem in morphogenesis." Scales take their origin from a con-
tinuous subepidermal matrix, a basement membrane. This basement mem-
brane is thickest on the dorsal and lateral aspects of the body, as seen in
sections of the young, for example, in Batraclms tau, a scaleless form. It is
"seen in larval stages of scale bearing forms, and may be continuous with a
very thin basal membrane from which the primordial fin-rays of embryo fishes
seem to be partly differentiated. . . . Such a matrix appears to be co-extensive
with the entire epidermic layer of the young in many types of fishes, just at
the time when the scale commences to be developed."

* Steeg, 1857. t Ryder, 1892.

32 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^E

Ryder's hypothesis seeks to account for the arrangement of scales in longi-
tudinal and oblique rows in two directions, and for their state of imbrication.
Scales are arranged in oblique rows showing two directions: (1) a direction
from above downward and backward ; (2) in the reverse direction, from below
ui)ward and backward. The scales may thus be enumerated in three different
directions: (1) in a downward and forward direction; (2) in a downward and
backward direction ; and (3) starting from any scale in any oblique row, they
may be counted either forward or backward longitudinally in the direction of
the long axis of the fish. In archaic types, the number of scales in a longi-
tudinal row on the sides of the body corresponds very exactly with the number
of muscle-plates or somites of the body. The myocommata, or sheets of
connective tissue intervening between the successive muscle-plates are attached
with great firmness to the deeper layers of the skin or corium. The structural
arrangements at the time of scale development noted above, affect and modify
the subsequent growth of the scale matrix. During the swimming movements
of the fish the entire integument is thrown into definitely circumscribed
areolce, the central portions of which remain in a passive condition, while the
periphery is wrinkled and folded as a result of the action of the lateral muscles
of the fish. In this way each and every one of the dermal and epidermal
areolae are circumscribed by the action of the fish in the normal act of swim-
ming. In each of the circumscribed areolte a scale develops ; the continuity of
its development with its fellows across the margins of the areolae is prevented
by the continual bendings or flexures to which the dermis is there subjected
owing to the action of the muscles. As it is impossible to state clearly the
details of Ryder's paper without also giving his drawings, I will content my.
self with quoting several of his sentences.

" It will be clear that in the case considered the arrangement and imbrica-
tion of the body is determined by the actions of the segmentally arranged
muscles of the body. In other words, Avhatever has determined the develop-
ment of somites has also, in the most clear and direct manner, determined
the segmentally recurrent and peculiar trilinear and imbricated arrangement
of the scales of many fishes. It may be urged that heredity has determined
the number, arrangement, and the development of the somites, and therefore
the development of the scale is also a sequence of hereditary influences
working thus indirectly. Tliis view of the .case may be admitted without
invalidating the conclusion that given the growing mechanism here described,
the development of the scale would, under any circumstances, have been
interfered with at the parts where the integument was being continually flexed,
wrinkled, or folded, as it is around the integumentary areolas wherein the
scales are formed, as has been here proved to correspond with the facts."

Ryder summaries " two conclusions of prime importance : —

"(1) The scales of fish bear a segmental relation to the remaining hard and
soft parts, and are either repeated consecutively and in oblique rows corre-
sponding to the number of segments, or they may be repeated in rows as
multiples of the somites, or segmental reduction may occur which may effect
the arrangement of the scales so as to reduce the number of rows below the
number of somites indicated by the other soft and hard parts.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 33

" (2) The peculiar manner of interdigitation of the muscular somites as
indicated by the sigmoid outline of the mj^ocommata, as seen from their outer
faces, and the oblique direction of the membranes separating the muscular
cones, has developed a mode of insertion of the myocommata upon the coriura
■which has thrown the integument into rhombic areolae during muscular con-
traction. These areolae are in line in three directions, and the folds separating
them, particularly at their posterior borders, are inflected in such a manner by
muscular tensions, due to the arrangement of muscular cones, as to induce the
condition of imbrication so characteristic of the squamation of many fishes."

The next paper which I must notice is a very important one by Dr. Klaatsch.*
While acknowledging my indebtedness to and appreciation of this lengthened
paper, I must at the same time agree with Ussow (see p. 202) in regarding
some portions of Dr. Klaatsch's work, for example, the section on the
" Structure of the teleostean scale from the histogenetic standpoint," as
wanting in complete clearness.

The teleostean scale, its arrangemeiit and 'position in the skin. The scales of
Teleosteans are represented by more or less circular plates of hard substance,
which exhibit considerable variation in their form. This variation is, however,
insignificant in comparison with the general agreement which typical teleostean
scales show with one another. Ivlaatsch chooses the cycloid scale as repre-
sentative of the ordinary teleostean scale, not only because it presents simple
conditions, but because it supplies a suitable object for placing the skin-
covering of Teleosteans in line with that of Selachians and Ganoids. As
examples of such scales, one may think of such as those of the salmon or of
Esox, One distinguishes in such scales two layers : (1) an outer liomorjeneous
layer and (2) an irmer fibrillar layer. Each scale is in its anterior half
arranged with regard to others in an imbricated fashion, namely, the anterior
half of each is covered by three scales, one of which is anterior and dorsal to it,
a second anterior and ventral, and a third directly anterior. The centrum of
the scale is usually covered over, and scales surround the body in oblique rows.

For the arrangement of scales in the skin, he gives a figure and description
of a transverse section through the skin of a young specimen of Cohitis fossilis.

Under the epidermis, which contains a large number of mucus cells, the
dermis is seen to be raised in a series of projections, each of which corresponds
with the posterior free end of a fecale. Each scale lies in an oblique direction
from behind forwards, and becomes enclosed in a compartment of the dermis,
the so-called "scale pocket." In this scale pocket one distinguishes an outer
and an inner wall. The outer wall consists in its posterior part of loose connec-
tive tissue containing numerous chromatophores ; in the anterior part the outer
wall is composed of tense connective tissue, which is similar to the inner wall
of the adjoining anterior scale pocket.

The fibrous projections of this connective tissue of the outer wall of the scale
pocket unite themselves at the anterior border of the scale with the deepest
layer of the dermis, in which the fibres have a course parallel to the surface of
tlae body. The inner wall of the scale pocket in its posterior part unites with
the outer wall of the adjoining posterior pocket. Further forwards it is

*Klaatsch, 1890.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VII. NO. 1. C

34 THE PERIODIC GROWin OF SCALES IN GADID^

built up of the fibrous processes of the ckep dermis layer. Near the scale its
condition changes, as immediately towards the inside of the same, numerous
cells are found in a ground substance only slightly developed and not fibril-
lated. The fibres of the deep dermis layer have a similar arrangement to that
of Ganoids and Selachians.

One may easily ascertain this by observing a piece of skin from the surface.
The fibres of one layer of fibrous bundles cross those of the next higher or
deeper layer in such a way that, in relation to the long axis of the fish, the
anterior and posterior angles of intersection are greater than right angles.
The fibres surround the body in a diagonal direction to the body axis, corre-
sponding to the rows of scales. Towards the musculature the dermis is
bordered by a layer of cells which resemble the other cells of the dermis, but
lie closer to one another. In this part chromatophores are also seen. Under-
neath the dermis the musculature only shows young fibres similar to those seen
in immature forms, xis regards number, the scales have nothing at all to do
with the myocommata. Several scales are usually found on a myocomma;
the relation to metamery suggested by Salbey does not exist.

The development of the teleostean scale has hitherto not been worked out ;
one only finds a few incomplete references to this subject. The first who
takes any notice of the subject is C. Yogt, in his " Embryologie des
Salmones," who mentions " poches epitheliennes," in which the scales are
formed. According to him, these pockets are simply folds of the epidermal
membrane. This point will be referred to further on.

Later Leydig devoted some attention to the structure of scales, but did
not concern himself with their ontogeny. He says, " The scales of most of our
fresh-water fishes appear partly as ossifications of flattened skin continuations
which one generally terms scale pockets." He regards scales as fusion products,
" peculiarly developed calcareous globules, concretions, or scale corpuscles," such
as one finds on the lower side of scales in many Teleosteans.

Baudelot held the same view as that of Leydig. Although Baudelot's work
appeared in 1873, he does not make any note as to the part which cells take
in scale formation; "according to him, the scale is simply a conglomerate of
calcareous concretions or scale corpuscles, with whose measurements he fills
many pages of an extensive treatise."

Development of scales in the trout. Klaatsch followed the development of
cycloid scales mainly in the trout ; but he also made use of Esox and several
Cyprinoids for some of the earliest stages. The following are the results of his
investigations : —

In the trout the first formation of scales appears several months after
hatching. Trout 2 cm. in length show no scales, but somewhat older ones show
the commencement of scale formation. Scales firstly originate in the anterior
and median region of the trunk near the lateral line, and their formation
extends from this region caudal wards, as well as ventrally and dorsally.

For this reason trout 3 cm. in length are suitable specimens for the study of
scale formation, since older and younger stages occur near one another, the
younger being more posterior. Before scale formation commences, the skin
of a trout shows a thin epidermis and relatively very fine dermis. In
the just hatched trout, the dermis is represented as a homogeneous layer of

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 35

little consistency. Within this lies a cellular layer resembling epithelium.
This epithelial layer is that described by Hatschek as the "bordering epithe-
lium of the dermis."

At the stage in which the first foundation of the scale appears the skin is
about '03 mm. thick. Of that thickness the epidermis occupies about one-half,
and consists of four to five layers of cells, of which the most external layer is
somewhat flattened. In the remaining part of the epidermis the cells are
somewhat cubical and show the presence of nuclei. Mucus cells with sickel-
shaped compressed nuclei are also seen, and a thin basal membrane separates
the epidermis from the dermis. The outer surface of the epidermis is smooth.

The dermis consists of a small number of lamellse lying horizontally upon one
another. So long as there is no trace of scales, the lamellae in the dermis
extend nearly to the epidermis. The dermis cells, which as in earlier stages
lie in small numbers between its lamelliB, show somewhat flattened nuclei.
The cells become rather more numerous immediately beneath the basal
membrane of the epidermis, and the nuclei here are slightly more circular in
form than those of the other dermis cells. Chromatophores are also seen at
this part ; but of blood-vessels there is no trace in the dermis. Chromato-
phores are also to be seen situated above the bordering epithelium of the
dermis. Internally to this last follows the musculature, the most external
portion of which is made up of only young stages of muscle-fibres. The
first foundation of the scale appears as an aggregate of dermis cells lying
beneath the basal membrane of the epidermis ; but neither the basal
membrane nor the epidermis itself takes any part in the formation of the
.scale. The cells which gather together to form the scale foundation are
distinguished from the other cells of the dermis in possessing larger nuclei
and a better-developed protoplasmic body. This cell-mass, the foundation
of the scale, resembles epithelial tissue. Each scale germ presses upward
on the basal membrane of the epidermis as a slightly arched papilla.
During this upward growth of the scale germ the upper surface of the
epidermis remains smooth ; but at the places where a scale germ is situated
the epidermis is reduced from five to two or three layers of cells. In trans-
verse section the scale germs are seen as papillse, Avhose highest points
are not exactly at the centres of the masses of cells, but are situated
slightly caudalwards. These cell-masses (scale germs), which approach the
circular form in surface view, stand free from one another in regular rows,
diagonal to the body axis. Later the entire cell-mass spreads itself out hori-
zontally, and its elements arrange themselves in two slightly flattened layers.
Between those two layers there appears a thin layer of stroncjhj refractive
suhstance. In transverse section it is seen that the formative cells lay down
the new substance, alternately on the outside and on the inside, producing
what looks like a slightly undulated plate. The form of the plate is approxi-
mately circular, corresponding to the form of the cell-mass. These plates can
be isolated and represent small scales. The strongly refractive substance later
on shows itself to be the hard substance of the scale : at what period this
plate impregnates itself with lime salts Klaatsch has not investigated. The
formative cells which give rise to the scale are known as srh'rohla.-ifr^, and
they correspond to similar elements in Selachians and Ganoids. At this

36 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

period the minute scales appear as circular discs, which lie adjacent to one
another in regular order; but they do not as yet show any special covering.
The scales so far lie parallel to the upper surface of the body, and do not
project nearly so strongly into the epidermis as they do later; but at the
posterior end of each scale tlie epidermis projects inwards, as can be seen in
tranverse sections. In the strips of skin intervening between the scales, cells
of the dermis lie embedded in great numbers in a ground substance consisting
of a few irregularly arranged fibrillse.

Above the anterior end of the scale several elements penetrate between the
basal membrane of the epidermis and the scale, adding themselves to the
scleroblasts already present there, and resembling the scleroblasts in their
appearance. An increase of the dermis cells internally to the scales also
takes place. As the scale was originally enveloped symmetrically on all sides
by formative cells, a change in the distribution of scleroblasts is the more
noteworthy. On the upper or more external surface of the scale they lie
closer to one another than on the lower or more internal surface ; but they lie
particularly close to one another at the posterior part of the scale. As the
latter portion of the scale is specially active in growth, the highest point of the
scale germ becomes displaced entirely in the caudal direction. The slight in-
ward invagination of the under surface of the epidermis, continued here from
previous stages, becomes gradually considerably enlarged ; Ijut the epidermis
by this infolding gains as little as previously any part in scale formation.
Contemporaneously all layers of the skin grow in thickness, and the epi-
dermis comes thereby to consist of a large number of layers of cells. In the
dermis also that part situated between the lamellre and the scales undergoes a
great degree of cell proliferation. The scale comes thereby to lie on a layer of
loose connective tissue, by which it is separated from the deeper part of the
dermis, in which the ground substance had already undergone a lamellar
differentiation. At the same time there takes place an increase of dermis cells
between the epidermis and the scales, and new elements thus become added to
the scleroblasts on the upper surface of the scales, while the uppermost or most
external layers of the dermis separate scales and scleroblasts from the epidermis.
The scales thus become enveloped on all sides by loose connective tissue, from
which the scleroblasts receive new auxiliaries. The posterior end of the scale
shows as yet no connective tissue covering. The result of this mode of growth
is that the scale always inserts itself deeper in the epidermis. The scales,
along with their envelopes of connective tissue, have the appearance of papillae
which press the epidermis before them in an oblique direction caudalwards.
The epidermis during this process does not become uneven on the external
surface, but, on the other hand, is thrown into folds on the internal surface.
Klaatsch regards these folds as equivalent to the "epithelial pockets" described
by C. Vogt. A section shows the corresponding epidermic processes running
out pointed in front and extending far underneath the posterior border of each
scale. The position of the scale in the skin now undergoes an imjDortant
change. The posterior border of the scale becomes pressed against the upper
surface, and the anterior end expanding underneath the epidermic continua-
tions, becomes sunk towards the interior. From the original horizontal
position the scale passes into a position oblique to the upper surface. The

AS AN INDEX OF AGE, 37

consequence of this change of position is that the scale, not being hindered by-
adjoining structures, can increase the extent of its surface in an oblique
direction. A necessary result of further growth is that scales push themselves
under adjoining anterior scales by their anterior borders, so that they begin
to cover one another like tiles. In order to understand further changes
it is necessary to bear in mind that all layers of the skin increase con-
tinuously in thickness. The deep lamellar layer of the dermis takes, in anti-
thesis to early stages, a stronger growth, and in this development it is the
outer layer next the scales which undergoes a change. The epidermis also
grows, as well as the continuations of the same underneath the posterior
part of each scale. In this inward growth of the epidermis no tissue change
takes place ; for instance, one finds in these continuations similar mucus
cells to those in the rest of the epidermis. This growth of the epidermic
continuations is not to be regarded as a process proceeding from the upper skin
alone, but as the result of growth taking place in the entire skin. In this
connection the constant increase of the scale at its posterior border is of
significance. The anterior border of the scale inserts itself always deeper in
the loose connective tissue of the dermis, whose stronger development towards
the upper half of the deep dermis has already been noticed. It therefore
happens that the scale does not lie next to the deep dermis ; but it gives rise
to an appearance as if the scales had pushed themselves between the lamellae.
This takes place because the loose connective tissue underneath the scale
gradually becomes diflerentiated in a similar manner to that which had taken
place earlier in the deeper part of the dermis, and in this case also lamellar
fibrillated bundles are formed. These lamellae do not, however, lie parallel
to the surface of the body, but parallel to the scale. The lamellae form
themselves in the same manner as the scales, growing stronger towards
tlie anterior part; the dermis layer situated between the scales becomes so
arranged that connective tissue septa exist between the scales. These septa,
whicli are the inner walls of the scale pocket, are connected externally with
the epidermic continuations, and internally they grade imperceptibly into the
deep layer of the dermis. By the foregoing means the scale pockets come into
complete formation. These scale pockets appear consequently as a result of
scale growth. In this two different processes operate together: on the one
hand the scale becomes separated from the epidermis by growing connective
tissue, and so an outer wall to the pocket is formed in its anterior part; on
the other hand the floor of the pocket and the posterior part of its outer wall
is formed by the ingrowth of the scale into the loose portion of the dermis
and by the development of the same. The floor of the scale pocket is of
special significance in the development of the scale. The tissue of the dermis
which produced the floor of the scale pocket retains immediately underneath
the scale its indifferent state. Here there lie cells in a ground substance
Avhich is not yet broken up into fibrillae. When the same prove themselves
active as scale formers, they lead to the formation of a deep scale layer, which
shows in its histological relationship much peculiarity. A superficial view of
the latest stages shows how the scales gradually insert themselves underneath
the three next anterior, until we arrive at tlie condition found in older fish.
The median point of the scale becomes distinctly prominent by the formation

38 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^E

of conceutric ridges. It remains uncovered for a considerable time, until it
also becomes overlaid by the posterior border of the next anterior adjacent
formations.

Structure of teleostean scales from the Tiistogenetic standjwiyit. The dermis
cells which take part in scale formation are large elements with well-developed
nuclei, each of which shows a distinct nuclear membrane, and also, as a rule,
a large nucleolus. These cells lie at first so close to one another that they
mutually affect one another in shape. From a circular form they pass over
into a polygonal one. While the cells on the internal surface of the scale
become disconnected from one another on the first separation of scale sub-
stance, different cell layers come into formation on the external surface.
Above the deepest scleroblasts immediately overlying the young scale a
layer of cells extends which easily allows itself to be lifted up in co7itinno.
At the margins of the scale the original condition persists, as here the cells of
the outer as Avell as the inner surface unite themselves into an almost complete
covering for the scale substance.

The superficial scleroblast layer presents a very characteristic structure.
Its polygonal-shaped elements simulate a fiat epithelium. Between the
protoplasmic parts, which stain deeply in carmine or hematoxylin, there
exists a network which does not stain. This network appears like a system
of intercellular spaces, and there is nothing so far to prove that the clear
strips between the cells are an intercellular substance. The further changes
of these cells clear up the meaning of the intervening substance. The
cells undergo a process of change which seems to take place for all in a
similar manner. Each cell extends itself in one direction, which is not quite
determined in relation to the entire scale. It attains thereby a lengthened
form, and the nucleus comes to have a more peripheral situation in the cell.
The nuclei of adjoining cells during this process come to lie nearer one
another. In all the cells a part containing the nucleus becomes distinct
from a part in which there is no nucleus. In the latter part the protoplasm
loses at one place its power of taking on stains, and in this part there
appears a clear circular spot which resembles a nucleus in size and general
form. There is no internal structure in this clear spot, which afterwards
expands in the direction of that part of the cell farthest from the nucleus,
and finally unites with the clear network between the cells.

The different stages correspond with a process of cell-metamori)hosis : the
clear strips between the cells, owe their origin like the clear spots in the cells
above described, to a substance which has become differentiated from the rest
of the protoplasm.

This substance unites with that part of the scale already existing. The
nucleus and a part of the protoplasm are preserved. The substance derived
from the cells is thus a secretory product. Klaatsch says, "An dem
vorliegenden Objekte, welches fiir die Untersuchung des scleroblastischen
Processes in Flachonbilde sich vortrefllich eignet, konnte ich nichts wahr-
nehmen, was zu Gunsten der Annahme sphiche, dass Zellen i}i ioto in
das Produkt aufgingen ; die Kerne zeigten keine Veriinderung, ich sehe
daher in der Bildung der Hartsubstanz einen Abscheidungsprocess."
This product, the substance of the scale, is thus an intercellular substance

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 39

hardened by the deposit of lime salts, and the described cell layer is simply a
layer of scleroblasts, which are only distinguished by regularity of arrange-
ment and by sharp marking of individual stages of the scleroblastic processes
from the deeper cells of a similar kind with which they are continuously
dependent at their borders. The nearer the scleroblasts are towards the
margin the more do they show (though here no longer separable into layers)
an increase of their cell-body in a tangential and a decrease in the radial
direction in relation to the entire scale. As in other Physostomi, ridges are
formed on the external surface of the scales of the trout. These ridges have
a concentric arrangement on the scales of this fish, which is not, however,
a general rule for superficial reliefs. In the trout the cells concerned arrange
themselves so that they correspond exactly with the concentric ridges. One
might expect that the superficial scleroblast layer would cover the deeper cell
layer with its product, so that the constituent parts of the last would be taken
up into the interior of the scale substance. This does not, however, take
place in the trout. The cells arrange themselves as they pass through the
changes described, so that they come to lie on the external surface of the
ridges and contribute to the enlargement of these. They elaborate, as it were,
the upper relief surface of the scale, for which the deeper cells had only
supplied the foundation.

In the older stages and in the mature condition of all the scleroblasts there
remain only the nuclei and small masses of protoplasm. One sees the cells
lying on the surface of the scale ; if one takes a scale from a living fish, for
example from one of the Cyprinoids, and observes it in a fixing lluid, say
chromic acid, then one easily recognises circular nuclei surrounded by proto-
plasmic masses which extend in fine continuations. A similar condition to
that in the trout appears in other Teleosteans; in many Clupeoids, for example
in Elops saurus, Albula conorhijnclms, cells are found perfectly similar in their
arrangement to those in the trout and surrounded by scale substance ; these
represent true osseous cells adjoining the concentric ridges. In other forms
there are numerous osseous cells present in the scales.

In Osteoglossum, for example, the wealth of bony cells, and in consequence
the thickness of the cell-containing layer, is very apparent. In this form a
true cell-containing osseous tissue constitutes an essential part of the scale; in
the trout scale, so far as it has hitherto been observed, a similar tissue must be
recognised. Its scleroblasts are osteoblasts ; whether these become enclosed
by their product or not is of subordinate significance, as in related forms some-
times the one, sometimes the other is the case.

Originally the outer and the inner surfaces of the scale are alike in
regard to their scleroblasts. On the inner surface, however, the scleroblastic
processes gradually take another direction. As the outer and inner sclero-
blasts gradually pass into one another at the margin of the scale, and as both
originate from the same cell material, no sharp separation can be drawn
between them.

The scales retain for a lengthened period of their ontogeny the structure of
a thin bony plate, whose growth takes place especially at the margins and at
the external surface. Not until the time when the scales have reached the
condition of being a tile-like covering does a considerable increase of volume

40 THE PEEIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^E

commence on the inner surface. The scale has here received, hy the forma-
tion of a scale pocket, a connective tissue foundation. It appears that this
lower layer gradually differentiates itself so that it becomes similar to the
deep lamellar dermis layer, but that close to the scale a layer of cells persists,
which continues in an indifferent condition, in so far as the tissue surround-
ing it still shows no fibrillar structure. This cell material on the floor of
the scale pocket becomes a matrix for the so-called lower scale layer. In
its fibrillar structure and the lamellar layering of the fibrillse the lower
scale layer agrees with the dermis tissue ; by the total absence of cells it
difi'ers from that tissue. AVe cannot, however, assume from the first factor
that the lower scale layer owes its origin to a development of connective
tissue fibrils, for this is contradicted by the second factor and by the genesis
of the layer. If previously differentiated dermis tissue of the scale pocket
were included directly in the substance of the scale, there must exist a con-
nection between scale and scale pocket in order that both of these may pass
directly the one into the other. Secondly, the cells already occurring in the
dermis tissue must be found again in the interior of the scale after the in-
clusion of the tissue in the interior of the scale. Neither of these occurs ; in
the interior of the lower scale layer there is no trace of cells or cell remains,
and the scale is separated from the dermis tissue by an indifferent zone.

From the previous histogenetic facts one gains the following ideas as to the
histological structure of scales : —

The outer layer consists of bony tissue. This layer is homogeneous and
is deficient in any special structure, except for a slight lamellar layering
(see, for example, Williamson, 1851, plate xxviii., fig. 9, of the Carp).
The chemical composition consists of amorphous phosphate of lime and
carbonate of lime. The formative cells of this layer are situated chiefly on
the upper surface. They represent that which Williamson has described as a
membrane, on which the growth of the layer depends. The scleroblasts form
the superficial relief of scales. If they become enclosed in their own secretory
product, then bone corpuscles are found in a great variety of conditions as
regards number and arrangement. On the addition of hydrochloric acid the
entire layer dissolves, but somewhat slowly. There is no difi'erence in re-
action with this acid between a piece of fish bone from the internal skeleton
and the external scale layer; both develop at first rapidly and then more
slowly carbon di-oxide.

The lower scale layer consists of fibres united into bundles, the fibres all run-
ning parallel within the bundles. The bundles of one layer again lie fairly
parallel to one another, and cross those of the next higher and deeper layers at
acute angles. There are usually three different systems to be distinguished in
a scale, which cut one another at similar angles. This tissue agrees with tense
connective tissue, and especially with that of the deep dermis layer. Con-
sequently it appears right, as most authors do, to regard the lower scale layer
as the connective-tissue part of the scale, yet no one has placed the peculiar-
ities of this tissue in a clear light. This should be done in two directions :
firstly, in regard to the adjoining connective tissue of the scale pocket;
secondly, in regard to the external scale layer. As regards the first point,
development has taught that the lower scale layer does not represent pre-

k

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 41

existing connective tissue of the scale pocket which has become annexed to
the scale. In regard to the deeper-situated connective tissue, this questionable
layer must be defined as tense connective tissue without cells, whose formative
cells probably originated from the connective tissue of the scale pocket. "The
development of this peculiar tissue can only be fully understood by taking
into consideration phylogenetic factors extending far backwards. Its peculi-
arity may, however, be partly explained by reference to the development of
the entire dermis. As Hatschek has shown, and as I also find in the trout,
the dermis consists originally of a layer, the formative cells of which lie only
on the inner side. The formation of the fibrillar structure of the layer is
independent of cells, which only arrive later in its interior. The dermis cells
return likewise to an embryonic stage in the course of scale formation, and
it is conceivable that events which govern the formation of the entire dermis
repeat themselves in detail."

Regarding the relation of the lower to the upper layer, it is of significance
that the upper layer exists for a long time alone, and that it is not till later,
when the covering of the scale has completed itself, that the other part of the
scale first appears. There exists indeed a genetic relationship between both
layers, and the external bony layer has indeed occasioned the formation of the
second. But now as it is a matter not simply of a connective-tissue lower
layer of the original scale, but of an integral portion of the entire structure, it
follows that a sharp separation between both layers is as little tenable as a
separation between the formative cells of both surfaces. At the margins of the
scale the layers cohere intimately with one another. As the lower layer
becomes impregnated with calcareous salts, a closer coherency is by that means
given to both layers.

This impregnation with calcareous salts never takes place in the lower layer
to the same extent as in the upper layer ; the substance remains little capable
of resistance against alkalies ; but Klaatsch believes that a sclerotic-like forma-
tion takes place, though in lesser degree. The calcareous concretions which
^landl has described thus appear in the lower layer. They are ovoid, layered
bodies which are largest in the centre of the scale. Immediately beneath the
outer layer they lie so thick and congregate so intimately together that
"Williamson has made a special third layer out of that part. Leydig referred
to them as " Kalkkugeln." He overrated their significance in scale formation.
"Now they again gain significance, but in another sense to that which the earlier
authors thought. These formations appear as the lower scale layer gradually
becomes changed by a sclerotic-like formation. The scale represents a plate,
which consists of an outer and an inner layer. The outer is bony tissue, the
inner owes its origin to connective tissue, ' das in den Sclerosirungsprocess
einbezogen worden ist ; sie besteht aus theilweise sclerosirten Eindegewebs-
lamellen, zwischen denen keine Zellen liegen.' "

In a later paper Klaatsch* returns to the question of the development of
the teleostean scale, and comes to the conclusion that it follows the same
course as that of the bones of the head, which he now describes. He points
out that his former work requires correction as regards the origin of the
elements which form the scale. The scleroblasts in reality arise from the

* Klaatsch, 1894.

42 THE TERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IX GADID.E

ectoderm, and not from the connective-tissue layers. Those beneath tlie scale
(the lower scale layer) are budded off from the ectodermal invagination,
which grows in under the posterior end of the scale.

To Ussow we are indebted for a paper on the development of the cycloid
scale of Teleosteans.* This author differs in a number of points from Klaatsch's
views on the same subject. I shall endeavour to give a summary of Ussow's
paper.

The scale of Teleosteans is built up of two layers, the structure of which is
not agreed upon by the various authorities. Hofer, for instance, considers the
first and otdermost layer of the scale to be composed of a form of dentine
which he terms ''h//alode7iti7ie," and speaks of the transformation of this
special tissue into common dentine. The second and innermost layer of the
scale is, according to Hofer, formed from the dermis.

Klaatsch, from the presence of minute osseus bodies in the first layer of
the scale, holds that this layer is built of ordinary bony tissue. He believes
that the second layer of the scale is formed out of connective tissue which is
developed from the scale pocket.

Leydig and Baudelot regarded the scales of Teleosteans simply as a con-
glomeration of calcareous concretions or little scale bodies.

In regard to literature dealing with the development of scales, Ussow cites
the following three papers : —

(1) Klaatsch, "Zur Morphologic dcr Fischschuppen and zur Geschichte der
Hartsubstanzgewebe."

(2) Hofer, " Ueber den Bau und die Entwicklung der Cycloid und Ctenoiil
schuppen." Berl. Gesellschaft filr Morphologie zuul Physiologie in Milnchen.
1889.

(3) Maria Sacchi, " Sulla struttura del toguniento negli embryoni ct
avanotti del Salmo lacustris." Red. del Inst. Lomhardo, vol. xx. ]\lilano.
1887.

The species which Ussow selected for the study of scale development were
the following : — In the family Cobitidee, Cohitis iicnia, Cohitis barbaiida,
Cobiiis fossilis ; in the family Cyprinidse, Leucasjnus dclineatus, Leuciscus
rutilus, Carassius vulgaris.

As the origin and development of teleostan scales takes place from the
mesoderm elements of the dermis, Ussow first gives some notes on the
epidermis and dermis of Cohitis tivnia as an example. In young examples
of Cohitis ttenia the skin is imperfectly developed and the epidermis is
thicker than the dermis. In such young stages (embryos 4 cm. long) mucus
cells are present in the epidermis in great number. The dermis consists at
this stage of numerous fibres and cells embedded in an intermediate ground
substance. In older forms tlie epidermis becomes much thicker and the
nuicus cells increase in number. The dermis also becomes thicker at the
expense of connective-tissue fibres Avhich cross under one another almost at
right angles ; these fibres, surrounding the body of the animal, lay themselves
down in diagonal lines in relation to its longitudinal axis. The dermis is
separated from the muscles by an epithelial layer of cells, not clearly marked

. • Ussow, 1897.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 43

out in all, which Ilatschek termed the ''marginal epitlieliiun of the cutis."
According to some authors, the dermis is separated from the epidermis by a
thin membrane, a distinct and independent structure, sometimes termed the
ground membrane. Toldt, in his "Lehrhuch der GewebeJehre," however, says,
" It has now been almost generally accepted, not as an independent structure,
but as a modification and thickening of the upper layer of the connective
tissue ground substance." Ussow thinks that this membrane as an independent
structure does not occur in the families Cobitidre and CyprinidiE, but simply
that a transition substance of connective tissue devoid of fibres lies between
the epidermis and the dermis.

The first stage in the development of a scale consists of fairly distinct and
prominent aggregations of mesoderm elements in the upper half of the dermis,
immediately beneath -the epidermis. The cells forming such a papilla, as we
may call these aggregations, differ at least in the beginning from the other
cells of the dermis, and no ground substance is developed between them.
This papilla gradually grows out in a horizontal direction, pushing the epi-
dermis before it slightly upwards. When the papilla has reached a certain
stage, a change takes place in its constituent cells. All cells excepting the
lower become more circular in form and their nuclei gradually become more
transparent ; the lower cells, on the contrary, are, as before, highly coloured and
their nuclei are spindle-shaped. In the next stage a separation of the elements
of the jyapilla into two layers, an upper and under, becomes distinctly observed.
Between these two layers a thin strip of highly refractive substance stands out
p)rominently. At the commencement this strip does not extend throughout
the entire length of the papilla, and one may see, in sections, that it is
thickest at the centre, and gradually thins out towards its border, until at the
end of the section of the papilla the strip is not visible.

The secretion of this refractive substance thus does not commence with the
peripheral elements, but with the cells found towards the centre of the papilla.
In further develoj)ment, the substance of the first layer of the scale shows itself
throughout the entire length of the section of the papilla, and the strips also
become broader ; meanwhile the papilla grows out in a horizontal direction.
In this way a round curved plate originates, lying parallel to the upper surface
of the body of the fish close beneath the epidermis. The upper and lower
surfaces of this plate are formed out of scleroblast cells (the formative cells of
the scales). The upper layer of scleroblasts simulates in its appearance a flat
epithelium with clear spaces between its component cells. Later, each of the
constituent cells changes, its nucleus comes to lie towards one end, and a
circular colourless space appears at the opposite end. Klaatsch held that the
clear spots within the cells fuse with the clear spaces between the cells ; but
Ussow did not observe any such fusion in his preparations. Klaatsch'a
description of these processes does not appear at all clear to Ussow. Klaatscli
says that the cell structure on the external surface of the scale sliows diiferen-
tiation into several layers of cells, and that these cells build up the substance
of the first layer of the scales. The question would naturally arise, how it is
that the cells of the lower row do not become covered by the product of the
upper cells. It would seem that the lower cells would become quite changed
by the product secreted on them ; but according to Klaatsch tliis docs not

44 THE PEKIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

take place, for he says, "An clem vorliegenden Oltjecte, welcher fiir die
Untersucliung der scloroblastischen Processes in Fliiclienbilde sich vortrelllich
eignet, konnte ich nichts wahrnehmen, was zu Gunsten der Annahnie spriiclie,
dass Zellen in toto in das Product aufgingen ; die Kerne zeigten keine
Veranderung, ich sehe daher in der Bildung der Hartsubstanz einen Abscheid-
ungsprocess." In regard to the above, Ussow reiterates, "Alles das ist mir
ganz unklar."

According to Ussow, the further development of the first layer of the scale
takes place in the following manner : —

The cells overlying the substance of the first layer of the scale already
secreted appear to waste themselves down more rapidly than the lower cells
from the product secreted by them, so in the following stages one frequently
sees a transparent strip of homogeneous substance in the position of the
future scale ; underneath this transparent strip and immediately united with
it lies a row of scleroblasts with easily observable nuclei ; on the upper side of
the clear strips, on the contrary, one only sees three or four cells, the size of
whose nuclei as compared with those of the lower scleroblasts is distinctly
smaller. In still later stages one only meets with one or two such nuclei, and
those much smaller than the nuclei of the lower scleroblasts. In section-
cutting also it is easily seen that the overlying nuclei readily become loosened
from the clear strips of the first layer of the scale, while, on the contrary,
those elements lying beneath the clear strips form part of the latter, and
never loosen themselves from it. In following stages the size of the under-
lying scleroblasts decreases, and at length there only remain, as in the case
of the overlying cells, long extended, closely adjacent nuclei without trace of
plasma, on which the first layer of the scale is formed.

Summary of preceding development.

(1) The cells of the papilla arrange themselves in two layers, the upper
and under; between these two layers there appears a thin strip of refractive
substance, the substance of the first layer of the future scale.

(2) The cells of the upper layer (the over-lying scleroblasts) use them-
selves up in the formation of scale material (its first layer) more rapidly than
those of the under layer (the underlying scleroblasts) ; in consequence of this,
one gets the stage of a plate with cells of the lower layer apparently enclosed
therein.

(3) The first layer of the scale is apparently the product of the scleroblasts,
that is to say, it is due to the change of the plasma of the latter into dentine-
like substance.

About this time, when the first layer of the scale is quite complete, the
change of its position in the dermis commences. Its posterior end (that
turned towards the tail of the animal) raises itself gradually and presses
on the epidermis ; the anterior end, on the contrary, becomes sunk in the
deeper layers of the dermis. This change in the position of the scale comes
about through the formation of the so-called ^^ scale pockets." Between the
plates of scale substance there exist free portions of the dermis which lie
close on the epidermis in these intervening spaces, and contain small

AS AN INDEX OF AGF. 45

aggregations of ordinary connective-tissue cells. By degrees the number and
size of the cells increases, and there arise between them thin connective-tissue
fibrils. Sections seem to show, without any doubt, that these fibrils of con-
nective tissue in the scale pocket are directly formed at the expense of cells
of the dermis, and are their immediate elongation. The developing connective
tissue of this intervening part grows, as it were, between the epidermis and
the anterior end of the scale, the horizontal position of the last gradually
changing into an oblique position ; the posterior end of the scale cuts into
the epidermis, and envelops itself in this as in an envelope. The large
development of connective tissue, the formation of the scale pocket, is thus
the cause of the change in the position of the scale from a horizontal to
an oblique position. The connective-tissue pocket itself appears as a newly
developed connective-tissue layer, which lies between every two scales, the
layer surrounding the scale on all sides (at least on the lower two-thirds).
Owing to their oblique position in the skin of the fish, the scales can extend
themselves in all directions without hindering one another in their growth.

When the first layer of the scale and the beginning of the connective-tissue
pocket have already been formed, a layer of transparent, quite homogeneous
substance appears at the border of the dermis underneath the scale ; this layer
contains pear-shaped nuclei, which increase very rapidly during the develop-
ment of this layer; nucleoli are, as a rule, not observed, Klaatsch regarded this
layer simply as cells of the dermis. According to Ussow, however, they are
the lower elements of tlie papilla still remaining behind ; during the entire
development of the first layer of the scale they retained the characteristic
spindle-shaped form of the basal elements of the papilla ; but at this time
they commence to increase in size and number, and between them a trans-
parent intervening substance comes into appearance ; further, one finds in
longitudinal sections that this developing second layer enters into close con-
nection with the first layer.

In this second layer one also finds nuclei whicli are plainly distinguishable
by their size and pear-shaped form. No striation, no fibrils, are at first to be
seen in the layer. At a later stage, however, we find a scale, which now con-
sists of two distinct layers, the upper already known as the hyalodentin layer,
and the lower without cells, but with fine stripe parallel to the upper surface of
the scale. How does this striation originate 1 From what are those longi-
tudinal fibres of the second layer formed 1 Klaatsch says the following : " In
order to understand the structure of the second layer of the scale, one must
know the formation of the entire dermis." According to Klaatsch, the dermis
at the commencement of development consists of a layer on whose inner side
lie the formative cells. The breaking down of the dermis into fibrillw does not
depend on those cells, whicli only penetrate into it much later. In the develop-
ment of scales, the process which took place in the development of the entire
dermis repeats itself, but in lesser degree. But the possibility of a direct
appearance in the scale of the dermis of the connective-tissue pocket, already
ditrerentiated into fibrils, Klaatsch denies: he asks, "Where then do the
connective-tissue cells disappear, for one finds no cells in the second layer
of tlie scale (in the trout)." Ussow says, " I think my preparations show
fairly clearly that the second layer develops itself anew, and is not merely

4G THE TERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

a part of the connective tissue of the scale pocket. As concerns H.
Khiatsch's explanation, it is not at all clear to me, because the development
of the dermis is also not clear." 11. Klaatsch says that threads arise in the
dermis without any participation of its cells ; hut literature seems not wholly
to confirm this view, as we read, " Die Fiiden aus Zellen entstehen, indem sie
aus dem Plasma der letzteren hervorwachsen (Kanvicr)." Ussow then proceeds
to note the varying opinions of difierent authorities in regard to the origin of
the fibrils of connective tissue, and he concludes his remarks on this subject
with the following sentence : —

^^ Elne fjenauere VorsteUung von dem hisiogenetisclien Vorgange der
FihriUenhildiing auf Gi-und direkter Beohacldung zu gelen, ist nun freilich
srlvcierig tind wir sind nach wie vor auf mehr specidative Erurterungen
angeiniesen."

In his preparations, Ussow sees something quite different to that described by
Klaatsch. According to Ussow, the first phase of development of the second
layer of the scale begins with a great numerical increase of the mesoderm
elements underlying the first layer of the scale, then a transparent inter-
mediate substance appears between them, firstly in a small degree, then
always more and more, by which process the cells now become quite sunk in
the intermediate substance. Ussow points out that in one of his figures
(6u) one sees the dermis developing, which consists of cells embedded in a
"round substance, and that this figure much resembles the figure showing the
development of the second layer of the scale. He regards it as possible, as
Klaatsch did, that in the development of the dermis these cells pass later
towards the margins of the ground substance, and that the breaking up of the
dermis into iilnillro does not depend on these cells. But he asks if one can
conclude either from his own or from Klaatsch's preparations that the fibrillro
originate without participation of the cells.

He says, "Mir scheint es, man kann nur sagen, dass man die Erscheinung
der Schraffirung nur dann konstatiren kann, wenn die Kerne allein in dieser
zweiten Schicht nach unten gegangen sind (fig. 7q), aber das heisst doch
nicht, dass das Zerfallen in Fibrillen ohne jede Theilnahme der Zellen geschah,
um so mehr als wiihrend der ganzen Entwicklungszeit der Zwischensubstanz
dor zweiten Schicht die Zellen in diese Zwischensubstanz versenkt waren und
nicht an ihren inneren Eandern lagen ; das letztere scheint mir gcradczu
unverstandlich zu sein; diese Schicht ist so diinn, dass an welchen der inneren
Kiinder — den oberen oder den unteren — man auch diese zellen versetzen
miichte, sie doch in der Schicht der Zwischensubstanz liegen wiirden."

He gives the following summary as to the development of the second layer

of the scale : —

(1) "The formation of the layer of intermediate substance precedes the for-
mation of the .second layer of the scale ; the intermediate substance contains
large nuclei embedded in it, whose plasma cannot be distinguished from the
intermediate substance itself; that the position of the formative cells is on
the inner side of the strips of intermediate substance cannot be urged, in
consequence of the insignificant width of that layer.

(2) " Such a substance with large nuclei we find firstly on the floor of the
pocket, then beneath the first layer of the scale closely bordering on it.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 47

(3) "This intermediate substance is formed at the expense of the basal
elements of the papilla. As to the possibility that the fibrillae of the second
layer of the scale may develop themselves at tlie expense of the inter-
mediate substance by immediate breaking down into such, without participa-
tion of the cells, one can say nothing definite, for the reason that there is no
possibility of distinguishing the plasma of the formative cells from the inter-
mediate substance itself."

The reliefs on the surface of scales. Ussow has only studied the formation
of these reliefs in cycloid scales. In perfectly developed scales this relief
has most frequently tlie form of rolls or cylinders, which cover the entire
surface of the scale and run parallel to its border. In sections the rolls
generally appear as small elevations of transparent homogeneous material, the
appearance of which does not differ from that of the first layer of the scale.
One finds a cell on such a roll or often behind it. The question might at
once be asked, Where do these cells come from '? Klaatsch says that these cells
make their appearance out of the connective tissue of the scale pocket, and
that as they penetrate into the intermediate space between the epidermis and
the scale (in its upper part which has penetrated into the epidermis) as well
as between the lower part of the scale and the pocket, they arrange them-
selves on the external surface of the scale in curved rows, and form,
always in front of themselves, the substance out of which the rolls are
made. Ussow saw such aggregations of cells in his sections, but in distinctly
later stages than those figured by Klaatsch, namely when the reliefs at the
sides of the scale are already completely formed ; but at the stage when those
reliefs occurred for the first time, no such cell aggregations existed. Ussow
regards it as very possible that these cells later take part in the formation of
the reliefs, l)ut he believes tliat the commencement of their formation arises at
the expense of the peripheral elements of the papilla, and that for the
following reasons : " Commencing with the stage of a plate of scleroblasts,
one finds in all subsequent sections the following formation : at the ends of
the scales one observes masses of cells which differ in form and colouring from
the scleroblasts of the plate, and are similar rather to the peripheral and basal
elements of the papilla ; they are, namely, much smaller tlian the scleroblasts
and stain more deeply ; in a word, they are cells which have taken no part
in the formation of the scale, as the cells which form the scale change their
form and appearance, their nuclei become larger, get a pear-shaped form, and
are not so intensively stained. In following stages, tooth-like projections
formed of transparent substance become observable at the ends of the jjlate,
where the cell-masses were situated ; behind each tooth lies a cell, or more
properly only its nucleus, for the plasma has. apparently been spent in the
formation of the roll or cylinder which appears as a tooth in transverse
section."

In connection with cycloid scales, Ussow believes that the teeth or small
si)ines are not in any true sense comparable to rudimentary forms of the spines
of placoid scales either in internal structure or development, but that tliere is
merely an external resemblance. He holds that these spines are built of the
same substance as that of the entire ujjper substance of the scale, that is to
say, according to Ilofer, uf hyalodentin.

48 TIIK PEHIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.1^

Ussow concludes liis paper in the following words : —

" The scale of Teleosteans is a plate consisting of two layers. The upper
layer (including the relief) consists of homogeneous tissue witliout any struc-
ture (frequently one can, however, observe on focussing a slight striation
running parallel to the upper surface of the scale). This layer originates
at the expense of the mesoderm elements of the dermis, at the expense of
the so-called scleroblasts ; its inorganic portion consists of amorphous calcium
phosphate. The tissue of this layer is an ordinary simple bony tissue.

"The lower layer of the scale also originates at the expense of the same
mesoderm elements. It is formed in part out of indurated (sclerosirten)
connective-tissue fibrillse, between which no cells exist (in the species investi-
gated by me). One terms its tissue a tense connective tissue."

The next paper which I notice, that by Hoff bauer* on the "Age-determination
of carp by means of their scale-!," bears more distinctly on my own contribu-
tions on the scales of marine fishes than any of the papers previously men-
tioned. Dr. Hoffbauer's work is that from which my investigations had
their origin, and I would therefore lay all due stress upon it. This
author showed that carp bred in pond or aquarium, for all of which he
had exact knowledge as to their age and history, possessed in their scales a
means of age-determination.

The scale of a carp shows the following structure : — There are two distinct
areas, firstly, a non-transparent part covered by the upper skin, and
situated towards the tail of the fish, which may be termed the posterior
field or area ; and a transparent part enveloped in the scale pocket, which may
be called the anterior field or area. Only the anterior area comes into con-
sideration in the determination of age. This anterior field, as distinguished
from the posterior, shows fine lines which run approximately parallel to the
margin of the scale, and apparently take their origin from a more or less
median point lying back towards the posterior area of the scale. This median
point is the centre of growth, and constitutes the oldest portion of the scale,
characterised by the absence of lines or stride, lie describes these lines or
striae in the anterior area of the scale as concentric lines or striae, which
show much similarity in their arrangement to the annual rings seen in the
transverse sections of trees. The concentric lines consist of ridge-like
elevations of the upper surface of the scale, in consequence of which the
upper surface is rougher to the touch than the under surface. The formation
of these concentric lines has a very close connection with the growth of the
scale. According to Baudelot, the lines are due to the fact that the lower
surface of the scale, consisting oidy at first of a small thin plate (the centre
of growth), gradually lays down lamella? which always become larger in
peripheral circumference, and on their free projecting margins concentric
lines form themselves. It was at one time believed that a new lamella was
formed each year, and that the concentric lines were the thrown up projecting
margins of individual lamellae; for example, that a twelve-year-old fish had
twelve individual lamellae and twelve concentric lines corresponding to the
number of lanielhe. In a previous paper Iloffbauer showed that this accepta-

* Hofn)auer, 1899.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE, 49

tion was incorrect (AUgem. Fischerei-Zeit, 1898, Xr. 19), as firstly the number
of lamellae is not the same as that of the concentric lines, and secondly the
total number of concentric lines is much greater than the number of years.
The number of concentric lines which form themselves at the free margin of
the lamella stands, however, in direct relationship with the growth of the
latter. As a result of this, the comparative distance of the concentric lines
from one another also changes ; it is greatest at the time of greatest growth,
that is to say, in the summer.

He gives a diagrammatic transverse section of the scale of a two-year-old
carp. He notes the diflficulty of investigations dealing with the compounding
of the lamellfe, that is to say, their number in relation to the size of the
scale and their relation as a foundation for the concentric lines, as the hardness
of their material renders it difficult to secure intact sections. In addition to the
concentric lines, there are also radial lines on the surface of scales, the arrange-
ment of which he considers to be of some service in the determination of age.
He notes the presence of scales which differ in their structure from that
described above. This variation from the normal consists of an expansion of
the centre of growth so that it sometimes comes to occupy quite an extensive
area, and there is a corresponding reduction of the number of concentric
lines ; but other scales from the same carp will show usually the normal
arrangement. This deformity shows itself in very intensively developed carp,
whose quick growth is expressed in the structure of the scale which does
not form concentric lines to the usual extent.

Age-determination from the scale. The hypothesis upon which, in the first
place, his method rests is the mode of the carp's life.

"It is clear, that in an animal which has a so-called winter sleep, whose
means of nourishment decreases in autumn at the commencement of colder
days, and whose body-weight remains the same in winter-time even under the
most favourable circumstances, while in warm months much growth takes
place as a result of a rich supply of nourishment, this reaction makes itself
evident in a corresponding manner by changes in the structure of the body.
We find that this phenomenon is shown, not only in every animal with such
a mode of life, but it is true also in the plant world."

He believes that this change in the nourishment of the fish in summer as
contrasted with winter shows itself in the scale as well as in other organs of
the body ; but the former is particularly well adapted in its structure to show
the effect of the change.

He says, "As I have now investigated hundreds of carp scales with the
most favourable results, I may indeed accept with complete assurance the
truth of my hypothesis."

He acknowledges that one finds individual scales from which age-determina-
tion would be difficult, and that there are other scales which would tend to
make the inexperienced worker very doubtful ; but the uncertainty disappears
after observing several scales from the same fish, as among them some would
be found showing more distinct demarcations.

He then describes the superficial structure of a scale taken from a carp at
the end of its second summer, namely, in late autumn, as illustrated by a photo-
micrograph. The means of determining the age is, as previously mentiuned,

NEW .sERIE.s. — VOL. VII. NO. 1. D

50 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADIDyE

found in the arrangement of the concentric lines on the scale surface. The
best way to observe the arrangement of those lines is to begin at the centre of
growth, and to pass straight outwards to the median border of the anterior
area. The first lines round the centre of growth are rather irregular and
interrupted, and are comparatively widely separated from one another ; then
follow more regular lines, which lie close to one another until they run into a
bordering zone appearing somewhat darker. This zone marks the end of the
first year's growth. In the second zone (the second year's growth) the arrange-
ment of the concentric lines shows a repetition of that occurring in the first
year, namely, firstly, irregular lines comparatively separated from one another ;
secondly, more regular lines with little separation between them. In scales of
carp observed at the end of the third summer, a third zone shows itself similar
in general arrangement to the last. " The number of concentric lines within
a year's zone is, in individual scales from a scale row of the same carp, running,
for example, close above or beneath the lateral line, approximately the same.
Their number only decreases at those places where the scales themselves
become smaller, as at the gill-slit and at the tail; the number is also only
subject to slight fluctuations in corresponding scales on the right and left sides
of the same individual fish ; in corresponding scales from different individuals
it can, however, vary considerably, according to more or less intensive growth
within a year."

He gives a statistical table to bring out these points, in which he shows the
number of concentric lines in individual scales in the row of scales dorsal to
and above the lateral line in the direction from the gill-slit to the tail. The
structure described above is seen in all normally formed scales, that is to say,
from carp living under favourable and natural conditions. lie, however, also
considers less favourable conditions. The fish's growth may have an irregular
course, it may grow faster or slower. For example, Avhat influence has illness,
or want of food, or both of these, for one or several years upon the method of
age-determination.

But, " in this case, the structure of the scale does not leave us in a difficulty ;
on the contrary, we gain from it, in a manner, a self-registering, infallible con-
trol over the mode of life of its bearer." He takes a case to show this point.
He commences with the most unfavourable case : the case of a carp in its
third summer which had grown slowly all its life in consequence of less food.
This mode of life showed itself in the arrangement of concentric lines at an
equal distance from one another within a period of growth. As a result of
this, the border separating one year from another becomes more indistinct.
As a rule, one sees a divergence of the concentric lines at the age border where
the posterior area meets the anterior area at the right and left of the concentric
lines. If one follows this divergence towards the front margin of the anterior
field, then the separation area between one year and another becomes more
distinctly marked out than one had hitherto supposed, or rather observed.
Besides this, the radial lines also aid one in age-determination. It is frequently
the case that at the border between one zone and another, either several radii
of the i^revious year's zone end, or new radii of the succeeding year's zone
begin. Lastly, the total number of concentric lines is a sure way of dispelling
all further doubts on the subject.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 51

One does not need a detailed observation such as the above to distinguish
a slow-growing carp of three summers from a well-grown carp of two summers,
as superficially the difference in the distance of the concentric lines, in such a
two-year carp of approximately the same size, is distinctly greater at its chief
period of growth, and besides this, the age border between the first and
second year is also much more distinct. "With practice one can in a similar
way distinguish between a slow-grown carp of two summers and a quickly
grown carp of one summer. The age-determination of rapidly grown carp
offers no difficulty, the difference in the distance of the concentric striae appears
distinctly prominent at the time of the growth period. One may lay down the
following general rule in regard to the relationship of the concentric lines : —

" Je mtensiver das Waclistum der Karpfen, I'esj^eJdive seiner Sclmppe, um so
grosser wird der Ahstand der Iconzentrischen Streifen von einander und umso
vnregelmdssiger, unzusammenhdngender ihr gegenseitiger parallel Verlauf."

He shows, from his figures that from spring until the height of growth in
the summer months a steady increase of the distance of the concentric striae
appears, which finally are represented as zigzag lines partly anastomosing with
each other. In autumn the lines become much closer to one another, until
finally they become extremely close and regular. In some cases in the first
year's zone, in consequence of a great expansion of the centre of growth, con-
centric lines are not formed in spring-time, but only in summer-time.

Under some circumstances, however, an intensive growth may take place in
spring-time, as shown in fig. 6 (Hoflfbauer). This figure shows that the con-
centric striae at the commencement of the second year have a very regular
course and are at a great distance from each other. In other figures he shows
how much the centre of growth may expand; thus in fig. 8, representing the
scale of a one-summer carp, only twenty irregular concentric lines have been
formed at the conclusion of the growth period, while under normal conditions
fifty to sixty and more are to be seen. Further, in fig. 9 the first year's zone
is altogether without concentric lines, which only commence their formation at
the beginning of the second year. Even the second year's zone may have no
concentric lines, as he shows in his tables giving the number of concentric
lines ; this is, however, a rare occurrence.

The remainder of his paper is taken up with a consideration of photo-
micrographs of scales from carp bred in pond or aquarium, for all of which he
had exact knowledge as to their age and history, and to my mind these figures
show in a very clear and interesting manner the truth of this mode of age-
determination. He shows that in carp, the scales of which were periodically
examined, the increase in the dimensions of the size of the scales, the number
of concentric lines formed in them, and the amount of separation between the
lines, corresponded with the known facts as to whether the fish were slowly or
quickly gaining weight, and this in a very striking manner. He says, '* Die
Unterschiede sind so deutlich erkcnnbar, dass wir uns eine bessere und
untrugliche Orientirung gar nicht verschaffen konnen." He further takes up
the case of two carp of the same brood and of equal weight ; one of these was
put into an aquarium, the other into a pond at the same time, their scales
being first examined. The carp placed in the pond naturally gained weiglit more
quickly than that placed in the aquarium, and on the .scales of botli being

52 THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADIDili;

examined some time later, those from the pond sliowed an increase of scale
surface, with widely separated concentric lines, while those from the aquarium
showed little increase of scale surface and closely situated concentric lines.
The increase in the case of the pond fish he ascribes to the supply of plankton
food from the water. Another interesting case is that of carp whose growth
was partly disturbed for a time by an accidental drying up of the water in the
pond in which the carp was living. On the scales of this carp being examined
some time after the renewal of the supply of water, the effect of the partial
drying up and subsequent renewal of the water appears marked out in the
scales, the adverse condition by dark closely situated lines lying close together,
the normal condition by clear and more widely separated lines. During the
partial drying up of the pond, the fish were probably deprived of their wonted
nourishment.

In conclusion, he deals with the case of an invalid carp. "When this carp
was caught it appeared thin and poorly nourished. On examination this
appeared to be due to a swelling in the anal region. The scales seemed
clearly to show at what time this, swelling had effected a disturbance in the
growth of the animal. He concludes his first paper on this subject by saying
that age-determination from the scales will not probably be so easy in carp
older than three years, as the older the carp becomes the larger and thicker
do its scales become, and consequently they are not so transparent, and
recognition of the concentric strise becomes more difficult, especially in the
first year's zone surrounding the centre of growth.

In the following year Dr. Hoffbauer issued a second paper, a continuation
of the last noticed. His subject is now somewhat Avider, namely, "Further
contributions on the structure of fish scales for determination of the age
and course of growth."* In this paper Hoffbauer strengthens his position
by means of further results and statistics, and also replies to certain criticisms
by Dr. Walter {Jaliresherichtes in der Fischerei Zeittmg, Bd. iii., 1900, Nr. 19).
"Walter had allowed the general correctness of Dr. Hoffbauer's observations,
but had regarded them as less certain and easy of recognition for practical men
than for Dr. Hoffbauer.

Hoffbauer regards "Walter's position as largely due to unnecessary methods
Avhich he employed in cleaning scales, by which the characteristic features of
the scale became less apparent.

In this second paper Hoffbauer, in addition to extending his observations
-on the scales of the two varieties of carp treated of in his first paper, includes
those of Carasshis carassiiis, L., Micropterus sabna'ides, and Perca lucioperca
in his observations with equally good results.

In January, 1902, I published a preliminary paper on the same subject as
my present contribution. t

From this paper I quote the following paragraphs : —

"The formation of these annual rings results from the fact that the lines of
growth on the scale surface are comparatively widely separated from one
another in that portion of the scale formed during the warmer season of the
year ; but much less widely separated in that part built up during the colder

* HofTlianei-, 1901. t Thomson, 1002.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 53

season. Thus by following the arrangement of the lines of growth on scales,
it is a simple matter to observe the starting-place of any year's growth by the
comparatively wide separation of the growth-lines at that portion of the scale,
and in this way the surfaces of scales appear mapped out V)y annual rings.
These annual rings supply us with an index as to the age of the fish, and may
be roughly compared to the rings in many trees. The annual rings in the
stems of trees are due to seasonal nutritive conditions, and the rings on the
scales of fishes are probably the result of seasonal environmental conditions,
such as food, temperature, etc. In more detail, the alternate occurrence of
comparatively rapid and slow areas of growth in scales is probably the result
of the variations in food, temperature, etc., which are associated with the
alternation of summer and winter. For example, the abundant supply of food
([)lankton, etc.) during the warmer season of the year probably has much con-
nection with the comparatively rapid growth of the scale at that time as
compared with the slow increase during the colder season, when there is a
decrease in the supply of food.

"These facts appear to possess both scientific and economic importance, since
they permit the extension to marine fishes of a new system of age-determina-
tion by means of these annual rings on scales, a system which has recently
been show'n and demonstrated by Dr. Hoffbauer for the carp.

"I hope to illustrate clearly the mode of formation of annual rings in Gadoid
scales by the aid of the figure on the accompanying plate.

"The figure [Plate II., Fig. 1, of the present paper] represents the scale of a
pollack, 28-5 centimetres (11| inches) in length, captured towards the end
of October. A minute translucent area (see Fig. 1, C) devoid of any lines is
situated towards the narrower and more internal end of the scale ; and around
this area, which is the first portion of the scale to be formed, are grouped
numerous excentric lines of growth similarly disposed to the excentric layers
in the starch grains of the potato.

"The excentric lines of growth on this scale, however, are arranged in such a
manner (see figure) as to map out its surface into two main regions, namely,
an internal area, which is the entire growth of the first year, and an
external part, the summer growth of the second year. One understands how
these two areas appear so distinctly if one follows the lines of growth out-
wards from the translucent area to the broader and more external part of the
scale. One may firstly observe that there are nineteen lines comparatively
widely separated from one another, wdiich indicate the growth of the first
summer, and secondly, ten lines less widely separated, indicating growth of
the first winter. External to these there follows an area showing much more
widely separated lines of growth, which indicate the scale growth of the
second summer.

"The difi'erence between the lines of growth formed during the second
summer and those of the preceding winter is so apparent as to clearly define
the termination of the first year's growth. The widely separated lines of the
second summer number nineteen, and as the pollack from which this scale was
taken was captured in October, it appears that in this scale the number of
lines formed during the second summer exactly agrees with the number
formed during the first summer."

54 THE TERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

I must conclude my review of the literature of scales, so far as it bears on
the subject of my investigations, with a notice of a preliminary paper by Dr.
Marett Tims.* This paper deals with later stages of scales than those of
Klaatsch and Ussow.

The scales observed by Marett Tims were from several species of Gadidse —
Gcuhis inrens, G. luscus, G. j^ollachius, G. callarias, etc. As this paper is very
brief, I content myself mainly by quoting several of his sentences.

"The formed scale is a compound structure consisting of a fibrous stratum,
upon the upper surface of which are situated numerous ' scalelets,' arranged in
lines radiating from a more or less homogeneous centrum. It is the presence
of these structures that gives the ' sculptured ' or ' ringed ' appearance to the
scales ; but these terms, though frequently applied, are misleading."

"The fibres (of the fibrous stratum) are arranged in definite layers: (1) a
superficial, in which the bundles are concentric ; (2) a deep layer, in which the
individual bundles interlace with one another at right angles, each set running
diagonally to the long axis of the scale. A third layer, the fibres of which
form an irregular network, is possibly present, but it is much more difficult to
demonstrate."

"The scalelets, placed upon the upper surface of the fibrous stratum, are
themselves covered with a delicate epidermis. . . . They consist of flattened,
imbricated, calcareous plates."

He infers from reactions with borax-carmine and acid that in the earlier
condition the scalelets " are more thoroughly calcified, or rather, perhaps, that
in the later stages they contain a larger amount of organic material, and thus
stain more readily."

" Between the radiating lines of scalelets the deeply stained fibrous stratum
is seen, resembling the spokes of a wheel.

" In an early stage, before the scalelets become imbricated, the fibres may
also be noticed as transverse bands passing between the individual plates of a
row.

" On examining a section of an undecalcified scale, the scalelets are seen to
be for the most part implanted in .sockets on the upper surface of the fibrous
stratum with a varying inclination. Those at the centrum appear to have
fused, forming a horizontal plate, while at the periphery of the scale they are
almost perpendicular. In a section through the skin of a green cod about
4 cm. long the individual scalelets are quite isolated. Each consists of a basal
plate, from the upper surface of which projects a minute spine, thus resembling
a small placoid scale.

" Such a condition is only evident in material from which acid has been
rigidly excluded. The condition does not appear to have been previously
noted ; the figures given by Klaatsch and others being similar to those which
I obtained from material which has been pas.sed through acid alcohol, and
wliich do not show the true nature of tlie scale."

If the forecasts of the results of this paper are true, they necessarily invali-
date many ideas previously held as to the nature of scales, and must also
introduce quite a new set of terms in their description. I prefer, however, to
keep cautiously to the older and more established views and terms until

* Marett Tims, 1902.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 55

Dr. Marett Tiins's facts may be affirmed by the publication of his detailed
paper, to which I look forward w^ith much interest.

[Since Mr. Thomson left for Soutli Africa, Mr. A. W. Brown, of St.
Andrews, has been good enough to send me a reprint of a note communicated
by him to the Royal Society of Edinburgh {Proceed. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh,
1902-3, p. 437), entitled "Some Observations on the Young Scales of the
Cod, Haddock, and Whiting before Shedding." This note is as follows : —

"During the winter of 1902-3, I conducted observations upon the scales
and their condition, in several of the gadoid fishes. Investigation was com-
menced in October, 1902; but it was not until the beginning of March 1903
that the first appearance of the young scale took place. In stained specimens,
it can be recognised as a deeply staining ' nucleus,' lying beneath the old
scale, just under its centre. Such an appearance was found in cod, haddock
and whiting of all ages from one to three or four years; and, in all, the
young scale is clearly recognisable, underlying the old. As soon as these
fishes have spawned, they appear to shed their scales, the epidermis first
peeling oif. An examination of a few large haddocks, eight pounds weight
and over twenty-seven inches in length, showed that in January the ovary
was black, shrunken, and not in spawning condition. I am inclined to think
that these fish are past the age for spawning. I examined very carefully
this class of haddock right on till April. In every case I found that the
scales showed evidences of hard wear, and in some cases were frayed. In
these fishes no traces of the replacing scales were found, and the probable
conclusion is that no further shedding of the scales takes place after the close
of the reproductive period.

" It has been suggested that the annual rings of growth may be traced
upon the gadoid scales; but 1 find that upon the cud, haddock, whiting,
green cod, and pollack, of one to three years of age, scales may be obtained
from difi'ercnt parts of the body showing ninety, sixty, or thirty rings,
according to the part selected.

" I have been enabled to trace back the first appearance of the new scale
to the month of February, when it may be recognised as a dark tip growing
upon a small papilla.

" By the middle of April, the epidermis on the head commences to peel off,
and, probably somewdiat later, over the body. The details of this process
will have to be followed in sections ; but sufficient evidence is to hand to
make it probable (1) that gadoid fishes shed their scales immediately after
spawning; (2) that after the age limit of spawning is reached no further
shedding of scales takes place ; (3) that the concentric rings of the scales do
not represent annual increments, but must have other causes."

Mr. Thomson had heard verbally of this communication, but had not seen
the note. He states that the presence of minute scales amongst the larger
ones in the trout was described and figured by Klaatsch in 1891, and their
presence in Gadidae has been known to him for two years. He refers to
these small scales in another part of this paper (p. 57), and does not attach
to them the same significance as that given them by Mr. A. "W. Brown.
— E. J. A.]

56 the periodic growth of scales in gadid.e

111. Statistical Section.

This section of my paper is chiefly concerned with measurements of
the surface size, enumeration of the lines of growth and annual rings for
scales of the following : pollack, poor-cod, whiting, haddock, and cod.

The area of the body from which scales were generally selected for
examination was the median region of the flanks, that is to say, slightly
posterior to the pectoral fin, and either slightly above or below the
lateral line.

In the majority of cases I have given data in the tables for half
a dozen scales from the same fish, three of which were taken from the
right side, and the other three from the left side of the body.

Scales from any part of the body show annual rings, though scattered
among the normally developed scales are some minute scales mentioned
by Klaatsch, to which I will later refer. Of the five species mentioned
above, that which shows annual rings in the scales least satisfactorily is
the whiting ; so much is this the case that at times their determination
becomes a matter of real difficulty, and it is only after a comparison of
the lines of growth in scales from a number of specimens that one
attains any degree of certainty in the matter. The other species
mentioned show annual rings remarkably clearly, much more so, indeed,
than is brought out in the photomicrographs. The coal-fish {Gadus
viretis) and the Norwegian whiting-pollack (Gadus Msmarkii) also show
annual rings very distinctly (see plates), and I only regret that want of
time prevents my giving statistics for these two species. In regard to
the cod, Gadus callarias, L., from photomicrographs which I have taken,
it appears that the system would also be applicable to this species ; but
not having a complete series of this fish, I have only given a few figures^
and more exclusively confined my attention to Gadidre of the English
Channel.

In passing, I may say that I approached the subject of the age of
fishes with an unbiassed mind, as I had little previous knowledge as
to the ideas of either practical or scientific men on this subject, and it
was only after I had compiled my own statistics on age-determination
that I compared my results with those arrived at by other workers by
different methods (see Cunningham, Fulton, etc.).

The determination of the years of large and aged fish from their
scales is a much harder task than in the case of younger fish, as the
scales of the former have, firstly, become much thicker and less trans-
parent, and secondly, the scales of such are frequently more or less
disintegrated. As an illustration of this one may notice the photo-
micrograph of a scale of a pollack 31 inches in length, which appears
to possess 8 annual rings (see Plate IV.).

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 57

That ill the life of fish, as in trees, there will be good years and bad
years is more than probable, and as this variation in metabolism
expresses itself in the stems of trees, one might, reasoning from analogy,
expect a similar change in the scales of fishes. That such an effect does
take place appears probable from my figures and photomicrographs.

In regard to locality of capture, as my work was mainly done at
Plymouth, most of the fish examined were from the western portion of
the English Channel, chiefly from the bays of Devon and Cornwall.
Few of the fish examined were captured by the ocean-going trawlers,
as in fish caught hj this method the scales were, as a rule, completely
rubbed off by the time the fish came to hand.

If, as in the case of a few whiting, etc., the fish examined were
captured at other localities, I have stated that such is the case in the
column of notes.

The haddocks examined were caught in the North Sea, off the Firth
of Forth, in Aberdeen Bay, and off the Shetlands.

The cod, only a very few statistics about which I am able to give,
were brought in at St. Andrews.

A friendly critic has suggested that annual rings would either not be
found, or would not be clearly marked, in scales from fish of deep water,
on account of the fact that in this case fish are not exposed to the same
seasonal variation in temperature as in shallow water; in other words, is
it not probable that the growth of fish living in deep water will be less
accelerated in the summer and less arrested in the winter than in forms
living in shallow water. In order to determine if such was the case, I
compared scales from a series of haddock (10-15 inches in length)
captured in comparatively shallow water (8-14 fathoms) at Aberdeen
Bay with another series (10-16 inches) caught in deep water (60-80
fathoms) seven miles off the Shetlands. The result of my observa-
tions was that annual rings were as clearly marked in the scales of
haddocks from deep water off the Shetlands as in those from shallow
water of Aberdeen Bay, excepting that in the older stages of the former
the rings appeared very slightly less clearly defined.

The weights of fish in the statistical tables must be slightly allowed for
as not being exactly accurate, as in most cases the fish were weighed
after having been for some time in spirit or formalin.

THE OCCURRENCE OF MINUTE SCALES.

In my observations on the skin of Gadidse I noticed the presence of
minute scales situated near the larger and better developed. These
minute scales I found chiefly in the younger stages of the fish. In older
stages of the animal tliey appeared to be almost entirely covered over
by the larger ones, and to lie in such positions that their growth would

58 THE PEKIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.I;

apparently be mucli liindered by the latter. The small scales do not
appear to be arranged on the skin in the regular manner characteristic
of the larger scales, and they do not possess many lines of growth.
According to my opinion, these minute scales never grow to any size,
and can always be distinguished from the better-developed and more
regularly arranged scales. In the early stages I believe that the
diminutive scales lie freely and are not covered over by the larger
scales ; but as these larger scales grow, they cover over the smaller
scales and hinder their growth, consequently the latter either remain
small or disappear altogether. That these minute scales grow and later
take their place alongside of the larger scales I do not believe. We
have also to remember in this connection that the exact number of
scales in a row on the fish has been regarded as sutliciently constant for
use in the determination of species.

Klaatsch has referred to these small scales in two connections, firstly,
in the development of the trout, and secondly, in a comparison of the
teleostean with the placoid scale. He also gives a figure of these small
scales in a young trout. In his section dealing with the development
of trout scales he says that at the same place in a fish one finds scales
which are by no means similarly advanced in development. Between
such large scales as already partly cover one another, small scales are
very frequently found which are in the earliest stages of development.
In older animals such an irregularity does not occur.

In his section dealing with a comparison of the teleostean and
placoid scales, he says that the arrangement of the rhomboid scales on
the skin of the trout is similar to the arrangement of the rhombic basal
plates of the dogfish ; both of them are arranged in oblique rows.
There is a further point of similarity. As in Elasmobranchs, new scales
originate in the trout between the well-developed scales ; thus one finds
lying between the older scales of the trout even in later stages quite
young scale foundations. This irregularity in the early development
soon ceases in the trout.

The Pollack (Gadus pollachius).

The following tables give detailed measurements of the surface size,
number of lines of growth, and annual rings for scales of pollack, which
varied from about If inches to 33 inches in length. According to
Cunningliam, on the coast of Cornwall the spawning of the pollack
commences in February or ]\Iarch, and the young of the year are found
in April. In that month they are from y^^ to 1 inch in length, and he
estimates their age at approximately six weeks.

In 1901 I found fish of the latter size, at the beginning of May,
possessed of extremely minute scales without any lines of growth.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 59

Pollack lf-2f inches in length, caught on 8th July, would thus be
about three months old, and these show, on an average, 3-4 lines of
growth, thus giving a formation of 3-4 lines in two months.

Cunningham further says, " In October I have taken a number in
Cawsand Bay, 3|-4f inches long, and I have no doubt these were
hatched in the preceding spring."

I have examined Cunningham's actual specimens, and the scales of
these give on an average 15 lines of growth, and tlieir structure bears
out his statement, and gives a formation of approximately 2-3 lines
of growth per month.

Two months later, in December, there are an average 18 lines of
growth, giving an addition of 1-2 lines of growth per month. One
would naturally expect to find fewer lines of growth during these winter
months. In another sentence Cunningham says, " The pollack caught
in Plymouth Sound in June and July are 12-15 inches long, and are
probably in their third year."

This is also brought out in my table. It will be seen there that a fish
15 inches long captured in the middle of June has 2 annual rings and
7 young lines of growth occurring on its scales.

If growth for the third year started in the middle of April, this again
would give a formation of about 3 lines per month.

In the following detailed tables dealing with the pollack, I have given
a comparison of scales from four different regions of the body in two
cases, firstly, that of a young fish (3-79 inches), and secondly, that of
an older fish (1519 inches). The four regions of the body from which
scales were examined in these two cases were the following : —

(1) The anterior region, laterally, slightly posterior to the eye.

(2) The median region of the flanks, that part of the body which

has the greatest depth vertically beneath the first dorsal fin
and posterior to the pectoral fin. This has been the usual area
from which I have examined scales throughout my investiga-
tions.

(3) Ptegion vertically beneath the posterior part of the second dorsal

fin, adjoining the lateral line.

(4) Ptegion vertically beneath the third dorsal fin, adjoining the

lateral line.

In a comparison of scales from these four regions the following facts
may be noticed : —

(1) That commencing with the anterior area and proceeding back-

wards to the posterior area, the number of lines of growth
increases in both the young and older fish.

(2) That proceeding in the same direction, the length of tlie scale

increases in a similar manner.

60 THE TERIODIC GEOWTII OF SCALES IN GADID^E

(3) That the length of the axis AB^ or AB" (axis from centre of

growth to posterior end of scale) increases in a correspond-
ing way.

(4) That in young fisli the broadest scales are those taken from the

median region of tlie lianks (second region) ; but in the case of
the older fish the broadest scales are those from the third
region, namely, vertically beneath the second dorsal fin.

I have selected that region vertically beneath the first dorsal fin as
the area from which I usually take scales for examination for several
reasons : firstly, that it is the area from which previous workers have
taken scales ; secondly, that this is, according to Klaatsch, Ussow, etc.,
the region in which scales first develop ; thirdly, that in the case of
fish in which the scales have been rubbed off by mechanical friction,
this area appears to retain them longer than others. This may be
because it is partly protected by the pectoral fin.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

61

Bdfh

R)sr

Fig. 1. Diagram of a pollack's scale with three annual rings to show the mode of
measurement adopted in the statistical tables.

Ant = anterior end of scale ; Post = posterior end of scale ; MB" — length of scale ;
MB'>"> = maximum breadth of scale ; AB" = long axis from centrum to posterior end of
scale ; LB' = total length of 1st year's growth ; AB' = long axis from centrum to posterior
end of Ring I ; B^ B^ = long axis from end of Ring I to end of Ring II in posterior direc-
tion ; B-B" = long axis from end of Ring II to end of Ring III in posterior direction.

Enumeration of the lines of growth is taken throughout from the centrum in the
posterior direction ; they are more numerous towards the latter than towards the anterior
end of the scale. In the tables the signs + and - are used in connection with the occur-
rence of annual rings ; for example, if no annual rings are as yet formed the term - 1 is
used ; if one annual ring is complete, and there are additional lines of growth present, the
sign 1 + is used.

62

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^E

CO

O

CO

o

<

t-1
O
P4

o

12;

o

H

I— (
1^
<l

X
o

KG
H

a?

W
P5

P3

<J

^

,a

CO

•

C£3

^.

'm

1

JS

^

^

vs

^

09

CO

«B

ca

«n

CO

V

0)

03

-u

s

S

Q

s

0 ~ „ > r, ^

0

S

i

g

>>

e

g

g

t:

'3

0

0

0

0

J

*

Cm

i:

0

•—J

'3

ca

C3

eS

GO

'^ .y «s », •« ^

0

M

««

*y

n

O)

B

■^

C«-t **

c

«

0

«

<

0
0

0

'a

-3

1

CO

'08
u

CO

K

'Eo +>

^

■^

•^

tf

^ . Jo _

I-4N

60

60

S

to

S

^ .< . ^ ^ :;

• ^H

• i-(

p

2

a>

s

•a
8

§

cS

^

a.

takei

.2

0

a

^

0 -s ^

so

^ 'a>

0

be

[C '0:

IS

:i " S)

(C

si

'm -i-s

cti

"3 -1-3

ee

to -u c3

0

^

;-i

"d

0

>

^ "^C "

3

^ '|o '

0

>

iS 'fo " 1

OT

<

^A Pi

<

h^l P^

<1-

t-:; Ph <5

V-^- .

0 IS a:

1— 1

I-H

I-H

I-H

. P tc

«S «s M

0 i= c

1 ' r :; ' ::

*>

1 ; " "

"

1 ^ »« rs

»%

1 " ' - •-

s-.S-

tD&O

tp

.„ f

c a

c.S

(-^^

c s

^

11

(M M CO t-l O'l rH

'^^

-M 0 0 '^'

iM

5 cj CO CO

CO

•^ -r -^ ■* -^

ci; Ci

ti;

I-H r-H

I-H

0

+ +

-t-

rH I-H

(N

09

fH

«M s

iJ

0 ~

<!

.a =

05 -t< 05 rH t^ 00

0

■«< rH s: CO

•N

0 rJH ?0 0

1^

CJ (N »^ l-H I-H

0

M.S

0 r-H 0 1-1 0 0

r-l

f-H I-H 0 1— '

I-H

I-H I-H I-H C^l

f-H

Oi Oi '^ Oi (M

Sea

J^

33 =

(N ^ CC t^ OI M

I-H

«0 CO 0 IM

CO

1* ?:! 00 I-H

-^

0 rH e^ (M f-(

.= « c

I— 1 »— 1 »— I 0 »— 1 1— 1

)-H

I-H I-H I-H I-H

I-H

I-H I-H ^H I-H

f-H

■^^ rN (N ^j lyi

s§ =

l-^-

^^

"33 3

10 CO 0 CO in x>

00

CO CO 00 c^

05

10 'M 00 00

«o

■<J< CO 0 ■* CO

E-i^ a

>^ :>1 C^ rH 1^ 1^

I-H

N ■>! rH ?1

T'

Ol C^l 7<1 (N

?'

CO CO CO CO CO

I-H

I-H

iH

I-H

0

0

0

0

Crf „;

OJ

o>

at

OJ

0 £

I-H

I-H

I-H

I-H

a> ?

rs ^ ^

1

•»•*#»•»

1

•N K » ^

1

„r - " " 1

■i^ te

00 " >. ^ r, »

1

GO •% ^ r>

1

00 - - -

1

CO - »> •- 1

c« fi.

Q ?;

>,

^

^

^

^^ 0

'a

S

'3

n

t-3

►^

•-5

l-TI

•2 ="'

CO

-?,=

00

10 ,

r^

.Ef E

-f . .. ^ ^ «

1

CO - J. -

1

0 ^ .. .

■* .. ^ r.

Cm

4) tC

<p -..«.>-

1

1

f-H

#s #% •* 1

II .

II .

II .

II .

«'

. c

•.s

. c

• a

s

^

S--

1

ig :: : :;

1

1^ = :: =

1

ii = — 1

l2

I-H

00 •

S-

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

63

ea

a

o

a

<a

o

,S-I

m

m

m

<o

a>

<u

<S

e3

e3

o

o

o

m

CO

Tjt

tH

•<H

bo

bO

bO

fl

fl

a

'O

-O

n3

<i>

<u

O)

o

o

Q)

<o

s

7-1

p.

&

P<

^

:-.

tH

q5

•73

^

o

TJ

a

o

Cj

cii

T3

a}

fcC

T3

•ffl

60

•i-t

m

bD

r/1

jj

cS

CO

-U

c3

M

+J

ca

ii

"tc ■

>

ii

'j3 :

>

"ib

>

>-A

s

•<

iJ

rt

<1

yA

«

<1

00

^J •i-H

eO

o

«»-l _,

a

° 2

c3

fi fU

to

o 1i

a

•bb-^

o

?> <D

^

-^^

g-5

<i>

cd

'C ^

2 u.

p

-fa

<r>

<]>

N

+3 >

03 O

-O

r^

Hn

C c3

bO

^ >>

n

-1
bc.S

0}

?

u

CTS

o

o e =3

i^

«2

<n f^ i3

c2

03

bO

03 >> 3

03

to

ej

EOT! ^

?3

0)

03 o 3

03

>

>

<1

H

-<1

CO CO -^ CO CO

ITS in rj< O O

>S u"? lO w^ O

lO «o -o m VC i~~ to

lO >~ IC >~ u~ ul O

00 CO 00 OJ 00

^ 50 M 05 CO
(M <M iM i-c !N

CO •M !N CO CO
C^J iM (M !M C^

00 ■* t-H OO i-i to
■* ■<}< ■>!< CO Tj< -^

CO

u!^ 1— I »— < I— 1 I— I I— t o

oi >n m m lA o o
^

00 O 1-1 o

i-H ■M !M n

o

-T <•-£> 1— I m

(M M -N M

c<i CO 'I' eo •^

(N ^ !M (N (N

to r- 1^ o ■^ ii'^ to

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO

u"5 i.i u~ m lt; u'^ lo
o t-~ t^ CO r->. o o>

■^ CO 00 n< CO -r> CO

•O o o o

05

05 CO ic in

<»

0> 00 01 00

f^

(N CO CO CO

(M

CO ':!' CO CO

CO

CO CO CO CO

00

o m 01 rt .-I in oi
CO to to to to to to

m OO K-5 00 05 >o o
CO I^ CO I^ to l^ ■«}'

I^ • l^ • • • l-^

o

en

o

C5

o

05

OS
00
00

o

GO

00

3

1-5

oo

>1

00

03

O

to

OS

CO

:; I

o
to

O

O)

C3 l;^

II

"- o

U1 to

in to

64

THE PEPJOPIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

"«
S

o

O

-<
vJ
►J
O
Ph

o
o

<

w
o

Eh
i-J
t3

W

•

U> -M

-i-5 ^

•s .

^g

2i "

^^

^.2

^ ^
^ ^

1.3

CO

1-2

o

> 5

o

p 5

o

CO

2^-

to <u

2 «

o

as

<

is corapa
[lengt

c8^
O J3

CO

1

to
00

to CS
S to

St-
S o

o ^

5 5

en to

US
-4-S
CO

o

>>

o

CO

OS

ts:

O

«

H

-1.1 Q

a CO

60

o

owing 24 mea
.ses ot compari
s of the body

5

SO

o
o
as

a

t2

to

^a

^r.2

'to 'O

fcD

3 tl

aj - ?*

X

50

CO

a G

-U M

03

eS

Tc

.»,j_i « ».

Ic •- " "^ " - "

3

>

o

?i

P^

i-:i

<

p^ ^4

<3

H

oc

<)

"

-*

°1a

i—<

T-H

1— t

i^i's

^

w

<- s

o.s

fc- ^^

« o

in -^

Tj< Tt^ ^ ^t*

•rn

CS'S'OOOO-^-^-^-T"

•^

00 t--. o; t-- 1~" t>>

t^

■r'C

f— 1 r-t

I— * I-H 1— 1 1— 1

T-i

i-H

— -^

^i

K

S>

m

pi]

*^ 2

iJ

° 5

I^

-s!

^ -

C5 f-H

.-1 05 CO (N

CO

omoooo^cooo

l~-

00 u-

Tl< ^ lO 00

OS

O
GQ

^<5

T* ■?*

■^ 00 'T -^

-#

yj.^-n'-^ip-^-^-n'

"?*

■?' "P

00 -N tN ^

T'

§S s

Oi -*

rH 00 in -^

o

OSOOOOO'MOVOO

o

OS 0-.

c^ OS ov i^

00

"■ ? —

00 eo

-:)( (M CO 00

00

COrtl-^OOTOO"^-^

-rf

o .—

C^l O 1-. -H

o

11=

f— 1

r^

735 =

1-1 !N

«o m ^ OS

f-H

?OCOI^-^<-H<MOOO

T—t

OS OS

(M c; t^ (30

o

o c -

«o «o !D »o «D m

f

CO CD «C> «0 I-^ l-~ l_^ 1^^

l--

■?* V

lt; CO ■* 00

■?*

^^.2

as

o

o

CO

OS

OS

oo

00

00

'52
^1

I-H

- - - ^

1

f-H

1

f— t

IM "

#.*.»*.

1

« ft

OS

o

-1-3

-S

O)

o

u

p

o

O

CO

-w w

1^

1.-5

to r;

CO *■

1

■^ „.,^».^-_

1

CO -

»(•.*.•.

E<^

4i to

«\ «\ •« n

Irt

!t

II

II

II

1

1

F-9

^' ov •■

1

1^

pj --'•■•''"

lO t^ '

«. *. r. r.

'

'." ^

<£>!.-

CO ■

• 00

.1

05

OS 00

OS

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 65

Q) >

•

■^s .

g=J

03 r^

S-^^

S

^t"^

o

-^ 3

•n

>» cS i:?

a

.— 1 .rH O

c^

O) -73 o

c3 a o)

o

,

- cts

03

s

C3 O

cd

>

o

usual a
le flank
josterior

S

<u

'3

Q.-^^ '-

Him

^1

60

a

S cj a>

8

O)

o S S

•^

^ tjD^

0)

rfi

S s- =S

PL,

0}

tC

<u ^

^

-i^ -. a>

O

©

cales
med
the

M

w

2
g

a

o

QQ

-<

Eh

CO ^ OJ

SO .2

NX , ,

O t« cS

^ -3

iC O

CO !~

!- . — I

S «J
S

bX) tn

> s

<1 fe

m

c8

(U

la

i

'^'

N

u

(U

O

•r3

M

0

1

HO

t»>

13

60

a

<d

60

!3

8

C-i

a

<»

^3

iS

O)

.2

(D

e3

a>

60

O

60

03

eS

U

S-,

03

<o

>

4:3

>

<l

H

<

■— Ir-li— li— 11— 1(— ( I— I r-Hi— li— li— lr-11— ( r-" r-(i— tIM'M'Mi— I t-H C<|IMi— ll^r?'— C^'

(MlOOJ^i— 10 1-- CO^t— 0000 05 Oil— lOOCOi— It-- C<5 0O5DOJe0?M'^ o>

00 m

'S«0»^t^5Dt^ t^ OOCXJOJl^OOOO 00 t^0S0VO0005 OJ oot>.i--oooot^

o o o 5?

OJ o> 03 00

CO CO C30 00

»~H f— ( ^H •"*

000

000

s —

s

<^ a>

M rv

»\ n «\

"

0 1^

r> «

' iO

■Pco

50

C5

05

NEW

SERIES.

—VOL.

a" a do

g.g

to ■ 00,

"Oi "^J-

10 1^"""" OCC

CO

OS 05

VII. NO, 1. . E

66

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.^

-«

CO

iJ
<J
o
cc

W
o
<)

iJ
O

Ph

o
o

H
<!

O

H
^A

CO

W
P^

P3
<1
iJ

<

.2-3

o -^
u
— «>

&-5 ^

a> 2

.2 »

c3

n3

P^

1^

»

a

N

o

V

to

a

o

S-i

&i
o

6D

>
<1

O

05
u
<n

o

r*M

bO

a

<U

o

0}

Oi

5C

a>

• fH

en

in
ID

o

u

a

ID
O
V

tlO

'n

<D
O

<U

^

.2

(D

bO

>■

<5

<«-< r5 .

- -

o 5 «

i—i

1— <

I— t

^§1

1 „ ~ „ „ ^

"

1 .,,«.- ^

»N

1 „ „ „ - -

M

^ 0;

<=>£

u ^^

S 2

00 03 1— 1 OS CO OS

o

CO !>. O 0> t^ rH

00

^ to CO t-~ 00 J^

t^

1-1 :^ !M rH i-H r-l

c^

i-l i-i (M f-H r-t jq

f— t

»-H I— t I—I r— I rH i-H

»-H

Is

X

©

OT

W

t^ s

o -

lO CO 1— 1 OO to CO

f— 4

00 to CO Tfi in .-H

lO

C<H~- rH Tl< ^ 00

OJ

o

in to to to O lO

to

■rti -rji in in ^ to

l«

Tjf •^ in lo ic -n

-T

C/J

1^ •

S *2 2

CO in oi o 00 (M

CO

o in CO (>i .-H o

(M

rH ao (N o CO in

00

■~ S ~

■^ CO -^ in CO Tf<

^ -

-J<

CO CO ■* »1< 'l' CO

CO

«5.S

--^ s

Iti

to 1^ O O OJ ^

to

CO O CO Oi l^ -^

^

o m ^ o CO lO

00

t^ t--. CO :m 1^ 00

00

1^ t^ t^ t^ to 00

t—

to to t^ i^ t-- to

to

^■2.=

?-4

rt a,

Q <S

05
CO
OO

o>
00
00

OO

00

a>
Q

o

o

II «•

s.s

"os
in o5

s.s

O o

(M •

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

67

m

va

m

o

m

^

^

<o

cn

OQ

SH

«

ea

o

cd

fl3

CQ

CO

•§

03

09

(A

a

0

'3

1

0

13

HS

>^?«

H«

p««

S'

60

tc

bo

.3

■a

.S

a

(3

•Pi

0}

(D

04

&

1

p.

^

^

^

t^

,

h

b

ai

0

a>

0

0

<u

x>

TS

TJ

c;

TJ

a>

TS

1-^

03

0)

T3

CO

0

to

60

'O

<n

6D

M

-4->

d

0}

•tJ

ce

OT

■u

«3

cS

^ " "I" - ' ^

ii " --si) " " §

aj .in >

^ " "3' ^ t

hJ

M

<5

y^

Pi

<

(J

l-H

<5

J

«

<

1 '

\ M n •

: : =

1—1
1 ■

::;.-:

; : :

1 '

: = :; ;

; : -

l-H
1 •

: : ' :

S M *t

irt 5D «5 •-© «0 I^ to

^ X> W t--. to u'.

t^ t^ --D -^ "^D "-D CO

«o »ft ■* 10 o o »o

iTi M O 00 00 t^ l-H

50 «0 XI u-3 10 O «0

50 m ^ 05 -r t— x>
iri 10 O ^ lO O u^

to
eo r— I CO 00 o urs to
to to ir^ irj o m >o

I— I ^H i^ — r^ r>. 00

to to 10 10 10 O >r5

lO 00 to (M r-H 0>
^^ tJ* ^^ '^ li^ '^

(M Tt< r-H Tl< O O

-p ■^ >n ^p -r -^

00 O IM Oi -^ 00
^^ lO '^ ^^ ^^ '^

O Oi •^ 00 >0 C<l 'I'

O '^ CO ^ ^ ^ ^

Tji CO m »« t--. oj

0> 00 01 00 00 CO

o

t^ l-H O (M ift 'M l-H

t--. 00 05 00 J--. CO 00

© rH O CO t^ IM
Oi Oi CO 00 t--. CO

00

00 1-1 O 00 00 05 M<

CO 05 00 t^ 00 t^ 00

o

00

o
at
00

o

00

o

00

<M

a

o

4-a
O

O

o

OS

o

CO

00

o

GO

"CO

»o o

S .5

CO •

e.s

E.9

10 •

68

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.^

s

I

o

OC!

o
•<
ij

o

o
o

1— I
H

w

&^
o

CO

H
(J
t^

CQ
<

oo

CO

<u

a;

"cS

cd

o

o

CO

O)

GO

PS

a

S3

<!

O

O

a

■73

■?

B

-*M

4m

rt

R

a>
a

£

to
o

• 2

ide.
side,

a

s ^ ^

so

S ■- S)

m -*J

p3

03 -U c«

r. ., r-* •* »»

S
>

hJ P5

<1

i-:i P^ <^

^ r:; .

° § K,

f-H

I— 1

. ::i tc

o S c

1 "-;;:;::

.^

1 " ^ " ' " "

^S'S

w

^ 2

o.S

t-i ■"•

II

to fo in \a ^ (o

CD

T}< IC U- to >« U"5 lO

I—l 1— 1 I— 1 ?— < I— t r— i

I— 1

r-i ^^ 1—1 i—f ^ rH I — 1

s -t^

3 -

>^

0)

M

»

Cm ;£

iJ

O g

<

iC t^ I— 1 t^ CO 00

50

i-H (M 00 ?0 in 1— 1 O

O

ip O lO ip ip o

ip

ip lo >o in lo ^ in

M

J^

r-

^ +3 rH

to

.5|a

CO CO O VO OS o

o

t~- m 05 1^ 00 "* to

Tt< ^ n< "^ ■* m

■?*

CO -^ y ^ -^ tp Tj<

X OJ

S t! C

S^-

^^ S

in

-M tog

■«i< CO oo -"ji oi >«

•*

03 00 in o m 00 (M

OD 00 t^ OO 03 OO

00

w !;» 00 00 CO 00 oo

^".S

o

o

o>

Oi

,. ■

00

00

o£

?-H

I-H

(C 3

1

« ^ « „ . .. 1

■S^

cf " " - ' "

1

(M - - - ~ 1

og

-1-3

6

o

o

OS

1-H

■e "

M

in

a> ^ ^ ^ .. .

1

^ 1

CO r. ^ .. c ..

fa

<u to

1

^ .s » n n 1

^.s

to

00

11

II

^

a .3

a.s

g

"=o =;:;-:

1

"»«:;: = = ::

jft ^j " -^ - - "

o c^ •"""'"- '

h-i

t^ •

oo •

b^

b-^

»— t

1-1

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

69

,«

la

CC -JJ

eci

c;= e3

S to

ea

=3 ti

CO

m S

a

*-<

S2

P

p '^

C!

^ c«

:=3

ci

"S .2

09

to OJ

O

<B 2

r-H

"— • QJ

c3 >

u P

CQ

tn ^

Pi

CS

ss

o .2

o

"T3 -3

TJ

r*^

-♦M'tS

60

SC-

d

s c

-.-«

^ 2

'Cf

a>

<c «CJ

o

t>

«}

Qj o:

h

!- O)

Ph

""^ ri •

,

u

,

- o a

9i

o

a>

O IB o

03

3

<«

■T3

3

v^ .^

:S

'm

0)

03

m

.4J>

<^

•1-3

'm

c3»" g

t^

r^ r* r.

«• *k

da

"hO " '

a>

>

«> " "^

" '

H 8

^^

s

<)

«

p-3

<i

i-i

«D

to ":f U"! Ift U^

ift

o> t^ ^*- 00 oi cs

00

»— 1

»— t »— ( 1— ) T-H I— (

I— (

i-H i— t ?— 1

r-H

>-i

r-l

I-I

u-5

I-H

t^

t^ Ci CO r-c t^

■^

O !N W

CO

00

in

00

CO

CO '-0 -o CC o

CD

•

u-i iCi >i~

^

"JS

XI

»p

OO -^ Tji O CO (M

^

O lO CO I^

o

CO

CO

•^

^^ ■^ ^ "^ "^

■?*

•

CO

■^

>p

Ttl

CO

CO i^ Oi vn 00

CO

r-4 Irt t^ CO

rjH

t^

CO

05 O 00 Oi 00

at

OO t--. t>. 00 00 o»

op

I-I

o

e»

<3i

00

GO

00

>-l

1

T-t

n

::

;

1

(m"

4-»

d

O

<o

o

Q

in

•

o

CO

1

=^ :; :

"

*•

"

1

CT>

I-H

II J

II

ii

S

.s

1

o

|^' :: ;

*.

.

1

lO

CD ' '

**

"

i ■*

i_-~

■^

1— 1

r-H

70

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^E

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATION

FISH.

SCALES.

YEAR L

Length

Weight

Date of

Total
length

Maximum
breadth

Length
of AB"

No. of
lines in

No. of

Total
length

Length
of ABi

No. of

lines in

in cm.

in grms.

capture.

in mm.

in mm.

in mm.

ABn

rings.

in mm.

in mm.

ABl

28-5 =

Not ascer-

End of Oct. or

11 -22 ill.

tained.

begin, of Nov.

2-20

1-30

1-75

49

-2

1-30

•85

29

>>

>)

99

2-40

1-30

1-71

46

1-22

•89

26

)}

>)

99

2-53

1-40

1-70

48

1-30

•90

29

>>

9}

99

2-92

1-50

1-81

49

1-40

•93

29

>)

1)

99

2-68

1-30

1-72

49

1-27

•87

28

31

) )

99

2-74

1-35

1-76

48

1-25

•87

29

>>

)}

99

2-72

1-58

1-75

48

1-30

•90

28

>>

>»

99

2-51

1-26

1-78

49

1-33

•93

29

2-58

1-37

1-75

48

1-29

•89

28

35-5 =
13-97 ill.

530

July 4, 1901

3-28

1-40

2-32

57

2 +

•78

•52

24

j>

)>

J 9

2-40

1-25

1-63

53

-70

•46

20

>>

>)

91

3-17

1-58

2-05

60

-91

•59

24

9)

>>

99

3-07

1-67

1-90

59

-85

•54

23

>)

))

>9

2-99

1-43

1-81

60

•88

-56

23

>l

9)

19

3-30

1-72

2-25

63

•94

-67

24

)9

))

99

3-09

1-06

2-30

58

•82

•65

24

J>

>J

J9

3-13

1-66

2-00

55

•88

-57

20

3-05

1-47

2-03

58

-85

•57

23

38-6 =

15-19 in.

535

June 18,1901

2-37

-95

2-21

47

2 +

•7

•57

1-2

)>

yy

99

2-63

-74

2-34

48

•68

•55

15

))

))

99

2-42

•75

2-32

50

•72

•59

16

>>

II

99

2-17

-87

1-94

50

•66

•53

16

)>

i>

99

2-29

-65

2-07

46

•54

•41

16

)>

>>

9>

2-91

•87

2-74

49

-62

•49

14

—

2-47

•81

2-27

48

•65

-52

15

38-6 =

15-19 in.

535

June 18, 1901

3-58

1-53

2-22

65

2 +

•91

•68

25

>i

)»

99

3-23

1-45

2-21

59

-84

•61

23

) »

) J

9)

3-30

1-75

2-06

59

•90

•64

23

))

>i

99

3-90

1-50

2-51

63

•95

•66

25

it

))

99

3-50

1-69

2-29

61

•88

•65

24

J)

>)

99

4-02

1-73

2-52

62

1^00

•70

25

—

—

3-92

1-61

2-30

62

-91

•66

24

38-6 =

15-19 in.

535

Juncl8,1901

4-08

1-84

2-44

70

2 +

1-21

•83

28

>j

)>

! 9

3-96

2-00

2-14

64

1-19

-69

27

>)

19

99

3-89

2-00

2-38

68

1-15

-84

28

)>

>9

9)

4-03

1-83

2-38

71

1-12

•75

29

))

1 )

99

3-88

1-84

2-30

64

1-15

•80

29

))

)>

)9

4-09

2-40

2-45

71

1-20

•88

30

—

3-99

1-99

2-35

68

M7

•80

29

38-6 =

15-19in.

535

June 18,1901

3-85

1-87

2-37

69

2 +

1-22

•86

32

9 )

99

99

3-81

1-75

2-49

68

1-22

•90

29

>>

9>

} 1

4-33

1-95

2-64

72

1-33

•91

32

} J

9 9

99

4-09

r72

2-59

73

1-30

•97

31

))

J 9

99

4-30

1-93

2-39

69

1^16

•85

30

>)

99

91

4-46

1-75

2-97

74

1^49

1-12

34

—

—

—

4-14

1-83

2-57

71

1^29

•94

31

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

71

OF POLLACK SCALES -contimicd.

YEAR II.

YEAR III.

Length

No. of

Length

No. of

REMARKS.

of Bi B2

lines in

of B2Bn

excen-

in mm.

B1B2

iu mm.

triclines

•86

20

■8-2

20

•82

19

•88

20

•85

21

...

•89

19

...

•85

20

•85

20

...

•85

20

...

Average for preceding 8 scales, all fruiu same fisli.

roo

28

•80

5

Right side.

•95

28

•22

5

J )

1-16

30

•30

6

) }

ro8

30

•28

6

>9

1-07

31

•18

6

Left side.

1-28

33

•30

6

„

rso

29

•30

5

) )

1"20

29

•25

6

))

1-14

30

•34

6

Average for preceding 8 scales, all from same fish.

The following 24 measurements have been made for purposes

1-2

30

•17

5

V of comparison of scales from four different regions of

1-6

28

•22

5

the body in an older fish.

1-3
1-15

29

28

•25

•22

5
6

y Scale from left side of body, posterior to eye.

1-40

27

•25

6

1-17

28

•32

7

.

rso

28

•24

6

Average for preceding J-dozen scales.

1-12

32

•43

8

'

1-00

30

•33

6

no

31

•34

6

1 Scales from left side of body, median region of flanks.

1-40

31

•45

8

'' viz. proximity of pectoral tin.

1-38

31

•26

6

1-50

30

•32

7

1-25

31

•36

7

Average for preceding ^-dozen scales.

1-28

34

•33

8

'

1^14

30

•31

7

1-24

35

•30

5

Scales from left side of body laterally, vertically beneath

1-28

36

•35

6

r second dorsal fin.

r20

30

•30

5

1-17

33

•40

8

-

1-22

33

•33

7

Average for preceding ^-dozen scales.

r26

31

•25

6

\

1-27

34

•32

5

r37

34

•36

6

Scales from left side of body, vertically beneath third

r28

36

■34

6

j dorsal fin.

1-17

34

•37

5

1-51

34

•34

8

i

i-u

34

•33

6

Average for preceding ^-dozen scales. Numerous scales iu
this region were disintegrated.

72

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATION

FISH.

SCALES.

YEAR I.

Length

Weight

Date of

Total
length

Maximum
breadth

Length
ofAB"

No. of
lines in

No. of

Total
length

Length
of ABi

No. of
lines in

in cm.

HI grms.

capture.

in mm.

in mm.

in mm.

ABn.

rings.

in mm.

in mm.

ABi.

44-40 =

17i in.

7-21 -01

Apl. 30, 1901

3-76

2-06

2-35

69

3 +

•77

-54

19

4-43

2-25

2-61

73

)> 1

-80

-58

22

))

))

99

4-06

2-35

2-28

73

>» i

-81

•55

22

>>

)>

99

3-80

1-97

2-23

68

) J

•S3

•51

21

—

—

4-01

2-16

2-37

71

J J

•80

•55

21

60 =

23 •62 in.

1922-70

Apl. 30, 1901

4-99

2-75

3-18

90

4 +

•86

•65

20

>)

4-40

2-65

2-53

80

•89

•64

25

)i

) J

})

6-29

3-40

3 "26

93

M

1-21

•69

24

»>

))

1)

6-53

3-43

3-51

102

>)

1-50

•73

26

—

—

—

5-55

3-06

3-12

91

"

1-12

•68

24

FISH.

SCALES.

YEAR I.

YEAR n.

Length
in cm.

Weight
in grms.

Date of
capture.

Total
length
in mm.

Maximum

breadth
in mm.

Length
ofAB"
in mm.

No. of

lines in

ABm.

No. of
rings.

Total

length
in mm.

Length
of A Bi
in mm.

No. of

lines in

ABI.

Length
of Bi B2
in mm.

No. of
lines in
B1B2.

83-82=
33 in.

4184-70

June 13, 1901

8-49

4'.35

5-09?

119

8 +

1-21

•76

26 1 1-22

25

N.B. — All the scales of this fish whicli were examined were seen to be more or less
disintegrated. Tlie measurements above were taken from one of the least disintegrated
scales ; but on account of the fact tliat many of the excentric lines had disappeared in the
median plane (A B"), the measurements interrogated, and the excentric lines in connection

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

73

OF POLLACK SCALES— continued.

YEAR II.

YEAR III.

YEAR IV.

YEAR V.

Length
of Bi B2
in mm.

No. of
lines in
B1B2.

Length
of B2B3

in mm.

No. of
lines in
B2B3.

Length
of B3 B-«
in mm.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines.

Length
of B^ B5
in mm.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines in
B-1B5.

REMARKS.

1-23

30

•52

18

•06

2

1-28

30

•67

19

•08

2

1-09

30

•56

19

•08

2

1-06

27

•57

17

•09

3

1-17

29

•58

18

•08

2

Average for preceding 4 scales.

1-00

28

•66

17

•67

19

•20

6

Several scales were disintegrated.

•80

22

•45

12

•54

18

•10

3

•90

25

•82

20

•75

22

•10

2

•95

24

•85

23

•85

27

•13

2

■91

25

•70

18

•70

22

•13

3

Average for preceding 4 scales.

YEAR III.

YEAR IV.

i YEAR V. 1

1 !

YEAR VI.

YEAR VIL

YEAR VIII.

YEAR IX.

No. of
Length ex-
of B'-B3 centric
in mm. lines in

B2B3.

Length
of B^ B^

in nira.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines in
B3B-1.

Length
of B-i B5
in mm.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines in
B^BO.

1 No. of

Length ex-

ofB5B6 centric

in mm. lines in

B5B8.

Lenf;th
of BB B-r
iu mm.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines in
B3 B6.

Length
of B7 B«

in mm.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines in
B~ B».

Length

|0f B« B9

in mm.

No. of
cx-

centric
linns in
Bs B'».

•35?

12

•37?

12

•42?

11

•41? 9

1

•51?

11

•40?

10

"20?

3

tliercwitli, were taken in a more lateral direction. At the same time the scale as observed
laterally sliowed fairly eonclnsively eight annual rings phis a few excentric lines, evidently
the growth of the early summer of 1901.

74

THE PErxIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

The following table gives a summary of the more detailed tables
along with other results, with special reference to annual rings and
lines of growth. It may serve to bring out some interesting points.
The case of the fish with an asterisk, for example, 27'62 cm. in length,
deserves notice. This fish only shows the following lines of growth :
year I., 13 ; year II., 13 ; year III., 18.

We have evidently here to deal with a rapidly grown fish, and this
fact has expressed itself in the formation of the scale, in the small
number of lines of growth for the first and second year. The more
intensive the growth the smaller the number of the lines of growth.
To compare with this we might take the case of a slower growing
pollack, 44'40 cm. The scale of such a pollack shows the following
lines: year I., 21 ; year II., 29; year III., 18 ; year IV., 2. It is pro-
bable that in the first case the fish grew quickly in years I. and II., and
in year III. about the normal.

SUMMAKY OF EXAMI:N"ATI0N OF POLLACK SCALES,
With Special Reference to the Annual Rings and Lines of Growth.

Length of fish.

Weight in

Date of

No. of

cm.

inches.

gnns.

capture.

ann. rings.

2-5

nrly. 1 "0

40

May

-1

4-4

1-73

64

July

4-8

1-88

78

) >

5-4

2-12

1-08

9)

5-9

2-32

1-45

J)

6-1

2-40

1-67

)>

6-4

2-51

1-95

) )

7-0

2-75

2-35

) )

9-15

3-60

6-60

Dec.

9-15

3-60

not taken

9-25

3-64

6-22

Oct.

9-50

3-74

6-67

Dec.

9-65

3-79

5-45

Oct.

9-65

3-79

6-0

)}

9-85

3-87

9-25

Dec.

9-85

3-87

not taken

10-0

3-93

9-45

10-15

3-99

17-5

J)

10-15

3-99

not taken

10-20

4-01

8-20

10-25

4-03

8-92

Oct.

10-35

4-07

8-30

10-45

411

8-45

10-55

4-15

8-10

10-75

4-23

6-95

10-SO

4-25

8-33

11-0

4-33

9 -.35

) 5

11-75

4-62

12-20

Dec.

11-75

4-62

not taken

14-60

5-75

)>

Sept.

14-92

5-87

14-92

5-87

25

April

1 +

Average number of lines of growth

(excentric lines) in years.
1 23456789

0 - •

2 - ■

2 -
2-3 - ■

4 - ■

3 - -

5 - ■
5 - ■

16 - ■
not taken ■

15 - -
14 - -
14 - -

14 - ■
21 - ■

not taken ■

20 - ■

18 - -

not taken -

17 - -

16 - -
16 - ■
16 - ■

15 - -

16 - -
15 - -
15 - -

18 - -
not taken -

20 - -

20 - -

18 4 -

Notes.

About 6

Aveeks old.

,, 3 months old.

3

t„ 3

3

,, 3

3

,, 3

„ 6

„ 6

„ 8

„ 8

J,, 8

§„ 8

t See PI. I., Fig. 1.

See PI. I., Fig. 3. § See PI. I., Fig. 2.

8

6

fi

>»

fi

fi

)>

6

fi

1

()

8

>!

5
5

>)

)>

1

yi'-

6 wks. old

See PI.

I.

, Fig. 4.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

75

SUMMARY OF EXAMIXATION OF POLLACK SCALES— continne:!.

Length of fish,
cm. inches.

15-24
15-55
15-55
16-83
1(5-83
16-83
16-83
17-14
17-14
17-46
17-46
17-46
17-46
17-78
18-09
18-09
18-66
18-66
19-05
19-05
19-68
19-68
20-0
20-0
20-63
20-63
20-63
20-95
21-27
21-27
21-90
21-90
21-90
22-86
23-49
23-81
24-13
24-44
24-44
24-44
24-76
24-76
25-08
25-08
25-08
*27-62
28-5
28-57
28-57
29-84
30-6
31-11
31-11
31-11
31-11
31-11
31-75
31-75
31-75
31-75

Weight in
grnis.

6-0
6-125
6-125
6-625'
6-625;
6 -6251
6 -6-25 j
6-750
6-750
6-875
6-875
6-875
6-875
0

•125
•125
•37
•37
•5

not taken

/ "0

7^75

7^75
7-87
7-87
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-25
8^37
8^37
8-62
8-62
8-62
9-0
9-25
9-37
9-5
9-62
9-62
9-62
9-75
9-75
9^87
9-87
9-87
10-87
11-22
ir25
11-25

ir75

12^0

12^25

12^25

12-25

12-25

12-25

12-50

12-50

12-50

12-50

Date of
capture.

40
not taken

55
not taken

55
not taken

)>
65
75
80
not taken
I)
>»
>»

105
100
115
115
not taken

175
not taken

265
not taken

No. of
ann. rings.

April

Sept.
May
Sept.

May
Sept.

April

Sept.
April

Sept.

April

Sept.
April

May
April

)>

April
May
April

May
April

May
April

May

April

)>
Nov.
April
May
April

>»

)>

May
April

1 +

-1

1 +

-1

1

1 +
-1

1 +

M
-1

1 +
-1

1 +
-1
1 +

)>
>J
))
>»
)>
>>
>I
))

)>

3
_ 2

2 +

Average number of lines of growth

(excentric lines) in years.
1 2 34 5G7S0

Notes.

not taken- ------ About

19 - -
27 5 -

22 - -

20 - -

24 - -

20 - -
not taken -

23 - -

21 - -
23 - -

25 4 ■
not taken-

21 8 -

23 - -

25 3 ■

24 - ■

23 - ■

26 - •
not taken

24 - ■
29 4 ■
26 5 ■

25 5

26 3

not taken ■

29 - -

27 5 -
not taken -

25 6 -

24 8 -

28 6 -

25 7 ■
not taken

28 5 ■
not taken

25 8 -
23 4 -

26 8 -
not taken -
*13*13 18

28 20 -
not taken -

18 24 2
not taken -

2 + 61.

)i >

2 + 4 ,
2 + 8 ,

2 + 1
2

2 +

-2

25 24 -

!not taken-

See text, p. 74.

tt See PI. L, Fig. 5.

1 yr. 6 wks. old,
1 .) 6 ,,
5 months old.
1 yr. 6 wks. old.
5 months old.

>»
) >

1 yr. 6 wks. old.
5 months old.
5 ,,

5 ,.

1 yr. 6 wks. old.

1 ,, 6 ,,
1 ,. 6 ,,
5 months old.
1 yr. 6 wks. old.
5 months old.
5 ,,
5 ,,
1 yr. 6 wks. old.
5 months old.
1 yr. 6 wks. old.

)>

11

6

II

))

1 1

6

II

>)

1 1

6

II

>»

11

6

II

)>

11

6

11

))

11

6

15

I }

1 1

6

11

>>

11

6

II

>>

11

6

II

))

11

6

11

>>

>i

6

11

) 1

11

6

11

»>

1 1

6

1 1

)>

11

6

1 1

))

1 1

6

11

))

II

6

II

)>

1 1

6

1 1

))

11

6

II

tt„

11

6

II

II

II

6

11

I>

11

6

11

1)

»i

6

1 1

II

3

years

old.

II

lyr.

/ m

ths.old.

2

yrs. 6

wks. old

II

2

6

II

II

2

6

11

II

2

6

)>

»>

2

6

i>

1)

2

6

II

11

2

6

6

II

M

•-^

1 1

11

2

6

i>

II

2

6

i»

11

2

6

II

1 1

2

2

6

6

II

M

76

THE PEllIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

SUMMARY OF EXAMINATION OF POLLACK SCALES— coiitimied.

Lcngtli of fish,
cm. inclies.

32-06
32-06
32-38
32-38
32-38
32-38
32-75
33-02
33-02

33 02
33-02
33-02
33-02
33-02
33-02
33-65
33-65
33-65
33-65
33-97
34-29
3-1-29
34-29
34-61
34-61
34-92

34 -92
34 -92
34-92
34-92
34 92
34-92
35-5
35-56
35-56
35-87
35-87
35-87
35-87
36-83
36-83
37-46
38-6
38-73

*44-40
44-40
45-72
48-26
48-26
57-15
60-0
60-32
63-50

64-77
78-74

80-01
83-82
96-52

12-62

12-62

12-75

12-75

12-75

12-75

12-89

13-0

13-0

13-0

13-0

13-0

13-0

13-0

13-0

13-25

13-25

13-25

13-25

13-37

13-50

13-50

13-50

13-62

13-62

13-75

13-75

13-75

13-75

13-75

13-75

13-75

13-97

14-0

14-0

14-12

14-12

14-12

14-12

14-50

14-50

14-75

15-19

15-25

17-50

17-50

18-0

19-0

19-0

22-50

23-62

23-75

25-0

25-50
31-0

31-50

33-0

38-0

Weight in
crins.

Pate of
capture.

not taken

315

not taken

325

not taken

)>

1)

not taken

370
not taken

530
not taken

470

535

not taken

1922-70

not taken

1922 70
not taken

not taken

4184-70

not taken

April
May
April

Oct.
April

May-
April

No. of
aim. rings.

2 +

2 + 7 l.g.

>)

2+...,,
2 + 4 ,,

-3
2 + 4 l.g.

2 + 8 „
2 +

not taken -
22 19 5

July
April

May

April

June
April

iMay
April
May

>>

April

May

April
A\n. or
May
April
June
April

2 + 9 l.g.

2 +
2 + 4 l.g.

2 +

2 +
2 + 5 l.g.

2 +

Average number of lines of growth

(excentric lines) in years.
1 234567S9

3 +

4 +

5 +

6 + 7
10 l.g.

5 +
8 +

7 +

8 +
10 +

not taken ■

not taken •

22 21 5

not taken •

23 30 6
not taken -

26 "25 5 -

24 31 7 -

not taken - -

21 29 18 2

not taken - -

20 29 21 3 -

not taken- - -

24 25 18 22 3

not taken - - -

26 25 12 12 11 9 11 10
not taken- - - - - -

Notes.

A.bou

t 2yrs

6 wks. old.

j>

2

>)

6

,',

) »

2

>>

6

)»

2
9

>>

6
6

>>

))

))

2

»>

6

2

6 mths.

yj

2

It

6 wks. old.

>)

2
0

)>

6
6

11

M

)>

>»

2

))

6

11

>>

2

II

6

11

>>

2

1)

6

11

>)

2

II

6

11

>>

2

II

6

I)

)>

2

))

6

II

»)

2

II

6

11

)>

2

11

6

I)

l»

2

11

6

1 1

>)

2

)>

6

11

>)

2

1 1

6

1 1

}1

2

>>

6
6

1 1

)>

u

)I

2

>I

6

11

>>

2

II

6

11

) »

2

I)

6

II

))

2
2

1 1

6

1 1

))

11

)>

2
0

1)

6
6

1 1

) J

"

11

11

t )

2
•1

11

()
6

11

>>

'-'

1 1

II

I )

2

1 1

6

i>

)»

2

11

6

1 1

) >

2

11

6

11

))

2

11

6

11

)>

2

11

6

11

I)

2

1)

6

11

))

2

II

6

11

))

2

11

6

1 1

J>

2

1 1

6

II

>f

2

11

6

1 1

))

2

1 1

6

11

11

2

11

6

II

))

3

11

6

II

>)

3

II

6

1 1

)>

3

11

6

i>

)>

3

11

6

11

))

3

11

6

1 1

» »

4

u

6

11

>)

4
5

11

6
6

i»

) J

i>

J>

6

1>

6

1 1

>>

5

II

6

i>

>1

8

1 1

6

11

I >

7

11

6

11

))

8

1 1

3

mths.

»)

10

11

6 wks. old

See text, p. 74.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

77

The following two tables are summaries of the more detailed tables
and of other results, giving the ages of a number of fish in a more
convenient and concise form. The first of these tables may serve to
bring out exceptions or variation, namely, that in some cases pollack
of approximately the same size may be of a very different age.

The second of these tables is a more general one, and serves rather
to bring out the more general facts as to the size of pollack in relation

to age.

POLLACK.

No.

taken.

Length of tish
in cm.

Age of fish.

7

2-7

First summer.

21

9-11-75

,, winter.

2

14 •60-14-92

,, summer (late).

3

14-92-15

Second spring.

1

15-55

First summer (late).

1

16-83

Second spring.

4

16-83-17

First summer (late).

1

17-14

Second spring.

3

17-46

First summer (late).

3

17-18

Second spring.

1

18-09

First summer (late).

1

18-66

Second spring.

4

18 --19

First summer (late).

24

19-25

Second spring.

1

27-62

Fourth ,,

1

28-5

Second winter.

19

28 --32

Third spring.

1

32-75

,, winter.

25

33 --34

,, spring.

1

35-5

, , summer.

9

35 --37

„ spring.

1

38-6

,, summer.

1

38-73

,, spring.

2

44-40

Fourth „

1

45-72

)> )i

2

48-26

»> !)

1

57-15

Fifth „

1

60-0

) J )j

1

60-32

Sixth

1

63-50

Seventh ,,

1

64-77

Sixth ,,

1

78-74

Ninth ,,

1

80-01

Eighth „

1

83-82

Ninth sunmier.

1

96-52

Eleventh spring.

'8

THE PEEIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

POLLACK.
Summarised Table of Age,

Length of fish in cm.

Age of fish.

2-10

First summer

9-11-75

,, winter.

14-92-25

Second summer.

28-5

,, winter.

28-0-38-6

Tliird summer.

27-62-48-26

Fourtli ,,

.^.7-15-60-0 •

Fifth

60 ••'32-64 -77

Sixth ,,

63-50

Seventh ,,

80-01

Eighth „

78-74-83-82

Ninth ,,

96-52

Eleventh ,,

Note. — Summer is here taken as from April to October,
winter as from October to April.

The next table is a summary of averages from the more detailed
tables to show, in a general way, the increase in the length and breadth
of scales, at various ages of the fish. From these tables it would be an
easy matter to calculate the approximate area of scales, as many of the
pollack's scales are nearly elliptical in shape.

Summarised Table
Showing Average surface size of Scales in the Pollack at various ages.

No. of

fish.

Bangs of

length in

cm.

4-4-5-9

6-1-7-0

9-1.5-9-85

10-0-10-80

11-0-11-75

28-5
35 -5-38 -6
44-40
60-0

83-82

Range of

weight in

grms.

•64-1-45
1-67-2-35
6-60-9-25
6 -95-9 -45
9-35-12-20

not taken

530-535

721-01

1922-70

4184-70

Month
of

capture.

Average

length of

scale in

mm.

Average

length of

A.B.i and

A.B.n in

mm.

Average

breadth of

scales in

mm.

July

•25

•15

•15

)j

•35

•21

•23

Oct. -Dec.

•70

•48

•40

•816

•565

•441

)> >)

•883

•610
Length of

A.B.n

•44

Oct. or Nov.

2-58

1-75

1-37

June-July

3-49

2-17

1-54

April

4-01

2-37

2-16

9)

5-55

3-12

3-06

June

8-49

5-09

4-35

Average lines of growth
in years.

123456789

3________

4 ________

16 ------_-

17 ________

17 ________

28 20 -------

21 31 7 ----- -

21 29 18 2 - - - - -

24 25 18 22 3 - - - -

26 25 12 12 11 9 11 10 3

For purposes of comparison, I annex a short table of ages for
the pollack from Cunningham's paper on the " Eate of Growth of
some Sea Fishes " {Journal of Marine Biological Association, vol. ii., n.s.,
1891-2).

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

79

GADUS POLLACHIUS, THE POLLACK.

Table from Cunningham'' s "Rate of Growth of some Sea Fishes" {Journal of
Marine Biological Association, 1891-2).

Date of
collection.

No. of
specimens.

Length in
era.

April 3, 1890
Oct. 2, 1890
Dec. 4, 1889

10
4

2-2-4
9-7-ir2
9 -3-1 1-8

Length in
inches.

•8--95
3 -8-4 -4
3 -7-4 -7

Calculated age.

3 to 6 weeks.
7 months.
9 „

The Poor Cod (Gadus minutus).

Cunningham mentions the occurrence of over two hundred specimens
less than three inches long in Whitsand Bay in the middle of June,
and that they undoubtedly developed from ova shed the preceding
spring. He calculates the age of these at about three months.

Tabular Eesults of Exaiminatiox of Scales of Pook Cod, Gadus minvMs.

FISH.

SCALES.

Length.

Weight
in

Date of
capture.

Total
length

Maxi-
mum
breadth

Length
of ABl

No. of

ex-
centric

No. of
annual

NOTES.

grins.

j in mm.

in mm.

in mm.

lines.

rings.

3-3 cm. =

;

1-29 in.

•27

June 3, 1889

•23

•13

•12

0

-1

Locality of capture,
Whitsand Bay.

3-9 cm. =

1-53 in.

•48

June 3, 1889

•21

•15

•12

2

0

From Whitsand Bay.

))

99

19

•20

•15

•10

2

0

99

—

•21

•15

•11

2

0

Average.

4 -3 cm. =

From Whitsand Bay ;

1 -69 in.

•55

June 17, 1889

•31

•22

•18

2

0

also numerous minute
scales without any ex-

4 '4 cm. =

centric lines.

1-73 in.

■65

June 17, 1889

•50

•40

•28

6

0

From Whitsand Bay.

»)

99

99

•30

•27

•19

4

0

99

M

99

99

•47

•35

•25

5

0

II

—

•42

•34

•24

5

0

Average.

4*7 cm. =

1-85 in.

•73

June 3, 1889

•34

•26

•19

3

0

From Whitsand Bay.

»>

99

99

•34

•20

•36

3

0

9>

—

•34

•23

•28

3

0

Average.

47 cm. =

1-85 in.

•72

June 3, 1889

•29

•29

■16

3

0

1 Fish captured 3 miles
) from Rame Head.

i>

99

9i

•23

•26

■12

2

0

—

•26

•2S

•14

3

0

Average.

4-8 cm. =

1-88 in.

1^22

June 17, 1889

•58

■55

•33

7

0

\

>>

99
9>

99
99

•53
•55

■38
•55

•32

•35

6

7

0

0

> From Whitsand Bay.

91

99

9>

•62

•51

•31

7

0

)

•57

•50

•33

7

0

Average.

80 THE PEKIOPIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

RESULTS OF EXAMINATION OF SCALES OF POOR COD-contimied.

FISH.

Length.

4-8 cm. =
1-88 in.

5'0 cm. =
1-96 in.

5 '2 cm, =
2-04 in.

5 "5 cm. =
2-16 in.

5 6 cm. =

2-20 in.

5 '6 cm. =

2-20 in.

5 "7 cm. =
2-24 in.

5 "7 cm. =
2-24 in.

5 "8 cm. =

2'28 in.

5'8 cm. =
2-28 in.

5'8 cm. =
2-28 in.

Weight

in
grins.

•8

1-07

Date of
capture.

June 17, 1889

June 3, 1889

SCALES,

Total
length
in mm.

Maxi-
mum

Length

breadth V

of ABi

1-09 June 17, 1889

1-27 ' June 17, 1889

1-32

1-30

1-35

1-32

1-40

1-30

1-75

June 17, 1889

June 17, 1889

June 17, 1889

June 17, 1889

June 17, 1889

June 17, 1889

June 17, 1889

•32
•34

•33

•55
•45

•50

•22
•37

•38

•32

•32
•33

•33

•58
•63

•61

•67
•71

•69

•61

•47

•54

•77
•509

•640

•75

•59
•63

•61

•31
•38
•38
•39

•37

•39
•35

•37

•50
•49

•50

•21
•29
•25

•38

■25
•29

•27

•49
•50

•50

•68
•65

•67

■61

•48

•62

■508

■564

•65

•42
•45

•44

■23
29
■33
•32

•29

in mm.

•19
•21

•20

•33
•27

•30

•14
•19
•23

.28

•18
•21

•20

•30
•38

■34

•41
•38

•38
•37

•38

•35
•35

•35

•36

•30
•32

•31

•29
•22
■23
■24

•25

No. of

No. of

annual

ex-
centric
lines. ""^''•

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0

NOTES.

From "Wliitsand Bay.
Average.

From Wliitsand Bay.

>>
Average.

j Same lot of fish ; few
} scales remaining on
) fish.

Average,

1 Same lot of fish ; from
) Whitsand Bay.

Average,

From Whitsand Bay,
Average,

From AVliitsand Bay,
Average,

From Whitsand Bay,
Average.

From Whitsand Bay.

>>
Average.

From AVhitsand Bay,
fish labelled being 2-3
months old.

From Whitsand Bay.
Average.

.All from same fish ;
from Whitsand Bay,

Average.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

81

RESULTS OF EXAMINATION OF SCALES OF POOR COD— cmiti meed.

FISH.

SCALES.

Length.

Weight

in
grms.

Date of

capture.

Total
length
in mm.

Maxi-
mum
breadth
in mm.

Length
of ABi
in mm.

No. of

ex-
centric
lines.

No. of
annual
rings.

NOTES.

5 "9 cm. =

2-32 in. 1

1-55

Jime 17, 1889

•56

•38

•36

7

0

■45

•52

•27

7

0

.Same lot of fish ; from

)>

]}

) }

•65

•50

•35

7

0

Wliitsand Bay.

J >

) )

9 )

•51

•38

•30

7

0

/

•54

•45

•32

7

0

Average for preceding 4
scales, all from same

5 "9 cm. =

fish.

2-32 in.

1-65

Jmie 17, 1889

•68

•60

•36

9

0

From Whitsand' Bay.

9>

9 )

) 9

•67

•70

•37

9

0

J 9

•68

■65

•37

9

0

Average.

6-0 cm. =

2-36 in.

1-59

June 17, 1889

•66

•40

•38

7

0

From ^Yhitsand Bay.

)9

) 9

9)

•54

•43

•32

6

0

„

•60

•42

.35

7

0

Average.

6 0 cm. =:

2-36 in.

1-6".

June 17, 1889

•50

•39

•32

8

0

From Whitsand Bay.

9>

) )

9)

•55

•44

•29

6

0

J9

•53

•42

•31

7

0

Average.

6'1 cm. =

2-40 in.

1-77

June 17, 1889

•59

•53

•38

6

0

From Whitsand Bay.

))

9)

>)

•72

•51

•41

9

0

9)

•66

•52

•39

8

0

Average.

6-1 cm. =

2-40 in.

1-92

June 17, 1889

•73

•71

•43

9

0

From Wliitsand Bay.

X

} )

9 }

•65

•65

•36

8

0

)>

•69

•68

•40

9

0

Average.

6-3 cm. =

2-48 in.

2-3

June 17, 1889

•72

•72

•38

9

0

From Whitsand Bay.

)i

3)

) 9

•74

•79

•43

10

0

99

—

•73

•76

•81

10

0

Average,

6 "5 cm. =

2-55 in.

2-22

June 17, 1889

•81

•79

•65

9

0

From Whitsand Bay;

))

99

)9

•89

•78

•68

10

0

V measurements not

> J

9)

99

•98

115

•70

10

0

very accurate.

>>

9>

99

•92

•78

•70

8

0

—

•90

•88

•68

9

0

Average.

G-8cm.=

2-67 in.

2-57

June 17, 1889

•49

•35

•30

5

0

>»

99

99

•75

•59

•40

8

0

y Same lot of fish.

>>

99

99

•75

•69

•35

9

0

>>

99

99

•72

•71

•40

10

0

.

—

•68

•59

•36

8

0

Average.

10 cm. =

Late winter or

3-93 in.

8 +

eai'lysprinf^lOOl

1^50

1-25

•90

22

1

91

) )

9 9

1-70

1-55

•93

19

1+9 0.1.

f I

yj

9 9

1-67

1-20

•95

22

N.B.— The weight and

91

t J

9 9

1^50

1-17

•93

24

I date of capture are
in thiscasc uncertain.

>l

jy

9)

1^43

1^16

■85

26

>>

a

99

1-30

TOO

•75

23

91

19

9 9

1-36

100

•75

23

1^49

1-19

•86

23

1 + 1-2

Average for above 7
scales, all from same fish.

NEW SERIES. — VOL, VII, XO, 1.

82

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

RESULTS OF EXAMINATION OF

FISH.

SCALES.

Weight

Date of
capture.

Total

Maximum

Length

No. of

^ 0. or

Length.

in
grnis.

lent;th
in una.

breadth
in mm.

of A B»
in mm.

excentric
lines.

annual rings.

11-5 cm. =

4-51 in.

14-8

July 9, 1901

1-97

1-68

109

40

1 + lOc.l.

11 -70 cm. =

4-60 in.

15-75

July 9, 1901

1-99

1-80

1-00

42

1 + 9 0.1.

J)

J J

>>

1-90

1-68

1-09

33

1 + 6 0.1.

1-95

1-74

1-05

38

1 + 8C.1.

12-5 cm. =

4-92 in.

16'8

July 9, 1901

1-57

1-40

•94

36

1 + lOc.l.

) J

) i

} i

1-61

1-38

•85

30

1+80.1.

»>

>>

>>

1-56

1-17

1-12

27

1 + 8 c.l.

>)

))

>>

1-74

1-43

1-14

34

1 + 9 0.1.

1-62

1-35

1-01

32

1 + 9 c.l.

13 cm.=

5-11 in.

18-4

July 9, 1901

2-09

1-90

1^19

43

1 + 12 c.l.

J J

»>

))

2-22

1-88

1^35

38

1 + 10 C.L

—

2-16

1-89

V27

41

1 + 11 C.l.

13 cm. =

5-11 in.

19-5

July 9, 1901

2-18

1-85

1^23

43

1 + 11 c.l.

>»

>)

»>

2-31

1-91

1-18

42

1 + 11 C.L

>j

>>

>i

2-37

1-90

1^23

42

1 + 10 c.l.

3)

)>

>>

2-03

1-70

1-10

40

1 + 10 c.l.

—

2-22

1-84

1-19

42

1 + 11 c.l.

13-5 cm. =

5-31 in.

24-5

July 9, 1901

2-22

2-00

1-27

44

1 + 13 c.l.

f:

>>

>>

2-14

2-00

1-19

42

1 + 10 c.l.

)»

) )

>>

1-99

1-87

1-12

45

1 + 13 C.L

Ji

>)

) 1

2-21

2-00

1-20

45

1 + 13 C.L

2-14

1-97

1^20

44

1 + 12 C.L

14-3 cm. =

5*62 in.

24-9

July 9, 1901

1-57

1-30

•98

32

1 + 10

>>

>)

j>

2-02

1-72

1^22

38

1 + 10

>>

)>

i>

2 00

1-95

1^26

43

1 + 9

) J

I)

f)

2-34

2-00

1^32

47

1 + 11

—

1-98

1-74

1-20

40

1 + 10

FISH.

SCALES.

Weight

Date

Total

Maximum

Length

No. of

No. of
annual rings.

Length.

in

of capture.

length

lireadth

of A Bn

excentric

in nim.

in mm.

m mm.

linos.

18-8 cm. =

7-40 in.

53-15

not known

3-00

2-77

1-95

70

2 + C.L

M

i>

»

4-35

1-67

r73

51

2 + c.l.

—

—

3-68

2-22

1-84

61

2 + cL

19-5 cm. =

7-67 in.

55

not known

2-52

2-30

1^52

52

2 + o.L

n

I)

>>

2-45

1-90

1-53

57

2 + C.L

^^

'~^

2^49

210

1-53

55

2 + c.l.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

83

SCALES OF POOR COD— conti7iued.

YEAR I.

Total

length

year's

growth in

7nm.

1-35

1-64
1-54
1-59

r20
1-18
1^20
1-30
1-22

1-40
1^50
1^45

r50
1^55
1^64
1-40
1-52

1^42
1-40
r22
1-42
1-37

1-05
r43
1-41
1-70

r40

Length
of ABi
in mm.

•SO

•78
•89
•84

•72

■77

•87
•90
•8-3

1-00
•93

•90
•86
•92
•80

•87

•84
•85
•75
•85

•82

•70
•90
1-00
■98
•90

No. of

excentric

lines.

30

33

27
30

26
22
19
25
23

YEAR II.

Length
ofBlB2
in mm.

No. of

excentric

lines.

•29

•22
•20

•21

•22
•20
•25
•24
•23

31

i -34

28

•35

30

•35

32

•33

31

•32

31

•31

30

•30

31

■32

32

•43

32

•34

32

•37

32

•35

32

•37

22

•28

28

•32

34

•26

36

•34

30

•30

10

10

12
10
11

11

11
10
10

11

12
10
13
13
12

10
10
9
11
10

REMARKS.

Few scales on tliis fish, and those mostly
disintegrated.

Several scales disintegrated.

Average.

Average for preceding 4 scales, all from same

fish.

Average.

Average for preceding 4 scales, all from same
fish.

A minilipr of disintegrated scales.

Average for preceding 4 scales, all from same
fish.

Average for preceding 4 scales, all from same
fish.

YEAR I

YEAR n.

YEAR III.

Total
lengtli

year's
growth
in mm.

Length
of ABi
in mm.

No.
of ex-
centric
lines.

Length
of Bi B2
in mm.

No.
of ox-
centric
lines.

Length
of B2B3
in mm.

•27

No.
of ex-
centric
lines.

REMARKS.

1^48

•90

28

•78

29

13

Scale from position very slightly pos-
terior to pectoral fin.

1-50

•65

23

•82

20

•26

8

This scale very tlilferent from pieci'ding,

1-49

•78

26

•80

25

•27

11

Average. [and has been taken from

[nearer the lateral line.
The above statistics arc not of much

•85

•64

17

•56

19

•32

16

detailed value, as the date of capture

MO

•70

20

■r>2

22

•31

15

of these two fishes is not known.

•98

•67

10

•54

21

•32

16

Average.

84

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.-E

Summary of Examination of Scales of Poor Cod.

Length of fish.

Weight
in grnis.

Date of
capture.

No. of annual
rings.

No. of lines of
growth (axcen-
triclines)inyears

Approximate age.

cm.

in.

12 3

3-3

1-29

•27

June

-1

0 — —

3 months.

3-9

1-53

•48

)>

2 — —

j>

4-3

1-69

-55

}>

2 — —

j>

4-4

1-73

•65

»)

5 — —

j>

4-7

1-85

•73

>)

3 — —

))

4-7

1-85

•72

j>

3 — —

!)

4-8

1-88

1-22

))

7 — —

>>

4-8

1-88

•8

)i

6 — —

) »

5-0

1-96

1-07

i i

6 — —

>)

5-2

2-04

1-09

) )

8 — —

))

5-5

2-16

1-27

II

3 — —

)9

5-6

2-20

1-45

11

6 — —

n

5-6

2-20

1-32

>»

7 _ _

n

5-6

2-20

1-30

1 1

9 — —

1)

5-7

2-24

1-35

) I

7 — —

) t

5-7

2-24

1-32

u

7 — —

i i

5-8

2-28

1-40

1 1

7 — —

) 1

5-8

2-28

1-30

19

8 — —

i J)

5-8

2-28

1-75

)l

4 _ _

)»

5-9

2-32

1-55

9>

7 — -

> )

5-9

2-32

1-65

11

9 — —

f )

6-0

2-36

1-59

1 1

7 — —

j»

6 0

2-36

1-65

11

7 — —

j>

6-1

2-40

1-77

1 1

8 — —

J )

6-1

2-40

1-92

1)

9 — —

)}

6-3

2-48

2-3

J)

10 — —

» J

6-5

2-55

2-22

II

9 — —

11

6-8

2-67

2-57

1 i

8 — —

)9

10-0

3-93

8-0

late winter or
early sjiring.

l + l.'.'.2l.g.

23 — —

1 year 1 montli (?)

i

10-16

4-0

4-0

October

-1

not taken

7 months.

11-5

4-54

14-8

July

1 +

30 10 —

1 year 3-4 months.

11-70

4-60

15-75

) )

1 +

30 8 —

) ) ) *

12-38

4-87

not taken

February

-1

not taken

11 months.

12-50

4-92

16-8

July

1 +

23 9 —

1 year 3-4 months.

13-0

5-11

18-4

J 1

1 +

30 11 —

}) 19

13-0

5-11

19-5

11

1 +

31 11 —

it yf

13-0

5-11

not taken

February

-1

not taken

11 months.

13-33

5-25

»)

January

-2

11

1 year 10 months.

13-50

5-31

24-5

July

1 +

32 12 —

1 year 3-4 months

13-65

5-37

not taken

May

1 +

— — —

1 year 2 months.

14-3

5-62

24-9

July

1 +

30 10 —

1 year 3-4 months.

14-3

5-62

not taken

1 1

1 +

not taken

91 99

14-60

5-75

25-0

May

1 +

* )

1 year 2 months.

15-55

6-12

not taken

February

-1

} )

11 months.

15-87

6-25

26-0

Ajiril

2 +

))

2 years 1 month.

17-14

6-75

35-5

11

2 +

) t

11 )i

17-78

7-0

not taken

October

-3

9 )

2 years 7 moutlis.

18-09

7-12

63-0

May

2 +

; )

2 years 2 months.

18-8

7-40

53-15

not known

2 +

26 25 11

2 years 3-4 months.

19 05

7-50

not taken

f )

-3

not taken

Under 3 years.

19-36

7-62

48-5

April

3 +

) >

3 years 1 month.

19-45

7-66

not taken

not known

-3

) >

Under 3 years.

19 "5

7-67

55-0

II

3

19 21 16

About 3 years.

19-5

7-67

55-0

1 1

-3

not taken

Under 3 years.

19-68

7-75

not taken

1 1

-3

))

1) 11

20-32

8-0

51-5

April

2 +

J)

2 years 1 month.

22-22

8-75

1100

February

-2

1 year 11 mouths.

23-75

9-35

not taken

II

-3

— — —

2 years 11 months.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

85

Summarised Table
Showing Average surface size of Scales in the Poor Cod at various stages.

No.

of

fish.

Range

of length in

cm.

Range

of weight in

grms.

Month
of capture.

Average

length of

scale in

mm.

Average

length of

A Bl or A Bn

in mm.

Average

breadth of

scale in

mm.

Average lines

of growth in

years.

1 2 3

1

3-3

-27

June

•23

•12

■13

0 - -

7

3-9-4-8

-48--80

•35

•21

•30

4 - -

13

5-0-5-9

1-07-1-65

, 9

•56

-34

•50

7 - -

7

6-0-6-8

1-59-2-57

) 1

•68

•47

•61

8 - -

1

10-0

8

uncertain, late

winter or early

spring.

1^49

•86

ABn

1-19

23 - -

2

11-5-11-70

14-8-15-75

July

1-92

1-07

r7i

30 9 -

5

12-5-14-3

16-8-24-9

202

1-18

1-76

29 11 -

1

18-8

53-15

not known

3-68

1-84

2-22

26 25 11

1

19-5

55

j>

2-49

1-53

2-10

19 21 16

POOR COI>.—Sv.mmary of Age.

Length of fish
in cm.

Age of flsh.

3-10

First summer.

10-16-15-55

,, winter.

11-50-14-60

Second summer.

13-33-22-22

,, winter.

15-87-20-32

Third summer.

17-78-23-75

, , winter.

19-36-

Fourth summer.

Note. — The detailed table shows more clearly how
variable in size fishes of the same age may be.

GADUS MINUTUS, THE POOR COD.

Table from Cunninghams ^' Rate of Growth of some Sea Fishes" {Journal of
Marine Biological Association, 1891-2).

Date of
collection.

Number of
specimens.

Length in
cm.

Length in
inches.

Calculated age.

May 28, 1890
June 17, 1889
July 9, 1891
April 19, 1891
June 17, 1889

12
218
6
7
2
1

2-8-4-3

4-2-7-2

11 -5-16^2

14-3-19-0

13-7-15-0

20-0

1-1-1-7
1-6-2-9
4-5-6-4
5-6-7-5
5-4-5-8
7-8

8-12 weeks.
About 3 months.

1 year 3 ,,

2 years.

1 year 2 months.

2 „ 2 „

The Whiting (Gadus merlangusj.

According to Fulton, " the spawning season of the whiting extends
from the beginning of March to the end of June or beginning of July,
with its maximum about the end of April, and at the temperature of
the water at that time the eggs will take about ten or twelve days
to hatch."

"The bulk of the larval whitings may thus be regarded as beginning

86

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADIDiE

their independent pelagic life in the early part of May, at a length of
about 3"5 mm. (i inch)."

By the end of the summer they are, on an average, more than four
inches in length. " The growth of the young whiting is very rapid."

According to Cunningham, the whiting at Plymouth spawn in
February and March. In the middle of June they are about two
inches in length, and lie estimates their age at three or four months.
In the middle of July they are two to three and a half inches in length,
and he estimates their age at about four or five months.

Tabular Results of Examination of Scales of Whiting, Gadus merlangus.

FISH.

SCALES. ;

Length.

Weight
in gnns.

Date of
capture.

Length
in mm.

Maxi-
mum

breadth
in mm.

Length

of
ABl.

No. of
lines of
growth.

No. of ;
annual

ring.s.

NOTES.

5^4 cm. =

2 12 in.

1-12

June 17, 1889

•29
•33
•30
•40
•33

•23
•28
•20
•38
•29

•17
•22
•16
•24
•17

3
4
3
4
3

-1

Locality of cai)ture, Wlutsand

)>

T 1

)»

J >

1 Bay. These scales were

>)

) )

)>

)i

taken from a part slightly

>>

>>
>>

1)

! J

posterior to the usual area.

—

•33

•28

•19

3

Average.

7 '8 cm. =

3-07 in.

2-85

Oct. 25, 1892

•59

•37

•35

11

-1

\

»J

yy

J)

•60

•34

•32

11

) »

From Cunningham's Grimsby

J>

J)

} J

•62

•43

•39

11

1 )

1 collection, trawled off the

) )

>)

9)

•56

•32

•35

11

) }

[ Humber October 25, 1902.

>l

^}

»»

•50

•35

•30

10

))

99

>)

>>

•66

•32

•38

9

J )

-

•59

•36

•35

11

J J

Average for preceding ^-dozen
scales, all from same fish.

8-2 cm. =

3-22 in.

3^47

Oct. 25, 1892

•69

•52

•38

10

-1

From Cunningham's Grimsby
collection, s s. Valcrtia

>>

)9

>»

•62
•64
•52
•72

•49
•46
•24
•46

•30
•35
•28
•37

9

10

8

9

J )

9]

>>
>»

J)

>>

>>

\ trawled oti' Humber, Octo-
ber 25, 1892.

»>

>l

)>

■61

•37

•34

9

n

•63

•42

•34

9

)>

Average for preceding ^-dozen
scales, all from same fish.

8^4 cm. =

3-30 in.

3^44

Oct. 25, 1892

•56

•41

•30

9

-1

M
)>

>>

•55
•60

•43

•44

•33
•33

10
10

-Same locality as last.

>»

)>

) y

•60

•47

•33

11

) y

•

•58

•44

•32

10

) >

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

9^8 cm =

3-85 in.

3'97

Oct. 25, 1892

•53

•41

•37

9

-1

From Cunningham's Grimsby

>i

>»

j>

•56

•55

•39

10

IJ

- collection ; off the Humber,

j>

>)

>>

•70

•37

•40

9

) >

s.s. Valertia.

)i

>i

»»

•60

•49

•33

10

) >

—

—

•60

•46

•37

10

) )

Average.

11 cm. =

4-33 in.

9

Nov. 4-16,1901

•86

•60

•52

20

-1

From Teignmouth Bay.

f )

1)

j>

•70

•47

•42

16

) )

i>

)i

jj

1)

•76

•55

•49

18

)>

»)

>)

>)

>>

•84

•58

•52

20

>>

>)

—

—

—

•79

•55

•49

19

1

Average.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

87

TABULAR

RESULTS OF

EXAMINATION OF SCALES OF WHITING— coniinwetZ.

FISH.

SCALES.

Length.

Weight

Date of

Length

Maxi-
mum

Length
of

No. of
lines of

No. of
annual

NOTES.

in grms.

capture.

in mm.

breadth

ABi.

growth.

rings.

in mm.

11*5 cm. =
4-52 in.

9-09

Nov. 4-16,1901

-64

■39

•40

11

-1

From Teigumouth Bay.

9)

))

II

•74

•46

•46

15

>i

) J

) f

II

•66

•39

•41

16

u

) )

f 9

II

•75

•42

•42

16

l»

J )

) )

If

•74

•43

•47

17

,,

II

)1

)J

>)

•67

-39

-41

16

II

—

•70

•41

•43

15

Average for preceding ^-dozen
scales, all from same lisli.

1 1-90 cm. =
4*68 in.

10-15

Nov. 4-16, 1901

•80

•55

-51

17

-1

This fish had few scales, some

-67

•40

•41

15

disintegrated, others of very

9)

t >

)>

•73

•43

•41

17

.small size, and, indeed, gave

n

19

99

•71

•48

•43

16

some hints of pathological

) )

y t

1)

•70

•49

•42

17

conditions. Fis i from same

•67

•41

•38

15

locality.

■71

•46

•43

16

Average for preceding ^-dozen
scales, all from same fish.

12 -20 001.=

4 -SO in.

12-8

Nov. 4-16, 1901

-90

■69

-54

22

-1

From same locality.

J )

,)

) J

1-00

•70

•60

22

II

} )

))

yy

•98

-70

-56

24

II

yy

) )

yy

1-04

•67

-62

23

II

i y

))

y i

•71

•48

-42

17

II

) )

M

>5

•85

-58

■52

19

II

•91

•64

•54

21

Average for preceding i-dozen
scales, all from same tish.

rj-!Ocm.=

4-88 in.

15-40

Nov. 4-16,1901

•88

-60

-52

21

-1

From same locality.

y J

) )

y y

•81

-57

-50

19

II

) y

] f

9)

•81

•55

-50

20

II

yy

n

M

•87

•58

•53

20

II

y y

1 1

$)

•82

•59

•46

19

II

»J

) )

>J

•76

-55

•46

19

II

—

—

•82

•57

•49

20

Average for preceding ^-dozen
scales, all from same fish.

13 cm. =

5-11 in.

Fish
damaged

Sept. 28, 1901

1-10

•73

-67

21

-1

From Cattewater, Plymouth .

>i

i>

) >

•97

•62

•60

18

II

11

>i

11

II

1-00

-58

•60

' 20

II

II

>i

i>

II

•92

•58

•54

18

II

II

—

—

—

1-00

-63

-60

19

II

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

1365 cm. =

From Teignniouth. The distinction

5-37 in.

17-4

Nov. 4-16, 1901

•81

-55

-50

17

-1

between sununer growth and win-
ter growth is by no means clearly

II

»i

1 t

•76

-66

•48

17

II

delined in the Wliiting scales of

1-18

-64

•70

24

) 1

this date ; there arc indications of

"

"

i >

1-06

•76

-63

23

a much greater wintergrowth than

II

II

>>

II

in the case of Pollack and Poor Cod.

—

—

—

•95

•65

-58

20

II

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

14-00 cm. =

5-51 in.

18-75

Nov. 4-16,1901

1-12

-80

-63

24

-1

From Teignmouth Bay.

fi

II

))

1-18

-92

•68

25

!l

II

II

II

II

1-07

-79

•59

21

. II

>i

II

I)

II

1-09

1-00

•67

26

1)

II

—

—

—

ri2

-88

•64

24

II

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all iVom same fish.

88

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATION OF SCALES OF \\mTl^G-conH7iued.

FISH.

Length.

1-1 -65 cm.
5*76 in.

1)

Weight
in grins.

SCALES.

23-15

1475 cm.
5-80 in.

Date of
capture.

Sept. 28, 1901

14-85 cm.:
5-84 in.

26-90

lot ascer.
tauicil

Nov. 4-16,1901

155 cm. =
6-10 in.

29-25

15-75 cm.:
6-20 in.

15-75 cm.:
6-20 in.

16 00 cm.:
6-29 in.

16-25 cm.
6-39 in.

91

28-8
>»
>>

25-62
>>

29-0

Nov. 2, 1891

Length
in mm.

Maxi-

iiunn
breadth
in mm.

Sept. 28, 1901

Nov. 4-16,1901

1-27
1-20
1-10
1-20

1-19

•94

•93

1-30

1-18

1-09

1-37
1-35
1-35
1-32

1-35

1-28
1-32
1-22
1-36

1-30

1-07

1-10

-95

1-08

1-05

Nov. 4-16,1901

Nov. 4-16,1901

32-9 Nov. 4-16,1901

1-32
1-28
1-05
1-20

1-21

1-52
1-29
1-48
1-48

1-44

1-28
1-30
1-23
1-35

1-29

Length

of
ABi.

-90
-78
•75
•77

•80

•60
•55

•69

•77

•65

•79
-95
•99
-98

-93

•83
•90
•80
•90

•86

•68
-64

•59
-65

-64

'ID

-80
•65

•80

•75

1-00
■85
•97

1-03

-96

-00
-81
-80
•88

•85

No. of No. of
lines of annual
growth.' rings.

•80
•73
•70
•70

•73

•59
•95
•73
-70

-74

-85
-80
•86
■76

•82

-70
-72
-72
-67

-70

-67
•63
•67
-64

-65

-85
-85
-70
-70

•78

•81

•81
•70
■74
•82

•77

24
23
23
24

24

19
19
23
24

21

28
27
29
26

28

25
24
26
25

25

23
23

20
22

22

25
27
23
22

24

86

33

75

28

80

33

82

31

31

29
25
26
29

27

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

NOTES.

From Cattewater, Plymoutli.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

From Teignmoutli Bay.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

Average for preceding 4 scales.

From Cattewater, Plymouth.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

From Teignmoutli Bay.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

From same locality.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

From same locality.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same tish. In the la.st two
specimens the exact length offish
was difficult to determine, on ac-
count of broken nature of tail fin.

From same locality.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

89

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATION OF SCALES OF ^XRlTl^G-continucd.

FISH.

Length.

16 '5 cm. -
6-49 in.

17 cm. =
6 69 iu.

17 '25 cm.
6-79 in.

Weight

not ascer-
tained.

36-9

42-87

17"75cm. =

6-98 in.

notascer
tained.

>>

»>

1)

)j

>)

))

—

—

17"75cm.=

6-9S in.

41-6

!>

)>

] }

))

>»

>>

—

18-70 cm. =

7-36 in.

51-7

>>

J>

J)

) J

18-75 cm.:
7-38 in.

18-80 cm.:
7-40 in.

44-7

56-10

Date of
capture.

Nov. 2, 1891

Nov. 4-16,1901

Nov. 4-16, 1901

Nov. 2, 1891

Nov. 4-16,1901

Nov. 4-16,1901

Nov. 4-16, 1901

Nov. 4-16, 1901

SCALES.

Length
in iinn.

1-51
1-40
1-50
1-55

•49

1-35
1-18
1-20
1-35

1-27

1-50
1-49
1-32
1-46

1-44

1-55
1-72

1-80
1-47

1-64

1-15
1-25
1-26
1-44

1-28

1-56
1-57
1-36
1-59

1-52

1-34
1-22
1-21
1-40

1-29

1-60
1-53
1-55
1-74

1-61

Maxi-

iimiii

breadth

in mm.

Length No. of

of lines of

ABi. 'growth.

1-07

-94

1-05

1-02

1-02

-95
•80
•95
•95

•91

1-02
•85
•85

1-02

•94

ri9

•92

1-26
1-10

1-12

•69
•76

•78
1^07

•83

ro3

MO

ro2

1-10
1-06

-75

•80
•71
-92

-so

1-02

1-03

•87

M5

1-02

•90

•95

•91

1-00

•94

•66
•73
•70
•70

•70

•92

•89
■77
•82

•85

•98
1^02

•97
•84

•95

•72
•80
•80
•93

•81

•99
•98

•77
•90

-91

•88
•79
•85
•95

•87

•95
•90
•95

roo

•95

30
28
29
30

29

26
25
27
30

27

32
30
29
31

31

31
33
31
30

31

23

26
26
31

27

33
34

29
31

32

30
29
27
32

30

31
30
31
31

31

No. of
annual

rings.

-1
>>

)>

-1

91

))

-1

-1
»>

>>

))

-1
>)
J>
>»

-1

NOTES.

Average for preceding 4 scales.

1^ From same locality; a few
j small disintegrated scales.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

Fish from same locality ; some
of the scales showed a break in (be
continuity .somewhat resembling
in appearance an annual ring, but
these were the exception ; also a
few very small scales observed.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

Average for preceding 4 scales.

From same locality ; a fcwdis-
integrated scales observed.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

Fi'om same locality ; a few
disintegrated ? '
scales observed

disintegrated and small

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

From same locality.

Average for preceding 4 scales,
all from same fish.

I

From same locality; a very
few disintegrated and small
scales.

Average for prcce<ling 4 scales,
all from same fish.

90

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.I'-

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATION

FISH.

SCALES.

Weight

Length

Maximum

Length

No. of lines

Wo. of

Length.

in

Date of capture.

in mm.

bread til

of ABn

of growth

annual

grms.

in mm.

in mm.

in scale.

rings.

26 '2.5 cm.=

10-33 in.

134-30

May 11, 1901

2-76

1-98

1-42

47

1 +

9>

>>

>>

2-73

1-85

1-37

49

) )

1>

) »

)>

2-93

2-05

1-47

48

5)

>>

} )

>)

2-88

2-07

1-35

42

J?

—

—

2-83

1-99

1-40

47

) J

28-5 cm. =

11 -22 in.

175

July 16, 1901

3-24

1-46

1-44

40

1 +

9}

J)

>>

2-53

1-40

1-27

44

) 5

9 y

jf

] >

2-37

1-50

1-33

44

) )

>)

»»

)>

2-37

1-52

1-45

44

? )

—

—

2-63

1-47

1-37

43

5)

29 "5 cm. =

11-61 in.

175

July 16, 1901

2-50

1-45

1-32

41

1 +

J y

9)

> J

2-42

1-40

1-19

39

5)

J )

1 }

55

2-08

1-20

1-33

45

J)

9>

)»

) J

2-12

1 -25

1-28

40

) 5

—

—

2-28

1-33

1-28

41

51

29-65 cm. =

11-67 in.

205

Dec. 2, 1901

2-06

1-70

1-45

54

-2

) )

} 1

} )

1-55

1-37

1-24

51

) ?

jy

>>

>>

1-96

1-25

1-18

48

u

11

It

)>

2-03

1-32

1-21

46

)>

—

—

1-90

1-41

1-27

50

>I

30-15 cm. =

11-87 in.

185

Dec. 2, 1901

2-30

1-65

1-28

42

_2

31-5 cm.=

12-40 in.

215

Dec. 2, 1901

2-49

1-65

1-48

53

-2

>i

9>

))

2-73

1-70

1-55

51

>)

—

—

2-61

1-68

1-52

52

>)

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

01

OF SCALES OF V\' HlTimi—coHtiMced.

YEAR I.

YEAR n.

Total
Length
in mm.

Length
of ABi
in mm.

No. of
lines of
growth.

Length
ofBiB--^
in mm.

No. of

concentric

lines.

REMARKS.

2-00
2-03
2-18
2-14

108

1-05

1-12

■95

37
38
38
32

•34
•32
•35

•40

10
11
10
10

2-09

1-05

36

•35

10

Average for preceding 4 scales.

1-52
1-53
1-45

1-55

1-51

•97

•82
•91
•95

•91

27 +
30
31
29

29

•47
•45
•42
•50

•46

13
14
13
15

14

Average for preceding 4 scales. A number of
disintegrated scales.

1-50
1-50
1-35
1-34

•82
•74
•85
•75

27
25
31
25

•50
•45
•48

•48

14
14
14
15

1-42

•79

27

•48

14

Average for preceding 4 scales, all from same
fish.

1-18
1-20
1-18
1-22

•80
•77
•70
•75

30
30
29
26

•65

•47
•48

•46

24
21
19
20

1-20

•76

29

•52

21

Average.

1'80

•98

32

•30

10

Only scale obtained from this fish (from
trawlers).

1-85
1-34

1^05
•80

40
27

•43
•75

13
24

1-60

•93

34

•59

19

Only scales obtained from this fish.

92

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADIDiE

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATION

FISH.

SCALES.

Weight

Total

Maximum

Length of

No.

No. of

Length.

in

Date of capture.

length in

breadth

ABiiiu

of lines of

annual

grms.

mm.

in mm.

mm.

growth.

rings.

32-3 cm. =

12-71 in.

257

Oct. 8, 1901

2-13

1-65

1-50

55

-3

>>

1-73

1-80

1-55

58

9>

2-70

1-95

1-80

69

»

2-89

2-15

1-82

65

l>

2-74

2-00

1-76

72

>»

3-05

2-20

1-80

70

—

—

2-54

1-96

1-71

65

33-2 cm. =

13-07 in.

290

Oct. 8, 1901

2-52

1-59

1-46

57

-3

}>

» J

2-24

1-87

1-42

61

>>

J !

3-03

1-72

2-07

72

n

) )

2-40

1-60

1-56

55

>>

)»

2-51

1-90

1-72

59

>>

)J

2-55

1-76

1-51

58

—

2-54

1-74

1-62

60

33-5 cm. =

13-18 in.

245

Dec. 2, 1901

2-39

1-80

1-62

50

-2

>)

>)

)>

2-42

1-70

1-62

54

)>

—

—

—

2-91

1 -75

1-62

52

))

34 em. =

13-38 in.

340

Dec. 12, 1901

2-150

1-90

1-80

63

-3

)>

5 )

) )

2-38

1-85

1-70

59

55

>>

»)

>)

2-65

1-72

1-58

60

S J

>)

)>

))

2-08

1-45

1-41

57

) y

—

—

2-43

1-73

1-62

60

) J

34-2 cm. =

13-46 in.

290

Oct. 8, 1901

2-48

1-60

1-51

56

-3

})

2-80

2-50

1-55

58

1)

2-92

2-22

1-78

61

1 1

2-24

2-00

1-31

49

jy

2-76

2-01

1-53

60

>>

2-36

1-90

1-38

54

—

—

—

2-59

2-04

1-51

56

34-5 cm.=

13-58 in.

335

Jan. 10, 1902

2-39

2-10

2-40

72

-3

34-92 cm.

13-75 in. =

255

Dec. 2, 1901

2-96

2-15

1-79

70

-3

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

93

OF SCALES OF ^VHITI^G— continued.

YEAR I.

YEAR II.

YEAR III.

Total
length

Length
of ABi

No. of
lines of

Length
of B1B2

No. of
lines of

Length No. of
of B'-iBS lines of

REMARKS:

in mm.

iu mm.

growth.

in mm.

growth.

in inm.

growth.

1-20

•87

31

•20

10

•43

14

■\

1 -50
1 -55
1-70
1-G8

1-00

TOO

•98

I-IO

34
37
37

44

•15
•25
•25
•21

10

12
10
10

•40
•55
•59
•45

14
20
18
18

A few scales showed disintegration ;

V apparently a very small f^rowth in

2nd year, especially winter growth.

1-78

1-00

41

•25

10

•55

19

^ [same fish.

rri7

•99

37

•22

10

•50

17

Average for preceding 6 scales, all from

1-70

•90

35

•22

10

•34

12

1-65

1-07

43

•14

8

•21

10

2-00

1-36

46

•33

12

•38

14

1-63

1-00

33

•23

10

•33

12

1-58

r07

36

•26

10

•39

13

1-53

•85

33

•31

13

•35

12

1-68

ro4

38

•25

10-11

•33

12

Average for preceding ^-dozen scales,
all from same fish, Jan. 7, 1902.

1-GO

1-05

34

•57

16

1-55

TOO

34

•62

20

—

—

Many scales on this fish were in a dis-

1-58

1^03

34

•60

18

—

—

Average. [integrated condition.

1-70

1-15

40

•40

13

•25

10

1-30

•95

33

•45

17

•30

9

1-50

•95

34

•42

16

•21

10

1-27

•8-2

32

•42

17

•17

8

I -a

•97

35

•42

16

•23

9

Average.

•75

•85
•90

•43
•45
•50

16

18
18

'55
•60
•73

20
19
23

•53
•50
•55

20
21
20

Many disintegrated scales.
N.B.— Small growth of first year.

•6.5

■35

12

•46

18

•50

19

•85

•44

18

•57

21

•52

21

•66

•38

14

•50

18

•50

22

•78

•43

16

•57

20

•52

20-21

Average.

1-80

i-io

32

•65

20

•65

20

Few scales on this lish, as it came
from the trawlers.

1'55

•94

38

•45

18

•40

14

94

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID.E

TABULAR RESULTS OF EXAMINATIOX

FISH. 1

1

SCALES.

[ YEAR L

Length

Weight

Date

Of

Total

Maximnm

Length

No. of

No. of

Total

Length

No. of

in cm.

iti grins.

captu

re.

length

brtadth

of AB»

lines of

annual

length

of ABi

lines of

in mm.

in mm.

in mm.

growth.

rings.

ill mm.

in mm.

growth.

34-92 =

13-70 in.

320

Dec.

9

1901

2-76

1-95

1-68

59

-4?

•50

•28

8*

»j

)j

99

2-52

1-85

1-76

63

-4

-45

•26

7

—

—

—

,2-64

1-90

1-72

61

99

-48

•27

8

35-06 =

14 in.

395

Dec.

2,

1901

2-55

1-95

1-51

58

-3

1-35

•76

30

»i

9>

9>

2-56

2-00

1-67

59

99

1-30

•75

30

—

—

2-56

1-98

1-54

59

9)

1 -33

•76

30

3.5-56 =

14 in.

280

Dec.

2,

1901

2-40

1-68

1-42

53

-3

1-25

.65

20

>)

99

99

2-61

2-00

1-57

61

»)

1-75

•96

30

—

—

—

2-51

1-84

1-50

57

JJ

1-50

•81

25

36-195 =

14-25 in.

355

Dec.

2,

1901

2-38

2-10

1'47

60

-3

1-50

•87

36

>)

99

9)

2-32

1-85

1-52

61

9>

1-45

•92

34

—

—

2-35

1-98

1-50

61

99

1-48

•90

35

36-195 =

1425 in.

355

Dec.

2,

1901

1-80

1-30

1-42

43

-3

1-10

•95

24

36-83 =

14-50 in.

332

Dec.

2,

1901

2-76

1-80

1-58

49

-3

1-55

•83

26

40 005 =

15-75 in.

455

Dec.

2,

1901

2-86

1-90

1-86

72

-3

1-30

•80

31

yj

99

99

3-10

2-00

2-01

71

9 )

1-40

•85

31

19

99

99

2-55

1-98

1-68

68

9 )

1-25

•78

31

>»

99

99

2-66

2-37

1-74

66

9>

1-30

•84

32

—

—

—

2-79

2-06

1-82

69

19

1-31

■82

31

41-275 =

16-25 in.

500

Dec.

2,

1901

3-44

2-30

2-14

74

-3

1-66

•92

34

) y

99

] 9

3-10

2-40

2-51

75

9 )

1-50

•98

31

) )

} 9

) 9

3-55

2-36

2-35

75

99

1-50

■90

30

»i

9)

99

3-29

1-67

2-27

72

19

1-26

•97

29

—

—

3-35

218

2*32

74

99

1-48

•94

31

46-6 =

18-34 in.

700

Jan.

10

1902

3-28

2-15

1-65

70

-4

•70

•40

21

i>

99

99

3-07

1-75

1-65

71

99

-65

•40

20

} )

99

99

3-47

2-15

2-00

81

9)

•85

•48

20

>>

91

)>

3-80

2-10

1-67

71

) 9

1-00

•47

26

—

—

3-41

2-04

1-74

73

99

•80

•44

22

49 =

19-29 in.

763-42

May

14

1901

3-54

2-90

2-15

78

4 +

1-55

•85

27

99

9 9

99

3-54

2-40

1-94

65

M

1-53

•93

30

99

9 9

9 }

3-52

2-45

2-20

75

J)

1-50

•90

30

>»

99

99

3-98

3-10

2-37

76

))

1-70

■95

29

—

3-65

2-71

2-17

74

" >

1-57

•91

29

Some concentration of lines at this point.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

95

OF SCALES OF WniTma—contmucd.

YEAR II.

YEAR III.

YEAR IV.

YEAR V. I

Lengtli
ofBiB2
in mm.

No. of

lines of
growth.

Length
of B2B3
in mm.

No. of
lines of
growth.

Length
of B3B-1
in mm.

No. of
lines of
growth.

Length
ofB-»B5
in mm.

No.
of ex-
centric
lines.

REMARKS.

•59
•63

•61

24
25

25

•35
•40

•38

11
17

14

•46
•47

1 -47

16

14

15

—

Remarkably small scale growth for first
year; also marked disintegration of
large number of scales. Yrs. I. and II.
should perliajis be Year I.

Average.

•40
•42

16
14

•35
•40

12
15

—

—

—

—

•41

15

•38

14

—

—

—

—

Average.

•40
•36

17
20

•37
•25

16
11

—

—

—

—

•38

19

•31

14

—

—

—

—

Average.

•35
•25

14
13

•25
•35

10
14

—

—

—

•30

14

•30

12

—

—

—

—

Average.

•28

13

•19

6

—

—

—

—

•50

14

•25

9

—

—

—

—

•

•63
•66
•50
•55

24
24
25
22

•43
•48
•40
•35

17
16
13
12

—

—

—

—

•59

24

•42

15

—

—

—

—

Average.

•74
•95
•80
•80

18
23
25
24

•48
•58
•65
•50

22
21
20
19

—

—

—

—

Many of tlie scales from tlie last
fish were in a disintegrated con-
dition.

•82

23

•55

21

—

—

—

—

Average.

•55
•65
■80
•60

22
25
30
23

•35
•35
•40
•30

13
14
16
11

•35
•25
•32
■30

14
12
15
11

—

—

This is a corrected observation :
in my i>revious observation I had
evidently put Years III. an<l IV.
togetlier as one year.

•65

25

•35

14

•31

13

—

—

Average.

T.O
•40
•47
•57

19
13 ,

11 1

•40
•29
•35
•38

14
12
12
13

•30
•20
•35
•35

14

7

14

13

•10
•12
•13
•12

4 '

3 1
3 '
3

•49

17

1

•38

13

•30

12

•12

3

Average.

9G

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID/E

Examination of Scales of "Whiting — Summary.

Length of fish.

inches.

5-4

7-8

8-2

8-4

9-S
11-0
11-5
11-90
12-20
12-40
13-0

13-65

14-0

14-65

14-75

14-85

15-5

15-75

15-75

16-0

16-25

16-50

17-0

17-25

17-75

17-75

18-70

18-75

18-80

26-25

*28-50
29-50
29-65
30-15
31-50
32-30
33-2
33-5

t34-0
34-2
34-5
34-92
34-92
35-56
35-56
36-19
36-19
36-83
40-0
41-27
46-6

±49-0

Weight

in
grins.

Month

of
capture.

Annual
rings.

2-12
3-07
3-22
3-30
3-85
4-33
4-52
4-68
4-80
4-88
5-11

5-37

5-51

5-76

5-80

5-84

6-10

6-20

6-20

6-29

6-39

6-49

6-69

6-79

6-98

6-98

7-36

7-38

7-40

10-33

11-22

11-61

11-67

11-87

12-40

12-71

13-07

13-18

13-38

13-46

13-58

13-75

13-75

14-0

14-0

14-25

14-25

14-50

15-75

16-25

18-34

19-29

1-12

2-85

3-47

3-44

3-97

9-0

9-09

10-15

12-8

15-40

fish
damaged

17-4
18-75
'23-15
26-90

not taken

29-25

28-8

25-62

29-5

32-9

not taken

36-9
42-87

not taken

41-6
51-7
44-7
56-10
134-30
175
175
205
185
215
257
290
245
340
290
335
255
320
395
280
355
355
332
455
500
700
763-42

June
Oct.

Nov.

Sept.
Nov.

Sept.
Nov.

Sept.
Nov.

)>
>»

May
July

Dec.

Oct,

i»
Dec.
Jan.
Oct.
Jan.
Dec.

i

Jan.
May

>»
)»
>>

M
1 )
1>
>)

)>
>1
)>
U

1 +

Lines of growth.

L II.

in.

IV. V.

-3

II

-2
-4
-3

>>

-3?
-3

>>

)>

>>
ji

i>
II

-4

4 +

3

11
9
10
10
19
15
16
21
20
19
20
24
24
21
28
25
22
24
31
27
29
27
31
31
27
32
30
31
36
29
27
29
32
34
37

38 10-11
34 18

10
14
14
21
10
19
10

31
16

21

20 20

32 20

33 14

38
30
25
35
24
26
31
31
22
29

18
15
19
14
13
14
24
23
25
17

17
12

10

01-21
20
15
14
14
14
12

6

9
15
21
14
13

Locality.

From English Cliaiinel
From Nortli Sea

From English Channel
>>

13
12

I J
>>
»>
i>
i>

99

99

99

99

I)

99

99

99

91

99

91

99

99
99
99
99
99
99
19
91
99
91
99
99
l>
99
91
99

Approximate
age.

3-4 months.

8 months.

>9
99

6-7 months.
8 months.

99

6-7 months.
8 months.

1 1
6-7 months.
8 months.

91
99
99

1 yr. 2-3 raths.
1 yr. 4-5 mtlis.

1 yr. 9 mths.

2 yrs. 7 mths.

11

1 yr. 9 mths.

3 yrs. 10 raths.

2 yrs. 7 mths.
2 yrs. 10 mths.

2 yrs. 9 mths.

99
19

99
9)
99

II

3 yrs. 10 mths.

4 yrs. 2 mths.

• See PI. VI., Fig. 1.

t See PI. VI.

Fig.

t See PI. VII., Fig. 1.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

97

GAD US ME RL ANGUS.
Summarised Table of Annual Rings.

No.
of

Length of fish.

Month
of capture.

No. of
annual
rings.

Xo. of lines of growth (cxcentric
lines) in years.

1 2 3 4 5

fish.

in cm.

in inches.

Remarks.

1

5-4

2-12

June

-1

3

—

_ _ _

V

1
2

7-8
8-0

3-07

*s. 3-22
L. 3-30

October

11
9-10

—

— _ _

From

Y North
Sea.

1

9-8

3-85

»>

10

-

_ _ _

,

4

11-12

s. 4-33
L, 4-80

November

15-21

-

_ _ _

3
5
6

12-13

14-
15-16

s. 4-88
L. 5-37
s. 5-51
L. 5-84
s. 6-10
L. 6-49

Oct. to middle
November

19-20
21-28
2-2-31

-

- - -

4

17-0

s. 6-69
L. 6 "98

November

27-31

-

_ _ _

3

18-0

s. 7.36
L. 7-40

J J

30-32

-

- - -

1

26-25

10-33

May

1 +

36

10

- - -

3

28-29

s. 11-22
L. 11-67

July to Dec.

1 + to - 2

27-29

14-21

- - -

2

30-31

s. 11-87
L. 12-40

Dec.

-2

32-34

10-19

_ _ _

1

32-3

12-7

October

-3

37

10

17 - -

1

33-2

13-07

»i

) J

38

10

12 - -

1

33-6

13-18

December

-2

34

18

_ _ _

4

33-34

s. 13-3
L. 13-97

Oct. to Jan.

-3

16-38

16-20

9-21 - -

1

34-92

13-75

December

-3?

34

14

15 - -

5

2

35-36
40-41

s. 14-0
L. 14-50
s. 15-75
L. 16-25

-3

>>

24-35
31

13-19
23-24

6-14 - -
15-21 - -

1

46-6

18-34

January

) >

23

31

24 - -

1

46-6

18-34

>>

-4

22

25

14 13 -

1

49-0

19-29

May

4 +

29

17

13 12 3

Have here taken the smallest (s.) and largest (l.) fi.sli.

NEW SERIES. — ynl,. VII. X(j. 1.

G

98

THE rERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

Summarised Table showing Average Surface Size op Scales in Whiting

AT Various Stages.

No.

of

fish.

Range of

length in

cm.

Range of

weight

in grnis.

Month of
capture.

Average

length of

scale

in mm.

Average

length of

ABior

AB'

Average
breadth
of scale
in mm.

Average 1
(excentric

nesof
lines)

growth
in years

Notes.

in mm.

I. II.

HI.

IV.

V.

1

5-4

1-12

June

•33

•19

•28

3 -

4

7 -8-9 -8

2-85-3-97

Oct.

•60

■35

•42

10 -

—

—

—

From North Sea

25

11-0-18-80

9-0-56-10

Oct. to Nov.

1-16

•70
AB"

•77

24 -

-

-

-

1

26 25

134-30

May

2-83

1-40

1^99

36 10

-

-

-

2

28-5-29 5

175

July

2-45

1-32

1^40

28 14

-

-

—

3

29-65-3r5

205-215

Dec.

2-27

r35

1-58

32 13

_

—

—

2

32-3-33-2

257-290

Oct.

2-54

1^66

r85

38 10

15

_

_

7

35 -56-41 -27

280-500

Dec.

2-59

1-67

1-88

29 17

13

_

_

1

46-6

700

Jan.

3-41

1 74

2-04

22 25

14

13

—

1

49-0

763-42

May

3-65

2-17

2-71

29 17

13

12

3

GADUS MEBL ANGUS (WHITIXG).

Length of fish in cm.

Age of fish.

5-4

First summer.

7-18

„ winter.

26-29

Second summer.

29-31

,, winter.

32-42

Third

(33^5

Second , , )

(34^0

Fourth ,, )

46^6

M M

49^0

Fifth spring.

For purposes of comparison I submit two tables of ages for the
Whiting, the first table from Fulton's paper on " The Eate of Growth
of the Cod, Haddock, Whiting, and Norway Pout" {Fishery Board for
Scotland, 1900) ; the second table from Cunningham's paper on " The
Eate of Growth of some Sea Fishes and their Distribution at Different
Ages " (Journal Marine Biological Association, vol. ii., n.s., 1891-2).

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

99

Table showing the Rate of Growth of the "Whiting (Gadus merlangns)^

AFTER Fulton.

A Series

(6,203 fish).

B Series

(1,168 fish).

*C Series

(1,110 fish).

*D Series
(30 fish).

*E Series
(5 fish).

Smallest
Average
Largest

Smallest
Average
Largest

Smallest
Average
Largest

Smallest
Average
Largest

Smallest
Average
Largest

Size.

inin.

inches.

69

124-4

196

183

237-9

297

257

313-5

404

410

469-4

491

526

534-2

541

oil

•^16

12 x%

16i
ISi
19A-

2011

21
21A-

Approxi- Apparent growth in

mate a year from previous

age. series.

yrs. mths. mm. inches.

- 2

- 5i

- 7

1 2

1 5i

1 7

2 2

2 5i

2 7

3 2
3 5^
3 7

[4 2]

[4 5i]

[4 7]

126

114-0

113-5

101

74
75-6
107

[153

[155-9

[87

[116

[64-8

[50

11

4H

4i
4i

Ol4

3
43.

6J]
3i]

4M
2-A]

* Deep water hauls.

Table showing the Rate of Growth of the Whiting {Gadus merlangus),

after Cunningham.

Date of
collection.

No. of
specimens

Length
in cm.

Length
in in.

Calculated age.

June 13, 1889
July 16, 1891

2
13

5-7
5-4-9-0

2-2
21-3-5

3 or 4 months old.

4 or 5 months old.

I must notice here the case of a whiting which I kept living under
observation in one of the small tanks of the laboratory, from a month
or so after hatching until it was one year and four or five montlis old.
When first placed in the tank, in early May, 1902, this whithig
measured 10-20 mm. in length (according to Cunningham the larval
whiting when first hatched is 3-G mm. in length). The whiting in
question was fed regularly from the hand until July 4th, 1903, when
it leapt from the tank. At the latter date it measured 8| inches in
length, and was 3^ oz. in weight. On examining its scales I found

100 THE rERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

them much more regular in their arrangement than the scales of
whiting captured at sea. The lines of growth appeared almost uni-
formly separated from one another, and because of this I could not
observe any distinction into sunnner and winter areas such as are
marked out in my plates.

Another noteworthy point about the lines of growth in the scales of
this whiting was that they appeared throughout to be closer to one
another than is the case in captured fish. This would probably indicate
a uniformly slower growth of the scale.

The temperature of the water in the Plymouth tanks remains fairly
constant ; but there is naturally a distinct difference between the
summer and winter temperature, and the whiting in question may be
taken as having been fairly regularly supplied with food. From these
facts, and also from the fact that fish from deep water, where the
temperature of the sea does not show marked variation in summer
and winter, show annual rings as clearly as those from shallow water
where there is a marked difference between the summer and winter
temperature, inclines me to believe that it is a question of variation
in the food-supply rather than variation in temperature which in-
fluences the metabolism of the fish, and indirectly brings about the
formation of annual rings in scales.

The scales of this aquarium whiting showed, however, some interesting
points, firstly as to the number of lines of growth : the total number of
these lines was on an average 50, and whiting from the sea which I
determined to be of about the same age, though of a larger size (see
tables), showed on an average 43 lines of growth. It appears to me,
if 1 had not already known the real age of this captive whiting, that
from my tables of calculated ages for captured whiting I would at
least have arrived at the approximate age by counting the number of
lines of growth in the scales.

In regard to the sizes of scales in this captive whiting, they were
on an average the following: Total length of scale, 2*00 mm. ; maximum
breadth of scale, l"50nim, ; long axis AB", llO mm. On comparing
the figures above with those given in my tables, it seems that the size
of the scale is small for the number of growth lines present, and this
one might expect from my previous observation that the growth lines
are all uniformly closely adjacent to one another.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

101

CO

o
o

«

o

:3

CZ2

O

00

o

«

H

C3

15

HH

M

o

M

o

H

•tf

fo

ee

o

»

OJ

H

o

J

fS

ti

EH

pel

pa

^

^

^

CO

oT

m

O)

<u

z>

cd

Is

"rt

o

o

0

CO

03

«

•<J<

to

to

«50

.9

CO

.s^*

'•B-^

'S'^

s «

m CO

Ci "*

CO

&ig

u ya

^ CO

C3

o p

a> P

t2 -
c

a, p

S-^

1^

<<

<1

<1

M

O to +s <u

!«»- S-2
OS-

MM

1

■^ ■* I-l Tji

CO

•r)< ^ mta

in

PS

_ JA

t£(M "

gM =

CO O l^ o

Ol

t^ O CD (M

■^

MM

1

O .^H O r-l

p

p rt i-H J^

i—t

i o .

13 vh s .a

QO i-i cr. O

1-1 (N r-l (M

o

CD l^ O O

i-< I-l (M :^

CO
I—I

Oi CO CD O
rH I-l I-l rH

1—1

«

og =

en =

(M «0 ^ O

tH

CO CO CO -^

vn

-It O t^ CO

CO

>H

00 Ci 1_^ CO

00

to l^ w t_^

i-~

i-~ CO 'p p

p

1-1 o.«

■ u .

O CD 5 Ol

O .-1 O .-H

T-i

O t^ 05 CO

00

-If CO -* •M

CO

Iziv. a.B

:<l C^ (N <M

!N

I— 1 I— 1 I— 1 I— 1

I— i

<N <N IN <N

^

t-4

oS-

^ rH

C3

Ki

irt> OJ o iM

•^

t^ I--, o »o

»o

O CO O O

CO

«;) oo CO GO

00

00 1^ 1^ p

r--

CT. p p Oi

p

^■s.a

1— 1

»H

-*-' -^ oj !* P

■^ ifl va -cji

(M

CO t^ Oi VO

tH

O 00 O 00

OS

•^ >p Tj< ip

ip

•rf CO C^ C^

CO

i_^ p CO ip

p

.-< I-H rH i-l

■-I

T-t r-i r—t r-t

1—1

1— 1 1—1 1—1 rH

I— 1

o1^

•N c^ ri OJ

OJ

+ + + +

+

+ + + +

+

o :: —
^ 3 '2

iM (M J^ 01

(M

(N (N IN M

IN

•S 'E .3 -

• a sa

OO (N Oi .-'

o

OJ 00 o C^

o

l^ CO u-5 <N

•^

CO Tt< CO rti

•^

00 CO "*l -*

-*

TJI T34 T3I Tjl

^

03

a>

fC C

^

■aoa

= •< a

^•■5 .a

u-5 >.-: '^ (M

l^

00 ic o a>

t»

^ 07 CO m

CO

i£> oo >o iX)

T— 1 1— 1 I—I r— 1

I-l

CO o >p -^

T-l I— 1 r-1 tH

ip

w p 00 w

rH rH I— 1 1—1

I— 1

o

£0

s - .

03 a

O 00 « UO

«^

l-_ O CO CO

a-.

u-1 0 0 -M

1^

a '^ a
.a cs ;:

ip (J5 I--. «5

IP

CO i_-^ ip -rn

<p

>p OS 00 00

1_^

X <u _

r-H T— 1 r— t i-H

T-H

1—1 I-l I-l I-l

rH

rH rH rH rH

7-<

— ■ad
5 teg
o a a

^ ".9

CO (N i-H 'J'

oo

1-1 ^ a> i^

00

CO CO 0 CO

l^

00 i- I-^ O

oo

oo 00 i-~ p

W

rH p 00 p

p

(N eq c^ eo

I>1

(N M <N (N

IN

00 <N (« iN

00

1— 1

1—1

rH

o

o

0

Oi

Oi

OS

f— 4

I-H

I— 1

55

''■^ « :: ;;

1

>--i" = :; ::

1

^^ :; ;; ::

1

c^ O.

f-H

r— I

t— (

OS

>-.

>»

t>.

ca

<a

eS

S

s

Bd

CO

to

Q •» ^ •*

1

1

0 « _ -
-1* - - '

T—1

1

«)

.«1 " " "

1

HtC

1

1

^

x>

o>

J3 ■

■4J a

'^ CO ;: - -

1

1—1
,1 ?• — -

1 ,1

'^ - . .

1

J-=

S-

in
CO

CO

rH

102

THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID/K

HADDOCK, from the North Sea.

Lengtl

li of fish.

Weight.

Xo. of

annual

rings

Date of
capture.

Approximate
age.

Notes.

m.

cm.

in scale.

lOi

26-67

6.^ OZ.

2

May 15, 1901

2 years.

No clearly marked growth for
spring of 1901.

lit

29-52

9i OZ.

2-h

>>

2 years 1 month

Clearly marked growth for spring
of 1901.

12f

32-38

12 OZ.

>i

ti

J }

Ditto.

m

33-33

12 OZ.

I)

t>

2 yrs. 1-2 mths.

1st year's growth small ; 2nd year
normal ; much growth forsprijig
of 1901.

13i

33-33

12: OZ.

)i

))

2 years 1 month

Sj)ring growth of 1901 apparent.

14

35-56

14: OZ.

>)

>i

>>

>» J )

14i

36-19

15^ OZ.

))

>i

>»

m

39-37

1 lb. 5i OZ.

3

)>

3 years

Very little, if any growth for
spring of 1901.

16i

41-27

1 11). Tii OZ.

3 +

) J

3 years 1 month

Spring growth of 1901 more
clearly marked than in last.

20^

51-43

2 lbs. 9^ OZ.

4 +

) )

4 years 1 month

Spring growth of 1901 apparent.

21 i

54-61

4 lbs.

>)

J)

)>

>) ))

N.B.— These haddocks were probably hatched in May. According to Fulton the majority of
larval haddocks are jirobably hatched in early April, and it may be later, as spawning fish can be
obtained as far on as the beginning of May.

Age of Haddock as Determined by Fulton.

Length.

Age.

Series A.

Range from 4| to 8| in.

Average length,

6{-e inclies

7 to 8 months in October.

Series B.

Range up to 13| inches

Average length

lli inches

1 year 7 months ,,

Series C.

Range up to 17i inches

Average length,

13^ to 14 in.

2 years 7 months ,,

AS AN INDEX OF AGE.

103

The Cod (Gadus callarias, LJ.

Date of capture.

No. of

annual

rings

in scale.

No. of lines of
growth.

Approximate age.

Length of fish.

Year 1.

Year 2.

9 "87 in. =25-08 cm.

August 26, 1902

1 +

19

9

1 year 4-5 months.

>i
>>
ft

19
20
17
20
20

10
9
10
10
10

>>
ji
II

»>

" [siune fish.

—

—

19

10

Average of scales, all from

8-25 in. =20-9§ cm.

August 26, 1902

1 +

15

8

1 year 4-5 montlis.

>>

>)
>)
>>

13
14
12
15

8
8
9
8

1 1
»»
II

>»

M

13

8

" [same fish.

—

14

8

Average of scales, all from

Note. — The ages thus determined agree with Fulton's results. According to Fulton,
the majority of Cod proljably hatch about the end of March and early part of April, and
this may be taken as the ]ieriod from which to date the average age of the season's brood,
and Haddock 8^ to 11^ inches long are 1 year and 5 months in September.

The Scales of Eels.

This paper commenced with the scales of the eel, and towards my
conclusion I must again refer to them.

I have recently obtained eels from the Isle of May, Firth of Forth,
in order to examine their scales to see if by this means I could throw
any light on their interesting life-history. I endeavoured to obtain
eels from the lighthouse-keeper of the isle during the past winter
(1902-1903), but was informed hj him that they were never seen
there during winter. He thought they must bury themselves in the
mud at the bottom of the loch during winter- time, and it seems
probable that at this season they indulge in a winter sleep. In the
following August, however, the lighthouse-keeper was kind enough
to send me three eels, measuring 28, 33, and 35 inches respectively.
The eels of the Isle of May liave previously attracted the attention
of the biologist on account of their supposed history. They were
supposed to have been introduced there by the monks some centuries
ago, and to have lived in the land-locked loch on the isle since that
time. It had been held for sometime that eels could only breed in
salt water, and that those eels prevented from reaching salt water by
their land-locked habitat were tlie identical eels brought over by the

104 THE TERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^

monks, being therefore of great age. Sandeman has contributed a
paper to the Liunean Society showing that the eyes and other organs
show symptoms of senile decay.

Lately, in the Field, it has been held that eels can breed in fresh
water. The lighthouse-keeper on the isle tells me that the eels found
by him are much smaller than those found formerly, that instead of
being five feet or so, they are only three feet or so in length.

The scales of eels are well buried in the skin, and from this position
one would naturally suppose that they could not easily be shed or
rubbed off. The scales show rings very clearly ; but whether these
are annual or not I would not at present certainly determine, as I
have not a complete series of the fish. If the rings are annual, and
from the fact that these animals seem to have a winter sleep, it would
be natural to suppose that such is the case, then the eels on the Isle of
May are of no great age, and the largest of the specimens (35 inches
in length) examined by me, may not be more than fourteen years old,
but on this determination I do not place any exact reliance.

The scales were thick, well preserved, and showed no signs of dis-
integration such as are found in scales from aged pollack. This may
be partly accounted for by the fact that scales in the eel do not over-
lap one another.

IV. Conclusion.

My present paper, firstly, rests on the foundation of Dr. Hoffbauer's
work for fresh-water fish, which no authority has as yet proved false.
Dr. Hoffbauer showed tliat scales gave a direct index of age in carp,
etc., for all of which he had exact and direct knowledge as to their
age and history. It is surely opposed to the principle of the unity
of science to believe that a law which holds true for some fresh-water
fish would not also be found applicable to some marine fish.

After reading the preceding statistics, I think that it must be
granted that, even after allowing for variation, they afford strong
cumulative proof that in these species of Gadida the growth of scales
is cyclical or periodic, and that the rings formed thereby are annual.
To believe that these are not annual rings, but are rings formed in
some more irregular manner, seems quite opposed to the facts in regard
to the growth of the scale, and the arrangement of the lines which
mark that growth, as brought out by my statistics and plates.

That scales of those Gadidre show a larger surface growth, and a
wider separation of the lines of growth in summer as contrasted with
winter, appears to me to be indisputable. This divergence in the growth
of scales during summer and winter is probably due to changes in the
general metabolism of the body, which are in their turn, in all proba-

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 105

Lility, the result of seasonal variation in the temperature and food-
supply. Of these two causes I am more inclined to give preponderance
to the lattar.

After an examination of thousands of scales from these Gadidse
I hold that in ninety-eight cases out of a hundred one would arrive
at a very closely approximate idea of the age of the fish from an
examination of three or four well-developed scales taken from the
median region of the Hanks near the lateral line. Other areas of the
body show annual rings in the scales, but in the area mentioned
they are more easily determined than elsewhere. The percentage
given would be less in the case of fish more tlian four or five years
of age, for reasons already stated in a previous part of this paper.
In this connection, however, it has to be remembered that the deter-
mination of age for younger is of more practical importance than for
older fish.

Corroboration of the truth of this hypothesis, that the ages of certain
marine fishes may be determined by means of annual rings on the
scales is afforded by the fact that the ages ascertained liy my method
agree in the main with the results calculated out by other workers who
have worked at the subject of the age of fish from a different standpoint.
In this connection I have quoted repeatedly from Cunningham and
Fulton, the latter of whom has worked out the subject in a very com-
plete manner after Petersen's method {Scottish Fishery Board, 1900 and
1901).

Allowing for difference of locality of capture, my results agree in the
nu\in with those of Fulton, and they also afford many points of agree-
ment with Cunningham's results for fish of the English Channel. As
I have already stated, I had little previous knowledge of Mr. Cunning-
ham's and Dr. Fulton's results on the probable ages of fish, and it was
only after I compiled my own statistics on age-determination that I
compared them with those of other workers.

It is almost impossible to acquire direct proof of this hypothesis,
the conditions of life in tank and aquarium being so unlike the natural
haunts, yet even with this, I have already mentioned that in the case
of a whiting which lived from shortly after hatching for thirteen and
a quarter months in a tank, the number of growth-lines formed on the
scale during that period roughly agreed (after allowing for a slower
scale growth under captive conditions) with the number of growth-lines
in the scales from sea whiting calculated to be about the same age.

The labelling of Gadidte as adopted for other fish by the International
Sea Fisheries Scheme along with an examination of their scales would,
I believe, furnish a direct proof of this hypothesis.

lOG THE PERIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID^E

LITERATURE.

1566. Borello. — Observationum microscopicaruni centuria. Ilagte Comituni ; 1566,
}). 23, observatio xxxvii., De sqiiamis. •

1667. Hooke. — Micrograi)lua. London, p. 162.

1696. Leuwenhoeck, Antonius. — Opera omnia, Lugduni Batavoriim, t. iii., epistola
107, pp. 191-2.

1716. Leuwenhoeck, Anlonius. — Epistola3 physiologictc super conipluribus naturae
arcanis, Deliiliis, 1719, epistola xxiv., p. 213. 1716.

1716. Reaumur. — (Histoire de 1' Academic royale des sciences ; Paris, 1718, p. 229).

Observations sur la matiere qui colore les perles fausses et sur queb^ues
autres matieres animales d'une autre couleur, a I'occasion de quoi on essaye
d'exjiliquer la formation des c'cailles des poissons.

1717. Roberg. — Dissertatio de piscibus. Upsal.

1733 and 1735. Petit. — Histoire de la Carpe (Histoire de I'Academie royale des

sciences, p. 197, avec 6 planches).
1761. SchaefFer. — Schiiffer's Vermischte Schriften, 2 Band. Piscium Bavarico-

ratisbonensium pentas, 1761, pp. 16, 43, 54, 65, 78, tab. iv.
1787. Broussonnet. — Observations sur les ccailles de plusieurs esiieces de poissons

qu'on croit communcment depourvues de ces parties (Journal de physique,

1787, t. xxxi., p. 12.

1823. Heusinger. — System der Histologic, von Carl Friedrich Heusinger. Erster

Theil. Histographie, p. 226.

1824. Kuntzman. — Bemerkungen iiber die Schuppen der Fischc (Verhandlungen

der Gesellschaft naturforschcnder Freunde in Berlin, }). 269, pi. xi., xii., xiii.)
1829. Ibid., p. 369, pi. xvi.

1833. Ehrenberg. — Annales de Poggendorf, vol. xxxviii., Leipzig, p. 470.

1834. Agassiz. — Recherclies sur les poissons fossiles, 2'-' livraison, Neuchatel, vol. i.,

p. 26, etc.

1839. Mandl. — Recherclies sur la structure intimc des ecailles des poissons (Annales

des sciences naturelles, 2" serie, t. ii.

1840. Agassiz. — Remarcpies sur la structure des ecailles des poissons, extrait d'une

Icttre dc M. Agassiz, addressee a I'Academie des sciences dans sa seance du
3 fcvrier, 1840 (Annales des sciences naturelles, 2^ serie, t. xiii., 1840).
1840. Mandl. — Nouvelles Observations sur la structure des ('^cailles des poissons,
extrait d'une lettre de M. Mandl a I'Academie des sciences (seance du 24
fdvrier, 1840) a I'occasion des remarques de M. Agassiz (Annales des sciences
naturelles, 2« serie, t. xiii., 1840).

1840. Agassiz. — Observations sur la structure et le mode d'accroissement des

ecailles des poissons ; refutation des objections de M. Mandl (Annales des
.sciences naturelles, 2«= serie, t. xiv., 1840).

1841. Peters. — Bericht liber den microscopischen Ban der Fisch-Schuppen, p. ccix.,

Miiller's Archiv.

1842. Vogt. — Embryologie des Salmones, Neuchatel, ])p. 147 and 148.

1843. Miiller.— Wiegmann's Archiv.

1844. Miiller. — Annales des sciences naturelles, 3« serie, t. iv., Memoire lu a

TAcademie des sciences de Berlin, le 12 decembre, 1844, et traduit par
M. Vogt des Archives d'histoire naturelle de Wiegmann et Erichson, 1845,
pp. 91-141.

1845. Vogt. — Annales des sciences naturelles, 3^^ serie, t. iv.

1849. Siebold and Stannius. — Nouveau Manuel d'anatomie comparee, Edn. Paris,

t. ii., pp. 49-53.

1850. Dareste. — Recherclies sur la classification des poissons de I'ordre des Plec-

tognathes (Annales des sciences naturelles, 3'-" serie, t. xiv. 1850).

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 107

1850. Dareste. — Examen tie la place que doit occuper dans la classification le poisson

fossile decrit par S. Volta sons le noni de Blochius longirostris (Annales
des sciences naturelles, 3" serie, t. xiv.).

1851. Williamson. — Investigations into the Structure and Development of the

Scales and Bones of Fishes (Philosophical Transactions, pt. ii., London).
Scales and Dermal Teeth of some Ganoid and Placoid Fish. 1849.
1851. Leydig.— Ueber die Haut einiger Susswasserfische(Zeitschrift fiirwissenschaft-
liche Zoologie).

1853. Hollard. — Monographie de la famille des Balistides, premiere partie : Annales

des sciences naturelles, 3*= series, t. xx., 1853. pp. 80-3 ; deuxieme partie :
ibid., 4« serie, t. i., 1854. pp. 39-54.

1854. Leydig. — Histologische Benierkungen iiber den Polypteru.s Bichir (Zeitschrift

fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Taf. ii. and iii.).
1857. Hollard. — Monographie des Ostracionides (Annales des sciences naturelles,

4« serie, t. vii., pp. 125-3G, 147, etc.).
1857. Steeg.--De anatomia et morphologia squamarum piscium. Bonnse.
1861. Steenstrup. — Sur la diflerence entre les poissons osseux et les poissons

cartilagineux an point de vue de la formation des ecailles. Annales des

sciences naturelles, 4'-" serie, t. xv., extr. Archives des sciences physiques

et naturelles, 1861, t. 11., p. 368.
1866. Leydig. — Trait d'histologie comparee de I'homme et des animaux. Traduit

pas M. Lahillonne, Paris, 1866. pp. 96-101.
1866. Owen. — On the Anatomy of Vertebrates, vol. i., p. 548.
1866. Blanchard.— Les Poissons des eaux donees de la France. Paris.
1868. Salbey. — Ueber die Structur und die Wachsthum der Fischschuppen.

(Archiv. fiir anatomische Physiol ogie und wissenschaftliche Medicin, 1868,

pp. 729-49, pi. xviii.).
1868. Carpenter. — The Microscope and its Eevelations. London, p. 700, figs. 362

and 363.

1872. Vaillant. — Sur la valeur de certains caracteres employes dans la classification

des poissons (Comptes rendus de I'Academie des sciences, t. Ixxv., No. 23).

1873. Baudelot. — Recherches sur la Structure et le Developpement des Ecailles des

Poissons Osseux (Archives de Zoologie Experimentale et Gen(5rale. Tome

ii., 1873).
1890. Klaatsch. — Zur Morphologic der Fischschuppen u. Gescliichte der Hart-

substanzgewebe. 7 Thle. in 2 Heften. Morph. Jahrbuch. Vol. 16.
1892. Ryder. — On the Mechanical Genesis of the Scales of Fishes ; Proc. Acad, of

Nat. Sciences, Philadelphia.
1894. Klaatsch. — Uber die Herkunft der Scleroblasten. Ein Bietrag zur Lehre

von der Osteogenese. Morph. Jahbuch. Vol. 21.
1897. Ussow. — Die Entwicklung der Cycloid-Schuppe der Teleostier. Mit 2 Taf.

Bulletin de la Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscow.
1899. Hoil'bauer.— Die Altersbestimmung des Karpfen an seiner Schuppe. Jahi'es-

Bericht des Sclilesischen Fischerei-Vereins.

1901. Hoff Imuer. — Weitei-e Beitriige zur Bestimmung des Alters und Wachstumsver-

laufes an der Struktur der Fischschupjie. Jahres-Bericht der teichwirth-
scliaftlichen Versuch-station zu Trachenberg.

1902. Stuart Thomson. — The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gadidae as an Index of

Age. Journal Marine Biological As.sociation, vol. vi., No. 3, January, 1902.

1902. Tims, H. W. Marett.— On the Structure of the Scales in the Cod. Report

British As.sociation (Belfast), p. 660.

1903. Brown, A. W. — Some Observations on the Young Scales of the Cod, Haddock,

and Whiting before Shedding. Proceed. Roy. Soc, Edinburgh. Vol. 24,

108 THE TEKIODIC GROWTH OF SCALES IN GADID/E

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plates I. to IV., Photo-micrographs of Scales of Pollack.
Plate v., Scales of Poor Cod.
Plate VI., Scales of "Whiting.

Plate VII., Fig. 1, Scale of Whiting ; Fig. 2, Scale of Coal Fish (Gadus rireuf^).
Plate VIII., Fig. 1, Scale of Haddock ; Fig. 2, Scale of Norwegian Whiting Pollack
(Gadus Esmarkii).

The lettering is taken in each case from the posterior area of the scale.

C = Centre of growth.
C - W 1 = Growth of first year.
C - S 1 = Growth of first summer. ,

S 1 - "W 1 = Growth of first winter.
W 1 - S 2 = Growth of second summer.
W 1 -W 2 = Growth of second year.
W 2 - W 3 = Growth of third year.
L.G. = Lines of growth.
S.L.G. = Summer lines of growth.
W.L.G.= Winter lines of growth.

o*-

PLATE I.

Fig. 1.— Scale of young Pollack, 3 to 4 months old, magnified about 140 diameters.
Length of fish, 5-4 cm. (2-12 in.) ; date of capture, July, 1901. Scale shows three
lines of growth. The figure was drawn with the aid of the camera.

Fig. 2. — Scale of Pollack, 7 to 8 mouths old, magnified aljout 45 diameters.
Length of fish, 10-15 cm. (3-99 in.) ; date of capture, December 4th, 1889 ; number
of lines of growth, 18. The later lines are clo.ser to one another than the earlier,
indicating winter growth as distinguished from summer growth. The distance
between two consecutive summer lines of growth is seen, from the Figures 2, 3,
and 4, to be in some cases half as much again as the distance between two con-
secutive lines of winter growth ; in other cases it may be twice as great.

Fig. 3.— Scale of pollack, 7 to 8 months old, magnified 45 diameters. Length of
fish, lO'O cm. (3'93 in.) ; date of capture, December, 1889. Shows 20 lines of growth.

Fig. 4. — Scale of Pollack, 7 to 8 months old, magnified 45 diameters. Length of
fish, ir7.') cm. (4-62 in.); date of cajjture, December 4tli, 1889 ; number of lines of
growth, 20. The later lines are closer to one another than the earlier lines, indicating
winter growth as distinguished from summer growth.

Fig. 5.— Scale of Pollack, 1 year 2 to 3 months old, magnified 37^ diameters.
Length of fi.sh, 2476 cm. (975 in.); date of capture. May, 1902; number of lines of
growth first year, 2G, 8 lines the early growth of the second year.

PLATE II.

Fig. 1. — Pollack scale at end of second summer, magnified 45 diameters. Length
of fish, 28-5 cm. (11'22 in.) ; date of capture, October, 1900; age determined, 1 year
6 to 7 months.

Fig. 2. — Pollack scale at end of second year. Length of fish, 3365 cm. (13"25 in.);
date of capture. May, 1902. This photo-micrograph has, owing to the larger size of
the scale, been magnified much less than jireceding scale.

AS AN INDEX OF AGE. 109

PLATE III.

Fig. 1. — Scale of Pollack at end of second year. Length of fish, 33"G5 cm.
(13-25 in.) ; date of capture, May, 1902. This scale has been photographed because
it shows extremely little growth for first year, namely, only 18 lines of growth, while
that of the preceding scale, for example, shows 28 during this period.

Fig. 2. — Scale of Pollack at commencement of fourth summer, magnified 28
diameters. Length of fish, 4440 cm. (17-50 in.) ; date of capture, April 30th, 1901 ;
age determined, 3 years 6 weeks.

PLATE IV.

Scale of Pollack at commencement of ninth year. Length of fish, 78-74 cm.
(31 in.) ; date of capture, April or May, 1902. This photo-micrograph shows, firstly,
how it becomes a much harder task to distinguish the annual rings in the scales of
older and larger fish, and, secondly, that the scales of such tend naturally to become
broken and disintegrated. Age determined, 8 years 6 weeks.

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. — Scale of Gadus minutus in its second summer. Length of fish, 14-30 cm.
(5-62 in.) ; date of capture, July 9th, 1901. This scale shows very clearly the earlier
growth of second summer. First year, 37 lines of growth ; second year (early
summer), 9 lines of growth. Age determined, 1 year 3 to 4 months.

Fig. 2.— Scale of Gadus minutus at end of third winter. Length of fish, 19-05 cm.
(7-50 in.) age determined, about 3 years.

PLATE YI.

Fig. 1.— Scale of Whiting in its second summer. Length of fish, 28-50 cm.
(11-22 in.) ; date of capture, July 16th, 1901. This scale shows 29 lines of growth
for the first year, and 14 lines of growth for the second summer up to July 16th.
Age determined, 1 year 4 to 5 months.

Fig. 2.— Scale of Whiting towards end of the fourth year. Length of fish,
34-0 cm. (13-38 in.) ; date of capture, January 10th, 1902. This scale shows the
following lines of growth : first year, 31 ; second year, 21 ; third year, 10 ; fourth
year, 9. Age determined, 3 years 10 months.

PLATE YII.

Fig, 1. — Scale of Whiting at commencement of fifth summer. Length of fish,
49 cm. (19-29 in.) ; date of capture. May 14th, 1901. Age determined, 4 years
2 months.

Fig. 2.— Scale of Coal Fish {Gadus virens) in the early summer of second year.
Length of fish, 20-22 cm. (8 inches). This scale shows very clearly the early growth
of second summer.

PLATE VIII.

Fig. 1. — Scale of Haddock at commencement of third summer. Length of fish,
26-25 cm. (10-33 in.) ; date of capture. May 10th to 15th, 1901. This scale shows
21 lines of growth for the first year, and 20 lines of growth for the second year.
Age determined, 2 years.

Fig. 2.— Scale of Norwegian Whiting Pollack {Gadus Esmarkii) in its third
summer. Length of fish, 19-05 cm. (7-50 in.) ; date of capture, August 27th, 1900.
Age determined, 2 years 3 to 4 months.

As to the photo-micrographs, Figures 2, 3 and 4, Plato I., were taken by myself ;
the remainder are the work of Mr. L. E. Sexton, Plymouth, and Mr. A. Flatters,
Manchester.

Notes on the Copepoda of the North Atlantic Sea
and the Faroe Channel.

By
R. Norris Wolfenden, M.D., F.Z.S.

("With Plate IX., and one Figure in the text.)

In a previous notice in this Journal, vol, vi,, p. 344, January, 1902, a
brief description of the phin of work undertaken by tlie writer was
given. This comprised cruises across the cold-water area of the
Faroe Channel during 1900, 1901, and 1902, during the course of
which tow-nettings were made at each station with Garstang's net, or
Fowler's net, down to 500 to 600 fathoms, simultaneously with
hydrographical observations (temperature, collection of water, etc.),
which have already been partly reported upon by Mr. H. N". Dickson
{Geographical Journal, April, 1903).

The exploration of the Faroe Channel being now, under the Inter-
national Investigation Scheme, handed over to the Scottish Fishery
Board, I have, during 1903, endeavoured to supplement this work by
a cruise from Yalentia, in Ireland, to the Faroe Banks, crossing in the
route the deep Atlantic trough, and keeping almost entirely within
tlie " warm area " of the Atlantic, The first station was located at
lat. 51° 66' N.,long. 11° 21' W., 120 fathoms, and successive stations at :—

Lat. 55° 47' N., long. 12° 28' W., 1,561 fms.

Lat. 51= 40' N., loi
„ 51°34'X.

51° 0' N.
51° 0' N.
50° 56' N.
51° 30' N.
52=0' N.
52° 30' N.
53° 0' N.
53° 30' N.
54° 0' N,
54° 30' N.
55° 0' N.

))
))
11
11
11
11
))

5)
11

g. 12° 15' W., 560 fms.
12° 30' W., 725
11° 32' W., 375
12° 0' W., 980
12° 6' W., 1,000
12° 0' W., 600
12° 0' W., 255
12° 0' W., 130
11°56' W., 100
12° 0' W., 150
12° 0' W., 205
12° O'W., 1,608
12° O'W., 1,577

11
))
))
))
11
))
))
11
))
))

55° 47' N.
56°11'N.

56° 37' N.
58° 24' N.
58° 45' N.
59°18'N.
59° 54' N.
60° 29' N.
60° 41' N.
61° I'N.
60° O'N.
60° I'N.

11

))
))
11

!5
11
))
))
))

10° 12' W., 1,325

9° 50' W., 875

9°48'W., 912

S°30'W., 110

8° 35' W., 342

8° 30' W., 841

8°42'W., 720

8°30'W., 194

8° 50' W., 75

7° 42' W., 475

7°47'W., 547

0° 4'W., 580

11
11
))
))
)>
J)
11
11
11
11
11
11

During this cruise was used a new tow-net, devised by the writer
and his skipper, Buchan Henry, which has already been exhibited

COPEPODA OF NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. Ill

by the writer at the " Challenger " Society, and which has been found
to work with much greater certainty than either Garstang's net or
Fowler's net. The former is too light for very deep-water work, and
the latter has frequently been a source of annoyance, but the new
net, partly owing to its superior weight and to the extreme neatness
and accuracy of the workmanship (manufacturers, jMessrs. Bullivant
and Co.), was found to work with absolute certainty in the deepest
water explored, viz. 1,200 fathoms, until one of the side springs gave
way towards the end of the cruise. This was, however, soon replaced.

Altogether on these cruises 216 hauls have been made with closing
nets from 0-1,200 fathoms, 125 vertical hauls, and 89 surface hauls,
a total number of 430 hauls. The hydrographical observations made
during 1903 have been entrusted to Mr. H. N. Dickson, and will be
reported on in due course.

The Pelagic Copepoda collected between lat. 51° N. and 60° N. and
long. 6° 4' and 12° 30', i.e. west of Valentia and the Faroe Banks,
comprise 70 species ; those collected in the Faroe Channel, i.e. the
cold area, number about 50 species. These therefore give a very fairly
complete list of the Copepoda which inhabit the area lying between
51° N. and 60° N., lat.

1. Species occurring in ihe warm area of the Atlantic (51°-G0° X.).

Calanus finmarcliicus (Gunner.).

„ tenuicornis (Dana).
Megacalanus {nov. gen.).
Eucalanus elongatus (Dana).

„ atlanticus {nov. sp.).

„ crassus (Giesb.).
Rliincalanus nasutus (Giesb.).
Paracalanns parvus (Glaus).
Pseudocalanus elongatus (Boeck).
Spiuocalanu.s al)y.ssalis (Giesb.).
„ niagnus {nov. s}}.).

Calocalanus pavo (Dana).
Ctenocalanus vanus (Giesb.).
^Etideus tenuirostris {nov. sp.).
Brady idius arniatus (Giesb.).
Gaidius pungens (Giesb.).

„ major {nov. sp.).
Gaetanus anuiger (Giesb.).

„ caudani (Cauu).

„ major (nov. sp.).
Undeucliceta major (Giesb.).
„ minor (Giesb.).

Eucliirella carinata (nov. sp.).

„ curticauda, var. Atlantica.
Euchajta norvegica (Boeck).

„ glacialis (Hansen).

Euclia!ta acuta (Giesb.).
Scolecithrix minor (Brady).
,, siniilis (nov. sj).).

„ atlanticus (nov. sp.).

Amallopliora magna (Scott).
Lopliothrix frontalis (Giesb.).

,, securifrons (nov. sp.).

Phaenna spinifera (Glaus).
Xanthocalaruis subagilis (nov. sp.).
„ atlanticus {nov. sp.).

„ cristatus {nov. sp.).

Pseudoetideus armatus (nov. sp.).
Faroella multiserrata (nov. gen. et sp.).
Metridia lucens (Boeck).
„ Normani (Giesb.).
„ brevicauda (Giesb.).
Pleuromamma robusta (Dahl).

,, abdoniinahs (Lubbock).

Lucicutia grandis (nov. s}).).
„ llavicornis (Glaus).
„ atlantica {nov. sp.).
Phyllopus bidentatus (Brady).
Haloptilus acutifrons (Giesb.).
„ longicornis (Clans).
Augaptilus magnus {nov. sp.).
„ gibbus {nov. sp.).

112

NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

Augaptilus loiigioaudatns (Clans).
Hetoroihabclus norvegicus (Boeck).

„ loiigicoruis (Giesb.).

„ vipera (Giesb.).

„ grand is {nov. s}).).

„ abyssal is.

Anomalocera Patorsoni (Templeton).
^Egisthus atlanticus (nov. sp.).

Ectinosoina atlantica (Brady and

Eobertsou).
Acartia Clausii (Giesb.).
Caudace iiorvegica (Boeck).

„ rotunda {nov. q).).
Oncea sji.
Oitliona sp.

Longipedia coronata (Clans).
ParaugapUlus Bucbani {nov. gen. ct sp.).

2. Species occurring in the Faroe Channel, cold area.

Culanus finmarcliicus.
„ hyperborens.
Eiicalanus elongatus.

„ atlanticus.

„ crassus.
Paracalanus parvus.
Ctenocalauus vanus.
Rbincalanus nasutus.
Bradyidius armatus.
Bryaxis brevicornis.
Gaidins pungens.

„ major.
Gaetanus major.
Chiridius obtusifrons.

„ Vaulioffeni.
Pseudtetideus armatus.
Faroella multiserrata.
JEtidens tenuirostris.
Scolecithrix minor.
„ similis.

Heterorliabdus norvegicus.
„ longicornis.

Augaptilns zetesios.
Eucbceta norvegica.

„ glacialis.

Euchajta barbata.
IMt'uroraamma robusta.

„ abdominali:^

„ abyssalis.

Lucicutia flavicornis.

„ magna.
Phaenna spinifera.
Ilaloptilus longicornis.
Eucliirella carinata.
„ rostrata.

Metridia lucens.
„ longa.
iEgisthus atlanticus.
Candace pectinata.
Temora longicornis.
Centropages hamatus.

„ typicus.

Acartia Clausii.
„ longiremis.
,, discaudata.
Anomalocera Patersoni.
Oncea sp.
Oitliona sp.
Tetragoniceps sp.

A BRIEF DP:SCRIPTI0N OF THE NEW GENERA AND SPP^CIES.*

1. Megacalanus princeps (nov. gen. ct sp.). A huge Copepod was
twice taken in the deep water of the Atlantic area, measuring 10 mm.
in length, and externally much resembling a Calanns, but differing
absolutely in the fact of the last segment of the exopodite of the
second, third, and fourth pairs of feet having three marginal spines
as well as the terminal saw. The inner margins of tlie fifth pair
have neither denticulations nor hairs. The head is separate from
the first segment, and the last two thoracic segments are also
separate, the posterior one produced laterally into wing-like ex-

* A full description, with figures of the Copepoda mentioned here, is reserved for a
larger work which the writer has had in preparation for the past two years.

NOKTH ATLANTIC SEA ANP THE FAR(iE CHANNEL. 11

o

pansions like C. IviiKrhorciis. The anterior antennae of twenty-five
joints are much longer than the whole body. The first pair
of feet have an extraordinary double-hooked process on the dorsal
surface of the second basal joint, an upper and lower hook placed
vertically, the latter very strong and prominent. (PI. IX., figs. 1
and 2.) The structure of tiie mouth organs is very similar to Calcnuis.
In both cases it was an adult female, with well-developed symmetrical
genital segment. The only described Copepod at all resembling it is
the C. princcps of Brady {Challenger JRi^ort, "Copepoda"), in which the
feet are very similar, but there are no such setre on the anterior foot-
jaws as Brady figures, the maxilla is totally different as regards its
bristles, and the segmentation of the anterior antenna3 and abdomen is
also different. It is therefore certainly not Brady's species. The latter
cannot be a Calanus, as is evident from the presence of three external
spines on the last segment of the exopodite of the swimming feet.

2. Eucalanus atlanticus {nov. sp). In the course of dissecting many
examples of the well-known E. elongatus <? , I have come across a good
many specimens which to all outward appearance resemble E. elongatus,
except that the larger furcal segment, and longest tail seta, are on the
left side instead of the right side (Giesbrecht had already noted the
irregularity in this respect of the females). But together with this
condition the oral organs are not retrograded, as in the 3' elongatus, and
resemble entirely those of the female. The exopodite of the posterior
antenna is longer ; the first joint of the endopodite is not twice as long
as the second joint, and is only two and a half times as long as broad ;
the mandible palp is longer (three times as long as broad), and divided
by the origin of the exopodite into two nearly equal parts, and a normal
masticatory plate is retained with the usual teeth. (Plate IX., fig. 4.)
In the maxilla all the inner lobes are retained as in the ? , while in
E. elongatus <? they have disappeared. The anterior and posterior foot-
jaws are also normal as in the $ . The left fifth foot is only a little
longer than the right, the first segment of the exopodite of each foot
has a short marginal bristle, the last joint of the left side two distal
bristles, the right foot three distal bristles. (PI. IX., fig. 3.) In size
(4-45 mm. to 4-50 mm.) the animal is equal to the adult S of E. elongatus.

In various species of jEtidvinm, while in the last adult stage many
males possess fully developed fifth feet together with retrograded oral
organs, the stage antecedent to the last is one in which the fifth feet
are imperfectly developed, while the oral organs are retained as in the
female. This I have proved to be the case in many instances, and the
fact accounts for many discrepancies of authors in the description of
males with immature fifth feet. I do not know, however, if the

NEW .SEUIES. — VOL. VII. NO. 1, H

114 NOTES ON THE COPEPOPA OF THE

peculiarity exists outside of tlie family yEtidiincc and extends to the
Ev.co.lanidcv. Meanwhile, until this is proved to be tlie case, in which
instance the <? described above would be only the S of E. doiifjatus in
the last stage but one, I prefer to regard it as a new species.

3. Gactamis major (sp. nov). This has been referred to by the writer
in Proc, Zool. Soc, February 3rd, 1903.* It has much resemblance to
G. armiger (Gbt.), but is much larger, reaching a size of over 5 mm. ;
the anterior antennai are as long, or longer than the body; the lamellar
appendage of the posterior foot-jaw is absent, and the exopodites of the
first pair of feet are distinctly three-segmented.

The S 4G5 mm. long; cephalic spine short; spines of last thoracic
segment short; abdomen of five segments; anterior antenuce twenty-
two-jointed (24-25, 8-9, 1-2), nineteenth joint long ; oral organs much
retrograded ; fifth feet very like those of Gaidius major Z . The
dorsal spine of the head at once distinguishes it as a Gactanus. (PI. IX.,
figs. 7 and 8.)

4. Gactanus caudani (Canu,? vel nov.). A Gaetanus somewhat re-
sembling G. miles (Gbt.), but the anterior antenna only one and a half
times as long as the body ; the lamella of the posterior foot-jaw, as in
G. miles, not different, as stated by Canu, and the exopodites of the
first feet distinctly two-jointed (not three, as in Canu's species) ; the
basal of the fourth feet, like G. armiger, i.e. with tubal bristles, and not
with spines, as in G. miles (Gbt.). (PI. IX., figs. 20, 21, and 22).

This may be identical with Canu's sjl>. G. caudani {Ann. Univ. Lyon,
v. 26), but if so, the species is subject to variation. His description
referred only to a young <? . My specimens, of which there are several,
are adult females of a size of 5 mm. and over.

5. Gaidius major] (Wolfenden). A large Gaidius, 4-65 mm. long (and
over), more robust than G. pnngcns (Gbt.), with longer anterior antennae,
shorter spines of the last thoracic segment, three-jointed exopodites
of the first feet, and endopodites of the second feet clearly of two
joints. It is identical probably with the Chiridius hrevispinus of Sars,
and his Ch. tenuispinus is almost identical with Giesbrecht's species
G. piingens, with which the writer carefully compared it at Naples in
April, 1902. J Neither of Sars' species is a Chiridius.

The 3 averages 3-1 mm. long; the head is united with the first
segment, there is a one-pointed rostrum ; the spines of the last seg-
ment are slender ; the abdomen, of five segments, only little more than
a third of the length of the cephalothorax ; anterior antennte shorter
than the thorax, and of twenty-two segments, with long nineteenth

* "The Plankton of tlio Fahie Cbannel," No. YIII., G. Herljert Fowler. (Proceed.
Zool. Soc, 1903.) t Ibid. i Subsequently referred to.

XORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 115

joint ; the oral parts are retrograded ; the first to fourth feet as in the
female, the fifth pair rather like Fseudcetideus armatus S . each of two
basal joints, and a two-jointed exopodite, right foot the largest, with
last segment a curved thin joint ending in recurved spiny process, last
joint of the left exopodite spatulate ; rudimentary endopodites on each
side, the left simple, long, thin, the right short and club-shaped.
(PI. IX, figs. 7 and 8.)

6. FsfudaiAcleus armcdus* {nov. gen. et sp.). liesembling ^tideus in
many features. Strongly bifurcate rostrum in both sexes, last thoracic
segments united and produced into short spines. Cephalothorax three
times as long as the abdomen ; second basal of the posterior foot-jaw
three times as long as the endopodite ; endopodite of second feet two-
jointed; simple hairs on the margins of the basals of the fourth feet;
anterior antennai in the $ twenty-three-jointed (8-9, 24-25) ; mandi-
bles with exopodite twice as long as endopodite ; posterior antenna
with both rami nearly equal. 3 with rostrum ; anterior antennas
twenty-two-jointed; oral parts retrograded; a pair of fifth feet, the
right foot ending in a curved, spine-like process, the left foot shorter,
with broad-haired terminal segment ; rudimentary endopodite on each
side. Size, ? 3-68 mm. ; <? a little less. (PL IX., figs. 29, 30, and 31.)

This Copepod is identical with Sars' Chiridius armatus -j- and Boeck's
Euchoita armata. It is, however, neither a CJiiridius nor a Eachmta,
and from its general resemblance to JEtidcus I have named the genus
Pseudcetideus and the species armatus.

7. Eiichirclla carinata (Wolfenden). I have previously referred to
the 3 of this species found by me in the Faroe Channel (this Journal,
vol. vi., p. 36G, January, 1902). I have since found adult females in the
Atlantic, whicli confirm the correctness of the previous diagnosis. The
female is distinguished by the presence of a median cephalic crest and
helmet, a short, strong, one-pointed rostrum, in the proportions of the
posterior antennas (endopodite about half as long as the exopodite and
with 8-1-6 bristles on the second joint), and the absence of any spinula-
tion of the basals of the fourth feet. In size, 5 mm. (cephalothorax nearly
five times as long as the abdomen), this is one of the largest Euchirellas.
The bristles of the maxilla are, second basal = 5, endopodite =15.

* Subsequently referred to.

t The genus Chiridius, described by Sars {Crustacea of Norwaxj), contains only one true
Chiridius, viz. Ch. oltusifrons. His Ch. tenuispimis and Irevispinus are true Gaidius
(Giesbrecht), and his Ch. armatus a new genus Pseudcetideus, The modified bristles, large
and almost like tubal processes, of the fourth pair of feet, so characteristic of the genus
Gaidius, are found in the G. major and inmgens {Ch. brcvispinus and temdspinus, Sars)
in all my examples and in those kindly sent to me in April, 190'J, by Professor Sars, to
whom I then pointed out the nature of his species.

116 NOTES ON THE COPKPODA OF THE

The endopodite of the posterior foot-jaw is only one-tliird as long
as the second basal, which again is very much longer than the first
basal (proportions 11 : 19:6). The anterior anienn;e are a little longer
than the thorax, with the twenty-fifth joint partially divided from the
twenty-fourth (eighth coalesced with ninth), and the head is separated
by a dorsal line from the first thoracic segment. This Copepod is
entirely different from E. pidclira, galatea, or cnrticauda, especially in
the proportions and number of bristles of the posterior antennae, and
the absence of any spines on the first basal of the fourth feet. It
occurred at a depth of 400 fathoms, lat. 5.5° 47' N., and also in tlie
Faroe Channel.

la. Eiickinila curticauda, var. Atlantica. Head with strong crest
and lielmet, but no rostrum ; genital segment very protuberant, and
abdomen very short (about one-sixth the length of the cephalothorax) ;
endopodite of posterior foot-jaw only one-half the length of the second
basal, the three joints proportionate respectively 10:13:6; posterior
antennas with very slender endopodite, only one-quarter the length of
the exopodite, and end joint of the former with only 3 4- 2 bristles ;
head separate from the first thoracic segment ; maxilla with bristles of
second basal and endopodite much reduced ( = 6). The basals of the
fourth feet have only six rather broad-based and long spines, instead of
twelve to thirteen, as in E. curticauda (Gbt.), and also they differ in
some minor particulars. The latter is also a Pacific Ocean species,
the Atlantic variety being a little larger (3"80 mm.) than the Pacific.
The Atlantic form is a distinct variety if not a true species, and
the widely different habitats suggest specific differences. In the warm
area of the Atlantic, lat, 54° 30' N., it occurred at 300 fathoms.
Probably the E. curticauda of the " Oceana " collections (nine stations
from 809-1,710 fathoms) is this, or the previous species.

8, ^tideus tenuirostris {nov. sp.). It is certain that the yEtidcus
arrnatus of the Faroe Channel and North Atlantic is not identical
with that described by Giesbrecht from the Mediterranean, with which
I have compared it at Naples. The former has a much less pronounced
dorsal cephalic curve ; the rostrum is not nearly so strong or so greatly
produced, nor does it possess (as Sars has pointed out already) any
secondary knobs of chitin at the base of the rostral processes as in the
Mediterranean species. In addition the spines of the last thoracic
segment are not so long or strong, and the endopodite of the second
pair of feet is biarticulate. It therefore seems desirable to distinguish
it as a distinct species. Brady's Indian Ocean species {Chcdl. Report)
has not again been met with. I do not find any /Etideus in Mr.

XOKTII ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 117

Gardiner's Maldive collection, nor does Scott mention its occurrence in
Professor Herdman's collection of Ceylon Copepoda.

9, Faroella multiserrata {nov. gen. et sp.)* Slender two -pointed
rostrum ; head fused with first segment, but last two segments of the
thorax more or less completely divided, the posterior segment with long
lateral spines. Anterior antennte with eighth and ninth joints fused,
but the twenty-fourth distinctly separate from the twenty-fifth. Man-
dibles with exopodite shorter than the endopodite ; posterior foot-jaws
with endopodites not more than half the length of the exopodites ; first
feet with one-jointed endopodites, second pair two-jointed, the terminal
saws of the feet distinguished by an extraordinary number of fine and
closely-set teeth (69-70). Size of the ? 3-54 mm. and over, the <? about
the same. (PI. IX., figs. 26, 27, 28.)

It is not uncommon in the deep water of the Faroe Channel, and has
been traced by the writer as far south as Valentia in Ireland.

10. Chiridius Vanhoffeni {nov. sp.). One example only of a <? , which I
think to be identical with the Pseud oml amis armatus described by Yan-
hoffen (Ch'djdand Exped., 1891, II. Bd., Berlin, 1897), was taken in the
Faroe Channel. Length 3'1 mm.; head without rostrum, and last thoracic
segment produced into short spines ; anterior antennte of twenty-three
joints ; posterior antennse with the outer ramus twice as long as the
inner ; mandibles with endopodite only half the length of the exopodite,
the masticatory plate wanting; anterior foot-jaw almost obsolete, the
posterior foot-jaw with the endopodite more than half the length of the
second basal ; maxilla retrograded, inner lobes nearly obsolete, exopodite
large and with ten bristles ; first pair of feet with one-jointed endo-
podite, second pair with two-jointed endopodite ; fifth pair of one
ramus on each side, each of five segments, the right foot the longest ;
two short basal and three slender terminal joints, the last ending in a
delicate curved stylet process ; the left foot with larger basal joints, of
the three distal the proximal the largest, the distal short, spatulate,
and haired on the inner margin, (PI. IX., fig. 3.)

In the difierent segmentation of the feet and in other particulars this
Copepod differs from CIi. ohtusifrons, of which it might be the hitherto
unknown S . It is certainly not a Pseicdocalanus, and though there
must always be hesitation about giving an unknown c? specific rank,
it does not agree with any genus except Chiridius, and provisionally, at
any rate, must be distinguished from other species.

* This is probably identical with the species described by Sars as ^tidiopsis. His
description is, however, rather meagre, and as the writer's descriptions and lithographed
plates were prepared for publication two years ago, but have been held over for completion
u!' his monograph, he retains tlie name originally given to this genus and species.

118 NOTES OX THE COPErODA OF THE

11. Candacia rotunda (nov. sp.). This is distinguished from all other
Candacc species by the fact that the last thoracic segment is rounded
on each side instead of being produced into points ; the proximal part
of the anterior antenna3 is of seven joints, the last joint (twenty-fourth)
nearly as long as the two preceding joints; the two middle hooks of
the anterior foot-jaw of the same length, but shorter than the two end
claw bristles. The maxilla, with the second inner lobe, second basal,
and endopodite, of about equal length ; the third feet with the last
exopodite segment denticulated and short end spine slightly bent ;
fifth feet of three joints, terminal the longest, with three outer short
marginal spines, and one inner apical spine long. (PL IX., figs. 10, 11.)

Size of female, 3'2 mm. This is a deep-water species, taken in 300
fathoms in the North Atlantic.

12. Spinocalanus magnus {nov. sp.). Head partially separate from the
first segment ; genital segment as large as the next two ; f ureal segments
a little longer than the anal ; last thoracic segment produced on each
side; exopodite of first feet with four inner marginal bristles on the
last segment ; exopodites of second to fourth pairs with five bristles on
the last segment ; no fifth feet; joints of the feet very spinulose; anterior
antennae of twenty-four segments, the eighth and ninth fused, the
twenty-fourth separate from the twenty-fifth. The characters of the
feet clearly distinguish this species as a Sjnnocala^ms, of which it is
the largest known species, attaining a size of 275 mm. in the $ . It
was very common in deep water in the Atlantic off the west coast
of Ireland.

13. Xanthocalanus suhagilis {nov. sp.). Several examples of a
Xanthocalanus, taken off the Mull of GalloWay by scraping the sandy
bottom, resembled X. agilis very closely, but the fifth feet of the

? differed in length and proportions of the segments and of the three
terminal spines from Giesbrecht's species, and the S possessed a pair
of fifth feet instead of only one as in the Mediterranean species. The
right foot of four segments is only a little longer than the left of five
segments and a terminal stylet process. The exopodite of the female
maxilla has only nine bristles ; the endopodite of the anterior foot-jaw
has six or seven brush sensory processes and two vermiform processes.
A brush process also exists on the first basal of the posterior foot-jaw.
The fifth foot of the female has the basal joint the longest and broadest,
the margin beset with strong teeth, the second joint with a bunch of
hairs at the distal margin, the last joint spinulose on the surface, longer
than broad, and the inner marginal spine the largest of the three.

? 2-6 mm., <? 2-3 mm. The abdomen is not at all setose, as in
Giesbrecht's species. (PI. IX., figs. 17, 32.)

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 119

14. Xanthocahinns atlanticus (nov. sp.). Differs from X. aijilis aiul
horealis in the characters of the anterior antennae : very thick basally,
tapered distally, and much shorter than the cephalothorax. The first
joint of the fifth feet in the ? broader than long, with the inner
margin armed with closely set spines, the second joint short, the third
joint twice as long as broad, with short strong spines marginally, and
distally with four broad-based long spines, the inner the longest, the
surfaces of all three segments covered with short spines. Size 2'50 mm
Taken on a sandy bottom, at 375 fathoms west of Valentia. Distin-
guished from X (((jilis and horealis by the very short anterior antennae,
the fifth feet, and other minor characters. The swimming feet have
the segments densely covered with short spines. (PI. IX., figs. 24,
25, 33.)

15. Xanthocalamts cristatus {7ioi\ sp.). ? very large, o'O mm. ; head
triangular and with prominent crest ; anterior antenme extending to
the end of the f urea ; anterior foot-jaw with very strong curved hook
on the fifth lobe, endopodite of the same with seven short thick brush
processes and a long thin curved vermiform process ; posterior foot-
jaw with brush sensory process on first basal. Feet as in Xantliocalanus,
but fifth pair each of three joints, the first as broad as long, the second
longer than broad, the third two and a half times as long as broad, all
densely spinulose, with long and short spines intermixed on the surfaces,
the last segment with a row of long stout spines on the external surface,
and ending distally in two short, rather stout, spiny processes (not articu-
lating spines, as in other species), the innermost a little longer than
the outer, and a third similarly formed outer spiny process. (Tl. IX.,
figs. 18, 19.)

No other Xanthoccdanus has a crest. Sheaf-like sensory processes as
in Amcdlophora are absent ; the segmentation of the feet and of the
anterior antenna;, the spinulation of the feet, the separation of the
head from the first segment indicate it clearly to be a Xanthoccdanus.
Taken off the west of Ireland at a depth of 300 fathoms.

16. Scolecithrif^ similis {nov. sp.). Much resembling S. minor, but
the head rounded and oval, the last thoracic segment rounded with
rounded Hap-like projections; fifth feet one-jointed, twice as long as
broad, with very short inner marginal spine inside the apex, and longer
spine arising from just below the middle of the inner margin, not as
long as the distance between its origin and the apex of the segment.
The different shape of the head and corners of the last thoracic segment,
and the fifth feet, at once distinguish it from *S'. minor. (PI. IX., fig. 5,
6.) Size 1-50 mm. Several examples have been taken iu the Faroe
Channel and the Atlantic.

120 NOTES ON THE COPOPEDA OF THE

17. Scolccithrix atlanticus (nov. sp.). $ very large, 3*95 mm. long.
Anterior antennae twenty-three-jointed and longer than the whole body;
rami of posterior antennre nearly equal ; sensory processes of the anterior
foot-jaw both brush and vermiform, a brush process on the posterior
foot-jaw ; fifth pair of feet of two segments, distal the longest, with
rounded extremity, and one short stout bristle at the apex, and a
thick bristle twice as long arising from the inner margin. Feet like
Scolecithrix. There may be doubt whether this species should be
considered a Scolecithrix or a Xanthocalanus ; the twenty-three-jointed
antennae and coalesced head and first segment are more characteristic
of the former genus. It is a very large species, and was taken in 300
fathoms depth off the west coast of Ireland.

18. Lophothrix sccurifrons (nov. $2}.). Head with a strong crest, and
strongly pointed wing-like expansions of the last thoracic segment;
very short abdomen, with large genital segment, with a downward
projecting process in front and strong bunches of lateral hairs. Helmet-
shaped appendage of head produced anteriorly into a thick rostrum,
each ramus ending in a short point. Amalliform (sheaf-like) sensory
processes on the anterior foot-jaw, and a similar process on the posterior
foot-jaw. Anterior antennae of twenty-four segments reaching the
end of the furca. (PL IX., figs. 12, 13, 14, 15.) The animal closely
resembles the Scolecithrix securifrons described by Scott {Trans. Linn.
Soc), but differs in the segmentation of the anterior antennte and in
the possession of amalliform sensory processes apparently absent in
Scott's species. Size of ? 4'2 mm. Occurred in the warm area of the
north Atlantic.

Note. — Tlie sub-family Scolecithrichina is conveniently subdivided into the genera
Scolecithrix, Amallophora, and Lo}ihothrix. The characters distinguishing each are as
follows : —

1. Scolecithrix. Head usually without crest (only in S. securifrons, Scott) ; anterior
antenna nineteen to twenty-four jointed ; sensory processes of anterior and posterior foot-
jaws of one kind only (vermiform) ; fifth feet generally present in the $ but always
small and of one to three segments ; type species .S'. minor (Brady) and S. danae (Brady).

2. Amallophora (Scott). Head with crest and helmet-shaped projection ; no epistome ;
anterior antenna? of twenty-two joints ; foot-jaws with three kinds of sensory appendages,
amallaj, brush processes, and vermiform ; maxilla with seven bristles on the exopoditc,
nine on the en(loi)odite, second basal with four only ; fifth feet of two or three segments,
with very long inner bristle ; type species Amallophora magna (Scott).

3. Lophothrix (Giesb.). Head with a crest and helmet appendage, produced into
rostrum ending in short spines and not filaments ; anterior antenna twenty-four-jointed ;
maxilla with five bristles on the second basal, eight on the eudopodite, nine on the
exopodite ; sensory processss of the foot-jaws amallre and vermiform ; fifth feet of two or
three segments with one to three terminal spines apical and inner, usually strong epistomal
projection; type species L. frontalis (Giesb.). (PI. IX., figs. 41, 42.)

19. Hcterorhdhdus yrandis (nov. s^;.) (?). The largest known species of
Heterorhahdus, attaining a size of 6-60 mm. in length ; the anterior

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 121

antennae longer than the whole body ; the mandibles without long curved
teeth ; posterior foot-jaw without the long spine ; the fifth feet of the
2 with two stout spines on the surface of the second joint of the
exopodite, in the same position as the spines of the same segment in
H. longicornis (Gbt.). (PI. IX., fig. 36.) This may possibly be the same
species as the H. major of Dahl, of which, however, no description has
been published. Only two specimens were captured in deep water in
the Atlantic off the west coast of Ireland.

20. Lucicutia grandis {nov. sp.) (?). A 2 6-5 mm. long, the largest
known species of Lucicutia from the deep water of the Atlantic ; the
anterior antennae about four joints longer than the whole body ; the
genital segment asymmetrical ; the first pair of feet with tubular
process on the first basal ; all the swimming feet, including the fifth
pair, with three-jointed exopodites and endopodites. (PI. IX., figs. 37,
38.) Very pigmented, witli deep orange pigment about the mouth, and
all organs of the mouth and the feet coloured a shade of burnt sienna.
This may be the $ of the species described by Giesbrecht from the
Pacific, Z. grandis, of which, however, he only knew the 3 (6 mm. long).

21. Lucicutia magna (Wolfenden). A single specimen, a 3 3'54 mm.
long, was found by me in Fowler's Collection from the Faroe Channel.
Anterior antennae longer by one and a half joints than the whole body ;
the endopodites of the first feet two-jointed ; the right fifth foot with a
strong spiny process on the inner side of the second basal, and an
exopodite of two segments ; the rami of the left foot each of three
segments. (PI. IX., fig. 35, 35«.)

21a. Lucicutia atlantica {nov. sp.). $ 3"5 mm. long (cephalothorax
2-1, abdomen 1'4 mm.). Head separate from first segment, last two
segments fused, and as long as the two preceding. Furcal segments
nearly five times as long as broad and as long as the two last abdominal
segments. Anterior antennte longer than the whole body by four
segments ; rami of the posterior antennae about equal ; the basals and
endopodite of the posterior foot-jaws about equal lengths; maxilla
resembling Z. flavicornis, but exopodite larger. First feet with endo-
podite clearly only two-jointed, the second basal with a marginal
tubular process. Second feet with the end saw only one-third of the
length of the exopodite last joint. Fifth feet with the end spine only
one-half the length of the last exopodite segment, the margin not
crenated as in Z. fiavicornis, the inner marginal thick bristle rather
long (nearly two-thirds as long as the last joint of the exopodite)
slightly serrated at the distal end. Tlie only Lucicutias with a two-
jointed endopodite of the first foot are Z. Clausi and longiscrrcda. The
shape of the head alone distinguishes this species from the former, the

122 NOTES ON THE COPErODA OF THE

size and proportions of the saws of tlie feet from the latter. One
example only occurred at a depth of 400 fathoms at station 55° 47' N.
It may perhaps be the ? of L. magna, but is better described, pro-
visionally at least, as a new species.

22. Augaptilus zetesios, Wolfenden. A $ which has already been
described in this Journal (January, 1902).

23. Auga'ptilus magnus (nov. s^).). $ 7 mm. long and over. Anterior
antennae reaching to the end of furca ; genital segment larger than the
rest of the abdomen ; second abdominal segment as long, or a little
longer, than the anal segment ; furcal segments very short ; mandible
two-branched ; maxilla with seven strong hooks, outer lobe with five,
exopodite with only two, second inner lobe with one long hook bristle ;
both basal joints of the posterior foot-jaw of similar length ; endopodite
much shorter. Branches of the posterior antenna subequal. Itami of
the fifth feet three-segmented.

It has most general resemblance to A. mcgalHrns (Gbt.), a Pacific
Ocean form, while the furcal segments and shape of the abdomen some-
what resemble A. filigcrus, but it is nearly twice the size of the latter,
and differs in the anatomy of the anterior and posterior antenna?, maxilla,
etc. It is a purely deep-water form, found only in the warm area of the
Atlantic.

24. Augaptilus gibhus (nov. sjh). The back of the head has a remark-
ably gibbous swelling. The anterior antennae are not quite as long as
the whole animal. The exopodite of the posterior antenna is not half
the length of the endopodite ; mandible with two-branched palp ; basals
and endopodite of posterior foot-jaw equal in length ; genital segment
longer than the rest of the abdomen ; anal longer than the second, and
furcal longer than the anal segment ; maxilla with outer lobe with
three, inner first lobe with six hooks ; exopodite with four bristles.
Size, 2-75 mm.

25. Pseudocydopia Gieshrechti, Wolfenden. This was described in this
Journal (January, 1902).

26. JEgisthus atlanticus, Wolfenden. Mentioned in this Journal
(January, 1902).

This striking and beautiful little Copepod bears a very close resem-
blance to JEgisthus mucronatus (Gbt.), but differs in the following points :
there is no spine on the third segment of the anterior antennae ; there
is a long sensory process on the last joint resembling the sensory process
on the third segment (this is the only one present in yEgisth. mticroii.) ;
the first feet are clearly three-segmented (two-segmented in JEgisth.
muc.)\ the terminal lance bristle of the fifth foot is only about half the

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 123

length of the foot, and this foot is very clearly three-segmented (in
^'Eg. mif.cro)i. one-segmented).

On these grounds I hesitate to regard it as identical with Gies-
brecht's species. One specimen was taken in the l\iroe Channel
(Fowler's Collection), and a second was captured in lat. 50° 56' at 300
fathoms in June, 1903. Giesbrecht's species was a Pacific Ocean one.
The JEff. mucronatus recorded from eight stations of the Oceana given
by J. C. Thompson is probably identical with my species.

26«. Parangaptilus Buchani {nov. gen. et s}).). 2 3'25 mm. long
(cephalothorax 2*55, abdomen 0'7). The head very much narrowed in
front and general shape like an Augaptilus; two slender rostral filaments
very divergent; the abdomen of four distinct segments, the genital
very protuberant ventrally and twice as long as the next, which with
the middle and anal segment are each of the same size (PL IX., fig. 44) ;
the furcal segments not quite twice as long as broad, each with four tail
setoe (the longest about as long as the abdomen) and a short dorsal
accessory bristle; the last thoracic segment on each side dorsally ends in
a short stumpy spine ; anterior antennie of twenty-one joints, the first
and second comparatively long, the next nine very short and compressed,
the eleventh partly divided from the twelfth, the twentieth from the
twenty-first; the left antenna is a little longer than the right, neither
of them as long as the whole body ; the posterior antenna has the
cndopodite about twice as long as the exopodite ; the mandible is one-
branched only, the masticatory plate like Arietcllus ; the maxilla has
the inner lobes much reduced, the second basal and endopodite fused
with only three distal bristles, the first inner lobes with five, and
exopodite short with two bristles ; the anterior foot-jaw is very like
that of AricteUus divided into three segments, the first two with small
lobes and short bristles, the endopodite short and with very long
bristles (eight) provided with augaptiloid cups ; posterior foot-jaws with
the endopodite as long as the second basal, its segments, five in number,
progressively diminishing in size, the first two large ; many of its
bristles have the augaptiloid cups ; the first four pairs of feet have
endopodites and exopodites of three segments each; the fifth feet are
peculiar, consisting only of a foliaceous plate on each side, imperfectly
segmented into two, and carrying each one long marginal and a longer
apical bristle. (PI. IX., fig. 45.)

The animal is an adult with well-formed genital segment ; the four-
jointed abdomen removes it from the genus AiKjaiyiilns ; the shape is
augaptiloid and not like ArktcUus, and the fifth feet are quite peculiar.
It seems to partake of some of the characters of each of these genera,
but cannot, I think, be referred to either; I attach to it the name of

124 NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

my sailing master, to whose constant labour in the management of
instruments I owe a great deal.

In addition to the before described new species the following are
new : —

27. Hcterorhahdus longicornis (Giesb.) S . This was described by me
in this Journal (vol. vi., 1902) under the name of H. zetesios. Since that
time I have taken many specimens in the Faroe Channel and the
Atlantic, and have come to the conclusion that it is the 3' of H. longi-
cornis, the $ of which is of common occurrence in the north Atlantic,
and occurs not infrequently in the Faroe Channel. The anterior
antennse are longer than the whole body by four joints, the left a
clasping organ of six segments beyond the geniculation ; the left furcal
segment is much longer and broader than the right. The anterior foot-
jaw has one thick hooked bristle on the fifth lobe, but no toothcomb
bristles, and the fifth feet have on the right side an upright and stiff
process of the second basal armed with stiff bristles on the inner
margin, and the proximal inner margin of the first joint of the exopo-
dite with a protuberance armed with four teeth, and a second smaller
protuberance above with a bunch of short hairs. The second basal
joint of the foot of the opposite side is armed with short, stiff bristles,
the end joint of the exopodite produced into a long curved spine with
a shorter marginal spine on the inner side. (PI. IX., fig. 34.) The
mandibles with three teeth on the left side, four teeth on the right
masticatory plate.

In the report by I. C. Thompson upon the " Oceana " Copepoda * is
figured on Plate VI. a pair of fifth feet of Mctridia venusta, which are
unlike any known Metridia feet, and resemble those of Hdcrorhahdus
longicornis ^. The general appearance of the whole animal and the
description in the letterpress probably refer to a Hcterorhahdus, which
the writer had wrongly thought to be a Metridict.

28, Phyllopus hidentatus (Brady). The female of this species is of not
uncommon occurrence in the Atlantic west of Ireland. It has been
fully described by Giesbrecht. Put much uncertainty has existed
about the ^ . Prady's example was undoubtedly a male. The <? is
2'25 mm. in length, and closely resembles the ? except in the struc-
ture of the anterior antennaj and fifth pair of feet. The margins of
tlie last thoracic segment are not in any specimens produced like the
figures of Brady {C/icdl. Rep., " Copepoda "). The abdomen is of five
segments, which, with the furcal segments, are of about equal length.
The left anterior antenna is of twenty joints, and between the seven-
teenth and eighteenth is a geniculating joint, ^sthetasks are numerous,

* Ann. and May. Nat. Hist., vol. xii. I'l. VI.

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AXP THE FARoE CHANNEL. 125

and paired at the basal joints. The fifth feet have each a two-jointed
basopodite and three-jointed exopodite ; the foot of the right side has
a rudimentary endopodite, broad and without spines. The second
exopodite segment carries two distal hooks ; the foot of the other side
has a much simpler exopodite, the last joint long and broad distally,
without spines. The second basopodite of each side has a long, thin,
feathered bristle. (PI. IX., fig. 16.) The FJ/i/Uojn'S Udentatiis, figured
by I. C. Thompson,* is certainly not identical with my species, if the
former is correctly drawn. My Atlantic specimens are, I think, without
a doubt the 3 of the species described by Giesbrecht ; and the females
captured at the same time by me agree entirely with the description
and figures of the last-named authority, and not with Brady's. The
"bidentate process" does not exist in the Atlantic specimens, and as
I have minutely examined quite a dozen, it is not likely that it has
been broken off in all of them,

29. Ctenoccdanufi Tenuis <? (nov.). On two occasions, once in the
Faroe Channel and once in the Atlantic, off the west coast of Ireland,
this Copepod has been taken, the 9 only (described by Giesbrecht) of
which is known.

The S is 1"25 mm. long; the anterior antennae of twenty-one joints,
the posterior antennte, with the exopodite, nearly twice as long as
the endopodite ; the exopodite of the mandible longer than the endo-
podite, a chitinous remnant of a masticatory plate remaining, but
without teeth ; anterior foot-jaws retrograded, posterior foot-jaws with
the two basal joints of about the same length, the endopodite longer
than either ; first feet with a one-jointed endopodite, second pair with
a two-jointed endopodite, the marginal spines especially of the fourth
pair modified, as Giesbrecht has described as characteristic of the
species, having peculiarly crenated edges ; fifth feet, one long (left)
foot of five segments, basal two joints largest and broadest, the distal
three joints small, the end one spatulate with bundles of short, stiff
bristles on the inner margin ; the right side carries a very short stump
only, representing the foot. (PI. IX., fig. 9.)

30. Miiridia Normani j (/loi:). The S only of this spAcies has
been described by Giesbrecht; the $ has hitherto remained unknown.
It is of common occurrence in the Atlantic, west of Ireland.

Length of the 2 2-5 mm. ; anterior antennas of twenty-five joints,
a little longer than the whole body, the first, second, and third with
prominent but not recurved spines on the upper margin, tliat of the
third segment the longest, the fifth and sixth segments witli shorter
spines; both second feet with the usual notch and hook; fifth pair

* A7in. and Mag. iXat. Hist., vol. xii. I'l. IH.

12G NOTES ON THE COPErODA OF THE

of feet, the left longer tliau the right, of three segments, with three
apical bristles, of which the middle is the longest, and a long outer
marginal bristle on the second segment; right foot smaller, indistinctly
three-segmented, with only two apical bristles of similar length. (PI. IX.,
figs. 39, 40.)

The genital segment is not so long as the next two; the furca is
longer than the anal, nearly four times as long as broad, and asym-
metrical, that of the right side shorter than the left. This Copepod
was frequently found in company with undoubted ^ examples of
Met. Normani.

DicJiotomons hrancMng of tail seice. A curious condition was first
observed by me in many instances amongst the Copepoda (referred to
me by my friend Mr. Stanley Gardiner) from the ]\Ialdive Islands of
tlie Indian Ocean. This consisted of a branching and sub-branching
of the setcE of the tail, an attempt at dichotomous division, so that in
many instances the whole of the tail setae were converted into a sort of
brush. I had never observed this in any Copepoda from our more
northern regions, and looked upon it as a condition probably peculiar
to the Copepoda of the Maldive region ; but I have lately observed
exactly the same in two examples from the Atlantic taken west of
Valentia, in Ireland, viz. once in UndeucJiceta major and once in Euchceta
norvegica. In the Maldive seas it has occurred with great frequency in
Calamis vulgaris, and also in Galocalanus, Paracalanus aculeatus, Scolc-
cithrix Danae, UuchireUa hella. It will be observed that it is always in
the Amphaskandria that this condition occurs. In the Maldive Collec-
tion it is of such frequent occurrence that it suggests a special variety
in each instance. What the precise significance may be I do not know,
possibly a device to assist flotation, but it is curious that it should occur
also in examples from the North Atlantic. The dichotomous branching
is very irregular, sometimes of one seta only, or two, or all the setae of
one side only, or of both sides.

PiEMARKS ON THE HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE COPEPODA.

Calamis finmarchicus. Sars (Crustacea of Norway) has recently
endeavoured to distinguish the Northern and Polar form under the
name of C. flnmarchicus from a southern form C. helgolandicus, basing
his opinion upon the size, length of the antennae, shape of the head, and
structure of the fifth feet. I have very carefully compared examples
from Thorshaven, the cold area of the Faroe Channel, the warm area of
the Atlantic, and the English Channel, and I am of opinion that the
factors upon which Sars bases this distinction are too inconstant to
admit such a separation into specific forms. Examples from the

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FARiiE CHANNEL. 127

southern waters are met with in which the shape of the liead and the
size of the animal, length of antennae, etc., are in no wise different
from the northern species. Tiie structure of tlic fifth feet of the 3 is
known to vary very considerably, as Giesbrecht long ago pointed out
for examples from Hong Kong. Even in Faroe examples (and those
from more southerly latitudes) this is also the case, and the fact is that
the species is very variable. Being also the most prolific Copepod
known, at any rate in northern waters, and constantly present in various
stages of development, is it not more natural to regard these variations
as only different stages of growth ? At any rate, the very careful
measurements and study which I have made of this Copepod between
the lat. 51°-62° N. convince me that the points stated by Sars are not
sufficiently reliable to justify such a differentiation of the species.
The horizontal distribution of this Copepod is known to be very wide.
In the Faroe Channel it is extraordinarily abundant, but south of the
Wyville-Thompson ridge it appears to get less frequent the further
south we go, and though taken throughout the Atlantic traverse, it
does not occur in great numbers at about lat. 51° (at any rate in 1903).
It is, however, known to reach the deep water under the Sargasso
Sea (Dahl).

Eucalanus. In a former list (this Journal, January, 1902) I included
EiLC. attenuatus in the list of Copepoda found in the Faroe Channel.
It is true that I found it once in a sample from Station A 1 in the
Faroe Channel, but I am of opinion now that this sample had become
contaminated with some material from the Indian Ocean, and as I have
never found it in any other samples from the Faroe Channel, including
those collected by Fowler, which were afterwards referred to me, I must
conclude that it does not occur in the Faroe Channel. In a subsequent
paper by Dr. Fowler in Proc. Zool. Soc, February 3rd, 1903, it is spoken
of as forming 22 per cent, of the Epiplankton and 41 per cent, of the
Mesoplankton of this region. This, however, is an error, and it should
be eliminated from the list. The species referred to is undoubtedly
F. elongatns. This species is very abundant in the Faroe Channel,
not uncommon in the fiords of Shetland, and occurs throughout the
Atlantic stations as far south as 51°, but less abundantly than in
the Faroe Channel, where it is apparently indifferent to temperature,
occurring at all depths. It is, however, curious that it does not extend
further north to the Norwegian Sea, and is not mentioned by Sars
as having been seen off the Norwegian coast. Its northern limitation
appears to be very well defined.

Hue. crassus is frequently met with in tlie Faroe Channel, and has
occurred in great alnmdance in some hauls with the " midwater open
net" at 45 to 50 fathoms. It is also met with througliout the Atlantic

128 NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

stations, and is very common in Mr. Gardiner's Maldive Collections,
thus appearing to thrive under widely differing conditions as to
temperature, etc. Its northward and eastern extension appears to be
as well defined as that of the previous species, as it is not mentioned
by Sars.

J\h incalanus. The Rldncalanus cornutus, also included in the list
before mentioned, must be removed for the same reasons as E. atteni'i/fi'.s.
It never occurs in the Faroe Channel, and I have never yet found it in
the Atlantic north of 51°. lat. In Fowler's list (P.Z.S., June 21st, 1898)
it is recorded as frequent, especially in the Mesoplankton. In Fowler's
collection it was certainly absent, but Rhine, nasntus was common, and,
in fact, is scarcely ever absent from the Epi- or Meso- plankton of this
region, and it is evident that the two species have been confused.
B. cornvtns is distinctly a southern ocean form, and all records of its
occurrence beyond 30° N. must be looked upon with suspicion. Rhine,
nasutvs occurs often in great abundance in the Faroe Channel, and
frequently throughout the Atlantic traverse. I have found it in the
Maldive Collection, but very sparingly, and Scott mentions it among
the Ceylon Copepods. Like Euccdanus, its northern distribution is
apparently well defined, having occurred only at two stations of the
cruise of the Michael Sars, in deep water off the coast of Iceland, and
once in the North Sea between Scotland and Norway.

Pleuromamma. PI. ahdominalis is not common in the Faroe Channel,
while PI. robusta (Dahl) occurs with great frequency. Consequently
the records of PL ahdominalis in Fowler's list {loc. cit.), and the figures
(5 per cent. Epiplankton and 58 per cent. Mesoplankton) in his
second paper (February 3rd, 1903) must be doubted. Pleur. rohusta
occurred abundantly in Fowler's collection, and in my own Faroe
collections it is the common Pleuromamma of the Faroe Channel
and North Atlantic (51° to 62° N.). Though PI. ahdominalis does occur
in the North Atlantic, it is comparatively rare in my collections.

The distribution of this Copepod {PL rohista) is not unlike that of
Eucalanus and Rliinccdanns. Sars mentions the occurrence of a few
specimens " somewhat north of the Faroe Islands," and two specimens
only from Norway. It occurred throughout my Atlantic traverse in
1903, and for four years successively has been always abundant in the
Faroe Channel, but north and east of Shetland it appears to have a fairly
well defined limit, though apparently reaching, in small numbers, the
coast of Norway. PL ahdominalis was not common in the Atlantic
traverse. PL ahyssalis has occurred in my experience only once in the
Faroe Channel.

Euehirella. Only two species of Euchirella occur in the Faroe
Channel, viz. E. r'ostrata and E. carinata. The former is of frequent

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 129

occurrence. What was meant by E. 2}iilehra (frequent at 450 to 320
fathoms) in Fowler's list {P.Z.S., June 21st, 1898) I do not know, but
I am pretty confident that it was not E. imklira, and probably was
E. rostmta. I found the latter species in Fowler's collection, and I
have taken it several times since, but it has not occurred in my collec-
tions in the Atlantic south of the Wyville-Thompson ridge, being there
replaced by a variety of E. eurticauda. E. rostrata does not apparently
occur in the Norwegian Sea, but it is recorded by Scott in the Ceylon
Copepoda. In the neighbouring Maldive Islands, however, I have not
met with it, but only E. hella. That it should occur at such widely
different localities is not a little curious. The limitation previously
given by Giesbrecht {F. v. Fl. N.) was 44° N. to 41° S.

Paracalamis parvus. Found plentifully in Christiana Fjord by Sars,
and South Norway, though not apparently further north, none having
been observed at Bergen by Nordgaard, nor in the Plankton samples
from the Northern Ocean examined by G. 0. Sars (Sars' Crust. Nonvay,
p. 18), and common round the British coasts. It occurs in the Faroe
Channel, and as far south, at any rate, as lat. 51^ (Valentia in Ireland) ;
occasional in deep-water samples, it is not common in the open ocean.
It has probably not such a wide southern distribution as has been
imagined. Met with in the Indian Ocean and Mediterranean, I think
there is reason to differentiate the two forms, boreal and Mediterranean
(and Indian Ocean), as at least distinct varieties. A careful examina-
tion of the figures of this species given by Sars (Crust. Norway) and
Giesbrecht {F. u. Fl. Golfes Neapel) discloses differences, and I have
made a detailed examination of examples from the Faroe Channel and
from the Indian Ocean (Maldives) for the purpose of comparison.

The Southern Ocean examples are found constantly to be rather
smaller than the northern, the basal joints of the feet are more
densely armed with short spines (in the northern variety these are
almost entirely absent, especially on the fourth pair), the basal joints
and the last segment of the exopodites (fourth pair) are broader in
proportion to the length (exopodite 3 is five times as long as broad in
the boreal variety, only four as long as broad in the Indian variety),
and the anterior antennai are rather longer in proportion to the body
in the southern variety. On the whole the southern variety may be
said to be constantly smaller, more spiny, and with less attenuated
segments of the feet (in which the marginal teeth are also stronger
and coarser) than the northern. This difference is also noted in
comparing the figures of Giesbrecht's P. parvus from the Mediter-
ranean with those of Sars' P. loarvus from Norway. They are not
distinct species, but undoubted varieties, and the northern form,
though extending as far south as lat. 51° (Valentia), does not prob-

NEW SERIES.— VOL. VII. NO. 1. I

1:*0 NOTES ox THE COPEPODA OF THE

ably reach the Mediterranean, from which point southwards the
southern variety extends. The species described by Scott as P. jxirvits
from the Gulf of Guinea must, T think, be designated P. acukatus (Gbt.).

Calornlanus jx^^^'o. The occurrence of this species north of 50° IST. is
unusual, its previous limitation being 30° N. Two undoubted examples
occurred in hauls made west of Valentia, but in this case it was probably
an accidental wandering beyond its proper limitations.

Gtenocalanus vanus and Calanus tenuicornis must probably be regarded
as having wandered far out of their usual habitat when found, the former
in the Faroe Channel, the latter off the west coast of Ireland. The
former is recorded, however, by Giesbrecht as rather common in the
Antarctic Ocean ( Voy. du Belgica).

Hctcrorhahdus. The species which I had previously named H. Clnusii
(this Journal, January, 1902) should be //. norvegicus. Until the
publication of Sars' recent work {Crust, of Noncay) no full account,
and no figures of the original species of Boeck were available. I am
now convinced that the Faroe examples are really Boeck's species,
H. norveyicus, which extends southwards at any rate to 52" N.

The H. zetesios recorded in that list I now think to be the male of
H. lonyicornis, previously unknown, and I have taken it on many
occasions since that date, both in the Faroe Channel and the Atlantic.

H. norvegicus is distinctly a boreal species, while H. Jongicornis (vel
zetesios) belongs just as certainly to the warm area, occurring with
considerable frequency in the warm Atlantic area. The <? is of such
frequent occurrence in this region that it is curious that it should have
been overlooked in previous records. H. vipera and H. abyssalis
occurred only in the warm area, and have never been seen north
of the Wyville-Thompson ridge. II. grandis is certainly only a very
deep water species.

The Hctcrorliahidm are species which seek deep water and do not
approach the coasts, at any rate in the North Atlantic. H. norvegicus
is capable of existence within a very extreme range of temperature,
from the polar water of the Faroe Channel to the warm Atlantic.
II. longicornis can apparently endure greater extremes than II. vipera,
but is not so robust as the first-named species. Amongst Epiplank-
ton I have found only quite young and undeveloped examples of
Heterorhahdus.

Candace. What is meant by Candace truncata in Fowler's list {P.Z.S.,
June, 1898) it is impossible to say. It is a Pacific Ocean species.
Probably Thompson meant C. norvcgica (Boeck), which has received
a full description from Sars (in Crustacea of Norway) and extends
southwards, at any rate as far as 51° N., where I took it at a depth
of 300 fathoms.

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 131

Chiridius. In 1892 Giesbrecht established this genus for a Copepod
{Ch. poppei) of small size (1'8 mm.), which was characterised by the
absence of rostrum and the very short endopodites of posterior antennae
and mandible.

Sars has extended the genus by the inclusion of four species — Ch.
armata, Ch. h-evispinus, Ch. tenuispinus, and Ch. ohtusifrons. There
can, however, be no doubt that hrevispimts and tenuispinus are really
examples of Giesbrecht's genus Gaidius. In both occur the modified
tubal bristles of the basal joint of the fourth feet, which Giesbrecht re-
marked long ago to be midway between the ordinary bristles of ^tideus
and the spines and teeth of Euchirella. Chiridius teimispinus (Sars)
is identical with Gaidius horecdis (described by me in this Journal,
January, 1902), and Chiridius brcvispinus (Sars) is identical with the
species which I had previously named Gaidius major.

Chiridius armatus (Sars), owing to its possession of a two-pointed
rostrum, is clearly not a Chiridius, and from its close resemblance to
u^tideiLs was, two years ago, placed by me in another genus to which
I gave the name Pseudmtidcus. (See Report of the Brit. Assoc., the
Zoological Station at Naples, 1902.)

Consequently only one of Sars' species, viz. Chiridius ohtusifrons
remains to be included in the genus Chiridius, which now includes
only CJi. poppci (Gbt.) and Ch. ohtusifrons (Sars). The latter form,
which appears to have been abundant in the Polar basin in Nansen's
Expedition (Sars, loc. cit.), occurs also, though not commonly, in the
Faroe Channel, and my examples agree entirely with the description
given by Sars.

It may be doubted if the Gaidius pungens of Giesbrecht is really
identical with the Faroe Channel and North Atlantic forms, for in the
former the second pair of feet have a one-jointed endopodite, while in
the latter it is distinctly two-jointed, added to which must be considered
the widely different localities of habitat, which would at once lead to
a supposition of non-identity. (PI. IX., tig. 43.)

G. 2)ungens (Giesbrecht).

Exopodite of first foot two segments.
Endopodite of second foot one segment.
Spiny prolongation of last segment shorter than in horealis.
Size, 9 3-2 mm. (Pacific Ocean).

G. horealis (Wolfenden), Ch. tenuispinus and G. tenuispinus (Sars).
Exopodite of first foot indistinctly three segments.
Endopodite of second foot two segments.
Spiny prolongation of last segment longer than pwujens.
Size, ? 3-8 mm. (North Atlantic).

132 NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

In addition there are minor differences in the relative proportions of
the segments of the feet, number of teeth on the terminal saws, hooked
bristles of the anterior foot-jaws, proportions and length of the segments
of the posterior foot-jaws (first and second basals shorter and broader).

The differences, though small, along with the widely different habitats,
cause me to hesitate before regarding them as identical, and probably
they are varieties,

Gaetanus. Of the two species of Gaetanus (armiger and major) which
I find common in the Atlantic, and somewhat more uncommon in the
Faroe Channel, the doubt may be expressed (as in the case of Gaidius)
whether the species G. armiger is really identical with Giesbrecht's
Pacific Ocean examples. Specimens from the Atlantic clearly have
the modified tubal bristles on the basal of the fourth feet (apparently
absent in Giesbrecht's species), and are larger than Giesbrecht's species
(viz. 4-4 mm., as compared with 3-2 mm.), but otherwise the resemblance
is very great. However, combined with such widely different habitat,
it might be considered advisable to regard them as different species, in
which case our northern species might be distinguished as G. ailanticus.
No doubt can be entertained in the case of Gaetanus caudani that it is
not identical with G. miles (Gbt.), though doubt may be felt whether
the specimen described by Canu {Ann. Univ. Lyon, vol. xxvi.) is identical
with the North Atlantic examples ; but as this appears to have been an
immature male, a proper comparison can scarcely be made.

With regard to the horizontal distribution of the genera Gaidius and
Gaetanus, Gaidius is of constant occurrence in the deep water only of
the Faroe Channel, and though it wanders south into the warm Atlantic,
it is by no means of such frequent occurrence as further north. Gaidius
major, and to a less degree G. 'puwjens, are in the North Atlantic
distinctly boreal species, occurring with frequency in the Polar seas
(Sars). Chiridius obtusifrons seems at present to be still more markedly
a Polar species, occurring sparingly in the cold under- water of the Faroe
Channel, and Fseudwtideus armcdus has the same distribution as Gaidius.
Both can be traced down as far as lat. 51° N., possibly further south.

Gaetanus species, on the contrary, appear to be of more a warm
Atlantic area habitat. Their frequency diminishes going northwards,
and Gaetanus is not mentioned in Sars' lists. G. major alone passes
into the Faroe Channel, 0. armiger and caudani not appearing north
of the Wyville-Thompson ridge, though on one occasion I took an un-
developed example (? G. miles vel caudani) just south of this locality.

Eucliceta. E. marina, described in Fowler's paper as common at
various depths, is erroneous.* It does not occur in the Faroe Channel,
nor have I found it in the North Atlantic, at any rate as far south as
* Its inclusion in my list (tliis Journal, January, 1902) was also an error.

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL. 133

51° N. Two species, E. norverjica and harhata, are common ; the third,
E. glacialis, is rather rare. The first species occurs in so many stages
of development that Thompson, who reported upon Fowler's Copepoda,
was probably misled. Tliough doubt has been expressed upon the
accuracy of the diagnosis of E. harhata, there is no doubt that this
is a good species. Each of the three differs, especially in the form
of the genital segment of the female, the length of the appendicular
tail setffi, the structure of the first and second feet, and the anatomy
of the last segment of the fifth foot of the (? , especially in its "scissors "
arrangement. What is meant in Thompson's list by E. hessii and E. gigas
(Brady) it is difficult to say. At any rate only the three Euchcctas
mentioned are as yet known to occur in the Faroe Channel.

E. norvegica extends southwards into the warm Atlantic area, at
any rate, as far south as 51" IST. It is fairly common in the warm
area, but not so much so as in the deep water of the Faroe Channel,
where it is seldom absent from deep hauls ; it is thus capable of
ranging through wide differences of temperature. Though, as I am
informed by Sir J. Murray, it is of common occurrence in the surface
waters of some of the Western Scotch lochs, I have never seen an adult
in the surface area of the Faroe Channel or Atlantic. Young and
undeveloped specimens are not uncommon near the surface, but the
adult animal appears to prefer the deep water down to 500 to 600
fathoms, and to extend northwards to the Polar basin.

E. glacialis, observed abundantly in the Polar basin (Hansen), but
seldom in the Norwegian Sea, is of rare occurrence in the Faroe
Channel, and once only it occurred in the warm Atlantic area.

E. acuta, of which a few undoubted examples were met with in lat.
50° 56' and 12° 6' W. long, at 300 fathoms depth, has hitherto had
a northern limit of only 41° N. It has lately been recorded by Scott
from the Indian Ocean.

E, harhata, first described by Brady from the South Atlantic (Eio
Janeiro), and lately by Scott from Ceylon, occurring with frequency in
the Faroe Channel, has thus a very wide range. In the Atlantic it is
purely a deep-water species, occurring once at 500 fathoms in lat. 55°
47' N.

These three species {E. norvegica, glacialis, harhata) may be dis-
tinguished from each other by the following points (cf. Fig. 1 in text): —

E. norvegica, $ . The last thoracic segment on each side ending in a
blunt spine. The genital segment with genital swelling occupying the
lower part of the segment, the opening nearly round, guarded on each
side by a prominent blunt tubercle. Second foot : the external spine
of exopodite 2 does not reach the end of the first marginal spine of
exopodite 3, the second spine of exopodite 3 does not nearly reach the

134

NOTES ON THE COPEl'ODA OF THE

end of the segment. First foot: exopodite 1, with partial division into
two segments, margin very concave above and convex below, with a
marginal bristle not reaching the end of the segment. Appendicular
bristle of the tail very long. Colour greenish yellow ; about 8 mm. long.
E. gJacialis. The last thoracic segment rounded and without tip.
Genital segment very prominent with conical swelling ; genital orifice
guarded on each side by an upper and lower tubercle, and opening oval

1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
6.

Fig. 1. Comparison of three species of Euchaeta.

Euchxta^glacialis.

I)

,, Genital segment, ventral surface.
norvegica.

,, Genital segment, ventral surface.
barbata,

,, Genital segment, ventral surface.

7. Last two segments of cxo25odite of second feet of Eiich. glacialis.

8. „ ,, ,, ,, Euch. norvegica.

9. 11 ,, ,, „ Euch, barbata.

(broader than long) ; the genital swelling occupies more the middle of
the segment, which is much swollen laterally. Second foot, with the
marginal spine of exopodite 1 very large, reaching the tip of the first
spine of exopodite 2 ; the second marginal spine of exopodite 3 larger
than in E. norvegica and reaching the end of the segment. First foot
without trace of segmentation in the exopodite 1 and its marginal seta
very small. Appendicular bristle very siiort. Colour greenish yellow.

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FARuE CHANNEL. 135

with a quantity of red pigment diffused, especially about the mouth
organs ; size, about 10 mm.

-&'. harhata. Last thoracic segment rounded on each side. Genital
segment not so swollen as the other two species, swelling occupying the
middle of the segment, more protuberant above than below ; genital
orifice oval, broader than long, guarded by lateral lamellar swelling on
each side. Second foot, with marginal spine of exopodite 1 stout and
reaching the end of the first spine of exopodite 3 ; second spine of
exopodite 3 not reaching the end of the segment. First foot, with
exopodite distinctly segmented into 3. Appendicular bristle long.
Colour always bright red, feet and mouth organs coloured red ; size,
10-11 mm. ; very hirsute.

Haloptilm. II. acutifrons (Gbt.), recorded by Sars once from the
Polar Sea and once from the Norwegian Sea, occurred twice only in the
Atlantic townettings. H. loiujicornis, recorded by Sars once only from
a station between Finmark and Bear Island, was captured several times
in the North Atlantic, and once only in the Faroe Channel cold area.

Neither of these species can be regarded as indigenous to the north
cold ocean. Tlieir distribution is pronouncedly southern, and H. lonyi-
cornis extends from the Mediterranean to the Indian Ocean, where it is
very common round the Maldive Islands.

Av.(japtilus. The occurrence of several members of this genus in
the North Atlantic is interesting. Only one of them am I able to
thoroughly identify with any species described in the list of Giesbrecht
and Schmeil {Das Tierreicli, "Copepoda"), only three of which, by
the way, are European, four being Pacific Ocean species, and one
recorded only from the Gulf of Guinea,

The description of Aiujajptilus fjlacialis (Sars), said by this authority
to be a Polar species, is not at the moment of writing available
to me. The J briefly described by I. C. Thompson is in all proba-
bility not this species at all, the size given by Thompson,* 4 mm.,
being greatly in excess of that of A. palumhoi (Gbt.), viz. 2*25 mm.
? , and no truly Pacific Ocean f forms have yet been recorded
from the North Atlantic. While the three species taken by Scott
in the Gulf of Guinea appear to be as much epiplank tonic as meso-
planktonic (25-360 fathoms), in the " Oceana " report the AugcqMus
species appear to be only niesoplanktonic, all being captured at 1,000
fathoms or under. In the North Atlantic none of my species appeared
above 300 fathoms. Two of them are new, and only one, A. lon>/i-
cav.datas (Glaus) has a wide range (Mediterranean, Gulf of Guinea,
and Pacific Ocean).

* *' 'Oceana' Copepoda," Ann. and Marj. Nal. Hist., vol. xii.
t ^Iwjai). puliunlui, bullifcr, mcgalunis.

l.!6 NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

Lucicutia species show a distribution similar to other warm-water
species, and may be regarded as wandering into the Fariie Channel by
accident. L. Jiavicornis is not often found there, but increases in
frequency further south of the Wyville-Thompson ridge. It has a very
extensive range, occurring with frequency al)0ut the Maldive Islands of
the Indian Ocean.

Mctridia species. M. longa is clearly a distinctly northern form,
occurring with great frequency in the deep water of the Faroe Channel,
and at very low temperatures, and is traced down the North Atlantic,
where it occurs with much less frequency and in deep water. M. lucens,
on the contrary, is apparently very common in the warm area of the
Atlantic ; equally with the cold area of the Faroe Channel, at any rate
as far south as lat. 50' N., south of which, however, it appears only
doubtfully to reach.

M. I^^ormcmi, which was described by Giesbrecht from the Faroe
Channel, has not occurred in any of my collections in that region for
the last four years, but was common in the North Atlantic during the
summer of 1903, especially between lat. 50° and 55° ; its presence in
the Faroe Channel at any time is therefore probably accidental.

31. hrevicauda, of which several examples occurred off the Irish coast
in 1903, has hitherto been regarded entirely as a Pacific Ocean species
(Giesbrecht). M. longa, and especially M. lucens, may be regarded as
typical northern cold-area forms.

Oncea species (especially 0. conifera) are rarely absent from any tow-
netting in the Faroe Channel or North Atlantic in deep water ; they
are very rarely, however, found at the surface. The genus is cosmo-
politan and has representatives in the Indian Ocean nearly as abundantly
as the northern seas. The same may be said of Oithona, especially
0. plumifcra and similis, and both Oncea conifera and Oithona similis
are recorded by Giesbrecht from the Antarctic Ocean {Voycuje clu S.Y.
Belgica, 1902). The same may be said of Microsctella atlantica, common
throughout the Faroe Channel, the North Atlantic, less common in the
Indian Ocean (Maldives, Wolfenden), Ceylon (Scott), and in the
Antarctic Ocean (Giesbrecht lac. cit.). Bradyidius armatus is similarly
cosmopolitan, frequent in the Faroe Channel, round the British Isles,
occurring also in the Mediterranean, and round the Maldive Islands of
the Indian Ocean. Acartia Clausii is similarly cosmopolitan, and along
with Oncea conifera, Oithona plumifera and similis, and Ectinosonia
{Microsctella) atlantica, indiirerent to depth and temperature. Scolccithriv
minor is also widely distributed, very common in the Fahie Channel,
but less common in the North Atlantic.

Aniallophora magna occurred witli frequency in the warm Atlantic
area, especially about lat. 51° to 52° N., in the summer of 1903. Scott

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAKOE CHANNEL. 137

has described it from the Gulf of Guinea, and Sars states that it was
abundant in the Polar basin crossed by Nansen ; it is recorded by
Giesbrecht from the Pacific, near Bergen (Nordgaard), and " at some
distance north of the Shetland Isles " (Sars). I have never once found
it in the Faroe Channel. Considering its widely differing habitats, it is
not easy to see why it should be described by Sars {Crust. Nonvcuj, p.
53) as of " undoubtedly Arctic origin." An allied species, A. hrevicornis,
is recorded by Scott once from a locality east of the Shetland Isles. The
same Copepod occurred in the cold area in July, 1902, but differs from
Sars' description in the entire absence of amalliforus sensory processes,
whicli are replaced by strong brush processes on both maxillipedes. The
head is broad and entirely without crest, and in every other respect it
agrees with Sars' A, hrevicornis, but cannot be an Amallopliora.

In considering the horizontal distribution of the Copepoda of this
region, the following occur with frequency, and may be said to be
indigenous to the Faroe Channel : —

Calanus finmarchicus, Eacalanus elongatus and crassus, Khincalanus
nasutus, Paracalanus parvus, Pseudocalanus elongatus, yEtideus tenui-
rostris, Gaidius pungens and major, Gaetanus major, Eucha3ta norvegica,
barbata, and glacialis, Pseudtetideus armatus, Faroella multiserrata,
Metridia lucens and longa, Pleuromamraa robusta, Heterorhabdus
norvegicus, Ectinosoma atlantica, Acartia Clausii, Candace pectinata,
Oncea conifera, Oithona similis, Centropages typicus and hamatus,
Euchirella rostrata, Bryaxis hrevicornis, Scolecithrix minor and similis,
Bradyidius armatus.

Others in the foregoing list, which occur only occasionally, are
visitors brought from the Norwegian Sea or from the Atlantic south
of the Wyville-Thompson ridge, such as Phaenna, Haloptilus, Chiridius
obtusifrons, Ctenocalanus, Augaptilus, Pleuromamma abdominalis, Luci-
cutia, Anomalocera, ^Egisthus.

I have not been able to state any essential differences as to abundance
of these individual species during the years 1899-1903, though the
hydrographical conditions of the Channel have been widely different.*
Thus in 1900 the whole Channel was occupied by water coming from
the south, strong earlier in the season, but in July with little move-
ment, but indications of intrusion of northern water at a depth of 300
fathoms on the east side. In 1901 most of the Channel was occupied
by water from the south, with feeble southward movement in the depth.
In 1902, at all depths below 150 fathoms, the Channel was tilled with
unusually cold fresher water, tlie southward movement increasing both

* See Mr. H. N. Dickson's report ("Hydrography of the Farue-Slietland Channel,"
Gcorjraphiad Journal, April, 1903) upon the hydrogiaphical results of the author's cruises
in this regioD.

138

NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

at the surface and deep as the season progressed, driving out the waters
of southern origin. This was an exceptional year.

The physical conditions in the Faroe Channel are, as is well known,
widely dillerent from those existing in the neighbouring Atlantic, and
in this area we have a very mixed fauna, but it is not difficult to
determine which species of Copepoda are, so to say, indigenous to this
area. In the tables appended the species captured at each station in
the 1903 cruise are tabulated. I purposely leave out the consideration
of the observations made exclusively in the Faroe Channel in the three
preceding years for future consideration. Only three stations in the
"cold-water area" (F. vii., viii., ix.) were visited in 1903, but they
serve for comparison with those on the southern side of the Wyville-
Thompson ridge.

Throughout the cruise there was a remarkable paucity of Copepoda
at the surface as far as species are concerned, and the well-known fact
is again established that the nearer the cold ocean is approached the
smaller the number of species, but the. greater the abundance of
individuals of the same species. Thus between 51° and 52" N., thirteen
species occurred at the surface ; at no .station north of this were
there more than six species found.

Between lat. 51" and 52° N. there occurred at

0 fathoms

13 species

100 „

14 „

20(. „

22 „

300

28 „

400 „

24 „

500 fathoms,

18 species.

600

13 „

700 „

10 „

800 „

15 „

1,000

5 „

Between 52° and 54° N. there occurred at

0 fathoms, 8 species.
100 „ 15 „

150 fathoms, 12 species.
250 „ 6 „

Between 54° and 55° N. there occurred at

0 fathoms

1

species.

600 fc

ithoms,

12 sijecies

100

13

700

))

9 „

200

14

800

I)

1" „

300

20

1,000

))

'■^ „

400

22

1,200

))

9 „

500

7

Between 55° and 56° N. there occurred at

0 fathoms

4

species.

600 fathoms,

8 species

100

)>

6

))

700

))

8 „

200

»

10

))

800

))

6 „

400

1)

12

?>

1,000

11

8 „

500

M

18

»

NOKTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL.

139

0 falhoms, 4 species,
100 „ 10 „

200 „ 5 „

400 „ 6 „

Between 56° and 57° N. there occurred at

500 fatlionis, 1 1 species.

600 „ 4 „

700 „ 5 „

800 „ 6 „

Between 58° and 59' N. there occurred at
0 fathoms, 2 species. | 200 fathom.^, 8 species.

100

11

300

8

Between 59° and 60° N. there occurred at

0 fathoms,

3

species.

100

»

8

51

200

Ti

5

n

300

5)

15

)>

400 fathoms, 5 species.

500 „ 4 „

600 „ 5 „

800 „ 4 „

Between 60° and 61° N. there occurred in the warm area (F. v., F. vi.) at

0 fathoms, 2 species.
100 „ 4 „

200 fathoms, 8 species.

Between 60' and 61° N. there occurred in the cold area (F. vii., F. viii., F. ix.) at

0 fathoms,

6

species

100

))

9

)j

200

5)

11

1)

300 fathom.'

, 11 species.

400 „

6 „

500

14 ,,

It is not unfair to conclude from these data that the greater number
of species of Copepoda in the North Atlantic prefer a mesoplanktonic
existence between 200-500 or 600 fathoms depth ; and that this is
also the case in the " cold area " of the Faroe Channel.

At Station A 2, June, 1901, there were taken at

0 fathoms, 6 species.
100 „ 5

300 „ 11

400 fathoms, 14 species.
500 „ 9 „

At Station A 2, July, 1901, there were Uiken at
0 fathoms, 3 species. | 200 fathoms, 9 species.

100

400

At 400 and 500 fathoms there was an abundance of Copepoda, much
more than from 200 fathoms to the surface.

At Station A 2, June, 1902, there were taken at

100 fathoms, 11 species.
200 „ 8 „

400-200 fathoms, 13 species.

140

NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

AVlicn the Copepod species of the warm area of the North Atlantic
are examined it is seen that there is not a single species which is
purely epiplanktonic. For long it has been considered that Anomaloccra
Patcrsoni was a purely surface species, but the capture of an adult
male example in a bottom scraping at 400 fathoms, in perfect condition,
shows that it can sometimes descend to considerable depths.

Lonyipedia coronata, an Harpacticid of supposed purely littoral
habit, is shown also to exist at great depths, having been taken in
scrapings of the bottom at 400 and 500 fathoms respectively.

The Vertical Range of Species in the North Atlantic {excluding the
Faroe Channel cold area).*

FaUioiiis.

Fathoms.

Calanus finniarchicus

0-1,200

Oithona species

0-

1,200

„ teuuiconiis .

500

Gaetanus sp. t

200-

400

Eucalanus elongatus .

0- 500

Gaidius &\).

300-

400

„ crassus

100- 500

Spinocalanus sp.

300-

1,000

Rliincalanus nasutus

0-1,000

Pseudaitideus arniatus

200-

600

Paracalaiuis parvus .

0-1,000

Phyllopus bidentatus

200-

700

Pseudocalauus elongatus

0- 100

Jjlgistlius

300

Acartia Clausii

0-1,000

Bradyidus annatus .

400-

500

Oncea sj^-

0-1,200

Scolecithrix minor .

100-

300

Ectinosonia atlantica .

0-1,200

„ similis .

100-

200

Metridia lucens

0-1,200

„ atlanticus

300

„ Normaui

300- 800

Amallophora magna

300

longa

. 300- 400

Lophotlirix securifrons

300

Euchteta norvegica .

100-1,000

„ frontalis

„ acuta

300

Faroella niuUiserrata t

200-

1,000

/Etideus arinatus

100- 700

Undeuchseta major and

Pleuroniamma robusta

200-1,200

minor

300

„ abdominale

200

Augaptilus sp.

300-

500

Heteroclueta vipeia .

200

Candace norvegica .

300-

500

„ longicornis .

300

„ rotunda

300

„ norvegica

100-1,200

Megacalanus .

600

„ liibeniica

400

Xanlholcalanus sp. .

300-

400

„ grandi.s

700

Euchirella carinala+.

100-

400

Haloptilus longicornis

100- 200

„ curticauda

300

„ acutifrons

200- 300

Paraugaptilus

300

Lucicutia flavicornis

200- 500

Longipedia coronata

300-

500

grand is .

7C0

Anomalocera Palersoni

0-

375

Phaenna spinifera

100- 400

* The deptli in fathoms here given is only the extreme range above and below at which
the species were taken.

t Young exanii)les only at 200 fathoms.
X Young examples only at 100 fathoms.

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FARciE CHANNEL.

141

Tables slwiving the depths at tvhich the different species of Copepoda
icere taken in the Closing Net.

In the following tables j signifies young specimen. The temperatures at each of these stations
will be published subsequently along with the salinities.

TABLE I.

Faroe Channel Cold Area.

Station F VII. 61'

1'

N., 7'42' W.-

-400 f. ;

August 13, 1903

„ F VIII. 60'

30'

N.,7'47' W.-

-547 f.

tt

H „

,, Fix. 60

1'

N., tj' 4' W.-

-5S0 f.

)1

17 ,.

Depth in fathoms. Closing net. 0

100

200

300

400

500

Calanus finmarehicus

X

X

X

X

_

_

,, liyperboreus

-

—

X

X

X

X

Eucalanus elongatus

-

—

—

_

—

X

Pseudocalanus elongatus

-

X

X

-

-

X

Paraoalanus parvus

-

-

X

—

X

X

Rliiiicalanus nasutus

—

X

X

_

_

X

Metridia lucens .

X

X

X

_

_

X

longa .

-

-

X

-

X

-

iEtideus aimatus

-

X

X

X

—

X

Euchseta norvegica

-

-

-

X

X

X

Gaidius pungens

-

-

-

X

-

X

Tt'inora ongicornis

X

-

-

-

-

X

Pleuroinamnia robusta

-

—

X

X

_

X

Acartia Clausii .

X

X

X

—

X

X

Gaetaiius caudani

-

-

-

X

-

—

Lophothiix secuiifrons

-

-

-

X

—

_

Heterorhabdus norvegicu

3

-

-

-

X

_

—

Scolecithrix minor

-

X

-

-

—

_

Ectinosonia atlantica

X

X

—

—

—

_

Oithona sp.

X

-

X

X

-

X

Oncea sp.

-

X

-

X

X

X

TABLE IL

Between OO'-ei" N. Stations F v. and F vi.
P V. 60° 29' N., 9° 30' W.— 194 f. ; August 8, 1903.
F VI. 60M1' N., 8° 50' W.— 75 f. ; ,, 9 „ (Faroe Bank).

Depth in fathoms. Closing net. 0

100

200

Calanus finmarehicus
,, liyperboreus
Metridia lucens .

-

X
X

X
X
X

longa ,
Euchfota norvegica
Acartia Clausii .

X

X

X
X

Candace norvegica
Oithona sp.

X

X

X
X

U-2

NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

TABLE III.

Between 59°-G0' N. Stations F in. and F iv.

F III. 59° IS' N., 8' 80' W.-840 f. ; August 6. 1903.
F IV. 59° 54' N., 8° 42' W.— 720 f . ; „ 7 „

Depth in fathoms. Closing net. 0

100

200

300

400

500

600

800

>»

Calanus finuiarcliiciis .
Rhincalaniis luisutus .
Megacalamis juinceps .
Paraealanus ))arvus
Acartia Clausii
Ectinosoma atlaiitica .
Pseud;vtidius armatus .
Faroella nmltisenata .
Metridia lucens
longa
Norman i
brevicauda
Heterorhabdus norvegieus
,, loiigicornis

Pleuroniamnia robusta
Lucicutia flavicornis .
Euchaita norvegiea
Gaetamis ariiiiger
Candace norvegiea
Amallopliora magna
Augapti] us longieaudatus

,, magnus

Parangaptilus
Spinocalanus magnus .
Oithona sp.
Oncea sp.

X

X

X

X

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

X

-

X
X

-

-

-

_

X

_

-

-

X

-

_

_

X

X

-

-

X
X
X
X
X

-

-

-

X

X

_

_

-

-

X

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

X
X
X

-

_

_

_

X

X

-

X

X

X

-

X

X X

X

X X

TABLE IV.

Between 5S" and 50° — Stations F i. and F ii.

Fi. 58=24'N.,8°30'W.-n0f. ; Aug. 4, 1903.
FlI. 58°45'N., 8°35'W.— 340f. ; „ 5 „

Depth in fathoms. Closing net

0

100

200

300

Calanus ilnmarchiciis

_

X

X

X

Eucalanus elongatus

-

X

-

-

Rhincalanus nasutus

-

X

-

-

Paraealanus parvus

-

X

-

-

.ffitideus armatus

-

X

X

-

Acartia Clausii

X

X

-

X

Scolecithrix minor .

-

X

-

-

Euchajta norvegiea .

-

XJ

X

X

Pleuromamma robusta

-

X

X

Metridia lucens

-

X

X

-

,, brevicauda.

-

-

X

X

Augaptilus magnus .

-

-

-

X

Oithona sp.

X

X

X

X

Oncea sp.

-

X

X

X

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL.

143

TABLE V.

Between 56'-57°. Stations) E 17 and E IS.
E 17. 56' 11' N., 9° 50' W.— 875 f. ; July 15, 1003.
E 18. 5(5° 37' N., 9° 48' W.— 012 f. „ 21 „

Depth in fathoms. Closing net

0

100

200

400

500

600

700

800

Calanus finmarchicus .

_

X

X

X

X

—

X

X

Eucalanus elongatus .

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

, , crassus

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

Rhincalanus nasiitus .

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

X

Paracalanus parvus

X

—

-

-

X

-

-

-

Pseudocalaiuis elongatus

X

X

—

—

-

—

-

—

Acartia Clausii

X

X

-

—

X

X

-

X

.ffitideus arniatus

-

X

-

—

-

-

-

-

Scolecitliii.v minor

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

Spinoealaims maguus .

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

-Metridia lucens

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

,, Normani

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

Pseudretideus aimatns .

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

Euehreta norvegiea

_

X

—

—

X

-

X

—

Heterorhabdus grandis

-

-

-

-

-

-

X

-

Ectinosoma atlaiitiea .

-

-

_

-

-

-

-

X

Candaee norvegiea

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

Lucieutia tlavieornis .

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

Oithona sp.

-

X

X

X

-

X

-

-

Oncea sp.

-

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

TABLE VL

Between 55° and 5U°— Stations E It, E 15, E 10.

E14. 55°00'N., 12° 00' W.— 1,577 f. ; July 12, 1903.
E15. 55° 47' N., 12° 28' W.— 1,561 f. ; ,, 16 „
E16. 55°47'N., 10°12'W.— l,325f. ; „ 10 ,,

Depth in fathoms. Closing net. 0

100

200

400

500

600

700

800

1,000

Calanus finmarchicus .

_

X

_

X

X

_

_

X

X

,, tenuieoinis

—

—

—

—

X

—

—

_

_

Rhincalanus nasutus

_

_

_

_

X

_

X

_

X

Eucalanus elongatus

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

, , crassus

-

-

>^j

X

X

-

-

-

-

Metridia lucens

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

,, Normani

-

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

longa .

-

-

X

-

X

-

_

—

—

.Stideus armatus

_

X

X

_

_

_

X

_

_

Acartia Clausii .

X

X

_

X

X

X

X

X

X

Ectinosoma atlantica

_

_

_

X

X

_

X

_

_

Gaetanus armiger

-

-

xj

-

X

-

-

-

-

,, major

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

_

,, caudani

-

-

X

-

-

-

_

—

—

Gaidius pungens

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

Euchfeta norvegiea

-

^i

-

_

-

X

—

—

_

,, barbata

_

_

_

X

_

_

_

_,

Heterorhabdus norvegicus

-

-

X

-

-

X

_

-

—

,, grandis

_

-

—

X

-

_

_

—

_

Pseudaetideus armatus .

_

_

_

_

_

X

_

_

Lucieutia flavicornis

_

_

_

_

_

X

_

_

_

Euchirella carinata

_

_

_

_

X

_

_

_

_

Faroella multiserrata .

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

—

X

Pleuromamma robusta .

X

-

X

-

X

-

-

-

X

Scolecithrix minor

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

—

_

Xanthocalanus atlanticus

_

_

_

X

_

_

_

_

_

Candaee norvegiea

_

..

_

_

X

_

_

.»

_

Spinocalanus niagnus .

-

-

-

X

-

X

X

X

-

Oncea sp.

-

-

X

-

X

X

X

X

X

Oithona sp.

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

144

NOTES ON THE COPEPODA OF THE

TABLE VII.

Between 54°-55' N. Stations E 12 and 13.
E 12. 54° 00' N., 12' 0' W.— 205 f. ; July 9, 1903.
E13. 54°30'N., 12° 0' W.— 1,608 f.; „ 11 „

Depth in fathom.s. Closing net. 0 103 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200

Calanus fitimarchicus

,, tenuiconiis .
Eucalanus elongatus

,, ciassus
Rhincalamis iiasutu.s
Paracalanus parvus .
Metridia liicens

,, luevicauda .

,, Nornmiii .
Scolecithri.x minor .
Aeartia Clausii
Ectiuosonia atlautica
.Stideus armatus
Euch?eta norvegica .
Heterorhabdus iiorvegicus -
, , longicornis -

Gaidius pungens

,, major
Gaetanns armiger

„ major

, , caudani
Eufhirella carinata .
Lucicutia flavicornis
Phyllopus bidentatus
Pleuromamraa abdominal is

, , ro])usta

Haloptilus longicornis
Undeuchoeta major .
,, minor .

Amallophora magna
Candaue norvegica .

,, robusta
Pseudretideus armatus
Augaptilus longicaudatus
Spinocalanus magnus
Oithona sp.
Oncea sp.

Pseudocalanus elongatus
Euchirella curticauda
Ctenocalanus vanus .
Calocalanus pavo
Longipedia coronata

X
X

X
X

X

- X X

- X X

- X X

XXX

X X
X -

X X

XXX

X

X

X
X

X

X
X

- - X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

- X
X X

- X
X -
X -

X - -

- - X

- X X

X

X

X
X
X
X
X

X

X

- X -

X - -

X - -
X

X
X

X X
X X
X X

Between 53'-54°.
Stations E 10 and 11.

ElO. 53 00'N.,ir,jO'W.

— 100 f.; Julys, 1903.
Ell. .03 30'N.,12WW.

— 150 f.: July 9, 1903.

Between ,")2'-53°.
Stations E 8 and 9.

E8. 52 00' X., 12 00' W.

-255f.; Julys, 1903.
E9. 52=30'N.,12"00' W.

— 130 f.; Julys, 1903.

X X
- X

X
X

X - -

X ?

X -
X -

X X

- X
X X
X X

0 150

- X
X X
X X

- X

X -

0 100 250

- X X
XXX

- X X

X
- X

X X

X
X
X
X
X
X

NORTH ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAROE CHANNEL.

145

TABLE YIIL

Between 51° and 52'— Stations E 1, E 2, E 3, E 4, E 5, E 6, E 7.

El. 51'56'N.,ir21"W.— 120f. ; June 10, 1903.

E2. 51°46'N., 12'lo' W.— 560f. ; ,, 12 ,,

E3. 51°34'N.,12°30' W.— 7iOf. ; ,, 22 „

E4. 51° 00' N., 11' 32' W.— 375 f.; „ 24 ,,

E5. 51°00'N.,12'00'W.— OSOf. ; June 25, 1903.
E6. 50''56'N., 12 0' W.— 1,000 f. ; July 0 „
E7. 51°30'N.,12'00'W.-6001. ; ,, 7 ,,

Depth in fathoms. Closin

g net. 0

100

200

300

400

500

GOO

700

800

1,000

Calauus finmarchicus

X

X

_

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

Eucalanus elongatus

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

,, crassus

xj

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

—

Rhincalanus nasutus

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Acartia Clausii

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

-

Ectinosoma atlantica

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

X

-

Metridia luceiis

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

,, brevicauda

.

-

-

-

-

X

X

-

X

-

, , Nonnani

-

-

-

-

X

-

X

-

-

-

Heterorhabdus vipera

.

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

„ longicornis

~

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

, , norvegicus

.

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

X

,, abyssalis .

.

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

X

—

Liicicutia flavicornis

-

-

X

-

X

-

—

-

-

—

Bradyidius arniatus

-

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

Phyllopiis bidentatus

.

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

Paracalauus pamis

X

-

X

-

X

X

X

-

-

—

Lucicutia grandis .

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

Anoraalocera Patersoni

X

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

.^tideus armatus .

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

X

-

PseudiBtidius armatus

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

X

-

Faroella .

—

_

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

Euchreta norvegica

.

xj

xj

X

-

X

-

-

X

X

,, acuta

X

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

—

Phaenua spinifera

-

X

X

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

Haloptilus longicornis

X

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

,, acutifrons

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

—

—

Pseudocalanus elongatus

X

X

-

X

X

-

-

-

X

-

Lophotlirix frontalis

-

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

Spinocalanus magnus

.

-

-

-

X

X

X

X

X

—

,, abyssalis

-

-

-

X

-

-

—

—

—

—

Augaptilus gibbus

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

—

—

, , longicaudata

.

-

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

—

, , magnus

.

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

Scolecithri.x minor

,

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

—

Undeuchseta major

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

,, piinor

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

—

—

—

Gaetanus armiger

,

-

X

-

X

-

-

-

—

—

, , caudani

.

-

-

X

-

-

-

—

—

—

Amallophora magna

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

Xantliocalanus

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

, , atlanticus

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

.ffigisthus atlanticus

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

Candace norvegica

.

-

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

Amallophora securifrons

.

-

X

-

-

-

-

—

—

—

Pleuromamma robusta

X

-

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

—

Xanthocalanus cristatus

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

X

-

-

Megacalanus

_

-

-

-

-

X

-

-

-

-

Oncea sp.

-

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

X

X

Oithona sp.

X

X

-

X

X

X

X

-

-

-

Longipedia coronata

.

-

-

-

-

X

X

-

-

—

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VII. NO 1.

K

146 COl'El'ODA UF NOKTll ATLANTIC SEA AND THE FAKOE CHANNEL.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.

1. Megacalanus, first foot, basal joints.

2. „ third foot.

3. Eucalanus atlanticus, <y , fifth feet.

4. „ ,, J , mandible.

5. Scolecithrix similis, $ , fifth foot.

6. ,, „ 2 , side view.

7. Gaetanus major, $ , abdomen and last thoracic segment.

8. ,, ,, ? , first foot.

9. Ctenocalanus vanus, 3 > fifth feet.

1 0. Candace rotunda, $ , dorsal view.

11. „ „ ?, fifth foot.

1 2. Lophothrix securifrons, ? , dorsal view.

13. „ „ $ , fifth feet.

14. „ „ ? , distal portion of anterior foot-jaw.

15. „ „ 2 , head.

16. Phyllopus bidentatus, 3 , fifth feet.

17. Xanthocalanus subagilis, ? , fifth foot.

18. „ cristatus, ? , fifth foot.

19. „ „ $ , head, dorsal view.

20. Gaetanus caudani, $ , dorsal view.

21. „ „ 5 , basal of fourth foot.

22. ,, „ ? , first foot.

23. Chiridius Vanhciffeni, S , lateral view.

24. Xanthocalanus atlanticus, $ , fifth foot.

25. ,, „ ? , second foot.

26. Faroella multiserrata, $ , dorsal view.

27. „ „ ? , posterior foot-jaw.

28. ,, ,, 2 , terminal view of one of the feet.

29. Pseudsetideus armatus, ? , dorsal view.

30. „ „ ? , first foot.

31. „ „ <y, fifth feet.

32. Xanthocalanus subagilis, ^ , fifth feet. 32a. Terminal segment.

33. „ atlanticus, $ , lateral view.

34. Heterorhabdus longicornis, 3 > fifth feet.
35 and 35a. Lucicutia magna, 3 , fifth feet.

36. Heterorhabdus grandis, $ , fifth foot.

37. Lucicutia grandis, $ , first foot.

38. „ „ ? , fifth foot.

39. Metridia Xormani, 2 , fifth feet.

40. ,, ., 2 , portion of anterior antenna.

41. Lophothrix frontalis, 2 , head.

42. „ „ 2 , fifth foot.

43. Gaidius pungens, <? , fifth feet.

44. Paraugaptilus Buchani, 2 , abdomen.

45. „ „ ? , fifth feet.

Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom.

LIST

OF

1st MAECH, 1904.

I.— Governors.

The British Association for the Advancement of Science, Burlington

House, W. £500

The University of Cambridge £500

The Worshipful Comjiany of Clothworkers, 41, Mincing Lane, E.G. £500

The Worshipful Company of Fishmongers, London Bridge £6905

The University of Oxford £500

Bayly, Robert (the late) £1000

Bayly, John (the late) £600

Thomasson, J. P., IVoodside, near Bolton £970

II.— Founders.

* Member of Council. f Vice-President. % President.

1884 The Corporation of the City of London £210

1884 The Worshipful Company of Mercers, Mercers' Hall, Clieapside £341 5s.

1884 The Worshipful Company of Goldsmiths, Goldsmiths' Hall, E.G. £100

1884 The Royal Microscopical Society, 20, Hanover Square, W. £100

1 884 The Royal Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, W. £350

1 884 The Zoological Society, 3, Hanover Scpiare, W £ 100

1884 Bulteel, Thos., Radford, Plymouth £100

1884 Burdett-Coutts, W. L. A. Bartlett, 1, Stratton Street, Piccadilly, IF.... £100
1884 Crisp, Frank, LL.B., B.A., Treas. Linn. Soc, 17, Throgmorton

Avenue, E.G. £100

1884 Daubeny, Captain Giles A., Les Golondalles, Montreux, Sioitzei-land ... £100

1884 Eddy, J. Ray, TJie Grange, Garleton, Skipton £1 00

1884 Gassiott, John P. (the late) £100

tl884 Lankester, Prof. E. Ray, F.R.S., British Museum {Natural History),

South Kensington, S.W. £100

1884 The Rt. Hon. Lord Masham, Swinton Park, Masham, Yorkshire £100

1884 Moseley, Prof. H. N., F.R.S. (the late) £100

148 LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBEKS.

+1884 The Rt. Hon Lord Avebury, F.R.S., High Elms, Bromley, Kent £100

1884 Poulton, Prof. Edward B., M.A., F.R.S., TFykeham House, Oxford ... £100

1884 Romanes, G. J., LL.D., F.R.S. (tlic late) £100

1884 Worthington, James (the late) £100,

1885 Derby, the late Earl of £100

*1887 Weldon, Prof. W. F. R., F.R.S., Merton Lea, Oxford £100

1888 Bury, Henry, ]\I.A., Mayfield House, Farnham, Surrey £100

1888 The Wor.'^hipful Company of Drapers, Drcqjers' Hall, E.G. £315

1 889 The AVorshipf ul Company of Grocers, Poultry, E.G. £ 1 20

+1889 Thomjison, Sir Henry, Bart., 35, TFimpole Street, W. £110

1889 Revelstoke, The late Lord £100

1890 Riches, T. H., B.A., Kitwells, Shenley, Herts £230

*1900 Bidder, G. P., Cavendish Corner; Hills Road, Gavibridge £300

1902 Gurney, R., Longmoor Point, Catfield, Great Yarmouth £100

III— Members.

Ann. signifies that the Member is liable to an Annual Subscription of One Guinea.

C. signifies that he has paid a Composition Fee of Fifteen Guineas in lieu of Annual
Subscription.

1897 Adams, W. R., 57, Wood Vale, Lordshi}) Lane, London, S.E Ann.

1900 Adcrs, VV. M., 28, St. John's Wood Road, London, N.W. Ann.

1884 Alger, W. H., 8, The Esplanade, Plymouth G.

*1895 Allen, E. J., D.Sc, The Laboratory, Plymouth Ann.

*1889 Alward, G. L , Enfield Villa, Humherstone Avenue, Waltham, Grimsby Ann.

1892 Assheton, R., M.A., Riversdale, Gi-anchester, Gambridge , £20

1899 Auckland, The Rt. Hon. Lord, Kitley, Plymouth Ann.

1884 Bailey, Charles, F.L.S., Atherstone House, North Drive, St. Ann^s-on-

the-Sea Ann.

1893 Bailey, W. E., Porth Enys Museum, Penzance G.

1902 Baker, R. J., 5, Restnrmel Terrace, Plymouth Ann.

1884 Balfour, Prof. Bayley, F.R.S., Royal Botanic Gardens, Edinburgh G.

1897 Baxter, G. H., Hutton Road, Brentwood, Essex Ann.

1884 Bayliss, W. Maddock, D.Sc, St. Guthberts, West Heath Road, Hampstead Ann,

1884 Bayly, Miss, Seven Trees, Plymouth £50

1884 Bayly, Miss Anna, Seven Trees, Plymouth £50

1884 Beaumont, W. L, B.A., Hie Laboratory, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Beck, Conrad, 68, Gornhill, E.G. C.

*1889 Beckwith, E. L., The Knoll, Eastbourne Ann.

1887 Beddard, F. E., F.R.S., Zoological Society's Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W. Ann.

1884 Beddington, Alfred H., 8, Gornwall Terrace, Regent's Park, N.W. G.

1897 Bedford, Mrs., 326, Gamden Road, London, N Ann.

1903 Bidder, H. F., 10, Queen's Gate Gardens, London, S.W Ann.

1893 Bles, A. J. S., Palm House, Higher Broughton, Manchester Ann.

1884 Bompas, G. C, 121, Westbourne Terrace, Hyde Park, London, W. Ann.

1884 Bostock, E., Stone, Staffordshire Ann.

1890 Bourne, Prof. A. G., F.R S., The Presidency College, Madras Ann.

*1884 Bourne, Gilbert C, M.A., Savile House, Mansfield Road, Oxford Ann.

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND ME^IBERS. 149

1898 Bowles, Col. Henry, 'SLW, Fortij Hall, Enfidd Ann.

1895 Bridge, Prof. T. W., D.Sc, University of Birmingham Ann.

1902 Brighton Covpovation, Town Clerk, Toivn Hall, Brighton Ann.

1890 Brindlev, H. H., M.A., 4, Devana Terrace, Huntingdon Road, Cambridge Ann.

1886 ljroo\.i^^)Sin]s.,'MY^.'M., Leigh Place, Godstone, Surrey G.

1884 Brown, Arthur W. "\V.,62, Carlisle Mansions, Carlisle Place, London, S. W. G.

1893 Browne, Edward T., B. A., 141, Uxbridge Road, W. Ann.

1884 Buckton, G. B,, JVeycombe, Haslemere Ann.

1896 Bulstrode, H. T., M.D., 4, The Mansions, Earl's Court, S.JF. Ann.

1889 Barnard, Kobert, 3, Hillsborough, Plymouth Ann.

1897 Byrne, L. W., B.A., 33, Lancaster Gate, London, IF. Ann.

1887 Caldwell, W. H G.

tl884 Chamberlain, Rt. Hon. J., M.P., 40, Prince's Gardens, S.W Ann.

1887 Clarke, Rt. Hon. Sir E., K.C., 5, Essex Court, Temple, E.G. £25

1884 Clay, Dr. R. H., Windsor Villas, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Clerk, Major-General H., F.R.S., " Mountfield," 5, Upper Maze Hill,

St. Leonards-on-Sea, Sussex £21

1 886 Coates and Co., Southside Street, Plymouth C.

1885 Collier Bros., Old Toicn Street, Plymouth C.

1900 Cooper, "\V. F., B.A., Ashhjns Hall, Berkhamsted Ann.

*1885 Darwin, Francis, F.R.S., JVychfield, Cambridge C.

1885 Darwin, W. ^., Ridgemount, Bassett, Southampton £20

1889 Davies, H. R., Treborth, Bangor Ann.

1884 Dewick, Rev. E. S., M.A., F.G.S., 26, Oxford Square, Hyde Park, JV.... G.

1885 Dixey, F. A., M.A. Oxon., Wctdham College, Oxford £26 5s. and Ann.

1890 Driesch, Hans, Ph.D., Philosophemceg 5, Heidelberg, Germany G.

tl889 'Dude,TheI{t.lion.theEavloi,F.'R.ii.,TorticorthCoiirf,Falfield,R.S.O. £50 15s.

1884 Dunning, J. W., 4, Talbot Square, IF. £26 5s.

1884 Dyer, Sir ^Y. T. Thiselton, M.A., K.C.M.G., F.R.S., Director of the Royal

Gardens, Kew C.

1898 Eliot, Sir C. K E., K.C.M.G., C.B., British Agency, Zanzibar Ann.

1891 Ellis, Hon. Evelyn, ii'ose?iais, Da^c/iei, Windsor G.

1893 Enys, John Davies, Enys, Penryn, Cornwall Ann.

1884 Evans, Sir John, D.C.L., F.R.S., iVas/i Mills, Hemel Hempstead £20

1885 Ewart, Prof. J. Cossar, M.D., University, Edinburgh £25

1902 Farmer, Prof. J. B., F.R.S., Claremont House, Wimbledon Common,

London Ann.

1894 Ferrier, David, M.A., M.D., F.R.S., 34, Cavendish Square, W Ann.

1884 Fison, Frederick W., M.P., 64, Pont Street, London, S.JF. C.

1 897 Foster, Richard, Windsworth, Looe, R.S.O Ann.

*1885 Fowler, G. Herbert, B.A., Ph.D., 58, Bedford Gardens, London, JF. ... Ann.

1884 Fox, George H., Wodehouse Place, Falmouth Ann.

1886 Freeman, F. F., Abbotsfield, Tavistock, S. Devon C.

1 884 Fry, George, F. L. S. , Carlin Brae, Berwick-on- Tweed £ 2 1

1884 Fryer, Charles E., Board of Trade, S.W. Ann.

1898 Ganz, C, Aldeburgh, Suffolk Ann.

1892 Galton, F., F.R.S., 42, Rutland Gate, S.JF. Ann.

150 LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEJIBERS.

1885 Gaskell, "W. H., F.R.S., The UjAamb, Shelford, Cambridge C.

1899 Gardiner, Dr. Edw. G., Woods Hole, Mass., U.S.A C.

1897 Gibbs, Hon. Henry, 10, Lennox Gardens, S.W. Ann.

1901 Giles, Col. G. M., Byfield, Mannamead, Plijmotith C.

1885 Gordon, Rev. J. M., St. John's Vicarage, Bedhill, Surrey Ann

1902 Gresson, Lieut.-Col. W., The Barracks, N'aas, Co. Kildare, Ireland Ann.

1884 Grove, E., Norlington, Preston, Brighton Ann.

1899 Guinness, Hon. Hui^evt, Elveden, Thetford £35 15s.

tl884 Giinther, Dr. Albert, F.R.S., 2, Lichfield Road, Kew Gardens Ann.

1900 Gnvney, E., Sprowston Hall, Norwich Ann.

1884 Halliburton, Prof. W. D., M.D., F.R.S., Church Cottage, 17, Marylebone

Road, London, W. Ann.

1884 TlsinriB\\,^o\)&vi,%'i, Addison Rocid, Kensington, JV. C.

*1885 Harmer, S. F., D.Sc, F.R.S., King's College, Cambridge C.

1889 Harvey, T. H., Cattedown, Plymouth Ann.

1888 Haselwood, J. E., 3, Lennox Place, Brighton C.

1884 Haslani, Miss E. Rosa, Ravenswood, Bolton £20

1884 Head, J. Merrick, F.R.G.S., J. P., Pennsylvania Castle, Isle of Portland,

Dorset Ann.

1884 Hea'pe, 'Walter, Heyroun, Cha'>icer Road, Cambridge C.

*1884 Herdman, Prof. W. A., F.R.S., University College, Liverpool Ann.

1884 Herscliel, Col. J., R.E., F.R.S., Observatory House, Slough, Berks C.

1889 Hey wood, Mrs. E. S., Light Oaks, Manchester G.

1884 Hickson, Prof. Sydney J., M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Ellesmere House,

Wilenslow Road, JVithington, Manchester Ann.

1902 Hill, M. D., M.A., Eton College, Windsor Ann.

1897 Hodgson, T. V., c/o L. E. Sexton, Esq., 17, Collings Park, Higher

Gompton, Plymouth Ann.

1884 Holdswortli, E. W. H., F.L.S., F.Z.S., Lucerne House, Dartmouth . .... Ann.
*1887 Howes, Prof. G. Bond, F.R.S., F.L.S., Royal College of Science, South

Kensington Ann.

1884 Hudleston, W. H., M.A., F.R.S., 8, StanhojK Gardens, South Kensing-

ton, S.JF. Ann.

1891 Indian Museum, Calcutta Ann.

1888 Inskip, Capt. G. H., R.N., 22, Torringfon Place, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Jackson, W. Hatchett, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., Pen Wartha, Weston-super-

Ma re Ann,

1893 Jago, Edward, Coldrenick, Liskeard, Cornwall Ann.

1887 Jago-Trelawny, Major-Gen., F.R.G.S., Coldrenick, Liskeard C.

1900 Johnsen, Hans, Norwegian Fisheries Commissioner, i^H// Ann.

1894 Justen, F, W., F.G.S., F.Z.S., 120, Alexandra Road, South Hampstead,

London, N.JV. Ann.

1884 Kellock, W. B., F.L.S., F.R.C.S., 94, Stamford Hill, N. Ann.

1899 Kent, "W. Saville, F.L.S., Belsito, Milford-on-Sea, Hants Ann.

1897 Lanchester, W, F., B.A., The Knott, Lady Margaret Road, Cambridge... C.

1885 Langley, Prof. J. N., F.R.S., Trinity College, Cambridge C.

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 151

*1895 Lister, J. J., M.A., F.R.S., St. John's Colkrje, Camhridye Aim,

1888 Lopes, The Rt, Hon. Sir Massey, Bart., Maristoic, Roborough, South

Devon Ann.

1885 Macalister, Prof. A., F.R.S., .SV. John's College, Cambridge Ann.

1884 MacAndrew, James J., Lukesland, Icybridge, South Devon Ann.

1900 Macfie, J. W. Scott, Rowton Hall, Chester C.

1884 Mackrell, John, High Trees, Clapham Common, S.JV. C.

1886 MacMunn, Charles A., M.D., OaJc Leigh, Wolverhampton Ann.

1902 Major, Surgeon H. G. T., 24, Beech House Road, Croydon C.

1889 Makovski, Stanishius, FairUmn, Redhill Ann.

1885 Marr, J. E., M.A., F.R.S., St. John's College, Cambridge C.

1 902 ]\Iartin, C. H., Magdalen College, Oxford Ann.

1884 Mcintosh, Prof. W. C, F.R.S., 2, Abbotsford Crescent, St. Andrews, N.B. 0.

1884 Michael, Albert D., Cadogan Mansions, Shane Square, S.IV. C.

*1903 Mill, H. R., D.Sc, 62, Camden Square, London, N.W. Ann.

*1899 Minchin, Prof. E. A., University College, London Ann.

1885 Mocatta, F. H., 9, 6'oj(7(rt »(//(« P/«ce, W. C.

1886 Mond, Ludwig, F.R.S., 20, Avemie Road, Regent's Park, X.JF. C.

1884 Morgan, Prof. C. Lloyd, F.R.S., University College, Bristol Ann.

tl889 Morley, The Rt. Hon. the Earl of, 31, Prince's Gardens, S.W. Ann.

tl896 Murray, Sir John, K.C.B., F.R.S., Challenger Lodge, JVardie, Edinburgh Ann.

tl884 Xewlon, Prof. Alfred, M.A., F.R.S., Magdalen College, Cambridge £20

tl884 Norman, Rev. A. M., M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S., The Red House, Berkhamsted,

Herts Ann.

1885 Phillijis, Chas. D. F., M.D., 10, Henrietta Street, Cavendish Square, W. C.

1887 Phii^son, Mrs., Dasak Bungalow, Nasik Road, Deccan, India Ann.

1886 Power, Henry, C.B., F.R.C.S., 37a, Great Cumberland Place, W. Ann.

1885 Pritchard, Prof. Urban, 26, Wimpole Street, W. Ann.

1884 Pye-Smith, P. H., M.D., 48, Brook Street, W. C.

1893 Quintin, St. W. H., Scampstone Hcdl, Rilling ton, Yorks Ann.

1884 Ralli, Mrs. Stephen £30

1885 Ransom, W. B., The Pavement, Nottingham C.

1888 HiiwUngs^, Edward, Richmond House, Wimbledon Common Ann.

1892 Robinson, Miss M., University College, London, W.C. Ann.

1892 Riiffer, M. A., M.D., Conseil Sanitaire, Maritime et Quarentenaire, Alexan-
dria, Egypt Ann.

1897 Sandeman, H. D., 4, Elliot Terrace, Phjmouth Ann.

1888 Scharff, Robert F., Ph.D., Science and Art Museum, Dublin Ann.

1901 Schiller, F. W., Burnham, Westcombe Hill, Blackheath, London, S.E. ... Ann.

1884 Sclater, P. L., F.R.S., Odiham Priory, Winchficld, Hants Ann.

1884 Sclater, W. L., The Museum, Gape Toion Ann.

1885 Scott, D. H., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Old Palace, Richmond, Surrey C.

1903 Scott, S. D., 2, ,S'^ Luke's Villas, College Road, Cheltenham Ann.

1884 Sedgwick, A., M.A., F.R.S., Trinity College, Cambridge C.

1888 Serpen, E. W., 19, Hill Park Cresceiit, Plymouth £50

152 LIST OF GOVERNOllS, FOUNDERS, AND iMEMBEUS.

1900 Sexton, L. E., 17, Collings Park, Higher Compton, Plyviouth Ann.

1885 Slu'ldon, Mi^^^i Lilian, The Murmurs, Exmouth Ann.

* 1 884 Shipk-y, Arthur E., M. A., Ch rut's College, Cambridge C.

1886 Shore, T. W., M.D., Heathfield, Alleyn Park, Dulwich, London, S.E. ... Ann.

1894 Simpson, F. C, J. P., Maypool, Churston Ferrers, R.S.O Ann.

1 885 Sinclair, F. G., Friday Hill, Chingford, Essex C.

1891 Sinclair, "William F., 102, Cheyne Walk, Chelsea, S.W. C.

1884 Skinners, the Wor.shipful Company of, &7aji?iers' ffa/Z, ^.C £42

1889 Slade, Commander E. J. Warre, Phcenice Farm, Great Bookham, Surrey C.

1893 Sorby, H. C, LL.D., F.R.S., Broomficld, Sheffield Ann.

1888 Spencer, Prof. W. Baldwin, M. A ,F.B..ii., University of Victoria, Melbourne Ann.

*1884 Stewart, Prof. Chas., F.R.S., Royal College of Surgeons, Lincoln's Inn

Fields, IF.G. Ann.

1897 Straker, J., L.L.M., F.Z.S., Oxford and Cambridge Club, S.JF. C.

1884 Sutherland, The Duke of, Stafford House, St. James', S.W. C.

1894 Sykes, E. R., 4, Gray's Inn Place, Gray's Inn, London Ann.

1894 Tliomas, W. F., BishopshaU, Hillingdon, Middlesex Ann.

*1899 Thompson, Prof. D'Arcy W., C.B., University College, Dundee Ann.

1890 Thompson, H. F., B.A., 35, Wimpole Street, W. Ami.

1884 Tliornycroft, Sir John I., F.R.S., Eyot Villa, Chiswick Mall Ann.

1888 Tliurston, Edgar, Government Central Museum, Egmore, Madras Ann.

1903 Torquay Natural History Society, Torquay Ann.

*1897 Trovers, J. A., Tortingto7i House, Arundel Ann.

1891 Vaughan, Henry, 325, High Holborn, London C.

1884 Venning, Mrs., 3, Wingfield Villas, Stoke, Devonport £50

1884 Walker, Alfred 0., Ulcombe Place, Maidstone Ann.

1884 Walker, P. F., 36, Prince's Gardens, S.W. Ann.

tl884 Walsingham, The Rt. Hon. Lord, F.R.S., Merton Hull, Thetfurd £20

1890 Waterhouse, Edwin, M.A., Feldemore, near Dorking Ann.

1891 Wildy, A. G., 14, Buckingham Street, Adelphi, London, W.C. Ann.

1900 Willey, A., D.Sc, Government Museum, Colombo, Ceylon Ann.

1 884 Wilson, Scott B., Heather Bank, Weybridge Heath C.

*1900 Wolfenden, R. N., M.D., Rougemont, Seaford, Sussex Ann.

1884 Woodall, John W., M.A., F.G.S., 5, Queen's Mansions, Victoria Street,

London, S.W. Ann.

1898 Worth, R. H., 42, George Street, Plymouth Ann.

IV.— Associate Members.

1900 Bignell, G. C, F.E.S., The Ferns, Home Park Road, Saltash, Cornwall.

1889 Caux, J. W. de, Great Yarmouth.

1889 Dannevig, Capt. G. M., Arendal, Norway.

1904 Donnison, F., Deep Sea Fishing Co., Boston.

1904 Edwards, W. C, Mercantile Marine Office, St. Andrew's Dock, Hull.

1904 Freeth, A. J., Fish Quay, North Shields.

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 153

1904 Hurrell, H. E., 25, Regent Street, Yarmouth.

1904 Inskip, H. E., Capt., R.X., Harbour Mastei-'s Office, Ramsgate.

1904 Johnson, A., Fi^hmomjers' Companxj, Billingsyate Marlcet, London, E.G.

1889 Olsen, 0. T., F.L.S., F.R.G.S., Fish Dock Road, Great Grimsby.

1904 Patterson, Arthur, Ibis House, Great Yarmouth.

1889 Ridge, B. J., Newlyn, Penzance.

1901 Sanders, W. J., St. Elmo, Brixham.

1889 Shrubsole, W. H., 19, Vancovier Road, Catford, London.

1889 Sine], Joseph, 2, Peel Villas, Cleveland Road, Jersey.

1890 Spencer, R. L., L. and N.W. Dep6t, Guernsey.
1890 Wells, W., The Aquarium, Brighton.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association.

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888, Price Is.

New Series {Royal 8vo).

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 jilates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899-1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., No. 1.

Separate numbers (generally 4 to one volume j, in wrappers, 3s. Qd. ; to Members, 2s. 8d.

London Agents; Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37, Solio Square, W.

Cloth 4to, 150 2'>P-, 18 plates (12 coloured).

A TREATISE ON THE COMMON SOLE.

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.R.S.E.,

Late Fellow of University College, Oxford ; Naturalist to the Association.

Price to Members, 20s. ; to Non-Members, 25s,

Medium 8vo, 3Q8 2^ages. 159 Illustrations and two Maps. Price Is. 6d. net.

{Macmillan and Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HLSTORY OF THE MARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Prepared expressly for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries,

BY

J. T, CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMERLY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ;
NATVRALLST ON THE STAFF OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL A.S.SOCI.VTION.

Mlitl) Preface bp
E. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA.

BULLETIN

DES RESULTATS ACQUIS PENDANT LES COURSES

PERIODIQUES.

Published Quarterly. Price per Volume of Four Numbers,

18 Kroner (£1).

RAPPORTS ET PROCES-VERBAUX DES REUNIONS.

Vol I., 1902-1903. Kr. 6.

PUBLICATIONS DE CIRCONSTANCE.

No. 1. C. G. Joh. Petersen : "How to Distinguish between Mature and Im-
mature Plaice throughout the Year." 8 pp., 1 PI. ; July, 1903. Kr. 1.

No. 2. Martin Knudsen : " On the Standard-Water used in the Hydro-
graphical Research until July, 1903." 9 pp. ; July, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 3. "Die Literatur der zehn wichtigsten Nutzfische der Nordsee." In
monographischer Darstellung. 112 s., 10 T; August, 1903. Kr. 3.

"The Literature of the Ten Principal Food Fishes of the North Sea."
In the form of compendious monographs. 108 pp., 10 PI. ; August,
1903. Kr. 3.

Nos. 4-5. Martin Knudsen : " Ueber den Gebrauch von Stickstoffbestim-
mungen in der Hydrographie." " Gefrierspunkt tabelle fiir Meerwasser."
Zusammen 13 s. ; September, 1903. Kr. 0.75.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FUR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. G. Harry M. Kyle : " On a New Form of Trawl Net, designed to fish in
midwater as well as on the ground." Preliminary notice. 8 pp. ;
November, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 7. P. J. van Breemen : "Ueber das Vorkomraen von Oithona nana
Giesbr. in der Nordsee." (Aiis dem niederlandischen Institut fiir
Meeresforschung.) 24 s. Nit einer Karte. November, 1903. Kr. 1.

Nos. 8-9. T. Wemyss Fulton : " On the Spawning of the Cod (Gadus
morrhua L.) in Autumn in the North Sea." With a Chart.

"A New Mark for Fish."

Together, 14 pp. March, 1904. Kr. 1.

No. 10. G. 0, Sars : " On a New (Planktonic) Species of the Genus Apherusa."
4pp., 1 Pi.; March, 1904.

Puhlislml on hehalf of the International Council

BY

ANDE. FRED. HOST ET FILS,
COPENHAGEN.

OF THE

^tnriiu ^liologrcal ^association of tj)t ^IniUb flingbom.

rPHE ASSOCIATION was founded at a Meeting called for the purpose in March, 1884,
-*- and held in the Rooms of the Royal Society of London.

The late Professor Huxlky, at that time President of the Royal Society, took the chair,
and amongst the speakers in support of the project were the late Duke of Argyll, the
late Sir Lyon Playfaiii, Lord Avebuivy, Sir Johx Hooker, the late Dr. Carpenter, Dr.
GiJNTHER, the late Lord Dalhousie, the late Professor Moseley, the late Mr. Romanes,
and Professor Lank ester.

The Association owes its existence and its present satisfactory condition to a combina-
tion of scientific naturalists, and of gentlemen who, from philanthropic or practical reasons,
are specially interested in the great sea fisheries of the United Kingdom. It is universally
admitted that our knowledge of the habits and conditions of life of sea fishes is very small,
and insuflScient to enable either the practical fisherman or the Legislature to take measures
calculated to ensure to the country the greatest return from tlie "harvest of the sea."
Naturalists are, on the other hand, anxious to push further our knowledge of marine life
and its conditions. Hence the Association has erected at Plymouth a thoroughly efficient
Laboratory, where naturalists may studj' the histoi-y of marine animals and plants in general,
and where, in particular, researches on food-fishes and molluscs may be carried out with the
best appliances.

The Laboratory and its fittings were completed in June, 1888, at a cost of some £12,000.
Since that time investigations, practical and scientific, have been constantly pursued at
Plymouth. Practical investigations upon matters connected with sea-fishing are carried on
under the direction of the Council; in addition, naturalists from England and from abroad
have come to the Laboratory, to carry on their own independent researches, and have made
valuable additions to zoological and botanical science, at the expense of a small rent for the
use of a working talile in the Laboratory and other appliances. The number of naturalists
who can be employed by the Association in special investigations on fishery questions, and
definitely retained for the purpose of carrying on those researches throughout the year,
must depend on the funds subscribed by private individuals and public bodies for the
purpose. The first charges on the revenue of the Association are the working of the sea-
w-ater circulation in the tanks, stocking the tanks with fish and feeding the latter, the
payment of servants and fishermen, the hire and maintenance of fishing-boats, and the
salary of the Resident Director and Staff. At the commencement of this number will be
found the names of the gentlemen on the staff.

In the summer of 1902 the Association was commissioned by His Majesty's Government
to carry out in the southern liritish area the scheme of International Fishery Investigations
adopted by the Conference of Euro{X!an Powers which met at Christiania in 1901. In
connection with this w'ork a laboratory has been oj^ened at Lowestoft.

The purpose of the Association is to aid at the same time both science and industry. It
is national in character and constitution, and its affairs are conducted by a representative
Council, by an Honorary Secretary and an Honorary Treasurer, without any charge upon
its funds, so that the whole of tl»e subscriptions and donations rectuved are devoted
absolutely to the sujjport of the Laboratory and the prosecution of researches by aid of
its appliances. The reader is referred to page 4 of the Cover for information as to
membership of the Association.

CONTENTS OF NEW SERIES, Vol. VII., No. 1.

PAQE

1. The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gauivjr as an Index of Age.

By J. Stuart Thomson, f.l.s. JFith Plates I.-VIII., and 07ie
Figure in the Text . . . ... 1

2. Notes on the Copepoda of the North Atlantic Sea and the

Faroe Channel. By E. Norris Wolfenden, m.d., f.z.s. With
Plate IX., and one Fiyure in the Text . . . . . 110

3. List of Governors, Founders, and Members. 1st March, 1904 . 147

NOTICE.

The Council of the Marine Biological Association wish it to be understood that
they do not accept responsibility for statements ])ublished in this Journal,
excepting when those statements are contained in an official report of the Council.

TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP.

& s. d.
Annual Members .... per auinuu. 1 10

Composition Fee. 15 15 0

Life Members

Founders

Governors

Members of the Assoc

100 0 0
500 0 0

iation have the following rights and privileges : they elect
annually the Officers and Council ; they receive the Journal of the Association free
by po.st ; they are admitted to view the Laboratory at Plymouth, and may introduce
friends with them ; they have the first claim to rent a place in the Laboratory for
research, with use of tanks, boats, &c. ; and have access to the books in the Library
at Plymouth.

All correspondence should be addrcs:eed to the Director, The Laboratory,
Plymouth.

New Series.— Vol. VII., No. 2— issued December, 1904.] [Price 3s.

6d.

\\>^^^

3fournal

OP THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

OF

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

--~'^'-- 1 - '.

*:- .. -i^.i^.v

,'SrXJf, J- '-^iS'- . ■

V*":^V-^.

■. - . " 1"-. '•'^,'- . -i --r--7v^ " "

THE I'LYMOUTH LABORATORY.

>

PLYMOUTH

PRINTED FOR THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION BY W. URENDON & SON,

AND

PUBLISHED BY THE ASSOCIATION AT ITS OFFICES ON THE CITADEL HILL.

SENT FREE BY POST TO ALL MEMBERS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :
ANNUAL SUBSCKIFTION FOR MEMBERSHIP, ONE GUINEA.

Agents in London :-Messrs. Dui.au k Co., 37, Soho Square, W.

PATRON.

HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL.

President.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, ll.d., f.b.s.

Vice-Premhnts.

Tlie Duke of Abercorn, k.g., c.b.
The Earl of St. Germans.
Till' Earl of Morlev.
The Earl 0/ DcciE, F.R.S.

I.fird AVEBCRY, F.R.3.
Lord TWEEDMOLTH, P.C

Lord Walsingham, f.r.8.

The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, m.p.,

F.R.S.

The Right Hon. J08EPH Chamber-
lain, M.r.

Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.

Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., m.p., f.r.8,

A. C. L. GCnther, Esq., f.r.s.

Sir John Murray, f.r.s.

Prof. Alfred Newton, f.r.s.

Rev. Canon Norman, d.c.l., f.r.s.

Admiral Sir Erasmus Ommannev,

K.C.B., F.R.S.

Rear-Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton,
K.C.B., f.r.s.

G. L. Alwarp, Esq.

G. P. Bidder, Esq.

G. C. Bourne, Esq.

F. Darwin, Esq., f.r.s,

G. Herbert Fowler, E.sq,

S. F. HaRMER, P]sq., F.R.S.

Prof. W. A. Herdman, f.r.s.

COUNCIL.

Elected Members.

Prof. G. B. How^es, f.r.s.

J. J. Lister, Esq., f.r.s.

H. R. Mill, Esti.

Prof. E. A. Minchin.

Prof. DArcy W. Thompson, c.b.

R. N. "WOLFENDEN, Esq., M.D.

Governors.

The Prime Warden of the Fish-
mongers' Company.

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'
Company).

Prof. Sir J. Burdon Sanderson, Bart.,
F.R.S. (O.vford University).

A. E. Shipley, Esq., f.r.s. (Cambridge
University).

Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, f.r.s.
(British Association for tlie Advancement of Science).

Hon. Treasurer:
J. A. Travers, Esq., Tortington, Arundel,

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

PERMANENT STAFF.
Director — E. J. Allen, Esq., D.Sc.

Naturalist in charge of Fisherxj Investiyations.
W. GaRSTANG, Esq., M.A.

Assistant Naturalist — S. Pace, Esq.
As.<iiitiini Naturalists for the International Tnrentiyations —

W. Wallace, Esq., b.Sc.
R. A. Todd, Esq., b.sc.

J. 0. BoRLEY, Esq., M.A.

L. H. GouGH, Esq., ph.d.

Hydrof/rapher {International Investigations) — D. J. Matthews, Esq.

RAME TO STOKE POINT

I NC LUD I NC

PLYMOUTH SOUND

To /.:,',: i>.

J.iur. Mar. Bi"l. A-.>..i;. Vul. \ii.

ftb

1905

[ 155 ]

Plymouth Marine Invertebrate Fauna

Being Notes of the Local Distribution of Species occurring in the

Neighbour Jiood.

COMPILED FROM THE RECORDS OF THE LABORATORY

OF THE

Marine Biological Association.*

(With Olio Chart.)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS.

PAGE

PAGE

Intioduetioii . . . 155

List of species, continued : —

Uescriiition of Grounds . . . 159

Chietognatha

. 233

Alpliahetical Index to Grounds . 159

Branchiopoda

. 233

Explanation of Abbreviations, etc. . 172

Ostracoda .

. 234

List of the Species : —

Copepoda .

. 234

Foraminifera . . .174

Cirripedia .

. 237

Porifera

. 185

Leptostraca

. 237

Anthoniedusre

. 187

Aniphipoda

. 238

Leptomedusaj

. 193

Isopoda

. 242

Tracliyniedusje

. 200

Cuniacea

. 245

Siphonopiiora

. 201

Stomapoda .

. 245

Stauromedusse

. 201

Schizopoda .

. 245

Disconiedusfe

. 201

Macrura

. 249

Alcyonaria .

. 202

Brachyura .

. 254

Zoantharia .

. 203

Pycnogonida

. 258

Ctenophora

. 206

Bryozoa

. 259

Echinodernia

. 206

Aniphineura

. 267

Turbellaria .

. 211

Prosobranchiata

. 268

Neniertini .

. 215

Tectibranchiata

. 276

Archiaiinelida

. 219

Nudibranchiata

. 277

Polychieta .

. 219

Pulnionata .

. 285

Myzostoniaria

. 233

Scapliopoda

. 285

Oligochffita .

. 233

Pelecypoda .

. 285

Gephyrea .

. 233

Cephalopoda

. 294

Hirudinca .

. 233

Tunioata

. 295

INTRODUCTION.

After the publication in this .luunml in 1899 of tlie paper "On the
Fauna and Bottom-Deposits near the Tliirty-Fathom Line from the
Eddystone Grounds to Start I'oint" {Jonrn. Mar. Biol. Assoc, vol. v.
pp. 365-542), observations v^ere undertaken for the purpose of pre-

It is hoped that main references to this i)aper may l)u made under " Alarine Biological
Association," and not under an author's name. — Ed.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VII. Nu. 2. DEC. 1901. L

156 PI,VMOUTH MArJNE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

paring a similar account of the fauna of the inshore grounds in the
neighbourhood of riyniouth. As the work proceeded, however, it was
realised that, owing to the great damage which has been caused to the
grounds within easy reach of the harbour by the constant discharge of
mud and refuse from barges working in connection witli the new dock-
yard extension at Devonport and other harbour works, any attempt to
prepare' a consecutive account of the fauna and bottom-deposits over
the whole area, such as was given for the grounds from Eddystone to
Start, would be a matter of extreme difficulty and of little use.

The present report has therefore been arranged in a somewhat
dilTerent way. A general account is first given of certain typical
areas, their physical conditions are briefly described, and a short list
is added of the more common and characteristic species which are
found in them. This description of the grounds is followed by a
general list of the species which have been recorded in the whole area
investigated, and the local distribution of each, so far as it is shown
from the Laboratory records, is given. The information supplied in
the two sections of the report when combined furnishes for each species
a general idea of the conditions under which it lives.

Some explanation is necessary as to the scope of the general list.
It is not intended to be a complete list of all species which have been
recorded from the Plymouth district,* but only of such as have been
found in recent years as a result of the work carried on at the
Plymouth Laboratory and for which the exact locality of capture is
known. All records which appeared to be in any way questionable
have been deliberately omitted. Omissions, which in some groups
especially are known to be exceedingly numerous, are easily made
good at a later date, whilst false records are less readily corrected.

In all cases the initials of the person or persons responsible for a
record have been given, but it must not be supposed that the persons
so indicated were the first or only ones to find the species in the locality
indicated. During the course of preparing this paper for the press it
has been frequently necessary, especially in the case of the conniion
and widely distributed species, to frame a general note expressing facts
which have for long been well known in the Laboratory, but in order to
fix responsibility such notes have been followed by the initials of the
person by whom they were framed. In editing the notes, care has been
taken that the collection of records for each species shall, as far as
possible, give a not incorrect indication of the abundance and distribution
of the species in the Plymouth district.

* Kecords for Plymouth previous to 1888 are sinnniariscd by Heape, "Preliminary
Rojiort upon the Fauna and Flora of Plymouth Sound," Jonni. Mar. Biol. Assoc,
Old Series, ii.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 157

Many of the records have already been printed in the Journal of the
Association and elsewhere. It has not, however, been thought necessary
in such cases to give detailed references, as a classified list of papers
dealing with work done in the Laboratory has already been published
{Jonrn. Mar. Biol. Assoc, vol. vi. p. 115).

As regards the question of nomenclature, whilst the names used
are in general those which it is thought will be finally adopted by
zoologists, we have not attached undue importance to this aspect of the
matter, but by supplying in each case one reference to a good descrip-
tion (preference being given to one accompanied by a figure or to one
in a recognised monograph of the group), we have endeavoured to leave
no room for doubt as to the precise species which the name is intended
to indicate.

The vast amount of detailed work which the preparation of this
paper has entailed has been carried out chiefly by Mr. R. A. Todd and
by Mr. S. Pace. A large amount of preliminary work in bringing the
records together was carried out by Mr, Todd. The whole, excepting
Foraminifera and Worms, has been critically reviewed, extended, and
prepared for the press by Mr. Pace, who has also paid special attention
to the nomenclature and references employed.

Each group when completed has been submitted, for critical examina-
tion to one or more specialists, to whom, as well as to the authors of the
records, the best thanks of the Association are due for the help given.

Taking the groups in the order in which they are printed, the follow-
ing notes as to the relative completeness of the lists, and as to those
who have chiefly assisted in their preparation, may be of service.

Foraminifera. Our records for this group are almost all due to
Mr. Pi. H. Worth, who has also arranged the list for publication. It
has been submitted to Mr. J. J. Lister, who has made some valuable
additions.

/ Porifera. The list is a very imperfect one, many common species
not having been identified and recorded. The records that we have are
chiefly due to Prof. E. A. Minchin and Mr. Gl. P. Bidder, both of whom
have assisted in tlie revision.

y Hydrozoa. Most of the species which occur at all frequently are
believed to have been included. The lists have all been revised by
Mr. E. T. Browne, to whom we are indebted for many additions and
suggestions.

Alcyonaria. Probably gives all the local species.

ZoANTiiARiA. An incomplete list, no specialist on the group having
worked at Plymouth.

Ctenopiioha. The only frequent species are included, but the
number of records is not large.

158 PLYMOUTFI MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

"^ EcHiNODERMA. Mr. Pace has devoted particular attention to this
group, and the list given is an almost complete one, except for the
Holothuria,

TuRBELLARlA. The records are almost all derived from Dr. F. W.
Gamble's list published in this Journal (vol. iii. p. 30), and has been
submitted to Dr. Gamble and Dr. E. G. Gardiner.

Nemertini. The list is based on that published in this Journal
(vol. iii. p. 1) by Mr. T. H. Riches. It has been revised and added to by-
Mr. Riches, Mr. R. C. Punnett, and Mr. W. I. Beaumont.

Polych.^ta, Archiannelida. The majority of the records are by
Dr. E. J. Allen, by whom the list has been prepared. It is believed to
be fairly complete for species which occur at all frequently, excepting
in the families Syllidce and Maldanidce.

The list of Pohjnoidce is based on that published l)y ]\Ir. T. V.
Hodgson in this Journal (vol. vi. p. 218).

Myzostomaria, Gephyrea, Hirudinea, Oligoch^.ta, Ch^tognatha.
The lists of these groups are known to be incomplete.
" Crustacea. The list of Branghiopoda is probably complete, that of
the Ostracoda contains only a few records kindly supplied by the Rev.
Dr. A. M. Norman, of which no account of the local distribution can
be given, whilst that of the Copepoda is confined to species for which
Plymouth records have already been published by Mr. G. C. Bourne
{Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S., i. p. 144) and by Prof. P. T. Cleve
{Svenska. Akad. Handl., vol. xxxiv., No. 2 ; Stockholm, 1900, etc.).
The parasitic Copepoda recorded by Dr. Bassett-Smith as occurring at
Plymouth have been omitted, as they were probably not found upon
fish caught within the area dealt with in this paper. The list of
CiRRiPEDiA is fairly complete.

The Amphipoda and Isopoda are incomplete as regards the smaller
forms, and do not contain records by anyone who has worked ex-
haustively at the groups in this district. Cumacea are also incomplete.
The ScHizoPODA, the account of which has been prepared by Mr. W. I.
Beaumont, probably includes all the species which occur in any
abundance.

The Macrura and Brachyura are fairly complete.

Pycnogonida have not been revised by a specialist, and the list is
imperfect.

^ Bryozoa. The list has been submitted to Dr. S. F. Harmer, who has
added many records.

^ Mollusca. The lists, which are chiefly based on the work of
Mr. Todd and Mr. Pace, include all the more prominent forms, but are
incomplete as regards the smaller and more critical species. The
Tegtibkanchiata have been revised by Mr. W. I. Beaumont.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEBItATE FAUNA. 159

TuNiCATA. The account is chieHy based upon the work of Mr. AV.
Garstang, but is by no means complete, as many of his records could
not be made available in time for publication.

The description of the grounds has been prepared by Dr. E. J. Allen,
with the assistance of Mr. S. Pace.

An alphabetical index of the grounds will be found below, and a
list of all those zoologists by whom records have been made on p. 172.

E. J. A.

•DESCRIPTION OF GROUNDS.

ALPHABETICAL INDEX.

Asia Shoal

. 164

Mount Edgcurabe (shore)

161

Batten (shore)

. 162

Queen's Ground

165

Breakwater .

. 163

Rame-Eddystone Grounds

171

Cattewater

. 165

Reny Rocks .

168

Cawsaiid Bay.

. 168

Rum Bay

160

Drake's Island

. 161

Sound (Plymouth) shores

160

Duke Rock .

. 165

,, ,, dredging and trawl-

Eddystone Grounds

. 172

ing grounds

164

Laboratory (Rocks below)

. 162

Stoke Point Grounds

171

Looe-Eddystoue Grounds

. 172

Wembury Bay

167

Mewstone ^ Amphioxus' Ground

. 170

West Hoe Rocks

162

, , ' Echiuoderni ' Ground

. 170

Whitsaud Bay (shore) .

168

,, Fine Sand Ground .

. 170

,, ,, trawling ground

169

Ledge .

. 169

Yealm Shores

.

166

„ Shell Gravel.

. 169

,, dredging and trawling

grounds

166

Millbay Channel

. 164

The area dealt with in this report extends from the shore to a deptli
of from 30 to 35 fathoms and may be considered as limited on the sea-
ward side by a line running westwards from Bolt Head, passing a little
outside the Eddystone Rocks and Hand Deeps, and then drawing north-
wards and meeting the coast at Looe. The length of such a line is
about 35 miles, and the greatest breadth of the sea area included within
it (from Plymouth to beyond the Eddystone) is from 14 to 15 miles.
Roughly speaking, this area may be said to lie within a radius of
15 miles from the Laboratory. The area contains a number of typical
tidal rivers (Hamoaze, Cattewater, Yealm R.), the large sheets of enclosed
and sheltered sea represented by Plymouth Sound and the mouth of the
Yealm, and a considerable stretch of coastal water exposed to the full
force of the waves of the English Channel.

Before giving the detailed list of the fauna inhabiting the area, it will
be convenient to review the general conditions prevailing in its difierent
parts. In this way it is hoped that some conception, even if it be an
imperfect one, of the nature of the influences which limit the distribu-
tion of the diirerent species may be formed by those having no personal
knowledge of the neighbourhood.

160 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEETEBKATE FAUNA.

PLYMOUTH SOUND AND THE ADJACENT TIDAL RIVERS.

Plymouth Sound must be regarded as an enclosed and sheltered arm
of the sea, into wliich the two tidal rivers, the Taniar (with its estuary
the Hamoaze) on the west, and the Plym (with its estuary the Catte-
water) on the east, discharge their waters. The fauna and the flora of
the Sound, in their general nature, are marine rather than estuarine.
The typical estuarine species of the Hamoaze and Cattewater occupy
no predominant place in their composition, and the effect of the fresh
water entering the area does not appear to be great. On the other
hand the conditions in the Sound differ from those obtaining on the
open coast, chiefly in respect to the force of the action of the waves,
and possibly also to the degree of circulation of the waters, both being
greatly modified by the presence of the Breakwater.

The fauna and the Hora of the Sound are comparable to those found
near the mouths of the different estuaries along the south coasts of
Cornwall and Devon : e.g. Salcombe Estuary below the Salstone (</. this
Journal, vol. vi. p. 151), Yealm Estuary below the junction of Newton
Creek with Yealm River.

Shores of the Sound.

No attempt will be made to give a detailed account of the whole
coast-line, but typical portions, which offer the best opportunities for
collecting, will be described.

The shores of the Sound are for the most part rocky, with gravel and
stones between the rocks. Fine sand in small patches is exposed liere
and there at extreme low water, but there are no stretches of sandy
shore.

Rum Bay. This term is used as a general name for the shore from
Batten Breakwater to Jennycliff' Bay.* It is a moderately sheltered
stretch of coast, with low rocks of a very friable shale, which dip
seawards and form ridges parallel to the line of coast. Near low-water
mark the ground between the rocks is for the most part very stony, but
fine sand and gravel are found at intervals. The low shale rocks are
covered, between tide-marks, with Fucus, Pclvctia, AscophyUnm, and
other brown weeds, occurring in definite zones, whilst at dead low
water Lnminarin is plentiful. The weeds and rocks are the home of
the usual shore Gastropods of the district {Purpura lapillus, Patella
vulrjata, Littorina neritoides, L. rudis, L. littoralis, Gihhnla cineraria,
G. umbilicata, Calliostoma zizyphinus, Ocinehra erinacea), occurring each
at its proper tidal level, as well as of the Polychretes Nereis pelagica

* The teini Kiiin Vmy, as here used, includes both Batten Bay and Rum Bay of the
Admiralty charts.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 161

and Eulalia viridis. The overhanging ledges of rock give shelter to
colonies of encrusting sponges {Hymeniacidoii sanguineum, Halichondria
panicca, and Syconcomprcssum), compound Ascidians {Botryllus violaccus,
BotryUoides ruhrnm), and Polyzoa {Umhonula verrucosa, Crisia), upon,
Vi^hich Xudibranchs {Arcliidoris tuhcrculata, ^olidia jMpillosa) feed.

On the Fucns the Hydroid Serlidaria pumila, the Polyzoa FlustrcUa
hispida and Mcmhranipora pilosa, and Spirorbis horealis occur in quan-
tity, and, on the Laminaria, Memhranipora memhranacea in large patches.
Clava squamata and Coripie var/mata are also often plentiful.

The cracks and crevices between the layers of shale shelter a
characteristic and typical fauna, of which Terchclla lapidaria, Am-
phitrite gracilis, Polydora jiava, Fotamilla reni/orviis, and Petalostoma
minutum are representative species of the higher and intermediate tidal
zones, whilst Marphysa sanguinea and Polymnia nehidosa occupy a
similar situation near low-water mark.

The patches of gravel and coarse sand contain at the higher tidal
levels Audouinia tciitacidata in large numbers, and the intermediate
and lower zones are characterised by the presence of large Kcphthys
cceca, Sthenelais boa, Nereis cultrifera, and Glycera convoluta.

Patches of fine sand, the most productive of which lies immediately
south of Batten Castle, are found to contain Arenicola marina, Lanice
conchilega (in sheltered situations near rocks), JSfephthys twca and JV.
Hombergi, Pectinaria Koreni, Scoloplos armigcr, Magclona papillicomis,
Pmcilochmtus serpens, Scolelcpis vulgaris (in black muddy sand), and a
number of other sand-burrowing Polychsetes, the burrowing brittle star
Ophiocnida brachiata, and the Lamellibranclis Ctdtellus pellucidus and
Tapes pullastra.

On stony ground the following species are met with in considerable
abundance beneath the stones: Gammarus marinus, PorccUana platy-
cheles, Cancer pagurus, Garcinus mcenas, Porhmus indter, Nchalia bipes,
Galathca squamifera, Lepidonotus clava and L. squamata, Anqjhiura
elegans, Asterina gibbosa, Ophiothrix fragilis, Leptoplana. tremellaris,
Botryllus violaceus. Actinia equina, and during the winter months
Goniodoris nodosa.

At the western end of Rum Bay, under Batten Castle, the shale joins
the Plymouth limestone, and there is a mass of high rocks of the
latter kind, with a fauna similar to that described in a subsequent
paragraph.

Drake's Island and Mount Edgcumbe. From their position off
the UKuith of the Hamoaze Estuary, the shores of Drake's Island and
Mount Edgcumbe are under the inllueuce of tidal streams of consider-
able force, whilst at the same time they are sheltered from the south-
west, and hence not exposed to the most violent wave action. The

162 TLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBKATE FAUNA.

shores of Drake's Island are for the most part rocky, the rocks, com-
posed of a hard grit, being generally steep and high. Between the
rocks are small patches of stony ground, and of sand and gravels of
various textures. The shores of Mount Edgcumbe resemble the stony
patches on Drake's Island, and may be treated with them.

The fauna on the rock faces resembles that at Eum Bay, and needs
no further detailed description beyond a notice of the fact that owing
to the steeper character of the shore and the height of the rocks, the
extent of surface exposed at each of the tidal levels becomes very much
reduced, so that those animals which are restricted to a particular zone
are represented by a relatively snuiUer number of individuals.

The overhanging ledges of rock are larger and more profusely covered
than those at Hum Bay, but the same species are plentiful. Perhaps
the most important addition to be made to the list given for Kum Bay
is the Ascidian Clavelina lepadiformis, which during some summers has
been very abundant beneath these ledges.

The characteristic fauna in the crevices of the soft shale at Eum Bay
is not so marked at Drake's Island, though Marphysa sanguinea and
Polymnia nehulosa are plentiful in crevices at dead low water.

On stony ground between the rocks at Drake's Island and along the
Mount Edgcumbe shore, in addition to the species found under similar
circumstances at Rum Bay, there may be found beneath the stones,
more plentifully than at the latter locality, specimens of Cucumaria
saxicola, Cucumaria Normani, and Echinus miliaris, whilst 3l//riothcla
2)hri/gia is very frequent attached to the under surface of the stones.

On the south side of Drake's Island a patch of clean shell gravel
is exposed, which is probably continuous with the shell gravel of
Queen's Ground (cf. p. 165). In addition to numerous specimens of
Carcinus mcenas, which are often of variegated colours matching the
colour of the shell gravel, the crab Pirimela is found, whilst in the
gravel Glycera gigantea occurs.

On the north-east side is a patch of sand, which is the most
characteristic bit of clean, even-grained sand in the district. Its
fauna includes Ammudytes, Natica Alderi, and Spisida {Mactra) solida.

A Zostera-hed exposed on the north side of the Island contains
numerous Solen, occasional specimens of JEchiiwccoxlium , whilst a patch
of a few square yards of harder sand is crowded with Lutraria elliptica.

Limestone Shores (Rocks below Laboratory and under West
Hoe ; Rocks at Batten). The rocks on the limestone shores differ
from the shale rocks which have been described at Rum Bay, in being
much higher, in forming a large number of rock pools at the higher
tidal levels, and in ])eing of a much harder and closer texture, with few
cracks and crevices. The rock fauna at the higher tidal levels, there-

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 163

fore, shows special features on the limestone shores, whilst the fauna
characteristic of the cracks and crevices between the layers of the
shale is not represented. The upper portions of the rocks are densely
covered with barnacles, amongst which the molluscs Otina otis and
Leuconia hidentata are plentiful. Tlie sides of the rock pools are
covered by growths of Coralline, red and green seaweeds, Hydroids
such as Syncoryne gravata, Clava squamata, small Tuhidaria, and the
sponges Leucosolenia hotryoides, L. coriijjlicata , L. variabilis, and Clath-
rina coriacea. In certain of these pools the Archiannelid Dinophilus
tceniatus is found in great numbers. Saxicava rugosa and Cliona celata
are abundant, boring in the limestone.

In other respects the fauna on the limestone rocks does not greatly
differ from that on the shale, the free-living animals being almost
exactly the same. Some of the overhanging ledges are densely covered
with the Ascidian, Styelopsis grossidaria and Fotamilla reniformis is
very abundant.

The Breakwater. The most interesting feature of the fauna of the
Breakwater is the collection of animals which are found boring in the
limestone of which it is built. To such an extent is llie stone eaten
into by various animals that considerable damage is done to the struc-
ture, and constant repairs are called for. In a stone which has been
injured through this cause the outer surface, to the depth of about
a quarter of an inch, is converted into a honey-combed, friable mass
through the ravages of the boring sponge Cliotui celata, whilst at fre-
quent intervals larger holes, each of which may have a diameter of a
quarter of an inch, and may pierce the stone to the depth of one inch,
are formed by the boring mollusc, Saxicava rugosa. To these two
animals most of the damage is due, but in addition there are found a
few holes formed by the mollusc Gastrochcena diibia, and many by the
Polychictes Dodecaccria concharum, Polydora ciliata, rolydora hop-
lura, and Fotamilla reniformis (the Sahella saxicava of Quatrefages).
Dodecaceria forms holes of oval or figure of eight section, which may
penetrate for a depth of several inches into the heart of the stone ;
Polydora ciliata forms small U-shaped burrows, open at each end,
whilst F. hoplura makes similar burrows of larger size.*

Other features of the fauna of the Breakwater are the abundance of
the anemone Corynactis viridis, and of a small salmon-red anemone at
present undescribed, of Caryopkyllia Smithi and of Gcdathea strigosa.
Large nests of Lima hians have also been found there.

* The facts here recorded were investigated at the request of tlie Government
engineers responsible for the repair of the Breakwater, and a n-port was furnislied
on the suV)ject. — E. J. A.

164 I'LV.MOUTII MARINE INVEIITEBKATE FAUNA.

Dredging and Trawling Grounds of the Sound.

The greater part of Plymouth Sound consists of comparatively
shallow water (4-6 fms.) with a bottom-deposit of fine muddy sand.
Winding through this is a channel of much deeper water, which repre-
sents the old river-bed of the Tamar. After leaving the Hamoaze (the
estuary of the Tamar) this deep channel turns northwards until it
strikes the northern shores of the Sound close to Millbay, wliere, bend-
ing sharply to the eastward, it attains a depth of 23 fathoms. The
channel continues to run eastwards, keeping within a short distance of
the shore but gradually diminishing in depth until it reaches the
Mallard Shoal, where, after passing southward between this and the
Winter Shoal, it becomes lost in the shallow water forming the central
part of the Sound (4-6 fms.). It is in this cliannel, and in the two
channels at the eastern and western etids of the Breakwater, that stony
ground suitable for dredging occurs. Tlie greater part of the rest of
the Sound, having a bottom of fine sand and mud, is better worked
with trawls. The principal grounds referred to in the records are the
following : —

Millbay Channel (14-23 fms.). The deep channel off Millbay is
one of the most productive dredging grounds in the Sound. The
dredge brings up masses of stones of varying size (chiefiy limestone),
with a few shells, all free from any growth of red or brown seaweeds.
The stones are generally covered with a good deal of brownish mud,
and are much honeycombed by the boring sponge Cliona celata, and by
Saxicava rugosa, Folydora ciliata, and Dodecaceria concharum. Sponges,
compound Ascidians, Antennularia antennina, and small Hydroids and
Polyzoa are numerous ; a great variety of small Polychtetes, more
especially Phyllodocids and Syllids, are hidden amongst the cavities
on the surface of the stones, and masses of tubes of Filograna implexa
are frequent.

The deepest part of the channel, which forms a deep pit or hole, is
remarkable for the abundance of Antedon bifida, the dredge often
coming up half full of these Echinoderms. From the sides of the pit
Tv.hvlarin indirisa is often obtained in quantity.

Asia Shoal. Another productive dredging ground lies along the
northern edge of the Asia Shoal, which is really the southern margin
of the deep channel. The water is here shallower (5-7 fms.) than
in the Millbay Channel, the stones are chiefiy the shales and grits of
Drake's Island, instead of the honeycombed limestones found at Mill-
bay, and they are generally covered with more or less mud. Eed sea-
weeds grow on them in small quantities, and large Hydroids, especially
Antennularia antennina and Tahnlaria indivisa, are often abundant.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEliTEBEATE FAUNA. 165

Alcijomdium gelatinosum is sometimes present in large quantities, as
well as Bowerbankia. Sponges also are numerous, and large numbers
of the smaller Polychtetes {Fhyllodoce maculat«, especially, n)ay occur
in great quantity) take refuge amongst the fixed organisms. Calyiitrcm
chijiensis is frequently found.

Queen's Ground. This term is used in the records to indicate the
area extending from the Queen's Ground Buoy to the New Ground's
Buoy and the ground around the latter. It is really the inner margin
of the channel at the western entrance of the Sound. The depth
is 5-6 fms. The soil is mainly a coarse shell gravel, amongst which
are a number of large shells and rather small Hat stones. The ground
is very clean, there being little mud covering the stones and shells, and
the water is clearer and purer than the estuarine waters from the
Hamoaze which run through Millbay Channel. Tlie stones and shells
afford attachment to occasional pieces of red seaweed (the rare Stcno-
(jramina may be especially noted) and to many of the larger Calypto-
blastic Hydroids and branching Polyzoa (especially Bovxrhanhia).
Lamellibranchs (especially Spisula) live amongst the shell gravel, whilst
Portunus depurator is abundant on it. The Polychaite fauna differs
considerably from that found on the edge of the Asia Shoal and in
Millbay Channel.

Duke Rock. Depth 4-5 fms. The grounds around the Duke
Eock form the western border of tlie channel at the eastern entrance
of the Sound. In recent years the Admiralty have carried out exten-
sive dredging operations in this neighbourhood, and have to a large
extent diminished its value as a dredging ground for scientific purposes.
The stones and shells which are taken here carry a similar collection of
animals to that found at Queen's Ground, but the shell gravel, with
the animals which inhabit it on the latter ground, is replaced by finer
muddy sand.

Trawling Grounds of the Sound. The fine sand and mud grounds
of the centre of the Sound and of Jennycliff Bay are best worked with
small trawls of either shrimp mesh or mosquito mesii. Shrimps,
prawns, and small Crustacea, small fiat - fisiies, pipe - fishes, Sepiola
atlantica, and Bhiline aperta, are the characteristic species taken. The
dog-whelk (Nassa reticulata) and shore crab (Carcimts mwnas) are
abundant species on these grounds, but are best taken in traps.

The Cattewater. The soil in the Cattewater (estuary of the Plym)
below Turncliapel is all soft mud, which can be worked with a shrimp
trawl. The characteristic local forms are almost exclusively shrimps,
prawns (especially Balamondes), Mysisjiexuosa, and Carcin us maiias. The
Cattewater is chiefiy useful, however, as a collecting ground, from the
fact that the Plymouth trawlers often throw a good deal of their refuse

166 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

overboard there, and many of the species from outside amongst this
refuse are capable of surviving for a time.

THE YEALM ESTUARY.

In the Yealm Estuary is a large body of enclosed and sheltered water,
with a fauna which is essentially marine for a considerable distance
above tlie mouth. The mouth is almost closed by a bar of sand, a
deep channel being left only on the southern side. At a distance of
about a mile from the mouth, the estuary divides into two branches,
the Yealm Eiver proper and Newton Creek. The Y'ealm possesses a
number of rich collecting grounds, which would well repay a more
careful and detailed study than they have yet received.

Shores.

Yealm Sand - bank. This name has been used in the records to
indicate a bank of fine to medium sand on the left bank of the Yealm
Kiver above the junction with Newton Creek, which is uncovered at
low spring tides. The fauna is characterised by the presence in the
sand of large numbers of Unsis ensis. By digging may also be obtained
in more or less considerable numbers Synapta inhcerens, Tapes jJuJlastra
and T. decussatus, Sjnsida solida, Gari deprcssa, Sigalion hoa, Amphitrite
gracilis, and large specimens of Nephthys cara. On the surface of the
bank are found Calliostoma zizyphinus, and, during the summer months,
Aplysia punctata, both in considerable quantities.

Eastern Shore below junction of Yealm River and Newton
Creek. Along this shore tlie soil is composed of a coarse, muddy
gravel, the most striking feature of the fauna of which is the abund-
ance of tlie large Terebellid Amphitrite Johnstoni, with its commensal
Polynoid, Onftyana cirrosa. Sealihregina inflatuvi is also found here.

Zostera Bed near the Mouth of the Yealm. Along the southern
shore a Zodcra bed is just exposed close to the mouth of the estuary.
The muddy sand in which the Zostera is rooted contains an abundant
Polychiete fauna, of which the two most numerous species are Aonides
oxycephala and Marphysa Belli, whilst Notomastus rubicundus and N.
latericeus are also found.

Dredging and Trawling Grounds.

The channel of the river just below the junction of the Yealm and
Newton Creek is the best dredging ground in the estuary. The bottom
is covered with stones and shells (chiefly oyster-shells), to which red
and brown seaweeds are attached in considerable quantities. Echiyius

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 167

miliaris is often abundant, and both Asterias ruhens and A. glacialis
are generally taken as well as Ophiothrix fragilis. In addition to the
ordinary shallow-water crabs, Pilumnus hirtellus, Portunus arcuatus,
Macropodia rostratvs, Inachus dorynchus, and Hyas arancus are usually
found. Large specimens of Archidoris tuherculata are met with, and
Acmcca virginca, Cahjptrcva chinensis, and Acanthochites fas(icularis, each
in considerable numbers, are characteristic. Of Hydroids, large colonies
of Plumularia 2y'in')wta are the most abundant, whilst Hydradinia
echinata is plentiful on shells inhabited by Eupagurus Ber7ihardus.
Large specimens of Phallusia mamillata are frequent, as well as speci-
mens of Ascidiella aspcrsa. Polycirrus aurantiacus is very plentiful,
wliilst numbers of Phyllodocids and Syllids, as well as other small
Polycha-tes, hide amongst the stones and shells. Eurylcpta cormUa,
Linens marinns, and Prosthcccrceus vittatus are also generally to be found.

In the Yealm Eiver itself, above the junction with Newton Creek,
there is a large oyster bed.

Zostera Bed along the Southern Shore. — A Zostem bed lies close
to the southern shore at the mouth of the harbour, which can be most
usefully worked with a shrimp trawl. Its fauna resembles that of the
Zostera bed in Cawsand Bay, to be mentioned later. In addition to
pipe-fishes, wrasse, and other small fishes, Macromysi? flexuosa is
abundant, as well as HippoJytc varians, Calliostoma striatum, Lacuna
divaricata, and Haliclystus auricula, whilst small Anemonin sulcdta are
abundant attached to the Zostera.

OUTSIDE GROUNDS.

Shores.

Wembury Bay. The shores of this bay form one of the best
collecting grounds on the open coast in the neighbourhood of Plymouth.
A reef of high rocks (Church lieef and Blackstone Piocks) runs seawards
in a south-westerly direction from in front of Wembury Church, forming
deep overhanging ledges on the landward side, and leaving at low
water many tide-pools both large and small. To the westward of this
reef the shore is formed of stretches of low, weed-covered rocks
alternating with patches of gravel and sand of different textures. Tiie
whole shore is exposed to almost the full force of the Channel waves,
and the greater part of the fauna is found beneath the overhanging
ledges and in other sheltered situations amongst the rocks and seaweeds,
The fauna of the sand and gravel is not very extensive.

The general character of the fauna of the rock ledges and of tlie
rock pools is similar to that found in corresponding situations within
the Sound {e.g Rum 15ay, Drake's Island), but there is greater profusion

168 riA'MOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

both of iiidividtuils and of species. The same shore Gastropoda are found
ill their respective tidal zones, and the ledges of rocks and under sides of
stones are covered with the same species of sponges, ascidians, polyzoa,
anemones, and hydroids. Of echinoderms the representative species, as
on the siiores of the Sound, are Amphmra elegans, Ophiothrix fragilis
Echinus miliaris, and Cucumaria saxicola, all of which are found under
stones, tlie two latter only at extreme low water.

Reny Rocks. A reef of exposed, weed-covered, low rocks running
from the Shagstone to the mainland. The fauna resembles that of the
rocks in Wenibury Bay.

Whitsand Bay. An exposed shore which consists chiefly of fine

shifting sand of a not very productive character. At intervals small

reefs of low rocks run out amongst the sand, which form the home of

a few ordinary rock-haunting species, and are specially characterised

in places by the great abundance of the reef-building polychcete,

Sahellaria alveolata. The rocky foundation in close proximity to an

abundant supply of sand evidently furnishes to these worms the special

conditions necessary for the formation of their masses of sand-built

tubes.

Dredging and Trawling Grounds.

Cawsand Bay. Depth 3-5 fms. A characteristic inshore shallow
bay with a bottom of fine sand. Being sheltered from the south-west,
it is protected from the most violent and frequent gales, which in this
district come from that direction, and is only visited by lieavy seas
during gales from the east. In the shallowest parts of the bay is an
extensive bed of Zostcra, with a characteristic fauna, this being one of
the chief features which distinguishes the trawling grounds of Cawsand
Bay, from those of the more exposed Whitsand Bay, to be presently
mentioned.

The smaller Crustacea {Hiiipohjte varians, Macromysis fiexuosa,
Cumacea, etc.) are abundant, and specimens of Maia squinado, the
common edible crab {Cancer jMgurns), mid the shrimi^ (Crangonvnlgaris)
are generally obtained. Sepiola atlantica is always present and often
numerous, and in the summer months Se2na officinalis is often abundant.
On the Zostcra, small specimens of Anemonia sulcata are frequent, and
Foraminifera, especially Polystomella crispa and Discorhina rosacea, are
generally abundant. Nassa reticulata occurs in quantity, often covered
with Hydroids. Spisula elliptica and Ensis ensis are common buried in
the sand.

The most characteristic feature of the fauna of this bay is, however,
the fishes, which are not dealt with in the present report. These
consist of llat-fishes (.Soles, Plaice, Dabs, etc.). Skates and Eays, and
several species of pipe-fish.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 169

Whitsand Bay. Depth 4-8 fms. Another example of a shallow
sandy bay, but being open to the south and west, it is subject to much
more disturbance from the waves than Cawsand Bay. There is here
also a great variety of the smaller Crustacea and Sepiola atlantica is
abundant. Cori/stes cassivelaunus and Astropecten irregidaris, character-
istic sand-dwelling species, are often taken in this bay, though much less
frequently than in deeper water.

Mewstone Ledge. Depth 10-15 fms. A ridge of soft, red
conglomerate rock runs seawards in a southerly direction from the
Mewstone. Over this ridge at a depth of 10 to 12 fms. it is possible
to work a dredge, the dredge often breaking away and bringing to the
surface pieces of the rock of considerable size. The rock is free from
the growth of any seaweeds, but is well covered with Hydroids, Polyzoa,
and sponges. The following species are common and typical of the
fauna associated with this red rock : Eunicella verrucosa with Gephyra
Lohrni and Tritonia pkhcia living upon it ; Alcyonium digitatum with
Ovvla imtulct; Caryophyllia Siiiithi with its associated barnacle Pyrgoma
anglicum; Antennidaria antennina a,nd A. ram osa with Scalpellum vnlgare ;
small colonies of Sertutarella Gayi and S.jiolyzojiias; Phiniularia pinnata
and P. Catharina; Lafoea dumosa with occasional specimens of Myzomenia
hanyidensis attached ; Cacumaria hrunnea on the rock itself and on the
attached Hydroids ; occasional specimens of Antedon rosacea, Opliiothrb:
fmgilis, Henricia sanguinolenta, and of the large YioloWwwi^n, Holotlniria
nigra ; OpMopsila aranea concealed in holes and crevices of the rock ;
Pludlusia mamUlata, Ascidiella scahra, and Ciona intestincdis (small
specimens) ; the Polyzoa Crista corimta and Bugida JlahelUda in abund-
ance, Alcyonidium gc/atinosum, Bicellaria cUicda, small colonies of
Cellaria Jistidosa and C. sinuosa, and occasional large masses of Lepralia
foliacca, amongst which a number of small Crustacea, especially large
numbers of Poixellana longicornis, are to be found. The large Phyllodoce
Paretti is also often found here. The red rock itself is bored by numbers
of Pholadidea loscomhiana.

Mewstone Shell Gravel. On either side of the Mewstone ledge,
and probably in patches between the rocks and the ledge, the bottom
soil is composed of a coarse shell gravel. In working a dredge over
the ledge a mixed fauna, comprising the animals from the rocks and
from the gravel, is generally obtained. The gravel itself may also
be worked with a small trawl, the Agassiz trawl having been generally
used in our work.

Species characteristic of this shell gravel are Holothuria nigra (often
in considerable numbers), Cardium norvcgicum, Spatangus purpureus,
Glycimeris glycimeris, Zumbriconereis impatiens, Ghjccra gigantea, Aylao-
plienia myriophyllu7n, and Eurynome aspera.

170 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

Mewstone 'Amphioxus' Ground. Depth 10-12 ftns. About
1| miles to the southward of the Mewstone (off Yeahn Head) is a
patch of shell gravel of finer texture than that last described, which is
one of the few localities in the Plymouth district where Amphioxus
lanceolatus has been found in numbers. The fauna of this shell gravel
is limited, but very characteristic. In addition to Ainphioxus, the
following are typical species : Anapagurus Icevis and Eupagurus
cuanensis, inhabiting chiefly the shells of Turritella communis and
Aporrhais 2Jes-2:>eIeca7ii, associated with which Epizoanthus incrustatus
is very frequent and the Hydroid Merona cornucopice is often found,
especially on the Aporrhais shells; Phascolion stromU, not uncommon
living in empty Aporrhais shells ; ^Z>«7m tumefada and E. tuhcrosa, Glyccra
lapiditm, and Omiphis conchilega.

Mewstone ' Echinoderm ' Ground. 2-4 miles south of Mew-
stone. Depth 23-24 fms. A few years ago this was one of the
most profitable grounds in the neighbourhood on which to shoot a
trawl when it was desired to obtain a good collection of invertebrates.
Recently it has been almost entirely ruined owing to the amount of
mud and refuse tipped upon it by barges from Plymouth and Devon-
port. The bottom soil consists of a coarse muddy gravel. The trawl,
after a successful haul, will contain large numbers of Echinus csculcnhis,
together with a few E. acutus; numbers of Solaster papposus, Buccinum
undatum, Eupagurus Bernhardus in Buccinum shells, some carrying
Adamsia polypus, others Hydractinia echinata, Eupagurus Prideauxi,
with Adamsia palliata ; Pecten opercidaris often in quantity, P. tigerinus
not uncommon, and an occasional specimen of P. maximus ; Galathea
dispersa, Inachus dorsetiensis, Macropodia longirostris, Ascidiella scahra,
a few Asterias glacialis and A. ruhcns, and varying quantities of
Sertularella Ga7/i and Ccllaria sinuosa and C. fistidosa, according to
the exact position of the haul.

Inside the ' Echinoderm ' ground, between that ground and Yealm
Head, in rather shallower water, there is a stretch of coarse, muddy,
gravel ground, which is covered almost exclusively with the brittle-
star Ophiotlirixfragilis. A dredge hauled on this ground comes up full
of these Echinoderms, a few specimens of large Ophiocoma nigra being
mixed with them.

Fine Sand south of Mewstone. Depths 27-30 fms. From 5
to 7 miles south of the Mewstone is a frequently worked trawling
ground with a bottom of fine clean sand. The fauna here closely re-
sembles that found on the Inner Eddystone Trawling Ground (cf. this
Journal, vol. v. p. 389). Characteristic and typical species are:
Astropcctcn irregularis, ApJirodite aculeata, Corystcs cassivelaunus,
Ophiura ciliaris, Dentalium entalis, Alcyoninm. digitahon attached to

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 171

shells, Pcden opercularis (abundant in patches), Sertidarella Gayi and
S. poli/zonias, Aglaophcnia myriopliyllwin, Cellaria sinnosa and C. fistulosa,
Ascidiella seahra, and Maovjjodia longirostris.

Stoke Point Grounds. Western boundary, Blackstone Point ;
eastern boundary, Ifevelstoke Church Cove ; seaward extension, about
li miles. The ground shelves very regularly outside the 10-fm, line;
inside this line it is very uneven; maximum depth, 22 fms.

In their general features these grounds present much similarity to
the 'Mevvstone grounds,' but they offer rather greater diversity of
type within a given area ; and perhaps partly as the result of this and
also of the fact that they are exposed to the full sweep of the Channel
tide, tlie fauna is considerably richer than it is on the Mewstone
grounds.

The friable red rock characteristic of the Mewstone Ledge is met
with again, and forms numerous more or less detaclied reefs, off Stoke
Point. It is abundantly perforated by Flwladldea, and in the disused
crypt of this mollusc, the remarkable Ophiurid Opliiopsila aranea is
plentiful. As at the Mewstone, the surface of the rock is very clean,
and it affords attachment to Eunicella, Antenmdaria, Aglaophenia,
Alcyonium digitatum, Caryophyllia, Tcthya, etc.

Between the reefs of red rock are patches of very rich shell sand and
gravel.

The grounds include an eastward extension of the IMewstone
' Echinoderm ' ground, together with patches where Ophiothriv and
Ophiocoma are abundant. In deeper water this gives place to typical
' Clicdopterus ' ground.

The Rame-Eddystone Grounds. This name has been used to
indicate the grounds lying for o to 4 miles on either side of the line
from Pame to Eddystone and at depths of from 25 to 30 fms. Two
typical classes of grounds can be recognised in this area: (1) coarse
grounds with a bottom soil of muddy gravel, on which Cha'toptcrv.s
is one of the most striking forms, and the chief Hydroids are Hidecium
halecinum and H. Bcani ; and (2) fine grounds with a bottom soil of
fine sand, characterised by the abundance of Cellaria sinuosa and
(J. fistidosa and by the Hydroid Sertidarella Gayi. Tlie grounds are very
patchy, and the two typical faunas are much intermingled, so that it is
only occasionally and after a short haul that a fair representation of
either of the two types of fauna is obtained.

Both classes of ground can be profitably worked with both the dredge
and trawl. On both, Ecliinas oieulcntas and Fcdcn opercularis nuiy be
met with in large numbers in particular spots, and Asterias ri(bens and
A. glaoialis are generally distributed over the area.

NEW SEKIES. — VOL. VII. Mt. 2. M

172 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEBRATE FAUNA.

The following are typical species occurring on the two classes of
grounds : —

Coarse Grounds. Cha'topterus variojyedatus, Hyaliiwecia tuhicola,
Halecium halceiniim and H. Beani, Atelecyclus septemdentatus, Ophiura
alhida, Ojyhiadis Balli, Vcnua fasciata, Tapes 'virgineus, and Ehalia
Uibcrosa and E. tnmefacta.

Tine Grounds. Cellaria sinuosa and C. fistulosa, Opliiura ciliaris,
ScrtidareUa Gayi and S. polyzonias, Echinocardium cordafum, Corystes
cassivelaunus.

From the above description it will be seen that the fauna of the
Rame-Eddystone grounds resembles very closely that of the grounds in
the neighbourhood of the Eddystone, already described in this Journal
(vol. V, p. 365 d scff).

The Looe-Eddystone Grounds. This name has been applied to an
extension westwards of tlie luime-Eddystone Grounds. Depths
25-30 fms. The fauna is of a similar general character to that of
the latter grounds, but is particularly rich, as the result probably of the
presence of much rough and rocky ground intermingled with trawling
ground.

The Eddystone Grounds. For a detailed description of these
grounds see this Journal (vol v. p. 365).

LIST OF THE SPECIES.
Explanation of Abbreviations.

The authorities for the various records are indicated by their initials, of whicli
the following is a complete list ; those of members, or late members, of the stall' are
marked with an asterisk : —

*A.J.s. — A. J. Smith, Assistant at the Laboratory since 1895.

A.M.N. — The Rev. A. M. Norman, ll.d., f.r.s.

A.o.w, — A. 0. \Yalker.

C.C.N.— Professor C. C. Nutting, University of Iowa.

c.s. — Professor Charles Stewart, ll.d., f.r.s., Conservator of the Royal College
of Surgeons.

E.A.M. — Professor E. A. Minchin, m.a.. Professor of Zoology, University College,
London.

K.B. — Emile Bnimi^t, Lie. ^s Sci., Paris.

E.G.G.— Dr. E. G. Gardiner, Woods Holl, Mass.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 173

*E.J.A.— E. J. Allen, D.Sc, Director of the Plymouth Laboratory since 1895.

*E.J.B.— E. J. Bles, B.sc, Director of the Plymouth Laboratory 1893-1894.

E.T.B. — E. T. Browne, b.a., L'^niversity College, London.

*E.w.L.H.— E. W. L. Holt, Naturalist in Charge of North Sea Investigations 1892-
1894; Hon. Naturalist at the Plymouth Laboratory 1897-1898;
Scientific adviser to the Fisheries Branch of the Board of Agriculture
for Ireland.

F.E.B. — F. E. Beddard, f.r.s., Prosector of the Zoological Society of London.

F.J.B. — Professor F. Jeffrey Bell, ma., Assistant Keeper British ]\Iuseum Natural
History.

F.w.G. — F. W. Gamble, D.Sc, Lecturer in Zoology, Owen's College, Manchester.

*G.c B.— G. C. Bourne, m.a.. Director of the Plymouth Laboratory, 1888-1890.

G.P.B.— G. P. Bidder, m.a., Cambridge,

j.c.s. — J. C. Sumner, a.r.c.s.

J.J.L.— J. J. Lister, m.a., f.r.s., Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge.

*J.T.c. — J. T. Cunningham, m.a., Naturalist in Charge of Fishery Investigations at
the Plymoutli Lal)oratory 1887-1894 ; ditto in charge of North Sea
Investigations 1895-1896.

*LH.G. — L. H. Gough, Ph.D., Assistant Naturalist in charge of Plankton Observa-
tions since November, 1902.

M.F.w. — The late Martin F. Woodward, a.r.c.s., Demonstrator in Zoology, Royal
College of Science, London.

p. T.c— Professor P. T. Cleve, University of Upsala.

R.c.p. — R. C. Punnett, m.a., Cambridge.

*R.A.T.— R. A. Todd, B.Sc, Director's Assistant 1898-1902 ; Assi,<tant Natmalist
since 1902.

R.G. — Robert Gurney, m.a.

R.H.w. — R. Hansford Worth, Plymouth.

R.M.P.— Mrs. S. Pace (Miss R. M. Clark).

s.F.H. — S. F. Harmer, d.Sc, f.r.s., Curator of the Museum of Zoology, Cambridge
University.

*s.p. — S, Pace, Assistant Naturalist at the Plymouth Laboratory since Nov. 1902.

T.H.R. — T, H. Riches, m.a.

T.H.T. — T. H. Taylor, m.a., Lecturer in Zoology at the Yorkshire College, Leeds.
*T.v.H.— T.V.Hodgson, Director's Assistant at the Plymouth Laboratory 1895-1897.

w.B.B, — Professor W. B. Benham, D.Sc, University of Otago, New Zealand.

w.E.H. — W. E. Hoyle, m.a., f.r.s., Curator of the Manchester Museum.

w.F.R.w. — Profes.sor W. F. R. Weldon, f.r.s.. Professor of Comparative Anatomy
in the University of Oxford.

*w.G.— W. Gar.stang, m.a., Director's Assi-stant 1888-1890; Naturalist 1892-1894;
ditto in charge of Fishery Investigations since 1897.

*w.H. — W. Heape, m.a., Superintendent of the Marine Biological A.ssociation,

1886-1888.

w.l.B. — W. I. Beaumont, b.a.
W.P.M.— W. P. Marshall.

In some cases where there is only a single record, this has been indicated by a
sui^erior numeral, cij. (j.t.c.'), or Queen's Gd.'

In the note.s on llreediiuj Period:^ only tlmse niontlis are named for whidi detniite
records e.\ist at the Laboratory.

174 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Foraminifera ]

FORAMINIFERA.

liY

R. H. WORTH.

Miliolinse.

'BiLOCULiNA RINGENS (Laiiiarck) : Williamson, 1858, liec. For. Gt. Br.,

p. 79, pi. vi, figs. 169, 170, pi. vii, fig. 171.
BiLOCULiNA RINGENS, var. patngoiiim, Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 80, pi. vii, figs. 175, 176. See also Biloevlinn ehmgnta.
Cawsaiid B.; Drake's I.; Eame-Eddystoue, generally distributed,
but with unexplained preferences for certain localities, only occasion-
ally plentiful ; Eddystone-Looe, same remarks as last ; Bolt, the
species seems to be poorly represented.
BiLOCULiNA DEPRESSA, d'Orbigny : WiUiamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 79, pi. vii, figs. 172-174 (as Biloculina rinrjen>i, var. cariiKita).

liame-Eddystone, distribution similar to that of Biloculina
ringens, but decidedly less numerous; Eddystone-Looe, same remarks
as last; the species also occurs around the Bolt; [Drake's I. (j.j.l.)].

Biloculina elongata, d'Orbigny: WiUiamson, 1858, liec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 80, pi. vii, figs. 175, 176 (as Biloealina ringens, var. iMtagnnica).

Five miles W. \ S. from Rame, characteristics exceptionally
marked.
Biloculina tubulosa, Costa: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Report, p. 147,
pi. iii, fig. 6.

A few individuals have been somewhat doubtfully attributed to
this species.
Spiroloculina planulata (Lamarck) : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 82, pi. vii, fig. 178 (as Spiroloculina deprcssa, var. rotvndata).
Rame-Eddystone, generally distributed and fairly plentiful in
places ; Eddystone-Looe, same remarks as last ; Bolt, an occasional
spec.
Spiroloculina limbata, d'Orbigny: Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 82, pi. vii, fig. 177 (as Spiroloculina deprcssa).

Rame-Eddystone, follows distribution of last, ])ut is less numerous;
Eddystone-Looe, here the conditions seem somewhat changed, and
this form is more numerous i\\dM p)lanulata ; [Drake's L (j.j.l.)].

Spiroloculina tenuiseptata, Brady: Bradg, 1884, "Cliallenger" Report,
p. 153, pi. X, figs. 5, 6.

Rame-Eddystone, an occasional spec, only ; Eddystone-Looe, an
occasional spec. only.
Spiroloculina excavata, d'Orbigny: Brady, 1884, "Cliallenger" Report,
p. 151, pi. ix, figs. 5, 6.

Rame-Eddystone, generally distributed, but rare ; Eddystone-
Looe, as above.
Spiroloculina fragilissima, Brady: Brealy, 1884, "Challenger" Report,
p. 149, pi. ix, figs. 12-14.

Found on the eastern slope of the Hand Deeps.

PLYxMOUTH MARINE INVEETEBKATE FAUNA. 175

[ Foraminifera — contd. ]

jMiliolina trigonula (Lamarck): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 84, pi. vii, tigs. 180-182.

Drake's I. ; riaine-Eddystone, generally distributed, but not
numerous ; Eddystone-Looe, scarce in the dredgings examined ;
Bolt, an occasional spec.

MiLiOLiNA TRICAEINATA (d'Orbigny) : Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 165, pi. iii, fig. 17.

Eame-Eddystone, an uncommon form ; Eddystone-Looe, none
found as yet.

MiLlOLlNA OBLONGA (Montagu) : Williamson, 1858, Kec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 86, pi. vii, 186, 187, as M. seminulum, var. ohlonrja.

Eame-Eddystone, generally distributed, numerous everywhere,
sometimes the dominant species in a dredging, one of the
commonest Foraminifera ; Eddy.stone-Looe, much as above, but
the species is a little less frequent ; Bolt, the species is less
common in the dredgings examined ; [Drake's L (J.J.L.)].

MiiJOLlNA SEMINULUM (Linne) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 85, pi. vii, figs. 183-185.

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I. ; Eame-Eddystone, universally present,
common everywhere, but numbers fluctuate considerably from
point to point, not unusually one of the dominant species in a
dredging ; Eddystone-Looe, much as last, but never the dominant
species so far as dredgings have been examined ; Bolt, extremely
common, the dominant species of the ground.

MiLlOLiNA SUBROTUNDA (Montagu) : Bnuly, 1884, " Challenger " Eeport,
p. 168, pi. V, figs. 10, 11.

Drake's I. ; Eame-Eddystone, common and almost universally
distributed, but more plentiful in shallower water. These remarks
apply to whole district.

MiLiOLlNA ciRGULARis (Bornem) : Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 169, pi. V, figs. 13, 14.

Drake's I. ; Eame-Eddystone, as last species, but less common ;
Bolt, occasional specimens.

MiLlOLlNA SECANS (d'Orbigny): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 86, pi. vii, figs. 188, 189 (as M.scminidum, var. disciformis).

From the shallower dredgings throughout the district, seems to
prefer clean sands, and is often common on beaches.

MiLiOLiNA BicoRNis (Walker & Jacob) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For.
Gt. Br., p. 87, pi. vii, figs. 190-192.

MiLiOLiNA BICORNIS, var. cUgans : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 88, pi. vii, fig. 195.

Cawsand B.; Drake's I.; Eame-Eddystone, generally distributed,
always present, sometimes plentiful. The same remarks may safely
be applied to the whole district.

MILIOLINA BOUEANA (d'Orbigny): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 173, pi. vii, fig. 173.

As last species, but a tritie less common.

176 PLYMOUTH MAT^INE INVEFa'EBKATE FAUNA.

[ Foraminifera— coH<f^. ]
MiLlOLiXA AGGLUTINANS (cVOrbiguy) : Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 180, pi. viii, figs. 6, 7.

Drake's I. ; liame-Eddystone, but commoner in shallow water ;
by no means an infrequent species anywhere in the district; occurs
on Eddystone-Looe Gds., Bolt Gds., and all areas examined.

Peneroplidinae.
CORNUSPIRA roLlACEA (Philippi) : Williamson, 1858, Kec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 91, pi. vii, tig. ly9 (as Si^irilUna).

Eanie-Eddystone, generally distributed, some localities yield
more specs, than others, but the form is very sparingly represented
anywhere ; Eddystone-Looe, rare,

CoRNUSPiRA INVOLVENS (Eeuss) : Brachj, 1884, "Challenger" Beport,
]). 200, pi. xi, figs. 1-3.

Drake's 1. ; Kame-Eddystone, generally distributed, in some
dredgings numbers were found adherent to Hydroids ; Eddystone-
Looe, same remarks as last.

Astrorhizidae.

Haliphysema tumanowiczii, Bowerbank: Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Beport, p. 281, pi, xxviiA, figs. 4, 5.

Occurs but sparingly in the deeper dredgings everywhere in the
district, is probably much commoner near tlie shore : [(j)ueen's GUI.,
abundant at times (s.r.) : Duke Ek. (e.j.a.)]

Lituolins8.

Haplophragmium canariense (d'Orbigny) : Williamson, 1858, Bee. For.
Gt. Br., p. 34, pi. iii, figs. 72, 73 (as Nonionina jcffrcysii).

Drake's I. ; Eame-Eddystone and all grounds, not uncommon
anywhere, but shows a preference for more silty areas, at times
quite plentiful.

HaplophragmiUxM fontinense, Terquem: Brady, 1881, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 305, pi. xxxiv, figs. 1-4.

Occurs near the Eddystone, and possibly elsewhere on the outer
grounds, but is nowhere common.

Haplophragmium globigeriniforme (Parker & Jones) : Brady, 1884,
"Challenger" Eeport, p. 312, pi. xxxv, figs. 10, 11.
Found in snudl numbers on the Eame-Eddystone Gd.

Trochammininae.

Ammodiscus incertus (d'Orbigny): Williamson, 1858, Bee. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 93, pi. vii, fig. 203 (as Spirillina arenacea).
Eame-Eddystone, uncommon.

Ammodiscus gordialis (Jones & Parker): Brady, 1884, " Challenger"
Eeport, p. 3.")3, pi. xxxviii, 7-9.
Eame-Eddystone, rare.

Trochammina ociiracea: Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 55,
pi. iv, fig. 112, pi. V, fig. 113 (as Rotalina).

Found over the whole area, but is not plentiful anywhere.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 177

[ Foraminifera — contiL ]

Trochammina inflata (Montagu): Williamson, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 50,

pi. iv, figs. 93, 94 (as Iloffdina).

Distributed much like Jfaplophrafjmiiim cannricnse, which in
some esLuarine waters it largely replaces ; it also occurs, however,
well outside the 30-fathom line.

Textularinse,

Textularia SA(iiTTULA, Defrance : Bradi/, 1884, " Challenger " Eeport,
p. 361, pi. xlii, figs. 17, 18.

The difficulty of precisely defining the limits of each species of
the arenaceous textularia on these grounds is almost insuperable.
Tcxtubiria sagittnUt is one of the less frequent forms, but it may
occur anywhere where either gramcii or agghdinans is found. The
most typical specimens are found in estuarine waters.

Textularia trochus, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. G t. Br.,
p. 75, pi. vi, figs. 160, 161 (as T. cuneiformis, var. conica).

This form, like the last, is infrequent, but while some specimens
of sagittula may be divided from agglvtinans by fairly marked
features, trochus, if it really occurs on these grounds, is always
most suspiciously like a somewhat unorthodox gramcn.

Textularia agglutinans, d'Orbigny : Brady, 1884, " Challenger "
Eeport, p. 363, pi. xliii, figs. 1-3.

Even between TcMidaria a ggl id in mis and Tcdtdaria gramcn there
may arise difficulties of discrimination. Tc.didaria aggbdiuans is
everywhere the less common, but is generally distributed, and follows
gramen in its preference of localities.

Textularia agglutinans, Yox.porrecta, Brady : i/r«f/7/,1884,"Challenger"
Eeport, p. 364, pi. xliii, fig. 4.

This variety is occasionally found in all parts of the district.

Textularia gkamen, d'Orbigny : Brady, 1884, " Challenger " Eeport,
p. 365, pi. xliii, figs. 9, 10.

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I. ; and the district generally.

Textularia gramcn is much the most common of the Textularia;
it frequently rises to from third to fifth in numerical order of the
foraminifera taken in a dredging, and on the eastern slope of the
Hand Deeps at one station it is only excelled by Mdiolina
seminulum.

Verneuilina roLYSTRoriiA (Eeuss): Williainson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br,,
p. 65, pi. V, figs. 136, 137 [as Bulimina scahra (arenacea)].

Drake's I. ; also sparingly present throughout the district, but
this species shows a preference for shallow water. In estuaries it
sometimes practically re})laces the Textularia.

Bulimininae.

Bulimina puroides, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 62, pi. V, figs. 124, 125.

Drake's I. A connnon species throughout the district, a little
more plentiful within than without the 25-fathoui line.

178 rLYMOUTII MAKINE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA.

[ Foraniinifera— co?i/f^. ]
BuuMiXA MARGINATA, d'Orbigiiy : Williamson, 1858, Kec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 62, pi. V, figs. 10-12 (as B. 2Jii2^oides, var. marginata).

Drake's I. Distribution precisely similar to that of Bulimiiia
jjnpoidcs, but individuals of the latter species average twice as
numerous.

BULIMINA ACULEATA, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 62, pi. V, fig. 128 (as B. jynpoides, var. spimUosa).

Common throughout the district, follows closely the distribution
of Bulimina pnpoidcs, on the average one specimen of amlcata
occurs to every twenty of pupoides. Williamson is probably right
in making Bulimina marginata and Bulimina acnleata mere varieties
of Bidimina p^ipoides, all intermediate forms occur.

Bulimina ELEGANS, d'Orbigny: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 398, pi. 1, figs. 1-4.

Drake's I. Occurs sparingly wherever Bulimina inipoides is
found, probably it should be regarded as a variety only.

BULLMIXA ELEGANS, var. cxUis, Brady: Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 399, pi. 1, figs. 5, 6.

5 miles W. | S. from Eame ; 4j miles W. \ S. from Eame.

Bulimina elegantissima, d'Orbigny: Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 64, pi. V, figs. 134, 135.

A minute form which is easily overlooked. On floating the silts,
however, it is found in practically all dredgings; never numerically
strong, it is none the less generally distributed.

Virgulina sgheeibersiana, Czjzek: Goes, 1894, Syn. Arctic and Scandi-
navian For., p. 48, pi. ix, fig. 459 ; Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 63, pi. V, fig. 131 (as Bulimina pnpoidcs, var. comprcssa).

Generally distributed throughout the district. A small species
liable to be underestimated as to numerical prevalence, unless the
sands are floated ; it is really present in considerable numbers
almost everywhere.

Bolivina punctata, d'Orbigny : Brady, 1884, " Challenger " Eeport,
p. 417, pi. Hi, figs. 18, 19.

Drake's I., and generally distributed throughout the district.
See also note to Bolivina dilatata.

Bolivina textilaroides, Eeuss : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 77, pi. vi, fig. 168 (as Textularia variabilis, var. kvvigata).

Drake's I., and generally distributed throughout the district,
nowhere very numerous, nowhere rare.

I regard this and Williamson's Textularia variabilis, typica, as
one species.

Bolivina difformis (Williamson): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 77, pi. vi, figs. 166, 167 (as Texttdaria variabilis, \a,r. difformis).

A small form, easily overlooked, but well defined. It is gener-
ally distributed, but nowhere numerous. The prevalence of this
species in surface townettings from the mouth of the Channel is
a feature which must influence its apparent distribution on the
sea-bottom.

PLYMOUTH -MAEINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 179

[ Foraminifera — contd. ]

BoLiviNA DiLATATA, Keuss : WilHamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 76,
pi. vi, figs. 164, 165 (as Tcxtuhiria rariahilis, var. sjpif/nilatd).
Drake's I., and generally distributed over the district.
This species and Bolivina jjundata both flourish on almost any
bottom soil and are both happier on genuine muddy silts than
most foraminifera. The relative prevalence of the two species
obeys some so far undiscoverable law and is subject to wide
variations.

Bolivina .enariensis (Costa): Bradi/, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport, p. 423,
pi. liii, figs. 10, 11.

Drake's I., and generally distributed throughout the district.
This is a species which will most probably be overlooked unless
the silts are floated. Although common, it is not numerically well
represented.

Cassidulininse.

Cassidulixa CRASSA, d'Orbigny : WilUamson, 1858, IJec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 69, pi. vi, figs. 143, 144 (as C. ohtu.m).

Drake's I. Universally distributed and fairly numerous every-
where.

Cassidulixa Bradyi, Norman: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Keport,
p. 431, pi. liv, figs. 6-10.

Distributed over whole district, l)ut distinctly in less numbers
than Cassididina crassa.

Lageninse.

Lagena globosa (Montagu) : Williamsou, 1858, Kec. For. Gt. Br., p. 8,
pi. i, figs. 15, 16 (as Entosolenia).

A common form of universal occurrence.

Lagena apiculata, Eeuss: Brady, 1884, " Cliallenger " Eeport, p. 453,
pi. Ivi, figs. 15-18.
Somewhat rare.

Lagena botelliformis, Brady : Brady, 1884, " Challenger " Eeport,
p. 454, pi. Ivi, fig. 6.
Not uncommon.

Lagena l^evis (Montagu): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 4,
pl. i, figs. 5, 5a (as Z. vulgaris).

Present everywhere, but in less numbers than either Laycna
orhiynyana, ylohosa, marginata, or probably sulcata. Small specs,
with either two or three chambers arranged in nodosarian form
are not rare ; some large individuals are entosolenian at one
extremity and ectosolenian at the other.

Lagena glavata (d'Orbigny) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 5,
pl. i, fig. 6 (as Z. vulgaris, var. davata).

Generally distributed, but in considerably less number than
Lagena la^vis.

Lagena gracillima (Seguenza): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 456, pl. Ivi, figs. 19-28.

A not unusual form, has not been found in all dredgings, but
probably is very generally distributed.

180 I'LYMOUTII MAKINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Foraminifera— foxif?. ]
Lagena aspera, lleuss: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" IJeport, p. 457,
pi. Ivii, ligs. 7-12.

Eare, but seems to exhibit a preference for the shallower waters.

Lagena hispida, Eeuss: Bradij, 1884, "Challenger" lieport, p. 459,
pi. lix, ligs. 2-5.

Somewhat rare in the district.

Lagena lineata (Williamson) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 9, pi. i, fig. 17 (as Entsolcnia glohosa, var. lineata).

Eame-Eddystone and Eddystone-Looe Gds., not a common form.

Lagena distoma, Parker & Jones: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 461, pi. Iviii, figs. 11-15.

Generally distributed, but in small numbers.

Lagena sulcata (Walker & Jacobs): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 462, pi. Ivii, figs. 23, 26, 34.

Drake's I., and throughout the district, a common species, occurring
in moderate numbers.

Lagena sulcata, var. interrujJta, Williamson.
[Drake's I. (j.j.l.).]

Lagena striata (d'Orbigny): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 7,
pi. i, fig. 14 (as L. vulgaris, var. snhstriata).

Drake's L, and throughout the district ; a common species, and
sometimes numerically strong.

Lagena semistriata, Williamson : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 6, pi. i, fig. 9 (as L. vulgaris, var. semistriata').
Drake's L, and throughout the district ; common.

Lagena gracilis, Williamson : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 7,
pi. i, figs. 12, 13 (as L. vulgaris, var. gracilis).
Generally distributed.

Lagena squamosa (Montagu) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 12, pi. i, fig. 29.

Drake's I., and throughout the district. Common and some-
times prominent in point of numbers.

Lagena hexagona (Williamson) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 13, pi. i, fig. 32 (as Entosolenia squamosa, var. hexagona).

Drake's L, and throughout the district. Common, perhaps not
quite so plentiful as Lagena squamosa.

Lagena marginata. Walker & Boys: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 476, pi. lix, figs. 21, 23.

Generally distributed and in considerable numbers ; small forms
are sometimes dilficult to discriminate from Lagena orhignyana.

Lagena marginata, var. ornata (Williamson): Williamson, 1858, Eec.
For. Gt. Br., p. 11, pi. i, fig. 24 (as Entosolenia).

Eare, but possibly many specs, have been overlooked.

Lagena trigono-marginata, Parker & Jones: Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 482, pi. Ixi, figs. 12, 13.

Eame-Eddystone, not infrequent, but represented by single specs.
in the quantities of sand examined from the different dredgings.

PLYMOUTH MAllINE INVERTEBEATE FAUNA. 181

[ Foraminifera— (Wi^f^. ]

Lagena quadrata (Williamson) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 11, pi. i, figs. 27, 28 (as Fntosulcnia mar<jinat<i, var. quadrata).

Present everywhere, but in small numbers. A mere variety of
Lagena maryinata.

Lagena orbignvana (Seguenza) : Brady, 1884, " Challenger " lieport,
p. 484, pi. lix, figs. 24-26, etc.

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I., and generally distributed over the
whole district. This is distinctly the most common of the Lagenjc,
and is well represented everywhere. The larger specimens are
well characterised, but the smaller forms are sometimes extremely
difficult to discriminate from Lagena marginata.

Lagena lagenoides (Williamson): WUliamson, 1858, liec. For. Gt. Br.,

p. 11, pi. i, figs. 25, 26 (as Entosolenia marginata, var. lagciioide.^).

Generally distributed and present everywhere, but not numerically
strong in any dredging.

Nodosariinse.

NODOSARIA PYRULA, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 17, pi. ii, fig. 39.

Generally distributed, but somewhat scarce, and rarely represented
by more than a few chambers of the shell

NoDOSARiA COMMUNIS, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, liec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 18, pi. ii, figs. 40, 41 (as Dcntalina suharcuata).

Generally distributed, in moderate numbers. The larger specs,
are the largest foraminifera of the district ; one in especial, from
one mile S.E. of Eddystone, measures 4 mm. in length.

NoDOSARiA SCALARIS (Batsch) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 15, pi. ii, figs. 36-38 (as N. radicula).

Drake's I., and generally distributed. Somewhat scarce at
places.

iSToDOSARlA CALOMORPHA, Eeuss : Brady, 1884, " Challenger " Ecport,
p. 497, pi. Ixi, figs. 23-27.

A small species, and very easily overlooked. Brady does not
include it in his Synopsis of recent British Species. It is by no
means uncommon in this district.

Ckistellaria crepidula (Fichtel & Moll) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For.
Gt. Br., p. 29, pi. ii, figs. 56, 57 (as C. suhareuatida).

Drake's 1., and generally distributed in the district ; a common
form, but not numerically strong.

Cristellaria rotulata (Lamarck): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 27, pi. ii, figs. 52, 53 [as C. calcar {typiea)].

Generally distributed, and somewhat more plentiful than Cristel-
laria crepidula.

Cristellaria vortex (Fichtel & Moll): Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 548, pi. Ixix, figs. 14-16.

Brady's only British locality is off the west coast of Scotland,
and he states that the specs, are doubtfully referrible to this species.
Occasional specs., the characteristics of which are well marked,
are found in this district.

i

182 PLYMOUTH MAlilNE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA.

[Foi-aminifera— cohW. ]
Ckistellakia ITALICA (Defraiice) : Brady, 1884, " Cliallenger " IJeport,
p. 544, pi. Ixviii, figs. 17, 18, 20-23.
Generally distributed, but scarce.

Amphicoryne falx (Jones & Parker): Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Keport, p. 556, pi. Ixv, figs. 7-9.
llare.

Polymorphininse.

POLYMORPHINA LACTEA (Walker & Jacob): Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 559, pi. Ixxi, figs. 11, 14.

Drake's I., and generally distributed throughout district. Not
a prominent species.

POLYMORPHINA GIBBA, d'Orbigny,

Included for present purposes in last-named species.

POLYMORPHINA OBLONGA, Williamson : Williamson, 1858, Kec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 71, pi. vi, figs. 149, 149^ (as P. lactea, var. ohloiuja).

An occasional spec, from Kame-Eddystone Gds.

According to Spence Bate, this species was abundant near tlie
Eddystone in or before 1858. I should not call it other than
somewhat scarce now ; [on Zostcra, Drake's I. (j.j.l.)].

POLYMORPHINA COMPRESSA, d'Orbigny: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 565, pi. Ixxii, figs. 9-11.

Occasionally found ; [Drake's I. (j.j.l.)].

UviGERlNA ANGULOSA, Williamson : Williamson, 1858, Pec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 67, pi. V, fig. 140.

Generally distributed and not uncommon, but never abundant.

Globigerinidas.

Globigerina bulloides, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 56, pi. V, figs. 116-118.

Drake's I., and generally distributed throughout the district.
Universally present, and if never abundant at least never scarce.

Globigerina inflata, d'Orbigny: Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Report,
p. 601, pi. Ixxix, figs. 8-fo.
An occasional spec. only.

Orbulina universa, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 2, pi. i, fig. 4.

An occasional spec. only.

SPHiEROlDlNA dehiscens, Parker & Jones: Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Report, p. 621, pi. Ixxxiv, figs. 8-11.
Rare.

Spirillininae.

Spirillina vivipara, Ehrenberg: Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 92, pl. vii, fig. 202 (as *S^. 'perforata).

Drake's I. ; Rame-Eddystone, everywhere, but not plentiful.

Spirillina margaritifera, Williamson : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For.
Gt. Br., p. 93, pl. vii, fig. 204.

Rame-Eddystone, an occasional spec.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 183

[ Foraminifera— coH/rf. ]

Rotalinae.

Patellina corrugata, AVilliamsou : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 46, pi. iii, figs. 86-89.

Generally distributed, but in small numbers.

DISCORBINA GLOBULARIS (d'Orbigny) : Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 53, pi. iv, figs. 104, 105 [as Rotalina concamerata (young)].

Cawsand B., at times abundant on the Zostera; [Drake's I. (j.j.L.)].
Generally distributed throughout the district, and in places common.

DiscORBiXA ROSACEA (d'Orbigny) : Williamson, 1858, liec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 54, pi. iv, figs. 109-111 (as Ixotalina mamiUa).

Cawsand B., very plentiful; Drake's I., and generally distributed.
A common species, universally present, and frequently from fifth
to sixth of all species in a1)undance. But both Disrorhina glohularis
and Discorhina orbicularis appear to merge in this species, and few
specimens are so well characterised as Williamson's figure.

DiscORBiNA ORBICULARIS (Terquem): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Report,
p. 647, pi. Ixxxviii, figs. 4-8.

Common, and of universal distribution, but less abundant than
either of the preceding Discorbime.

DiscORBiNA PARisiENSis (d'Orbigny): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Report,
p. 648, pi. xc, figs. 5, 6, 9-12.

Cawsand B., and sparingly represented in most dredgings, but at
places apparently scarce.

DISCORBINA Bertheloti (d'Orbigny): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Report,
p. 650, pi. Ixxxix, figs. 10-12.
Much as Discorhiaa parincnsis.

Planorbulina mediterranensis, d'Orbigny : Williamson, 1858, Rec.
For. Gt. Br., p. 57, pi. v, figs. 119, 120 (as P. vulyaris).

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I., and generally distributed through the
district, but in very varying abundance. Sometimes third or fourth
in numerical precedence, and sometimes very low indeed. There
is no present key to its preferences of locality.

Truncatulina lobatula (Walker & Jacob): Williamson, 1858, Rec.
For. Gt. Br., p. 59, pi. v, figs. 121-123.

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I., generally distributed throughout the
district. Present practically everywhere, but in very varying
abundance. Long ago Montagu noted it adherent to Hydroids,
and this is the clue to its distribution; wherever Hydroids are
present, this is one of the commonest foraminifera. It also exhibits
an apparent preference for Scriularella yayi as a host.

PuLViNULiXA REPANDA (Fichtcl & Moll) : Williamson, 1858, Rec. For.
Gt. Br., p. 52, ])1. iv, figs. 101-10;5 [as liotalina concamcnda (mature)].
Cawsand Ji., and generally distributed, but not a species which
occurs in abundance.

PULVINULINA Menardii (d'Orbigny): Brady, 1884, "Challenger" Report,
p. 690, pi. ciii, figs. 1, 2.

Somewhat uncommon, and doubtfully an inliabitant oi the
district, but rather a casual visitor.

184 I'LYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Foraminifera — contd. ]
KOTALIA Beccarii (Linne) : Williamson, 1858, Eec, For, Gt. Br., p. 48,

pi. iv, tigs. 90-92.

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I. ; everywhere throughout the district

competes with Miliolina seminuliaii and, at places, Truncatulina

lohatula for first place in abundance. On line sands it seems best

at home, and one dredging, about 4 m. W. of liame, in 20 fnis.,

yielded close on 12,000 individuals of this species to each 10 grms.

of bottom deposit, while Miliolina f^rmiinihirn was present in equal

numbers.
ROTALIA NITIDA, Williamson: Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br., p. 54,

pi. iv, figs. 106-108.

A common form of general distribution ; never attaining the

occasional extreme abundance of llotalia beccarii, it none the less

runs that species very nearly at places.

Polystommellinae.

XONIONINA DEPRESSULA (Walker & Jacob) : Brady, 1884, '* Challenger "
Keport, p. 725, pi. cix, figs. 6, 7.

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I., and generally distributed. A common
species, present everywhere, and frequently in some abundance.

NONIONINA UMBILICATULA (Montagu) : WiUiamsov, 1858, Eec. For. Gt.
Br., p. 32, pi. iii, figs. 68, 69 (as N. harlccana).

Apparently prefers the deeper waters of the area examined ;
is nowhere a prominent species. Since, however, it also occurs in
estuaries, it evidently is not restricted to deeper waters only.
NONIONINA TURGIDA (Williamson): Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 50, pi. iv, figs. 95-97 (as Eotalina),

Cawsand B., and generally distributed. A small form probably
present everywhere, but not abundant.

NONIONINA SCAPHA (Fichtel & Moll): Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 730, pi. cix, figs. 14-16.

Occurrence similar to that of Xonionina tnnjida.

NONIONINA STELLIGERA, d'Orbigny : Brad//, 1884, "Challenger" Eeport,
p. 728, pi. cix, figs. 3-5.

Caw^sand B. ; Drake's I., generally distributed, with an apparent
preference for the shallower waters. Nowhere present in such
numbers as JSfonionina dcprcssula.
POLYSTOMELLA CRisPA (Linn^) : Williamson, 1858, Eec, For. Gt. Br.,
p. 40, pi, iii, figs, 78-80,

Cawsand B, ; Drake's I,, and generally distributed within the
15 fni. line ; outside the 20 fm. line this form is practically
unknown; never abundant outside 10 fms., but within that limit
sometimes the dominant species. The Zostera of Cawsand B. is at
times crowded with this species,
POLYSTOMELLA SUBNUDOSA (Mllnster) : Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p. 734, pi. ex, fig. 1.
Not infrequent outside 28 fms.
POLYSTOMELLA MACELLA (Fichtel & Moll) : Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
Eeport, p, 737, pi. ex, figs. 8, 9, 11.

Drake's I., and probably wherever Polystom el I a crisj)a Cornishes.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 185

[ Foraminifera— co?!<rf. : Porifera ]

POLYSTOMELLA STEIATOPUNCTATA (Ficlitel & Moll) : WiUwmson, 1858,
Kec. For. Gt. Br., p. 42, pi. iii, tigs. 81, 82 (as P. umlnlicaluta).

Cawsand B. ; Drake's I., and generally distributed, by no means
uncommon at the 30-fm. line and outside.

PoLYSTOMELLA ARCTICA, Parker & Jones: Brady, 1884, "Challenger"
lieport, p. 735, pi. ex, figs. 2-5.

Drake's I. ; Cawsand B., and throughout the district, but much
less abundant than either Foli/stonwl/a cri!<pi( or Polii^toinclhi s(ri((tu-
punctata ; a complete series of intermediate forms connects these
three species.

PORIFERA.

Leucosoleniidae.

Leucosolenia botryoides (Ellis & Solander): J. S. Boiverlank, Monogr.
Brit. Spongiadie, vol. iii, pp. 7, etc., fig.

On the shore between tide-marks, not abundant except in certain
localities (e.a.M.) : rocks under the Hoe, in abundance (g.p.B.) :
Wembury B., very abundant, on seaweeds, together with Si/co/i
compressum (e.a.m.).

Leucosolenia complicata (Alontagu).

Fairly common in rock-pools between tide-marks; also in ileeper
water off the Mewstone and elsewhere (e.a.m.).

Leucosolenia variabilis, Haeckel.

Common everywhere in rock-pools between tide-marks (e.a.m.).

Clathrinidae.

Clathrina CORIACEA (Fleming): J. S. Biturrhank, Monogr. Brit,
Spongiadie, vol. iii, pp. 8, etc., fig. (as LcucoHolenia).

Found in small quantities nearly everywhere on rocks between
tide-marks ; near ladies' bathing-place ; on rocks under the pier,
etc, (e.a.m.): rocks under the Hoe, in abundance (G.P.B.) : Pteny Kks,
(w.G. & R.A.T.).

Clathrina lacunosa (Johnston): J. S. Bowcrlanl; Monogr. Brit.
Spongiadte, vol. iii, p. 9, fig. (as Leifcosolenia).

Occasionally (w.G.): liame-Eddystone Gds., not uncommon (s.P.):
only below tide-marks and in deep water (e.a.m.).

Syconidae.

Sycon compressum (Fleming): J. S. Boicerhank, Monogr. Brit. Spongiadie,
vol. iii, ]). 1, (ig. (as Grantia).

Common at low water on most rocky stations (s.P.) : ]\lillbay
Docks, large specs, (e.j.a., r.a.t., s.p.).

This form appears to be an annual. The ova develope in Feb.,
free larvte occur in July, and sponges 3 mm. long in Sept. (g.p.B.).

Sycon coronatum, Ellis & Solander : J. S. Boivcrhanh, ]\Ionogr. Brit.
Spongiadie, vol. iii, pp. 3, etc., fig. (as Grantia ciliata).

Common at most rocky stations at low water (s.p., e.a.m.): occurs
in less exposed situations than S. coinprt^^utn ; common under the
Hoe except in autumn (g.p.b.).

186 PLYMOUTH -MAKINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Porifera— ooH^t^. ]
Halisarcidse.

Halisarca Dujardini, Johnston : F. E. Schulzc, Zeitschr. wiss Zool., vol.
xxviii, }). 3G, fig.
Millbuy Cli. (G.P.B.).

Haploscleridae.
Chalina OCULATA (Pallas) : J. S. Boiverhanl; Monogr. Brit. Spongiadae,
vol. iii, pp. 169, etc., tig.

Millbay Pit ; Wembury B. (t.v.h.).

Halichondkia panicea (Pallas): J. S. Bourrhank, Monogr. Brit. Spon-
giadoe, vol. iii, pp. 97, etc., tig.

Common ; Hum B. ; Drake's I. (r.a.t.).
Apparently an annual (g.p.b.).

Poeciloscleridae.

Leptolabis luciensis, Topsent: K Topscnt, Piesult. Sci. Monaco, pt.
XXV, p. 185, fig.

Plymouth (E.A.M.). Axinellid^.

Hymeniacidon sanguineum (Grant) : J. S. Boiverhank, Monogr. Brit.
Spongiadic, vol. iii, pp. 81, etc., fig.

Pocks under the Hoe, in abundance (g.p.b.).
Apparently an annual (g.p.b.),

Tragosia infundibuliformis (Johnston): J. S. Boiverhanl:, Monogr.
Brit. Spongiadse, vol. iii, pp. 137, etc., fig. (as Isodidya).
Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).

Tragosia polypoides, 0. Schmidt : /. S. Bowcrbank, Monogr. Brit.
Spongiada?, vol. iii, pp. 137, etc., fig. (as Isodictya dissimilis).
Mewstone Ledge (g.p.b.).

Suberitidse.
Suberites domuncula, Olivi: J. S. Botvcrhcnik, Monogr. Brit. Spongiadte,
vol. iii, pp. 91, etc., fig. (as Hymeniaccdon suherea).

Millbay Ch. (t.v.h., r.a.t., g.p.b.) : Cattewater (t.v.h.) : Mewstone
Gds. (t.v.h., r.a.t., g.p.b.) : Eddystone Gds., Pame-Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a.) : Yealm P. (e.j.a., t.v.h.).

Polymastiidae.
Polymastia mamillaris (0. F. Miiller): G. C. J. Vosmaer, Bijdr. Dierk.,
vol. xii, pt. V, p. 14.

Milll)ay Ch. ; Mewstone Ledge ; Yealm P. (t.v.h.) : 4i m. S.E. of

the Mewstone (g.p.b.). ,,,. . ,
^ ^ Clionidae.

Cliona celata, Grant : J. tS. Boiverlank, Monogr. Brit. Spongiadte,
vol. iii, ])p. 95, etc., fig.

Millbay Ch.; Queen's Gd. (T.V.H.): IMillbay Dock, common on
piles (r.a.t.) : Mewstone Gds. (t.v.h., r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a.) : Pame-Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Tethyidae.
Tethya lyncurium (Linnaeus) : J^ 8. Boiverhanh,'M.o\\ogv. Brit. Spongiadie,
vol. iii, pp. 38, etc., fig.

Mewstone Ledge (t.v.h., s.p.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 187

[ Anthomedusae ]

ANTHOMEDUSiE.
{HYDROID STAGE.)

Clavidse.

Clava (sp.?) LEPTOSTYLA, Agassiz: W. Garstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc,
ser. 2, vol, iii, p. 212.
Under the Hoe (w.G.).
Bearing gonophores iu March (w.G.).

Clava multicornis (Forsk&l) : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr.,
p. 246, fig.

Common in tide-pools under the Hoe (g.c.b., w.g.): common
Wembury B., and inside Penlee (g.c.b.) : Millbrook (t.v.h.).

Bearing gonophores: Feb. (r.a.t.): Mar.-Apr. (w.G.): Nov. (t.v.h.).

Clava squamata (0. F. Miiller) : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 243, fig.

Fairly common between tide-marks; under the Hoe; Drake's I.;
Pium B.; etc. (e.j.a., r.a.t.): Jennycliff B. (a.j.s.): Barn Pool (e.t.b.):
St. Germans K., abundant on Fucus (w.G.).

Breeding : Feb., May (w.G.) : Sept. (e.t.b.).

Merona cornucople, Norman : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 11, fig. (as Tuhiclava).

Not uncommon on shells of Aporrhais, Bentalium , and I'lirritellci,
tenanted by Phascolioii stromhi (R.A.T., s.p.) : Mewstone Gds. (w.G.,
r.a.t., .s.p.) : Stoke Ft. Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : on the fine sand S. of the
Eddystone (e.j.a.) : Ilame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Breeding : May (w.G., R.A.T.) : June (w.G.).

Tubiclava lucerna, Allman : G. J. Aliinan, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr.,
p. 256, fig.

Millbay Ch., on stones (e.j.a.).

Hydractiniidse.

Hydractinia echinata, Fleming: G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 345, fig.

Moderately common, on Biiccinum and other shells inhabited by
Eupagurus Bernhardm (r.a.t., s.p.) : occasionally taken on living
Buccinum (r.a.t.) : Cattewater (r.a.t., s.p.) : Asia Sh., Jennycliff B.
(r.a.t.) : Cawsand B. (g.c.b., r.a.t., s.p.) : Yealm II. (t.v.h., r.a.t.) :
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.) : Mewstone Gds., Eame-Eddystone Gds.
(r.a.t., s.p.).

Breeding : Aug. (w.G.) : Nov. (s.p.).

^' Podocorinidse.

Podocoryne carnea, M. Sars: G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr.,
p. 349, fig.

Occasionally on old shells, 10-20 fms. (g.c.b.) : Cawsand B., small
colonies common on living Nas^ia reticulata (r.a.t.).

Medusiu liberated in May, 1896 (e.t.b.).

.NKW SEIUES.— VOI,. VII. Nil. 2. N

188 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Anthomedusae — contd. ]
Laridae,

Lar Sabellarum, Gosse [Medusa = iri/Zm stellata]: T. Hincks, Hist.
Brit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 36, fig.

Millbay Ch., on Sabellid tubes (a.j.s.): on FotamiUa Torelli (e.t.b.).
Attached medusa^, Feb. (e.t.b., a.j.s.).

Corynidae.

CoRYNE VAGINATA, Hincks : G. J. Alhiian, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hvdr.
p. 268, fig.

Under the Hoe, fairly abundant (e.j.a.) : common in tide-pools ;
Paini B. ; Cawsand B. (r.a.t.) : Drake's T. (G.C.B., t.v.h.) : inside
Bovisand Pier (^v.G.): Bovisand B. (G.C.B.): Wembury B. (g.c.b., e.j.a.).

Breeding : Apr. (R.A.T.) : May-Aug. (g.c.b.).
Syncoryne eximia, AUman : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr.
p. 282, fig.

Single colony on piece of old rope, 1 m. S. of the Mewstone,
May, 1889 (g.c.b.) : Penlee Pt., Sept., 1897 (e.t.b.).

Medusa buds in September (e.t.b.).
Syncoryne (sp.?) gravata (T. S. Wright) : T. HincU, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 53, fig.

Hocks under the Hoe, occasionally; Mt. Edgcumbe (w.G., r.a.t.):
Drake's I. ; Devil's Pt. ; Garden Battery (e.j.a.).

With attached medusae : Mar. (w.G., r.a.t.) : Apr. (e.j.a.).
Zanclea implexa (Alder): G. J. AUman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr.,
p. 290, fig. (as Goumaria).

A single colony on an encrusting Polyzoan dredged from rocky
ground between Penlee Pt. and Rame Hd., Aug. 1899 (e.t.b.).

Medusae liberated : Aug. (e.t.b.).

Stauridiidse.

Stauridiu.m productum, Wright: G. J. AUman, Monogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 371, fig.

A small colony in a Laboratory tank, June, 1899 (e.t.b.).

Myriothelidse.

Myriothela phrygia, Fabricius: T. Hind's, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
].. 77, fig.

Connnon, under stones, at low tide (g.c.b.): Drake's I. (g.c.b., r.a.t.,
S.P.): Millbay Ch. (e.j.a., A.j.s., t.v.h., r.a.t., s.p.): shore below the
Lab., Mt. Edgcumbe (e.j.a.) : Pame Hd. (t.v.ii.) : Asia Sh., Peny
Rks. (r.a.t.): Picklecombe, Bovisand B., Mewstone (g.c.b.): Bum B.
(a.j.s.): Wembury B. (g.c.b., t.v.h., a.j.s., r.a.t.).

Gonophores ripe : Jan., Mar., Apr. (r.a.t.) : ]\Lay-Aug. (g.c.b.).

Eudendriidae.

EUDENDRIUM ALBUM, Nutting: 0. 0. jyiU/l)if/, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 7, vol. i, p. 362, fig.

One of the most abundant Hydroids at Plymouth during the
spring : on stones from Millbay Ch., often covering the stones

I'LYMOUTII MARINE INVEUTEnKATE FAUNA. 180

[ Anthomedusae— ct/H^iZ. ]

with a dense growth of white cottony tufts (C.C.N.) : Millbay Ch.
(E.J.A., T.V.H., A.J.S., R.A.T., s.P.) : Asia Sh., Duke Ek. (r.a.t.).

Bearing gonophores : Jan., Feb. (a.j.s.): Mar. (t.v.h.): Apr. (CCN.):
May (R.A.T.).

EuDENDPJUM CAPILLARE, Alder: G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnol)!. Hydr.,
p. 335, fig.

Off Stoke Pt. on worm tubes, and on Antennularia antennina
(g.c.b.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

EuDENDRiUM RAMEUM (Pallas) : T. Iliiiclcs, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 80, fig.

Eddystone, 30 fnis., not common (g.c.b.).

EuDENDRiUM RAMOSUM (Linnfcus) : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 232, fig.

Not uncommon in dredgings from the Sound (r.a.t.) : Eeny liks.,
at low tide (t.v.h.) : off the Mewstone, very common (g.c.b.) : Kame-
Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., generally growing on
shells or on other Hydroids, most frequent on sandy grounds (e.j.a.).
Breeding : Feb. (w.g.) : Mar. (w.g., r.a.t., a.j.s.) : Apr., May, Nov.
(R.A.T.).

Bougainvilliidae.

BOUGAINVILLIA RAMOSA (van Beuedeii^i: G. J. Alhnan, Monogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 311, fig.

Drake's I., at low tide (g.c.b., r.a.t.) : Millbay Pit ; Millbay Dock,
on piles ; Asia Sh. (r.a.t.): Cawsand B., on old tin can (e.t.b.) : Eddy-
stone Gds., practically confined to the fine sand ground, where it is
frequently met with, generally on Polych;vte tubes or on other
hydroids (e.j.a.).

Meduste : Apr. (w.f.r.w.) : May (e.j.a.).

Perigonimus repens (T. S. Wright): T. HinclxS, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
]). 00, fig.

Drake's I., on living Nassa reticulata (t.v.h.) : Cawsand B., on
Nasm ; Cattewater, large colony on abdomen of Cnrcmus (r.a.T.) :
Mewstone ' Echinoderm ' Gd., irside Buccinum shell (e.t.b., r.a.t.) :
Eame-Eddystone Gds. on TurriteUa shells (g.c.b.) : Eddystone Gds.,
on claw of Eupagnrv.fi Bernliardns (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Aug. (w.G.) : medusic in April (r.a.t.).

Perigonimus serpens, Allman : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hvdr..
p. 327. fig.

3 m. S. of the Mewstone, on an old rope, Oct. 1897 ; Eddystone
Buoy, Apr. 1808 (e.t.b.).

Medusa-buds present : Oct. (E.T.B.).

Bimeriidae.

Garveia nutans, T. S. Wright: G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hvdr.,
p. 295, fig.

Piocks under the Hoe (e.j.a., T.V.H., R.A.T.) : on the piles of the
I'romenade Pier, occasionally (R.A.T.) : Millbay Ch. and I'it
(w.G., e.j.a., T.V.H., R.A.T.): Asia Sh. (r.a.t.).

liearing gonophores : Feb.-Apr. (r.a.t.).

190 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Anthomedusae — contd. ]
Heterocordyle Conybearei, Allnian: G. J. AUman, Moiiogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 307, tig.

Abundant in the Sound on living Nassa reticulata (E.T.B., R.A.T.) :
Drake's I., on Nassa (t.v.h.) : Cawsand B., on Nassa (r.a.t., s.p.):
Eddystone Gds., with J^/7>r^//«/-«.s (e.j.a.): near the Kast Eutts, on
Ui'ccinuiii shells containing Eiiimgurus BcrnJiurdus (E.T.B.).
With gonophores : Aug., Oct. (e.t.b.).

"^ Tubulariidse.

TUBULARIA indivisa, Linnwus: G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr.,
p. 400, fig.

Hocks under the Hoe (e.j.a.) : Drake's I., in low tide rock-pools
(G.C.B.): Millbay Oh. and Pit, moderately common (w.G., e.j.a., r.a.t.,
S.P.) : Asia Sh. (e.j.a., r.a.t.) : Mt. Edgcumbe (e.j.a.) : Duke Ek.
(r.a.t.) : Eddystone Ek. (e.j.a.).

Breeding: Feb.-Apr. (w.G., r.a.t.): May (r.a.t.).

TuBULARiA (Thamnocnidia) humilis, AUuian : ir. Garstang, Journ.
Mar. Biol. Assoc, ser. 2, vol. iii, p. 212.

Tide-pools below the Hoe (w.G., t.v.h.) : Barn Pool (w.o.).
Breeding in March (w.G.).

Tubularia (Thamnocnidia) larynx, Ellis & Solander: G. J. Allman,
Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr., p. 406, fig.

Growing profusely on the Duke Ek. Buoy, and on other buoys in
the East Ch., 1889 (g.c.b.) : Millbay Ch. (w.G., r.a.t.): not taken in
1895 (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Apr.-May (w.G., R.A.T.) : Dec. (s.p.).

CorymorpMdse.

CORYMORPHA NUTANS, M. Sars [Medwsii = Stfrnstriipia ruhra, Forl)es] :
G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr., p. 388, fig.

The hydroid generation has only been taken veiy occasionally,
although its medusa is common (e.j.a.) : off Ft. Tregantle, 5 specs,
in about 3 fm.. May 1887 (w.ii.), 3 specs., May 1895 (e.j.a.): sought
for unsuccessfully, 1889-90 (g.c.b.): two specs, on patch of sand in
East Ch., May 1895 (e.j.a.): Queen's Gd., single spec, June 1904
(s.p.) : Cawsand B., single spec, June 1904 (s.p.).

Attached medusa* in May.

(MEDUSA STAGE.)

Codonidse.

Saesia eximia, Allman [Kydroid = Sipicori/ne]: G. J. Allman, Monogr.
Gymnobl. Hydr., p. 282, fig.

Plymouth, some specimens in duly (w.G.).

Sarsia GEMMIFERA: E. Forbes, IMonogr. Brit. Naked-eyed INIed., p. 57, fig.
Plymouth; Sept., 1897; May, 1898; 1899, fairly common in
June, few in July ; Cawsand B., a young stage with medusa-buds,
Sept. 1897 (E.T.B.).

PLYMOUTH MAKINE INVERTEBKATE FAUNA. 191

[ Anthomedusx—contiL ]

Saesia peolifeka: K Forbes, Monogr. Brit. Naked-eyed Med., p. 59, fig.
Plymouth (w.g.) : single spec. Aug., 1895 ; Whitsaiul B., about
100 specs., May 1896 ; May 1898, few ; July 1899, very abundant
off Eame Hd. (e.t.b.).

Sarsia tubulosa (Sars) : K Forbes, Monogr. Brit. Naked-eyed Med.,
p. 55, fig.

Plymouth, rare (w.G.) : very abundant about Saltash Bridge,
Apr. 1898 ; occasionally taken in the Sound during j\lay (E.T.B.).

Medusie appeared in a Laboratory tank April 1898, and were
reared to the adult stage (e.t.b.).

EcTOPLEURA Dumortieei, L. Agassiz : T. Hmcks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 124, fig.

Tlie Sound, a single spec, of an early stage (e.t.b,).

DiPUREXA halteeata : F. Forbes, Monogr. Brit. Naked-eyed Med., p. 53,
fig. (as Slabberia).

Plymouth, Sept. 1893 ; July 1899, two early stages (e.t.b.).

DiPURENA OPHIOGASTEE, Haeckel : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl.
Hydr., p. 45, fig. (as Sarsia strangidata).
Single spec, July 1897 (e.t.b.).

Peeigonimus eepens (T. S. Wright): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 90, fig.

Plymouth (e.t.b.).

Meduste budded off in tank in March (e.t.b.).

Steenstrupia eubea, Forbes [Hydroid = Cory7nor^>/^a nutans, M. Sars]:
F. T. Broivne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1896, p. 463, fig.
Abundant in spring and early summer (e.j.a.).

Hybocodox peolifee, Agassiz: F. T. Brovne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1896,
p. 466.

Not uncommon Apr. 1898 (e.t.b.): few specs, with numerous
buds, Apr. 1894 (w.G.).

EuPHYSA aueata: F. Forbes, Monogr. Brit Naked-eyed Med., p. 71, fig.
Single spec. 4 m. S. of Breakwater, Sept. 1897 ; Apr.-June 1898,
few specs, (et.b.).

Tiaridae.

Amphinema dinema (Peron & Lesueur): F. Haeckel, Syst. Medus.,
Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 50, fig. (as A. Titania).
Plymouth (w.G., e.t.b.) : Sept. 1893, fairly common ; Sept. 1895,
scarce ; Sept. 1897, several specs, from the Sound and outside
grounds ; May 1898, two specs, near the Eddystone ; June 1898,
single spec, near the Mewstone ; July 1899, common (E.T.B.).

TiAEA pileata, a. Agassiz: E. Haeckel, Syst. Medus., Denkschr. med.-
naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 58, fig.

I'lymouth (w.G.) : Sept. 1897, 2 specs. 4 m. S. of the Breakwater
and 2 specs. 5 m. E. of the Eddystone, all young stages; ]\Iay-
June 1898; June 1899, one or two specs, occasionally (e.t.b.).

102 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEHRATE FAUNA.

[ Anthomedusse — co)itd. ]
Margellidae.

LizziA BLONDINA : K Forhcs, Moiiogr. Brit. Naked-eyed Med., p. G7, tig.
I'iyniuuth, Sept. 1897, of varying frequency in the Sound and out-
side grounds, a large slioal off the P^ddystone on Sei)t. loth; May
1898, a large slioal in the Sound on May 2nd, it disappeared from
the Sound on the 12th, and was off the Eddystone from the 16th
to the 2Gth, but no specimens were then seen in the Sound or near
the Mewstone ; 1899, June-Aug., very scarce (e.t.b.).

PODOCORYNE CARNEA, M. Sars : G. J. Allman, Monogr. Gynniobl. Ilydr.,
p. 349, fig.

Free-swimming medusa3 in March (w.f.r.w.); July-Aug. (w.g.).

Cyt.eandra areolata, Haeckel: E. T. Browne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1897,
p. 817, iig.

Sept. 1897, intermediate stages occasionally met with in the
Sound and outside ; June 1898, single spec. 10 m. S. of the
Mewstone (e.t.b.).

Margelis AUTUMNALIS : C. Hartlav.h, Wiss. Meeresunters., ser. 2, vol. ii,
p. 465, fig. (as Bniif/ainvil/.ia).

Sept. 1897, very scarce; Sept. 1898, scarce (e.t.b.).

Margelis bella: C. JIartlanh, Wiss. Meeresunters., ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 470,
fig. (as BougaiiiviUia).

1898, a young stage in May, 4 specs, in June (e.t.b.).

Margelis britannica (Forbes) : B. T. Bruivnc, Proc. Liverp. Biol. Soc,
vol. ix, p. 267.

Plymouth, end of April (e.t.b.).

Margelis principis, Steenstrup : E. Ilaerh-d, Syst. Medus., Denkschr.
med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 88, fig.
I'lymouth, end of April (W'.G.).

Mahgellium octopunctatum (M. Sars): B. Forhcs, Monogr. Brit. Naked-
eyed Med., p. 64, fig. (as Lizzia).

Numerous specs, during latter half of Feb. and March, 1893 ;
less abundant in 1894 (w.g.): 1898, few specs, in Apr. and May
(e.t.b.).

Cladonemidse.

Gemmaria implexa (Alder) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 59,
fig. (as Zanclca).

Plymouth, 2 specs., Aug. 1895 ; Cawsand B., single spec, of an
early stage, Sept. 1897 (e.t.b.).

"WiLLiA stellata [Hydroid = Zar SaheUnrum, Gosse]: B. Forbes, Monogr.
Brit. Naked-eyed Med., p. 19, fig.

Single spec, May 1896; Sei)t. 1897, earlier and intermediate
stnges frequently taken, adult very scarce; June-Aug. 1899, very
scarce, only 2 specs, taken (e.t.b.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 193

[ Leptomedusae ]

LEPT0MEDUS.5:.

{UYDliUlI) STAGE.)

Campanulariidae.
Clytia Johkstoni (Alder) : T. Ilincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 143,

Ubiquitous on Alga' and on other Hydroids (g.C.B.) : L.W.-
35 fms. (R.A.T., S.P.).

Breeding: Mar. (r.a.t.) : Apr. (a..j.s.) : July (e.t.b.). Medusae ■
produced in Laboratory tanks, May 1895 (C.C.N.). Medusie bearing
gonothecse, July (e.t.b.).

Agastra caliculata (Hinrks) [Medusa = ^1. mira (Hartlaub)] : T.
Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zuoph., p. 164-, fig. (as Carnpunidaria).
The Hydroid form has not yet been recorded (s.P.).

Obelia dichotoma (Linnaeus) : 2\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 156, fig.

lianie Hd. (w.H.) : Eame - Eddystone Gds., on Antcnmdaria
antrnninn and t>rrtiihirella Gaiji (R.A.T.) : Whitsand B., on worm-
tubes (g.C.B.) : Eddystone Gds., on the line sand area, growing on
Peden ojjcrcidaris shells, Hydrcdlmania, Bougainvillia, Scrtidaria
arffentca, and Cellaria (e.j.a.).

Obelia geniculata (Linmeus) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 149, fig.

Very common, generally on Lainiiiuria (G.C.B. , w.n., R.A.T., s.P.):
Millbay Dock, on the piles (R.A.T.) : Eame -Eddystone Gds., on
Lepralia (r.a.t.).

Bearing gonophores : Mar.-Sept. (w.g.).

Obelia longissima (Pallas): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 154, fig.

From trawl refuse from outside the Eddystone (G.C.B.): S. of
Eddystone (e.j.a.).

sDbelaria gelatinosa (Pallas): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 151, fig. (as Obelia).

Lynher P., large colonies, up to 13 inches, in deep water under
Sheviock Wood, July 1898 (e.w.l.ii., w.i.b., e.t.b.): Bovisand B.
(t.v.h.).

Campanularia ANGULATA, Hincks : 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 170, fig.

Bovisand B., at low tide (G.C.B.).

Campanularia flexuosa (Hincks) : 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zoopli.,
p. 168, fig.

Very common on weeds and in rock-pools below the Hoe (g.c.b.):
common on the shore between tide-marks ; on hulks and buoys in
the Sound and Cattewater ; Phoenix Wharf and Millbay Dock, on
piles: Milll)ay Pit (R.A.T.): Mt. p]dgcumbe (E.J.A.): Saltash Pier,
very abundant (.)ct. 1897 (E.T.B.).

Gonosomes well developed in May (c.c.N.).

194 PLYMOUTH MAKINE INVEItTEBlJATE FAUNA.

[ Leptomedusae — could. ]
Campanulakia IIincksi, Alder : 7'. Hinds, Hist. Brit, llydr. Zoopli.,
p. 162, lig.

Common in 10-30 fms. on shells, Hydroids, Cellaria, etc. ; liame-
Eddystone Gds. ; Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Campanulakia neglecta (Alder) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr, Zooph.,
p. 171, lig.

On stems of 2\ihularia indivisa ; Millbay (c.C.N.).

XJampanularia verticillata (Linnaeus) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 167, tig.

Mewstone Gds. ; Eddystone Gds., occasionally on the fine sand
areas (e.j.a.).
Campanularia volubilis (Linnjeus) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 160, fig.

Duke Ilk., on shells (G.C.B.): N. of Breakwater, 5| fms., plentiful
(W.H.).
Gonothyk.ea Loveni, Allman : T. Hincks, Hist, l^rit. Hydr. Zooph.,

p. 181, fig.

Millbay Ch. ; Hamoaze (e.j.a.) : Millbay Dock, on piles ; on
hulks in Cattewater ; between tide-marks Turnchapel, Rum B.,
and Yealni R; Asia Sh. (r.a.t.): Mt. Edgcunjbe, at low tide (c.c.N.,
E.J.A.) ; Ikrn Pool on Fucus ; Saltash Pier (e.t.b.).

Breeding : Mar. (r.a.t.) : Apr. (w.g., r.a.t.) : Sept. (e.t.b.) : Oct.
(W.G., E.T.B.) : Nov. (W.G.).

Sometimes grows in great profusion in the Laboratory tanks
(E.J.A.).

Campanulinidae.

Campanulina repens, Allman : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 189, fig.

Winter Sh.,^ abundant on Delesscria ; between Penlee Pt. and
Ilame Hd., on Algte and stems of J'uhularia ; Mewstone Gds.,^
many colonies on a piece of rope (e.t.b.).

Gonophores : July (e.t.b.).

Opercularella hispida: 0. C. Nuttimj, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7,
vol. i, p. 363, fig.

The type specimen from Plymouth, on a stone associated with
Clava niulticornis (c.C.N.).

Opercularella lacerata (Johnston) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 194, fig.

Millbay Dock, on young stems of Tnhularia indivisa and on
Eudendrium (c.C.N.).

Lafoeidae.

Lafoea DUMOSA (Fleming) [cf. Coppi/iia arcta (Dalyell)] : T. Hincks,
Hist. Ihit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 200, fig.

Common in 15-35 fms., on shells, worm-tubes, other Hydroids,
etc. (r.a.t., S.P.) : Eddystone Gds., both the creeping and branched
varieties, the latter especially upon the fine sand areas where it is
attached to shells or Polychale tubes (e.j.a.).

The Neomenian Myzomenia ( = Dondcrsia) hanyulensis is frequently
associated with the erect form of L. dumosa (e.j.a., s.p.).

PLYMOUTH xMAKIXE INVEKTEBEATE FAUNA. 195

[ Leptomedusae —contd. ]

Lafoea fruticosa, M. Sars: T. Rinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 202, fig.

Not uncommon, 15-30 fnis. (h.a.t., s.p.) : l\ame-Eddystone Gds.
(e.t.b. & R.A.T., S.P.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.): Stoke Pt. Gds. (g.c.b.,
S.P.).

Calycella syringa (Linnseus) : 7\ Hinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 206, fig.

Abundant on roots of Laminaria (g.c.b.): abundant on young
stems of Tuhuhirin indivisa (c.c.N.): Penlee Pt.; Panie Hd. (g.c.b.):
Saltash Pier, on Scrtularia (e.t.b.).

Calycella fastigiata (Alder): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 208, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Cuspidella costata: T. Rinds, Hist. P^rit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 210, fig.

Inner Eddystone trawling grounds (e.j.a.) : growing on weed,
trawl refuse (g.c.b.).

Cuspidella grandis : T. Rincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 210, fig.
On stems of Ralecium tencUiun (c.c.N.).

Trichydridae.

Tkichydra pudica, T. S. Wright : T. RindxS, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 216, fig.

Eddystone Gds., fine gravel (e.t.b. & e.j.a.) : Eddystone Buoy
(e.t.b.).

Coppiniidae.

COPPINIA arcta (Dalyell) [? = gonosome of Lafoea clumosa (Fleming)]:
T. Rincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 219, fig.

Eddystone Gds., abundant on the fine sand grounds; growing
on Hydroids, especially Lafoea dumosa var. robusfa and Scrtularia
(diiiiina (e.j.a.): Mewstone Gds. (a.j.s.) : Pame-Eddystone Gds.;
Mewstone Ledge, very occasionally (r.a.t.).

Haleciidse.

Halegium Beani (Johnston): T. RindiS, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 224, fig.

Not uncommon in the Sound, on stones and shells, and outside,
in 15-o0 fms., on shells, other Hydroids, and on CJiaitoptcrus tubes.
Not so abundant as //. halecinum (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a.).

With gonophores : Jan. (w.G.) : Mar., Apr. (r.a.t.) : May (s.p.) :
July (w.G.) : Oct. (r.a.t.).

HaleciUxM halecinum (Linnieus): T. Rinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 221, fig.

Not uncommon in the Sound, on stones and sheila. Common
outside, 15-30 fms., on Chcdopterus tubes, stones, and shells (r.a.t.,
S.P.) : Eddystone Gds., al)undant on certain grounds, and generally
on Cha'toptcrus tubes (E.J.A., S.P.): Rame-Eddystone Gds.; Mew-
stone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.); Stoke Pt. Gds.; Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).

Breeding: Jan. (w.G.): Feb.-June (R.A.T.) : July (w.G.).

100 PLYMOUTH MAKINE INVKHTEBItATE FAUNA.

[ Leptomedusae — could. ]
Haleciu.m labrosum, Alder: T. Hindis, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 225, fig.

Eddystone Gils. (E.T.B.).

Halecium tenellum, Hincks : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 226, fig.

Plymouth, 18 fms. (c.c.N.).
Breeding : Apr. (c.C.N.).
Haloikema Laxkesteri : G. C. Bourne, Jour, Mar. Biol. Assoc, ser. 2,
vol. i, p. 395, fig.

Duke lik., on flat stones (g.c.b., e.t.b.) : S. end of Jennyclif!" B.
(g.c.b , W.G.).

Sertulariidse.

Sertularella Gayi (Lamouroux) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 237.. fig.

Not uncommon in the Sound (R.A.T., S.P.) : Eddystone Gds., one
of the most characteristic features of the fauna of the fine sand
grounds (E.J.A., S.P.): Kanie-PMdy stone Gds.; Mewstone Gds. (r.A.T.,
S.P.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. ; Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).

Breeding : Feh. (w.g.) : Mar. (r.a.t.) : Aug.-Oct. (w.g.).

Sertularella polyzonias (Linnasus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 235, fig.

Occasionally in the Sound (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds., with
S. Gayi, but much less common (e.j.a., s.P.): Mewstone Gds.: Eame-
Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Breeding : Aug. (s.P.) : Sept. (r.a.t.).

DiPHASLV ATTENUATA (Hincks): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 247, fig.

On the fine sand of the ' Outer ' Trawling Gds. (e.j.a.).

DiPHASiA PINASTER (Ellis & Solauder) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 252, fig.

Very common in trawl refuse ; S. oi Eddystone (g.c.b.).
DiPHASiA PINNATA (Pallas) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zoopli.,
p. 255, fig.

5 ni. S. of Eddystone (g.c.b.).

Breeding : A])r. (w.g.) : gonophores in May (g.c.b.).
DiPHASiA ROSACEA (Linuiuus) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 245, fig.

Millbay CI)., common on stones (w.G.) : Millbay Dock, on the
piles (w.G., R.A.T.) : 2 m. S. of the Mewstone, small colony on piece
of rope (e.t.b.): Eddystone Gds., occasionally met with (e.j.a.).
Breeding: Mar. (w.g., r.a.t.): Apr. (w.G.).
DiPilASiA TAMARISCA (Linnicus) : T. Himks, Hist. Bril. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 254, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Sertularia abietina, Linmeus: T. Him-ks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 260, fig.

Common in trawl refusi; (g.c.b.): abundant in depths below
30 fms. on the 'Outer' Trawling Gds. (e.j.a.): Millbay Ch., occasion-
ally (r.a.t., s.P.).

PLYMOUTH MAKINE INVEllTEBKATE FAUNA. 197

[ Leptomedusae— co7(<(^. ]

Sertulakia argentea, Ellis & Solander : T. Rincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 268, fig.

Queen's Gd. ; Asia Sh. ; Millbay Ch. and Pit (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddy-
stone Gds., not infrequent on Pcctcn opcrcularis shells, and on
other Hydroids (e.j.a.) : Yealni If. (r.a.t.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (r.a.t.,
s.p.) : Saltash Pier (e.T.b.).

Breeding : Feb. (w.g.) : Mar., Apr. (r.a.t.).

Sertularia gupressixa, LiniiiGus : T. Rinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 270, fig.

Common in trawl refuse from the Eddystone (g.c.b.) : Queen's
Gd. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Gonophores ripe : JMarch (r.a.t.),

Sertularia operculata, Linnaeus : T. Rinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 263, fig.

Wcmbury B. ; Eddystone Ptk., abundant Apr. 1898; Eddystone
Buoy (e.T.b.).

Sertularia pumila, Linnaeus: T. Rinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 260, fig.

Abundant on rocks and weeds, especially Fucus, between tide-
marks (g.c.b., r.a.t., s.p.) : buoy near Breakwater (r.a.t.).

Breeding : Mar. -July (w.g.).

Hydrall.maxia 1 alcata (Linnreus) : T. RindiS, Hist. Brit. Hvdr. Zouph.,
p. 273, fig.

Not uncommon in the Sound; conmion, 15-30 fms., on stony
ground, and on sand with stones and shells : always attached to
stones or shells (r.a.t.): abundant in the Hamoaze (e.j.a.) : Millbay
Pit; Uuke Pk.; Mewstone Gds.; Cawsand B.; Eame-Eddystone Gds.
(r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., occasional specs, (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Jan. (w.a.) : Feb.-Apr. (r.a.t.).

Thuiaria articulata (Pallas): T. Rinds. Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 277, fig.

Wembury ]].; stones and shells off Mewstone (g.c.b.): Mewstone
Ledge (r.a.t.).

Plumulariidae.

Antennularia axtenxina (Linnyeus): T. Rinds, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 280, fig.

Not unconnnon in the Sound ; common outside, 15-30 fms.,
especially on medium gravel and muddy sand (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddy-
stone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.) : Cawsand B : Pame-Eddy stone Gds.; Mew-
stone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.): Stoke Pt. Gds.; Looe-Eddystonc Gds. (s.p.).

Breeding: Apr. (r.a.t.): May (w.g., R.A.T., s.p.): June-July (w.g.).

Antennularia ramosa (Lamourou.x) : T. Rinvks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 282, fig.

With A. antennina, but less abundant (e.j.a., r.a.t., s.p.).
Breeding: Apr. (r.a.t.): May (w.g., r.a.t., s.p.).

Aglaophexia Helleri, Marktanncr - Turneretscher : C. C. Nutting,
Journ. Mar. ]>iol. Assoc, ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 153.
Eddystone lik. (c.C.N., E.T.B.),

198 I'LYMOL'TIl MAi;iNE INVKIITEIJUATE FAUNA.

[ Leptomedusae — coiUd. ]
AoLAOrHENiA MYRIOPHYLLUM (Liiiiueus) : T. Himks, Hist. Brit. Hydr.
Zooph., p. 290, fig.

Moderately common, 15-30 fms., on fine sand and sand with
gravel (h.a.t., s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., e.a.t., g.c.b., s.P.): Eame-
Eddystone Gds. (r A.T., s.P.): Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).
Breeding : Apr.-June (r.a.t.) : Aug. (w.G.).

The Aplacophoran Rliopalomcnia AyJaoplienice is very commonly
met with twined round tlie base of the stem of this form (E.J.A.,
R.A.T., S.P.).

Aglaophenia pluma (Linna'us): T. Ifincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 286, fig.

Common on the fronds of Halidrys siliquosa ; Bovisand B. ; off
Mewstone (g.c.b.) : Eame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Yealni B. (t.v.h.,
A.J.S.) : Penlee-Bame Gds. ; N. of Mewstone (e.,t.a.) : Millbay Ch. ;
Queen's Gd. ; Wembury B. ; occasional specs, (e.j.a., r.a.t.).
Breeding : May (e.j.a., r.a.t.) : Aug. (w' .g.).

Aglaophenia tubulifera (Hiucks): T. HincJo;, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 288, fig.

Not uncommon, Aug.-Oct. ; AVembury B. ; off the Mewstone
(g.c.b): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., e.t.b.) : liame-Eddystone Gds.;
Mewstone Ledge (r.a.t.) : Bovisand B. (g.c.b.).

Breeding : Sept. (r.a.t.) : Oct. (av.g.).

Plumularia Alleni, Nutting : 0. C. Nnttiwj, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 7, vol. i, p. 364, fig.

Growing on Antennularia ramosa (c.c.N.).
Bearing gonophores : Apr. or May (c.c.N.).

Plumularia Catharina, Johnston : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 299, fig.

Not uncommon ; Duke Ek. ; Winter Sh. ; off Stoke Pt. (g.c.b.) :
Queen's Gd., occasionally (t.v.h., r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds., the
most abundant species on both the fine sands on other Hydroids,
and on the gravels, where Hincks' green variety is often very
abundant on Ch(etopterus tubes (e.j.a.) : Ptame-Eddystone Gds., on
Chcvtopterus and Terebellid tubes, Cdlaria, Antennularia, Ascidiclla
scahra, etc. (r.a.t.).

With gonophores : Apr.-May (r.a.t.) : Aug. (e.j.a.).

Plumularia echinulata, Lamarck : 2\ Ifincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 302, fig.

On weed, not very common (g.C.b.) : Winter Sh., on Drlesseria ;
Millbay Dock, on the piles; Yealm Est., on Laniinaria (e.t.b.).

Plumularia frutescens (Ellis &, Solandor) : 7\ irinrk.^, Hist. Brit.
Hydr. Zooph., p. 307, fig.

Eddystone Gds., single colony on shell of Fedenmaximus (e.j.a.):
Wembury B. (g.c.b.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Plumularia halecioides. Alder: T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph,,
p. 306, fig.

Parasitic on P. setacca and on Antennularia (c.c.N.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE IX VERTEBRATE FAUNA. 199

[ Leptomedusse — contd. ]

Plumularia pinnata (Liniiifius): T. Rincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 295, fig.

By far the most abundant Plumularian at Plymouth (c.C.N.) :
Millbay Ch. (e.j.a., r.a.t., s.p.) : JMillbay Dock, on piles ; Asia Sh. ;
Eum B , occasionally (r.a.t.) : common ; Duke Kk. ; Barn Pool ; off"
Mewstone (g.c.b.) : Puime-Eddystone Gds. (e.t.b. & r.a.t., «.p.) : Eddy-
stone Gds., generally distril)uted, particularly on the gravel W. of
the Eddystone, where it is usually attached to Chwtoptcrus tubes or
to other Hydroids (e.j.a.) : Yealm P. (e.j.a., r.a.t.).

Asexual ' stoloniferous ' reproduction has been observed in Apr.
(c.C.N.). Gonophores in Apr. (w.G., r.a.t.): May (e.j.a., r.at.): June
(e.j.a.).

Plumularia setacea (Ellis) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph.,
p. 29G, fig. . _,

Common in the Sound; Hincks' branched variety is very common,
generally on Hrdivhondria imnicca (g.C.B.): Millbay Ch. and Pit, not
uncommon ; Millbay Dock, on piles ; Tinside, occasionally ; Asia
Sh., occasionally ; Pame-Eddystone Gds., on Chcvtoptcrus tubes
(r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., generally on other Hydroids or on Poly-
cha?te tubes (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Feb.-June (w.G.).

Plumularia similis, Hincks: T. Hiiu-l'n, Hist. Brit. Hydr. Zooph., p. 303,

fig-
Common ; rocks below Lab. ; Jennycliff' B. (g.c.b.) : under the
Hoe; Bovisand B. ; Yealm P. (t.v.h.) : Church Peef, Wembury B.,
very occasional ; Millbay Ch., occasional specimens (r.a.t.).

{MEDUSA STAGE.)
Eucopidse.

Agastra mira (Hartlaub) [Hydroid = ^. calkulata (Hincks)]: E. T.
Brou-ne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1897, p. 832., fig.
A single spec, in the Sound, Aug. 1897 (e.t.b.).
Obelia lucifera : E. Forhes, Monogr. Brit. Naked-eyed Med., p. 52, fig.
(as 'Thaumantias).

Very plentiful, June 1892 (e.j.b.) : by far the most abundant
Leptomedusan in the Sound and outside, Sept. 1897 (e.t.b.),

Obelia nigra: E. T. Brovmc, Proc. Irish Acad., 8er. 3, vol. v, p. 721.

Common; 1898, very abundant Apr.-May ; 1899, abundant in
June (e.t.b.).

TiAROPSis MULTICIRRATA (Sars) ; E. HaecM, Syst. Medus., Denkschr.
med.-naturw. Ges. Jenn., vol. i, p. 179.
Apr. 1895 (e.j.a.).

EuciiiLOTA PILOSELLA (Forl)es) : E. T. Browne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol.
189G, p. 484, fig.

Plymouth (e.t.b., e.j.a.) ; common every sunnuer (w.G.).
Mitrocomella fulva: E. T. Broirii,; Ikrgens Mus. Aarb., vol. 1903,
No. 4, p. 17, fig.

Single spec, off the Eddystone, May 1898 (e.t.b.).

200 TLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Leptomedusae— fo?i<(l: Trachymedusae ]

Phialidiu.m buskianum (Gosse) : E. T. Broicne, l*roc. Zool. Soc, vol.
1896, p. 488, fig.

Sept. 1893; Sept. 1895; Sept. 1897, few specs, nearly always
present in townettings; June 1898, only once taken (e.t.b.).

Phialidium cymbaloideum (van Beneden) [Hydroid 1 = Camjxtnulina
rejycns]: K T. Broinu; Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 189G, p. 491, lig.

Sept. 1893; Sept. 1897; Apr.-May 1898; June-July 1899;
never very abundant, but a few specimens generally tnken (e.t.b.).

Phialidium TEMPORARiUiM : IJ. T. Broivne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1896,
p. 489.

Nearly always present from the spring until autumn (e t.b.).

EUTIMA INSIGNIS (Keferstein) ; K T. Broivne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1896,
p. 492.

Oct. 1893 (W.G., E.T.B.1): Sept. 1895, single adult; June 1898,
S. of the Mewstone, two specs. ; Aug. 1899, single spec, (e.t.b.).

Saphenia mirabilis (Wright): B. T. Broivne, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1896,
p. 493, fig.

Near the Eddystone, July 1891, some hundreds (j.t.c.^) : off
Penlee, at bottom in 9 fms., July 1892 (e.j.b.^) : 1897, single specs,
in Aug. and Sept.; Apr.-June 1898, few specs.; June-July 1899,
few (e.t.b.).

OcTORCHis Gegenbauri, Hacckel : B. Hdcdrl, Syst. Medus., Denkschr.
med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 197, fig.

Sept. 1895, single spec; 1899, four specs, in July, one in Aug.
(e.t.b.).

Irene rellucida (Will): B. Hacclxl, Syst. Medus., Denkschr. med.-
naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 201, fig.

Oct. 1892, several specs, (w.g.); Sept. 1897, single spec, from the
Sound, two specs. 3 m. S.W. of the Mewstone, all young stages
(e.t.b.).

TRACHYMEDUS^.
Geryonidae,

Liriantha arpendkulata : B. Burhcs, Monogr. Brit. Naked- eyed Med.,
p. 36, fig. (as Gcrijonia).

Exceedingly abundant Sept.-Oct., 1893 ; absent Sept. 1895 ;
scarce and only early stages in the Sound and outside grounds,
Sept. 1897 (E.T.B.): Jan. 1896 (e.j.a.).

Solmaridse.

Solmaris CORONANTIIE, Haeckel : B. HaccK-cl, Syst. Medus., Denkschr.
med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 359, fig.
Plymouth, Sept., 1895 (e.t.b.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 201

[ Siphonophora : Stauroniedusae : Discomedusae ]

SIPHONOPHORA.
Monophyidre.
MuGGl^A ATLANTICA: J. T. Cunningham, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, ser. 2,
vol. ii, p. 212, fig.

First met with 5 m. S. of the P^ddystone, afterwards in great
abuudauce close to the Breakwater, and even inside the Sound,
Sept. 1891 (j.T.c): 1892, appeared near end of Aug. (E.J.B.): Sept.
1893, fairly abundant early part of month; Sept. 1895, exceedingly
abundant (e.t.b.): 1895, middle Aug.-mid. Dec. (t.v.h.): 19U:'.,
occasionally met with in Feb. (w.G.).

Agalmidse.

Agalmopsis Sarsi, Haeckel : E. T. Broume, Proc. Irish Acad., ser. 3,
vol. V, p. 678.

Mar., 1902, single specimen from | m. S.W. of the Mewstone
and from West Channel (r.a.t.).

STAUROMEDUS^.
Lucernariidse.

LucERNARiA campanulata, Lamouroux : B. Haeclrl, Syst. ]\Iedus.,
Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 392.

Pieny Eks., several small specs, with Halidydu^ ; single specs,
from Cawsand B. and Whitsand 15. (w.i.B.).
Haliclystus auricula (Fabricius) : W. I. Beaumont, Proc. Irish Acad.,
ser. 3, vol. v, p. 806.

Yealni Est., on Zostcra, fairly common (s.P.) : Eeny Pks., on
Enteromorpha, in high tide rock-pools (a.j.s.) : Cawsand B., on
Zostcra, occasionally (s.P.).
Depastrum cyathiforme : 31. Sars, Fauna Litt. Norvegiag, pt. i, p. 26,
fig. (as Lucernaria).

Mount Edgcumbe ; Batten (e.j.a.) : Drake's I. ; Rame Hd. (w.G.).

DISCOMEDUS^.

Pelagiidse.

Chrysaora isosceles (Linnpeus) : E. Haeclrl, Syst. Medus., Denkschr.
med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 513.

Occasionally during the summer months (s.P.).

Planuke liberated in Aug. and reared to Seyphistoma stage (e.t.b.).

Cyaneidse.

Cyanea capillata (Linntcus): E. Haeckel, Syst. Medu?., Denkschr. med.-
naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 529.
Plymouth (e.t.b.).

Cyanea Lamarcki, Peron & Lesueur : E. Haeckel, Syst. Medus.,
Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 530.
Occasionally, every summer (a.j.s.).

202 PLYMOUTH MARINE IXVEnTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Discomedusae — co«W. : Alcyonaria ]
Ulmaridae.

AuRELiA AURITA, Laiuarck : E. Hacckcl, Syst. Medus., Denkschr. med.-
natuiw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 552.

i\Iost abundant in the estuaries in sprin^,' and summer; R. Tamar;
Hamoaze ; Yealm \{.\ carried out into the Channel towards the
end of the summer (e.j.a.) : Saltash (e.t.b.).

The ephyra? appear in February and may be taken iu shoals
during the first fortnight of March, they metamorphose towards
the end of the month and begin to disappear. The young meduste
reappear towards the end of May and reach their maximum
abundance during June (w.G.).

Pilemidse.
Rhizostoma OCTOPUS (Linnteus) : E. Hacclcd, Syst. Medus., Denkschr.
med.-naturw. Ges. Jena, vol. i, p. 593 (as Pilema).
Occasionally (s.p.).

ALCYONARIA.
CorDulariidse.
Sarcodictyon CATENATA, Forbes : W. A. Jlenlinan, Proc. Liverp. Biol.
Soc, vol. IX, p. 163, fig.

Eddystone Gds.; the red form is found, often in abundance, on
old shells, and is generally most })lentiful on clean shell-gravel
(e.j.a., s p.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. ; Rame-Fddystone Gds. ; etc. (s.p.).

Alcyonidae.

Alcyonium DIGITATUM, Linuicus : >y. J. Hickson, (.^)uart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., ser. 2, vol. xxxvii, p. 349, fig.

Generally present in dredgings from the Sound and outside
grounds, but the colonies are usually small (r.a.t., s.p.) : Promenade
Pier, large colonies are occasionally common, at extreme low water
(E.J.A., R.A.T., S.P.): Eddystone Gds., large colonies abundant on the
fine sand of the ' Outer ' Trawling Gds, and S. of the Eddystone,
attached to valves of Cardium cchinatinn, etc. (e.j.a.).
Breeding : Oct. ; Jan. (r.a.t.) ; Nov.-Feb. (w.G.).
Alcyonium glomeratum (Hassall) : >S'. J. Ilidson, Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., ser. 2, vol. xxxvii, p. 353, fig.
Mewstone Ledge (r.a.t.).

Alcyonium palmatum, Pallas : G. v. Koch, Mitth. Stat. Neapel, vol. ix,
p. 663, fig.

Mewstone Ledge (s.p.) : 3 m. S.E. of the Mewstone (e.j.a.).

Plexauridae.

EuNiCELLA Cavolini: G. V. Kocli, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xv, p. 58, fig.

More or less connnon everywhere on rocky ground, 10-25 fms.

(s.p.) : Mewstone Ledge, very common (e.j.a., r.a.t., s.p.) : Queen's

Gd., rare (r.a.t., s.p.) : Rame-Eddystone Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.p.).

Virgulariidae.
Yirgularia miuaiulis, O. F. Miiller: A. M. Marshall cO W. l\ Marshall,
Rept. Penuatulida Oban, p. 51, fig.

Single spec, Nr. Eddystone (w.p.m.): 6 m. W.S.W. of Penlee Pt.
(R.A.T.1) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.p.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEBEATE FAUNA. 203

[ Zoantharia ]

ZOANTHARIA.

Ceriantliidse.

Cerianthus Lloydi, Gosse: F. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Aneiii.,p. 268, fig.
The adult form has only once been taken, in muddy sand on the
N. side of Drake's I., but the free-swimming larva {Arachnactis
alhida) is common during April (r.a.t.).

Zoanthidae.

Epizoanthus Couchi (Johnston): A. C. Haddon & ShacTcleton, Trans.
Dublin Soc, ser. 2. vol. iv, p. 644, fig.

Duke Ek., common (w.g.) : Millbay Ch., not uncommon (w.G.,
R.A.T.).

Epizoanthus incrustatus, Diiben & Koren : A. C. Haddon & Shackle-
ton, Trans. Dublin Soc, ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 636, fig.

Mewstone Gds., common on shells inhabited by Anapagurus
la^ris (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., a characteristic species of, and con-
fined to, the ' Outer ' Trawling Gds. (e.j.a.).

Edwardsiidae.

Edwardsia Beautempsi, Quatrefages: A. C. Haddon, Trans. Dublin
Soc, ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 327, fig.

Yealm Sand-bank, single spec (r.a.t.).

Edwardsia carnea, Gosse: P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 259, fig.
Millbay Ch. (s.p.) : Church Eeef, Wembury B. (r.a.t.).

Ilyanthidse.

Halcampa chrysantiiellum (Peach) : A. C. Haddon, Proc. Dublin Soc,
ser. 2, vol. v, p. 1, fig.

Yealm Sand-bank, common (a.j.s., r.a.t.).

The larvffi parasitic on Medusaj {Irene, Phialidium, etc), are
common in May (w.G., e.j.a., r.a.t.).

Eloactis Mazeli (Jourdan) : W. Garstang, Trans. Devon. Assoc, vol.
xxiv, p. 380.

Single spec, few miles off the Mewstone, 20 fms. (w.G.).

Actiniidse.

Actinia equina, Linna'us: F. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 175,
fig. (as A. mcsemhrijanthemum).

Common on rocks between tide-marks (r.a.t., s.p.).
Breeding: Jan.-Aug. (r.a.t.).

Anemonia sulcata (Pennant): F. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 160,
fig. (as AntJtea cereus).

More or less common everywhere on rocks between tide-marks
and on the Zostera l)eds. The slate -coloured variety is more
abundant than the typical form with violet-tipped, green tentacles,
and on the Zostera it is alone present. i\ fiesh-coloured variety is
occasionally met with. Yealm Sand-bank, brownish var. only (s.p.).

NEW SKItlES. — VUL. VII. No. 2. O

204 rLYMOUTII MAIUNE IXVEKTEBUATE FAUNA.

[ Zoantharia — contd. ]
Metridium senilis (LiniicT'iis): J\ IT. Gosse, Hi.st. r>rit. Sea-Aneni., p. 12,
fig. (as Adinoloha dianlliUfi).

Promenade Pier, very common on the piles at extreme low water
(r.a.t., S.P.): Millbay Ch., occasional specimens (r.a.t.): Yealm Sand-
bank, occasionally (r.a.t.): Yealm Estuary, young specs, common on
the rocks between tide-marks (s.p.).
Breeding, in tanks, Aug.-Sept. (s.p.).

Sagartia miniata (Gosse) : F. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 41, fig.
Asia Sh. (a.j.s., r.a.t.) : Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.).

Sagartia nivea (Gosse) : P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 67, fig.
Eocks below the Laboratory (g.g.b.^).

Cereus pedunculatus (Pennant) : P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem.,
p. 27, fig. (as Sagartia hellis).

Common on the shore where the ground is suitable, this form
seeming to prefer muddy sand with stone. Not uncommon in
dredgings from Millbay Ch., Mallard Sh., etc. (R.A.T.), Especially
common in the estuaries of the Yealm, Tamar, and Plym (e.j.a.).
Breeding : Jan.-Feb. ; Dec. (w.g.).

Chondractinia digitata (0. F. Miiller) : A. C. Haddon, Trans. Dublin
Soc, ser, 2, vol. iv, p. 306, fig.

Eddystone Gds., few specimens on the ' outer ' trawling grounds,
and on the fine sand S. of the Eddystone, inside valves of Cardium
echinatum (e.j.a.).

Chitonactis coronata (Gosse): P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem.,
p. 202, fig. (as Biinodcs).

Occasionally in the deeper water outside the Breakwater, and in
Millbay Ch. (w.G.) : Rame-Eddystone Gds., single spec, on Hydroid
stem (r.a.t.).

Breeding : Jan.-Apr. (w.G.).

Paraphellia expansa (Haddon): A. C. Haddon, Trans. Dublin Soc,
ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 321, fig.

Eddystone Gds., few specimens, apparently living buried in the
sand (e.j.a.) : liame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.).

Cylista undata (0. F. Miiller): P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem.,
p. 88, fig. (as Sagartia troglodytes).
Common at Plymouth (w.G.).

Cylista viduata (0. F. Miiller): P. H. Gosse, Hist, lirit. Sea-Anem.,
p. 105, fig. (as Sagartia).

Rare within the Sound, but common in the neighbourhood
(w.G.) : Promenade Pier, not unconnnon on the piles at extreme
low tide (r.a.t., a.j.s.) : Millbay Ch., not uncommon (r.a.t.).

Adamsia palliata (Bohadsch) : 1\ II. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem.,
p. 125, fig.

Generally distributed and common, 10-30 fms., associated with
Uvjxigurus Prideaiixi. Eddystone Gds., Rame-Eddystone Gds.,
Mewstone Gds., Cawsand B., Yealm R., etc. (s.p.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEETEBRATE FAUNA. 205

[ Zoantharia— co?ifc?. ]

Adamsia polypus (ForskAl): P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 112,
fig. (as Sagartia parasitica).

More or less common everywhere 15-30 fms., associated with
Eupagurns Bernhardus (s.P.).

AiPTASiA COUCHI (Cocks) : P. If. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 152, fig.
Rocks below the Lab., occasionally (g.c.b., r.a.t.) : Eeny Eks., not
uncommon (r.a.t.).

Thoe sphyrodeta (Gosse) : P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 73, fig.
(as Sagartia).

Drake's T., at low tide (w.n.) : Mallard Sh. (j.c.S.) : Millbay Ch.,
occasionally (r.a.t., e.j.a.).

Bunodes Balli (Cocks): P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 198, fig.
The Breakwater ; the typical form is rare, being replaced by
Gosse's varieties " dealhata " and " livida " (w.G.).

Bunodes gemmacea, Ellis : P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 190, fig.

Caves under the Lab. (G.C.B.) : Drake's L, common on rocks (e.j.a.,
R.A.T., S.P.): Mt. Edgcumbe (e.j.a.): Bum B., not uncommon between
tide-marks (R.A.T., e.j.a.) : Jennycliff B., between tide-marks, rare
(r.a.t.) : Bovisand Cove (r.a.t.) : Whitsand B., common between
tide-marks (r.a.t.).

Breeding : Mar. (r.a.t.) : Apr. ; Sept. (w.G.).

Corallimorpliidse.

CORYNACTis VIRIDIS, Allman: P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 289, fig.
More or less common in crevices and under stones on all rocky
stations, L.W.-lo fms. (s.P.) : The Breakwater (e.j.a., r.a.t., s.P.) :
Millbay Ch. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Amphianthidse.

Gephyra Dohrni, v. Koch: A. C. Haddon, Trans. Dublin Soc, ser. 2,
vol. iv, p. 325, fig.

Mewstone Ledge, on Eunicella, not uncommon (t.v.h., a.j.s.,
R.A.T., S.P.).

Urticinidse.

Urticina felina (Linnaius) : P. 11. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem., p. 209,
fig. (as Tealia crassicornis).

Not uncommon on rocks between tide-marks and occasionally in
10-20 fms. in the Sound. The specimens are not usually of great
size, but large ones are occasionally trawled in 20-40 fms. (r.a.t.).

Breeding : May (w.G.).

Turbinolidse.

Caryophyllia Smithi, Stokes: P. H. Gosse, Hist. Brit. Sea-Anem.,
p. 310, fig.

More or less abundant on all rocky stations, L.W.-30 fms., under
boulders and in rock-crevices (s.P.) : The Breakwater ; Mewstone
Ledge, etc. (e.j.a., s.p.).

The Cirripede Pyrgoma anglicum is commonly found attached to
the margin of the cup of this species; and frequently several occur
upon a single coral (s.P.).

206 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA,

[ Ctenophora : Echinoderma ]

CTENOPHORA.

BOLINA INFUNDIBULUM (Fabricius): E. Vanlwffen, Nordisclies I'laukt.,
pt. xi, p. 5, fig.

Abundant in May of particular years (W.G.): Sept., 1900 (a.j.s.).

Beroe cucumis, Fabricius: E. Vanhoffen, Nordisches Plankt., pt. xi,
p. 7, fig.

Plymouth, few small specs, (e.t.b.).

Pleurobrachia pileus (Fabricius) : E. Vanhoffen, Nordisches Plankt.,
pt. xi, p. 3, fig.

Always abundant towards the end of May (W.G.). Adults not
seen after June; minute specs, appeared in Sept. (e.j.b.): Aug.

(T.V.H.).

ECHINODERMA.

Synaptidae.

Synapta digitata (Montagu): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 34, fig.

Rame-Eddystone Gds., occasional specs, (r.a.t.).
Synapta inh/EP.ens (0. F. Miiller): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 33, fig.

Drake's I., occasional specs.; Yealm P., not uncommon between
tide-marks in coarse, loose sand (r.a.t.).

Cucumariidse.

CUCUMARIA BRUNNEA (Thompson) : E. Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf., p. 229,
fig. (as Ocnus).

Frequently in some numbers on Hydroids, Alga?, etc., from rocky
ground and from the trawling grounds; below tide-marks to 25 fms.
(s.P.) : often abundant on rocky ground off' the Mewstone (E.J. A.) :
Yealm 11., not uncommon (r.a.t.).

CucUMARiA Hyndmani (Thompson) : This species may be readily recog-
nised by the silvery appearance of its test.

Occasional specs, not inicommon on coarse ground ; Stoke Pt.
Gds. ; Pame-Eddystone Gds. ; Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).
Cucumaria Normani*: S. Face, see p. 309.

Not uncommon on rocky ground in crevices and under stones,
L.W.-10 fms. (S.P.).

Cucumaria SAXicoLA-f , Brady & Robertson : *S'. Pace, see p. 30G.

Not uncommon on rocky ground, in crevices and under stones,
L.W.-IO fms. (s.P.).
Thyone fusus (0. F. Miiller): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 42, fig.

Occasional specs, from Millbay Ch., Cattewater, Cawsand B. ;
not uncommon on the Mewstone Gds., and occasionally met with
in 15-35 fms. on other grounds (r.a.t.).

* Previously recorded as 0. I'lanci.
t Previously recorded as C. pentodes.

PLYMOUTH MAKINE IN VEliTEBliATE FAUNA. 207

[ Echinodernia— co/fCf/. ]

Holothuriidae.
HoLOTHUiiiA NIGRA, Crny : /'. J. BcU, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit. Mus.,
1>. 49, fig.

Coiiiinon on the Mowstoiie Gds. on clean gravel (e.j.a., r.a.t., s.p.):
occasional specs, have been taken in AVhitsand B., off Penlee,
Melampus Sh. (r.a.t.) : Stoke Ft. Gds., not unconunon (s.p.) :
Eddystone Gds., on the clean shell gravel immediately adjacent to
the rocks (e.j.a.) : Queen's Gd. (s.p.).

Gonads ripe : Apr. (s.p.) : July, I)ec. (R.A.T.).

Antedonidse.
Antedon bifida (Pennant) [ = A. rosacea, auctt.] : F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit.
Echinod. Brit. Mus.. p. 54, fig.

Extremely abundant at certain small areas, but practically
restricted to these (s.p.): Millbay Pit (K.A.T., S.P.): Asia Sh.,
occasionally (r.a.t., s.p.) : Mallard Sh. (g.c.b., j.t.c, s.p.) : inside the
Bridge (s.p.): the Cattewater, several specs, on bottom of coal hulk
of}" Turnchapel (a.J.S., S.p.) : Mevvstone Ledge (s.P., R.A.T.).

The marsupia containing ova: Oct. (t.v.h.). Pentacrinoid larvae
in Feb. (a.j.s.) : July (r.a.t., s.p.) : Aug., abundant at all stages,
chiefly on Cellaria (E.W.L.H.) : Sept.-Oct. (w.G.).

The parasitic Polycluete Myzostoma cirriferum is common on
the arms of this species (e.j.a.).

Astropectinidae.
Astropecten irregularis (Pennant) : E. Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf.,
p. 130, fig. (as Aster ias aurantiaeus).

Common on fine, clean sand and moderately so on clean gravel
and shell, 15-35 fms. (r.a.t., s.p.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.):
Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Stoke Ft. Gds. ; Kame-Eddystone
Gds. ; Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).
Luidia Sarsi, Diiben & Koren : F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 72.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., j.t.c., r.a.t.).

Gymnasteriidse.
PORANIA PULVILLUS (0. F. MuUer) : F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 79, fig.

Occasionally at about 3 m. S. of the Breakwater (e.j.a., s.p.) :
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., r.a.t.).
Breeding : Feb.-Apr. (r.a.t.).

Asterinidae.
Asterina gibbosa (Pennant): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 82, fig.

Common under stones at all rocky shore stations (s.P.) : single
spec. I m. S. of the P)reakwater in 7 fms, (r.a.t.).
Breeding : May-June (w.G.).
Palmipes placenta (Pennant): E. Forhes, Hist. Brit. Starf., p. lUJ, hg.
(as F. meiiihranaeeii.s).

Eddystone Gds , moderately common (e.j.a., s.p.): Fame-Eddystone
Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.): Stoke Ft. Gds., not unconunon; about 3 m. S. of
Breakwater, fairly connuon (s.p.).

208 PLYMOUTH MAltIXE INVEKTEBRATE FAUNA.

[Echinoderma — eo7itd. ]

Solasteridse.

SoLASTER PAPPOSUS (Fabricius): L\ Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf., p. 112, fig.

Fairly common on coarse sand and gravel, 15-35 fms. (s.P.) : the

most plentiful starfish in 1892 (w.g.): Mewstone Gds., Rame-

Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., S.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A., s.P.): Stoke

Pt. Gds. (s.P.) : Cattewater, probably from trawl refuse (r.a.t., S.P.).

Gonads ripe in Mar. (t.y.ii.).

Echinasteridae.

Heneicia sanguinolenta (0. F. Mliller) : K Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf.,
p. 100, fig. (as Cribclla oculata).

Eeny Eks., occasional specs, at extreme low water (r.a.t.) : not
uncommon on the Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds.,
occasionally on clean medium gravel (e.j.a., s.p.) : Stoke Pt.
Gds. (s.p.).

Asteriidae.

Asterias glacialis, Linnffius : H. Ludwig, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol.
xxiv, p. 364, fig.

More or less common at all stations below low- water mark, but
somewhat uncertain in its occurrence (s.p.) : large specs, generally
from deeper water, 30 fms. and over (e.j.a.) : the Breakwater, not
uncommon ; Yealm E., not uncommon in dredgings, large specs,
occasionally on the Sand-bank (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., most
abundant where Pcdcii opcrcularU is plentiful (e.j.a.).

Asterias rubens, Linnaeus : E. Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf., p. 83, fig. (as
Urastcr).

Occurs below tide-marks at most stations, but in very varying
abundance in difterent years; it is generally plentiful, but occasionally
it would seem to be almost absent:* a smaller, violet-coloured var.
is met with on coarse ground in 15-30 fms. (e.j.a., s.p.).

Ophiolepidae.

Ophiura albida, Forbes: F. J. BcII, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit. Mus.,
p. 108.

Lives generally on coarser soil and is less abundant than 0. cilia ris
(e.j.a.): Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t.): Stoke Pt. Gds., fairly common;
Eame-Eddystone Gds. (s.p.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.).

Ophiura ciliaris (Linmeus): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit. Mus.,
p. 106.

Common, 15-35 fms., on gravel and sand (s.p.) : most frequent
on fine hard sand (e.j.a.) : Mewstone Gds. (R.A.T., s.p.) : Stoke Pt.
Gds. (s.P.): Eame-Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., R.A.T., S.P.): Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a., s.p.) : Looe-Eddystone Gds. (S.P.).

Breeding: May (r.a.t.): Aug. (s.P.).

* Not a single spec, of A. rubens was obtainable from towards the end of Oct. 1903 until
well on in the spring of 1904, although repeated search was made for it both in the Sound
and in Cawsaud H. (s. i'.).

PLYMOUTH MAKINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 209

[ Echinoderma — contd. ]

Ampliiuridse.

Ophiocnida BRACHiATA (Montagu) : F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod.
Brit. Mus., p. 116, fig.

Common in muddy sand on a Zostera bed S. of Batten Castle
(E.J.A., K.A.T., S.P.): Jennycliff B., single spec, (r.a.t.).

Amphiura Chiajii, Forbes : F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Ecbinod. Brit. Mas.,
p. 117 : two mouth papilhe on each side, two tentacle scales, 5-8
arm spines.

Millbay Ch., single spec. (r.a.t.) : 2 m. S. of the Breakwater,
single spec, (e.j.a.).

Amphiura elegaxs (Leach): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit. Mus.,
p. 119: three moutli papilla on each side, two tentacle scales.

Common at most stations in the Sound, L.W.-20 fms. (S.P.) :
liame-Eddystone Gds., 27 fms., single spec, (r.a.t.) : Yealm K. (s.P.).
Breeding: May-Sept. (w.G.).

Amphiura filiformis (0. F. Miiller): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod.
Brit. Mus., p. 119: two mouth papilla on each side, no tentacle
scales, arms very long.

Single spec, 2 m. AV.S.W. of the Eddystone (e.j.a.).

Ophiactis Balli (Thompson): F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit.
Mus., p. 124.

Common, but rather local, 15-35 fms., in crevices of rock and
stones and on Chcdopterns tubes (s.P.) : Millbay Ch. and Pit, not
uncommon (r.a.t., s.P.) : Asia Sh. (t.V.IL, s.P.) : Mewstone Gds.;
liame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : abundant around the Eddy-
stone (e.j.a.) : Stoke Pt. Gds., not uncommon (s.P.).

Gonads ripe : Sept. (s.P.).

Ophiocomidae.

Ophiocoma nigra (0. F. Miiller) : E. Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf., p. 50, tig.
(as 0. fjranulata).

This form is almost invariably found associated with OpJiiothrix
fi'iKjilis, but is generally far less abundant tban the latter species,
although occasionally it is the predominant form ; at most stations
the specimens are brilliantly coloured, but sometimes, as on the
Mallard Sh., it is possible to get a pure gathering of the typical
black form (s.P.) : Mallard Sh., in abundance together with Antcdon
(w.G., s.P.) : Millbay Pit, common ; Mewstone ' Echinoderm ' Gd.
(r.a.t., s.P.) : Eddystone Gds., occasional specs, on stony and rocky
ground, 15-30 fms. (e.j.a., s.p.): Rame-Eddystone Gds.; Stoke Pt.
Gds. ; not uncommon but very local (s.P.).

Gonads ripe : Apr. ; July. Spent individuals, Sept. (s.P.).

Ophiopsila aranea, Forbes: A. E. G-ruhe, Die Insel Lussin (Brgslau,
1864), p. 104.

Mewstone Ledge, not uncunnnon in rock crevices (e.j.a., r.a.t.,
S.P.) : Stoke Pt. Gds., fairly common in crevices of the local red
rock, especially in old Pholadiilea crypts, 15-25 fms. (s.P.).
Gonads ripe in Aug. (r.a.t.).

210 I'LYMOUTII MAltlNE IXVEKTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Echinoderma— co«(^. ]
Ophiotliricidae.

OnilOTilKiX FKACiLis (0. F. Mullei): E. Forhr.-i, Hist, liiil. Starf., p. 60,
tig. (u.s Ophiocoina rosula).

Generally distributed and enormously abundant at certain
stations, L.W.-35 fms. ; a small, solitary, greyish-coloured form
occurs under stones on the shore ; in deeper water it grows to
a much larger size and is usually very brilliantly coloured ; this
latter form favours a coarse gravel ground and lives in such pro-
fusion where it occurs that the dredge will frequently come up
completely filled with a practically pure gathering of this species
alone (s.P.).

Gonads ripe : Mar.-June (k.a.t.) : Aug.-Sept. (s.P.). Spawning :

Oct. (R.A.T.).

Echinidae.

Echinus acutus, Lamarck : F. J. BcU, Catal. Brit. Echinod. Brit. Mus.,
p. 146.

Not uncommon in 15-35 fms., chicily on the finer grounds (E.A.T.,
S.P.) : more common in deeper water, where it replaces E. csculentus
(e.j.a.) : Mewstone Gds. (it.A.T.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.) : Eame-
Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.) : Looe-
Eddystone Gds. (s.p.).

The Voljchxte Siplionostoiiia <fffi)iisis often found associated with
this form, crawling among its spines (r.a.t.).

Breeding in July (w.G.).

Echinus esculentus, Linnaeus: A. Ayassiz, Illustr. Catal. Mus. Harvard,
No. vii, p. 491, fig.

(Queen's Gd., occasionally; moderately common in 15-35 fms.,
especially on the Mewstone 'Echinoderm' Gd. ; liame-Eddystone
Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.): Eddystone Gds. (e..j.a., s.p.): Mewstone Ledge;
Stoke Pt. Gds., common (s.P.) : Cattewater, probably from trawl
refuse (r a.t., s.p.).

The Polycluete Scalesetosus assimilis is often found among the
oral spines of this species (k.a.t.).

Gonads ripe : Mar. (r.a.t.) : May (s.p.).

Echinus MILIARIS, Linnteus : E. Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf., p. 161, fig.

Common under stones at all shore stations, and frequently met
with in dredgings, L.W.-35 fms. (s.p.): specs, from the deeper water
stations are usually small ; largest ones from Church Peef, Wembury
B. (r.a.t.) : Yealm P., very common near the oyster beds (e.j.a.).

Breeding : May (w.G.).

Clypeastridse.

Echinocyamus pusillus (0. F. Midler): F. J. BcU, Catal. Brit. Echinod.
Brit. Mus., p. 160, fig.

Not uncommon on gravel bottom, 10-35 fms. (s.P.): Queen's Gd.,
occasionally (U.A.T., S.P.) : Mewstone Ledge shell gravel, very
occasionally; Mewstone ' Amphioxus' Gd., moderately conmion
(r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

PLYMOUTH .MARINE INVEllTEBKATE FAUNA. 211

[ Echinodev ma,— contd. : Turbellaria ]

Spatangidae.
Spatangus purpureus, 0. F. Miiller: F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echiiiod.
Brit. Mus., p. 165.

Moderately common in coarse sand and gravel, 15-35 fms. (s.p.):
Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A., s.p.): Stoke Pt. Gds.; liame-Eddystone Gds.
(r.a.t., s.p.) : Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.) : Mewstone Ledge (r.a.t.) :
Queen's Gd. (s.P.i).

The Mollusc Mo)dnciita suhdriata is very commonly attached to
the oral spines of this species (r.a.t., s.p.).

ECHINOCARDIUM CORDATUM (Pennant): B. Forbes, Hist. Brit. Starf.,
p. 190, tig. (as Amp] lid ot us): anterior ambulacrum in a deep groove.

Not uncommon buried in sand between tide-marks in the Yealm
Estuary; and in Kuni B., on the Zostcra beds; occasionally dredged
in Cawsand B., and outside in 15-35 fms. on fine sand (r.a.t.) :
Rame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.):
Looe-Eddystone Gds. ; common 6 m. S. of Breakwater (s.P.).

The Mollusc Tdliniya ferruginosa is found associated with this
species (r.a.t.).

Echinocardium penxatifidum,* Norman: F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit. Echinod.
Brit. Mus., p. 170, fig. : anterior ambulacrum not in a groove,
postero-lateral ambulacrum with generally 14 and 12 pores.

Not uncommon 15-30 fms.; Eame-Eddystone Gds.; Stoke Pt.
Gds. ; Looe-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).

EcHlNOCARDiUxM FLAVESCENS (0. F. Muller) : F. J. Bell, Catal. Brit.
Echinod. Bdt. Mus., p. 171, fig.: anterior ambulacrum not in a
groove, postero-lateral ambulacrum with generally 7 and 6 pores,
spines thick-set and silky.

Looe-Eddystone Gds., rare, associated with F. i^ennatijidum, but
its habitat is probably on finer ground than that of the latter
species (s.P.).

TURBELLARIA.

(Nomenclature that of F. W. Gamble, British Marine Turbellaria.
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxxiv, 1893.)

Proporidse.

Proporus venenosus (0. Schmidt).

Not uncommon at low water Wembury B. and Drake's L (f.w.g.).
MoNOPORUS RUBROPUNCTATUS (0. Schmidt).

Not uncommon at low water, Wembury B. and Drake's L (f.w.g.).

Aphanostomidse.
Aphanostoma diversicolor. Oersted.

Various localities between tide-marks (f.w.g.).
Aphanostoma elegans, Jensen.

One specimen amongst Ulvct at Redding Pt. (f.w.g.).

CONVOLUTA saliens, V. Grail.

Among Zoslera from Cawsand B., rare (f.w.g.).

* The specimen recorded, Journ. Mar. liiol. Assoc, ser. 2, vol. v, p. 530, as E. peimatiftdiwi,
was really E. Jlavescens (e..i.a.).

212 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBKATE FAUNA.

[ Turbellaria — conld. ]
CONVOLUTA TARADOXA, Ocrstcd.

Littoral zone, widely distributed, nowhere abundant (f.w.g.).

CoNVOLUTA FLAVIBACILLUM, Jensen.

Among sand in creeks at Picklecombe Fort, Wenibury V>. and
Bovisand B. (f.w.g.).

Microstomidse.

Microstoma grcenlandicum, Lev.

Among l/lva, Kedding Pt. (f.w.g.).

Mesostomidae.

Promesostoma marmoratum (Schulze).

Not uncommon in tide-pools in Wembury B., Drake's L, and
Kedding Pt. (f.w.g.).
Promesostoma ovoideum (0. Schmidt).

Occasionally dredged near Duke lik. (f.w.g.).

Promesostoma solea (O. Schmidt).

Abundant in dredging from all localities (F.W^.G.).

Promesostoma agile (Levinsen).

Among Zostera in Cawsand B. (f.w.g.).

Byrsophlebs Gkaffi, Jensen.

Drake's I., low spring-tide ; amongst algic (f.w\g.).

Brysophlebs intermedia, v. Graff.

Drake's L, low spring-tide ; amongst algse (f.w.g.).

Proxenetes cochlear, v. Graff.

Plymouth Sound (e.g.G.).
Proxenetes flabellifer, Jensen.

Tide-pools on north side of Cawsand B. (f.w.g.).

Mesostoma neapolitanum, v. Graff (?).

One specimen among Fuci on inner side of Breakwater (f.w.g.).

Proboscidse.

PSEUDORHYNCHUS BIFIDUS (McTntOsh).
Plymouth Sound (e.G.G.).

AcRORHYNCHUS CALEDONicus (Claparede).

Tide-pools near Picklecombe and Bedding Pt. ; less commonly
in Wenibury B. (f.w.g.).
Macrorhynchus Naegeli (Kulliker).

Plentiful in August on inner side of Breakwater (f.w.g.).

Macrorhynchus croceus (Fabricius).

Dredged once on New Gds. (f.w.g.).
Macrorhynchus helgolandicus (Metschnikoff).

Once on New Gds. (f.w.g.).
Gyrator hermaphroditus, Ehrbg.

Tide pools on rocks in front of Laboratory : water sometimes
brackish. In early winter, not in spring (e.g.g.).

Hyporhynchus armatus (Jensen).

Among Zostera in Cawsand B.; tide-pools Kedding Pt. (f.w.g.).
Tanks in Laboratory (e.g.g.).

TLYMOUTII iMAlilNE INVERTEBltATE FAUNA. 213

[ Turbellaria— co?iW. ]

Hyporhynchus penicillatus (Schmidt).

One specimen among Zostera in Cawsand B. (f.w.g.).

Vorticidae,
Provortex balticus (Schultze).

Between tide-marks, chiefly at Wembury B. (f.w.g.).

Provortex affinis (Jensen).

Drake's I. among algae (f.w.g.).

Provortex rubrobacillus, Gamble.
Dredged off New Gds. (f.w.g.).

Fecampia erythrocephala: a. Giard, C. E. Acad. Paris, vol. ciii, p. 499.
Encysted stage common on all stony shores at low water (w.i.b.^s.p.).

Plagiostomidae.

Plagiostoma dioicum (Metschnikoff).

Duke Pik. and Wembury B. (f.w.g.).

Plagiostoma elongatum, Gamble.

Wembury B., among sand; Breakwater (f.w.g.).

Plagiostoma pseudomagulatum, Gamble.

Among weed-tubes of Polydora cccca in Hamoaze (f.w.g.).

Plagiostoma sagitta, Uljanin.

Tide-pool Piedding Pt. (f.w.g.).

Plagiostoma caudatum, Levinsen.

One specimen among Zostera in Cawsand B. (f.w.g.).

Plagiostoma vittatum (Frey u, Leuckart)

Abundant littoral species in all localities. Egg capsules from
Breakwater in September (f.w.g.).

The tanks in the Laboratory swarm with them (e.g.g.).

Plagiostoma Koreni, Jensen.

Breakwater and Piedding Pt. Tank in Laboratory (f.w.g.).

? Plagiostoma siphonophorum (Schmidt).

A specimen from Millbay Ch. (f.w.g.).

Plagiostoma Girardi (Schmidt).

Low spring-tides, Wembury B.; tide-pools north side of Cawsand B.
Not uncommon Duke Ptk. and Millbay Ch. (f.w.g.).

Vorticeros auriculatum (0. F. Miiller).

An abundant littoral species in all localities (f.w.g.).

Vorticeros luteum, v. Graff.

One specimen New Gds.; one on inner side of Breakwater (f.w.g.).

Enterostoma austriacum, v. Graff.

Common in Sound below 5 fms. (f.w.g.).

Enterostoma fingalianum, Claparede.

Among FloridcK, Wembury V>. (f.w.g.).

Cylindrostoma quadrioculatum, (K. Leuckart).

Abundant among Floridce, Wembury B. (f.w.g.).

Tanks in Laboratory (e.g.G.).
Cylindrostoma inerme (Hallez).

Duke Kk., Millbay Ch., Hamoaze (f.w.g.).

214 PLY.MUITII MAItlNH IN VKK I'KliltATK I'ALNA.

[ Turbellaria — contil. ]

CYLINDKUSTUMA KLuNGATUM, Lcviliyun.

Tide- pools, Wenibury B. (f.w.g.).
MONOOPHORUM STRIATUM (v. Graff).

Duke Ilk., a single specimen (f.w.g.).

Monotidae.

MONOTUS LINEATUS (0. F. Miiller).

Not uncommon amongst Ulva, Keddiiiu' ?t. (r.w.c).

MoNOTUS Fuscus (Oevsted).

Abundant among Balani, Ulva, and generally throughout the
littoral zone (f.w.g.).

MoNOTUS ALDUS, Levinsen.

Tide-pools below Picklecombe Fort (f.w.*;.).

AUTOMOLOS UNIPUNCTATUS (Oersted).

Rarely among alga-, Duke lik. (f.w.g.).

AUTOMOLOS HORKiDUs, Gamble.

One specimen from Hamoaze (f.w.g.).

(?) AUTOMOLOS OPHIOCEPHALUS (Schmiilt).

Millbay Cli. (f.w.g.).

^, . Planariidae.

FoviA AFFiNis, fetnnpson.

In a sandy creek, Wembury 13. (f.w.g.): Cawsand B. ; Whitsand
B. ; on drift weed (w.i.B.).

Leptoplanidse.
Cryptocelis alba, Lang.

Millbay Cli. ; Mewstone Amphiojcus Gd., Nov., 1899 (w.lb.).
Confirmed F. W. Gamble.
Leptoplana tkemellakis (0. F. Miiller).

Generally, under stones and shells, from littoral zone to 15 fms.
(f.w.g., W.LB.) : plentiful in July and August, scarcer in September.
Ditticult to find in February (f.w.g.): Millbay Pit; about 2 m. S.
of Mewstone ; Yealm R. (w.LB.).

Leptoplaxa dk.ebaciiknsis, Oersted,
riymouth Sound (F.W.G.).

Leptoplana fallax (Quatrefages).
Millbay Ch. (f.w.g.).

Planoceridae.

Stylochoplana maculata, Quatrefages.

Cawsand B., common on trawled weed, July, 1898 (w.lb.).

Euryleptidae.

Prostiiecer^us vittatus (Montagu).

Off Stoke Pt. (j.T.c): Sound (w.G.) [f.W.c.]: Queen's Gd.,
occasionally ; Yealm R., not uncommon, sometimes very large (w.LB.).

CyCLOPORUS PAPILLOSUS, Lang.

On Ascidians aiul sponges dredged in Cattewater and outside
Sound (F.W.G.): on Botryllus under stones below the Laboratory
(e.J.a.): Barn Pool, var. laivigatus ; Mt. Edgcumbe; on Fitcn^ with
Botrylloids ; Queen's Gd.; Duke Rk. (w.lb.): common on Botryllus
(S.P.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 215

[ Turbellaria— con<(i?. : Nemertini ]

EuRYLEPTA CORNUTA (0. F. Miiller).

Occasionally dredged on Duke Ek. and in Yealm R. (f.w.g.):
Drake's I., N. shore ; Yealm 1?. ; off the Mewstone. on gravel and
rough ground ; llanie-Eddystone Gds. (w.l.B.) : Asia Sh. ; Queen's
Gd. ; etc. (s.p.).
Oligocladus sanguinolentus (Quatrefages).

Duke Rk. ; Millbay Ch. ; Cawsand B. ; Stoke Ft. (f.w.g.):
Queen's Gd. ; Mallard Sh. ; Mewstone ' CeUaria ' and ' Echinoderm '
Gds.; Yealm E., common (w.i.B.).

Stylostomum variabile, Lang.

Estuary of Yealm, Duke Ek. Young stages between tide-marks
at Eedding Ft. and round Mallard Buoy in September (f.w.g.) :
not uncommon on stony bottom in the Sound and Yealm E. ; Cawsand
B., on drift weed; Millliay Docks, on Files with Ascidiella (w.i.b.).

Prosthiostomidse.

Frosthiostomum siphunculus (Delle Chiaje): A. Lawj, Die Folycladen
d. Golf. Neapel, p. 595, fig.
Drake's I, (f.w.g.).

NEMERTINI.

Nomenclature : — Biirger. Nemertinen des Golfes von Neapel. 1895.

(Unless otherwise stated.)

Carinellidse.
Carinella linearis, Mcintosh.

Two specimens Duke Ek. (1892) (t.h.r.).

Carinella polymorpha (Eenier).

One specimen, Stoke Ft., 25 fms. 22.3.92 (t.h.r.): Mewstone
AmpliifKriis ground, 10.9.95; about half-way between Eame and
Eddystone, 20.12.28; 4 m. W. of Eddystone, 9.4.00, one specimen
on each occasion (w.lb.).

Carinella superba (KoUiker) { = C. anmdata, Montagu of Eiches and
of Burger's earlier works).

Six miles S.E. of Mewstone, one specimen (t.h.r.): sand- bank in
Yealm (r.c.p., w.i.b.) : Drake's I., Mewstone Gds., Eame to Eddy-
stone and Eddystone Gds. (w.i.b.).

Carinella annulata, Montagu (=6'. Mclntosliii of Burger's earlier
papers and of Eiches ; = (J. aragoi, Joubin).

Not uncommonly dredged 5-20 fms. (t.h.r.): Milll)ay Ch. (w.i.b.,
R.A.T.) : Queen's Gd., Asia Sh. (w.i.b., r.a.t., a.j.s.) : Duke Ek.,
Yealm E., Mewstone Gds., 6 m. S.W. of Eame: PMdystone Gds.
(w.lb.).

Cephalothricidse.

Cephalothrix bioculata, Oersted.

Common l)etvveen tide-marks, in clean, coarse sand and among
corallines (t.h.r.) : Drake's L, Eum !>., Mt. Edgcumbe (e.j.a., w.lb.):
Millbay Ch. (w.i.b.).

Breeding: Apr. to Aug. ; pelagic larvie as late as Dec. (t.ili:.).

216 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA,

[ "Semertini—cmitd. ]

Cephalotiirix linearis (Kathke), Oersted.

liuin L. in sand between tide-marks; dredged outside Breakwater

(T.H.R.).

Breeding in March (w.g.).

Eunemertidse.
EuNEMERTES Neesi (Oersted).

Abundant on Breakw^ater, rare elsewhere (t.ii.r.) : the Bridge,
Drake's I., common (r.a.t., w.i.b.) : "Wembury B. (e.j.a., t.y.h.).
Breeding : Feb. (r.a.t.) : March to Oct. (t.ii.r.).

Eunemertes gracilis, Johnston.

Breakwater, among Laminaria roots (t.h.r.) : Drake's I. (r.a.t.,
W.I.B.).

Eunemertes echinoderma (Marion).

Yealm, one specimen dredged 25.1.99, one from sand-bank 1.2.00
(w.lb.): Yeahn at low water (r.c.p.).

Nemertopsis flavida (Mcintosh) Beaumont (= Tetrastemma Jlavidum,
Mclntosli, Riches, Joubin, ncc Biirger).

Xemertopsis tenuis, Biirger ( = Tetrastemma flavidum, var. longissimum
Joubin).

Beaumont: Fauna and Flora A^alencia Harbour, Proc. Eoy. Irish
Acad., 1900, pp. 817 and 818, where reasons are given for relegating
2\irastcmma Jlavidum to genus Nemeiiopsis Biirger.

Biirger, Naples Monograph.

The doubtful status of Ncmertopsis tenuis as a species distinct
from N. flavida, and the fact that they have rarely been dis-
tinguished witli certainty make it expedient to consider them
together (av.i.b.).

Very common in Plymouth Sound, between tide-marks and from
dredgings, especially Duke Rk. and Millbay Ch. (t.h.r.).

Breakwater (between tide-marks), Asia Sh., Duke Bk., Millbay
Ch., E. Yealm (dredging-ground) ; both forms occur in Pi. Yealm
and IMillbay Ch. (w.LB.).

Amphiporidse.

Amphiporus pulcher (Johnston): Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. i.
Nemertines, Bay Soc, 1874. Beaumont, Proceed. Eoy. Irish Acad.,
V, 1900, p. 819. This is not the A. 'pidclier of Burger's Monograph.
Taken on one or two occasions on Eddystone Gds. (w.i.B.).

Amphiporus lactifloreus (Johnston).

Common between tide-marks, under stones (t.h.r.) : Drake's I.
(e.j.a., T.V.H., r.a.t.): Eum B. (w.i.b.): Mt. Edgcumbe (e.j.a.);
Wembury B. (t.v.il).

Breeding in early spring (t.ii.r.), March (av.g.).

Amphiporus dissimulans, Eiches, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S., iii, p. 10.
In considerable abundance, IMillbay Cii. (t.ii.r.).
Once between tide-mark.s, Drake's 1.; dredged, Asia Sh., Millbay
Ch. (common) ; R. Yealm (w.i.b.).

Breeding in spring and in Oct. (t.h.r,).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 217

[ Nemertini — contd. ]

Amphiporus bioculatus, Mcintosh.

One specimen dredged in Millbay Ch., 18.11.92, (t.h.r.).

Drepanophorus spectabilis (Quatrefages).

Among weeds dredged in Cawsand B. (one specimen); dredged
off Stoke Pt. (four) (t.h.r.).

Taken several times on Mewstone Ledge ; Queen's Gd. (once) ;
Eddystone Gds. (w.i.B.).

Queen's Gd.. Millbay Ch., Cawsand B. (r.a.t.) : 5 m. S. of Mew-
stone (a.j.s.).

Tetrastemmidse.

Tetrastemma ambiguum, Riches: Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S.,iii, p. 19.

Found Nov., 1902 (t.h.r.).
'Tetrastemma candidum (O. F. Miiller).
- T. veRxMICULAtum (Quatrefages).
.T. melanocephalum (Johnston).

Until the British Tetrastemmidm have been thoroughly revised,
any attempt to deal with the distribution of the so-called species,
T. candidum, T. vcrmiculatum, and T. melanocephalum, is of doubt-
ful value. Nemertines recorded under each of these names have
been commonly dredged in Plymouth Sound, and occasionally
found between tide-marks and among Zostent in Cawsand B.
T. candidum — so-called — has also been found on the Mewstone
ledge, on the inner trawling grounds, where it is abundant among
Cellaria, and on the Eddystone Gds. But it may hereafter be found
that two distinct species (perhaps more) have been confused as
T. candidum (w.i.B.).
Tetrastemma cephalophorum, Biirger.

Millbay Ch., Duke Pk. (as Frosorlioelimus Claparcdii by mistake)
(t.h.r.): dredged Millbay Ch., Queen's Gd., Duke Pk., P. Yealm
(w.i.B.).
Oerstedia dorsalis (Zool. Dan.).

Very common in dredgings, especially in early summer among
Zostera in Cawsand B. (t.h.r.) : Queen's Gd., Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.) :
Asia Sh. (w.i.b., r.a.t.) : Cawsand B. (r.a.t.) : 5 m. S. of Penlee Pt.
(r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (w.i.B., e.j.a.) : found almost everywhere
from shore down to 30 fms. or more — a yellow form (Biirger's var.
cincta) abundant among Cellariet (w.i.B.).

Breeding in autumn (t.h.r.) : Sept., Oct., Nov. (w.G.).
Oerstedia nigra (Piches) : Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, KS., iii, p. 14.

On Codiicm and other weeds from Laminarian zone (t.h.r.): Pum
B. and Batten among corallines (w.i.B.).

Oerstedia immutabilis (Piches): Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc N.S., iii, p. 14.
. Coralline pools in Wembury B., many specimens ; among weeds
on shore and dredged at Duke Pk. (t.h.r.).

Malacobdellidae.

Malacobdella grossa (0. F. Midler).

In branchial cavity of Cyprina islandica, never more than one
in a mollusc (t.h.r., s.p.).

Pipe females in autumn (t.h.r.).

218 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[Nemertini— co?iW. ]
Eupoliidse.
EuPOLiA CURTA, Hubrecht.

Oil" Borough I.; oft* Prawle Pt. ; Eddystone Gds. (T.H.R., e.j.a.) :
Millbay Ch., 2 specimens, October, 190U (a.j.s.) : Queen's Gd., one
small (r.a.T.) : ]\le\vstone Ledge ; about 4 m. S. of Mewstone ; 2 m.
W. of Eddystone (w.i.b.).

Oxypolia beaumontiana, Punnett: Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xliv,
p. 555.

Dredged oft" Mewstone 10.6.97 and 23.11.99, one specimen on
each occasion (w.i.b., h.c.p.).

Lineidae,

MiCRELLA RUFA, Punnett : Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xliv, p. 548.
Yealni shore, low water, one (R.C.P.).

LiNEUS LONGissiMUS, Gunn (=Z. marinus of Mcintosh).

Dredged in Yealm and outside Breakwater, occasionally on shore
(t.H.R.): occasional specimens dredged and found on the shore from
all parts of the Sound ; Wembury 11 ; Yealm ; Mewstone Ledge
(W.I.B., R.A.T.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

LiNEUS GESSERENSIS (0. F. Miiller) = L. obscurns, Desor.

Common everywhere in Sound between tide-marks (t.h.r., r.a.T.):
Yealm (t.v.h.): Wembury B. (r.a.T.): common everywhere under
stones at about mid-tide level (w.i.b.).

lireeding : Jan. (w.g.) : Feb. (r.a.T.) : March (t.h.r.).

LiNEUS LACTEUS (Grube).

North side of Drake's L, between tide-marks; Cawsand B., not
common (t.h.r.).

LiNEUS bilineatus (?Ptenier), Mcintosh.

Connnon 5 to 20 fms., especially at Duke lik. (T.H.R.): occasionally
in sand and gravel between tide-marks, lium B. (w.i.b.): Drake's J.
(R.A.T.) : Yealm Sand-bank (w.i.b., r.a.T., a.j.s.) : dredged on all
stony grounds in Sound (w.i.b., R.a.T.), Yealm II., S.W. of Penlee
(1| miles), Eddystone Gds. (w.i.b.).

MiCRURA FASCIOLATA, Ehrcnberg.

Common in Sound, especially Duke Ilk. (t.h.r.): dredged from
stony ground in all parts of Sound (w.i.b., t.v.h., r.a.T.): Eame-
Eddystone Gds., Eddystone Gds. (w.i.b.).
Breeding : Oct. to end of year (t.h.r.).

MiCRURA PURPUREA (Dalyell), J. Miiller.

Common in Sound, especially Duke Ilk.; also outside Break-
water (t.h.r.) : in dredgings from stony ground in all parts of
Sound (W.I.B., R.A.T.) : Yealm P., Mewstone Ledge, Eddystone Gds.
(w.i.b.).

MiCRURA AURANTIACA (Grube).

Between tide-marks, Wembury 11, one spec, 10.0.92 (t.h.r.):
Mewstone Ledge, Mallard, Queen's Gd., Yealm (dredged) (w.i.b.):
Asia Sh. (a.j.s.), one spec, only from each locality.

MiCRURA LACTEA (Hubrecht) ( = ^f. Candida, Biirger).
Stoke Pt., 10.n.9i\ one dredged (t.h.r.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEr.TEBTIATE KAUXA. 219

[ Nemertini — contd.: ArcMannelida : Polychaeta ]

Cerebkatulus fuscus (Mcintosh).

Jennycliff B., Mallard and Cobbler Shoals, few (t.h.r.) : Mallard,
Queen's Gd., Drake's I., Mewstone Gds. (w.i.B.) : Eum B. ; Millbay
Ch. (r.a.t.): Eddystone Gds., with LcpraUa foliacea (w.i.B.).
Cerebkatulus pantherinus, Hubrecht ( = (7. marginatus (pars) Joubin).
One dredged off Stoke Pt. (t.h.r.).

ARCHIANNELIDA.

DiNOPHiLUS TAENIATUS, Harmer : Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S.. vol. i,
p. 119, Pis. ix. and x.

Kock -pools in Sound far above low- water, in March and April :
not found in June (s.F.H.) : pools high up on limestone rock below
the Laboratory and in front of West Hoe Terrace (e.j.a.).

POLYGORDius (apogon McIntosh ?) : Frcdjwnt, Le Genre Polygordius,
Faun. rior. Neapel, 1887, p. 87.

Clean shell gravel off Mewstone (t.v.h., e.j.a.) : Eddystone Gds.

(E.J.A.).

Protodrilus Leuckarti, Hatschek : Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Wien., vol. iii,
1880, p. 79, PL 2.

Eeared from townettings taken in September (e.j.b.).

Histriobdella homari, van Beneden : Foettinger, Archiv. Biologic,
vol. V, 1884, p. 435.

Frequent on the eggs of lobsters taken by Plymouth fishermen.
Breeding during the summer months (e.j.a.).

POLYCH^TA.

Syllidse.

Typosyllis prolifera, Krohn : Langerhans, Wurmfauna v. Madeira.
Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., vol. xxxii, 1879, p. 531.

Drake's I., Millbay Ch., Queen's Gd., buoys in Sound, amongst
weeds : Yealm, in red sponge (e.j.a.).

Typosyllis alternosetosa, de St. Joseph: Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool, i, 1886,
p. 150.

Eddystone Gds. (w.r.R.w.).

Syllis (Ehlersia) cornuta, Eathke : Langerhans, Wurmfauna v.
Madeira, Zeitschr. wiss Zool., vol. xxxii, 1879, p. 537.
Eddystone Gds. (w.f.r.w.).
Syllis gracilis, Grube: Langerhans, Wurmfauna v. Madeira, Zeitschr.
wiss. Zool., vol. xxxii., 1879, p. 540.

Amongst dredgings from Millbay and Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).

Odontosyllis ctexostoma, Claparede: Marion et Bobretzky, Annul.
Golfe Marseille, 1875, p. 42.

From the shore, under stones and amongst weed.'?, sponges, etc.,
on Drake's T., Kum P>., and below Laboratory (e.j.a.).
Odontosyllis fulgurans, Claparede: La/igerlia/is, Wurmfauna v.
Madeira, Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. xxxii, 1879, p. 554.
Dredgings from Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).

NEW SERIFS, — VOL. VII. NO. 2. P

220 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Polychaeta--co?i/(f.]
Odontosyllis GIBHA, Clapaiode : Marion H Bubnizki/, Aniiel. Oolfe.
Marseille, 1875, p. 08.

In diedgings from Queen's Gd. and Asia Sh. (e.j.a.).
Trypanosyllis zebra (Grulie): L(inf/erltans, Wurnitauna v. Madeira,
Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xxxii, 1879, p. 556.

Frequent in dredgings from Milibay Ch. and Asia Sli. Ycalm
dredging (e.j.a.).
Amblyosyllis spectabilis (Johnston) : Catal. Brit. Non-paras. Worms,
p. 195. PI. xvi. (as Gattiola).

Common in dredgings from Milibay Ch. : less numerous Queen's
Gd., Mallard, Asia (e.j.a., r.a.t., t.v.ii.) : Eddystone Gds., occasional
(e.j.a.): sometimes in large numbers in sponges from ]\Iillbay
Ch. (W.G.).
Sphaero-SYLLLS ovigera, Langerhans: AVurm fauna v. Madeira, Zeitschr.
wiss. Zool., xxxii, 1879, p. 507.

One spec, from Queen's Gd. dredging (e.j.a.).
Autolytus pictus (Ehlers): Borstenwiirmer, 1860, p. 25G.

Fairly common among stones from Milibay Ch. (^v.G.) : very
plentiful in dredgings from Asia Sh., es])eeially amongst sponges
and Alcyonidium : occasionally dredged MilUuiy Ch. and Queen's
Gd. (e.j.a.).
Autolytus rubropunctatus (Grube): Mariuii d' Bohretzli/, Ann. Golfe
Marseille, 1875, p. 44 (as P. ornata) : Lfdigcrhaiia, Wurnif. Madeira,
p. 579.

Frequent in dredgings from Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).
Myrianida pinnigera (Montagu): Trans. Linn. Soc, ix, \\ 111 (J/.
I'dHciiitd, And. et Edw.).

Frecpiently met with in Plymouth Sound (w.G.): dredgings from
Milll)ay Ch., Asia and Queen's Gd. (t.v.il, r.a.t., e.j.a.): amongst
Ascidians and s])onges fi'om piles at INIillbay Dock (r.a.t.).

Hesionidse.
Kefersteinia CIRRATA (Keferstein): C/njxiredc, Beobachtungen, 18G3,
p. 55, Taf. xiv.

On shore at low-water mark under stones, Drake's I., Mt.
Edgcumbe, Pium 15.: amongst dredgings from Milibay Ch. and Asia
Sh. (e.j.a.).
Castalia punctata (Miiller): Johnston, Brit. Mus. Cat. Worms, 18G5,
p. 182: Gvuhe, Jahresber. Sehles. Gcssellsch, 1879 (1880), p. 19.

Connnon in dredgings from Milibay Ch. and Asia Sh.; occasion-
ally from Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).
Magalia peharmata, Marion et Bobretzky: Anncl. Golfc Marseille,
1875, p. 54, PI. 7.

Not uncommon in dredgings from (Queen's (Id., Asia Sh., and
Milibay Ch. (e.j.a.),

Apliroditidse.
Aphrodita ACULEATA, Linn. : Mr I ,ilu.-<li, Mon. P.iit. Annel., ii, ]{ay
Soc, 1900, p. 247.

On most line-sand grounds off Plymouth, between 20 and
30 fmS. (T.V.H., R.A.T., E.J.A.;.

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBKATE FAUNA. 221

[ Fo\ychset&— contd.]

Hermione iiYSTRix (Savigiiy) : McIntosJi, Mon. lirit. Aniiel. ii, Eay
Soc, 1900, p. 264

Most frequently on gravel grounds in the neighbourhood of the
Eddystone (t.V.H.) : occasionally on similar ground in about 20 fnis.
(R.A.T., E.J.A.).

Lepidonotus squamatus (Linn.) : Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii,
Eay Soc, 1900, p. 274.

Under stones and amongst weeds, Hydroids, Polyzoa, etc. : from
low- tide mark to oO fms. and over, connnon and widely distri-
buted (T.V.H., E.J. a.).
Lepidonotus clava (Montagu): 3Ic.lutosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii, Ray
Soc, 1900, p. 280.

Everywhere on the shore under stones, especially at extreme low
water (t.V.H.): less frequently in dredgings from the Sound (E.J.A.).

Gattyana cirrosa (Pallas) : McTntosk, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii, Ray Soc,
1900, p. 285.

In dredgings from the neighbourhood of the Eddystone (t.v.h.) :
Yealm Sandbank and east shore, commensal in tubes of Amphitrite
Johnstoni (e.j.a.).
EuNOA nodosa (M. Sars): Mclnfosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii, Ray Soc,
1900, p. 292.

Stony ground off Prawle Point, oO fms. (w.F.R.W.).
Lagisca floccosa (Savigny): iMclntos/i, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii, Ray Soc,
1900, p. 298.

Between tide-marks and in dredgings throughout the whole area
to 30 fms. (t.V.H.).
Lagisca extenuata (Grube): Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii, Ray Soc,
1900, p. 307.

Not uncommon : most frequently under laminarian roots at the
Breakwater, more rarely on Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h.).
Lagisca rarispina (Sars): J/«/?;?r/rcn, Nordiska Hafs-Annulater, 1865,
p. 65.

Eddystone Gds. (w.f.r.w., t.v.h.) : Mewstone Gds. (t.v.h.).
HARMOTHOii IMBRICATA (Linn.): Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii., Ray
Soc, 1900, p. 814.

Between tide-marks amongst laviinaria roots on the Breakwater:
amongst Hydroids, Polyzoa, etc. on Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h.).
Harmothoe spinifera (Ehlers) : Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii., Ray
1900, p. 327.

Amongst dredgings from Millbay, Queen's Gd., Asia Sh., etc., and
Yealm R. : common (t.v.h., h.a.t., e.j.a.).
Harmothoe lunulata (Delle Chiaje) : Mcintosh, Mon. ih-it. Annel. ii.,
Ray Soc, 1900, p. 342.

On the Breakwater, among Laminaria roots and under stones at
low-water mark (t.v.h.).
Harmothoe setosissima (Savigny): Mchitosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii.,
Ray Soc, 1900, p. 345.

Among Polyzoa {CeUaria) and Chaiopterus tubes from Eddystone

Gds. (T.V.H.).

222 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Polychaeta — conhL ]
Hakmotiioe areot.ata (Grube) : Mcintosh, Mon. P.iit. Annel. ii., Ray
Soc, 1900, p. :549.

Amongst Polyzoa and Chmtoptcrua tubes on EJdystone Gds. :
not uncommon (t.v.ii.).

Evarne impar (Johnston): Mcintosh, ]\Ion. Brit. Annel. ii., Eav Soc,
1900, p. 353.

Common between tide-marks and among.st dredginc^s throughout
the Plymouth area (t.v.h., e.j.a.) : Eddystone Gds. (T.V.H.).
SCALISETOSUS COMMUNIS (Delia Chiaje): Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii.,
Eay Soc, 1900, p. 372.

On the shore at Mt. Edgcumbe : amongst dredgings Millbay Ch.
and Asia Sh. (r.a.t., e.j.a.).

ScALiSETOSUS ASSiMiLis (Mclutosh) : McIntosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii.,
Eay Soc, 1900, p. 377.

Amongst spines of ErJiinus csculentus from Mewstone and Eddy-
stone Gds. (t.v.h., R.A.T.).

Malmgrenia castanea, Mcintosh: Mon. Brit. Annel. ii., Eay Soc,
1900, p. 379.

Commensal on the surface of Spatang2is purpureus, near the
mouth of the Echinoderm : not uncommon (t.v.h.).
Halosydna gelatinosa (M. Sars): Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii.,
Eay Soc, 1900, p. 384.

On shore under stones ; occasionally in deep water (t.v.h.) :
Wembury B., Drake's I., rocks below Laboratory (r.a.t.) : Millbay
Ch., Asia Sh.. Queen's Gd. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h., e.j.a.).
Polynoe scolopendrina, Savigny : Mcintosh, Mon. P.rit. Annel. ii., Eay
Soc, 1900, p. 389.

Millbay Ch. and Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h.): Millbay Ch. and Asia Sh.,
Mt. Edgcumbe, common in tuliesof Poli/mnia nehnhsa (r.x.t., k.j.a.).
Breeding : March (r.a.t.).
ACHOLOE ASTERICOLA (Delle Chiaje): Mcintosh, Mon. P.rit. Annel. ii.,
Eay Soc, 1900, p. 397.

In the ambulacral groove of Astropccten irreyahtris: common
(t.v.h., R.a.t., e.j.a.)

Sthenei.ais BOA (Johnston) : Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel., ii., Eay Soc,
1900, p. 408.

Common in sand between tide-marks, Eum B., Drake's I., Mt.
Edgcumbe, Wemluiry B., Yealni E. (t.v.h., r.a.t., e.j.a.) : occasion-
ally amongst dredgings from Millbay and Asia Sh. (t.v.h., e.j.a.):
Mewstone Gds. (t.v.h.).

I'liOLoit MiNUTA (Fabricius): Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel. ii., Eav Soc,
1900, p. 437.

Common amongst dredgings from Millbay Ch.,less frequent from
Asia Sh. and Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).

Amphinomidae.
Euphrosyne foliosa. And. et Kdw. : Mrlnfosli. Mon. I'.iit. Annel.,
part ii., Polychaeta, Eay Soc, 1900, p. 234. PI. xxiv.

Occasional specimens in dredgings from Queen's Gd., Asia Sh.,
Millbay Ch. (t.v.ii., r.a.t., e.j.a.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE TNVERTEBEATE FAUNA. 223

[Polychaeta— fo«<(/.]

Phyllodocidse.

EULALIA viRiDis (Mliller) : Johnston, Catal. Worms. Brit. Mus., 1865,
p. 178. PI. xvi.

Common on rocky shores all round the Sound (k.a.t., e.j.a.) :
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

EULALIA PUNCTIFERA (Grubs) : (Ic St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., v.,
1888, p. 289. PI. xii.

In dredgings from Millbay Cli., Asia Sh., and Yealm ; on the
shore at Mt. Edgcumbe and in Yealm estuary (e.j.a.).

EuLALiA aurea, Gravier : Pecherches sur les Phyllodocieus., Bull. Sci.
Prance et Belg. xxix., 1896, p. 309.

Common in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh., and Queen's
Gd., occasionally from Yealm (e.j.a.).

Breeding : March, April, May, June, July (e.j.a.).

Eulalia Claparedei, de St. Joseph: Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., v., 1888,
p. 285. PI. xi.

Not infrequent in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh., and
occasionally Queen's Gd.

Breeding : May, eggs brick-red (e.j.a.).

Eulalia obtecta, Ehlers: Borstenwiirmer, 1868, p. 169. PI. vii.

Frequent in dredgings from Queen's Gd. : occasionally from
Asia Sh., Millbay Ch., and Mewstone Echinoderm Gd. (e.j.a.).
Eulalia ornata, de St. Joseph : Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., v., 1888, p. 291.

In dredgings from Millbay Ch. and Asia Sh. (e.j.a.).

Breeding : April-July (e.j.a.).

Eulalia pallida, Claparede: de St. Josefh, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., v.,
1888, p. 294.

Very numerous in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh., and
Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).

Breeding : May to July : eggs green (e.j.a.).

Pterocirrus macroceros (Grube) : de, St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zoo].,
v., 1888, p. 300. PI. xii.

Occasional specimens Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).
Piiyllodoce laminosa, Savigny, de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool. v.,
1888, p. 274. PI. xi.

Between tide-marks Drake's I., Breakwater : in dredgings Mill-
bay Ch., Asia Sh., Duke Pock (t.v.h., e.j.a.),
Phyllodoce maculata (Miiller) : Johnston, Catal. Worms. Brit. Mus.,
1865, p. 177.

Common in dredgings from Milll)ay Ch. and Asia Sh. (often in
great numbers) (w.G., t.v.h., e.j.a.) : shore at Drake's I. (e.j.a.) :
Yealm dredgings (t.v.h.).

Breeding : Jan. Feb. (w.G.) : April, May. Eggs orange-brown
(e.j.a.).

Piiyllodoce rubiginosa, de St. Joseph : Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool. v, 1888,
p. 282.

Frequent in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh.,and Drake's I.
(e.j.a.).

224 I'LY MOUTH MAUINE 1NVERTE15RATE FAUNA.

[ Polychaeta— coH^f/.]
PllYLLODOCE Paretti, Blaiiiville : Cucier, Eegue animal, Ainic'lides.
ri. l::5. Fig. 1.

Mewstone Ledge (e.j.a.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Eteone picta, Quatrefages: Hist. Nat. Annel. ii, p. 147. PI. 18.

Occasional specimens from dredgings, Millbay Ch., Asia Sh.,
Queen's Gd., Barn Pool (e.j.a.).

Tomopteridae.
Tomopteris helgolandica, Greef : AiMein, Alciopiden und Tomopteri-
den der Plankton-Kxpedition, Kiel, 1.900, p. 38. PI. x.
In towiietlings Oct. (T.V.II.) : Dec. Jan. June (L.H.G.).

Nereidae.
Nereis gultrifera, Grube: Ehlcrs, Borstenwiirmer, 18G8, p. 461.
PJ. xxi.

Common on the sliores, especially in muddy gravel, all round
the Sound, Wembury B., Yealm Estuary (r.a.t., e.j.a.).

Nereis diversicolor, 0. E. Miiller: Elders, Borstenwiirmer, 1868,
p. 554. PI. xxii.

Common in the mud flats of the Tamar and Plym estuaries,
seldom in the Sound ; found only where the density of the water
is low (e.j.a.).

Nereis Dumerilli, Aud. et Edw. : Ehlcrs, Borstenwiirmer, 1868, p. 535.

PI. XX.

Small specimens common in all dredgings from the Sound, Mill-
bay, Asia Sh., Queen's (4d., and from Yealm P.; larger specimens
chielly from Queen's Gd. ; occasional specimens on the shore under
Laboratory and Barn Pool (e.j.a.).

Nereis fucata, vSavigny : Elders, Borstenwiirmer, 1868, p. 546. PI. xxi.
In shells of Biuxinnrn vndcUuni inhabited by Ei'jjac/Kriis Bcrn-
hardus; Mewstone Gds., liame to Eddystone Gds., Eddystoue Gds.
(e.j.a.) : Yealm P. (s.P.).
Breeding : May (W.G.).
Nereis irrorata, Malmgren : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., v,
1888, p. 263, and xx, 1805, p. 215.

Not uncommon in sand between tide-marks, Drake's I., Mt.
Edgcumbe, Jennyclifl (rare), Wembury ]>., Yealm Estuary south
shore. Small specimens amongst dredgings Queen's Gd. and Asia
Sh. (e.j.a.).

Nerhiis longissima, Johnston: dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., v,
1898, p. 304. PI. xvi. and xvii.

Occasional specimens in fine sand between tide-marks, Drake's I.
and Mt. Edgcvunbe ; more connnon on shores of Yealm estuary ;
one specimen of llcleronereis stage taken in Cattewater (e.j.a.).
In mud-bank of Cattewater near Oreston (j.T.G.).

^^^EREIS pelagica, Linnicus : Ehlcrs, P>orstcnwurnier, 1868, p. 511. PI. xx.
Freijuent amongst weeds on rocky shores and from dredgings in
all parts of the Sound ; also Wembury B. and Yealm \l. (T.v.ii.,
e.j.a.).

PLYMOUTH iArAKINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 225

[ Polychaeta— co/(/;(;. ]

NepMhydidae.
Nephthys c.eca (Fabricius) : df St. Joseplt, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 16.

Large specimens on sandy shores, especially Drake's T., Rum B.,
and Yealni Sand-bank (t.v.h., r.a.t., e.j.a.).
ISTephthys Hombergi, Aud. et Edw.: dc St. Joseph, Anu. Sci. Nat., Zool,
xvii, 1894, p. 3.

Shore between tide - marks, Drake's I., Jennycliff, Bovisand
(r.a.t., e.j.a.) : dredged on Mewstone 'A/iiphioei's' Gd. (r.a.t.), and
Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h.).
Nephthys cirrosa, Elders: Borstenwurmer, 1868, p. 624. PI. xxiii.

In sand between tide-marks, Drake's I. and Yealm estuary
(e.j.a.).

Eunicidse.

Eunice Haras.si, Aud. et Edw.: Elders, IJorstenwurmer, 1868, p. 312.
Pis. xiii & xiv.

On the shore Drake's L, Rum B., Breakwater (r.a.t., e.j.a.) :
Wembury B. (e.j.a.) : in dredgings from Duke Rk. (w.g., t.v.h.) :
Queen's Gd., Asia Sh., Millbay Ch. (r.a.t., e.j.a.) : south of Break-
water Fort (w.g.) : Ranie to Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Onuphis conchilega, M. Sars: Oersted, Gronlands Annulata Dorsi-
branchiata, 1843, p. 20, PI. iii. (as 0. Esehriehtii): cf. de St. Jose2)h,
Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., v, 1888, p. 194.

On coarse shell-gravel grounds, in deptbs from 20 to 30 fms. off"
the Mewstone, off' Stoke Pt., S. of Rame Head, and off Eddystone
(e.j.a., r.a.t.).

Hyalincecia tubicola (Miiller): Elders, Borstenwiirmer, 1868, p. 297.
Common on muddy-gravel grounds from 20 to 30 fms. : off"
Mewstone, Rame to Eddystone and Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., r.a.t.)

Marphysa sanguinea (Montagu): de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat., v,
1888, p. 201.

Frequent on the shore in crevices of rock, especially on the
bridge between Drake's I. and Mt. Edgcumbe; also Rum B., Wem-
bury B., and Yealm Estuary (w.g., t.v.h., r.a.t., e.j.a.).

Marphysa Belli, Aud. et Edw.: Hist. Nat. Lit. France, ii, p. 149,
PI. iii.

On the shore between tide-marks N. side Drake's L, Rum B.;
most frequent in Zostem beds at mouth of Yealm R. (e.j.a.).

Lysidige ninetta, Aud. et Edw. : Hist. Nat. Lit. France, ii, p. 161,
PI. iii^'.

Freipient in I'lymouth Sound, on the shore between tide-marks
(Rum B., Drake's 1.), and in dredgings (Asia Sh., Millbay Ch.,
Queen's Gd.) ; on shore Wembury B. and Reny Rks. ; dredged in
Yealm R. (e.j.a.).

Nematonereis unicornis (Grul)e): de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat., v,
1888, p. 207.

Between tide-marks N. side of Drake's L and Mt. Edgcumbe ;
amongst dredgings from (>)ueen's Gd., Asia Sh., and Millbay Ch.
(e.j.a.).

226 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[Polychseta — contd.]
LUMBRICONEREIS IMPATIENS, Claparede : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat.
Zool., V, 1898, p. 279.

Coarse grounds l)etween Eddystone and llame ; very abundant
on Queen's Gd. in spring of 1903 (e.j.a.),

LUMBRICONEREIS Latreillei, Aud. et Edw.: tic >Sf. JosrpJi, Ann. Sci.
Nat. Zool, V, 1808, p. 276.

Shores of the Sound, between tide-marks (Drake's I., Mt. Edg-
cumbe, Euni B.) ; amongst dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh.,
Queen's Gd., Yealni E., and Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Maclovia iricolor (Montagu): Wilh\//, dourn. Mar. Biok Assoc, vi,
1900, p. 98 - 3L f/if/aiitra (Quatrefages).

Occasional specimens at low-water mark on shores of Sound
(e.j.a.).

Staurocephalus rubrovittatus, Grube: Elders, Borstenwiirmer, 1868,
p. 424.

Frequent in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Queen's Gd., and Asia
Sh. (E.J.A.).

Staurocephalus ciliatus, Keferstein: Elders, Borstenwiirmer, 1868,
p. 440.

Recorded once from Queen's Gd. dredging (e.j.a.).

Staurocephalus pallidus, Langerhans : Zeits. wiss. Zool., xxxiii, 1879,
p. 300.

Recorded once from Asia Sh. dredging ; resembles S. cUiatus,
Kef., excepting for absence of eyes (e.j.a.).

Ophryotrocha puerilis, Clpd. et Meczn. : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat.
Zool., XX, 1895, p. 210 (as Paractius mutahilis, n. sp.).

Dredgings from Duke lik. (t.v.h.) : often common in Laboratory
tanks (e.j.a.).

Breeding: Aug. (w.g.). Spawned in tanks, May (a.j.s.).

Glyceridae.
Glycera convoluta, Keferstein : dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 27, Tl. ii.

Between tide-marks Drake's I., JennyclilT, Yealm Estuary; in
dredgings from Millbay Ch., Eame to Eddystone and Eddystone
Gds. (e.j.a.).

Glycera lapidum, Quatrefages : Anvidsson, Studien iiber die Familien
Glyceridae nnd Goniaididae, Bergens Mus. Aarb., 1898, p. 15,
Figs. 7, 8, and 55.

Between tide-marks Wembury B. (t.v.h., e.j.a.) : dredged in shell
gravel off Mewstone (t.v.h., e.j.a.) and near Queen's Gd. (e.j.a.).

Glycera gigantea, Quatrefages : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 22, PI. ii.

Between tide-marks, Drake's L (w.g., r.a.t.) : Mewstone Amjjhi-
oxus Gd. (e.j.a.).

GONIADA maculata, Oersted: Elders, Borstenwiirmer, 1868, p. 704,
PI. xxiv.

One specimen from Plymouth Breakwater (e.j.a.).

PLY.MOUTII MARINE IXVEUTEBRATE FAUNA. 227

[ Polychaeta— co/^/</.]

Sphaerodoridse.
Ephesia gracilis, Rathke: de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 38, PI. \\\ = Sp1ic€rodonim peripatus, Johnston.

Frequent in dredginn;s from Millbay Ch. and Asia Sh. ; occasion-
ally also from Queen's Gd. and from between tide-marks on
Drake's I. and Mt. Edgcumbe (e.j.a.).

Ariciidse.
Aricia Cuvieri, And. et Edw.: dc Sf. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 91.

One specimen dredged off the Mewstone (e.j.a.).

SCOLOPLOS ARMIGER (Mliller) : de St. Josepli, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 94, ri. V.

In dirty sand and l)etween layers of shale at Rat I. (Hanioaze)
(w.G.) : in sand at Drake's I., Rum B., and the Yealm Estuary
(e.j.a.).

Spionidse.
ScOLELEPis VULGARIS, Johnston (probably the same as S. fuliginosa
Claparede, var. macrocliccta major of Mesnil : IjuII. Sci. France et
Belg., xxix, 1896, p. 138).

Mud between tide-marks, Rum B. and Wembury B. ; numerous
(e.j.a.).

ScoLELEPis GiARDi (de Quatrefages) : Mcsail, Bull Sci. France et Belg.,
xxix, 1896, p. 140.

One specimen from mud in Rum B. (e.j.a.).

Nerine cirratulus (Delle Chiaje): Mesnil, Bull. Sci. France et Belg.,
xxix, 1896, p. 152.

Fine gravel between tide-marks on eastern side of Plymouth
Sound (e.j.a.).

Nerine coniocephala, Johnston { = N. foliosa, And. et Edw.: Mesnil,
Bull. Sci. France et Belg., xxix, 1896, p. 165).

In sand between tide - marks, E. side of Drake's I. (e.j.a.) :
Wembury B. (t.v.h.).

AONIDES OXYGEPHALA (Sars) : Mesiul, Bull. Sci. France et Belg., xxix,
1896, p. 242, PI. X.

In Zostera bed at low-water mark, eastern shore of Yealm
mouth ; very numerous (E.J.A.).

PuLYDORA CILIATA (Joluiston) : Mcsiiit, Bull. Sci. France et Belg., xxix,
1896, p. 210, PI. xiv.

Boring in limestone of the Breakwater and in limestone dredged
from Millbay Ch. (e.j.a.).

PoLYDORA FLAVA, Claparede : Mesnil, 'Bull. Sci. France et Belg., xxix,
1896, p. 182, PI. xi.

At Rum B. and Rat 1. (Hamoaze); common in crevices of shale
(w.g.) : Rum B. in crevices of shale (e.j.a.) : dredgings from Yealm
R. (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Feb. (w.g.).

228 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBKATE FAUNA.

[ Polychaeta — cunt(/.]
roLYDORA c.KCA, OersLcd : JLsjtil, liull. Sci. France et Bulg., xxix, 1896,
p. 191, PJ. xii.

Eddystone Gds. (T.V.H.).

PoLYDORA HOPLURA, Claparklc : Ainu'l. Chetop. Golfe Naples, 1868,
p. 318, PI. xxii.

Poring in the limestone of Llie PlyniouLh Preakwater (e.j.a.).

Disomidse.
PtECILOCH.ETUS SERPENS, Allen : guait. Journ. ^licr. Sci., vol. xlviii,
1904, p. 79, Pis. 7-12.

In sand at low tide, S, of Patten Castle; lavvie nut uncouiiiKin
in llie plankton during the summer months (E.J.A.).

Chaetopteridse.

Ch.etopterus variopedatus, Ptenier: Joyeux-Laffuie, Arch. Zool. Exp.
et Gen., viii, 1890, p. 244, Pis. 15-20.

Common in muddy gravel on Eddystone Gds. and between IJame
and Eddyj?to]ie (e.j.a.) : occasional specimens Duke Pk. (T.Y.H.),
Asia Sh. (r.a.t.), ]\Iillbay Ch. (r.a.t., e.j.a.), and Mewstone Echino-
derm Gd. (r.a.t.): Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Larvte in townettings July to October (w.c;.).

Magelonidse.

Macielona PAPILLICORNIS, Fr. Midler: (h: Si. Jusq)//, Ann. Sci. Nat.
ZooL, xvii, 1894, p. 83.

In tine sand near low-water mark at JennycIiti'P. (k.a.t., E.j.a.),
under Patten Castle, and on S. shore of Yealm F^stuary (e.j.a.).
Larva3 in townets in July and August (e.j.a.): in September
(e.j.b.).

Ammocharidae.
Owenia FUSiFORMis (I)elle Chiaje) : dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
V, 1898, p. ;597, PI. xxii.

In fine sand near low-water mark at Jennycliff P. (R.A.T., E.J.A.)
and under Patten Castle (e.j.a.).

Cirratulidae.

AUDOUINIA tentaculata (Monlagu) : dc Si. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 49, PI. iii.

Common in gravel and sand just l)elow hitdi-water mark on all
shores, both inside and outside the Sound (t.v.ii., r.a.t., e.j.a.) :
occasional small specimens from dredgings at Millbay Ch. (e.j.a.).

Dodecaceria cONi'iiARUM, Oersted : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
V, 1898, p. 34(3, PI. XX.

Poring in limestone on Plymouth Preakwater, abundant ; Mill-
bay Ch. (e.j.a.).

Terebellidae.

Ampihtiiite ORAr-iLis, (;rul)e: dr St. Jii>iejih, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 198.

Common in sand between tide-marks and between layers of
shale in llum !>. and at Mt. Edgcumbe, Yealm Sand-bank, and
Wembury P. ; dredged Millbay Ch. and Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 229

Polychaeta— cohW.]
Amphitrite Johnstoni, Malnigren : dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
V, 1898, p. 421.

In sand and gravel near low-water mark along the S. shore
of the Yeahn E. ; most common on east shore where the stream
divides (r.a.t., e.j.a.).

Terebella lapidaria (Kahler), Linn. : de St. Joacpli, Ann. Sci. Nat.
Zool., xvii, 1 894, p. 202, Pis. viii. and ix.

Common in crevices of shale at IJum B. (r.a.t., e.j.a.).

POLYMNIA NEBULOSA (Montagu) : (Ic St. Jos€2jh, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 219, PI. ix.

Very connnon between tide-marks at Mt. Edgcunibe (r.a.t.,
E.J.A.) : occasional specimens on the shore at Kum 11 and in
dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh., Queen's Gd., and Yealm P.
(r.a.t., E.J.A.) : Eddy stone Gds. (t.v.h.).

POLYIMNIA NESIDENSIS (Delle Chiaje) : dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 225, PI. x.

Between tide-marks, Puni B., Mt. Edgcumbo, Wcmljury B. ;
dredged at Asia Sh., Yealm P., and Cawsand B. (e.j.a.).

Lanice coxchilega (Pallas) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 211.

Common on sandy shores inside and outside the Sound; occasion-
ally dredged Queen's Gd. ; Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h., r.a.t., e.j.a.).

NicOLEA ZOSTERICOLA (Oersted) : Malmgren, Nordiska Hafs-Annulater,
Ofer. K. Vet. Akad. Eorh., 1865, p. 381, PI. 26.

Common between tide -marks on Peny Pks., less freijuent
Drake's I., N. side ; also from dredgings in Yealm P. (e.j.a.).

Thelepus setosus (Quatrefages) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool,
xvii, 1894, p. 230, PI. x.

Dredged at Millbay Ch., Queen's Gd, Eddystone Gd;?. (e.j.a.).

POLYCIRRUS aurantiacus, Grubc : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool,
xvii, 1894, p. 239.

Common in dredgings from Millbay Ch. and Yealm P ; less
frequent in those from Asia Sh., Queen's Gd., and Duke Pk. (t.v.h.,
R.A.T., e.j.a.) : Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A.).

Breeding : July (w.G.) ; April (e.j.a.).

POLYGIRRUS CALIENDRU.M, Claparede : dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 237.

In dredgings from Millbay Ch., Queen's Gd., and Asia Sh. (e.j.a.).

LoiMlA MEDUSA (Savigny) : Malmgren, Nord. Hafs - Ann., p. 380,
PI. xxv ; Annul. Polych., p. 217, PI. xiv.

Amongst shell gravel near low- water mark on N. side of Drake's
I. ; tubes from Queen's Gd. ; Yealm P. shore (E.J.A.).

Terebellides Stroemi, Sars : Malmgren, Nord. Hafs-Annul., 1865,
p. 396, PI. xix. Fig. 48.

One specimen dredged four miles S.W. by S. of Pame Head

(e.j.a.).

230 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Polycheeta — could. ]

Ampliaretidae.
Melinna adriatica, v. Mareiizeller : Adiiatische Anuelideii. Sit/Ji.
Akcul. Wieii, Ixix, 1874, p. 472, PI. vii.

Comnion in soft mud in riymouth Sound, mi the shore aiul in
deeper water (e.j.a.).
Ampiiicteis curvipalea, ClaparMe: dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zoo!.,
xvii, 1894, p. 163, PI. vii.

One specimen dredged four miles S.W. hy .S. of Pame Head
(E.J.A.).

Ampliictenidae.

Pectinaria (Lagis) Koreni, Mahngren : dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat.
Zool., V, 1898, ]). 405, Pis. xxii and xxiii.

Common in sand near low-water mark S. of IJatten Castle (e.j.a.).
Pectinaria (Ami'IIIgtene) auricoma (Miiller) : Malingren, Nord. Hafs-
Annulat., 1865, p. 357, PI. 18.
Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h.).

Capitellidae.
Capitella capitata (Fabricius) : Uisig, Die Capitelliden des Golfes von
Neapel, 1887, p. 849.

Common in black mud frum between iide-marks, Wembury P.
and Ptum B. (e.j.a.).
Notomastus rubicundus, Keferstein: ^'i6-?V/, Die Capitelliden des Golfes
von Neapel, 1887, p. 863.

South shore of Yealm Estuary (near the mouth), common (e.j.a.).

Notomastus latericeus, Sars: Sars, Korm, Danielscn, Fauna littoralis
Norvegiae, ii, 1856, p. 9, PL ii.

Shore near low- water mark, Yealm Estuary; not frequent (e.j.a.).

Opheliidae.
xV.mmotrypane aulogastei;, Pathke : Peitriige zur Fauna Norwegens,
1840, p. 188, PI. X.

Dredged off Duke Pk. (w.G.): Mewstone Amplnoxus Gd. (e.j.a.).

POLYOPHTHALMUS PICTUS (Dujardin) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
V, 1898, p. 385.

Between tide-marks Wembury Bay (a.J.S.) : Peny Pks. (e.j.a.).

Arenicolidse.
Arenicola marina, Linn.: Gamhlc, Anatomy and Classification of
Arenicolidae : Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xliii, ]>. 419.

Fine sand between tide-marks Hum B., Drake's 1., Mt. Edgcumbe,
Wembury B., Yealm Ii. (t.v.ii., r.a.t., e.j.a.).

Postlarval stages of Arenicola in townettings February (w.G.,

AV.B.B.).
Arenicola Grubei, Claparede: Gamhlr, Anatomy and Classification of
Arenicolidae, (^)uart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xliii, p. 419.

With A. (caudata near the bases of rocks in a deposit composed
of sand and small stones (f.w.G.): Bum B., Wembury B., Drake's L

(E.J.A.).

PLYMOT'TII MAraXE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 231

[ Polychaeta— co?(A/.]

Arenicola ecaudata, Johnston : GamUe, Anatomy and Classification
of Arenicolidae, Quart. Jonrn. Micr. Sci., xliii, p. 419.

With A. Griihii near the bases of rocks in a deposit composed
of sand and small stones (f.w.g.) : Eum B., rocks below Laboratory
(r.a.t.) : AVembury B. (r.a.t., e.j.a.) : Drake's I. (t.v.h.).

Scalibregmidae.

ScALiBREGMA INFLATUM, Eathke : Ashiroftli, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,
xlv, 1902, p. 237.

In muddy gravel at low-water mark on southern shore of Yealm
E., just below the junction of the two rivers ; two specimens,
10/9/00 (E.J.A.).
ScLEROCHEiLUS MINUTUS, Grube : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool,
xvii, 1894, p. 104, PL V.

Frequent in dredgings from Millbay Ch. ; occasionally from
Asia Sh. and off the Mewstone (e.j.a.).

Chlorhaemidae.

Stylarioides (Trophonia) plumosa (Miiller) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci.
Nat. Zool., xvii, 1894, p. 101.

Dredgings from Millbay Ch. and Asia Sh. ; also 2^ miles off
Stoke Pt. (E.J.A.).

SiPHONOSTOMA (Flabelligera) affinis, M. Sars : Nevjhigin, Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist., .ser. 7, vol. v, 1900, p. 190, PI. iv.

Between tide-marks at Drake's I. (r.a.t., t.v.h., e.j.a.) : Eenny
Eks. (r.a.t., E..I.A.): under Eame Head (t.v.h.): Wembury B. (e..j.a.,
A.J.s.) : in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Queen's Gd. (r.a.t., t.v.h.) :
Mewstone Gds. (e.j.a., r.a.t.) : on Echinus etcutus (r.a.t.).

Sabellidse.

Sabella pavonina (Savigny): de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 267, Pis. X. and xi.

Common on the shore in Yealm E. and also found in Yealm
dredgings (r.a.t., e.j.a.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Branchiomma vesiculosum (Montagu) : de St. Josep>h, Ann. Sci. Nat.
Zool., xvii, 1894, p. 300, PI. xi.

Occasional specimens Yealm Sand-bank, Eum B. (r.a.t.) :
Drake's I., Yealm south shore near mouth, Barn Pool, and shore
S. of Batten Castle (e..t.a.).
Dasychone bombyx (Dalyell) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 309, Pis. xi and xii.

In dredgings from Duke Ek., Queen's Gd., Asia Sh., and Millbay
Ch., occasionally (e.j.a.) : Eddystone Gds. (t.v.h.).

Potamilla reniformis (Miiller): de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 292, PI. xi.

Large specimens from shore in Jennycliff B. ; found also in
Wembury B. (shore); not unconnnon boring in Hniostone of Ibvak-
water (e.j.a.).
Potamilla Torelli, Malmgren: de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 296.

Common in dredgings from Millbay Ch. and from Yealm W. { e.j.a.).

232 PLYMOUTH MAIIINE IXVERTEBIIATE FAUNA.

[ Polychaeta— twf^rf.]
POTAMILLA IXCEKTA, Laiigerluius : dc SL Joi^eph, Ann. Sci. Xat. Zool.,
. xvii, 1804, p. 209.

Eecorded once from Yealm dredging (e.j.a.).

Blspira volutacornis (Montagu) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1804, p. 28G.

In cracks between rocks at extreme low-tide mark on Kenny
liks. ; Jennyclifl" 1>. siiore (r.a.t.).

Myxicola infundibulum (Renier) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
V, 1898, p. 433, PI. xxiii.

North side Drake's I. (k.a.t.) : Barn Pool (e.j.a.) : Panis Cliff
Point (s.r.).

Serpulidee.

Seri^ula vermicularis, Linnjcus : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 328.

Occasionally in the Sound : Mevvstone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Ranie to
Eddystone Gds., and Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Pomatoceros triqueter (Linn.) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1894, p. 353, PI. xiii.

Common attached to shells and stones on all grounds from the
shore to 30 fms. (e.j.a.).
Hydroides noryegica (Gunn.): de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., v,
1898, p. 440.

Common on stones and shells, 0-30 fms. (e.j.a).
FiLOGEANA implexa (Berkeley): de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 335, Pis. xii and xiii.

In quantity ]Millbay Cli., piles of Promenade Pier (e.j.a.): on piles
at entrance to Millbay Docks (R.A.T.) : Breakwater (t.v.h.) : occa-
sionally met with in all dredgings from Sound and outside to
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Spirorbls borealis, Daudin : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. 345, PI. xiii.

Connnon on weeds, especially Fiieus, and on stones on all shores.
(e J.A.).
Protula tubularia (Montagu): dc St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool, xvii,
1894, p. 362, PI. xiii.

Mewstone Gds., Rame-Eddystone Gds., Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.,
e.j.a.).

Hermellidae.

Sabellaria alveolata (Linn.) : de St. Joseph, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., xvii,
1894, p. IGU.
Common attached to rocks on sandy shores at Whitsand B. (e j.a.).
Sabellaria spinulosa, Leuckart: de St. Josepli, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool.,
xvii, 1891, p. 154.

Attached to shells, etc., in dredgings from Queen's Gd., Duke Pvk.,
Asia Sh., Millbay Ch., and Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Breeding : May (w.G.) ; September (e.j.a.).

Pallasia murata, Allen : see p. 299.

One specimen from gravel off Stoke Pt. ; tubes frequent on
Mewstone shell-gravel Grounds (ej.a.).

PLYMOUTH .MARINE INVEKTEBRATE FAUNA. 233

[ Myzostomaria : Oligochaeta : Gephyrea: Hirudinea: Chaetognatha : Brancliiopoda ]

MYZOSTOMARIA.

Myzostomum cireifekum, Leuckart: BeuJtam, Cambridge Nat. Hist.,
Worms, etc., fig. 186.

Common on Anfcdon bifida from the Sound (e.j.a.).

OLIGOCH^TA.

Clitellio arenarius, Claparede : Beddard, Joiirn. Mar. Biol. Assoc.,
N.S., i, p. 69.

Mud at Drake's I. and on the shores of the Sound (f.e.b.).

Clitellio ater, Claparede: Beddard, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S., i, \). VO.
Mud on Drake's I. and on shores of Sound (f.e.b.).

Pachydeilus sp. : Beddard, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S., i, p. 69.
Common in gravel between tide-marks. Bum B. (f.e.b.).

GEPHYREA.

Nomenclature : — Selenka. E., Die Sipunculiden., Eeiseu. Archipel. Pliilipp.

Semper., Bd. iv, 1883-1885.
Petalostoma minutum, Keferstein.

Bum B., common in crevices of shale (t.v.h., r.a.t., e.j.a.).
Phascoliox stkombi, Montagu.

Frequently met with in shells of Aporrhais pes-pelecani ; Mew-
stone Gds. (T.V.H., e.j.a.).

Thalassema neptuni, Gaertner.

Common in holes in rock, Bum B., Wembury B., Drake's I. ; one
spec Yealui Sand-bauk ; in stones dredged from Millbay Cli., Asia
Sh., and (rarely) Queen's Gd. (r.a.t.).

Phoeonis hippocrepia, Wright: Shijylei/, Cambridge Nat. Hist., 1896.

Abundant in the Sound (w.g.) : Duke Bk. (T.v.H.) : Millbay Ch.
(t.v.h., E.J.A.) : AsiaSh.; Queen's Gd. (s.P.).

HIRUDINEA.

Pontobdella muricata, Linnieus : IV. C. Mcintosh, Mar. Invert. &
Fishes St. Andrews, p. 114, fig.

Occasionally on the outside grounds; parasitic on the skate (s.P.).
Breeding: July (e.W.l.IL).

CH^TOGNATHA.

Sagitta BIPUNCTATA (Quoy & Gaimard): Grassi, I Chetognati, Fauna
u. Flora Golf. Neapel., v.

Jn townettings throughout the year (l.h.g.).

BRANCHIOPODA.

EvADNE NOEDMANNI, Loven : C. Apdeiii, Nordisches Plankt., pt. vii,
Cladoc, p. 12, fig.

1892, appeared beginning of July and still present in Oct. (E.J.B.):
1895, constantly present in Aui,'., disappeared early Oct. (t.v.h.):
Apr.-May, 1899 (p.t.c): May, July, Sept., 1903; Mar.- June, 1904
(l.h.g.).

Carrying ova: Aug. (t.v.h.). Winter eggs produced from a))Out
mid-Sepl. (e.,lb.).

2:14 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Branchiopoda— co/(/rf. : Ostracoda : Copepoda ]
PODON iNTERMEDius, Lilljeborg : C. A^)s(cin, Xordisches I'laiikt., i»t. vii,
Cladoc, p. 15, fig.

1892, became less abundant in July and disappeared about
niid-Sept. (e.j.b.): 1895, constantly present in Aug., disappeared
early in Oct. (t.v.h.): Plymoutb neighbourhood, Apr.-Sept., 1903;
Apr.-July, 1904 (l.h.g.).
Carrying ova : Aug. (t.v.h.)

PoDON Leuckarti, G. 0. Sars : C. Apstcin, Nordisches Plankt., pt. vii,
Cladoc, p. 13, fig.

Plymouth neighbourhood, Apr. 1904, rare (l.h.g.).

OSTEACODA.
Cypridinidse.
Philomedes INTERPUNCTA, liaird: G. S. Brddy & Norman, Trans.
Dublin Soc, ser. 2, vol. v, p. 656, fig.
Plymouth (A.M.N. ).

Asteropidse.

ASTEROPE MARiiE (Baird) : G. >S. Bradij & JVornian, Trans. Dublin Soc,
ser. 2, vol. v, p. 630, fig.
Plymouth (A.M.N.).

Cytheridse.
Cythere OBLONGA, Brady: G. aS'. Jh-mlii, Trans. Linn. Soc, vol. xxvi,
p. 400, fig.

Plymouth (a.m.n.).

Cythere quadridentata, Baird: G. B. Brady, Trans. Linn. Soc, vol. xxvi,
p. 413, fig.

Plymouth (a.m.n.).

Cythere emaciata, Brady : G. S. Brad]/, Trans. Linn. Soc, vol. xxvi,
p. 414, fig.

Plymouth (a.m.n.).

Cythere runcinata, Baird: G. S. Brady & Nor ma n, Trans. Dublin
Soc, ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 160, fig.
Plvmouth (a.m.n.).

COPEPODA.

Calanidse.
Calanus finmarchicus (Gunnerus) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
]). 9, fig.

Plymouth, 1899, more or less common, Apr.-Aug., Oct. (p.t.c.) :
1903-4, common in summer (l.ii.g.).

Paracalanidae.

Paracalanus parvus (Claus) : G. 0. Sai-s, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,

p. 17, fig.

Plymouth, 1888-9, in great abundance except from Sept.-Mar.,
when it appeared absent (G.C.B.): 1899: Mar.-Apr., fairly plentiful;
June, very common ; July-Aug., more or less rare ; Sept.-Oct.,
more or less abundant ; Nov., rare ; Dec, more or less rare (p.t.c.) :
1903, abundant all the year, except during May and July; 1904,
abundant Jan.-Jirfv (l.ii.g.).

I

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 235

[Copepoda— conW.]

Pseudocalanidse.
PsEUDOCALANUS ELONGATUS, Boeck : G. 0. Sai's, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
p. 20, fig.

One of the commonest species, in immense numbers during
autumn, winter, and spring, 1888-9 (g.c.b.) : 1899, Feb.-Apr.,
more or less i"are (p.t.c.) : very common in 1903 and 1904 (l.h.g.).

Centropagidse.

Centropages typicus, Krijyer: (1. U. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
p. 75, fig.

Plymouth, 1888-9, abundant except during winter, when it is
scarce (g.c.b.): 1899, Jan.-Feb., rare; ]\Iar.-Apr., in fair numbers;
May, rare; June, more or less rare; Juiy-Aug., rare; Sept., very
rare (p.t.c.): 1903, Jan.-Feb. ; Apr.-June ; Aug.-Oct. ; 1904, Jan.-
July (l.h.g.).
IsiAS CLAVIPES, Boeck : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv, p. 79, fig.

Plymouth, June 1899 (p.t.c): Dec. 1902; Sept. 1903; Mar.-
June 1904 (l.h.g.). Temoridse.

Temora longicornis (0. F. Miiller) : G. 0. >Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
p. 97, fig.

Plymouth, 1888-9 ; scarce during winter months, becoming more
common in Apr., and reaching maximum abundance Aug.-Sept.
(g.c.b.): 1899; Mar., somewhat rare; Apr., very common; June-
Oct., rare (p.t.c): 1903-4, rare in winter (l.h.g.).

Pontellidse.
Anomalocera Patersoni, Templeton : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol.
iv, p. 139, fig.

Plymouth, 1888-9, abundant in autumn and late summer, absent
in winter (g.c.b.) : 1904, July (l.h.g.).
Labidocera Wollastoni, Lubbock : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
p. 142, fif.

Plymouth; 1902, Dec; 1904, Apr.-July (l.h.g.): near the Eddy-
stone, in small numbers, Aug. and Oct., 1888 (g.c.b.).

Parapontellidse.

Parapontella brevicornis (Lubbock) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol.
iv, p. 145, fig.

Near Eddystone, few specs. Sept. 1888 ; tiie Cattewater, Mar.
1889 (G.CB.): Plymouth, rare, Mar.-Apr. 1899 (p.t.c): 1903, May-
July; 1904, Feb.-May, July; rare in winter (l h.g.).

Acartiidae.
ACARTIA Clausi, Giesbrecht : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
p. 150, fig.

Plymouth, 1899; Jan., rare; Mar.-Apr., more or less abundant;
June-Aug., common ; Sept.-Oct., in fair numbers ; Nov.-Dec, very
rare (p.t.c): 1903, except during Mar. and May; 1904, Jan.-July
(l.h.g.).

AcARTiA longiremis (Lilljeborg) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iv,
p. 149, fig.

One of the most common species at all seasons, 1888-9 (g.c.b.).

NEW .SEKIES. — VIII.. VII. NO. 2. Q

236 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Copepoda — contd.]
Longipediidae.
LONGIPEDIA ScoTTl: U. 0. Sors, Ciusi. Norway, vol. v, p. 11, lig.
Plymouth (G.C.B.).

Ectinosomidae,
MiCROSETELLA NOKVEGICA (Boeck) { = Ediiwsoma atlanticum, Brady]:
G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. v, p. 44, fig.
Plymouth ; Jau.-Peb. 1899, rare (p.t.c).

Harpacticidae.
Euterpe acutifrons (Dana): C. Clans, Frei lebend. Copep., p. 110,
fig. (as E. gracilis).

Plymouth, very abundant late winter and spring, 1889 (g.c.b.) :
1899; Jan. -Feb., rare; Mar.-May, somewhat rare; July, fairly
plentiful ; Aug., rare ; Sept., fairly common ; Oct.-Dec., more or
less rare (p.t.c).
Thalestris mysis, Clans : G. S. Brady, Monogr. Free & Semip. Copep.
Brit. Is., vol. ii, p. 121, fig.
The Cattewater (g.c.b.).

Cyclopidse.
OiTHONA plumifera, Baird : W. Gicsbrccht, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xi.x,
pp. 548, etc., fig.

Very abundant Feb.-Apr., practically absent during late summer
and autumn, 1888-9 (g.c.b.).
OlTHONA SIMILIS, Claus. : W. Giesbreclit, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xix,
pp. 548, etc., fig.

Plymouth, 1899, more or less common tliroughout the year (p.t.c).

Cyclopina littokalis (Brady) : G. S. Bnuhj, Monogr. Free & Semip.
Copep. Brit. Is., vol. i, p. 92, fig.

Plymouth, few specs. Apr. 1889 (g.c.b.).

Corycseidae.

CoRYCiEUS ANGLICUS, Lubbock : G. S. Bradi/, ]\Ionogr. Free & Semip.
Copep. Brit. Is., vol. iii, p. 34, fig.
Plymouth (g.c.b., p.t.c, t.v.h.).

CORYC^US VENUSTUS, Dana: W. Gicsbrccht, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol.
xix, pp. 674, etc., fig.

Plymouth, Nov. 1890, very rare (p.t.c).

Oncea xMEDITERRANEA (Claus): /('. Gicshrcrlif, Fauna Flora Neapel,
vol. xix, pp. 602, etc., fig.
Plymouth (g.c.b., p.t.c).
Oncvea minuta: if. Giesbreclit, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xix, pp. 003,
etc., fig.

Plymouth, 1899, very rare Jan.-Mar., rare in Dec. (p.t.c).

ONCiEA SUBTILIS: W. Giesbvecld, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xix, pp. 603,
etc., fig.

Plymouth, ]\Iar. 1899, very rare (p.t.c).

Saccopsis Alleni: E. Brmnpt, C. R. Acad. Paris, vol. cxxiv, p. 1404, fig.
Plymouth, on Pohjcrrrvs ai'raiifi(fci's (e.b.).

TLYMOUTII MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 237

[ Cirripedia : Leptostraca ]

CIRRIPEDIA.

Balanidse.
Balanus balanoides (Liiinseus) : G. Darwin, Monogr. Cirrip., Balanidae,
p. 267, tig.

Eocks between tide-marks in the Sound, etc. (s.P.).

/-Balanus crenatus, Bruguiere : C. Darunn, Monogr. Cirrip., Balanidie,
p. 261, fig.

Common in dredgings from the Sound, etc., on stones and shells
(s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A.).

^^Balanus perforatus, Bruguiere: C. Darvin, INIonogr. Cirrip., Balanidre,
p. 271,%.

Abundant on rocks between tide-marks; rocks under the Labora-
tory ; Millbay Dock, on piles ; Drake's I. ; etc. (s.P.).
Balanus spongicola, Brown : C. Darwin, Monogr. Cirrip., Balanid«,
p. 225, fig.

Kame-Eddystone Gds., attached to the upper valve of Pccten
opercvlaris ; etc. (s.P.).

Pyrgoma anglicum, Leach : C. Darivin, Monogr. Cirrip., Balanidae,
p. 360, fig.

Common on Caryophyllia Smithi, 15-35 fms. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Chthamalus STELLATUS (Poli) : C. Darv:in, Monogr. Cirrip., Balanida?,
p. 455, fig.

Eocks between tide-marks in the Sound, etc. (s.P.).
Breeding: Jan.-Mar.; Aug.-Sept. (w.g.).

Verrucidae.
Verruca Stroemia (0. F. Miiller): C. Darwin, Monogr. Cirrip.,
BalanidcX', p. 518, fig.

Common on shells, stones, etc., L.W.-35 fms.; the Sound; Stoke
Pt. Gds. ; Eame-Eddystone Gds. ; etc. (s.P.).

Lepadidse.
/Lepas anatifera, Linna'us: C. Darwin, Monogr. Cirrip., Lepadidse,
p. 73, fig.

Occasionally on drift-wood, etc. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Scalpellum vulgare. Leach : C. Darvnn, Monogr. Cirrip., Lepadid*,
p. 222, fig.

Common on Halccium, Antennularia, Aglaophenia, etc., 15-35
fms. (R.A.T., S.P.). Peltogastridse.

Sacculina Carcini, Thompson : I\ J. r. Bnuden, Eecli. Faune Litt.
Belgique, Crust. [Bruxelles, 1861], p. 154, fig.
Common, parasitic on Carcinus mcenas (s.P.).
Breeding : May-Sept. (w.G.).

LEPTOSTRACA.

Nebalia bipes (Fabricius) : G. G. Sars, Fauna Norvegife, vol. i, p. 9, fig.

Common under stones, at low tide; Drake's L; Mt. Edgcuml)e;
Eum B.,ctc. rR.A.T.,S.P.): Asia Sh., not uncommon (s.P.): ]\Iilll)ay Ch.,
occasionally ; Whitsand B. (A.J.S.). Often abundant on the bait
in lobster pots (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Apr.-July (w.G.).

238 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Amphipoda ]

AMPHIPODA.

Hyperiidae.

Hyperia galba (]\rontajj;u) : G. 0. N?/-x, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 7, fig.
Occasionally taken on liliizostoiiHi, Chri/sdorc, etc. (r.A.T.).

Parathemisto oblivia (Kroyer) : G'. 0. Scos, Crust. Norwav, vol. i.
p. 10, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (g.c.b.).

Orchestiidae.

Talitrus locusta (Pallas) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 23, fig.
Abundant on all sandy shores, under weed and stones, at the
high-water mark of spring tides (s.P.).

Orchestia littorea (Montagu) : G. 0. Sars:, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 24, fig.

Abundant everywhere at high water, under weed and stones,
and in rock crevices (s.P.).

Orchestia mediterranea, A. Costa: C. S. Bate (C- Westwood, Brit.
Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. i, p. 31, fig.
Drake's I. ; Knap Buoy (t.v.h.).

Lysianassidse.

Lysianax [ = Lysianassa] Cost/E (Milne-Edwards) : G. 0. Sars, Crust.
Norwvay, vol. i, p. 42, fig.
Mill bay Ch. (t.v.h.i).

Orchomene Batei, G. 0. Sars: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 60, fig.

Millbay Ch. ; Queen's Gd. (t.v.h.).

Orchomenella nana (Kroyer) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 69,
fig. (as 0. cillata).
Plymouth (t.y.h.^).

Tkyphosa Sarsi (Bonnier): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 76, fig.
(as 2\ nana).

Queen's Gd. (t.v.h. ^).

Pontoporeiidae.

Bathyporeia pelagica, Spence J^ate : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 129, fig.

Whitsand B. (t.v.h.^).

Ampeliscidae.

Ampelisca spinipes, Boeck: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 173, fig.
Cawsand B., occasionally ; Mewstone Gds., not uncommon on
fine and medium gravel (r.a.t.).
Eemales bearing ova: Mar. (r.a.t.),

Ampelisca tenuicornis, Lilljeborg : G. 0. Sai-s, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 167, fig.

Duke Pik. (a.o.w.^): near the Mewstone (a.m.n.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEBEATE FAUNA. 239

[ Amphipoda— con/ff^. ]

Amphilochidse.
Amphilochus manudens, Speiice Bate: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 217, fig.

Inside Drake's I. (a.m.n., a.o.w.).
Amphilochoides odontonyx (Boeck): G. 0. ^ars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 221, fig.

Plymouth, 8 fms., 1887 (a.m.n.).

Stenotlioidae.
Stenothoe marina (Spence Bate) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 236, fig.

Duke Kk. (a.o.w.i).
Stenothoe monoculoides (Montagu) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 240, fig.

Plymouth (a.M.N.).
Stenothoe setosa: A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. vi,
p. 39, fig.

Plymouth, single spec, the type (a.m.n.).

Leucothoidse.
Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildgaard) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 283, fig.

Millbay Ch., moderately common (t.v.h., r.a.t.) : Cattewater;
Queen's Gd.; Duke Ek. (t.v.h.): Yealm E., not uncommon (k.a.t.).

CEdiceridae.
Monogulodes carinatus, Spence Bate: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 295, fig.

Plymouth (a.m.n.).

Iphimediidse.
Iphlmedia minuta, G. 0. Sars: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 379, fig.

Queen's Gd. (t.v.h., k.a.t.) : Yealm E. (r.a.t.).
Iphimedia obesa, Eathke : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 377, fig.
Plymouth Hr. (t.v.h.^).

Calliopiidae.
Apherusa bispinosa (Spence Bate) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 439, fig.

Inside Drake's I. (a.m.n. & A.o.w.i) : Yealm Estuary, very rare
(R.A.T.).

Atylidae.
Paratylus Swammerdami (Milne-Edwards): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway,
vol. i, p. 463, fig.

Cawsand B., not uncommon (r.a.t.) : Eum B. (T.V.H.) : Whitsand
B. (R.A.T.).

Females carrying ova : Jan., May (r.a.t.) : Dec. (t.v.h.).
Dexamine spinosa (Montagu): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 475, fig.

Inside Drake's I. (a.m.n. & a.o.w.) : Millbay ; Cawsand B. ; Knap
Buoy; Whitsand B. (t.v.h.): Y'"ealm Estuary, occasionally (r.a.t.).

Breeding : July (r.a.t.).

240 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Amphipoda— coiW. ]

Gammaridae.
Gammarus campylops, Le;ich : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vul. i,
p. 500, fig.

Queen's Gd.^ ; Duke Ilk} (t.v.h.).

Gammarus locusta, Linnaeus : G. 0. >Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 499, fig.

Very conmion under stones and among weeds, etc., between tide-
marks to 5-G fms. (R.A.T.).

Females with ova: Jan. (r.a.t.) : Dec. (r.a.t., t.v.h.).

Gammarus marinus. Leach: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 497, fig.
Common on the shore (r.a.t., s.p.) : Hum B. (r.a.t.): Drake's L;
the Breakwater; Mt. Edgcumbe ; AVembury B. (t.v.h.): lieny Eks,
(r.a.t.) : Queen's Gd., occasionally (r.a.t., t.v.h., s.p.).
Females wdth ova : Feb. (r.a.t.) : Mar. (t.v.h.).
Melita gladiosa, Spence Bate: T. R. E. Stcbhing, Ann. j\Lig. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 4, vol. v, p. 77, fig.

Queen's Gd., occasionally (r.a.t.).

Melita obtusata (Montagu) : A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 6, vol. iv, p. 132.

Not uncommon, Millbay Ch. and Pit ; Queen's Gd. ; Cawsand B.
(r.a.t.) : Duke Ek. (t.v.h.).

Females with ova : Jan., Apr., Dec. (r.a.t.).
Melita palmata (Montagu) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 508, lig.
Occasionally between tide-marks in the Sound (r.a.t.).

M.ERA GROSSIMANA (jMontagu) : C. S. Bate c& Westwood, Hist. Brit.
Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. i, p. 350, fig. ( ^ only) ; C. Heller, Denkschr.
Akad. "VVien, vol. xvi, p. 41, fig. ( $ only, as M. Donatoi).

Occasionally taken between tide-marks (r.a.t.) : Bovisand Cove
(j.T.c).
MyERA Othonis (Milue-Edwards) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 518, fig.

]\Iillbay Ch., occasionally (r.a.t.): Duke Rk.^; Yealm V.} (t.v.h.).

MiERA semiserrata (Speuce Bate) : C. S. Bate & Westwood, Hist. Brit.
Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. i, p. 401, fig. (as Megamcera).
Nr. Eddystone, 30 fms. (A.O.W.).

Gammarella brevigaudata (H. Milne-Edwards): T. B. B. Stehhing,
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. xiv, p. 13, fig.
Plymouth (a.o.w.^).

Cheirocratus Sundewalli (liathkc) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 524, fig.

The Sound, occasionally (r a.t.).

Photidae.
AORA gracilis (Spence Bate): G. O. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 545, fig.
The Sound, occasionally (r.a.t.).

Gammaropsis erythrophthalma (Lilljeborg): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway,
vol. i, p. 558, fig.
Millbay Ch. (t.v.h.).

PLYMOUTH MAIiLXE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA. 241

[ Amphipoda — contd, ]

Podoceridae.
Amphithoe rubeicata (Montagu) ; G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 579, fig.

Not uncommon in dredgings from the Sound and occasionally
between tide-marks (r.a.t.) : Yealm E. (t.v.h.).
Female carrying young : Feb. (r.a.t.).

IscHYROCERUS MINUTUS, Lilljeborg : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 589, fig.

Duke Ek., 5 fnis. (t.v.h.^).

PODOCERUS FALCATUS (Montagu): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 594, fig.

Abundant on the buoys, hulks, and piles in the Sound, Millbay
Docks, and Cattewater (r.a.t.).

A female with ova : Nov. (t.v.h.).

Erichthonius abditus (Templeton) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 602, fig.

Millbay Ch. ; Queen's Gd. ; common (r.a.t., s.p.) : Yealm K.
(r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Corophiidse.

CoROPHiUM BoNELLii, Milnc-Edwards : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 616, fig.

Millbay 1; Queen's Gd.i; Duke Rk.i (t.v.h.).

CoROPHiUM CRASSICORNE, Bruzelius : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 615, fig.

Millbay Cii. and Pit, very common ; Queen's Gd., not uncommon
(r.a.t., t.v.h.) : West Ch. : Yealm E. (t.v.h.).
Females with ova : Nov. (t.v.h.).
Unciola crenatipalma (Spence Bate) : C. S. Bate & Westivood, Hist.
Brit. Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. i, pp. 488, 489, fig. ( c? as Dryopc
irrorata, 5 as D. crenatipahnata).

Plentiful among stones and shells on muddy bottom, 20 fms.
(W.G., A.M.N. ).

Cheluridse.

Chelura terebrans, Philippi : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i,
p. 627, fig.

Common in drift-wood (r.a.t., s.p.).

Caprellidse.
Phtisica marina. Slabber : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 646, fig.
Inside Drake's I. (e.j.a.) : N. of the Breakwater (t.v.h.^) : Whit-
sand B., single spec, (j.t.c.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Protella phasma (Montagu): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 649, fig.
Moderately common, Millbay Ch.; Asia Sh.; Drake's I.; Queen's
Gd. ; Yealm E. (r.a.t.) : 4 miles W. of the Eddystone, single spec.
(r.a.t.).

Females with ova : Mar. -Apr. (r.a.t.).
Pariambus typicus (Kroyer) : G. 0. Sai^s, Crust. Norway ,vol. i, p. 655, fig.
Cawsand B.; -Jennycliff 1). (t.v.h.).

242 rLYMOLTH MARINE IN VEKTEBKATE FAUNA.

[Aphipoda— c-y/j^/. : Isopoda ]
CAi'liELLA ACANTHIFEKA, Lcacli : (/. 0. Sars, Crust. Nurway, vol. i, p. GG6,

H-

Milll)ay Ch.; Eddystone, on sponge (t.v.h.).

Caprella .equilibka, Say : G. 0. Sai-s, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 663, fig.

The Sound, common on buoys and hulks (k.a.t.).

Capkella linearis (LinucTus) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. i, p. 657,

fig.

Drake's L, at low water (j.T.c.^): Millbay Ch.^; Queen's Gd.^;

Yealm E.^ (t.v.ii.).
Caprella tuberculata, Guerin : C. S. Bate A Wcstwood, Hist. Brit.
Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. ii, p. 68, fig.
Occasionally in the Sound (r.a.t.).

ISOPODA.

Apseudidse.
Apseudes Latreillei (Milne-Edwards): A. M. Norman & Stehhivg,
Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. xii, p. 82, fig.

Drake's I., common among mud at roots of corallines (w.G.) :
common under stones and in rock crevices; Jennycliff B.; Drake's J.
(S.P.).

Females carrying ripe ova in Aug. (s.P.).
Apseudes talpa (Montagu): A. M. JVoninni & Stcbbinn, Trans. Zool.
Soc, vol. xii, p. 81.

Not uncommon between tide-marks ; liuni B. ; Keny Rks. ;
Wembury B. (r.a.t.) : Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.).
Ova hatching : Feb. (r.a.t.).

Tanaidae.
Tanais tomentosus, Kroyer: G. 0. !:^ars, Crust. N(Tway, vol. ii,
p. 12, fig.

Common in crevices of the limestone of BlyniouUi Breakwater
(r.a.t.).

Anthuridse.
Anthura gracilis (Montagu): A. JI. XoDiian cIj Stchhimj, Trans. Zool.
Soc, vol. xii, p. 122, fig.

Occasional specimens in dredgings from the Sound; Asia Sh. ;
Queen's Gd. ; Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.).

Gnathiidse.
Gnatiiia maxillaris (Montagu): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii,
p. 52, fig.

Common under stones between tide-marks, and in dredgings from
the Sound (r.a.t., s.p.) : Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t.).

Females with ova: Jan.; Feb. (R.A.T.): March (s.P.): May (r.a.t.).
Hatching out: Feb. (r.a.t.).

JEgidx.
Eocinela damnoniensis, Leach : -/. C. Schicedtc & Meinert, Naturhist.
Tidsskr., ser. 3, vol. xii, p. 383, fig.

Occasional specs., 20-30 fnis. (r.a.t., s.p.).
Breeding : Feb. (r.a.t.).

TLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 243

[Isopoda— ct»«W.]

EociNELA DuMERiLi (Lucas) : J. C. Schicedte dc Meinert, Natiirhist.
Tidsskr., ser. 3, voJ. xii, p. 391, fig.

Occasional specs., 20-30 fms. (r.a.t., s.p.).
Hatching out : Aug. (r.a.t.).

Cirolanidse.
CiROLANA HIRTIPES, H. Milne-Edwards : H. J. Hamcv, Danske vid.
Selsk. Skr., ser. 6, Naturvid., vol. v, p. 326, fig.
Drake's I. (a.o.w.).
CONILERA CYLINDRACEA (Montagu) : H. J. Haiiscii, Danske vid. Selsk.
Skr., ser. 6, Naturvid., vol. v, p. 358, fig.

West Entrance ; Mewstone Ledge ; occasionally (r.a.t.) : Mew-
stone Gds , not uncommon (r.a.t., s.p.): Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.p.);
Eame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Breeding : Apr. (r.a.t.) : June-Aug. (s.p.).

A dead, but fresh specimen of SnjUiiiiii canirvbi brought to the
Laboratory in Sept. 1899, contained about 400 C. ci/lindracca, of
which over 300 were living; having eaten through the wall of the
stomach of the dogfish, they were feeding on the heart and liver
(r.a.t.).

Cymothoidae.
Nerocila neapolitana: ./. C. SchkecUe & Meinert, Naturhist. Tidsskr.,
ser. 3, vol. xiii, p. 41, fig.

Single spec, 5-6 m. S. of the Mewstone (a.m.n.).
Breeding : Sept. (a.m.n.).

Dynamexe rubra. Leach : C. Sjjenee Bate tij Wcsticood, Brit. Sess.-eyed
Crust., vol. ii, p. 419, fig.

Rum B., common ; Eeny Rks., occasionally (r.a.t.).
Breeding: Feb. (r.a.t.).

Sphseromidse.
N^SA bidentata (Adams) : C. >:>pence Bate ct- Westwood, Brit. Sess.-eyed
Crust., vol. ii, p. 431, fig.

Not uncommon in empty barnacle shells, etc., between tide-marks
in the Sound (r.a.t.) : Jennycliff B., abundant in rock crevices ;
Mt. Edgcumbe, under stones ; the Breakwater ; etc. (s.P.).

SPH.^iROMA CURTUM, Leach : G. Sjjencc Bate cii Westwood, Brit. Sess.-eyed
Crust., vol. ii, p. 412, fig.
Drake's I. (a.o.w.).
Sph^eroma serratum (Fabricius) : C. Speace Bate & Westivood, Brit.
Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. ii, p. 405, fig.

Under stones ; Drake's I. ; Bum B. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Limnoriidae.
LiMNORiA LIGNORUM (Rathke): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii, p. 76, fig.
Common in drift wood, etc., in the Sound (r.a.t., s.p.).

Idotheidae.

Idotiiea baltiga (Pallas) [ = /. trieusjjidata, Desmarest] : G. 0. Sars,
Crust. Norway, vol. ii, p. 80, tig.

Queen's Gd., on Antennularia'^ ; Cawsand 15., on Zodera ; Whit-
sand B. (s.p.).

244 PLYMOUTH .MAi;iNE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

I Isopoda— coH^/.]

Idothea emarginata (Fabricius) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii,
p. 85, fig.

Jenuycliff B., common (t.v.h., r.a.t.) : Whitsand B. (s.P.).
Idothea linearis (Liumtms): C. Spcncc Bate & West ivood, Bv'it. Sess.-
eyed Crust., vol. ii, p. 388, fig.

Coinmon among Zodcra ; Drake's I.; JennyclilT ]j.; Cawsand B.;
AVhitsand B. ; Yealm Est. (s.P.).

Idothea neglecta: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii, p. 84, fig.

Drake's I., abundant under stones at low-water; JennycliU' B.,
Mt. Edgcumbe, etc., occasionally (s.P.).
Breeding : Mar. (s.P.).

Idothea prism atica (Eisso) : C. S. Bate & Wcstv:ood, Brit. Sess.-eyed
Crust., p. 391, fig. (as /. imrallela).

Cawsand B., single spec, inhabiting a dead Zosteva stem (w.G.).
Idothea pelagica. Leach: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii, p. 81, fig.

Single spec, between Breakwater Lt. and Queen's Gd. Buoy (j.t.c).

Carrying embryos : Dec. (j.t.c).

Arcturidse,

Astacilla longicornis (Sowerby) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii,
p. 88, fig.

Not uncommon clinging to the spines of Echinus esculent u s ;
Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Mewstone Ledge, occasionally (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Apr. (r.a.t.).
Astacilla intermedia (Goodsir) : C. Spcncc Bate & Westicood, Brit.
Sess.-eyed Crust., vol. ii, p. 371, fig. (as Aretnrns).
The Breakwater (w.h.) : Queen's Gd. (t.v.il).

Janiridae.

Janira maculosa. Leach : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vul. ii, p. 99, fig.

Common in Millbay Pit and between tide-marks at Mt. Edg-
cumbe and Drake's I.; less common in dredgings from Queen's
Gd. and Asia Sh. and on the Eeny Kks. ; occasionally outside in
33 fms. (r.a.t.).

Females carrying ova : Mar.-Apr. (r.a.t.).

3mRi\ marina (Fabricius) [ = /. alhifrons, Leach]: G. 0. Sars, Crust.
Norway, vol. ii, ]). 104, fig.

Bocks under the Hoe: Qhieen's Gd. ; the I'rcakwater: not un-
common (r.a.t.) : Hollow liock B., common under stones at low-
water (s.P.) : lieny I'ks., common (r.a.t.).
P>reeding : Feb. (r.a.t.).

Munnidse.

Munna Kroyeri, Goodsir: G. 0. Scrs, Crust. Norway, vol. ii, p. 10'.', fig.
Millbay Ch.; Asia Sh. ; Queen's Gd. ; Yealm B. ; not uncommon

(R.A.T.).

Ligiidse.

Ligia oceanica (Linnfeus): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii, p. 156, fig.

Common in rock-crevices, etc., above hij^h-water mark in the
Sound (r.a.t., s.P.): abundant on quay walls in the Cattcwater
(s.P.) : the Breakwater (a.o.w., s.P.).

Breeding : June (a.j.s.).

PLYMOUTH MAIUNE IXVKRTEBUATE FAUNA. 245

[Isopoda — contd.: Cumacea: Stomapoda: Schizopoda ]

Bopyridse.
BoPYRUS Squillarum, Latreille: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii,
p. 197, lig.

Not uncommon on Lcandcr scrratus; Cawsand B. ; etc. (k.A.T.).
Gyge Galathe.e: C. S. Bate & Wcsticood, Brit. Sess.-eyed Crust.,
p. 225, fig.

Eura B., on Galathea squamifera (k.a.T.).

Cryptoniscides.
Cryptothir Balani, Spence Bate : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. ii,
p. 236, fig.

Eocks below the Hoe, not uncommon among barnacles (r.a.t.).

CUMACEA.
Cumidae.
Iphinoe trispixosa (Croodsir): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iii, p. 14, fig.
Abundant 1892 (w.G.) : Wliitsand B., May 1902, May 1903(a.m.n.).

Leuconidas.
EUDORELLA TRUNCATULA, Spence Bate: G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway,
vol. iii, p. 37, fig.

Caw.sand B. ; 1889; Apr. 1900; June 1903 (a.m.n.).

Diastylidse.

DiASTYLis Bradyi: A. 31. Xor//;'/», Ann.Mag.Nat.Hist.,Rer. 5, vol. iii, p. 59.
Cawsand B., Apr. 1900; Whitsand B., May 1902, and common
in May 1903 (a.m.n.).

Diastylis laevis [? = i>. rostrata (Goodsir)]: A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist., ser. 5, vol. iii, p. 60.

Sept. 1889 ; 3 m. N.E. of the Eddystone, Sept. 1900 (a.m.n.).
Diastylis Eathkei (Kroyer): G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway, vol. iii, p. 44, fig.
Whitsand B. (a.j.s.).

Pseudocumidse.
Pseudocuma cercaria (P. J. V. Beneden) : G. 0. Sars, Crust. Norway,
vol. iii, p. 74, fig.

Cawsand B., Apr. 1900 ; Whitsand B., May 1902, and abundant
in May 1903 (a.m.n.).

STOMAPODA.

Squilla Desmaresti, Eisso: 7\ Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 354, fig.

Single spec, near New Ground Buoy, Dec. 1900 (r.a.t.).
The larva; are occasionally met with in townettings (e.j.a.).

SCHIZOPODA.

Euphausiidae.
Nyctiphanes Couchi : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 346, fig.
(as T/ii/sa/toj)0(Ia).

Occasionally taken in the townets, in the Sound and outside
(r.a.t.) : single spec, 3 m. oft' Eame Hd., June 1898 (e.w.l.h.) :
Cawsand B. and 2' m. S. of Breakwater, few immature specs.,
Feb. 1899 (w.i.b.).

246 rLVMOlTII MARINE INVRIJTKr.i; ATE FAUNA.

[ Schizopoda — could.}
Siiiellinae.
SiRlELLA ARMATA (Miliie-Edwards) : G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid.,
vol. i, p. 96, fi<,^

June 1893, Drake's 1. (w.g.) : Cawsaiul !>., few specs. Apr., May,
June, Sept. 1899, Apr. 1900; Jennycliff W., few specs. Sept. and
Oct. 1899; Whitsand B., abundant Aug. 1898 and Oct. 1899;
Bovisand B., Oct. 1899; Yealm Est., Oct. 1899 and Apr. 1900

(W.I.R.).

Breeding: Apr. ; Oct. (w.i.b., k.a.t.).
SiRlELLA Clausi : G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid., vol. i, p. 81, fig.

Cawsand B., few specs. Apr. June, and Sept. ; Jennycliff B., few
specs., June and Oct.; Yealm Est., several specs, among decaying
Zodera, Oct.; 2.\ m. S. of the Breakwater Fort, single spec, at
surface, Feb. ; 1899 (w.i.b.).
SiRlELLA JALTENSis, Czerniavsky : G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid.,
vol. i, p. 89, fig. (as *S'. crassipcs).

At the surface 1 n). S. of the Breakwater Fort, Sept. 1892 ;
Drake's 1., abundant among weeds Juno 1893 (w.c;.): Bum B.,
single spec. Feb. 1901 (r.a.t.) : Jennycliil' B. (f.w.g. & w.lb.).

Breeding : June (w.g., r.a.t.).

G-astrosaccinae.
Gastrosaccus sanctus (v. Beneden): G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid.,
vol. i, p. 56, fig.

AVhitsand B., Aug. 1892 (w.g.): July 1898 (e.w.l.il): Oct. 1899,
abundant (w.LB.): May 1903, abundant (s.F.): Cawsand B., im-
mature spec, in Apr. ; Yealm Est., single spec, among decaying
Zostera, Oct. ; 1899 (w.lb.).

Breeding : July (e.w.l.h.) : Aug. (w.g.) : Oct. (w.lb., r.a.t.).
Hatching out : May (r.a.t.).

Haplostylus Normani: G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid., vol. i, p. 65,
fig. (as Gastrosaccus).

At the surface about 1 in. S. of the Breakwater Fort, Sept. 1892
(w.g.) : Mewstone 'Amphioxus ' Gd., Oct. 1899 (w.lb.).

Breeding: Sept. (w.g.): Oct. (w.lb.).
Anchl\LIS AGTLis : G. 0. ,SV/r.<, Arch. Math. Naturvid.. vol. i, p. 70, fig.

PlymouU), 1889: 1890 (a.M.n.) : Aug. 1898, 3 m. S. of Bame
Hd. (e.w.l.h. & W.LB.): 1899; Cawsand B., few specs, in Feb.;
Mewstone 'Anqihiojiis' CJd., several in Oct.; W. of Hand Deeps,
33 fnis., sand, abundant in -lune; about 4 m. S. of the Breakwater,
abundant in Mar. ; etc. (w.lb.) : Whitsand B., single spec. May
1903 (S.P.).

Breeding: June (w.lb., r.a.t.).

Heteromysinse,
Heteromysis FORMOSA, S. I. Smith : A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., ser. 6, vol. x, p. 158, fig.

Millbay Ch. ; Queen's Gd. ; Cawsand B. ; Yealm W. : off Stoke
Pt. ; a few at a time (w.g.): Jan. 1899, Millbay Ch. ; Feb. 1900,
Asia Sh. (w.lb.).

Breeding : Oct.-Nov. (w.g.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 247

[ Schizopoda — contd.'[

Leptomysinse,

Erythrops elegans (G. 0. Sars) : G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. i, p. 33, fig. (as E. pygmcca).

3 m. S.W. of Rame Hd., Aug. 1898 '(e.w.l.h. & w.l.B.) : Kame-
Eddystone Gds.; Mewstone 'Amphioxns' Gds. ; etc.; several specs.
Mar., June, Oct. and Nov. 1899 (w.i.b.).

Breeding : June ; Oct. (w.i.b.) : Oct., late embryos only (w.g.).

Mysidopsis angusta, G. 0. Sars : G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. ii, p. 27, fig.

Occasionally in 15-33 frns. (r.a.t.) : W. of Hand Deeps, June;
4 ni. S.S.AV. of Piame Hd., and Mewstone 'AmpJiioxus' Gd., Oct. ;
1 m. ^y. of Stoke Pt., Nov. ; 1899 (w.i.b.).

Breeding : June-Oct. (w.l.B., R.A.T.).

Mysidopsis gibbosa, G. 0. Sars : G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. ii, p. 23, fig.

Caw.sand B., several occasions 1893-4 (w.g.): Aug. 1898, few
specs. 3 m. S.W. of Eame Hd. (e.w.l.h. & w.i.b.) : 1899; single spec,
Cawsand B. in Apr. ; three specs. W. of Hand Deeps in June
(w.i.b.): Apr. 1902, Jennycliff B. (f.w.g.).

Breeding: Apr. (w.i.b., r.a.t.): July (w.g.).

Leptomysis gracilis (G. 0. Sars): G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. iii, p. 31, fig.

Aug. 1896, 3 ni. W. by S. of 'the Eddystone (w.i.b.) : Aug. 1898,
3 m. S.W. of Bame Hd. (e.w.l.h. & w.i.b.): June 1899, fairly
abundant W. of Hand Deeps (w.i.b.).

Breeding: June (w.lb., r.a.t.).

Leptomysis lingvura (G. 0. Sars) : G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. iii, p. 35, fig.

Cawsand B. ; liame Hd., on the shore among Favns ; Whitsand
B.; 4 m. S.S.AV. of Eame Hd.; W. of Hand Deeps, on sand: Yealni
Est., among decaying Zostera; several specs., Fel».-Oct. 1899 (w.l.B.).

Breeding: Apr. ; Oct. (wm.b., r.a.t.).

Leptomysis mediterranea : G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid., vol. i,
p. 37, fig.

Cawsand B. : common June 1893 (w.g.): Aug. 1898 (e.w.l.h. &
w.i.b.): several specs. Feb., Apr., May, June, Sept. Oct. 1899
(w.i.b.). Jennycliff B. : single specs. Oct. and Dec. 1899 (w.l.B.) :
Apr. 1902, single spec, (r.a.t.^. Bovisand B.; Whitsand B.; Yealm
Est., among decaying Zostera ; Oct. 1899 (w.lb.).

Breeding: Apr. (wm.b., r.a.t.): June (w.c;.): Oct.; Dec. (w.l.B.,
K.A.T.).

Mysinse.

Hemimysis Lamorn^ (Couch): G. O.Sars, Carcinol. liidr. Norges Fauna,
Mysider, Pt. iii, p. 65, fig. (as Mysis).

Cawsand B. : July 1893 (w.g.): a doubtful spec. Apr. 1900
(w.i.b.). Drake's L, single spec, (r.a.t.).

248 rLY.MOUTII MAKINE INVEIITEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Schizopoda — contd.]

Macromysis flexuosa (Mlillei) and M. NiGiiA : K Kcchlc & Gamble,
Phil. Trans. Eoy. Soc, ser. B., vol. cxcvi, p}). 332, etc., fig.

Tof,'ether these two species include, but they do not respectively
coincide with, the Macrom^/sis Jlrxnom and M. nrrilrda of Sars and
of Norman. Both are known to occur in the Plyniouth area, but
they have only been quite lately differentiated, and consequently
their distribution has not yet been fully determined. The evidence
at pre.sent available points to the conclusion that M. flexuosa is
essentially an estuarine form, and M. nujra more strictly marine.
This is in agreement with the experience of Gamble. The Macro-
mysis which swarms about the shores of the Tamar at Saltash
(especially in the summer months) appears to be exclusively
M. flexuosa. In Plymouth Sound M. iivjra is the predominant
form ; it occurs commonly in the shallows, especially in Cawsand
Bay; but M. flcanwsa has been found in small numbers also. Both
species are known to occur in the P. Ycalm. M. nigra has been
found in AVhitsand Bay once (w.i.B.).

Macromysis inekmis (Pathke): G. 0. Sars, Carcino]. P,idr. Norses
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. iii, p. 54, fig.

Plymouth, 1889 (a.m.n.) : Sept. 1892 (w.g.): 1898: Cawsand B.,
Bigbury B. in July (w.i.B.): 1899; Cawsand B. ; Jennycliff B. ;
Bovisand B. ; Whitsand P). : Ycalm Est. among decaying Zostera
few specs., Feb.-Oct. : Apr. 1900 (w.i.B.).

Breeding : Apr. ; Oct. (w.i.B.).

ScHiSTOMYSis arenosa: G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid., vol. i, p. IG,
fig. (as 3li/sls).

Cawsand B. : 1893 (w.g.): Feb. 1899, four specs.; Apr. 1900,
single spec. (w.i.B.). Whitsand B. : 1892-3 (w.g.): 1896 (t.v.ii.) :
Oct. 1899 (W.I.B.) : May 1903, several specs. (s.P.). Bovisand B. :
Yealni Est., on sand with decaying Zostera; Oct. 1899 (w.i.B.).

Breeding : June (w.g.) : Oct. (w.i.B., r.a.t.).

SCHISTOMYSIS ORNATA (Gr. 0. Sars) : G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. iii, p. 62, fig. (as Jh/sis).

Pt. Tamar, Saltash: Mar. ;"l)ec. ; 'l899 (w.i.B.): Feb. 1901
(W.I.B. & R.A.T.). 3 ni. S.W. of llame Hd., few specs. Aug. 1898
(e.w.l.h. & W.I.B.): liame-Eddystone Gds. : Mewstone Gds. etc.;
several specs. Mar. -Nov. 1899 ( w.i.B.).

Breeding : Feb. ; Apr. ; Oct. (w.i.B., r.a.t.).
SCHISTOMYSIS Parkeri : A. M. Norman, Ann. Ma^. Nat. Hist., ser. 6,
vol. X, ]). 256, fig.

Whitsand B., 1896 (t.v.h.) : Tregantle, 1897 (e.w.l.h.).
SCHISTOMYSIS spiritus, Norniau : G. 0. Sars, Carcinol. P.idr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. iii, p. 58, fig. (as 3L/sis).

Whitsand B.: abundant July 1892 (w.G.): 1897 (E.W.L.H.): Aug.
1898, abundant (E.W.L.H. & w.LB.): May 1903 (s.P.). Cawsand B.,
single specs, in Fel». and Apr. 1899 (w.t.b.). 3 m. S.W. of Pame
Hd., Aug. 1898 (E.W.L.H. & w.i.i!.).

Breeding: Apr. (w.i.b., r.a.t.): June; July; Aug., late stages
only (w.G.). Large individuals almost disappeared by Aug., young
ones numerous (w.G.).

rLYMOUTII MAKINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 249

[ ScMzopoda — contiJ.', Macrura ]

ISTeomysis vulgaris (Thompson) : G. 0. Sars, Carciiiol. Bidr. Norges
Fauna, Mysider, Pt. iii, \). 80, fig. (as Mysis).

Laira, 1897 (e.w.l.ii.) : R. Lynlier; tidal pool opposite Saltash ;
Summer 1898 (e.w.l.h. & W.i.b.) : \\. Tamar, just above Saltash
Bridge, few specs. Mar. and Dec. 1899; Jenuyclif'f B., sintile young
spec. Sept. 1899 (w.i.b.) : Saltash, Feb. 1901 (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Feb. (r.a.t.).

Dasymysis longicornis (Milne-Edwards): G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math.
Naturvid., vol. i, p. 22, fig. (as Mi/sis).

W. of Hand Deeps, June 1899 ; 4 m. S.S.W. of Eame Hd., Oct.
1899 ; several specs, (w.i.b.).
Breeding : June ; Oct. (w.i.b.).

Macropsis Slabberi (v. Beneden) : G. 0. Sars, Arch. Math. Naturvid.,
vol. i, p. 28, fig.

Saltasli, very abundant Mar. and Dec. 1899 ; Cawsand B., single
spec. Apr. 1900 (av.I.b.): Tregantle, single spec. Dec. 1897 (e.w.l.h.):
Whitsand B., several specs. May 1903 (s.P.).

MACRURA.
Palaemonidse.

Leander serratus (Pennant): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 302, fig. (as Pala:iiwii).

More or less common everywhere among weed (r.a.t., s.p.).
Breeding: Jan.-Feb. (w.g., r.a.t.) : Mar.-Apr. (w.g., r.a.t., s.P.) :
May (w.g., r.a.t.) : June (w.g.) : Nov. (w.g., r.a.t.) : Dec. (w.g.).

Leander squilla (Linnseus): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 305, fig. (as Palmmon).

The Sound, not uncommon between tide-marks (r.a.t.).
Breeding: May (r.a.t.): July, and earlier (w.g.). Hatched out
in Aug. (r.a.t.).

PALiEMONETES VARIANS (Leach) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 309, fig. (as Palcemon).

Common in brackish water; Saltram ; Laira; etc. (r.a.t.): Erth,
E. Lynher, connnou in pools on a salt-marsh (w.l.B ) : triV)utaries
of It. Plym, very common (w.f.r.w.).

Breeding: Apr. (r.a.t.): May-June (w.g., r.a.t.): July; Aug., late
stages only (w.g.).

Pandalidae.

Pandalus Montagui, Leach : T. Be//, Hist. P>rit. Stalk-ej'ed Crust.,
}). 297, fig. (as P. aniiiiHrornls).

(Jccasionally abundant during short periods, at other times
apparently quite absent (s.P.) : Nov. 1887, large numbers in l>atten
B. (w.H.) : Feb. 1896, single spec. Cawsand B. (t.v.ii.) : Aug. 1897 ;
Sept. 1898 (E.W.L.H.): July-Aug. 1902; Aug. 1903 (s.P.).

Breeding: Jan. (w.g.): Feb. (w.g., t.v.ii., r.a.t.): Nov. (w.g.,
r.a.t.): Dec. (w.g.).

-50 rLYMOUTII MARINE INVERTEBrvATE FAUNA.

[Macrura — conUl.]

Pandalus brevirostris, Eathke: C.Hel/cr, Crust. siidl. Europa, p. 247, fig.

Coiniuou in the Sound, especially on clean coarse gravel and
clinker grounds, 5-10 fms. ; common on ' Cellaria' grounds, 15-20
fms. (R.A.T.).

Females in berry: Mar. (r.a.t., sp.): Apr. ('W.g., rat.): May-
July (r.a.t.). Zoiea stage: Mar.-June (r.g.).

Hippolytidse.
HiPPOLYTE FASCIGEKA, Gossc: A. Wullchcck, Kept. Norweg. Fisli. & Mar.
Invest., vol. i, No. 4, p. 27 (as Virhiufi).
Cawsand 15. (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Apr. (r.a.t.).
HiPPOiA'TE varians, Leach : G. Heller, Crust, siidl. Europa, p. 288, fig.
(as Virhiua).

More or less common everywhere among weed, L.W.-5 fms. ;
occasionally taken outside in 15-30 fms. (r.at.).

Breeding : Feb. (r.a.t.) : Mar. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Apr. (r.a.t.) : May-
July (W.G., R.A.T.): Aug.; Nov. (r.a.t.).
HiPPOLYTE viRiDis (Otto) : C. Hellcr, Crust, siidl. Europa, p. 286, fig.
(as Virhius).

Yealm Est., not uncommon (r.a.t.).
Breeding : J uly (r.a.t.).
Spirontocaris Cranchi (Leach) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 288, fig. (as Hijypohjtc).

Moderately common in the vSound, L.AV.-25 fms, and on the
outside grounds, 15-30 fms. (r.a.t.).

Breeding : Feb. (w.H.): Apr. (w.G., r.a.t.): May (w.g.): June; Aug.
(r.a.t.). a female spawned in a Lab. tank in Apr. (r.a.t.).

Alpheidae.
Alpheus ruber, Milne-Edwards : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 271, fig.

Single spec, Church IJeef, "Wembnry B., under a stone (r.a.t.).
Athanas nitescens (Leach): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 281, fig.

Not uncommon in rock-pools and among corallines, Fncus, etc.
(s.p.) : generally gregarious, 3-4 specs, under one stone (r.a.t.) :
Bum I*).: Mt. Edgcumbe : Wembnry B. (r.a.t., s p.) : Tinside (R.G.,
r.a.t.): Cawsand JV, occasionally between tide-marks; occasional
specs, on the outside grounds, 15-30 fms. (ra.t.).
Breeding: May(PuG.): July (s.p.): Aug. (k.at.).

Crangonidse.
Crangon Allmanni, Ivinahan : A. Wollehcvk, Eept. Norweg. Fish. & Mar.
Invest., vol. i, No. 4, ]). 21, fig.

Very rare, 15-30 fms. (li.A.T.) : ;! m. S.S.W. of Eame Hd., common
Aug. 1898 (w.i.B.)
Crangon vulgaris (Linnaus): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 256, fig.

More or less abundant everywhere on sand, L.W.-IO fms.
(r.a t., s.p.).

Breeding: Jan. -Aug. (w.g,, r.a.t.): Nov, (R.A.T.): Dec. (w.G.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 251

[ Macrura — contcf.]

Egeox fasciatus, Kisso : T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 259,
fig. (as Cra/u/on).

Pium B.; Jeniiycliff B.; Cawsand B.; sand-patch N. of Drake's I.;
not uncommon, L.W.-5 fms. (r.a.t.): West Entrance (j.t.c).

Breedinf,^ : Mar.-Apr. (r.a.t.): May (w.G.). Hatching out: Apr,
(r.a.t. ). Zoieas : May ; July-Sept. (r.g.).

Egeon sculptus : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 2G3, fig. (as
Crangon).

Occasionally, 15-30 fms. (r.a.t.).
Breeding : June (w.g.) : Aug. (r.a T.).

PONTOPHILUS SPINOSUS, Leach : T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 261, fig. (as Cranfinn).

Mewstone Gds.: 1 m. AV. of Stoke Pt. ; not uncommon on coarse

sand and medium gravel (r.a.t.) : liame-Eddystone Gds. (e.w.l H.).

Females in berry: Jan.; Mar.-Apr. (r.at.): Dec. (e.w.l.H.).

Hatching out : Apr. (r.a.t.). Zoiea stage : Apr.-May, (r.a.t., r.g.).

Cheraphilus nanus (Krciyer;: 1\ Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 268, fig. (as Cranr/on hisjnnosiis).

At the surface in the Sound, Feb. 1887 (w.H.).
Females in berry: June-July (r.a.t.). Zotea stage: June ; Aug.-
Sept. (R.G.).

Cheraphilus trispinosus (Hailstone): T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
Crust, p. 265, fig. (as Crauf/oii).

The Sound, occasionally; Yealm Est., occasionally; Whitsand B.,
common (R.A.T.): Cawsand B. (w.LB.).

Females in berry: Apr. (t.V.H.) : May-June (r.a.t.): July (W.G.) ;
Aug. (j.t.c). Hatching : May (r.a.t.). Zoa:;a stage : Apr.-May :
Sept. (r.g,).

Nikidae.
NiKA EDULis, Ptisso : T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 275, fig.

The Sound, occasionally, but rare (w.g.): Cawsand B., sometimes
moderately common; occasionally outside in 20-30 fms. (R.AT.):
Jennycliff B. (A.J.S.).

Females in berry: Feb. (s.P., A.J.S.); May (w.g.): July (r.a.t.).
Hatching: Apr. (h.a.t.). Zoa^a stage: Apr.-June: Aug.-Sept. (r.g.).
Late stages : Sept. (r.g.).

Nephropsidae.

HoMARUS vulgaris,* Milne-Edwards : 7\ Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
Crust., p. 242, fig.

Conmion among rocks, occasionally between tide-marks; Rum B,;
Wembury B.: etc. (it.A.T.) : occasionally on sand ; Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a.).

Females in berry : May-June (r.a.t.) : July (w.g., r.a.t.) : Aug.
(W.G.): Sept.-Dec. (r.a.t.). Hatching: May-June (w.g.): July
(r.a.t.). Larva-, newly hatched and first moult, very abundant at
the surface, July 1897 (w.i.b.): larva' at the surface, Aug. 1897
(e.w.l.H.).

* If tlie "law of priority" is to be rigidly followed, this species must be termed Astacus
gammarus (Linn.).

NEW SKKIES. — Vol.. \ll. N(i. 2. R

252 PLYMOUTH MAIUNE INVEHTP^HUATE FAUNA.

[ Macrura — fo«W.]
Scyllaridae.
Arctus URSUS, Dana: C. Hdhi\ Ciusl. siidl. Einopa. j). 195 (as ScjiUanis
a ret us).

Millbay Dock, single spec, Apr. 1892 (r.a.t.): off the Breakwater
Lt , single spec, in a crab-pot, Aug. 1897 (j.t.c.) : 5 m. S. of the
Eddystone, .single spec. Jan. 1900 (i;..\.t.).
Ikeeding: Mar. (s.r.).

Paliniiridae.

Palinurus vulgaris, Latreillo : 7'. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 213, fig.

Common among rocks ; the Sound ; etc. (K.A.T.).

Females in ]>erry: Apr.-May (r a.t.) : Dec. (w.n.) Hatching:
July (J.T.C). Pliyllosoma stage: Mar. (r.g.).

Galatheidse.
Galathea di.sper.sa, Spence Bate: /. Bonnier, Bull. Sci. France Belg.,
ser. 3, vol. i, p. 154, fig.

Abundant everywhere, 10-30 fms. (s.p.) : Queen's Gd., common ;
Duke Kk., common; Cawsand B., occasionally (r.a.t.) : Millljay Pit
(w.i.B., r.a.t.): Rame-Eddystone Gds. : Mewstone Gds. : etc. (w.lb.,
R.A.T., S.P.): Eddystone Gds., on all the grounds and in almost
every haul (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Mar. (w.g., r.a.t.) : May (s.p.).

Galathea intermedia, Lilljeborg: /. Bonnier, Bull. Sci. France Belg.,
ser. 3, vol. i, \^. 130, lig.

Asia Sh.; Millbay Ch.; 3 m. S.S.W. Breakwater Lt. ; 5 m. S.W.
Penlee; 1 m. S.S.W. Yealm Hd. (w.lb.): Queen's Gd.; Mewstone
Gds.; Piame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t. & W.LB.).

Breeding: Mar. (w.g., r.a.t.).

Galathea squamifera. Leach: J. Bonnier, Bull. Sci. France Belg.,
ser. 3, vol. i, p. 143, fig.

Abundant under stones on all rocky shores, L.W.-3 fms. (s.P.) :
Millbay Cli ; Queen's Gd.; Yealm E.; occasionally (r.a.t.).
Breeding: Jan.-May (r.a.t.).
Galathea strigosa (Linnaeus): J. Bonnier, Bull. Sci. France Belg.,
ser. 3, vol. i, p. 160, fig.

The Breakwater, occasionally; Mt. Edgcumbe (r.a.t., s.p.):
Drake's I. (t.v.h.): off Batten Breakwater^; off Yealm Hd., 18 fms,^

(J.T.C.).

Callianassidae.
Upogebia stellata (Montagu) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 223, fig. (as Gehi(i).

Occasional specs, between tide-marks in the Yealm and under
Mt. Edgcumbe, also in dredgings from (^hieen's Gd , and a single
spec. 5 m. AV. \ S. of Pame Hd. (r.a.t.).
Breeding: Aug. (r.a.t.).

Thaumastoclielidae.
Calocaris MACANDREiE: T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 233, fig.
Zofea stage : Aug.-Sept. (r.g.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 253

[ Macrara — contd.]

Paguridae.

EuPAGURUS Bernhardus (Linniuus): 7'. Br/l, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
Crust., p. 171, fig. (as, P<K/i(n(s).

Generally distributed on sand, gravel and stones, 3-30 fms.
(R.A.T., S.P.).

The shell inhabited by this species nsually affords lodgment for
one or more specs, of Adnmsia jw/t/pi's \^ = Sa(ifirtia parasitica\ox
else it is invested with a colony of Hfidrdctinia cchinata ; also its
apical whorls are occupied l)y the Polychtete Nereis fucnta (r.a.t.,s.p.).

Females in berry : Feb. (r.a.t.) : Apr. (w.G., r.a.t.). Zotea stage:
Mar. (R.G.).

Eupagurus cuanexsis (Thompson): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
(Jrust., p. 178, fig. (as Peigurus).

Mewstone Gds., not uncommon, generally with Snherites; Eame-
Eddystone Gds., occasionally (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., never in
large numbers, and confined to the gravel grounds in the neighbour-
hood of the Eddystone (e.j.a.) : Yealm E,, occasionally (r.a.t.).

Females in berry : Mar.-Apr. (r.a.t.).

Eupagurus Prideauxi (Leach): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 175, fig. (as Pagurns).

Moderately common, 15-30 fras. (r.a.t): Eddystone Gds., absent
on the fine sand of the 'inner' and 'outer' trawling grounds (e.j.a.).

Almost always associated with Ad<imsla jxdliata (r.a.t., S.P.) : a
spec, trawled 2 m. S.W. of Penlee had an Adcimsiei 2)ol>ji)us upon
its shell as well as the normal A. imlliritei (e.w.l.h ) : occasionally
the shell is invested with a colony of Hydraetinia eehinata in place
of the Adamsia palliata, and very rarely both are present upon the
same shell (s.P.).

Females in berry : Jan. (r.a.t.) : Mar.-July (w'.g., r.a.t.) : Sept.
(S.P.). Hatching out : Mar.-Apr. (r.a.t.) : June (s.P.) : July-Aug.
(r.a.t.). Zosea stage : Mar.-Apr. (r.g.).

Eupagurus sculptimanus (Lucas): T.Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust,,
p. 186, fig. (as Pagurus Forhcsi).

Kame-Eddystone Gds., in Siiberites (r.a t.).

Diogenes varians, Costa: C. Heller, Crust, siidl. Europa, p. 170, fig.
Whitsand B. (t.v.h.).
Breeding: July (w.G.).

Anapagurus l.eyis (Thompson): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 184, fig. (as Prig urns).

Common on the Mewstone Gds. with EiJizocmtliv.s incrustatus ;
the Sound, occasionally ; moderately common on other grounds,
15-30 fms. (r.a.t.): Eddystone Gds. (ej.a.).

Breeding: Feb. (r.a.t.): Apr. (w.G., r.a.t.): May (w.G.): July
(R.A.T.): Aug. (s.P.).

254 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Brachyura ]
BRACHYURA.

Porcellanidae.
PoKCELLANA LONGICORNIS (Liiuiaus) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
Crust., p. 193, tig.

More or less abundant on all grounds, L."\V.-30 fnis. (s.?.).
Females in Ijerry : Mar.-Apr. (w.g., k.a.t., s.p.): May (w.G., S.P.):
June (W.G., k.a.t.) : July (w.G., r.a.t., s.p.): Aug. (k.a.t.). Zotea
stage : Mar. (K.G.).
Porcellana platycheles (Pennant): T. Bell, Hist. Brit, Stalk-eyed
Crust., p. 190, fig.

Under stones on all rocky shores, L.W.-3 fms. (s.p.).
Females in berry: Mar. (r.a.t.): Apr. (^v.G., ka.t.): May (w.G.):
June-July (w.G., S.P.) : Aug. (K.A.T.). Zotea stage: Aug. (r.g.).

Dromiidse.
Dromia vulgaris, Milne-Edwards: T. Bell, Hist, Brit. Stalk- eyed Crust,
p. 3G9, fig.

Not yet observed in the I'lymoutli district, although specs, are
occasionally taken a little outside the district on the Cornish
coast (s P.).

Leucosiidae,
Ebalia Cranchi, Leach : 7'. /A//, Hist. Brit. Stalk - eyed Crust,,
p. 148, fig.

Cawsand B.^; Whitsand B.^ (t.v.h.) : Eddystone Gds., on sandy
gravel, E. of Hand Deeps (E.J. a.).
Ebalia tuberosa (Pennant): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 141, fig. (as B. Pennanti).

Millbay Ch. (t.v.h.) : not uncommon, 20-30 fms.; Mewstone
Gds. ; Panie-Eddystone Gds. ; etc. (k.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., together
with E. tuinef(irt(( (E.J. A.).

Females in berry : May-June (k.a.t,),
Ebalia tumefacta (Montagu): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p, 145, fig. (as E. Bnjeri).

Duke Kk., single spec, (t.v.ii.) : Eddystone Gds., abundant on
coarse sandy gravel AV. of the Eddystone, constantly ])resent but
less abundant on clean shell-gra^'el grounds (e.j.a.).

Inachidse.

Macropodia egyptia: a. Milne- Ediccmh, Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. i,
p. 280.

Not uncommon on weedy ground (w.G.) : very rare, 1 5-30 fms.
(r.a.t.).

Macropodia longirostris (Fabricius) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
Crust., p. 6, fig. (as Kitenor//i>rIi/>s feu7iirostris).

Queen's Gd., not uncommon ; Cawsand B., occasionally ; moder-
ately conmion outside the Sound, 15-30 fms.; Mewstone Gds.;
Piame-Eddystone Gds. ; etc. (k.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., especially
abundant where the prevailing Hydroid is Sertularclld Ga iji (E.J.A.):
Yealm P., occasionally (k.a.t.).

Breeding: Feb.-Apr. (r.a.t.) : May(w.(;.): July-Aug. (r.a.t.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 255

[ Bracliyura — confd.]

Mackopodia rostratus (LiniKi'us) : 7'. 7A//, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 2, fig. (as Stenorynclius i^lialangium).

Occasionally in dredgings from the Sound ; Cawsand B.,
moderately common ; Yealm B., not uncommon (r.a.T.).

Breeding : May (w.g.) : Aug. (r.a.t.).
AcHiEUS Cranchi, Leach: T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 10, fig.

Queen's Gd. ; Duke Ptk. (t.v.h.) : Yealm \\. (r.a.t.).

Breeding : Aug. (R.A.T.) : Sept. (S.P.).
Inachus dorsettensis (Pennant): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 13, fig.

Queen's Gd., occasionally ; common in 15-30 fms. outside the
Sound; Mewstone Gds.; Eame-Eddystone Gds.; etc. (r.a.t.): Eddy-
stone Gds. (e.J.A.) : Yealm li, not uncommon (r.a.t.).

Females in berry : Jan.-Apr. (r.a.t.) : June-Aug. (r.a.t., s.p.) :
Sept. (s.p.). Zotea stage : Mar. ; July (r.g.).
Inachus dorynchus, Leach: T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 16, fig.

Millbay Ch., occasionally ; Duke Ek. ; Yealm \l., not uncommon
(r.a.t.).

Female in berry : Mar. (r.a.t.).

Maiidse.
Maia squinado (Herbst): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 39, fig.
Moderately common in the Sound, among rocks and on sand with
Zosterc, etc., 5 fms. (r.a.t.) : common amongst the rocks outside
Plymouth Sound (e.j.a.) : Caw.sand B., not uncommon (r.a.t., s.p.) :
Mewstone 'Echinoderm' Gd.; Eame-Eddystone Gds.; occasionally
(r.a.t.): Eddystone Gds. (E.J. A.): Yealm E., moderately common (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Mar.-Apr. (r.a.t.) : May (S.P.) : June (R.A.T.).
Pisa biaculeata (Montagu): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 27, fig. (as F. Gihhsi).

Mewstone Ledge, single spec. ; Yealm E., single spec, (r.a.t.).
Breeding : May (r.a.t.).
Hyas araxeus (Linnffius): T. Bell, Wist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 31, fig.

Yealm E. (e.j.a., e.w.l.h., r.a.t., t.v.h.): the Mewstone (t.v.h.).
Hyas coarctatus. Leach: T. Brll, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Ci'ust., p. 35, fig
Occasionally in 15-30 fms.; Eame-Eddystone Gds.; etc. (r.a.t)
Eddystone Gds., occasionally on the fine sand grounds (e.j.a.)
Cawsand B., fairly common (a.j.s.).

Breeding: Mar.-Apr.; July (r.a.t.) : Aug. (w.G.): Dec. (r.a.t.).

Parthenopidae.
EuRYNOME aspera (Pennant): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 4H, fig.

Fairly common, 10-30 fms., on gravel and sand (s.p.) : Millbay
Ch. and Pit, not uncommon ; Asia Sh. ; Queen's Gd. (r.a.t., s.p.) :
Duke Ek. ; the Breakwater, between tide-marks^; Yealm E.,
occasionally in dredgings (r.a.t.) : Eame-Eddystone Gds. ; Mew-
stone 'Amphio.rufi' Gd. (R.A.T., s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.) :
Stoke Pt. (ids. (s.p.).

Breeding: Jan.-Feb. (w.g., it.A.T.) : Mar.-Apr. (W.G. , R.A.T., S.P.)
May-June (s.p.) : July (r.a.t., s.p.) : Sept. (s.P.).

256 I'LYMOUTII MARINE INVEllTEBEATE FAUNA.

[Brachyura — conld. ]

Cancridse.
Cancer pagurus, Linnams: T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 59, fig.

Small specs, common among stones between tide-marks on all

rocky shores ; large specs, seldom seen above low-water mark (s.P.).

Breeding: Jan. (r.a.t.) : Feb., onwards (w.G.) : Mar.-July ; Dec.

(R.A.T.).

PiRLMELA DENTICULATA (Montagu) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 72, fig.

Drake's I., not uncommon on clean coarse siielly gravel (w.G.,
S.P.): Hum B. (R.A.T.): Yealm E. (T.v.ii.): Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Breeding : Feb. ; Apr. (r a.t.).

Xantho hydrophilus (Herbst) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 54, fig. (as X. riimlosa).

Between tide-marks on all rocky shores, not uncommon under
stones, etc. (s.P.).

Breeding : Mar. (r.a.t.) : May (w.G., S.P.) : June (w.G.).

Xantho incisus, Leach : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust., p. 51, fig.
(as X.Jiorida).

Common between tide-marks on all rocky shores (s.P.).
Breeding : Apr. (r.a.t.) : May (w.G.) : June (w.G., r.a.t.).

Eriphidse.

PiLUMNUS HIRTELLUS (Linujcus) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 68, fig.

Not uncommon on all rocky shores under stones and in crevices,
L.W.-5 fnis. (s.P.) : common in f.epraliafoliacea; Mewstone Ledge ;
etc. (r.a.t., s.i'.).

Breeding: Mar. (s.P.): Apr. (w.G., R.A.T.): May-June (w.G.):
July (S.P.).

Portunidae.
PoRTUNUS ARCUATUS, Leach : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 97, fig.

Queen's Gd. (r.a.t.) : Cawsand B. (t.v.ii., e.w.l.h.) : Yealm R., not
uncommon (r.a.t., t.v.h.) : Laira (t.v.h.).

Breeding: Mar. (w.G.): Apr.-May (w.G., r.a.t.).

PoRTUNUS corrugatus (Pennant): Z i^W/, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust,
p. 94, fig.

Queen's Gd. ; Millbay Ch. ; not unconnnon (r.a.t.) : Drake's I.,
between tide-marks (t.v.h.^): Cawsand B. (e.w.l.h.): Bovisand B.
(J.T.G.).

Breeding : June ; Aug. (r.a.t.).

PoRTUNUS depurator (Linmeus): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,

p. 101, fig. . .

Generally distributed, 3-30 fms., sometimes in large numbers
(r.a.t., s.P.).

Breeding: Jan.-Feb. (r.a.t.): Mar.-Apr. (w.G., r.a.t., s.p.): May-
July (w.G., r.a.t.): Aug. (W.G.): Sept.; Nov. (r.a.t.).

PLYMOUTH MAKINE INVERTEBKATE FAUNA. 257

[ Brachyura — contcL]

PoRTUNUS HOLSATUS, Fabricius : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stiilk-eyed Crust.,
p. 109, fig.

Queen's Gd. : Cawsaiid B. ; Whitsand B. (e.w.l.h.).
Breeding : Mar. (w.g.).
PoRTUNUS MARMOREUS, Leach : r. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 105, tig.

Breeding : May (w.g.).

PORTUNUS RUBER (Linnicus) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 90, fig.

Common among stones on all rocky shores, between tide-niarks-
5 fms. (s.P.).

Females in berry : Feb.-May ; July (r.a.t.). Zoa^as hatching
out : Mar.-May (R.A.T.).
PORTUNUS PUSILLUS, Leach : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,

p. 112, fig.

Not uncommon in dredgings from the Sound and outside grounds,
15-30 fms.; Queen's Gd., occasionally; Drake's 1., occasionally
between tide-marks; Yealm B., not uncommon (r.a.t.): Eddystone
Gds., on gravel, and occasionally on sand grounds adjoining the
gravel (e.j.a.).

Females in berry : Feb.-May (R.A.T.). Hatching out : Mar. ;
June (r.a.t.).
Bathynectes longipes (Kisso) : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 361, fig. (as Portunus).

Near the Eddystone, on fine sand (w.g.).
Carcinus m^nas (Pennant): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 76, fig.

Common everywhere, tide-niarks-3 fms. (r.a.t., s.p.): Millbay
Ch., occasionally (r.a.t.).

Females in berry: Jan.-Apr. (w.G., R.A.T.): May -Aug. (w.g.):
Nov. (r.a.t.) : Dec. (w.G., r.a.t.). Zotea stage : Feb.-Apr. (r.g.) :
July (r.a.t.).
PoRTUMNUS biguttatus (Risso) : C. Heller, Crust, siidl. Europa, p. 94
(as ridtyonicltus nasutus).

Drake's I., occasional specs, burrowing in fine gravel (w.G., R.A.T.).

Females in 1)erry : Aug. (r.a.t.). Megalops stnge : Aug. (r.g.).
POLYBIUS Henslowi, Leacli : T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,

p. 116, fig. , , . ,. J

The ^ is not uncommon at tnnes on the shrnnp-trawlmg grounds,

particularly in Cawsand Jl, also swimming near the surface at the

deeper water stations, but the $ has only twice been recorded at

the Laboratory (s.p.).

Females in berry : Sept. (r.a.t., w.i.b.). Hatched : Sept. (r.a.t.).

Corystidae.
Atelecyglus septemdentatus (Montagu): T. Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-
eyed Crust., p. 153, fig. (as A. hetcroclon).

Moderately common 15-30 fms. (r.a.t.): local but conmum
where it occurs, generally on muddy gravel (s.P.) : Kame-Eddy-

258 rLYMOUTII MAKINE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA.

[ Brachyura — coahl. -. Pycnogonida ]
stone Gds. ; Mewstoiie Gds. (k.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds., abundant
on muddy j^'ravel about 1 ni. E. of the Eddystone, on gravelly sand
about 3 m. W. of the Eddystone, and occasionally at other stations

(E.J.A.).

Breeding: Apr. -July (r.a.t.).

CORYSTES CASSIYELAUNUS (Pennant) : T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed
Crust., p. 159, fig.

Generally distributed on clean fine sand, 15-30 fms. ; Cawsand
B., not uncommon (k.a.t., s.p.).

Females in berry: May -July; Nov. (r.a.t.). Zotea stage: Feb.-
May (r.g.). Megalops stage : Apr. (r.g.).

Pinnotheridse.

Pinnotheres pisum (Linnieus): T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 121, fig.

Mewstone 'Amjjhioxus' Gd}, in the mantle-cavity of Cardium
norvcfjinim and of Ghjcimcris (w.G. & R.A.T.).
Breeding: July-Aug. (r.a.t.).

Ocypodidse.
Gonoplax rhomboides (Linnieus): T. Bdl, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crust.,
p. 130, fig. (as G. angulata).

Cawsand B., rare; Jennycliff B.^ (s.P.) : occasionally in 15-30
fms. ; liame-Eddystone Gds. ; Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddy-
stone Gds. (e.j.a.,^ S.P.).

Hatched out in June (r.a.t.).

PYCNOGONIDA.

Pycnogonidse.
Pycnogonum littorale (Strcem): G. 0. Skis, Zool. Norsku Nordhavs-
Exped., Pycnog., p. 7, fig.

Yealm E.; 13reakwater (x.v.H.).

Phoxichilidse.
Phoxichilus spinosus (Montagu): F. P. C. Hock, Arch. Zool. expt.,

vol. ix, p. 518, fig. I

Queen's Gd., occasionally (r.a.t.) : Millbay Pit, several specs. ; *

Yealm E. (t.v.ii.).

Phoxichilidiidse.
0^ Anaplodagtylus petiolatus (Kroyer): G. 0. Sars, Zoo]. Norske
Xordhavs-Exped., Pycnog., p. 25, fig.
Asia Sh. (a.m.n., s.p.).

Pallenidae.
Pallene brevirostris, Johnston : B. B. C. Hoeh, Arch. Zool. expt.,
vol. ix, p. 511, fig.
Asia Sh. (s.P.).

Nymphonidae.

Nymphon GALLICU.m : B. B. C. Hod,, Arch. Zool. expt., vol. ix, p. 501, fig.
Occasionally Ijetween tide-marks in the Sound and in 2-5 fms.
in Cawsand II (r.a.t.).

Males carrying ova in Feb. (r.a.t.).

rLYMOUTH MAKINE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA. 259

[Pycnogonida — conhl.: Bryozoa ]

Nymphon geacile, Leach : P. P. C. Hoek, Arch. Zool. expt., vol. ix,
p. 498, fig.

Duke Ek., rare ; Yeahn E. (t.v.h.).

A male was observed carrying ova in May (r.a.t.).

Nymphon rubrum, Hodge: G. 0. Sars, Zool. Norske Nordhavs-Exped.,
Pycnog., p. 58, fig.
Asia Sli, (a.m.n.^).

Ammotheidae.

Ammothea echinata (Hodge): P. P. C. Hock, Arch, Zool. expt., vol. ix,
p. 508, fig.

Not uncommon, jNlillbay Ch. and Pit, Asia Sh., Queen's Gd.,
Yealm E., Eum B., Duke Ek., etc. (r.a.t.).

Breeding, Aug. (w.G.).

BRYOZOA.

Aeteidse.
Aetea anguina (Linnaeus): T. Rincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 4, fig.
Queen's Grd., occasionally on Algse ; common on rocky ground
S. of the Breakwater (r.a.t.).

Aetea recta, Hincks : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 6, fig.

Not uncommon on shells, etc., 20-35 fms. ; Mewstone Gds. ;
Eame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.).

Eucrateidae.
EucRATEA chelata (Linuieus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 14, fig.

On a hulk near the Breakwater (r.a.t.) : between Eame Hd. and
the Eddystone, on Boicerhankia (e.j.a.).

Cellulariidas.

SCRUPOCELLARIA REPTANS (Linnaeus): 2\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 52, fig.

Plymouth (s.F.H.).

SCRUPOCELLARIA .SCRUPEA, Busk : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 50, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).

SCRUPOCELLARIA SCRUPOSA (Linnteus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 45, fig.

Common S. of the Breakwater, 20-35 1ms. ; Mewstone Gds. ;
Eame-Eddystone Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone
Gds., plentiful on the fine sand and gravels, generally attached to
Polycli;ete tubes or to Ccllaria, rare on the shell-gravel grounds
(E.J.A.).

Caberea Boryi (Audouin): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 61,

tig.

Plymouth (s.F.H.).

260 I'LYMOUTII .MARINE INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA.

[Bryozoa— cohW.]
Bicellariidae.
BiCELLARiA CILIATA (Liiinaius) : T. Ilincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 68, tig.

Moderately common, 5-35 fms., on Cellaria and on Hydroids
(r.A.T.) : Millbiiy Pit ; Asia Sli. (r.a.t., S.P.) : Queen's Gd., not un-
common (s.P.) : Duke Kk. (e.j.a.): Mewstone Ledge, occasionally
(r.a.t.) : Kame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds., not
uncommon on various Hydroids (e.j.a., s.p.).
With ovicells : March (r.a.t.).
BUGULA avicularia (Linnitus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 75, lig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a, s.p.) ; Kame-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.).
BUGULA FLABELLATA, J. E. Gray : T. Ifincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 80, fig.

Common in dredgings from the Sound (R.A.T., S.P.): Mewstone
Ledge, moderately common (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., occasionally
(e.j.a.).

Breeding: July, Sept. (r.a.t.).
BUGULA PLUiMOSA (Pallas) : T. Hinds, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 84, fig.

Plymouth, common (s.F.H.).
BUGULA TURBINATA, Alder : T. Hi neks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 77, tig.
Moderately common in dredgings from the Sound (R.A.T., s.P.).

Flustridas.
Flustra papyracea, Ellis & Solander: T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 118, lig.

Millbay Ch., occasionally (s.P.): Queen's Gd. (r.m.p.).
Flustra (? sp.) segurifrons (Pallas) : 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 120, fig.

Millbay Ch., occasionally (r.a.t.).

Membraniporidse.
Membranipora AURITA, Hincks: T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. j\Iar. Polyzoa,
p. 159, fig.

Mewstone, 20 fms. (t.h.t.^).
Membranipora catenularia (Jameson): T. Jlinck^, Hist. Brit. j\Iar.
Polyzoa, p. 134, fig.

Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
MeiMBRANIPORA curvirostris, Hincks : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 153, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (r.m.p.).
Membranipora Dumerili (Audouin): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 156, fig.
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Membranipora Flemingi, Busk : 7\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 156, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A.).
Membranipora flustroides, Hincks: T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 151, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).

PLYMOUTH MATMXK INVEKTEBKATE FAUNA. 261

[Biyozoa—coiUcL]

Membranipora imbellis, Hincks : 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 160, fig.

Plymouth, a doubtful fragment (s.f.h.).

Membranipora Lacroixi, Audouin: T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 129, fig.

Plymouth (r.m.p.).

MExMBRANIPORA lineata (Liuiicbus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar, Polyzoa,
p. 143, fig.

Cawsand B. (t.h.t.).

Membranipora xMEMBkanacea (Linuieus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 140, fig

Generally distributed, ou Laminar ia, etc. (R.A.T., s.P.).
Membranipora pilosa (Linnaeus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 137, fig.

Common everywhere on i^/tcws, etc., between tide-marks (r.a.t.,s.p.).

Membranipora Eosselii (Audouin): T. Hinckfi, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 166, fig.

Queen's Gd. ; Cawsand B. ; Mewstone, 20 fms. (s.f.h.).

Microporidse.
MiCROPORA coriacea (Esper): 7\ Jlincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 174, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).

Cellariidse.
Cellaria fistulosa (Linna'us): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. j\Iar. Polyzoa,
p. 106, fig.

Common with C. sinuosa, especially on fine sand grounds, 15-30
fms. (e.j.a.).

Cellaria salicornioides, Lamouroux : 2\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 112, fig. (as C. Jo/nisoni).
Eddystone Gds. (E.J. A.).
Cellaria sinuosa (Hassall) : 1\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 109, fig.

Common with C. fistulosa, especially on fine sand grounds 15-30
fms. (e.j.a.).

Tubicellariidse.

Lagenipora socialis, Hincks : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 235, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).

Cribrilinidae.

Ceibrilina figularis (Johnston) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. ^Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 196, fig.

Mewstone ' Echinoderm ' Gd. (r.a.t.) ; Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A.).
With ovicells: Apr. (r.a.t.).

Cribrilina punctata (Hassall): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 190, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).

262 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEIJTEBRATE FAUNA

[ Brjozoa— co/(/f^ J

Cribrilina radiata (Moll): T. Hinds, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 185, fig.

Mewstoiie Ledge, very coinmon (s.F.n.) : liame-Eddystone Gds.,

on Pedcn maximus (R.A.T.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Membraniporella nitida (Johnston): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.

Polyzoa, }t. 200, fig.

Common on Lcpralia fuliacca (s.F.II.) : Mewstone, 20 I'ms. (T.ii.T.).

Microporellidse.
MiCROPORELLA CILIATA (Pallas) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 206, fig.

Mewstone, 20 fms., ydA\ personata (s.f.h.): Eame-Eddystone Gds.,
occasionally, on Peden maximus (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
MiCROPORELLA LAIPRESSA (Audouin): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 214, fig.

Common on red sea-weeds (s.f.h.).
MiCROPORELLA Malusii (Audouin): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 211, tig.

Mewstone Ledge, very common (s.f.h.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

MiCROPORELLA VIOLACEA (Johnston): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 216, fig.

Mewstone Ledge (s.f.h.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Escharidse.
Lepralia foliacea (Ellis & Solander): 7\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 300, fig.

Millbay Pit, occasionally: Queen's Gd., not uncommon: Mewstone
Ledge, abundant; more or less common on all the outside grounds,
10-30 fms. (S.P.).
Lepralia Pallasiana (Moll): 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. JNIar. Polyzoa,
p. 297, fig.

Yealm 11., 1^ fms. (t.h.t.^): Yealm Sand-bank, between tide-
marks (R.M.P.).
Lepralia pertusa (h^sper) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 305, fig.

Yealm K.i ; Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Umbonula verrucosa (Esper) : 7\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 317, fig.

Drake's L, on rocks, between tide-marks (r.a.t., e.j.a.): WemburyB.
(E.J.A.).

Chorizopora Brongniarti (Audouin): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 224, fig.

Kame-Eddystone Gds., on Fecten mctximus (r.a.T.) : Eddystone
Gds. (e.j.a.).
PORELLA concinna (liusk) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 323, fig.

Mewstone, 20 fms. (s.F.H.^) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Escharoides quincuncialis (Norman) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 339, fig.

Plymouth, single spec, Apr. 1889 (s.f.h.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 263

[Bryozoa — condL]

Smittia cheilostoma (Mauzoni) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,

p. 349, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Smittia Landsborovii (Johnston): 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 341, fig.

Mewstone Ledge (s.f.h.).

Smittia trispinosa (Johnston): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 353, fig.

Mewstone Ledge, excessively common (s.F.ii.) : Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a.).

Phylactella collaris (Norman) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 358, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

MucRONELLA cocciNEA (Abildgaard) : 2\ Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Poly-
zoa, p. 371, fig.

Plymouth, very common (s.f.h.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Mucronella Peachi (Johnston) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 360, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Mucronella variolosa (Johnston) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. IMar. Polyzoa,
p. 36(3, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Mucronella ventricosa (Hassall) : 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mai':^
Polyzoa, p. 363, fig.

Mewstone ' Pxhinoderm ' Gd. ; Pame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.) :
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Palmicellaria Skenei (Ellis & Solander) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 379, fig.
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Ehynchozoon bispinosum (Johnston): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 385, fig. (as Wiynchopora).
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

HiPPOTiiOA DiSTANS, Macgillivray : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 293, fig. (as H.flagcUvin).
Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.il).

HiPPOTHOA DIVARICATA, Lamouroux : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 288, fig.

Queen's Gds., 4 fms. (t.h.t.^): Mewstone 'Echinoderm' Gd. ;
Paime-Eddystone Gds., on Pecten maximus (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds.
(e.j.a.).

Schizoporella armata (Hincks) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. M;ir. Polyzoa,
p. 258, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.^).

Schizoporella auriculata (Hassall) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. ]\Iar.
l'(.]yz():i, p. 260, fig.

Kddy stone Gds. (r.j.a.).

264 PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[BTyozosL—coiitd.]
SciiizopORELLA Cecilii (Au(louiii): 7'. llinrl-x. Hist. lUil. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 269, fig.

Eddystone, 20 fms. (s.f.h.).
ScHizoPOKELLA CRISTATA, Hiiicks : T. Hincloi, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 254, fig.

Mewstone Ledge, two small colonies in dead Fectcn shell (s.f.h.).

SCHIZOPORELLA HYALINA (LinniGus) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 271. fig.

Millbay Ch. (t.h.t.) : Plyniontli, common ; Yealm Sand-bank,
abundant on Algic (r.m.p.).
SCHIZOPORELLA JoHNBTONT, Quelcli ; T. Iliiirks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 246, fig. (as S. siNqylc^c).
Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).
SCHIZOPORELLA LINEARIS (Hassall) : T. Hiucls, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 247, fig.

Plymouth, very common (s.F.ii.): Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.): Eddy-
stone Gds. (E.J.A.).
SCHIZOPORELLA SPINIFERA (Johnston) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 241, fig.
Plymouth (s.F.ii.).
SCHIZOPORELLA UNICORNIS (Johuston) : T. Hincks, Hist. I'rir. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 238, fig.

Mewstone, 25 fms. (s.f.h.).
SCHIZOTHECA FISSA (Busk) : 1'. Hlncks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 284, fig.
Eddystone Gd. (e.j.a.).

Celleporidae.

Cellepora avicularis, Hincks: T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 406, fig.

Mewstone, 20 fms. (t.h.t.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Cellepora Costazii, Audouin : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. I'olyzoa,
p. 411, fig.

Cawsand B. (r.m.p.).
Cellepora dichotoma, Hincks : 7'. Hinrks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 403, fig.

Eddystone, 20-30 fms. (s.f.h.).

Cellepora pumicosa, Linnteus : 7'. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 399, fig.

Common at most outside stations (r.m.p.).

Cellepora ramulosa, Linnceus : 7\ Hinclcs, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 401, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.) : Bame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) :
Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.p.).

Crisiidae.

Crisia aculeata, Hassall: S. F. Harmcr, Quart. Jouvn. Micr. Sci., .ser. 2,
vol. xx.xii., p. 132, fig.

Xot unconunon, 4-5 fms., on red seaweeds, stones, and sponges
(s.f.h., r.a.t.).

Ovicells: Apr., May (s.f.h., ii.a.t.).

rLY.MOUTII .MAUINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 265

[ Bryozoa — cont/'.]

Crisia cornuta, (LiuiULnis): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa, p. 419,
fig. [excl., var. (jeniculata, = C. geniculata].

Fairly common, mostly on red seaweeds (s.F.ii.) : Queen's Gd. ;
Mewstone Ledge ; Kame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.T.).
Ovicells : commonest Apr.-May (s.F.n.).

Crisia denticulata (Lamarck) : >S'. F. Harmer, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,
ser. 2, vol. xxxii., p. 129, fig.

Plymouth, seldom found (s.f.h.): Queen's Gd., not uncommon;
Duke Ptk., occasionally common (r.a.t.).

Crisia eburnea (Linmeus): S. F. Harmer, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,
ser. 2, vol. xxxii., p. 131, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., r.a.t.) : common, almost always on red
weeds or Seriidaria (s.f.h.).

Ovicells: Feb.-May (s.f.h., r.a.t.) ; commonest, Mar.-Apr. (s.f.h.).

Crisia geniculata: If. Milne Edivards, Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., ser. 2,
vol. ix, p. 197, fig.
Pare (r.a.t.).

Crisia ramosa : *S'. F. Ilanncr, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., ser. 2, vol. xxxii,,
p. 134, fig.

Plymouth, 4-30 tins., the commonest species; generally on stones,
but also on shells, red seaweeds, Cdlaria, sponges, etc. ; grows most
luxuriantly in 4-6 fms. (s.f.h.): Queen's Gd., occasionally (R.A.T.):
Eddystone Gds. (E.J. A.).

Breeding: Feb. (r.a.t.): Apr.-Aug., maximum in May-June
(s.f.h.).

Diastoporidae.

Diastopora obelia, Johnston : T. Jlind's, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 462, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Diastopora patina (Lamarck) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 458, fig.

Common on shells, etc., 15-35 fms. (r.a.t.) : Mewstone Ledge,
fairly common (S.F.H.) : Pame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone
Gds. (e.j.a.).

Diastopora sarniensis, Norman : 7'. Rim-U, Hist. Ik-it. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 463, fig.

Common on shells, stones, etc., 15-35 fms. (r..-\.t.): Pame-
Eddystone Gds. (R.A.T.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Diastopora suborbicularis : T. Hinch^, Hist. Brit. Mar. I'olyzoa,
p. 464, fig.

Mewstone Ledge (s.f.h.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Tubuliporidae.
TuBUUPORA liliacea (Pallas) : S. F. Hanncr, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,
ser. 2, vol. xli, p. 90, fig.

Duke lik., very occasionally; not uncommon on shells, stones,
Hydroids, etc., S. of the Breakwater, 15-30 fms.; Pame-Eddystone
Gds (R.A.T.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

'2QG PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Bryozoa— co?i<r?.]
TUBULIPORA I'liALANGEA, Coucli : >S'. /'. Hariiic)', Quart. Jouni. Micr. Sci.,
ser. 2, vol. xli, p. 94, tig.

riyinoutli, common, 3-15 fms. (s.F.H.).

TUBULIPORA PLUMOSA, W. Thompson : S. F. Harmer, Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., ser. 2, vol. xli, p. 105, tig.

Plymouth district, abundant on Cystoseira granulata and on
Saccof/iiza hiilbusa (S.F.II.).

Stomatopora GRANULATA, Milne-Edwards : T. Hinchs, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 425, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Stomatopoka Joiinstoni, Heller: T. ffincks, Wisi. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 430. tig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Stomatopora major, Johnston : T. ffijick^, Hist, Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 427, tig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Lichenoporidse.

Lichenopora iiispida (Fleming) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 473, fig.

Common on all grounds 15-30 fms. (e.j.a.).

Alcyonidiidae.

Alcyonidium (iKLATiNOSUM (LiniKCUs) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. ]\Iar.
Polyzoa, p. 491, fig.

In dredgings from the Sound, Mewstoue Ledge, and S. of the
Breakwater to 35 fms. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Millbay Ch. ; Asia Sh. ;
abundant (A.J.S., s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Alcyonidium hirsutum (Fleming) : T. Hinrk.'^, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 493, fig.

Cawsand B. (t.h.t.^).
Alcyonidium mytili, Dalyell : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 498, fig.

Plymouth (s.F.H.).

Alcyonidium parasiticum (Fleming) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar.
Polyzoa, p. 502, fig.

Plymouth, on Serhdaria cupressina (s.F.H.).

Flustrellidse.
Flustrella hispida (Fabricius): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 506, fig.

Very abundant everywhere between tide-marks, on Fucus, etc.
(r.m.p.).

Breeding: early Feb.-mid. July; spermatozoa more abundant
Feb.-Mar. ; ova, Mar.-May ; larva?, Apr.-July (r.m.p.).

Vesiculariidse.

Amatiiia lendigera (Linnieus): T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 516, fig.

Penlee-Rame Gds., common on Halidrys (r.m.p.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUXA. 267

[ Bryozoa — conld.'. Amphineura ]

BowERBANKiA CAUDATA (Hiiicks) : T. HincLs, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 521, fig.

The Cattevvater (t.h.t.).
BowERBANKiA IMHRICATA (Adaiiis) : T. Hiiiclcs, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 510, tig.

Millbay Dock (T.H.T.).
Breeding : Aug. (a.j.s.).
BowERBANKiA PUSTULOSA (Ellis & Solaiider) : 7\ Rincks, Hist. Brit.
Mar. Polyzoa, p. 522, fig.

Plymouth, very common (s.f.ii.): Duke Pk. (t.ii.t.).

Cylindroeciidae.
Cylindrcecium dilatatum (Hincks) : T. Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,
p. 536, fig.

Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

Hypophorellidse.
Hypopuorella expansa, Ehlers: ./. Joycux-Laffnie, Arch. Zool. expt.,
ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 152, fig. (as Drhtaia rhcrioptcri).

Not uncommon on the tuljes of Clicctoiitenis variopedatus (s.F.H.).

Triticellidae.
Triticella Boecki : G. 0. >:>ars, Forhandl. vid.-Selsk. Christiania, vol.
1873, p. 397, fig.

Rame-Eddystone Gds., on a spec, of Gonopla-': rliomhoUks (r.a.t.^).

^ Pedicillinidae.

Pedicillina cernua (Pallas) : T. Hincks, Hist. Biit. Mar. Polyzoa,

p. 565, fig.

Not uncommon, L.W.-35 fms. ; Tinside ; Asia Sh. ; Drake's T. ;

Queen's Gd. ; Duke lik. ; Wembury B. ; Itame-Eddystone Gds., on

Hydroids, Cellaria, Alga?, etc. (r.a.t.) : Millbay Dock (t.h.t.) :

Penlee-Rame Gds., on Bov-erhankia imbricata (r.m.p.) : Eddystone

Gds. (E.J.A.).
Pedicillina gracilis, Sars: 2\ Hiiiclcs, Hist. Brit. Mar. Polyzoa,

p. 570, fig.

From 5 m. S. of the Mewstoue, 27 fms. (t.h.t.).

AMPHINEURA.

Neomeniidse.
Rhopalomenia AglaophenI/E (Kovalevsky & Marion): G. Prmot, Axch.
Zool. expt., ser. 2, vol. ix, p. 720, fig. (as Proncomcnia).

Common on Aglaophcnia uiyrioijhijUuin, generally coiled around
the base of the stem of the Hydroid (s.P., e.j.a.).

Myzomenia banyulen.sis : G. Fruvot, Arch. Zool. expt., ser. 2, vol. ix,
p. 715, fig. (as Dondcrsia).

Occasionally on Lnfoea dumosa (r.a.t., S.P., E.J.A.).
Gonads ripe : Aug. (r.a.t.).

NEW ^ERIE.«!. — vol.. VII, NO. 2. S

268 ri.YMOUTII MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[Amphineura — condJ . : Prosobranchiata ]
Ischnochitonidae.
Oallociiiton l.evis (Montagu) : -/. G'. Jrffnys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 226, fig. (as Chiton).

The Sound, under stones at low tide (s.P.).
Craspedocitilus cinereus (Linnoius) : E. Forbes & Hanleij, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 402, fig. (as Chiton).

The Sound, under stones at low tide ; Yealm Ii., abundant on
the sand-bank (s.P.).
Craspedochilus onyx (Spengler) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 407, fig. (as Chiton asellns).

Abundant, 15-30 fms., especially on muddy gravel (s.P.).

Acanthochitidse.
Acakthochites fascicularis (Linnaeus): E. Forbes & Hanleij, Hist.
Brit. Moll., vol. ii, p. 393, fig. (as Chiton).

Rocks under the Hoe, moderately common among barnacles;
Millbay Ch..; Mewstone Ledge ^; Yealm E., occasionally in dredg-
ings (r.a.t.) : Blackstone Rks., Wembury B., abundant ; Yealm
Sand-bank (s.p.).

PROSOBRANCHIATA.

Patellidse.

Patella yulgata, Linmeus : -/. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 236, fig.

More or less abundant everywhere on rocks between tide-
marks (r.a.t.) : Mt. Edgeumbe, very large specs, (a.j.s.).
Helcion pellucida (Linnseus): /. G. Jcff'reys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 242. fig.

On stems of Lamina ria, common everywhere, especially Eeny
Piks. and the Bridge (r.a.t.).

Acmseidae.
AcMiEA VIRGINEA (Miiller): E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. ii,
p. 437.

More or less common under stones on all rocky shores, L.W.-
5 fms., gregarious; Drake's I., large specs. (s.P.): moderately
common in dredgings from the Yealm (r.a.t.).

Fissurellidse.
Emarginula conica, Schumacher : E. Forbes & Hanlcy, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 479 (as E. rnsnt).
Not uncommon, 10-30 fnus. (s.P.).
Emarginula fissura (Linnams): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 477, fig. (as E. reticvkita and E. Mulkri).

Millbay Ch. ; Queen's Gd. (s.P.): the Breakwater, between tide-
marks (r.a.t.) : Mewstone Ledge ; occasional specs, on the outside
grounds in 15-30 fms. (it.A.T., s.P.) : Eddystone (Ids., constantly
present, but seldom numerous, on all grounds where shells are
plentiful (E.J.A.).

rLYMOUTir MAKIXE IXVERTEBUATK FAUNA. 269

[ Prosobranchiata — contiJ.'\

FissuRELLA GE.ECA (Liniui3us) : E. Forhes & Hanky, Hist. lirit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 469, tig. (as F. rcticidata).

Occasional specs, on all rocky stations, L.W.-l 0 f ms. (s.P.) :
occasionally between tide-marks ; the Breakwater ; IJcny iJks. ;
the Mewstone ; Church lieef, Wembury B. ; not nnconimon in
dredgings from the Yealm E. (r.a.t.).

Trochidae.

EUMARGARITA GRCENLANDICA (Chemnitz): E. Forhcs tC- Hanlcij, Hist.
Brit. JNIoll., vol. ii, p. 528, fig. (as Trochus undulatus).

A single specimen, possibly merely an empty shell, 3 m. S.W.
Penlee Pt. (r.a.t.).
GiBBULA CINERARIA (Llnnanis): E. Forbes tl; Hanky, Hist, lirit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 516, fig. (as Troclius).

Abundant nearly everywhere, between tide-marks-10 fms., under
stones, on Zodrra, Fucus, etc. (s.P.).
Gibbula magus (Linnreus): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii, p. 305,
fig. (as Troehns).

Uncommon at Plymouth, occurring only on coarse shell-sand or
gravel; Queen's Gd. ; between the Knap and Panther lUioys, four
very large specs. (s.P.) : Millbay ' shell-gravel ' Gd. ; Mewstone
' Ainphioxus' Gd. (r.a.t.).
Gibbula tumida (Montagu) : E. Forhcs c5 Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 513, fig. (as Trochus).

Occasional specs, from the Pame-Eddystone, Eddystone, Stoke
Pt., and other outside grounds (s.P.).
Gibbula umbilicata (Montagu): E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 519, fig. (as Trochus).

Common at most stations, but not so abundant as G. cineraria,
and occurs at a rather in"gher level, H.W.-3 fms. (s.P.).
MoNODONTA CRASSA (Moutfort) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 317, fig. (as Trochus lineatus).

The distribution of this species at Plymouth appears to be a very
liu)ited one, but it is met with in some numbers upon restricted
areas of the rocks, at and above high-water mark, at tbose stations
where it occurs ; N.E. Drake's T. ; Blackstone Kks., Wembury B. ;
Yealm Sand-bank (s.P.).
Callfostoma granulatum (Born): E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 499, fig. (as Troelms).

Moderately common on sandy gravel, 20-30 fms. (s.P.) : Mew-
stone 'Echinoderm' Gd., common (r.a.t.): Pkldystone Gds., on gravel
with sand or muddy sand (e.-T.a.).
Calliostoma striatum (Linn;vus): E. Forbes clj Hanky, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol ii, p. 508, fig. (as Trochus).

Occasionally; Caw.sand B. ; Jennycliff B. ; Yealm Est., common
on Zostera (r.a.t.).
Calliostoma zizvpiiinus (I^innnMis): E. Forhes tC- Hanley, Hist. I'rit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 491, tig. (as Trochus).

Common under stones and in crevices on all rocky shores at low
water; a dwarf var. is not uncommon in the deeper water of the
outside grounds (s.P.): Yealm P., a characteristic var. is common
on the sand-bank (r.a.t.).

270 PLYMOUTH MAIIINE IXVEItTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Prosobranchiata — conl<K]
Turbinidae.
Phasianella pullus (Liiinanis): i^'. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 538, fig.

More or less coininon everywiiere on Algte and Zostera, L.W.-
10 fnis. ; common among weed growing on ships'-bottoms, buoys,
etc. (s.P.): Queen's Gd.; Jennycliff B.; Cawsand B.; etc. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Littorinidse.
Lacuna divaricata (Fabricius) : E. Furhes tC- Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
^ vol. iii, p. 62, fig. (as L. vincta).

Common on Fucus-covered rocks near low-water mark (s.P.) :
rocks below the Hoe, large specs, moderately common : smaller
specs, connnon on the Zodera in Jennyclilf B., Cawsand B., and
Yealm Est.; 1 m. S. of the Mewstone, very occasionally (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Feb.-Apr. (r.a.t.).

Lacuna pallidula (da Costa) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 56, fig.

Not uncommon on Fncus-co\evQ(\. rocks under the Hoe (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Feb. (r.a.t.).

Lacuna parva (da Costa): E, Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. ]\Ioll., vol. iii,
p. 58, fig. (as L. 2)i(teoIus).
Cawsand B. (r.a.t., S.P.).
Littorina littorea (Linnajiis): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 368, fig.

Not uncommon between tide-marks on most shores, but seldom
in any quantity ; this form occurs at a lower zone than L. ruclis
(s.P.): St. John's Lake, abundant; Yealm K., common (a.j.s.).
Breeding : Feb. (w.g.).
Littorina neritoides (Linna;us): /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 361, fig.

Abundant on rocks above high-water mark (s.P.).
Littorina obtusata (Linn?eus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 356, fig.

Abundant everywhere on Fucks, Zostera, etc. (s.r.).
Breeding : Feb. ("W.G.) : Mar. (s.P.).

Littorina rudis (Maton): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 364, fig.

Very abundant on all rocky shores near high-water mark (s.P.).

Bissoiidae.
RiSSOlA PARVA (da Costa) : E. Forbes cO Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. iii,
p. 98, fig.

Moderately common in the Sound l)etween tide-marks; occasion-
ally in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Asia Sh., etc. (r.a.t.).
Alvania cancellata (da Costa) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 80, fig. (a*^ Jiissoa crennhitn).
Dead shells only (k.a.t.).
Alvania reticulata (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, pp. 82 and 84, fig. (as Rissoa cakithvs and R. Beanii).
Dead shells only (h.a.t.)

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 271

[ Prosobranchiata — co)itd.]

Manzonia costata (J. Adams) : U. Forbes & Hanky, Hist, Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 92, fig. (as Rissoa).

Drake's I. ; Millbay Pit ; occasionally (r.a.t.).

Zippora membranacea (J. Adams): E. Forbes (& Hanlry, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. iii, p. 109, fig. (as Rissoa labiosa).

Common on Zostera (s.P.) : Cawsand B., very common ; Yealm
Est., moderately common (r.a.t.).

Onoba striata (J. Adams): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 94, fig. (as Rissoa).

Connuon on all rocky shores, gregarious under stones, particularly
where there is a certain amount of silt, L.W.-IO fms. (s.P.).

Ceratia proxima, Alder : E. Forbes <£■ Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. iii,
p. 127, fig. (as Rissoa).
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Hyala vitrea (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. iii,
p. 125, fig. (as Rissoa).
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Cingula semistriata (Montagu): E. Forbes tC- Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 117, fig. (as Rissoa).
Millbay Pit (r.a.t.).

Cingula trifasciata, J. Adams: E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 122, fig. (as Rissoa cingillus).

Common between tide-marks on all rocky shores, gregarious
under stones and in crevices, especially where there is a certain
amount of silt ; Yealm Sand-bank (s.P.).

Galeodixa carinata (da Costa) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 73, fig. (as Rissoa striatula).
Dead shells (r.a.t.). Assimineid^.

Paludestrina stagnalis (Baster) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 52, fig. (as Hydrobia ulvce).

Common in brackish water ; the Hamoaze ; Hooe Lake ; etc.

^ ' ' '^' Adeorbidae.

Adeorbis subcarinatus (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Heinley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 541, fig.

Itam's Clilf Pt., common on rocks at low tide, Aug. 1887 (w.ii.).

Skeneidae.
Skenea planorbis (Fabricius) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 156, fig.

Common among the roots of seaweeds, and corallines, rocks under
tlie Hoe ; Drake's I. ; etc. (r.a.t.).

Capulidae.

Capulus HUNGARICUS (Linmeus) : /. (/. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 269, fig.

Occasionally on gravel grounds, 15-35 fms., generally attached
to Pecten ojyereularis (s.P.): Mewstone Gds., occasionally on
P. opercularis (r.a.t., S.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.).

Breeding : Jan.-Mar. (w.g.).

272 PLYMOUTH MAlilNE INVEnTEBKATE FAUNA.

[ Prosobranchiata— to/(A/.]
Calyptr.EA CHlNENSIS (Liiinteus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 273, fig.

The Sound, connnon in dredgings on stony ground, attached to
stones, sliells, etc. ; Asia Sh. ; Millbay Ch. ; the Bridge ; etc. (s.P.) :
Yealni II., always present in dredgings; Cavvsand B. ; etc. (r.a.t.) :
Yealm Sand-bank, between tide-marks (s.P.).
Breeding: July (r.a.t.) : Aug.-Sept. (s.P.).

Cypraeidse.

Trivia europ.^u (Montagu): E. Forbes tt Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 495, fig. (as Cyprcm).

More or less abundant everywhere, particularly on rocky or
stony ground, L.AV.-30 fnis. ; the form occurring in deeper water is
usually small and has a smooth, fawn-coloured mantle (s.P.).

Ovula (Slmnia) patula (Pennant) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 407, fig.

Not uncommon on Alcyonium digitatum, 10-30 fms. ; Mewstone
Ledge; Stoke Pt. Gds. ; etc. (s.P.): Mewstone Ledge, on Eunicclla'^

(W.I.B.).

Spaw-n probably belonging to this species has been found in Apr.,
June- July (r.a.t.).

Erato l.evis (Donovan) : /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 400, fig.
(as Mavfiinclla).

Not uncommon on gravel grounds, 15-30 fms. (s.P.).

Naticidae.

Natica (Luxatia) Alderi, Forbes : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 224, fig.

Not imcommon on clean sand and gravel, L.W.-35 fms. (s.P.) :
Drake's 1., sand-patch at N. end, occasionally; Cawsand B., not un-
common ; Mewstone 'Echinoderni' Gd. ; Kame - Eddystone Gds.
(R.A.T., S.P.): Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.):
Yealm E., on the sand-bank opposite the Coastguard Station (r.a.t.).

Breeding : June (r.a.t.).

Natica (Luxatia) catexa (da Costa) : ./. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 220, fig.

On sandy bottoms (w.g.) : rare (s.p.).
Breeding : Apr. (w.g.).

Lamellariidse,

Lamellaria perspicua (Linnreus): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. iii, p. 355, fig. ; p. 338, fig. (as L. tentetadatn).

Not uncommon between tide-marks and in dredgings from tlie
Sound, etc. (s.P.): occasionnlly on the outside grounds, 15-30 fms.
(r.a.t., MM.b., s.p.) : Yealm P.. not uncommon (r.a.T., S.P.).
Spawn : Jan. -May (w.g.).
Velutixa l^:vigata (Pennant): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 240, fig.

Mewstone ' Echinoderm ' Gd. (r.a.t.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 273

[ Prosobranchiata — contd.]

Ceritliiidse,

BiTTiUM RETICULATUM (da Costa) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 258, fig. (as Cerifhiinn).

Not uncommon under stones on rocky shores, L.W.-IO fms. (s.P.).

Triforis perversa (Linnaeus) : K Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 195, fig. (as Cerithium adverswn).

Occasional specimens not uncommon; Eddystone Gds. ; Eame-
Eddy stone Gds. ; Mewstone Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).
Cerithiopsis tubercularis (Montagu): K Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. iii, p. 3fi5, fig.

Not uncommon in dredgings from the Sound, generally on
sponges; occasionally on the outside grounds in 15-30 fms.;
Yealm E., common on red sponge (r.a.t.).

Scalidse.
SCALA clathratula (Adams) : F. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll,
vol. iii, p. 209, fig. (as Sealaria).
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).
SCALA CLATHRUS (Linnanis) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 206, fig. (as Scalaria communis).

Rum B.,^ between tide-marks; Asia Sh.^; Yealm R.^ (r.a.t.).
ScALA TURTONI (Turton) : F. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 204, fig. (as Scalaria).
Stoke Pt. Gds> (S.P.).

Pyramidellidse.
Brachystomia ambigua (Maton & Packett): /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch.,
vol. iv, p. 124, fig. (as Odostomia pallicla).

Common on the ears of Fecten opei'cularis (r.a.t., S.P.) : on
P. maximus (r.a.t.).
TURBONILLA LACTEA (Linutcus): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 167,
fig. (as Ododomia).

Occasionally under stones, particularly where there is a certain
amount of silt, L.W.-IO fms.; Drake's I.; Jennycliff B.; etc. (s.P.):
Asia Sh. ; Wembury B. (r.a.t., s.p.).
Pyrgostelis interrupta (Totten): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 245, fig. (as Chemnitzia rufa).
Rame-Eddystone Gds., occasionally (s.P.).

Eulimidse,
EULIMA polita (Linnaeus): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 201, fig.
Not uncommon on muddy gravel, 15-35 fms. (s.P.): Mewstone
'Amplnoxus' Gd., not unconnnon ; Mewstone Ledge, occasionally;
Stoke Pt. Gds.; Rame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., S.P.): Eddystone Gds.
(E.J.A., s.P.).
EuLlMA IXCURVA (Renier) [ = E. distorta, auctt., nee Deshayes] : F. R.
Syb's, Proc. Malac. Soc, vol. v, p. 350, fig.

Common among sponges, etc. ; Millbay Pit; Asia Sli. ; Mallard
Sh. ; Yealm R. ; etc. (.s.P.).

274 PLYMOUTH .MAIMNK INVRliTEBIiATK FAUNA.

[ Frosobranchiata — contd.]
EULIMA (Leiostkaca) bilineata (Alder): K ForhesS: HanJeij, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. iii, p. 287, fig.

Occasionally; Ivame-Etklystone Gds.; Eddystone Gds.; etc. (s.P.).

Eulima (Leiostraca) glabra (da Costa): E. Forbes <(• Hanky, Hist.
Brit. Moll., vol. iii, p. 235, fig. (as E. snhnhifa).

Occasionally ; Millbay Pit ; Mewstone Gds. ; etc. (s.P.).

Csecidse.

CAECUM GLABRUM (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hcuileij, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 181, fig.

Dead shells only (r.a.t.).
CiECUM biperforatum (G. Adams): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. iii, p. 178, fig. (as C. trachea).
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Turritellidae.
Turritella communis, Lamarck : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 80, fig. (as T. terebra).

Common in places, on muddy and sandy gravel, 15-30 fms. (s.P.):
Mewstone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.): Kame-Eddystone Gds.; Stoke Pt. Gds.
(s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.).

Aporrhaidae,
Aporrhais pes-pelecani (Linn.Tus): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 250, fig.

Not uncommon, particularly on muddy gravel, 5-35 fms. ;
Jennycliff' B., rare : Cawsand B., occasionally : liame-Eddystone
Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. ; etc. (s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.).
Young shells in Aug. (a.J.S.).

Buccinidae.
BUCCINUM UNDATUM (Linmvus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 285, fig.

Mewstone ' P^chinoderm ' Gd., moderately common; Pame-
Eddystone Gds. ; Yealm P., moderately common in dredgings,
and not uncommon on the sand-bank (r.a.t.): Eddystone Gds.,
numerous on the gravel and coarser sands near the Eddystone
(e.j.a.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Breeding: Jan.-Apr. (w.g.). Hatching: Feb. -Mar. (r.a.t.).

DONOVANIA MINIMA (Moiitagu) : ,/. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 313 (as JarJiesis).

Not uncommon in the Sound, under stones, L.W.-20 fms. (s.P.).

Tritonofusus gracilis (Costa) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, \). 416, fig. (as Fiishs ishnifJieus).
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Muricidse.
Ocinebra erinacea (LinUcX'Us) : /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 306,
Y fig. (as Miirex).

Moderately common on rocks between tide-marks (R.A.T., S.P.) :
Asia SI). : Milll)ay Ch. ; Yealm P. ; occasionally (r.a.t.).
Spawn : Apr. (r.a.t., s.P.) : May (w.g.).

PLYMOUTH MAEINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 275

[ Prosobranchiata — coittd.]

Trophon muricatus (Montagu): K Forhes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 439.

Occasionally taken in 15-30 fnis. ; not miconnnon on the Mew-
stone ' Echinoderm ' Gd. (r.a.t.).

Purpura lapillus (Liunteus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 276, fig.

Abundant on rocks between tide-marks everywhere (s.P.).
Spawn: Jan. -Apr. (w.G., R.A.T.) : May (w.G.) : July (s.P.): Nov.
(W.G.).

Nassidae.

Nassa reticulata (Linnojus): E. Forhes (£■ HrmJcy, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 388, fig.

More or less conunon everywiiere, L.W.-5 fms., especially on
muddy sand ; Cawsand B. ; Jeunycliiff B. ; Drake's I. ; Yealm R. ;
etc. (s.P.).

Breeding: Feb. (w.G.): Mar. (w.G., r.a.t., s.p.): Apr. (w.G., r.a.t.):
May (s.P.) : June (r.a.t., s.p.) : July (w.G.): Aug. (s.P.): Sept. (w.G.).

Nassa incrassata (Strom): E. Forbes & Rrinley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 391, fig.

More or less commcn oii all rocky shores, gregarious under
stones and in crevices, particularly where there is a certain amount
of silt, L.W.-10 fms. (s.P.).

Breeding: Fel).-Mar. (s.P.): Apr. (w.G., R.A.T., S.P.) : June (w.G.):
Aug. (w.G., S.P.) : Sept. (w.G.).

Pleurotomidse.
Mangilia attenuata (Montagu): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 377, fig. (as Pleurotoma).

Occasionally in muddy gravel, 20-30 fms. (s.P.).

Mangilia nebula (Montagu): E. Forhes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 476, fig.
Queen's Gd. (r.a.t.^).

Mangilia (Bellardiella) gracilis, P. Fischer: J. 0. Jeffreys, Brit.
Conch., vol. iv, p. 363, fig. (as Defrevnciei).

Not uncommon, 20-35 fms., particularly on muddy gravel (s.P.).
Clatiiurella linearis (Montagu): J. G. Jeff'reys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 368, fig. (as Defraneifi).

Queen's Gd., not uncommon; Asia Sh. : occasionally on the out-
side grounds, 15-30 fms. (r.a.t., s.p.): the Breakwater, occasionally
(R.A.T.).
Clathurella purpurea (Montagu) : ,/. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 373, fig. (as Defrrnirici).

Occasionally under stones and in rock crevices, L.W.-5 fms. ;
Drake's I.; Asia Sh.; Hollow Piock B., JennyclilT B. ; Blackstone
Rks., Wembury B. ; etc. (s.P.).
Breeding: Nov. (s.P.).

Clathurella reticulata (Penier) : /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 370, fig. (as Defrrineia).

Occasionally, 15-30 fras. (s.P.).

276 i'LY.MOUTlI MAinXE INVEUTEBKATE FAUXA.

[ Tectibrancliiata ]

TECTIBRANCHIATA.
Actaeonidae.
ACTiEON TORNATlLis (Liniifeus): </. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 433, fig.

Dead shells occasionally taken (r.a.t.).

Tornatinidae.
Tornatina mamillata (Philipin) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 420, fig. (as Utricuhis).

Dead shells occasionally taken (r.a.t.).

Tornatina truncatula (Bruguiere) : E. Fortes & Hanlcy, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. iii, p. 510 (as Cylichna truncata).
Only dead shells (r.a.t.).

Scaphandridae.
SCAFIIANDER LIGNARIUS (LinniL'us) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 443, fig.

Common on the trawling grounds outside Sound (w.i.B., S.P.).
VOLVULELLA ACUMINATA (Bruguicre): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 411, fig. (as Cylichna).
Dead sliell only (r.a.t.).
BULLINELLA CYLINDRACEA (Pennant): ./. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 415, fig. (as Cylichna).

Dead shells only taken (R.A.T.).

Bullidse.
Haminea hydatis (Linnpeus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 437,
fig. (as Bulla).

Yealm Est. (w.G.) : Jennycliff B. (r.a.t.^).

ItOXANIA UTRICULUS, Brocchi : E. Forbes <& Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 533, fig. (as Bnlla Cranchi).

A single specimen, 4i m. S.W. by W. Penlee Pt. (r.a.t.).

Philinidae.

Philinr aperta (Linnu'us) : J. G. Jiffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 457, fig.
Common on muddy sand bottom, at times very abundant ; Caw-
sand B.; Jennycliff B.; Cattewater, etc. (w.i.b., s.p.) : sandy bottom
Whitsand B. (w.G.).

Breeding : Apr. (w.G.) : May-July (w.G., r.a.t.).

Philine catena (Montagu): J. G Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 449, fig.

Mewstoue Ledge (w.l.B.^) : Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.).
Philine punctata (J. Adams): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv,
p. 453, fig.

The Sound, single spec, among Bowerhnnhia ; plentiful 20 fnis.,
among shells covered with Bufjula, 1891 (w.G.): Drake's 1. (e.J.a.^):
Asia Sli.^; Millbay Docks, occasionally on the piles (r.a.t.).
Philine scabra (Miiller): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iv, p. 447, fig.
Whitsand B., 4-12 fms. (w.h.^).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVEKTEBRATE FAUNA. 277

[ Tectibranchiata— CO/;/'/. : Nudibranchiata ]

CoLPODASPis PUSILLA, M. Sars : ir. Garstang, Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1894,
p. 664, fig.

On rough ground, about 2 m. S. of the ]\Iewstone, Feb. 1893 (w.G.).

Aplysiidae.
Aplysia PUNCTATA, Cuvier: W. Garstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, ser. 2,
vol. i, p. 401.

Queen's Gel, rare; Cattevvater; CawsandP).; lieny liks. ; Yealm R.,
moderately common in dredgings, very common at times on the
shore, especially in May and June; Yealm Est., small specs, not
uncommon on the Zostera (r.A.T.) : E. end of Whitsand P)., in
quantity beneath seaweed on rocks (w.H.).

Breeding: Apr.-July (R.A.T.) : June-Oct. (w.G.): maximum,
May-June (a.j.s.).

Pleurobranchidse.
Pleurobranchus plumula (Montagu): /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v,
p. 11, fig.

Jennyclift' B. (a.j.s.) : Wembury B., on the shore ; S. of the
Mewstone (w.G.).

OscANius membranaceus (Montagu): /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v,
p. 10, fig. (as Flcurohreinchus).

Not uncommon on the trawling grounds (w.i.B., S.P.): the Sound,
unusually plentiful, especially in Milibay Ch. and the Hamoaze,
1893; young specs, common swimming at the surface in the Sound,
Sept. 1892 (w.G.): Cattewater and Yealm E., very occasional (R.A.T.).

Runcinidse.
Euncina coronata (Qnatrefages): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v, p. 15,
fig. (as R. H(incoehi).

Tide-pools below Hoe, very abundant Apr. 1889, small specs, in
Sept. (w.G.) : Eum B. (r.a.t.^) : among corallines from rock-pools
in the Sound ; Yealm E. (w.i.b.).

NUDIBRANCHIATA.
Hermaeidse.
HerMtEA bifida (Montagu) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 53, fig.

St. Peter's Pt., Hamoaze, single spec, on DeJesseria (w.G.) : West
Entrance of Sound, in townet, single spec; Cawsand B., single spec
(w.i.B.) : off Penlee Pt., small spec, in townet (s.P.).

HERMiEA dendritica (Alder & Hancock): /. Alder & Hancoch, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 53, fig.

Drake's I., two on Bryopsis (w.G.): inside Bovisand Pier, single
spec (r.A.T.) : in Lab. tank on a stone from Bovisand B. (w.i.B.).

Breeding: June (w.G.).

Stiliger bellulus, d'Orbigny.
Cawsand B. (W.g.^),

278 I'LYMOUTH MAItlNE INVEliTEIHtATK FAUNA.

[ Nudibranchiata — could.]
Elysiidae.

Elysia viridis (Montagu): L\ Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. iii, p. 614, fig.

Yealiu Est., cominou (g.c.b., w.g.) : Duke Kk.^ ; middle of the
Sound 1; tide-pools below the Hoe^ (w.g.): Queen's Gd.; Yeahn 11.;
uncommon (w.i.B.).

Breeding: Oct., and probably earlier (w.g.).

Limapontiidae.
LiMAPONTiA CAPITATA (Milller) : J. Alder tC- Hancock, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., ser. 2, vol. i, p. 402, fig. (as L. nigra).

Eeny Bks. (w.H., w.g.): Cawsand B., abundant in tide-pools
(W.G.): tide-pools below the Hoe, abundant Apr. 1890, disappeared
Aug. and Sept. (w.g.): Drake's I., common on corallines (r.a.t., w.g.):
Hum B., occasionally (r.a.t., s.p.).

AcTEONiA corrugata: J. Aider & Hancock, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2,
vol. i, p. 403, fig.

Tide-pools below the Hoe(w.G.i): Jennycliff' B. (s.p.): Bovisand B.,
single spec, among corallines (w.i.B.j.

.ffiolidiidae.
^OLIDIA PAPILLOSA (Liuua'us) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll, p. 48, fig. (as Halls).

Fairly common on all stony shores (w.i.B., s.p.): Yealm E., specs,
common and particularly fine, among heaps of drift Fiicus, etc.

(A.J.S.).

Breeding: Feb. (r.a.t.): Mar.-May (w.g., r.a.t.): June (w.g.):
July-Aug. (R.A.T.).
iEoLiDELLA Alderi (Cocks): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 48, fig. (as Folis).

Drake's I.; Kocks below the Hoe^ (e..j.a.): Yealm R. (w.i.B., w.g.,
R.A.T.): Eeny Eks. (r.a.t.^): Wembury B., among corallines (av.i.b.).
Breednig : Aug. (w.g.).
^OLIDELLA glauca (Alder & Hancock): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
lUit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 48, fig. (as Eolis).

Millbay Ch., occasionally (r.a.t., w.i.B., a.j.s., s.p.): Drake's I.,
rarely (r.a.t., S.p.) : Mallard Sh. (J.c.s.^) : Mt. Pklgcumbe (W.G.^) :
Queen's Gd. (w.i.B., r.a.t.) : Asia Sh. (s.p.) : Cattewater, large spec,
probably from trawl refuse ; 5-6 m. S.W. Breakwater Lt. ; Mew-
stone Ledge (w.i.B.) : several specs, under Laira Bridge (a.j.s.).
Bergiiia C/ERULESCENS (Guerin Meneville): R Ber;/h, Verhandl. Zool.-
bot. Ges. Wien, vol. xxxii, p. 20.
Outside the Breakwater (w.g.).
CUTHONA Peachi (Alder & Hancock): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 50, fig. (as Folis).

Two specs, with spawn on Hijdrnctinia, 3-4 m. S. of the Mew-
stone (W.I.B.).
Cavolina amcena (Alder & Hancock): ./. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 51.

Occasionally on stony ground; Millbay Ch.; Asia Sh.; New Gds.

(W.I.B.).

I'LYMOUTH MAKINE INYEKTEBRATE FAU^'A. 279

[ Nudibranchiata — contiL]

Cavolina aurantia (Alder & Hancock) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll, p. 51, fig. (as EoHs).

On piles, Millbay Dock^; buoy near the Breakwater^ (w.i.B. &
R.A.T.): Millbay Ch., very rare, one on Garvcia nutans (r.a.t., w.i.b.):
Duke l\k. (w.i.B.).

Breeding: May (w.i.b., r.a.t.).

Cavolina olivacea (Alder & Hancock) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 51, fig.

Occasionally on stony and rocky ground (w.i.b.) : Queen's Gd.,
occasionally (w.i.b., r.a.t., s.p,): Asia Sli.; Drake's 1.; Millbay Ch.
and Pit (r.a.t.): Mewstone Gds. (w.G.^): Yealm R. (w.i.b.): Mew-
stone Ledge (w.i.b., s.p.).

Cratena viridis (Forbes): /. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 51, fig. (as Eolis).

Millbay Ch., single spec, (a.j.s.^): Duke lik. (w.g.^): Mewstone
Gds. (w.g.): Banie-Eddystone ' Cellar ia' Gds. (w.i.b.): Eddyslone
Gds. (E.J.A.).

Tergipes DESPECTUS (Johnston): J. Alder &, Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll., p. 52, fig.

Millbay Dock, on piles, common. Mar. 1901 (r.a.t.) : Barn Pool
(wm.b.): buoy near Breakwater; Duke Ek. (r.a.t.): Mewstone Gds.
(W.G.).

Breeding : Mar. (w.g., r.a.t.) : Apr.-May (r.a.t.).

Embletonia pulchra (Alder & Hancock) : /. Alder tfc Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 52, fig.

Asia Sh., single spec, apparently on Antennularia (w.l.B.).

Amphorina g.erulea (Montagu) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v,
p. 51 (as Eolis).

Asia Sh. ; Queen's Gd., not uncommon (s.p.) : Eame-Eddystone
Gds.; Mewstone-Eddystone Gds., on 'Cellaria' grounds (w.i.b.);
Mewstone Ledge ; off Tregantle (w.i.b. & r.a.t.).

Galvina cingulata. Alder & Hancock : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr.- Moll., p. 51, fig. (as Eolis).

From among weed, etc., below the Laboratory (w.i.b.) : Asia Sh.
(w.i.b. & R.A.T.\): Millbay Dock, on Plvmularia from the piles;
Yealm Est., on Zostera ; Yealm K., on Antennularia (w.i.b.) :
Mewstone Gds. (w.g.^).

Breeding : July (w.g.).

Galvina exigua (Alder & Hancock): J. Alder & Hancock; Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 52, fig. (as Eolis).

Duke lik. (w.g.): Barn Pool, several specs, on Ubelia (w.i.b.).
Breeding : Mar. (w.G.).

Galvina picta. Alder & Hancock : /. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll, pp. 51, 52, fig. (as Eolis i)icta and E. Farrani).

Cawsand B., common on Zostera; Asia Sh.; Millbay Ch.; Queen's
Gd. ; Yealm Est., on Zostera (w.i.b.) : buoy near West Hoe, among

Tubularia (s.P.).

280 rLYMOUTlI .MAUINE INVKUTEIIRATE FAUNA.

[ Nudibranchiata — could. \
Galvina tricolor (Forbes) : J. Alder & Hancock, Moiiogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 51, fig. (as A'o/is).

Fairly abundant on the trawling grounds, 20-35 fnis. (w.l.B., S.P.).
Breeding: May; Nov. (w.G.).

CoRYi'iiELLA GKACir.is (Alder & Hancock) : J. Aider tO Hanmh, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 49, lig.

Single spec, between Duke Bk. and Jennyclifl': Cawsand !>.,
single spec. (w.G.).

CORYPiiELLA Landsburgi (Alder & Hancock): ./. Alder & Hancoch,
Monogr. ]>rit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 49, fig. (as EoUi^).

Occasionally at most stations in the Sound and outside (w.i.E.,
s.P.) : twice amongst Hydroids, IJuke Kk. (w.G.).

CORYPIIELLA LINEATA (Loven) : ,/. Aider & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. ]\Ioll., p. 49, fig. (as Bolis).

Mewstone Ledge, rare (r.a.t.) : on stone dredged in Firestone B.;
Kame-Eddystone Gds. (WM.B.).

CORYPHELLA RUFIBRANCHIALIS (JohnsLuu): J. Alder cO Haaeock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 49, fig.

Fairly common on the 'Inner' trawling grounds (w.i.b., s.p.) :
Whitsand I]. (w.G.).

CORYPIIELLA SMARAGDINA [? = C rjracUis, var.] : J. Alder & Hancock,
Monogr. Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 49, fig.

Millbay Cii. : Asia Sli. ; May 1898 (w.i.b.).

Favorinus albus (Alder & Hancock) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 49, fig.

Drake's T. ( w.G., w.i.b.) : Asia Sh., on Antennularia ; Barn Pool,
on Fvcus; Batten B. ; Duke Rk. (w.i.b.): Cawsand B. (w.G.):
Yealm Est., on Zosiera, fairly common in 1897 (W.I.B.).

Breeding : June (W.I.B.) : Nov. (w.G.).

Facelina coronata, Forbes & Goodsir: ./. Alder & Hancock, ]\Ionogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll, p. 49, fig. (as AoZ/.s).

Millbay Dock", on piles : Millbay Ch. : Cawsand B. (w.i.b.) ; the
Cattewater; Cobbler Buoy; Duke Ilk.; off tiie Mewstone (W.G.):
reef between Wembury Bt. and the ]\Iewstone (e.j.a.).

Breeding : Apr.-May (w.G.).

P'acelina Drummondi (Thompson): /. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll., p. 49, fig. (as Uolis).

Queen's Gd. ; Cawsand 15. ; Yealm Est. (W.i.B.).

Facelina punctata (Alder & Hancock): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nubibr. Moll., p. 49, fig. (as Eolis).

Millbay Ch. ; Cawsand B. ; rocky ground off Penlee (w.i.b.) :
Mewstone Gds. (^v.G., W.I.B. & r.a.t.).

Calma glaucoidks (Alder & Hancock) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 50, fig. (as Eolis).

Queen's Gd. (w.i.b. & r.a.t.i): IMackstone llks., AVembury B. (s.P.):
West Entrance of Sound, amongst goby eggs, which is apparently
its natural habitat (w.i.b.) : Mewstone Gd-s., generally in Buecininii
shells occupied by JJlennins ocellaris, sometimes as many as 50 in

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBltATE FAUNA. 281

[ Nudibranchiata — conid.]

one shell ; resembles the eggs with which it is associated, the
colour varying according to whether the eggs are those of the
Gohj or Butterfly Blenny (a.j.s.).
Antiopella cristata (delle Chiaje) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Xndibr. Moll., p. 54, fig. (as Antiopa).

liock-pool under the Hoe; lium B. (av.g.) : Queen's Gd. (s.p.,
W.I.B.): Millbay Docks, very large spec; Eddystone Gds. (w.i.b.) :
Mewstone Gds. (w.G.) : Yealm E. (k.a.t.).
Breeding : Aug. (r.a.t.).
Antiopella hyalina, Alder & Hancock : •/. Alder & Hcincock, Monogr.
Brit. Xudibr. Moll., p. 54, fig. (as AntiojKf).

Queen's Gd., several small specs. (w.LB.) : Duke Rk. (T.V.H.^):
Mewstone Ledge ("W.lb. & r.a.t.^) : Mewstone ' Echinoderm ' Gd. ;
2-4 m. N.E. of Eddystone (w.lb.).
Hero Formosa (Loven) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v, p. Go.

Not unconnnon outside the Breakwater (w.G.): Eddystone Gds.;
Mewstone Gds.; Stoke Pt. Gds.: 6 m. S. of the Mewstone, in con-
siderable numbers, Jan.-June 1895 : has not been seen since 1898

(E.J.A.).

Breeding : Apr. (w.G.).

Lomanotidae.

LoMANOTUS marmoratus (Alder & Hancock): W. I. Bcaurnont, Proc.
Irish Acad., ser. 3, vol. v, p. 846.

Fairly common on Antcnnularia in shallow water: Asia Sh.:
New Gds.: Millbay; etc. (w'.lb., s.p.): about 1 m. S. of Mewstone,
large spec, (w.lb.): 3 m. S. of Mewstone* (w.G.).
Lomanotus portlandicus, Thompson : W. I. Beaumont, Proc. Irish
Acad., ser. 3, vol. v, p. 842.

Very scarce; two specs., New Gds.: 4 m. S. of the Mewstone,
large spec. ; 3 m. S.S.W. of Eame Hd. (w.LB.) : Queen's Gd.,f
young specimens on Antemudecria (w'.G.).
Spawned : Sept. (w.lb.).

Dotonidse.

Doto CORONATA (Gmelin) : /. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 48, fig.

Fairly plentiful on Antcnnularia at most stations (w.lb., S.P.):
always on calyptoblastic Hydroids (w^G.) : Millbay Docks, on
Plumularia ; buoy near Breakwater; Drake's I., on the shore
(w.lb.) : Yealm Pi. (w.lb., r.a.t.).

lireeding : most of the year (w^.lb., s.p.).

DoTO FRAGiLis (Forbes) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 48, fig.

Common on Antennularin, etc., from the outside grounds, less
frequent in the Sound (W'.G., W^LB., S.P.).

lireeding during the greater part of the year (w.lb., s.p.).

* As L. varians. I As L. Genei.

282 I'LYMOUTII MAIMXK INVKRTEHKATE FAUNA.

[ Nudibranchiata — contd.]
UoTO riNNATiFiDA (jMuntagu): /, A/dcr & Hancock, Monogr. Jirit. Niulibr.
Moll., p. 48, Hg.

Generally distributed and common on Antennularia in the Sound
and outside (w.i.i?., S.P.).

Breeding most of the year (w.i.B., s.P.).

Hancockia eudactylota, Gosse: F. IV. Gamble, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc.,
ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 193.

Between Drake's I. and Breakwater Lt. (f.w.g.^); Cawsand B. ;
Yealm Est. ; on Zostcrci and on Laminaria, rare (w.l.B.).

Dendronotidae.
Dendronotus fkondosus (Ascanius) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 47, fig. (as D. arborescens).

Local specimens are usually small (s.P.) : occasionally in the
Sound (G.c.B.) : Queen's Gd. (s.P., w.i.b.) : Ii. Tamar, near Saltash, a
large spec, (w.i.b.): Mewstoue Ledge occasionally (r.a.t.): Mewstone-
Eddystone Gds. (w.g.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.) : Rame-Eddystone
Gds. (w.g., s.P.).

Pleurophyllidiidae .
Pleurophyllidia Loveni, Bergh : B. Forbes & Hanleij, HisL. Brit. ]\loll.,
vol. iv, p. 290, fig. (as Diphyllidia lineata).
Single spec, 2 m. N. of Eddystone (j.t.c).

Tritoniidae.
Tritonia Hombergi, Cuvier : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 46, fig.

The habitat of this form appears to be below the 30 fm. line
(w.i.b., s.P.) : Mewstone Ledge (t.v.h.) : common on the ' outer '
trawling grounds (w.g.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., W.G., S.P.) : Mew-
stone Gds. (j.t.c).
Tritonia (Candiella) lineata, Alder & Hancock : J. Alder & Hancock,
Monogr. I>rit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 47, fig.
Stoke Ft. Gds., single spec. (s.P.).

Tritonia (Candiella) plebeia, Johnston : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 47, fig.

Millbay Pit (a.j.s.) : Mewstone Gds. (w.g.): Eame-Eddystone
Gds. (w.i.b.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., w.i.b.).

A pink variety is fairly common on Eiuiicella, especially from
the Mewstone Ledge (w.LB.).

Breeding : Aug. ; Oct. (r.a.t.) : Nov. (w.G.).

Dorididse.
Archidoris FLAMMEA (Alder & Hancock): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 41, fig. (as Doris).

Duke Ek., single spec, on red sponge (w.G.) : Queen's Gd. or
Duke lik., single spec, (w.i.b.).
Archidoris (gen.?) maculata, Garstang: W. Oarstany, Journ. Mar. Biol.
Assoc, ser. 2, vol. iv, p. 167 (as Doris).

Queen's Gd. (w.G., s.P.) : Mewstone Ledge (t.v.h.) : Eddystone
Gds. (E.J.A., w.LB.).

PLYMOUTH MAi;iNE INVERTEBItATE FAUNA. 283

[ Nudibranchiata— co»/r/.]

Akchidokis tuberculata (Cuvier) : J. Alder & Hancock, Moiiogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll., p. 41, fig. (as Doris).

Not uncominon on most rocky shores and in dredgings from the
Sound (w.G., AV.i.B., s.P.) : Yealni E. ; liame-Eddystone (4ds.: Eddy-
stone Gds. (w.i.B.).

])reeding: Jan.-Jnne (w.G.).
FiOSTANGA COCGINEA (Forbes): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 42, fig. (as Doris).

Occasionally on the shore and in dredgings from the Sound on
stony ground (w.i.B., sp.): Drake's I. (w.G., G.c B.) : Yealm K. ;
Downderry, on the shore (w.i.b.)
JORUNNA JoHNSTONi (Alder & Hancock): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 42, fig. (as Doris).

Occasionally on rocky and stony shores, and in dredgings from
the Sound (w.G., w.i.b., s.p.): Keny Eks. ; Yeahn Est., south shore
(W.I.B.).
Platydoris (gen.?) testudinaria (Eisso): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Couch.,
vol. V, p. 85 (as Doris).

Drake's I. (w.G., t.v.h.) : Barn Tool (w.H., w.G.) : Garden Battery
(e.j.a.): Mt. Edgcumbe; Millbay Ch.; Queen's Gd., very occasionally
(R.A.T.) : Duke Ek. (w.G.) : Yealm E. (r.a.t.) : Eame-Eddystone Gds,
(w.i.b.).

Polyceridae.
^GIRES PUNCTILUCENS (d'Orbigny) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll., p. 44, fig. (as yEfjiri/s).

Millbay Pit and Oh., very occasionally; l)rake's I., single spec,
among coralline (r.a.t.): Queen's Gd. (t.v.h.): Duke Ek. (w.G., t.v.h.):
Yealm E. (r.a.t.) : Wembury B., few small specs, among corallines
(t.v.h.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Triopa clavigera (Milller): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
AIoll., p. 44, fig.

Milllmy Pit, single spec, (w.i.b., r.a.t.): Mevvstone Ledge, occasion-
ally (r.a.t.): Mewstone Gds. (w.G., E.J.A.): Stoke Pt. Gds.; Eddy-
stone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Thecacera PENNIGERA (Montagu): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll., p. 44, fig.

Off Eame Hd., 20 fnis., single spec. (w.G.): Queen's Gd. (s.P.).
Palio Lessoni (d'Orbigny) : -/. Alder tfc Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 45, fig. (as Polycera occllata and P. Lesso)iii).

Eum B. (W.I.B., R.A.T., S.P.): Duke Ek.; Mt. Edgcumbe; Drake's I.
(W.G.): Queen's Gd. (t.v.h.): Asia Sh. (R.A.T.).
Polycera quadrilineata (Miiller) : J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit.
Nudibr. Moll., j). 45, fig.

In most years abundant on Zostera beds; Cawsand B.; Yealm
Est.; etc. (w.i.b., s.p.): Drake's I., under stones (w.l.B.) : Yealm E.,
occasionally (r.at., W.I.B): Q)ueen's Gd. (w.i.b.): Wembury B. (w.G.):
Kame-Eddystone Gds.; Eddystone Gds. (w.i.b., s.P.): Bigbury B.,
large spec, close in, off Thurlestone (w.i.b.).
Breeding : July-Aug. (w.G.),

NEW SKItlKs.— Vol.. VII. NO. 2. T

284 ri.vMoriii MAitiNK invektebkate fauna.

[ NudibrancMata— cw«^/.]
ACANTHODORIS PILOSA (Miillcr) : J. Aider cC' Hancock, ]\luiiugr. Brit.
Nuilibr. Moll., p. 43, fig. (as Doris).

Kocks under the Lab. (e.j.a.): Drake's I., occasionally (e.j.a., r.a.t.):
]\Iilll»ay Ch., occasionally ; Asia Sh., occasionally ; Queen's Gd., not
unconnnon; Kuni B.; ihe Ik'eakwater (r.a.t.): Duke Ek. (t.Y.II.,R.a.T.):
Bovisand B. (t.v.H.): Wenibury B. (w.g.): Yealni B., not uncommon
(r.a.t.) : 2 m. N. of the Eddy stone (j.T.c).
Breeding : May (a.j.s.).

Lamellidoris aspeka, Alder & Hancock : J. Aider & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 42, fig. (as Doris).

Iktween the IMallard and Cobbler Buoys, single spec. (w.G.) :
Yeahn Est., very rare (r.a.t.).

Lamellidoris bilamellata (Linnieus): J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 43, fig. (as Doris).

Common; Batten B.; Jennycliff P>.; Duke Bk. (■\v.G.) : Milll)ay
Ch.; the lU-eak water ; Yeahn B. (w.lb., R.a.t.): 4 m. N.E. of the
Eddystone (t.v.h.^).

Breeding: Mar. -Apr. (r.a.t.).

Lamellidoris depressa (Alder & Hancock): ,/. Alder i(- Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., ]>. 43, fig.

Inner side of the Breakwater^; Mewstone Ledge^ (w.i.b.).

Lamellidoris oblonga. Alder & Hancock: /. Alder (fc Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 43, fig. (as Doris).

Extremely abundant at times on Cellaria ; Mewstone Ledge;
Bame-Eddystone Gds.; Eddystone Gds. ; etc. (w.i.b.).

Breeding : Apr. (w.G.).

Lamellidoris pusilla, Alder & Hancock: J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 43, fig.

Plymouth (W.G.).

Breeding: Eeb. (w.G.).
Lamellidoris sparsa, Alder & Hancock : J. Alder cO Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 43, fig. (as Doris).

Off Stoke Pt. (w.G.i).
GoNlODORis castanea. Alder & Hancock: J. Alder & Hancock, Monogr.
Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 44, fig.

Occasionally under stones on most rocky shores (s.P.): below the
Lab. (e.j.a., W.G., S.P.): Millbay Ch. (w.i.b., r.a.t.): Drake's L (e.j.a.):
Cattewater; Piuni B. ; Bovisand Cove (w.G.): Cawsand B. (T.v.H.) :
Bame-Eddystone Gds.; Yealm 11., occasionally (it.A.T.).

Breeding: Eel).: May; duly: Sept. (w.G.).
GONIODORIS NODOSA (Moutagu) : J. Alder & Hancock, ]\Ionogr. Brit-
Nubibr. Moll., p. 44, fig.'

Plentiful on most shore stations and in dredgings from the Sound
(w.i.b., S.P.).

Breeding: Jan.-Apr. (w.(;., r.a.t.): May: Sei)t. : Dec. (w.G.).
Adults, with spawn, in large numl)ers on the shoves of the Sound
from Feb. to May; small specimens abundant in dredgings in June,
.July, and Aug.; probably an annual migrating to the shores to
spawn (w.G.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 285

[ Nudibranchiata — confi/.: Pulmonata : Scaphopoda : Pelecypoda ]
Idalina (Idaliella) aspersa (Alder & Hancock) : J. Alder & Hancock,
Moiiogr. Brit. Nudibr. Moll., p. 46, fig. (as Idalia).
Yealm Est.i ; off Penlee Pt.i (w.G.).
Ancula cristata (Alder): J. Alder & Hancock, Mouogr. Brit. Nudibr.
Moll., p. 45, fig.

Hocks below the Lab. (e.j.a.): near the Ladies' Bathing Pool
(w.G., T.V.H.): oil the piles at Millbay Dock (r.a.t.) : Drake's L
(w.G., W.I.B., R.A.T.) : Cawsand B. (w.G.) : Batten B., amongst coral-
lines, etc. (w.i.B.): Jeniiyclift' B. (r.a.t.).

PULMONATA.
Otinidse.
Otina OTIS (Turtou): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v, p. 110, fig.

Common in empty barnacle shells near high-water mark on
the rocks under West Hoe and below Laboratory (r.a.t.) : very
abundant near high-water mark in rock crevices, etc., gregarious
within limited areas ; Drake's L ; cave under Eam's Cliff' Pt. ;
etc. (S.P.).

Auriculidse.

Leuconia bidentata (Montagu): J. G. Jefreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v,
p. 104, fig. (as Melampus).

Rocks under West Hoe, in empty barnacle shells (r.a.t.): common
in crevices of rocks near high- water mark; Jennycliff' B.; Drake's I.;
etc. (s.p.).

SCAPHOPODA.

Dentalium entalis, Linnaeus: J. G. Jefreijs, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 191, fig.

Not uncommon on the fine sand grounds, 15-30 fms. (r.a.t.,
S.p.) : Eddystone Gds., on all fine sand grounds except the 'Outer'
trawling ground, and occasionally on gravel (e.j.a.).

PELECYPODA.

Nuculidae,

NUCULA NITIDA, G. B. Sowerby : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 218, fig.

Jennycliff B., Cawsand B. ; in muddy sand (r.a.t.) : Eddystone
Gds., in the fine sand of the 'Outer' trawling ground (e.j.a.).
Nucula nucleus (Liniiieus): U. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 215, fig.

Common on muddy gravel, 10-30 fms. (S.P.) : Millbay sliell-
gravel ; Cawsand B. ; Mewstone Gds. (R.A.T.) : Eddystone Gds.
(E.J.A.).

Anomiidse.
>Anomia epiiippium, Liniianis : ./. (/. Jeff)-e)js, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 30, fig.

More or less common everywhere, L.W.-30 fms., on stones,
shells, rocks, etc. (R.A.T.): Eddystone Gds., wherever suitable attach-
ment can be found, least frequent on the fine sand grounds (e.j.a.).

2.S6 PLYMOUTH MAIJIXE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Pelecypoda— con<'?.]

Anomia patelliformis, Liniifpus: J. (1. Jrffn//s, I'.iit. (.'unuli., vol ii,
p. :u, fig.

Eddystone Gds., wherever suitable attachment is to be found,
least common on the fine sand grounds (e.j.a.).

Arcidae.
Glycimeris glycimeris (Linnjeus) : ./. G. Jcfrei/.^i, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 166, fig. (as Pectunculus).

Coninion in sandy and nnuldy gravel, 7-30 fins. (s.P.) : moder-
ately common on Mewstone Ledge in the patches of gravel between
the rocks and occasionally from the other grounds round the Mew-
stone ; Queen's Gd. ; Cawsand B. ; Kame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.) :
Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).

LiMOPSis aurita (Brocchi): -/. 0. Jeffrois, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 161, fig.

Several dead shells (s.p.).

Barbatia lactea (Linnffius): /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 177,
fig. (as Area).

Occasionally between tide-marks, among stones, etc., and in
15-30 fms., particularly on muddy gravel (s.p.) : Queen's Gd.
(R.A.T., S.P.) : lleny Eks., occasionally (r.a.T.).
Arca TETRAGONA, Poli : J. G. Jrffrqjs, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 180, fig.

Occasionally on all rocky shores, in crevices and among stones,
L.W.-30 fms. (s.p.) : not uncommon in rock crevices at Drake's I.
and Kuni B. : occasionally from the Bridge and Millbay Ch. (r.a.t.).

Mytilidse.

^Mytilus EDULIS, Linn;eus: J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 104, fig.

A^ery common on the coal-hulks moored in the Cattewater and

on the piles of the Promenade Pier ; young specs, are common

between tide-marks on the rocks below the Hoe and occasionally

from Drake's T. and Asia Sh. (r.a.t.) : Yealm Sand-bank (s.p.).

VOLSELLA barbata (Linna_*us): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 114,
fig. (as Mytilus).

Occasionally between tide-marks, under boulders (s.P.): Asia Sh.
(r.a.t.).

VoLSELLA PHASEOLINA (Philippi) : ,/. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 118, fig. (as MytiluH).

Not uncommon on the outside grounds in 15-30 fms.; occasion-
ally between tide-marks on the Breakwater and Drake's I.; Millbay
Pit (R.A.T.).

MODIOLARIA MARMORATA (Forbes) : J. G. Jefrei/s, P)rit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 122, fig.

More or less common, buried in the tests of Tunicates; Millbay
Pit and Ch. ; Mewstone Ledge ; Yealm R. ; etc. (r.a.t., s.p.).

Pteriidae.
Pteria HIRUNDO (Linnaeus) : U. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. ii,
p. 251, fig. (as Avicula tarentina).
Very rare from the offing (r.a.t.).

PLYMOUTH MAIUNE IXVERTEBKATE FAUNA. 287

[ Pelecypoda — contd.]

Pinna fkagilis, Pennant : J. G. JeJ'rei/s, Brit. Concli., vol. ii, p. 99, fig.
(as F. rudk).

Small specs, are occasionally taken on gravel otl' Eanie Hd.,
20-30 fms. ; dead shells are common (r.a.t.) : Queen's Gd. ; Stoke
Pt. Gds., etc. ; small specs, only (s.P.).

Ostreidae.
Ostrea EDULIS, Linnfcus : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 38, fig.
Millbay Ch. ; Queen's Gd. ; Mewstone Ledge ; Yealnl R. ; stray
specs, occasionally dredged (k.a.t.) : inside the Bridge (s.P.^).
Extensive oyster-beds are cultivated in the Tamar P. at Saltash,
and in the Yealni E. (e.j.a.).

Pectinidae.
Pecten maximus (Linnaifus) : /. G. Jeff'rei/s, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 73, fig.
Mewstone 'Echinoderm' Gd., not uncommon; Rame-Eddystone
Gds., etc. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., moderately abundant on the
various gravel grounds (e.j.a., s.p.) : Mewstone Ledge ; Asia Sh. ;
Yealm Sand-bank, between tide-marks^ (r.a.t.).
Pecten (Hinnites) pusio (Linnaeus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 51, fig.

Not uncommon on all rocky shores, among stones, inside dead
shells, etc., L.W.-30 fms. (s.P.) : Drake's L ; Asia Sh. ; Queen's Gd.;
the Breakwater; etc. (r.a.t., s.p.).
Pecten (Chlamys) varius (Linnaeus) : ./. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 53, fig.

The Breakwater, not uncommon at low tide ; occasional specs,
from Drake's L, Asia Sh., Queen's Gd., Rum B., Yealm R. (r.a.t.).
Pecten (..Equipecten) opercularis (Linnaeus) : /. G. Jefreys, Brit.
Conch., vol. ii, p. 59, fig.

More or less common everywhere in 15-30 fms., especially on
the Mewstone 'Echinoderm' Gd. and about 5 m. S.W. of Penlee Pt. ;
occasionally from Queen's Gd. and Asia Sh. ; the Breakwater, single
small spec, between tide-marks (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., more or
less abundant on all the grounds, often in beds which, while of
limited extent, contain very numerous individuals (e.j.a., s.p.).
Breeding: June-Aug. (s.p.).
Pecten (Palliolum) tigerinus (Miiller): K Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 285, fig.

Not uncommon on coarse muddy or sandy gravel : Stoke Pt.
Gds.; Rame-Eddystone Gds.; etc. (s.p.): Mewstone ' Echinoderm '
Gd. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Eddystone Gds., not abundant, for the most part
on coarse ground (e.j.a.) : the Breakwater, single spec, between
tide-marks (r.a.t.).

Limidae.
Lima iiians (Gmelin) : J. G. Jeffreys, lirit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 87, fig.

Abundant at extreme low tide among a small patch of stones
with muddy gravel on the N. side of the Breakwater ^ ; Reny Rks.^
(R.A.T.) : Drake's L (s.P.^).

288 rLY.MoLTlI MARINE IN VEUTEBKATE FAUNA.

[ Pelecypoda— co/(/(/.]

Lima Loscombi, O. B. Soweil)y: •/. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Couch., vol. ii,
p. 85, tig.

Not imcoinnion on tlie coarse grounds W. of the Eddystone
(E.J.A., S.P.): Eame-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.) : Mevvstoiie Gds. (h.a.t.,
S.P.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (w.g., S.P.).
Lima subauriculata (Montagu) : /. G. Jeff'in/s, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 82, fig.

Dead shells only (u.a.t.).

Astartidse.
AsTAKTE SULCATA (da Costa) : £. Furbcs tt JLodci/, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 452, fig.

Not uncommon, 15-30 fnis., generally on muddy or sandy
gravel (r.a.t., s.p.).

Cyprinidse.
Cypkina islandica (Linnaeus) : U. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
voL i, p. 441, fig.

Occasionally, 15-30 fms.; dead shells moderately common (r.a.t.).

Lucinidae.
LuciNA bokealis (Linnjtus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. -^42, fig.

Occasionally on the Zostcra l)ed N.E. of Drake's L and on the
Yealm Sand-bank ; dead shells are very common in Cawsand B.
(R.A.T.).
LuciNA SPINIFERA (Montogu) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 49, fig.

Kame-Eddystone Gds. (s.P.^) : dead shells not unconunon (r.a.t.).

Thyasira flexuosa (Montagu): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 247,
fig. (as Aj-inns).

Yealm Sand-bank, occasionally; dead shells are very common in
Cawsand B. (r.a.t.).
MONTACUTA SUBSTRIATA (Montagu): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 205, fig.

Common attached to the anal spines of Spatcmgus lyurpii^reus

(R.A.T., S.P.).

Tellimya ferruginosa (Montagu): E. Forbes & Heinley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 72, fig. (as Montdevta).

Yealm Sand-bank, common commensal with Eehinoeurdinm
conUditin (R.A.T.).
DiPLODOXTA ROTUXDATA (Moutagu) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 254, fig.

Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Leptonidae.
Kellia suborbicularis (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. ii, p. 87, fig.

Not uncommon on all rocky shons, L.W.-30 fms., in crevices,
inside dead shells, etc., particularly where there is a thin layer of
silt; gregarious (s.P.) : Drake's!.; AsiaSh.; Queen's Gd.; Bum B. ;

PLYMOUTH .MAIUNE INVEHTEBEATE FAUNA. 289

[ Pelecypoda — contd. ]

Millbay Ch., in >S((.':lv((r(( borings: etc. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Stoke Pt. G-ds.,
in Pholadidea crypts, etc. (s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. ; generally in fine
mud inside dead shells (e.j.a., s.p.).

Las.^ia rubra (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. ii,
p. 94, fig. (as Foi'oni(().

Abundant between tide-marks on all rocky sliores, in crevices,
etc. (s.P.) : rocks below the Hoe, very common among barnacles
and the roots of Fucus, etc. (r.a.t.).
Lepton squamosum (Montagu): E. Forhcs & Uanlen, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 98, fig.

Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Scrobiculariidae.
ScROBICULARIA PLANA (da Costa j : E. Furbcs tC Hdiilaj, Hist. I5rit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. ?)2(J, fig. (as ^i. pipe rata).

St. John's Lake, Hamoaze, common in fine tenacious mud (r.a.t.).

Tellinidss.
Tellina CRASSA (Gmelin): E. Forks cO Ranlei/, Hist. Brit. Moll, vol. i,
p. 288, fig.

Drake's I., occasionally Ijetween tide-marks (r.a.t.) : Mewstone
Gds., common : Eame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.) : Stoke Pt. Gds.
(s.p.): Eddystone Gds. (E.J.A., S.P.) : Yealm Pi., occasionally on coarse
sand between tide-marks (r.a.t.).
Tellina doxacina, Linnieus: E. Forks & Hanley, Hist, lirit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 292, fig.

Yealm P., occasionally in coarse sand between tide-marks (r.a.t.).

Tellina fabula, Gronovius : E. Forks & Hanlejj, Hist Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. o02, fig.

Not uncommon in the muddy sand of the Zostera beds; Cawsand
B. ; Batten B. ; Jennycliff B. ; eti\ (s.p.).
Tellina squalida, Pulteney: E. Forks & ffanley, Hist Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 298, fig. (as 1\ incarnata).
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).
Macoma balthica (Linuicus) : E. Forks & Hanleij, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 304, fig. (as Tellina solidula).
Saltash (e.j.a.^).

Donacidse.
Donax variegatus (Gmelin): E. Forks tO Hanlc;/, Hist. Brit. ]\Ioll.,
vol. i, p. 336, fig. (as D. politus).
Dead shells only (r a t.).
Donax vittatus (da Costa): E. Forks &. Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 332, fig. (as D. analinnsi).

AVhitsand Ii., occasional specimens (r.a.t.).

Mactridae.
Mactra stultorum, Linnfeus: J. G. Jeffrei/s, Hist. Brit. Mnll.. vol. ii,
p. 422, tig. •

Dead shells only; these are common in \\'esl Ch. and Whitsand B.
(R.A.T.).

290 I'LYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Pelecypoda— co/i<''.]
Spisula ELLIPTRA (IWdwii): /;. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. i,
p. 356, tig. (as Mavtrii).

West Entrance, abundant; Cawsand B., moderately common (s.P.).

Spisula solida (Linnieus) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. 1,
p. 351, tig. (as Madra).

])rake's I., common on sand-bank at E. end (s.P. & A.J.S.): Yealm
JSand-bank (k.a.t.).

LUTRAKlA ELLIPTICA, Lamarck : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 428, tig.

Drake's I., abundant in a small sandy patch on the Zoskra bed
on the N.E. side (s.P.): on the shore S. of Batten Castle and Yealm
Sand-bank, occasionally (r.a.t.).

Gonads ripe: Mar.-Apr. (s.P.): May (R.A.T.).

Veneridse.
LuciNOPSis UNDATA (Pennant): F. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 435, fig.

Dead shells only (r.a.T.).

DosiNiA exoleta (Linnaius): F. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 428, tig. (as Artemis).

Occasionally from gravel S. of Drake's I. and in Millbay Ch. ;
Yealm Sand-bank, not uncommon (r.a.T.): Mewstone Gds. : Stoke
Pt. Gds. ; Eame-Eddystone Gds. ; etc. (s.P.) : Eddystone Gds.
(E.J.A., s.P.).

Meretkix chione (Linnaeus): F. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i., p. 396, fig. (as Cytherea).
Dead shells only (k.a.t.).

Venus (Clausinella) fasciata (da Costa): F. Forhcs &. Hanhii, Hist.
Brit. Moll., vol. i, p. 415, fig.

Common on coarse gravel, particularly on muddy or sandy
gravel, 6-30 fms. ; Queen's Gd. ; Mewstone Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. ;
Kame-Eddystone Gds.; Eddystone Gds. (S.P.) : Yealm Sand-bank,
occasionally between tide-marks (r.a.t.).

Venus (Ventricola) CASINA, Linna3us : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. i, p. 405, fig.

Occasionally on gravel grounds, 10-30 fms. (s.P.).

Venus (Ventricola) verrucosa, Linnaeus: E. Forbes & Hanlcy, Hist.
Brit. Moll., vol. i, p. 401, fig.

Occasionally on mi.xed gravel grounds, 15-30 fm.*'. : Pamc-P^ddy-
stone Gds.; Mewstone Gds.; etc. (s.P.): Milll)ay Cii. ; Yealm
Saud-liank (K.A.T.).

Venus (Timoclea) ovata. Pennant: E. Forbes & Hanleij, Hist. P>rit.
Moll., vol. i, p. 419, fig.

Moderately common in the Sound on muddy sand and gravel,
and occasioiudly outside in 15-30 fms. (r.a.T.).

Venus (Chamel.<ea) gallina, Linnams : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. i, p. 408, fig. (as V. struduk).

Cawsand B., moderately common in sand; occasionally on the

rLYMOUTH MAKINE l.WEKTEBKATE FAUNA. 291

[ Pelecypoda — cunkL]

outside grounds, 15-30 fins.; Yealm Sand-bank, between tide-marks
(E.A.T.).

Tapes aureus (Gmelin): K Forbes & Hanleij, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. i,
p. 392, fig.

Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Tapes decussatus (LinniBus): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. lirit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 379, tig.

Laira (a.j.s.) : Yealm Sand-bank, not uncommon (s.P.).

Tapes pullastra (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hanlei/, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 382, fig.

Occasionallv between tide-marks and in dred^inus from the
Sound; the variety " per/orcois" is moderately conjmon between
tide-marks where the rocks are bored by Saxicava ; Yealm Sand-
bank, common (r.a.t.).

Tapes virgineus (Linnseus): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 388, fig.

Common in gravel in Millbay Ch.; occasional specs, from Drake's
L, Jennycliff B., the Breakwater, Eeny Rks., and from the outside
grounds in 15-30 fms. (r.a.t.).

GOULDIA MINIMA (Montagu) : E. Forbes & Hanlei/, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 446, fig. (as Circe).

Not uncommon on fine and medium gravel, 5-30 fms. ; Queen's
Gd., occasionally; Mewstone Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. (S.P.): Eddystone
Gds. (E.J.A., S.P.).

Cardiidse.
Cakdium echinatu.m, Linmeus: E. Forbes <& ffcnlei/, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 7, fig.

Living specs, are seldom obtained, 15-30 fms., although dead
shells are moderately common ; Cawsand B., single spec, (r.a.t.) :
Eddystone Gds., fresh dead shells are a characteristic feature of
the fine sand of the ' Inner' and ' Outer' Trawling Gds. (e.j.a.).

Cardium edule, Linnseus: E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. ii,
p. 15, fig.

Hamoaze, abundant in places; occasional specs, from Laira,
Drake's I. and Kum B. ; Yealm E., abundant just below Steer Pt.
(A.J.S.).

Cardium (LiEViCARDiUM) norvegicum (Spengler) : E. Forbes & Hanky,
Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. ii, p. 35, fig.

Common on gravel, 15-30 fms. ; "West Ch. and (Queen's Crd.,
occasionally ; Mewstone Ledge, moderately common in the patches
of gravel between the rocks: 'Mewstone 'AnipJiioxKs' Gd.[ Pame-
Eddystone Gd.s. ; etc. (r.a.t., s.p.): Eddystone Gd. (e.j.a., s.p.).

Garidae.
Gari costulata, Turton : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 394, fig.
(as Fsanimobia).

Occasionally with G. tellinella ; Pame-Eddystone Gds.; Eddystone
(rds. : etc. (s.p.).

292 I'LYMOUril MARINE INVEKTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Pelecypoda — contcL]
Gaki FEiiKOEXsis (ClieuuuLz) : ./. a. Jeffreys, Brit. Coiicl)., vol. ii, p. 396,
fig. (us r>>niiiinohu().

Small specs, not uncoiunioii in Cawsaiid 15., and dead shells are
moderately common in 15-30 tins, (r.a.t.).

Gaki tellinella, Lamarck : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 392,
fig. (as P.^iiii(ni(ihic().

Millbay Ch. ; Mewstone Gds., common in gravel and coarse sand
(r.a.t.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. ; liame-Eddystone Gds. ; etc. (s.P.).

Gaki (Psammocola) depressa. Pennant: J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch.,
vol. ii, p. 398, tig. (as Psammohia vespertina).

Yealm P.,' not uncommon in coarse sand l)etvveen tide-marks

(K.A.T.).

Myidse.
MvA TRUNCATA, Linnjcus : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. i,
p. 1 63, fig.

Single spec, Yealm Sand-bank (a.j.s.).

CoRBULA GIBBA (Olivi) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. i,
p. 180, fig. (as C. nucleus and C. rosea).

Jennycliff B. ; Cawsand B. ; occasionally (r.a.t., s.p.) : Mewstone
Gds. ; Stoke Pt. Gds. ; Eame-Eddystone Gds., not unconmion on
nniddy gravel (s.P.).

Solenidae.
Solecurtus antiquatus (Piilteney) : /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 6, fig.

Jennycliff 15., single spec; 4 m. VV. by S. of liame Hd., single spec ;
dead shells are not uncommon 2-4 m. S.W. of Pame Hd. (r.a.t.).
Solecurtus scopula (Turton) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii, p. 3,
fig. (as ^S". candidus).

Eddystone Gds., single spec, (r.a.t.).
Cultellus pellucidus (Pennant) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 14, fig. (as Solen).

Jennyclilf B. ; Cawsand B. ; connnon (k.a.t., s.p.) : Mallard Sh.,
in sandy mud (s.P.).

Ensis ensis (Linnaeus): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii, p. 16, fig.
(as Solen).

Yealm Sand-bank, very common: Drake's I., not uncommon in
sand at the N.E. corner; sandy patch S. of Batten Castle; Cawi^and
B. ; etc. (r.a.t.).
Ensis siliqua (Linnreus) : J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii, p. 18, fig.
(as Solen).

Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

Solen vagina, Linnicus: J. G. Jeffreys, P,rit. Conch., vol. iii, p. 20, fig.
Drake's I., occasionally on muddy sand N. of the Island (s.P.) :
Yealm Sand-bank (r.a.t.).

Saxicavidae.
Saxicava arctica (Liinueus): E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 141, fig.

Mewstone Gds.; Pame-Eddystone Gds. (R.A.T.): Eddystone Gds.,
on all grounds, attached to shells, the roots of Hydroids, etc. (e.j.a.).

rLYMOUTii MAPvixE invp:i;tebi;ate fauna. 293

[ Pelecypoda— oj/i^/. ]

Saxicaya rugosa (Liiiiiceus): E. Forbes cfc Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol i.,
p. 146, fig.

Everywhere boring in limestone, etc., L.W.-20 fms. (r.a.t.).

Gastrochaenidae.
Gastroch^NA DUBIA (Pennant) : E. Forhcs cfc Hankij, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 132, tig. (as G. modiolina).

The Breakwater, boring in limestone; Asia Sh. ; Millbay Cli. and
Pit; Yealm B., single spec, boring in an oyster shell (r.a.t.).

Pholadidse.
Pholas DACTYLUS, Linmeus: E. Forhcs & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll, vol. i,
p. 108, fig.

Rum B., common in particnlar patches of shale rock (r.a.t., a.j.s.).

Barnea parva (Pennant) : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. i,
p. Ill, fig. (as Pliulas).
Bum B., common (r.a.t.).

Pholadidea loscombiana, Goodall : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. i, p. 123, fig. (as P. pa^pyracea).

Bum B., common at low tide (r.a.t.) : abundant in the red rock
of the Mewstone Ledge, Stoke Pt., etc., 10-20 fms. (s.P.).

Teredinidse.
Teredo navalis, Linmeus : E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll., vol. i,
p. 74, fig.

Not uncommon in drift and submerged wood (R.A.T.).
Breeding : July (w.g.).

Pandoridse.
Pandora in^quivalvis (Linnaeus): E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 207 (as F. rostrata), p. 210 (as P. obtusa), fig.

Cawsand B., occasionally (r.a.t.) : Bame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.,
s.P.) : Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a., s.p.) : Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.P.).

Lyonsiidse.
Lyonsia norvegica (Chemnitz) : E. Forbes <& Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 214, fig.

Cawsand B., occasionally (r.a.t.): single spec, off Stoke Pt. (e.j.a.).

Anatinidae.
CocHLODESiMA PR^TENUE (Pulteney) : E. Forbes cO Hanky, Hist. Brit.
Moll., vol. i, p. 235, fig.
Dead shells only (r.a.t.).

TnRACiA FRAGiLis, Pennant: E. Forbes & Hanky, Hist. Brit. Moll, vol. i,
p. 221 fig. (as T. i)]iaseolina).

Single spec, S. of Batten Castle, in sand (r.a.t.).

TilRACiA PUBESCENS (Pulteiiey) : /. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. iii,
p. 38, fig.

Dead shells only (h.a.t.).

294 I'LVMorni makink invki;tki;i;ath fal'na.

[ Cephalopoda |
CEPHALOPODA.

Ommastrephidae.
TODAKOPSIS Eblan^E (Ball): W. E. Hoi//c, Juuni. Mar. Biol. A.s-soc.,
ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 189.

Plymouth neighbourhood, single spec, (j.t.c. & W.E.H.).

Loliginidae.
LOLIGO FORBESI, Steeiistrup : ir. E. Hoyle, Proc. Phys. iSoc. Edinburgh,
vol. viii, p. 459.

The Sound, occasionally ( w.g.) : practically absent, Jan. -June
1895 (e.j.a.) : Tamar E., below Saltash Bridge; Lynher E. ; small
specs, common, July 1897 (e.w.l.h.): 'Inner' trawling grounds,
large spec. Aug. 1897 (w.i.B.).

Breeding: Apr.-Sept. (w.G.). ,

LOLIGO ]\Iarmor^, Verany : A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6,
vol. V, p. 481.

Off the Draystone, single spec. (w.G.).

LoLlGO media (Linnpeus): A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6,
vol. V, p. 482.

Cawsand B. ; Whitsand B. ; etc. (w.G.) : Jennycliff B. (r.A.t.) :
St. John's Lake, Hamoaze, Aug. 1898 (e.w.l.h.).

Breeding: Apr. -June (w.G.). Late embryos in Oct. (w.g.).

Sepiidae.
Sepia elegans, d'Orbigny : G. Jatta, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xxiii,
p. 160, fig.

Not uncommon on the trawling grounds (e.w.l.h., w.i.is., s.I'.).

Sepia officinalis, Linmeus: G. Jatta, Fauna Flora Neapel, vol. xxiii,
p. 149, fig.

Comes into the bays and estuaries to spawn during July and
Aug. (w.i.B.) : Mewstone Gds. ; Eame-Eddystone G-ds. ; etc.,
occasionally (r.a.t.) : very scarce during 1904 (a.j.s.).

Breeding : July-Sept, (r.a.t.). Hatching : Oct. (r.a.t.).

Sepiolides.
Sepiola atlantica, d'Orbigny: A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 6, vol. v, p. 473.

Common in Cawsand B., Jennycliff B., and Whitsand B. ;
occasionally on the outside grounds in 15-;50 fms. (R.A.T., S.P.) : the
Cattewater, common (r.a.t.): Tanuir E., common just below Saltash
Bridge; Downderry, common in sandy pools; Yealm E. (w.i.B.).

Sepiola scandica, Steenstrup: A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 6, vol. v, p. 472.

The Sound, single spec. Nov. 1887 (w.H.) : Mewstone Gds., single
spec. Oct. 1899 (w.i.b.).

EOSSIA MACROSOMA (delle Chiaji): A. M. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 6, vol. v, p. 469.

Two specs., autumn 1892 (w.G.): occasionally on the Trawling
Gds. (A.J.S.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 295

[Cephalapoda— co«W.: Tunicata ]

Polypodidse.
Polypus vulgaris (Lamarck): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v, p. 144,
fig. (as Octopus).

On the shore and from lobster pots ; generally only a few speci-
mens are obtained during the summer months, but it varies greatly
in abundance in different years (e.j.a.) : exceptionally plentiful* in
1900 (W.G.).
MoscniTES cirrosa (Lamarck): J. G. Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., vol. v, p. 146
(as El e done), fig.

Frequently met with on the trawling grounds (e.j.a.): conmionly
canght in lobster pots (a.j.s.).

TUNICATA.

Molgulidae.
Molgula oculata, Forbes : H. de Lacaze-DiUhiers, Arch. Zool. expt.,
ser. 1, vol. vi, p. 516, fig. (as Anurella).

Mewstone Ledge (t.v.h.): not uncommon in clean fine gravel off
the Mewstone (r.a.t.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.).
Molgula simplex. Alder & Hancock: H. de iMcaze-Duthiers, Arch.
Zool. expt., ser. 1, vol. vi, p. 542, fig. (as Anurella).

Eddystone Gds., on Chcvtopterus tubes, not uncommon (E.J.A.).

Cynthiidse.
Forbesella tessellata (Forbes) : E. Forbes & Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 39, fig. (as Ci/n.thia limacina) ; Jf'. A. Herdman, Journ.
Linn. Soc, Zool., vol. xxiii, p. 578.

liame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., single spec, on
fine gravel (e.j.a.).
Styelopsis grossularia, v. Beneden : R. Hartmeyer, Meeresf. Bergen
[Bergens Mus. Publ], pt. i, p. 46.

Abundant on rocks between tide-marks, Jennyclilf B., Bum B.,
Mt. Edgcumbe; occasionally in dredgings from Millbay Ch., Queen's
Gd., etc. (r.a.t.) : Eddystone Gds., the small squat var. not un-
common on shells, particularly Pecten shells, on the gravels W. of
the Eddystone (E.j.a.).

Breeding : May ; Oct. (W.G.).
Polycarpa pomaria (Savigny) : E. Hartmeyer, Fauna Arctica, vol. iii,
p. 229.

Common at times in the Cattewater, but probably from trawl
refuse; very plentiful on one occasion 4 m. W.N.W. of the Eddystone
(r.a.t.): Eddystone Gds. (e.j.a.): Mewstone Ledge (a.j.s.).

Ascidiidae.
Corella larv^.formis, Hancock : IV. A. Herdman, Journ. Linn. Soc,
Zool., vol. xxiii, p. 588.
Off the Eddystone (W.G.).

* Jonrn. Mar. Biol. Assoc, ser. '2., vol. ii. pp. 'J(J0-73.

29G I'LY.MOUTII .MAKINK IXVF.IJTKHKATE FAUNA.

[Tunicata — cunbl. \
CORELLA PARALLELOGRAMMA (0. F. ^liillcr) : 7.'. Hartmcijer, Meeresf.
Bergen [Bergens Miis. Publ.], pt. i, p. 42, fig.

Duke Rk., single spec, on small stone ; 2 m. S. of Mewstone,
single spec, on stone (w.g.).

Phallusia mamillata, Cuvier: J/". P. A. Traustcdt, Mitth. Zool.-Stat.
Neapel, vol. iv, p. 456, fig.

Moderately common in dredgiugs from the Yealm B., Mewstone
Ledge; and occasionally from tiie Duke Bk., Cattewater, and "West
Ch. Not unconmion washed \\\) on the Yealm Sand-bank between
tide-marks (r.a.t.).

AsciDiELLA aspersa (O. F. Mttller): W. A. Herdman, Journ. Linn. Soc,
Zool., vol. XV, p. 281, fig. (as Ascidia).

Common on the piles of the Promenade Bier, and in Millbay
Dock (R.A.T.): Cattewater (t.v.h.): occasionally lietween tide-marks,
Bum B. (r.a.t.): Yealm B. (r.a.t.) : Yealm Sand-bank (a.j.s., r.a.t.).
Breeding : Apr. (w.G.) : June-July (r.a.t.).

Ascidiella scabra, 0. F. Miiller : W. A. Herdman, Journ. Linn. Soc,
Zool., vol. XV, p. 284, fig. (as Ascidia).

Duke Bk. ; Yealm B. (w.G.): Eddystone Gds., generally present,
but particularly abundant wliere Srrfuhdr/hi Gaz/i is plentiful,
growing at the base of the stem of the Hydroid (e.J.a., S.p.) :
Mewstone Gds. (A.J.8., R.A.T., S.P.): Bame-Eddystone Gds. (r.a.t., s.p.):
Stoke Pt. Gds. (s.p.).

Ascidia venosa, 0. ¥. Miiller: B. Harfmeyer, Meeresf. Bergen [Bergens
Mus. Pul)l.], pt. i, p. 3G, fig-.

Eddystone Gds., occasional specs, (e.j.a.).

Ascidia depressa. Alder: W. Garstanr/, Journ. Mar. B>iol. Assoc, ser. 2,
vol. ii, p. 125, fig.

Not uncommon on the Bolt Head shell gravel attached to stones
(e.j.a.).

Ascidia mentula, O. F. Miiller : IF. Garstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc,
ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 130, fig.

Beny Bks., single spec, var. depressa (w.G., r.a.t.) : Millbay Ch. ;
Mewstone Gds. (e.j.a.).

^Ciona INTESTINAL18 (LinntBus): 7?. Kartmeyer, Fauna Arctica, vol. iii,
p. 297, fig.

Until 1901 this Ascidian was comparatively rare, having only
been recorded occasionally from Millbay Ch., the Cattewater,
Yealm B., Mewstone Ledge, and tiie Eddystone Gds., and the
specimens were never of greater length than 4-5 inches. In that
year the species became for a time very abundant in Millbay Docks,
completely covering the piles and rafts, and many of the specimens
from the Inner Dock were of extremely large size, measuring as
much as a foot in length (e.j.a.): Stoke Pt. Gds., small specimens
fairly common (s.p.).

Breeding: June-July (R.A.T.) : Aug.-Sept. (w.G.).

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA. 297

[ Tunicata — coiU(/.]

Clavelinidae.
DiAZONA YiOLACEA, Savigiiy : W. Gurstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc,
ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 63.

Eddystone Gds. (\v.(;., r.a.t.^) : Stoke Pt. Gd.s. (w.G.).

Perophora banyulexsis, Lahille.

Duke Rk. (w.g.).
Perophora Listeri, Wiegnianii : W. Garstang, Journ. IMar. Piiol. Assoc,
ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 58, tig.

Kocks under the Hoe, abundant (w.H.): Queen's Gd. ; Milll)ay
Pit ; Asia Sh. (a.j.s.) : Duke Ifk. ; Yealni Estuary (w.g.).
Pycnoclavella aurilucexs : W. Garstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc,
ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 53, fig.

Mewstone Gds., attached to various objects from rough ground,
10-20 ftns. ; once in the Sound, forming a thin growth on the stems
of red weeds (\v.g.): Mewstone Ledge, on JSunice/ht (k.a.t., s.P.).
Clavelina LEPADIFORMIS (0. F. Miiller) : IV. Garstang, Journ. Mar.
Biol. Assoc, ser. 2, vol. ii, p. 51.

Drake's I., occasionally at extreme low tide (w.g., r.a.t.): Queen's
Gd. (R.A.T., s.P.) : Mt. Edgcumbe (w.g., t.v.h.): Duke Rk. (w.G., r.a.t.):
Rum B.; Millbay Ch.; Mewstone Ledge; "Wembury B. (T.V.H.) : very
rarely, in 10-15 fms. off the Mewstone and Penlee (w.G.).
Breedhig: June (w.g.): July (r.a.t.).

Distomidae.

DiSTAPLiA ROSEA, Delia Valle: ]\\ A. Rcrdman, Jouiii. Linn. Soc, Zool.,
vol. xxiii, p. G1-").

On stones, dead shells, etc., at Duke Rk. and elsewhere (w.G.).

Archidistoma AGGREGATU.M: W. Garstang, Zool. Anz., vol. xiv, p. 422, fig.
Duke Rk., very abundant on stones; 2 m. S. of Mewstone^ (w.g.).
Breeding: June (w.g.).

Polyclinidae.

Aplidium zostericola: A. Giard, Arch. Zool. expt., ser. 1, vol. i, p. GoG, fig.
Plymouth, attached to the stalks of Boirerhanl'ia or A))iathia (\Y.g.).

Amaroucium albicans (H. Milne-Edwards): W. A. Herdman, Journ.
Linn. Soc, Zool., vol. xxiii, p. 623.
Off the Mewstone (w.g.).
Amaroucium Xordmanni (H. Miliu'-Edwards): A. Giard, Arch. Zool.
expt., ser. 1, vol. i, p. 636.

Church Reef, Wembury B. (w.G.^).
Breeding : June (w.g.).

Amaroucium punctum : A. Giard, Arch. Zool. expt., ser. 1, vol. ii, p. 495.

Single colony, 3 m. S. of the Mewstone (w.g.).
MORCHELLIU.M ARGUS, Miluc-Edwards : W. A. Herdman, Journ. Linn.
Soc, Zool., vol. xxiii, ]). 625.

Connnon everywhere on rocks between tide-marks (R.A.T.): Mill-
bay Ch. (T.V.H.) : Millbay Docks, on wooden piles (W.G.) : Duke J!k.
(e.j.a., R.a.t.): Yealm R. (t.v.h., r..\.t.).
Breeding : Sept. (w.g.).

I

298 PLYMOUTH MAi;iNK INVERTEBRATE FAUNA.

[ Tunicata — could. \

MoRCHELLioiDES Alueri : W. A. Herchian, Proc. Lit. riiil. Sue. Liver-
pool, vol. xl, p. 291, tig.

Asia Sh., on roots of Laminaria and on stones and shells ; Mill-
bay Ch., on stones and shells; Bovisand B., on stones and shells (w.g.).
FRAtiARiUM ELEGANS : A. Giard, Arch. Zool. expt., ser. 1, vol. i, p. 638, fig.
Duke Kk., on stones (w.g.).

CiRCiNALiUiM concresgens: A. Giard, Arch. Zool. expt., ser. 1, vol. i,
p. 6:39, fig.

Drake's I., on reef leading to the Bridge, on roots of Laminaria
at extreme low-water; Pickleconibe, E. of the Fort on roots of
Laminaria ; Devil's Ft., Stonehouse, under a stone, low-water,
spring tide ; Duke Ek., in crevices of stones ; Wembury B., under
overhanging rocks (w.g.).

Botryllidae.
Botryllus VIOLACEUS, H. Milne-Edwards : A. Giard, Arch. Zool. expt.,
ser. 1, vol. i, p. 621, fig.

Common on rocks, under stones and on weed, at low water on all
shores (w.g.).

Breeding: June-Aug. (w.g.).

Botrylloides rubrum, Milne-Edwards: A. Giard, Arch. Zool. expt.,
ser. 1, vol. i, p. 632, fig.

Under the Hoe, common under stones (w.g.).
Breeding : Aug.-Oct. (w.g.).

Doliolidae.
DoLiOLUM NATiONALis, Borgert*: A. Borqert, Ergebn. Plankton Expedn.,
vol. ii, pt. E. a. C, p. 21, fig.

Tow-nettings, Aug. and Sept., 1893, a considerable number (w.g.):
very abundant during 1895 (T.v.ll.) : S. of the Eddystone, several
specs. Nov. 1904 (l.ii.g.).

Salpidse.
Salpa fusiformis, Cuvier: W. A. Herdman, Fiept. Toy. Challenger, vol.
xxvii. (pt. Ixxvi), p. 74, fig. (as 8. riineinata-fasi/ormis).
Aggregated form at surface, N. of Eddystone, Aug., 1901 (r.a.t.).
Salpa mucronata, Forskal : IF. A. Herdman^ Kept. Voy. Challenger,
vol. xxvii (pt. Ixxvi), p. 79, fig. (as S. democratica-mucronata).

Large shoals visited the Sound in 1893, from the middle of June
to the end of the first week in duly (w.g.).
Breeding : Aug.-Oct. (w.g.).

Appendiculariidse.
OiKOPLEURA DIOICA, Fol: H. Luhinumi, Ergebn. Plankton Exped., vol. ii,
pt. E. c, p. 76, fig.

Generally present in tow-nettings, occasionally common (r.a.t.).
Breeding : Mar.-Apr. (w.g.).

Fritillaria BOREALis: H. LolivHinn, Ergebn. Plankton Exped., vol. ii,
pt. E. c, p. 49, fig.

Plymouth; Mar., Oct., Nov., 1899 (p.t.c): Eddystone, Aug., 1903
(L.H.G.).

* Previously recorded as D. Tritonis, Herdman.

[ 299 ]

Pallasia murata, n. sp. : a new British Sabellarian.

By
E. J. Allen, D.Sc.

Director of the Plymouth Laljoratory of the Marine Biological Association.

With Plato X.

Fragments of a large tube bitilt of pieces of coarse gravel and shell,
evidently the work of some Polychaite, have been constantly dredged
for many years on the grounds in the neighbourhood of the Mewstone
and Stoke Point, to the eastward of Plymouth Sound. Not until June
4th, 1903, was the worm first discovered to whose skill as a mason
these tubes are due. On that day the Laboratory fisherman captured
and drew attention to a tube whicli was occupied by a living worm.
The specimen, along with a number of fragments of empty tube, was
obtained on a patch of coarse gravel off Stoke l*oint.

The species thus discovered has proved to belong to the genus
Paliasid, a genus which was founded by de Quatrefages to include
certain foreign Hermellida? (Sabellaridie) which were distinguished by
having two rows and not three of peristomial chtetre in the paleal
crown. As will be seen from the description given below, the new
worm most closely resembles Pallnsia Giardi, Mcintosh, from Port
Jackson, in Australia, and Pullada Icevispinis, Grube, from Upolu, in
the Pacific and from Ascension. The details of its structure, as well
as the large size of the British specimen, indicate that it is a new
species. I propose to name it l\ill(isla nivrata. My thanks are due to
Mrs. L. E. Sexton for the excellent drawings of the specimen reproduced
in Plate X.

Tube. The pieces of tube of Fal/asia which have been dredged
have sometimes reached a length of four to five inches, with an
internal diameter of half an inch. It is doubtful, however, whether a
complete tube has ever been obtained.

The tube is built of two layers, an internal layer consisting of cojn-
paratively small pieces of shell or thin, fiat stones, arranged with
considerable regularity and forming a smooth internal surface, and an
external layer of large pieces of gravel and shell, forming a strong, Itut

NEW .SKRIKS. — V(il. VII. Ml. 2. U

P>Of) PALLASIA MURATA, N. SP. : A NEW BT^ITISII SABELLAKIAX.

rugged and irregular, outer covering. (Plate X., Fig. 5). The particular
tube which contained the living worm had a piece of IlaJccivm halc-
cinum growing near one end. This circumstance, combined with the
fact that short pieces of empty tube only are generally taken with the
dredge, seems to suggest that the tubes are sunk more or less vertically
in the gravel, with one end protruding at the surface.

Colmir. When removed from its tube the general colour of the body of
the worm is seen to be buff, with dark chocolate-brown markings in the
region of the thorax and peristomium. The branchire, which form two
rows along the dorsal surface of the thorax, are dark olive-green, and
the smooth caudal portion of the animal is also dark green.

External clw meters (Figs. 1 and 2). The peristomial lobes, which
carry the crown of palese, are not fused together as in SabcUaria, but
form distinct, elongated organs, pointed at their anterior extremities.
Their dorsal surfaces are slightly concave, and each carries a row of a
little over twenty papillae on its external margin, and two rows of pale^e
(peristomial chastae), one on the external margin immediately inside the
papilla?, and one on the internal margin (Fig. 4).

The outer row of palete contains thirty-four or thirty-five tliin,
straight, translucent, flattened bristles, which run out into long line
points at their distal ends.

Tiie paleae of the inner row, of which eleven can be seen on each
side, are much stouter and stronger than those of the outer row. They
are of a bright yellow colour, straight, flattened, and directed forwards.
The two most posterior chretse of this row appear much smaller than
the others, their tips only protruding througli the skin, and they a})pear
to be separated from the others by a considerable interval, being situated
quite at the hinder end of the inner margin of tlie lobe. The inter-
vening space is not, however, free from paleae, which are present, but
have not pierced the skin.

Behind the rows of palepe (Fig. 4), on the dorsal surface of the worm
are two stout, black hooks, one on each side, embedded in fleshy papillae
and curving backwards. Outside the hooks are two conical papilla-,
which seem to be the two most posterior members of the rows of
papilhu which line the outer margins of the peristomial lobes. They
are, however, of considerably larger size than the papilbe immediately
in front of them.

The inner and ventral surfaces of the peristomial lobes (Fig. 3) are
covered with numerous tentacular filaments, arranged, as is usual
amongst the Sabellaridae, in transverse rows.

The mouth lies on the ventral surface, between the bases of tlie
peristomial lobes (Figs. 1 and 3), and is almost completely surrounded
by a large, hood-shaped structure. Posteriorly the mouth, including

PALLASIA MURATA, N. SP. : A NEW BRITISH SABELLARIAN. 301

the hinder portion of the ' hood - shaped structure,' is bordered by
a curved row of ten rounded, cushion-like lobes, and laterally there
is on each side a much larger conical lobe, as in Sahellaria* Outside
this conical lobe lies the neuropodial cirrus of the first segment, and
externally to this again a small rounded lobe, from in front of which
the short neuropodial bristles of this segment arise.

The two tentacles are best seen from the ventral surface of the
worm. They arise behind (dorsal to) the lip, and extend a little
beyond the anterior ends of the peristomial lobes. The tentacles

* After tlie above was written I sent the specimen of Pallasia to Mr. Arnold Watson,
who is at present engaged in a study of the British Sabellarida?. Mr. Watson lias kindly
allowed me to print here tlie following valuable note exjilaining his views as to the nature
of the structures which surround the mouth : —

"The hood-shaped structure which surrounds the mouth (well shown in Figs. 1 and 3)
is really formed by the ui)per and lower lips combined ; the lop jwrtion lieing due to the
former, and tiie side folds to the latter. As the result of recent study of the British
Sabellaridffi {S. alveolnta and S. spinulosa) I have found that the lower lips (by means of a
membranous structure winding in and out between the tentacular fans) are practically
extended to the distal extremities of the peristomial lobes, while the upper lip is similarly
but more directly so extended right and left, a few foldings only (less than a dozen on
either side) occurring anteriorly, and each fold corresponding with the position of a single
tentacular filament placed in the inner margin of the peristomial lobe. The membranes
which proceed from the upper and lower lips respectively coalesce at the extremity of the
lobes. The result is the formation of a ciliated channel running the length of each lobe,
receiving, by means of the transverse folils, the material collected by the fans and by the
intcrn.-il filaments, and conveying it to tlie mouth of the worm, there to be used for food or
for building purposes. An arrangement, similar in principle, but differing in detail, appears
to exist in Pallasia.

"The hood-shaped structure, the product of the upper and lower lips combined, is com-
moa to all. Fear of causing injury by manipulation of the tentacular filaments, etc., to the
specimen Pallasia, has prevented my making a satisfactory examination, Init by careful pos-
ing and illumination it can be seen that the margin of the npjier lij), though shallower, runs
forward (and not backwards, as would be needful to form a liood), and that it is intimately
connected with the first of a series of filaments which border completely the inner edge of
the peristomial lobe. For the reason before given, the course of the lower li]is cannot be
followed, liut from appearances and analogy with Sahellaria, each lip is probably connected
with the inner edge of the first external fan. An avenue or channel is thus formed
between the inner and outer sets of filaments, leading to and carrying material to the
mouth in the way already explained.

"The main difference to be noted is, that whereas in Sahellaria there are only few inner
tentacular filaments, and those at varying intervals, in Pallasia the inner margin of the
lobes is by their means completely and compactly fenced. Viewed from the dorsal surface,
these inner filaments seem to have a fan-like arrangement somewhat similar to those in the
outer edge, but not quite so well defined.

"The 'curved row of cushion-like lobes,' combined with the 'larger conical lobes,'
forms the ' building organ ' of the worm. They are glandular structures, and doubtless
supply tiie cement with which the sand, stones, and sliells are attached. I have seen the
whole in action in Sahellaria, and by means of sections the glandular structure of the organ
has been jiroved. Tiie peculiar columnar arrangement of the glands is, in Pallasia, to some
extent indicated by its external appearance. In Sahellaria the glandular portion, although
crenate on its edge, is not distinctly divided into cushion-like lobes. Probably the latter
arrangement in Pallasia is a modification enabling the worm to deal more easily with the
very bulky material used in the construction of its tulie, Aknoi.h T. Watson."

302 PALLASIA ML'IiATA, N. SP. : A NEW BRITISH SABELLARIAN.

have the same general shape as the palps of Spiouiclffi and Disomidfe
{e.g. Pcecilochcetus), being D-shaped in section with the flattened (or
grooved) surface, bordered by a crenate membrane.

Meyer (1888, p. 507) suggests that the peristoniial lubes (Paleen-
triiger) represent the notopodia of the first segment of the body. This
view is supported by the striking resemblance between the relations of
the parts in Pallasia murata and that found in Pcecilochcctus* where the
parapodia of the first segment are much enlarged and directed forwards.
It may be noted in this connection that Meyer considers that the Her-
mellidae are nearly related to the Spionida?, with which family Pcecilo-
chcetus also is closely allied.

The neuropodial cirrus of the second segment is seen immediately
behind the mouth. It consists of a flattened, triangular lol)e,f from in
front of which a bundle of hair-like bristles arises. The notopodium
of this segment is represented by two broad, flattened, forwardly
directed, fin-like processes, extending transversely along the lateral
surfaces of the body, and running out into two or three points. No
notopodial chatre can be seen. The notopodial cirrus of the second
segment is well developed, springing from the dorso-lateral surface and
falling inwards and backwards to meet its fellow of the opposite side,
constituting with the latter the first of the pairs of gills with which the
dorsal surface of the worm is furnished.

In the third segment the neuropodium consists of a very small,
pointed lobe, from below and behind which a few short, flattened chretie
spring. There is no neuropodial cirrus. The notopodium consists of a
broad, flattened, fin-like process, with a small secondary lobe or cirrus
attached to the posterior angle of its dorsal surface, and provided with
a row of strong, broad, flattened cluetw (paleas) of a bright yellow
colour. The notopodial cirrus forms a gill like that of the second
segment, though slightly larger.

The fourth, fifth, and sixth segments are very similar in character to the
third, and all have broad, strong chietie in the neuropodia. These chtetie
occur, therefore, in four segments and not in three as in Sahe/lario.

In the seventh segment the parapodia take on the form which persists
generally throughout the abdomen. This region comprises about forty
segments, of which the last few are rudimentary, and on which the
dorsal cirri (gills) persist only in the first fifteen or sixteen. Tlie noto-
podia on all the segments have the form of flattened, fin-like processes,
each bearing along its external margin a closely packed row of uncini.
These uncini (Fig. G) have eight teeth, of which the first is only slightly
developed. The middle teeth are the longest. Two long, tendon-
like filaments are attached to the lower end of each uncinus, and one

* Allen, E. J., "The Anatomy of Pcecilochietus," Quart. Joitrn. Micr. Sci., vol. .\lviii.
p. 79. t On one side of tlie specimen examined this lobe is bifid.

PALLASIA MUKATA, N. SP. : A NEW BKITISH SACELLAlilAX. 303

such filament is also attached to a small projecting piece behind the
first rudimentary tooth. The neuropodial cirri are developed on the
abdominal segments as flattened, bilobed processes arising behind the
bundles of neuropodial chaitffi and joined to the ventral edges of the
notopodia. Of the two lobes of each cirrus the internal is rounded,
the external conical and pointed ; the bilobed structure becomes less
pronounced posteriorly. Each neuropodium has a bundle of long, hair-
like cluette, which are longest on the most posterior segments and show
the structure seen in Fig. 7.

The smooth, caudal portion of the worm is devoid of appendages,
excepting for three or four pairs of rudimentary neuropodial cirri
on its most anterior part. The anus is terminal and is surrounded by a
large, funnel-shaped membrane with a crenate margin.

JDimcnsions. Total length of preserved specimen, 13 cm. (5-1 inches).
Length of first segment to the tip of the peristomial lobes, 22 mm.
Length of thorax, to anterior edge of mouth, about 19 mm. Length of
abdomen, ^6 mm. Length of caudal portion, 26 mm. Maximum breadth,
not including parapodia, 10 mm. Length of tentacles, 18 mm.

Amongst the various species of Sabellaridie (Hermellidic) which have
been described, the two species which most nearly resemble that now
found at Plymouth are SahrUarii/ {Pidlasia) Giardl, Mcintosh
(from Port Jackson, Sydney), which Mcintosh thinks may be identical
with Kinberg's L>/(/domis indicxs, and SaheUarla {Pallasia) IccvispinU,
Grube (from Upolu and Ascension). The three species P. Icvvispinis,
P. Giardl, and P. murata form a distinct group of the genus Pcdlasia
cliaracterised by the deep division of the peristomial lobes (a char-
acter found also in P. Johnstooii, Mcintosh), l)y the straight, slender
and pointed palea3 of these lobes, and by the fact that the dorsal chcctte
of four segments (Segts. 3, 4, 5, and 6) have the modified, stout,
flattened form, instead of this modification being confined to three
segments only.

The following table gives an indication of some of the points in
which the tliree species differ from one anotlier : —

Length (preserved)
]ire;ulth .

Number of Segments .
Papillae on Peristomium

Paleae-

Uncini

-outer row
inner row

P. Iccvispinis,
Grube.

25 -f mm.
4-5

27

16

28, straight and smooth

6 teeth

18 fiicli si(k'

P. Giardi.
Mcintosh.

7 mm.
2 „

11

P. murata,
n. sp.

130 mm.

10 „

46

20

rDenticulate at tip,y 3 ^^^^.^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^
y sliglitly curved j ' °

Curved inwards 1 1 „ „

9 teeth 8 teeth

l'O •_>! rarll Mile

30-1 I'ALLASIA MUKATA, N. SI'.: A NEW IJKITISII .SAUELLAKIAN.

LITERATURE.
( Fmnihj Sabellaridcc.)

1863. Baiku.— Proceed. Zool. Soc. London, p. 109.

L^G;"). QuATRKFAGES.— Hist. Nat. Anneles, T. ii. pp. 308-32.5. llcfcivnc-e.* to pro-

vioiLS literature on the subject will be found here.
186G. KiNBERG. — Annulata Nova. Ofvers k. Vetensk. Akad. Fiuhandl 1866.

p. 350.
1869. Grube. — Ueber die Goldkronchen (Sabellarien oder Hermellen). Jahresb.

Schlcs. Gesell fiir 1869, pp. 69 and 70.

1877. Grube. — Anuelidenausbeute von S.M.S. Gazelle. Monatsber. Kouig. Akad.

Wissen. Berlin, p. 542.

1878. Grube. — Annulata Semperiana, p. 217.

1882. Haswell. — Proceed. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., vii. p. 634.

1885. McIntosh.— Challenger Rejwrt, xii. pp. 414-422.

1887-1888. Meyer, E.— Studien liber den K(irperbau der Anneliden. Mitth.

Zool. Stat. Neajjel., vii. p. 592, viii. p. 462.
1897. Ehlers.— Hamburger niagelhaenische Saiumelrei.se, p. 124.
1900. Pratt.— A Collection of Polycha?ta from the Falkland Islands. Mem.

Manche.ster Lit. and Phil. Soc.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

Illustrating Dr. E J. Allen's paper on " Pallasia murata, n. sp. : a new British
Sabellarian."

Fig. 1. l'all(isi(t munitii, ventral view. Natural size.
Fig. 2. „ „ dorsal view. Natural size.

Fig. 3. Anterior segments, ventral view, x 2.
Fig. 4. ,, „ dorsal view. x 2.

Fig. 5. Tube of Pallima murata. Natural size.

Fig. 6. Uncinus.

Fig. 7. Neuropodial clueta of abdomen.

[ 305 ]

Note on two species of Cucumaria from Plymouth, hitherto
confused as 0. Montagu/' (Fleming) : C. Normani, n. sp.,
and 0. saxicola, Brady and Robertson.

By
S. Pace.

Pending the publication, in a paper now in preparation, of an account
of the Holothuria of the Plymouth district, and an attempt at a revision
of the European species of tliat group, it has appeared advisable to
publish the following sliort note*, with tlie view of removing one of
the most prolific of those sources of error with which the literary
history of the Holothuria has come to be burdened.

Holothuria Montcujui, Fleming, affords a remarkable instance of how
mucli confusion may gather around a specific name ; the species was
itself founded on a misconception, and almost every author who
has since made use of Fleming's name, or who has attempted to dis-
entangle its synonymy, has but made matters rather more involved.
It is not my intention to discuss the synonymy of C. Montarjui at
all fully in the present paper, as it will be more convenient to do
this subsequently, when dealing with other species, and only so much
of the history of the name will now be mentioned as is essential to tlie
immediate purpose of the present note.

In 1808 Montagu (4) described and figured as " MoloiJniria ]\ntadcs,
var.," a species of Cucumarin which he had found on the south coast
of Devonshire. This species, from Montagu's excellent description,
must certainly have been one of the two forming the subject of this
paper ; and which has, among other names, been known as G. Montar/ni,
Fleming. Now, whatever C. Montagid really may be, it certainly
is not conspecific with Montagu's supposed variety of C. pcntades.
Of course, it was undoubtedly Fleming's intention to iionour Montagu
by bestowing his name upon the species discovered by that naturalist ;
but, unfortunately, the description (2) of C. MontcKjui is based upon
specimens of another species collected in the Firth of Forth. Fleming
makes reference under the name Moutofjui to Montagu's description

* My thanks are due to Dr. E. J. Allen, Director of the Plymouth Laboratory, for
allowiuff nie to devote tlie necessary time to this research ; to Prof. F. .T. Hell for
granting me facilities for working at llie collections under his care at the British ISIuseum ;
and to Dr. A. M. Xornian for nnuli frii'iidly criti<'isni.

306 NOTE ON TWO SPECIES OF CUCUMAIUA I'lfOM PLYMOUTH.

of the Devonshire Ciuuiiiiuiaii, Imt Montagu's actual form is probably
the one that is described as Holothuria pcntadcs in the Historif uj
Bvitish Animals.

Fleming's name appears to have dropped into almost complete disuse
until revived by Dr. A. M. Norman (5). Norman, however, overlooked
the fact that Fleming was not dealing with the same species as
Montagu ; and in addition, he has failed to realise that there are
two species of Cucuinaria of somewhat similar outward appearance
living upon the South Devon coast. Norman's CHCuiiinria Montayui
is, in fact, a complex, and it is mainly as the result of this that sub-
sequent authors have experienced so much difliculty in reconciling
their ideas as to the identity of C. Montagui.

Before proceeding further, it will, perhaps, be most convenient to
say something regarding the characters and habits of the two Cucu-
marians in question, and to call attention to the more important points
of difference between them.

During life it is an easy matter to Separate the two forms ; and from
quite an early date in the history of the Plymouth Laboratory they
have there been recognised as distinct species. At Plymouth, for some
years past, these species have been recorded and distributed as " C.
pentactes," and " C. Planci,'' the one known by the latter name being
the one figured by Montagu. However, neither of these names can be
retained. Linnfeus' Holothuria ijentactes is now generally regarded as
being an indeterminate* species; and, whether Brandt's name Planci
be eligible for the common Mediterranean species or not, it certainly
cannot be applied to the very different species from Plymouth. For
the moment, it will perhaps simplify matters if we refer to Montagu's
" Ilolof/mrui peiitacte.% var.," as CuciDiiaria sp. 1 and to the second
Plymouth form as Cucumaria sjj. 2.

Both of these species of Cucumaria, sjj. 1 and sj). 2, are fairly common
in the neighbourhood of Plymouth Sound, being found under stones and
in crevices on rocky ground from low-water mark down to a depth
of a few fathoms. S/k 2 is perhaps the more frequently met with, and
it appears, also, to live in somewhat deeper water.

There are no very great points of difference in the ouhvard form
of the two species, which are also of much the same size ; but sp. 1
is rather shorter and of less even calibre than sp. 2, and it has the
posterior extremity more tapering. I'he j^dia in sj). 1 are numerous,
appearing as though disposed in two })arallel rows in each ambulacrum ;

* Absolutely no useful purpose is served by guessing as to wbat an author had before
liim when founding a species. Unless, in tlie case of an insufficiently described species,
the type-specimen is available, it is far better to entirely discard the name in question
rather than to accept the interpretation of a subsequent author. The latter course
is a fruitful source of error, for it is seldom possible to say delinitely which later writer
is the one to be followed.

NOTE ON TWO SPECIES OF CUCUMAKIA FROM I'LYMOUTII. 307

while in sji. 2 they are so few as to appear arranged in a single zigzag
series ; also, in the latter species, the ijodia are less completely
retractile. The arborescent tentacles are very similar in both forms.
Tiie general body colour of .s/>, 1 is a dirty, brownish white ; while
in sj). 2 it is a pure milk white, excepting the tips of the^^of^^V^ which
are yellowish. Both species are absolutely without maculation. In ,9^;. 1
the neck and the bases of the tentacles are uniformly tinged a rich
purple-brown colour, with more or fewer scattered pigment granules
of an even darker colour. On the other hand, in sj). 2 these parts
are typically pale, although generally they are more or less dusted with
dark-coloured pigment granules, and sometimes, indeed, to such an
extent as to render the neck region quite dark ; but in such a case
the dark pigmentation is never diffuse, as it invariably is in sp. 1. The
interspaces between the anal pa pill ce are darkly pigmented in sp. 1, and
in sp. 2 the interior of the anal orifice is reddish or orange coloured.
A great difference is noticeable in tlie texture of the surface. In
sp. 1 the test, being densely crowded with spicules, is very tough
and coriaceous, and its surface is much wrinkled, while in sp. 2 the
surface of the body is extremely smooth and delicate, marked only
with transverse strife due to the encircling fibres of the superficial
muscle layer.

The spicular (hposits, which are much more numerous in sjj. 1 than
they are in sp. 2, show considerable and characteristic differences. The
general body spicule in xp. 1 is typically lozenge-shaped, perforated
with four large foramina, and always bearing about twelve very
prominent nodules : in sp. 2 the corresponding spicule is invariably
a1)Solutely devoid of nodulation, and an additional foramen is typically
developed at each end of the long axis of the spicule, thus doing away
with the simple lozenge shape. The upper body spicules of the two
forms offer even greater diversity of structure : while in sp. 1 they are
numerous and campanulate in form, in .s/>. 2 they are quite typical
' tables,' and, being few in number, are easily overlooked. The lateral
deposits of the podia in s^^. 1 have their foramina typically in a single
series, while in sp. 2 they are arranged in two or more parallel rows, or
with a group of three or four small foramina at each end of the spicule.

Ileturning now to I)r. Norman's paper on Cucumaria Montagui,
Norman first briefly describes the external features of three spirit
specimens, which he terms specimens ' A,' ' B,' and ' C,' and which
with others had been collected for him by a local naturalist at Polperro,
a few miles west of Plymouth. He then goes on to give a very full and
remarkably lucid account of the spicules of each of these specimens
individually. Specimen 'A' is certainly an example of what we have
termed Cucumaria, .s^a 1 : the general body spicules, the campanulate
deposits, and those of the podia and tentacles being well described.

o08 NOTE OX TWO SPECIES OF CUCUMARIA KKOM I'LYMOUTH.

Kegarding his specimen ' B,' Norman says : " Body-spicule like that of
A, but only a spicule here and there showing any nodulous growth, the
vast majority presenting a perfectly smooth surface ; nor are they so
universally confined to the number of four foramina, the spicules often
having an additional foramen at each end (i.e. four in a direct central
longitudinal line). ... No btdl-shaped spicules have been found in this
specimen, though they have been thorougldy sought for. Pedicels with
lateral spicules, some just as in A, but here more generally witii about
three small foramina at each end." Witli reference to his specimen
' C,' Nomum writes as follows : " IJody-spicule exactly as in B, but here
I could not find a single one that was nodulous, and no bell-shaped
spicules. Pedicel-spicules as in B."

From the above quotations it will be seen that while Norman is thus
describing in his specimens 'B' and 'C ' the body-spicule of a Cucumarian
which is evidently the same as my Cucumaria, sp. 2, he regards this
spicule, by reason of the presence of a few scattered nodulous spicules
in one of the preparations he examined, as a mere modification of that
type which he had met with in his specimen ' A,' and which is charac-
teristic of my Cucumaria, sp. 1. There can, however, be no doubt as to
the absolute distinctness of the two spicule types, and the explanation
of their apparent coexistence in Norman's specimen ' B ' is probably a
very simple one indeed ; namely, that a few spicules of the first species
were adhering to the surface of specimen ' B.' It must be remembered
that all Dr. Norman's specimens had been preserved in the same bottle * ;
and I have been able to prove experimentally that under such con-
dition it is a very easy matter for spicules from one individual to
become transferred to the mucus, enveloping the body of another
specimen ; in fact, I was myself very nearly misled in this manner.
It is also to be noted that Norman was unable to nuike out the upper
body deposits, which, as already remarked, are not very easily seen in
sp. 2, in either of his specimens ' !'. ' or ' C ' ; had he observed these he
would have seen immediately that he was dealing with a species different
to that of his specimen ' A.'

Misled by the apparently enormous variability uf the spicules of
the specimens examined by him, Nornuxn was induced to unite witli
C. Montagu i a couple of other species, Cucumaria Zcfcvrei, Barrels, and
Sem2yeria Drumoiuli, Herouard, which are probably distinct, and also to
suggest the possible identity of still others : a suggestion which subse-
quent authors have not been slow to follow.f

* I have been able to examine tlie original bottle, which is now in the British Museum,
and I ciin afFirni that it Lontaiiis both the species rcfcrrecl to in this paper.

t Koehler (o) coiisidur.s that Noinian erred in uniting lloronard's Colochirus Le/evrei with
JJ. Montagui; but the evidence he adduces in support of this view is rather strange, and
shows that he cannot have read Norman's paper at all carefully, for he instances the
spectacle shajie of the spicules of Norman's Cucumaria MoiUayui, and their invariable want
of nodulation, as points of difference between it and C. Lcfevrei!

NOTE ON TWO SPECIES OF CUCUMAKIA FROM PLYMOUTH. 309

Coming now to the question of the nomenclature of the two species
of Cucumaria, which for convenience have liitherto in this paper been
referred to merely as species ' 1 ' and ' 2.' It is unfortunate that the
name 3fontaf/vi cannot be retained for sjk 1, more especially as this form
would in consequence appear to be as yet without a legitimate name ;
to meet this deficiency I would propose that the species l)e called
CucK inn rill Normani. liegarding the second species, this would appear
to be the same as a form described more than thirty years since by
Brady and Eobertson (1) from the West of Ireland as Cucumaria
saxicola, but which has since remained a ' doubtful ' species.

Cucumaria Nonnani, n. sp.
1808: '' Hulothuria Fcntactes, var.'' : G. Montagu, Trans. Linn. Soc,

vol. ix. p. 112, pi. vii., fig. 4.
1893, Dec: "Cucumaria Montaffui {Y\e,nmv^)" : A. M. Norinftii, Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. xii. p. 469 [excl. specimens ' B '
and ' C ' and synonymy].
Diagnosis. — Body of uniform dirty white or brownish colour, neck
and bases of tentacles darkly pigmented, the pigment diffused. Test
very coriaceous, densely crowded with deposits. Body-spicule typically
lozenge-shaped, nodulous, and with four symmetrically disposed perfora-
tions. The foramina on the long axis of the spicule smaller and nearly
circular, those of the short axis larger and elliptical in outline, the long
axes of the foramina parallel to that of the spicule. U})per body-spicule
campanulate, typically with four short arms which, arising from tiie ends
of a short cross-bar, curve down to, and are inserted on a nodulous
circular rim.

Habitat. — Plymouth, on rocky ground, L.W. — 10 fnis. The type-
specimen from Blackstone Bocks, Wembury Bay.

Type-Specimen. — Has been acquired by the British Museum.

REFERENCES.

1. Brady, G. S., ami RoluTtson, D. — DescvipLions of two lu-w Sjn'ries of BriLiiih

Hoiotluiroidea. Proc. Zool. Soc, vol. 1871, pp. 690-2, ply. Ixxi. lx.\ii.

2. Fleiuing, Jolni. — A Hi.story of British Animals, exliil)itiiig llie Descriptive

Cliaractors and Systematic Arrangement. . . . Edinlmrgli, 1828.

3. Kd'hler, R.— Sur la Delormination et la Synonymie de (pielques HoloUuiries.

Bull. Sci. France Belg., ser. 4, vol. iv, pp. 353-66 ; Sept. 189r).

4. Montagu, George. — Description of several Marine Animals found on the South

Coast of Devon-shire. Trans. Linn. Soc, vol. ix. pp. 81-114 ; 1808.

5. Norman, A. ^i.—Chicumaria Mouhujui (Fleming) and its Synonymy. Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. xii. pp. 469-73 ; Dec. 1893.

[ 310 ]

Ulariiif 'l^iological Association of tjjc ^Iniftb ^linjboiii.

Report of the Council, 1903-1904.

The Council and Officers.

Four ordinary and two special meetings of the Council have been
held during the year, at which tlie average attendance has been ten.
The Council have to thank the Royal Society and the Linnean Society
for allowing the meetings to be held in their rooms.

The Council regret to record the death of Sir Henry Thompson,
Bart., a Vice-President, as well as that of Mr. J. P. Thomasson, a
Governor of the Association, through whose great generosity much of
the early work of the Association in connection with fishery research
was rendered possible.

Professor J. B. Farmer, f.r.s., resigned his seat on the Council during
the year, and the vacancy was filled by the election of Mr. Francis
Darwin, f.k.s.

The Laboratories.

Only repairs of an ordinary character have been necessary at the
Plymouth Laboratory in order to maintain the buildings, machinery,
and equipment in an efficient condition. The Council have still reason
to regret that a good deal of the accommodation of the Laboratory,
althougli utilised during the summer months, is unoccupied during a
large part of the year owing to the limited number of workers whose
services can for financial reasons be retained by the Association. A
satisfactory remedy for this state of things would be found if Univer-
sities and other teaching institutions would offer scholarships to students
anxious to carry on marine investigations at Plymouth.

The Lowestoft I>altoratory has proved adequate for the purposes for
which it was intended. It has been improved during the year by the
addition of a room in wbicli to keep small aquaria and of a dark room
for photographic work.

The Boats.

The steamer Huxley, which was fitted out for the International
Investigations in tlie North Sea, has proved an efficient and sue-

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 311

cessful vessel for the work. She has been at sea throughout the year,

and has experienced weather of all kinds without accident.

The Oitliona worked at Plymouth during last summer. In October

she was sent to Grimsby, where a new boiler is being placed on board,

and the vessel is undergoing a thorough overhaul and refit. Some delay

was experienced in commencing these repairs owing to lack of funds

for the purpose. The Council have to thank the following persons for

generously promising special contributions to enable the work to l)e

proceeded with : —

£

The Court of the Worshipful Company of Fishmongers 200

G. P. Bidder, Esq. . . ... 50

T. H. Riches, Esq. . . ... 50

J. Shaw, Esq. . . . . . 13

Mrs. Bidder . . ... 5

H. F. Bidder, Esq. . . ... 3

The Staff.

The only change which has taken place in the Staff of Naturalists
employed by the Association since the last general meeting has been
the appointment of Mr. J. 0. Borley, m.a., as an Assistant Naturalist at
Lowestoft in place of Mr. C. Forster Cooper, who has resigned.

Occupation of Tables.

The following Naturalists have occupied tables at the Laboratory

during the year : —

G. P. Bidder, M.A., Cambridge (Experiments for determining bottom

currents).
W. R. G. Bond, M.A., Oxford (General Zoology).
Rev. A. Cole, Berkliamsted (General Zoolog}').
A. D. Darbishire, M.A., Manchester (Sponges).
L. DoNCASTER, M.A., Camljridge.
G. P. Farran, B.A., Dublin (Plankton).

E. G. Gardiner, Boston, Mass. (Rhabdocoels).

F. W. W. Griffin, B.A., Cambridge (Embryology of Fishes),
^[iss A. Kelly, Ph.D., Strassljurg (Invertebrate Phy.siology).
Rev. Dr. A. M. Norman, f.r.s., Berkliamsted (Crustacea).
Mrs. S. Pace, Plymouth (Polyzoa).

Mi.9s E. Peacey, Oxford (General Zoology).

Dr. C. Shearer, Cambridge (Development of Annelida).

Miss I. SoLLAS, Cambridge (Echinoderma).

J. SruAitT Thomson, Plymouth (Fishes).

Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, f.r.s., Oxford (Variation of Mollusca).

W. Woodland, T^niversity College, London (Echinoderma).

Six students attended a course of study in Marine Biology conducted
at the Laboratory during the Easter vacation by Mr. L. Doncaster.

312 REPOKT OF THK COUNCIL.

The Library.

Tlie thanks of the Association are due for the following books and

current numbers of periodicals presented to the Library during the

past year : —

Acadt'inie Imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.
Agent General for New South Wales. Report.
Allgenieine Fisclierei-Zeitung.
American ^licroscopioal .Society. Transactions.
American Museum of Natural History. Bulletin.

Memoii-s.

Report.

American Philosopliical Society. Proceedings.
Annaes de Sciencias Naturae.s.
Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab.
Australian Museum. Memoirs.

Records.

Report.

Bergens Museum. Aarbog.

An Account of the Crustacea of Norway, etc. ; by G. 0. Sars.

Bernuula Biological Station. Prospectus.

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Occasional Papers.
Board of Trade. Annual Report of the Inspectors, Salmon and Freshwater
Fisheries, England and Wales.

Annual Report of the Inspectors, Sea Fisheries, England and Wales.

Report of Meetings of Fisheries Representatives.

Boston Society of Natural History. Proceedings.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report.

British Museum. Catalogue of the Madreporariau Corals, etc., vol. iv. : by IT.

M. Bernard,
lirooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. tJuld Spring Harbor Monograplis.

Science Bulletin.

Brown University. Contributions from the Anatomical Laljoratory.

Bryn Mawr College. M()nogra2)hs, Rejtrint Series.

Buli'alo Society of Natural Sciences. Bulletin.

Bulletin Scientifique de la France et de la Belgique.

La Cellule.

College of Science, Tokyo. Journal.

College voor de Zeevisscherijen. Ver.-'lag van den Staat der Nederlandsdie

Zeevisscherijen.
Colombo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica.

Commissioners of Inland Fisheries, Rliode Island. Annual Reports.
Conseil iierm. internat. pour rExi)loration de la Mer. Bulletin des Resultats

acquis pendant les Courses Periodiques.

Publications de Circonstance.

Rapj)orts et Proces-Verbau.x des Reunions.

Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru. Bolelin.

Danske Hydrografiske Laboratorium. Forelobig Meddelelse.

Kgl. J)anske Videnskabernes Selskalj. Oversigt.

Skrifler.

Dept. of Agriculture, Cape of Good Hope. Marine Investigations in South
Africa.

Rejiort of the Government Biologist.

Dept, of Agriculture, etc., Ireland. Heports.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 313

Dept. of Marine and Fisheries, Canada. Annual Report.

Deutscher Seefischerei Verein. Mitteilungen.

La Feuille des Jennes Naturali.'ites.

Field Columbian Museum. Pulilications.

Fisheries Society of Japan. Journal.

The Fisherman's Nautical Almanack ; liy 0. T. Olsen.

Fi-shery Board for Scotland. Annual Report.

The Fishing Gazette.

Fi.schzucht Anstalt, Nikolsk. Aus der Fischzuchtanstalt Nikolsk.

Geological Society of Cornwall. Transactions.

The Government Biologist, Cape of Good Hope. Marine Investigations in

South Africa.
Government Museum, Madras. Report.
Illinois State Lalioratory. Bulletin.

Indian Museum. Illustrations of the Zoology of the R.I.M.S.S. Investigator.
Indiana University. Bulletin.
R. Irish Academy. Proceedings.

Transactions.

Kommission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere, etc.

Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen.
Laboratoire Biologique de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.
Lancashire Sea Fisheries Laboratory. Report.
Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries. Superintendent's Report.

Syllabus of the Lessons on Marine Biology given in lln' Practical Classes

for Fishermen.

Leicester Corporation Museum. Report.

Liverpool Biological Society. Proceedings and Tran.sactions.

Lloyd Library, Cincinnati. Bulletin.

Mj'cological Notes.

Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland. Annual Report.
Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Holl. Biological Bulletin.

Research Seminar.

Mededeeliugen over VisscheriJ.

R. Micro.scoi>ical Society. Journal.

Ministry for Agriculture, Denmark. Fi.skeri-Beretning.

Ministry of Industries, Chili. La Seccion de Ensayos Zool/ijicos i Bot;inicos fltd

Ministerio de Industria.
Ministry of Marine, France. Bulletin de la Marine Marehande.
Le Mois Siientifique.
Musee du Congo. Annales.
Mu.see d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Bulii'tin.
Musee OceanoL:raphicpie de Monaco. Uullcliii.
Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires. Anales.
Museo Nacional de Montevideo. Anales.
Museo Zoologico della R. Univer.sita di Na]inli. Aunuario.
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College. Pnlletin.

Memoirs.

Report.

The Mu.seums Journal.

Naturforschende Gesell.schaft in Basel. Verhandlungen.
Naturhistorischen Museum, Hamburg. Mitteilungen.
Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift.

Verslag.

New York Academy of Sciences. Annals.

314 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

New York Zoological Society. Bulletin.

Report.

New Zealand Institute, Transactions.

Norges Fiskerityrelse. Aarsljeretning vedkoniniende Norges Fiskerier.
Kgl. Norske Yidenskabers Selskab. Skrifter.

Nortluunberland Sea Fisheries Committee. Report on the Scientific Investi-
gations.

La Nuova Notarisia.

Oberlin College. The Wilson Bulletin.

Peterborough Natural History, etc., Society. Reijort.

Physiograpliiske Forening Christiania. Nyt Magazin for Natur\-iden8kaberne.

Plymouth Institution. Annual Report and Transactions.

Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. (Presented by Prof. E. Ray

Lankester, f.r.s.)
Resultats des Canipagnes Scientifiques . . . All)ert I" de Monaco.
Le Reveil Salicole Ostreicole et des Peches Maritimes, etc.
Rijksinstituut voor het Onderzoek der Zee. Uitkomsten van Meteorologische

Waarnemingen.
Rousdon Oljservatory. Meteorological Observations.
Royal Society of Edinburgh. Proceedings.

Transactions.

Royal Society of London. Philosophical Transactions.

Proceedings.

Reports to the Malaria Committee.

Report of the Sleeping Sickness Committee.

Report to the Covernmcnt of Ceylon on the Pearl Oyster Fisheries of the

Gulf of Manaar.

Year-Book.

Royal Society of Yictoria. Proceedings.

Selskabet for de Norske Fiskeriers Fremme. Norsk Fiskeritiilende.

Smithsonian Institution. Annual Report.

Bulletin of the United States National Museum.

Proceedings of the United States Museum.

Societa di Naturalisti in Napoli. Ijollettino.
Societe Beige de Geologie, etc. Bulletin.

Societe Centrale d'Aquiculture et de Peche. Bulletin.

Societe Imp. Russe de Pisciculture et de Peche. Messager de I'lndustrie de la
Peche.

Revue Internationale de Peche et de Pisciculture.

Societe Zoologique de France. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

South African Museum. Annals.

Station Zoologique de Cette. Travaux.

Svensk Fiskeri Tidskrift.

Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademien. Handlingar.

Bihang till Handlingar.

Arkiv for Botanik.

Arkiv f()r Zoologie.

Tokyo Imp. University. Calendar.

A Treatise on Zoology ; edited l>y E. R. Lankester.

Ulster Fisheries and Biology Association. Report.

United Stales Commission of Fish and Fisheries. Bulletin.

Report of the Commissioner.

L^niveisity of California. Publications.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 315

University of Pennsylvania. Bulletin.

Catalogue.

Provost's Report.

University of Toronto. Studies.
Welsh Museum. Report.

Zoological Society of Japan. Annotationes Zoologicso Japonensis.
Zoological Society of London. List of the Fellows.

Proceedings.

Transactions.

Zoological Record.

Zoologischer Station zu Neapel. Mittheilungen.

Prof. C. B. Davenport. Variation in the Number of Stripes on the Sea-
Anemone, Sagartia Luci;e ; by G. C. Davenport.

The Beach Flea : Talorchestia longicornis ; by M. E. Smallwood.

The Director, The Royal Gardens, Kew. Memoires de 1' Academies Imp. des

Sciences de St. Petersbourg.
Dr. E. G. Gardiner. Science (odd parts).

The Tortugas, Florida, as a Station for Research in Biology ; by A. G.

Mayer.

Prof. S. J. Hickson. The Alcyonaria of the Maldives ; by E. M. Pratt.

Prof. C. C. Nutting. Science (odd part).

Owens College. The Mechanics of Development ; by S. J. Hickson.

The Bionomics of C'onvoluta Eoscoffensis, Avith special Reference to its

green Cells ; by F. W. Gamble and F. Keeble.

Ditto, Alistract.

The Culour Physiology of the Higher Crustacea ; by F. Keeble and

F. W. Gamble.

On the Presence of Mobile Fat in the Chromatophores of the Crustacea

(Hippolyte varians) ; by F. Keeble and F. W. Gaml)le.

On a Collection of Turbellaria Polycladida from the Straits of Malacca ;

by F. F. Laidlaw.

On the ^farine Fauna of Zanzibar and British East Africa, etc. Turbel-
laria Polycladida, Part I. ; by F. F. Laidlaw.

Suggestions for a Revision of the Classification of the Pol^'clad Turbel-
laria ; by F. F. Laidlaw.

Dr. H. Fowler. Uber den Ban und die morphologische Auffassung der Siphono-

phoren ; by C. Chun.
Honolulu Museum. Fauna Hawaiiensis.
The Secretary of State for the Colonies. Report of the Government Biologist,

Cape of Good Hope.

To the authors of the Memoirs mentioued below the thanks of the

Association are due for separate copies of their works presented to the

Library : —

Bateson, W. Variation and Differentiation in Parts and Brethren.
Brown, E. T. Report on some Medusae from Norway and Spitzbergen.
Crossland, C. The Coral Reefs of Zanzibar.

On the Marine Fauna of Zanzibar and British East Africa, etc. Poly-

cha)ta L and IL

Darbishire, A. D. On the Result of Crossing Japanese Waltzing with Albino
Mice.

Davenport, C. B. Quantitative Studies in the Evolution of Pecten. Part IIL

Wonder Horses and Mendelism.

Colour Inheritance in Mice.

NKW SKIUKS. — VOL. VII. NU. 2. X

316 RErORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Davenport, C. B. Com]iarison of some Pecteiis from tlie East and tlie West
Coasts of the United States.

The Collembola of Cold Spring Beach, with Special Reference to the

Movements of Poduridpe.

Report on the Freshwater Bryozoa of tlie United States.

Dekhuyzen, M. C. Un liquide fixateur isotonique avec Teau de mer.

Doncaster, L. Experiments in Tlyhridization, with .special reference to the

Effect of Conditions on Dominance.
Driesch, H. Kritisches und Polemisclies, IV.

Drei Aphorismen zur Entwickelungsphysiologie jiingster Stadien.

Ueber Anderungen der Regidationsfiihigkeit im Yerlauf dor Ent wickcliing

bei Ascidien.

Uber Seeigelba-starde.

Edwards, C. L. Note on Phrymosoma.

Farran, (i. P. Record of the Copepoda taken on tlie Mackerel Fishing Grounds
off Cleggan in 1901.

The Nudibranchiate Molluscs of Ballynakill and Bofin Harbours, Co.

Galway.

Fowler, G. H. Contributions to our Knowledge of the Plankton of the Faeroe

Channel. Nos. VII. and VIII.
Gerould, J. H. Studies on the Embryology of the Sipunculidae. Part I.
Giard, A. Caracteres dominant transitoires chez certains hylirides.

Notes Ethologiques sur le Hareng des c6tes du Boulonnais.

E.xuviations motamorphiques chez les Ascaride.s des Poisson.s.

Dissociation de la Notion de Paternite.

La ]\Iouche de I'Asperge et ses Ravages a Argenteuil.

Les Faux Hybrides de Millardet et leur Interpretation.

Giles, G. M. On Pre-pupal changes in the Larvse of the Cnlicida?.
Gough, L. H. Plankton English Channel, February-May, 1903.

Ditto, August, 1903.

Grosvenor, G. H. On the Nematocysts of /Eolids.

Gurney, R. Metamorphoses of the Decapod Crustaceans ^Egeon (Crangon)

fasciatus and .Egeon (Crangon) trispinosus.
Hickson, S. J. On the Coelenterata collected l)y ^Ir. C Crosslaiid in Zanzibar.

T. Ceratella minima.

The Alcyonaria of the Maldives. Part 1.

Holt, E. W. L., and Byrne, L. W. On a Young Stage of the White Sole,
Pleuronectes cynoglossus.

The British and Irish Gobies.

Ilur.-t, R. On a case of Commcnsalism of a Fish {Amphiprioii intennediiis,
Schleg.) and a large Sea-Anemone {Dixcosoma spec).

New Species of the Genus Eu])hrosyne from the Siboga Expedition, with

a Table of the Species hitherto known.

Kiser, H. Dyrclivet i Drobaksund.

Laidlaw, F. F. On a Land Planarian from Iluliili Male Atoll, with a note on

Leptoplana jKinhilia Liiidlaw.
Mcintosh, W. C. On the Distribution of Marine Animals.

The Story of a Pearl.

Marine Annelids (Polych;eta) of South Africa. Part I.

Man, J. G. de. Nematodes Libres [of the "Belgica" Ex2)edition].
Norman, A. ]\1. A Monogra])h of the British Spongiadre. Vol. IV.

British Land Lsopoda. Supplement.

New Generic Names for .some Entomostruca and Cirrij)idia

Copepoda Calanoida, chiefly Al)yssal, from the Faroe Channel and other

Parts of the North Atlantic.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 317

Nutting, C. C. The Bird Rookeries on the Island of LaN'san.
Punnet, R. C. The Enterojiueusta of the Maldives and Laccadives.

Note on the Proportion of the Sexes in ("arcinus nncnas.

On Nutrition and Sex-determination in Man.

Schmidt, J. Some Preliminary Remarks on the Identification of Pelagic
Postlarval forms of Gadoids.

Shipley, A. E. On the Ento-Parasites Collected by the Skeat Expedition, etc.

Report on the Gephyrea collected by Prof. Herdman, at Ceylon, in 1902.

Some Foreign Zoological Gardens.

The Order of Insects.

Some Parasites from Ceylon.

Smith, J. C. The Animal Parasite supposed to be the Cause of Yellow Fever,

Discovery of Yellow Fever Germs.

Stenius, S. Der Osmotische Druck im Moerwasser.

Stevens, N. M. Further Studies on tlie Ciliate Infusoria, Licnophora, and
Boveria.

Tattersall, W. M. Notes on the Classification and Geographical Distribution

of the Cephalochorda. •

Thompson, M. T. The Metamorphosis of the Hermit Cral).
Todd, R. A. Notes on the Invertebrate Fauna and Fish-Food of the Bays

between the Start and Exmouth.
Trybom, F. Two New Species of the Genus Euconaxius.
Walker, A. 0. Report on the Isopoda and Amphipoda Collected by Mr. G,

^Murray, etc.

Amphipoda of the " Southern Cross " Antarctic Expedition.

Walker, A. 0., and Scott, A. Crustacea from Abd-el-Kuri.

Wallace, W. Observations on Ovarian Ova and Follicles in certain Teleostean

and Elasmobranch Fishes.
Watson, A. T. Observations on the Habits of the Onuphidae, etc.

On the Structure and Habits of the Polychaeta of the Family Ammo-

charidre.

Williams, J. L. Alternation of Generations in the Dictyotacete.

Studies in the Dictyotaceoe. Parts I. and II.

Woodcock, H. M. On Myxosporidia in Fiat-Fish.

Notes on a Remarkable Parasite of Plaice and Flounders.

General Work at the Plymouth Laboratory.

The detailed reports on the trawling experiments in the bays on the
Sotith Devon coast, and on the study of fish scales as an index of the
age of fishes, have been published in the Journal of the Association,

A report on the local distribution of the invertebrate fauna of the
Plymouth neighbourhood, summarising the work which has been done
in this direction by the Association, is now nearing completion. This
report will, it is hoped, be published during the course of the present
year.

At the request of the British lioyal Commission, an exhibit has
been prepared on behalf of the Association and sent to the St. Louis
P'xhibition, It illustrates the development and growth of sea fishes,
and emljodies a representative collection of the principal invertebrate

318 RErOHT OF THE COUNCIL.

animals wliich serve as the food of fishes. This exhibit has been
successfully transported to St. Louis and set up in the Exhibition.

The collection and supply of specimens for teaching purposes and
for museums has been continued as heretofore. This part of the work
of the Laboratory has grown considerably during the last few years,
owing to the fact that the teaching of biology is receiving more and
more attention in secondary and technical schools, and that local
museums are also paying more attention to the subject. It is a matter
for regret, however, that the increase in these directions is accompanied
by a decrease in the amount of material supplied to the Universities
and University Colleges, where the number of zoological students
appears to be generally diminishing.

The International Fishery Investigations.

Section I.— NORTH SEA WORK.
A. WORK OF THE S.S. "HUXLEY."

Trawling Investigations. — Except when required for the quarterly
hydrographic cruises in the English Channel, the ss. Huxley has been
continuously engaged during the past year in the investigation of the
North Sea fishing grounds. In carrying out this work the Association's
naturalists have directed their principal attention to the analysis of
hauls made on the various grounds with the large commercial trawl,
the quantities and sizes of the fishes caught having been systematically
recorded in every case,

LTp to the end of May, 1904, the Hu.dnj had made thirty-one
voyages, often of two or three weeks' duration, and had taken 349
hauls of the great trawls (otter and beam), in addition to other ex-
periments with special apparatus.

In accordance with the scheme of international co-operation, most
attention has been paid by the Huxley to the western half of the
North Sea south of latitude 56° N. ; but all the important trawling
grounds south of that latitude have been visited, and special voyages
have been made to assist in the survey of the continental grounds
where small flat-fish particularly abound. Nearly one -third of the
Huxley's hauls {i.e. 110) have been taken upon or on the borders of the
English and continental "nursery grounds."

Fish Measured. — On the voyages mentioned over 100,000 fishes
have been measured on the grounds where they were caught, as shown
in the following table: —

Plaice. Haddock. Others. Totals.

North Sea . . 34,809 8,388 6:2,106 ... 105,303
English Channel . 252 — 2,059 ... 2,311

35,061 8,388 64,165 ... 107,614

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 319

Marking Experiments. — Experiments have been systematically
carried out in the marking and liberation of fishes, especially plaice
and soles, over wide areas, in order to throw light on their migrations
and rate of growth, and on the intensity of fishing under modern
conditions. Altogether, up to the end of May, 1904, 2,881 fishes had
been marked and set free. Of these the majority were liberated in the
localities where they were caught, but during the present year about
1,200 marked plaice have been transplanted to the Dogger Bank from
the English, Dutch, and Danish nursery grounds, in order to test the
possibility of their rate of growth being more rapid in parts of the
sea where the competition for food is apparently less keen. If these
transplantation experiments should be successful, the possibility of
restocking exhausted areas in the North Sea will have entered upon
a new phase.

The success of the marking experiments in general is shown by the
satisfactory percentage of marked fish which have been returned by
the fishermen, by the general consistency of the returns, and by the
interesting results obtained in regard to the seasonal migrations of the
fish. Of 539 plaice liberated up to the end of May, 1903, the number
of recoveries amounted twelve months later to 125, i.e. 23 per cent.
The experiments off' the north coast of Holland, referred to in the last
Annual Ifeport of the Council, were repeated during the autumn and
winter of 1903. The movements of plaice again showed the same
southward tendency, and a simultaneous migration in the same
direction was exhibited off the English coast. Plaice marked and
liberated on the Leman Ground (about fifty miles east of Cromer) on
December 10th, were recovered in February off the Suffolk coast, and
in March in the English Channel off Winchelsea (a minimum distance
of 175 miles).

Mr. A. Meek, Lecturer in Biology at the Durham College of Science,
and Director of the Marine Laboratory at Cullercoats (since destroyed
by fire), has kindly co-operated with the Association's staff in the
marking experiments, and, in addition to special experiments, liberated
about 200 marked plaice on behalf of the Association off the coast of
Northumberland during the summer of last year. Most of the fish
recovered were recaught locally, but several were subsequently re-
covered in Scottish waters, off St. Andrews Bay and the Isle of May.

Special Experiments. — During the present year special experiments
have been made on the vitality of trawl- caught fishes and on the
proportion of small fishes which escape through the meshes of the
trawl.

In May, drift-bottles were thrown overboard at intervals along lines
between Lowestoft and Heligoland, and between the Wash and the

320 REPOirr of the coqncil.

Dogger Bank, in order to determine the direction of drift during the
spawning season of the sole and turbot.

The HiLiIcy has recently completed a special survey of the spawning
grounds of the sole in the western part of the North Sea, and an
investigation of the distribution and abundance of the eggs of this
species in the same area, in co-operation with simultaneous surveys by
the Poseidon and Wodan in the German and Dutch areas respectively.

P.. LABOKATOEY INVESTIGATIONS.

Age of Fishes. — Considerable attention has been paid in the
Laboratory at Lowestoft to the investigation of the age and rate of
growth of fishes, especially the plaice, both by Petersen's statistical
method based on the periodicity of the spawning season, by Peibisch's
method based on the periodicity of growth of the otoliths, and by
direct observation of the increase in length of marked fishes. The

'&^

result of these investigations is to show that the age of individual
plaice can now be determined with considerable exactitude — a matter
of much importance for the scientific treatment of fishery problems.

Food of Fishes. — Extensive material has been collected and worked
up for determining the physical and biological characteristics of the
various grounds, and the food-contents of many thousands of fish-
stomachs have been studied and recorded.

C. FISHEPMEN'S PECOPDS.

1903-1904. — The system of fishermen's trawling records has recently
been extended to Grimsby, at which port several specially reliable
trawling skippers have been selected to take part in the work. The
Lowestoft records are being continued. These records deal with in-
dividual hauls of the trawl, and have been found useful for supplement-
ing and checking the results of the HiLxley's investigations, and in
providing a kind of outside " intelligence department " for keeping the
scientific staff informed of the most profitable regions for investigation
from time to time.

1881-1882. — Log-books of a somewhat similar cliaracter, initiated
by Mr. Olsen, of Grimsby, with the co-operation of the late Mr. Frank
Buckland, were kept by a number of east coast fishermen in 1881 and
1882, and have been kindly entrusted to the Association by Mr. Olsen
for analysis and report.

1892-1893. — Records more closely approximating to those now
being kept were again filled up for Mr. Holt, when in the service of
the Association, by various Grimsby fishermen in 1892 and 1893.

The Association is thus in the possession of a unique series of

IJErORT OF THE COUNCIL. 321

ti.slieniiea's records which distinguish the fishing ground, date and
duration of fishing, and amount of fish caught for each haul of the
trawl. All the records have been tabulated for the purpose of com-
parison, and it is hoped that light will be thrown by means of them,
in conjunction with the scientific survey now in progress, upon any
changes which have taken place in the distribution and abundance of
fish on particular grounds during the past twenty-three years.

1865-1874. — liecords of the llamsgate trawl-fishing, covering the
greater part of the period from 1865 to 1874, have also been placed in
Mr. Garstang's hands by the fisherman who kept them. The same
boat is still fishing from llamsgate, and the present master has under-
taken to keep a record of liis catches for comparison with the old ones
referred to.

The thanks of the Association are due to the Eastern and North
Eastern Sea Fisheries Committees for the privilege of trawling within
the waters under their jurisdiction, and to their Inspectors, Mr. Herbert
Donnison and Captain K. E. Simpson, for much friendly assistance ;
also to the Great Central Ifailway Company, the Boston Corporation,
and the Great Eastern Eailway Company, for privileges in connection
with harbour facilities at Grimsby, Boston, and Lowestoft.

At several ports the work in connection with the reception and
transmission of marked fish recovered by the fishermen has been con-
siderable. The best thanks of the Association are due to their agents
in this connection, especially to Mr. 0. T. Olsen, f.l.s., of Grimsby, to
Mr. W. C. Edwards, Statistical Officer to the Board of Agriculture and
Fisheries at Hull, and to Messrs. A. Johnson and J. Eoberts, Inspectors
of the Fishmongers' Company at Billingsgate.

Last, but not least, the Association is indebted to the fishing-boat
owners and fishermen of the east coast for the general interest which
they have displayed in the investigations in progress, and for the
confidence and friendly spirit with whicli they have co-operated with
the naturalists of the Association in the work.

Section IL— HYDROGRAPHIC AND PLANKTON WORK
IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

Six (piarterly cruises have now been made in the English Channel,
viz. in February, May, August, and November, 1903, and February and
May, 1904, on each of which the programme of hydrographic and
plaidvton observations described in last year's Eeport has been carried
out. The material collected up to February, 1904, has been worked
out and the results forwarded to the Central Bureau in Copenhagen.
The ol)servations made up to November, 1903, have already been pub-
lished in the International Bulletin.

322 KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

The number of stations at wliich observations are made has been
sliglitly increased, three stations having been added at the eastern end
of the Channel. At the same time tlie plankton programme has been
somewhat reduced at certain of the shallower stations where no marked
ditt'erence in the organisms found at different depths could be proved
by the methods employed.

In addition to the work done on the cruises, samples of sea-water
and of plankton are being regularly taken on a number of lightships
in the Channel and on the Irish coast, and samples of water are obtained
every fortnight from steamers crossing the Channel from Newhaven to
Caen and from riymouth to the Channel Islands. A number of samples
have also been taken at the mouth of the Englisli Channel and in the
Bay of Biscay l)y officers of steamships navigating those waters.

The hydrographic observations during 1903 and the first three months
of 1904 show that the direction of the flow of the waters of the English
Channel is from west to east, and that they are derived from a northerly
current of about o5'6 7oo S. from the Bay of Biscay and from a southerly
current of about 35"2 7oo S. or less from the Irish Sea and Bristol Channel.
The meeting-place of these waters may be roughly fixed as south of the
Scilly Islands in mid-channel, and it will be generally found that the
salinity of the water increases as we pass this point from west to east.
Owing to the varying salinity and temperature of these two currents it
has been found that at the entrance to the Channel the water is often
divided into distinct layers, while the changes of their relative velocity,
combined with the general drift up Channel, give rise to alternate areas
of high and low salinity which follow one another eastward. On the
line between the Isle of Wight and Cape Bartieur the salinity has been
low on all five cruises, a state of things due in all probability to the
amount of fresh water discharged from Southampton Water and the
Seine. The presence of denser water south of Beachy Head, however,
points to the occasional passage of a high salinity current across this
line.

In February (1903) the Channel from the Land's End to the Isle of
Wight was filled witli water of 35-4 7oo S., bounded by fresher water on
the west and east, and by water of 35-5 7oo i^ear Ushant, the general
features pointing to a quick movement. No observations were made
east of the Isle of Wight.

In May the area of 35*4 7oo S. had diminished in size, being encroached
upon by water of 35'6 7oo on the south-west and by fresher water on the
east. In this month the area of 354 7oo S. south of Beachy Head was
first observed, and the increased distance between the isohalines indi-
cated a slower movement.

In August the low-salinity water of the Irish Sea had spread south

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 323

and east so as to cut off' the 35-4 7oo water of the western part of the
Channel from the dense water of the Bay of Biscay on the siaface,
though there was still a connection by an undercurrent. The general
velocity of the currents had reached its minimum, whilst the difference
in temperature between the top and bottom was now greatest. The
isolated area in the eastern part of the Channel was not well marked,
but this may have been due to the want of observations far enough
south.

In November there were signs of an increased velocity, and water of
high salinity was now found west of Ushant, though there was still
a narrow strip of fresher water between this point and the area of
35-4 7oo S. south of Devon and Cornwall. The dense water in the
eastern part of the Channel was well marked.

In February, 1904, the conditions were complicated by the great
gale at the beginning of the month, and the distribution of salinity
for the first ten days, as shown by the analysis of samples taken on
liners, lightships, etc., differs considerably from that obtaining from
February 16th to March 1st, when the observations on the Huxley
were made. During the first period a large area of 35-6 7oo S. extended
from a point about 100 miles south of the Irish coast easterly to mid-
channel south of Land's End, and thence south-west across the Bay of
Biscay, This was quickly obliterated by a southerly flow from the
Irish Sea, and during the latter half of the month it only appeared as
an isolated area marked by a single sample in mid-channel north of
Ushant, the general conditions east of this point resembling those of
May in the previous year.

It would appear that during the summer and early autumn the
Channel waters were derived largely from the Irish Sea, while during
the rest of the year the high -salinity water of the Bay of Biscay
preponderated.

An interesting conclusion regarding the effect of gales may be
drawn from the work done during the period dealt with in this Beport,
namely, that they cause considerable variations in the physical con-
ditions at any point, but these variations do not persist for more than
a few days. The great gale at the beginning of February, 1 904, caused
a marked rise in salinity of the surface water at the lightships round
the coast from Cardigan Bay to the East Goodwin, with the exception
of the Ourrs and Jiojjdl Sovereign light-vessels, where an equally well-
marked fall occurred. In less than a week, however, normal conditions
again prevailed, and as it is impossible to make observations on a small
steamer like the Hiuley during or for a few days after a gale, it is
almost certain that the results obtained on any cruise show the normal
conditions for the season. The variations mentioned show that the

o ,■

24 KEPOUT OF THE COUNCIL.

denser waters were driven up Channel and insliore, causing a rise of
salinity, the fall at the Oircrs and Koijal Sovereign being easily ex-
plained 1))' the fact that the Isle of Wight is always surrounded by
comparatively fresh water, and that a strong gale from the south-west
or west would drive this eastwards along the shore.

The plankton observations show that a large proportion of the more
oceanic organisms found off the mouth of the Channel do not penetrate
for any considerable distance up Channel, even along a central axis, the
percentage of oceanic species having on each cruise fallen below forty
at the stations on the line from the Isle of Wight to Cape Bartieur.
When compared with those taken by other countries in the southern
part of the North Sea, the observations indicate that very similar con-
ditions exist in the eastern end of the English Channel (from the Isle
of Wight to the Straits of Dover) to those found in the southern part
of the North Sea, between a line from the Wash to Heligoland and the
Straits of Dover.

The results both of the liydrographic and of the plankton work can
only be interpreted on the supposition that during the period under
investigation there was on the whole a constant passage of water from
the Channel into the southern part of the North Sea, but the rate at
which this passage of water took place must have been very slow.

Published Memoirs.

The following papers, either wholly or in part the outcome of work
done at the Laboratory, have been publislied elsewhere than in the
Journal of the Association : —

Aders, "W. M. — BeitriUje :air Kenntnis der Spermatogenese hci den Colenteraten.
Zeitscli. Wiss. Zool., vol. 74, pp. 81-108. 1893.

Davenport, C. B. — QuantiUdive Studies in the Evolution of Peden- HI. Com-
parison of Ferten opercularis from three locolities of the British Isles. Proceed.
Aniericaii Acad. Arts and Sci., vol. xxxix., 1903, pp. 123-159.

Grosvenor, G. H.—On the Nenwtoajsts of JEolids. Proceed. Hoy. Soc, vol.
Ixxii., 1903, pp. 462-48G.

Gurnet, R. — The Metamorphoses of the Decapod Crustaceans .Egeon (Crangon)
FA.sciATUS Ris.so, II ml .Eg EON (Crangon) trispinosus (Hailstone). Proceed. Zool.
Soc, London, 1903, II., pp. 24-30.

Iloi/r, E. W. L., and Byrne, L. W.—The Britislt oml Irish Gobies. Report on Sea
and Inland Fisheries of Ireland for 1901. Part II., i)p. 37-66. Publi-shed 1903.

Keehle, F, and Gamble, F. W. — The Colour-jihijsiologii of Higher Crustacea.
Phil. Tran.s. Roy. Soc. Series B. vol. 196, pp. 295-388, 1904.

Wallace, W. — Observations on Ovarian Ova and Follicles in Certain Teleostean and
Elasmobranch Fishes. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xlvii. pp. 161-213.

Wat.son, a. T. — Observations on the Habits of the Oniiphidee. Trans. Liverpool
P.iol. Soc, vol. xvii. pp. 303-318. 1903.

Woodcock, II. "M.— On Myxosporidia in Fiat-Fish. Rejjort for 1903 on the
Lancashire Sea Fi.sheries Lahoratory, pp. 46-62.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

325

Donations and Receipts.

The receipts for the year for the ordinary work of the Association
include the grants from His Majesty's Treasury (£1,000) and the
"Worshipful Company of Fishmongers (£400). Special Donations
(£271), Annual Subscriptions (£113), Ivent of Tables in the Labora-
tory (£16), Sale of Specimens and Fish (£285), Admission to the
Tank Koom (£141).

Vice-Presidents, Officers, and Council.

The following is the list of gentlemen proposed by the Council for
election for the year 1904-1905 : —

President.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, LL.D., F.R.S.

Vice-Pr
The Duke of Abercorn, K.G., C.B.
Tlie Eail of St. Germans.
The Earl 6f Morley.
The Earl of Dlcie, F.K.S.
Lord AvEBURY, F.R.S.
Lord Tweedmouth, P.C.
Lord Walsingham, F.R.S.
The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, M.P.,
F.R.S.

Rear-Adniiral Sir W. J, L.

Joseph Chamber-

esidents.

Tiie Right IIou.

LAIN, M.P.

Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.

Sir Michael Foster, K.C.B., M.P,

F.R.S.
A. C. L. GiJNTHER, Esq., F.R.S.
Sir John Murray', F.R.S.
Prof. Alfred Xewton, F.R.S.
Rev. Canon Norman, D.C.L., F.R.S.
Wharton, K.C.B., F.R.S.

Members of Council.

G. L. Alward, Esq.
G. P. Bidder, Esq.
G. C. Bourne, Esq.

F. Darwin, Esq., F.R.S.

G. Herbert Fowler, Es(i.
S. F. Harmer, E.sq., F.R.S.
Prof. W. A. Herdman, F.R.S.

Prof. G. B. Howes, F.R.S.

J. J. Lister, Esq , F.R.S.

H. R. Mill, Esq.

Prof. E. A. MiNCHiN.

Prof. Charles Stewart, F.R.S.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, C.B.

R. N, Wolfenden, Esq., M.D.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, Esq.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, E.sq., The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, 1'1\ luoiilh.

The following Governors are also members of the Council : —

The Prime Warden of the Fish-
mongers' Company.

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fibluuongers'
Company).

Prof. Sir J. Burdon Sanderson, Bart.,
F.R.S. (0.\ford University).

A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S. (Caml)ridge
Univer.sity).

Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, F.R.S. (British Association).

[ 326 ]

gr.

Statement of Receipts and Expenditure

£, s. d.
To Current Income : —

H.M. Treasury 1,000 0 0

Fishmongers' Company (including half-year's payment

of £200 on account of year to 31st May, 1905) ... 400 0 0

Annual Subscriptions 113 7 0

Kent of Tallies 16 12 0

Interest on Investment 18 19 11

.. Extraordinary Receipts : —

Donations to Fund for Repair of ss. Oithona —

Fishmouf^ers' Company £200 0 0

G. P. Bidder 50 0 0

J. Shaw 13 0 0

Mrs. A. Bidder 5 0 0

H. F. Bidder 3 0 0 271 0 0

Advance on Loan 100 0 0

Cheque drawn some years ago, but not presented for

l)ayment, written back 10 0 0

s. rf.

1,518 18 11

381 0 0

Investment held 31st May, 1904, £500 Forth Bridge Railway
4% Guaranteed Stock.

£1,929 18 11

Examined and found correct,

(Signed) Edwin 'WATEnuousE, F.C.A.

E. T. BuowNE.
June 28th, 1004.

Geo. p. Bidder.

E. A. MiNCHIN.

[ 327 ]

for the Year ending 31st May, 1904.

dr.

By Balance from last year, viz. : — £ s. <?. £ s. d.

Amount due to Bankers 156 3 11

Zess Cash in hand 39 2 11 117 1 0

„ Current Expenditure : —
Salaries and "Wages —

Director ! 200 0 0

Naturalist 250 0 0

Director's Assistant 150 0 0

Wages 421 2 7 1,021 2 7

Travelling Expenses 54 14 0

Library 87 19 1

Journal — Printing and Illustrating 245 19 8

Z«s Sales of Journal 22 7 2 223 12 6

Buildings and Public Tank Room —

Gas, Water, Coal, etc 74 13 9

Stocking Tanks, Feeding, etc 29 14 3

Maintenance and Renewals 122 14 11

Rent of Land, Rates, Taxes, and Insurance 17 0 7

244 3 6

Zcss Admissions to Tank Room 141 5 10 102 17 8

Laboratory, Boats, and Sundry Expenses —

Stationery, Office Printing, Postage, etc 85 12 10

Glass, Chemicals, & Apparatus £95 18 6

icssSales 5 18 7 89 19 11

Purchase of Specimens 35 7 0

Maintenance and Renewals of Boats,

Nets, Gear, etc £257 19 0

icss Sales 124 18 7 133 0 5

Coal and Water for Steamer 84 17 7

428 17 9
Less Sales of Specimens, etc. (including £50 from
International Investigations Commission for use of
ss.Oithoym) 335 3 7 93 14 2

Interest on Bank Overdraft 3 15 6

„ Extraordinar}' Expenditure — 1,704 16 6
Cost of Exhibit sent to St. Louis Exhibition — to be re-
funded by the Britisli Royal Commission 173 1 6

Zcss Received on Account 52 3 7 120 17 11

„ Balance, being cash at Bank and in liand, 31st May,
1904, viz. :—

Plant, Repairs, and Renewals Fund, including £25

added during year 116 10 8

Donations to Fund for repair of ss. Oithona received

per contra 271 0 0

387 10 8
Zcss Amount overpaid on General Account 283 6 2 104 4

£1,929 18 11

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association.

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888. Price Is.

New Series {Royal 8ro),

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 plates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899-1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., Nos. 1 and 2.

Separate numbers (generally 4 to one volume), in wrappers, 3s. M. ; to ^lembers, 2s. M.

Loudon Agents; Messrs Dulau & Co., 37, Soho Sc^uare, W.

Cloth 4to, 150 2T-) 18 2>lates (12 coloured).

A TREATISE ON THE COMMON SOLE.

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.R.S.E.,
Late Fellow of University College, Oxford ; Naturalist to the Association.

Price to Members, 20s. ; to Non-Members, 25s.

Medium 8vo, 368 j^age.". 159 Illastrations and two Maps. Price Is. Gd. net.

{Macinillan and Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE .AIARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Prepared express! // for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries,

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMEULY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ;
NATURALIST OX THE .STAFF OF THE MAIIINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION'.

G^Qllit!) Preface hv
E. RAY LANKESTEK, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

I'ROFESSOll OF COMPARATIVE ANATo.MV IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA.

BULLETIN

DES RESULTATS ACQUIS PENDANT LES COURSES

PEIUODIQUES.

Published Quarterly. Price per Volume of Four Numbers,

18 Kroner (£1).

RAPPORTS ET PROCES-VERBAUX DES REUNIONS.

Vol I., 1902-1903. Kr. 6.

PUBLICATIONS DE CIRCONSTANCE.

No. I. C. G. Joh. Petersen: How to Distinguish between Mature and Im-
inaturo Plaice throuifhout the Year. A Preliminary Communication.
8 pp., 1 pi.; July, 1903. Kr. 1.

No. 2. Martin Knudsen : On the Standard-Water used in the Hydro-
graphical Research until July 1903. 9 pp. ; July 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 3. iJie Litcratur der zehn wichtigsten Nulzfi^che der Nordsee. In
monographiselier Darstellung. 112 s., 10 T; August, 1903. Kr. 3.

The Literature of the Ten Principal Food Fishes of the North Sea.
In the form of compendious monograplis. 108 pp., 10 pi. ; August,
1903. Kr. 3.

Nos. 4-5. Martin Knudsen : X^eber den Gebraucli von Stickstotfbestim-
mungen in der Ilydrographie.

Gefrierpunkttabelle fuer Meerwasser.

Zusammen 13 s.; September, 1903. Kr. 0.75.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. G. Harry M. Kyle : On a New Form of Trawl Net, designed to fish in
niidwator as well as on the ground. Preliminary notice. 8 pp.
November, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 7. P. J. van Breemen : Ueber das Vorkommen von Oithona nana
Giesbr. in der Nordsee. (Aiis dem niederlaendischen Institut fuer
Meeresforschung.) 24 s. Mit einer Karte. November, 1903. Kr. 1.

Nos. 8-9. T. Wemyss Fulton : On the Spawning of the Cod {Gachis
morrhua L.) in Autumn in the North Sea. With a Chart.

A New Mark for Fish.

Togetlier, 14 pp. March, 1904. Kr. 1.

No. 10. G. 0. Sars : On a New (Planktonic) Species of the Genus Apherusa.
4 pp. 1 Plate. March, 1904. Kr. 0.50.

No. 1 1 . Martin Knudsen : a-, Tabelle, Anhang zu den 1 90 1 herausgege-
benen liydrograpliischen Tabellen. 23 pp. May, 1904. Kr. 0.75.

No. 12. Catalogue des poissons du nord de I'Europe, avec les noms
vulgaires dont on se sert dans les langues de cette region. 76 pp. June,
1904. Kr. 1.

No. 13a. Die Ostsee-Fischerei in ihrer jetzigen Lage. (Erster Teil.)

I. Uebersicht ueber die Seefischerei in den daenischen Gewaessern innerhalb

Skagens. Im Auftrag von Dr. C. Gr. Joh. Petersen bearbeitet von
Andreas Otterstrom.

II. Uebersicht ueber die Seefischerei Schwedens an den sued — und oestlichen

Kuesten dieses Landes. Bearbeitet von Dr. Filip Trybom und Alf.
Wollebsk. Together, 59 pp. 6 Plates. June, 1904. Kr. 1.50.

No. 14. E. van Everdingen und C. H. Wind: Oberflaechentemperatur-
mcssungen in der Nordsee. (Vorlaeufige Mitteilung.) 10 pp. 1 Plate.
July, 1904.

Published on behalf of the Intenialional Council

BY

ANDK. FRED. HOST ET FILS,
COPENHAGEN.

OBJECTS

OF THE

Marine biological Association of \\t Sniteb l^ingbom.

THE ASSOCIATION was founded at a Meeting called for the purpose in March, 1884,
and held in the Rooms of the Royal Society of London.

Tlie late Professor Huxley, at that time President of the Roj'al Society, took the chair,
and amongst the speakers in support of the project were the late Duke of Argyll, the
late Sir LyoN Playpair, Lord Avebury, Sir John Hooker, the late Dr. Caupexter, Dr.
GCXTHER, the late Lord Dalhousie, the late Professor Moseley, the late Mr. Romanes,
und Professor Lankester.

The Association owes its existence and its present satisfactory condition to a conihina-
tion of scientific naturalists, and of gentlemen who, from philanthropic or practical reasons,
are specially interested in the great sea fisheries of the United Kingdom. It is universally
admitted that our knowledge of the habits and conditions of life of sea fishes is very small,
and insuflScient to enable either the practical fisherman or the Legislature to take measures
calculated to ensure to the country the greatest return from the "harvest of the sea."
Naturalists are, on the other hand, anxious to push further our knowledge of marine life
and its conditions. Hence the Association has erected at Plymouth a thoroughly efficient
Laboratoiy, where naturalists may study the history of marine animals and plants in general,
and where, in particular, researches on food-iishes and molluscs may be carried out with the
best appliances.

The Laboratory and its fittings were completed in June, 1888, at a cost of some £12,000.
Since that time investigations, practical and scientific, have been constantly pursued at
Plymouth. Practical investigations upon matters connected with sea-fishing are carried on
under the direction of the Council ; in addition, naturalists from England and from abroad
have come to the Laboratory, to carry on their own independent researches, and have made
valuable additions to zoological and botanical science, at the expense of a small rent for the
use of a working table in the Laboratory and other appliances. The number of naturalists
who can be employed by the Association in special investigations on fishery questions, and
definitely retained for the purpose of carrying on those researches throughout the year,
must depend on tlie funds subscribed by private individuals and public bodies for the
purpose. The first charges on the revenue of the Association are the working of the sea-
water circulation in the tanks, stocking the tanks with fish and feeding the latter, the
I)ayment of servants and fishermen, the hire and maintenance of fishing-boats, and the
salary of the Resident Director and Staff. At the commencement of this number will be
found the names of the gentlemen on the staff.

In the summer of 1902 the Association was commissioned by His Majesty's Government
to carry out in the southern British area the scheme of Interuatitmal Fishery Investigations
adopted by the Conference of European Powers which met at Christiania in 1901. In
connection with this work a laboratory has been opened at Lowestoft.

The purpose of the Association is to aid at the same time both science and industry. It
is national in character and constitution, and its affairs are conducted by a representative
Council, by an Honorary Secretary and an Honorary Treasurer, without any charge upon
its funds, so that tlie whole of the subscriptions and donations received are devoted
absolutely to the support of the Laboratory and the prosecution of researches by aid of
its ai^jiliances. The reader is referred to page 4 of the Cover for information as to
membership of the Association.

CONTENTS OF NEW SERIES, Vol. VII., No. 2.

PAGE

1. Plymouth Marine Invertebrate Fauna : Being Notes of the
Local Distribution of Species occurring in the Neighbour-
hood. Coni])iled from the Records of the Laboratory of the Marine
Biological Association. JVith one Chart

2. PnUasia murata, n.s]). : A new British Sabellarian. By E. J. Allen

D.sc. JVith Plate X. .....

3. Note on two species of Cucumaria from Plymouth, hitherto con

fused as G. Montayui (Fleming) : C. Normani, n.sp., and C. saxicoh
(Brady and Robertson). By S. Pace

4. Report of the Council, 1903-1904 . ...
Balance Sheet, 1903-1904 .....

155

299

305

310
326

NOTICE.

The Council of the Marine Biological Association wish it to be understood that
they do not accept responsibility for statements published in this Journal except-
ing when those statements are contained in an official report of the Council.

&

5.

d.

. per annum

1

1

0

Composition Fee

15

15

0

.

100

0

0

500

0

0

TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP.

Annual Members
Life Members
Founders
Governors

Members of the Association have the following riglils and i)rivileges : they elect
annually the Officers and Council ; they receive the Journal of the Association free
by post ; they are admitted to view the Laboratory at Plymouth, and may introduce
friends with them ; they have the first claim to rent a place in the Laboratory for
research, with use of tanks, boats, &c. ; and have access to the books in the Library
at Plymouth.

All correspondence should be addressed to the Director, Tlu^ Laboratory,
Plymouth.

^-

IB!, -t'

New Series.— Vol. VII., No. 3— issued June, 1906.] [Price 3s. 6d,

3fournal

OF THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

OF

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

THE PLYMOUTH LABORATORY.

i

PLYMOUTH:

PRINTED FOR THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION BY W. BRENDON & SON, LTD.,

AND

PUBLISHED BY THE ASSOCIATION AT ITS OFFICES ON THE CITADEL HILL.

SENT FREE BY I'OST TO ALL MEMnEKS OF THR MARINE BIOLOCJICAL ASSOCIATION :
ANNUAL SUBSCnil'TION FOR MEMBERSHIP, ONE GUINEA.

Agents in London :— Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37, Soho Square, W.

PATRON.

HIS MAJESTY THE KIXG.

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL.

President.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, ll.d., f.r.s

Vice-Preside7its.
Tlie Duke of Acercorn, kg., c.b.
The Earl of St. Germans.
The Earl of DfCiE, F.R.S. '
Lord AvEBURY, f.r.s.

Lord TWEfiDlIOUTH.

Lord AValsixgham, i.u t?.

The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, m.t.,

F.R.S.

The Right Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, SI. p.
Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.
Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., m.p., f.r.s,

A. C. L.- GUXTHER, Ei^fJ., F.R.S.

Sir John Murray, f.r.s.
Prof. Alfred Newton, f.r.s.
Rev. Canon Norman, d.c.l., f.r.s.

G. L. Alward, Esiq.
G. C. Bourne, Esq.
Prof. T. W. Bridge, f.r.s.

F. Darwin, Esq., f.r.s.

G. Herbert Fowler, Esq.
S. F. Harmrr, Esq., f.r.s.

The Prime Warden of the Fish-
mongers' Company.

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'
Comiiany).

COUNCIL.

Elected Members.

Prof. W. A. Herdman, f.r.s.

E. W. L. Holt, Esq.

J. J. Lister, Esq., f.r.s.

H. R. Mill, Esq.

Prof. E. A, MiNCHiN.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, c.b.

R. N. Wolfenden, Esq., m.d.

Governors.

G. P. Bidder, Esq.
The University of Oxford.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., f.r.s. (Cambridge
University).

The British Association for the Advancement of Science.

Cliairman of Council.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., f.r.s.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, Es(j., Tortington, Arundel.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth-

PERMANENT STAFF.
Director — E. J. Allen, Esq., D.Sc.

Naturalist in clumje of Fishei-y Investigations.
W. Garstang, Esq., m.a , d.s.c.

Assistant Naturalist — L. R. Crawshay, Esq., m.a.

Assisfaytt N aturalists for the International Investicjations-

W. Wallace, Esq., d.sc
R. A. Todd, Esq., b.sc

J. 0. BoRLEY, Esq., M.A.

W. Bygrave, Esq., b.a.

Hydrographer (International Investigations) — D. J. Matthews, Esq,

iUt 31 1906

[ 331 ]

Professor W. F. R. Weldon, F.R.S.

By the death of Professor W. F. II. Weldon, F.R.S., Liuacre I'rofessor
of Comparative Anatomy in the University of Oxford, which occurred
on Good Friday, 13 April, 1906, with painful suddenness in the midst
of his activities, the Marine Biological Association has lost one of its
oldest workers and one of its most earnest and enthusiastic supporters.
It was in the autumn of 1887, before the building of the Laboratory
was c jmpleted, that Professor Weldon first commenced work in connec-
tion with the Association, and from that time until his appointment to
the Chair of Zoology, at University College, London, in 1S91, he resided
chiefly at Plymouth, and was engaged in investigations at the Labora-
tory. Since 1891, although the periods spent at Plymouth have not
been so prolonged, visits during his vacations have taken place at
frequent intervals, and many of his most important papers have been
based upon researches carried out at the Laboratory and material
collected there.

Professor Weldon's earlier investigations were directed to the study
of the classification, morphology, and development of the Decapod
Crustacea, and, although much of what he did remains unpublished, the
thoroughness with which his researches upon the whole group were
carried out was shown in the special courses of lectures upon it, which
he subsequently delivered at University College. At the same time
several important papers resulted from the work. Li two memoirs, one
published in the Journal of the Association on " The Ccelom and
Nephridia of Pakcmon scrratus" (N.S., i. p. 1G2), and the other in the
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, on " The Penal Organs of
Certain Decapod Crustacea" (vol. xxxii. p. 279), the structure of the
green glands of various Decapods was described, and the remarkable
development of the bladder of these glands in Palcemon, with its
considerable extension backwards into the body cavity, was for the first
time pointed out. In a later paper, on " The Formation of the Germ
Layers in Crangon vulgaris" {Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc, vol. xxxiii.
p. 343), a careful and detailed account of the early development of a
typical decapod ovum was given, and this paper well illustrates
Professor Weldon's skill, both as a master i.f histological technique and
as a powerful and accurate draughtsman.

Of Professor Weldon's later work, based upon the application of
statistical methods to the study of variation, by which ho will be chiefly
remembered as a biological thinker of originality and force, it is not
necessary to dwell at any length here, but it is of interest to record
that one of his earliest, if not his first published statement on this

NEW SERIES. — vol.. VII. NO. 3. .nrNE, IQOtJ. Y

332 PROFESSOR AV. F. R. WELDON, F.R.S.

subject, is the note on " Pakonondes varians in Plymouth," published
in the Journal of the Association (N.S., I., 1890, p. 459), in which the
variations of the teeth on the ro.-^trum of this species are recorded
from an examination of 915 individuals. Later papers based upon
work done at Plymouth or upon material obtained there are : —

" The Variations occurring in Certain Decapod Crustacea. 1. Cranrjon

vuhjaris " {Proceed, lioy. Soc., vol. xlvii. p. 445).
" Certain Correlated Variations in Crangon vulgaris " (Proceed. Boy.

Soc, vol. li., 1892, p. 1).
" Certain Correlated Variations in Carcinus mcemis " (Proceed. Roy.

Soc, vol. liv., 1893, p. 318).
" An Attempt to Measure the Death-rate due to Selective Destruction

of Carcinus mccnas, with res])ect to a Particular Dimension"

(Proceed. Boy. Soc, vol. Ivii., 1895, p. 360).
" Remarks on Variation in Animals and Plants " (Proceed. Boy. Soc,

vol. Ivii., 1895, p. 379).
"Presidential Address to the Zoological Section (on Natural Selection

and Variation) " (Beport. Brit. Assoc, 1898).

l*rofessor Weldon became a member of the Marine Biological Associa-
tion in 1884, the year of the inauguration of the Association, and his
name first appears in the list of Founders in 1887. Tn 1888 he was
elected a INIember of Council, and from that time he continued to serve
the Association in this capacity, having been in recent years the
representative of the British Association for the Advancement of
Science. His time and energy have been freely devoted to the work of
the Council, and his personal experience of the various departments
of the Association's activity have given special value to his views and
recommendations upon many important questions of policy, which the
Council has been called upon to determine.

When the Association undertook to carry out for His Majesty's
Government the programme of International Fishery Investigations in
the English area. Professor Weldon gave particular attention and
devoted much time to the vast amount of statistical work, which is
entailed by those invc-jtigations, and the fact that both the general
methods and the results so far published were subjected to his careful
and critical examination has added greatly to their value and to the
confidence with which the Council was enabled to regard them.

By his enthusiasm, his energy, and the keenness of his intellectual
insight, Professor Weldon helped largely in the attainment ot the
success which has attended the efforts of the Marine Biological Associa-
tion, and by his ever-ready co-operation with his colleagues on the
Council, and with the members of the scientific staff, he so endeared
himself to all those with whom he was associated in the work that his
death has left a gap whicli it will luirdly be possible to fill. — E. J. A.

[ 333 ]

Notes on some British Nudibranchs.

Hy
C. Eliot,

Vice-Chaucellor ol' the University of Sheffield.

With Plates XI and XII.

The following notes are the result partly of an examination of various
living specimens at Plymouth in the spring of 1905, and partly of the
study of preserved material most kindly placed at my disposal by
Mr. E. J. Allen and Mr. W. I. Beaumont, of the Laboratory, Plymouth,
Mr. W. E. Hoyle, of the Manchester University Museum, and the
Council of the Hancock Museum at Newcastle. I must also express
my thanks and obligations to Mr. T. J. Evans, lecturer in Biology at the
University of Sheffield, who has prepared for me sections of the smaller
specimens and embodied the results in drawings which will add very
materially to any value which this paper may have.
The following are the species noticed : —

1. Tritonia alba, A. & H.

2. Staurodoris verrucosa (Cuvier).

3. Arcliidoris testudinaria (A. & H.).

4. Geitodoris i)lanata (A. & H.).

5. LameUidoru hilamcllata (L.).

6. L. ohlonga (A. & H.).

7. L. depressa (A. & H.).

8. L. jmsilla (A. & H.).

9. Pleurophyllidia loveni, Bergh.

10. Lomanotus yenei, Verany.

11. L. marmoratus, A. & H,

12. L. fiavidus, A. & H.

13. Hancockia dadylota, Gosse.

14. Doto innnatifida, A. & H., var. painllifera.

15. Berghia cierulescens (Laurillard).

16. Coryphclla riijibj'anchiaiis (Johnst.).

17. a. gracilis (A. & H.).

18. G. landshurghii (A. & H.).

19. G. heaumonti, spec. nov.

20. Bolts angukda, A. & H.

21. Amphorina aurantiaca (A. & H).
( = Gulliona aw'anUaai.)

334 NOTES ON SOME RIJITISII NUDIBRANCHS.

22. Amphorina olivacea (A. & H.).
( = Cratena olivacea.)

23. Cratena amcena (A. & H.).

24. Calma glaucoides (A, & H.).

25. AntiojjeUa cristata (Delle Cliiaje).

26. Janolus hyalinus (A. & H.).

27. Janolus Jiagellatus, sp. iiov.

28. Aldcria modesta, Loveii.

29. Sfiliger helliUus (d'Orbigny).

Of the above, Coryphdla heaumoidi and Janolus Jiagellatus are new
species. The first may be regarded as certain, though it offers so many
peculiarities that its place in the genus Corypliella is open to question.
Janolus flagrllatus differs from other described species in its genitalia,
but cannot be regarded as certain until better preserved specimens
are examined. Berghia ccerulescens must be removed from the list of
the British fauna, for the only recorded specimen is a Facelina coroTuita ;
but Staiirodoris verrucosa may be added, for it seems to be certainly,
though sporadically, recorded from Devonshire, the Clyde, and West
Ireland.

An examination of the type specimen of Tritonia alba, A. & H., has
enabled me to show that this species, which has been called in ques-
tion, is valid and well cliaracterized. Tiie valuable material with which
I have been supplied has, I hope, enabled me to amplify our knowledge
of Lomanotus, Hancockia, Alderia, and Gulma. The systematic position
of the last genus appears to me to have been misunderstood ; Calma
glaucoides belongs to the same genus as the later Forcstia niirahilis of
Trinchese, but Calma cavolini must be removed from this group, as it
does not possess the characteristic radula.

I have also attempted to elucidate the synonymy and affinities of
Alder and Hancock's Boris testudinaria, which appears to be a fairly
common form, though often confounded with Arcliidoris tuhercidata, and
have also examined the classification of the Cratenidie. I think that
the genus Amphorina must be referred to this group, and that the
animals described as Cratena olivacea and Cutkomt aurant'uica are really
referable to Amphorina. Eolis angulata is probably a young jEolidiella
glaaca.

TRITONIA.

A species of this geims which has been called in doubt is now shown
to be valid by an examination of the type specimen, and the following
additions may be recorded to Tritonia and Candiella, of which Bergh
recognized sixteen species in the tiijstem der Nudihranchiaten Gastcro-
poden, 1892. I do not think that the distinction between Tritonia and

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 335

Candiella can be maintained {vide Eliot, "On the Nudibrauchiata of the
Scottish National Antarctic Expedition," Trans. Roy. Soc. Bdinb.,
vol. xli. part iii. p. 523, 1905).

17. T. alba, A. & H.

18. 2'. exsulans, B.

19. T. incerta, B.

20. T. gi(jantea, B.

21. T. (Candiella) australis, B.

22. T. (Cand.) ingolfiana, B.

23. T. (Cand.) villa/ranca, Vayssiere.

24. T. ajypendiculata, Eliot.
(?= jT. chaUengeriana, var.)

25. T. olivacea, B.

26. T. irrorata, B.

TRITONIA ALBA, A. & H.

(Monoijr. of the British Nudib. MoUusca, part vii. p. 48, and

Appendix, p. vi.)

Specimens of this form were found by Alder and Hancock at Culler-
coats, near Newcastle, and described by them as having considerable
external resemblance to young individuals of T. /lojnbcrgii, but as
diftering in dentition from all known Tritonias, inasmuch as the lateral
teeth were denticulate or branched. Bergh (i¥al. Unt. in Semper s
Reisen, Heft xv. pp. 734 and 736) rejects the species as doubtful, and
thinks tiiat the denticles were merely an illusion of the microscope.
An examination of the original specimens preserved in the Hancock
Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne has shown me, however, that this is not
the case, and that the teeth are really denticulate.

The two specimens are respectively 7 and 6 mm. long, and 2*8
and 2"2 mm. broad. One is dark brown, the other yellowish. The
hard buccal parts are fortunately well preserved, otherwise few
characters either external or internal can be established, which is
hardly surprising, as the specimen must be at least fifty years old.
There is no reason, however, to doubt the accuracy of Alder and
Hancock's descriptions. The dorsal margin is large, and seems to have
borne in the one specimen six, in the other eight branchi;e of various
sizes. No trace of stomach plates was found.

The jaws are yellow, rather long and narrow, and bear near the edge
about four rows of small prominences resembling a mosaic. The radula
is very transparent, and consists of twenty-five rows, which appear to
contain thirty-six teeth on each side of the rhachis when complete.
The rhachidian tooth (PI. XI., Fig. 1. a.) is tricuspid, and hollowed out

336 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS.

below. The first lateral (I'l. xi., Fig. 1. b.) is of the usual clumsy shape,
but is rather variable in outline. The second lateral (PI. XL, Fig. 1. c.) is
smooth, moderately stout, and simply hamate. The succeeding teeth
become longer and slenderer towards the outside. The third lateral
bears a prominence or rudimentary denticle, and the remaining laterals
in the middle of the half-row (PI. XL, Fig. 1. d. e. f.), bear from one to three
long branch-like denticles, and sometimes one or two accessory shorter
ones. Towards the end of the row the denticles are found only at the
tip of the teeth, and the outermost (PI. xi., Fig. 1. g.) are elongate and
bifid. This peculiarity is not marked in Alder and Hancock's plate,
which otherwise gives a very accurate representation of the radula.

STAURODORIS, BERGH.

It is worthy of consideration if this genus should not bear the
Linufean name of Doris. Bergh {Mai. Unt. in Semper s Rciscn, xiv.
p. 616) decided to discontinue the use of this name (" besser wiire es,
wie liier geschieht, den Namcn Doris als generische Bezeichnung ganz
zu streichen "). But there seem at least two objections to this course.
Firstly, if an old genus is divided into sub-genera, one of these new
sub-genera should, according to the rule generally recognized, bear the
name of the old genus. Secondly, it would appear that in Staurodoris
verrucosa, Bergh, the use of the specific name really admits that the
animal is the Linn;ean Doris. The type of Doris is Doris verrucosa of
the tenth editit^n of the Si/sUma Natura\ It is true that the animal
cannot be recognized from Linmeus's description, but Cuvier identilied
it riglitly or wrongly with a Mediterranean form, and Cuvier's animal
has been renamed Staurodoris verrucosa by Bergh. But this form can
bear the specific name verrucosa only on the supposition that it is the
Doris verrucosa of Liuna-us. Therefore either it is Doris verriLcosa, or
else Staurodoris with a new specific name; but it cannot logically be
Sta urodoris verrucosa.

Further, it seems a pity to abolish a well-known name used by so
many eminent naturalists, and in my opinion the use of Doris is not
only correct, but convenient. I cannot help thiiddng that the distinc-
tions between Bergh's genera of the Archidorididic are somewhat
mitmte, and that a juster classification would be secured by the use of
the genus Doris (type Doris verrucosa), to include as sub-genera at least
Staurodoris, Archidoris, Anisodoris, and possibly others.

Staurodoris, liergh, cannot in my opinion be satisfactorily separated
from Archidoris, Bergh, as the two genera are connected by their less
typical members. The typical Staurodoris has simply pinnate branchiae
and the back studded with clavate tubercles, which form valves round
the rhinophores and branchiie. But in the less typical form the

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 337

branchife become bi- or tripinnate and the valvular tubercles less
distinct.* The following forms would perhaps be referable to the sub-
genus Staurodoris : —

1. St. verrucosa (Cuvier).
>S^^. pseudoverriccosa, J her.
St. januarii, Bergh.

2. St. bertheloti (d'Orbigny).

3. St. (Vorhigmji (Gray).

4. *S^^. 2>ustulata (Abraham).

[See Hedley and Basedow, Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Australia, vol. xxix., 1905, p. 150, pi. ix.]
0. 'S'^. maculata (Garstang).

6. St. depressa, Eliot.

7. St. calva, Eliot.

8. St. hicolor, Bergh. ^

9. St. rusticata (A. & H.).

10. ? St. peden, Eliot.

11. ? St. fiahdlifera (Cheeseman).

Tlie last two species have a peculiar configuration of the branchige,
which renders their inclusion in this genus doubtful. St. bertheloti and
St. d'orhignyi are only known from very imperfect descriptions.

STAURODORIS VERRUCOSA (CUV.).

Two specimens from the Museum of the Manchester University,
labelled as coming from the Firth of Clyde. Tiie larger is 35 mm.
long and 21 broad ; tlie other slightly smaller. The details given below
refer to the larger specimen, unless otherwise stated.

Both specimens are depressed, rather stiff and hard, uniform whitish
yellow in colour. The back is studded with large and small tubercles.
There are fifteen of the former, about 3 mm. high and 2 mm. broad.
Smaller ones are scattered among them, and the tubercles decrease in
size towards the edge of the mantle, which is fairly wide. The foot is
broad ; no groove or notch is visible on the anterior margin. The
tentacles are ridge-like.

The rhinophore pockets are protected by four tubercles (two large
and two small) in the smaller specimen and by three in the other, one
of the smaller tubercles not being developed. The branchi;e are simply
pinnate, eighteen in the larger specimen, fourteen in the smaller. The
pocket has a thin slightly raised lip, Ijearing eight tall, slender tubercles
about 3"5 mm. high, alternating fairly regularly with quite small ones.

Tho intestines are yellowish, except the stomach, which is black from

* Vayssifere's figure of the Meditenanean ArchidorU tubtrculata {Opisth. de Marseille, iii.
1)1. 1, fig. 1) aeeius to me to have the external characters of Staurodoris.

338 NOTES ON SOME r.i;iTISII NUnil5HANCHS.

the colour of its contents. The spermatotheca is very large. The
formula of the yellowish radula is 55 x about 60.0.60. The teeth are
simply hamate, and rather crowded. The outermost are degraded, but
not denticulate. In the anterior, but not in the posterior rows, the
innermost teeth project somewhat into the rliuchis, which bears longi-
tudinal folds.

i^t. verrucosa has already been recorded from the British marine area
by Mr. G. 1\ Farran, who found one specimen at Fahy Bar, Ballynakill,
West Ireland {Aiin. Rep. Fish. Ireland, 190'2-o, part. ii. app. vii.
[1905] pp. 207-8). Bergh in his systematic arrangement of the
Nudibranchiata unites with it St. januarii, St. ocelligera, and St. jjseudo-
verrucosa, and including these varieties the species is now recorded from
the Mediterranean and Adriatic, the coast of Brazil, the Atlantic
coast of Europe, and South Carolina.

STAURODORIS VERRUCOSA (CUV.), VAR. MOLLIS.

One specimen, labelled Salcombe, K. A. Todd, 3. VIII. 1900. The
measurements are: length, 21 mm.; breadth, 12 ; height, 7. The colour
is white, with a faint yellowish tinge; the texture soft. The foot is
17 mm. long and 6 broad, with a longish free tail ; it has slight traces
of a groove in front, but no notch. The mantle edge " is ample, and
measures about 4 mm. The tentacles consist of a ridge-like prominence
on either side of the mouth ; they are attached for the greater part of
their length, and show slight traces of a fold. The back is somewhat
sparsely tuberculate. Down the centre run six fairly regular longi-
tudinal lines of large tubercles, about 15 mm. wide and 1 mm. high.
Between them and on the mantle edge are smaller tubercles. A few
tubercles near the branchise are taller and almost clavate. There is
no trace of ridges connecting the various tubercles. The rhinophores
are deeply perfoliate, and emerge between two tubercles. The rim of
the branchial pocket is slightly raised, and bears ten tubercles of
various sizes, but all quite distinct. The largest are 1 mm. high. The
branchiie are simply pinnate, the pinnie being alternately long and short.
They project about 45 mm. from the pocket, and lie flat on the back
like a star. Seen thus they appear to be thirteen, but on opening the
pocket it is seen Liiat nine are long and separate, and four small, springing
from the sides of the longer ones. All the [)lumes are united at the base
in a common circular band, wliich bears papillie outside. The anal
papilla is central.

The intestines are white. In the central nervous system the cerebro-
pleural ganglia are above the pedal, which as preserved lie below them
at the side. The eyes are black and distinct.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 339

The buccal mass is elongate. In one part of the labial cuticle is
a mass of variously shaped spicules, which are apparently the remains
of a fragment of food embedded in the skin, and do not represent an
armature of the lips. The radula is colourless, with a maximum
formula of 40 x 45.0.45. The teeth are rather straight and only
slightly hamate. Towards the end of the rows the spike becomes
reduced and the base increases, with the result that the tooth resembles
a broad, clumsy hook. The two innermost teeth project into the rhachis,
and are lower than the rest, but not denticulate.

The oesophagus is thin, and tlie salivary glands band-like. The
stomach lies in an upper anterior cleft of the liver, but is separate from
it. Its walls are thickish, with a strong irregular lamination. The
genitalia seem to be as in the typical form. The light-grey hermaphro-
dite gland is spread over the greenish liver. The spermatotheca is
large and spherical ; the spermatocyst much smaller and elliptical. No
armature was found.

I have compared this animal with specimens of aS'^. verrucosa from the
Mediterranean. It is lighter in colour, very much softer in consistency,
and the tubercles are lower and, as a rule, not clavate. But these are
all matters of degree, and I do not think a new species can be created
on the evidence of a single specimen.

The present specimen is superficially quite unlike St. macnlata
(Garstang), which is very convex, hard, and bears a pattern of knob.s
connected by ridges.

AKCHIDORIS TESTUDINARIA (A. & H.).

[Doris testudinaria, Alder and Hancock, Ann. and Mag. U. N., 1862,
vol. X., 3rd series, p. 261.

? Doris testudinaria, Risso. Hist. Nat. de VEiir. Mer., iv., 1826, p. 33.

Archidoris stellifera, H. von Jhering. See Vayssieke, Journal de
Conchyl, vol. lii. No. 2, 1904, p. 123. Id. Opist. de Marseille Supp.,
p. 82, 1903.

Doris testudinaria. Jeffrey's British Conchologi/, vol. v. p. 85 (written
by Alder, as stated on p. 27).]

Both the nomenclature and the specific limits of this form present
many difhculties, and it is with great dilhdence that ! submit it should
be called Archidoris testudinaria, that it is identical with the Arc/iidoris
stellifera of Vayssiere and von Jhering, and that it is probably distinct
from the Doris planata of Alder and Hancock. Two points, however,
seem certain : lirst, that the specimens from Plymouth here described
are the Doris testudinaria of Alder and Hancock ; second, that they are
distinct from Archidoris tuberculata, with which they are often con-
founded in practice.

340 NOTES ON SOME liKITLSH NUDIBRANCHS.

In 1862 Alder and Hancock described (I.e.) a new British Dorid,
which they identified with the D. testudinaria of Kisso. From some
unpublished notes preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-
Tyne, it is probable that they based this identification, not on Kisso's
description, but on specimens sent from the Mediterranean and labelled
D. testudinaria, which they considered identical with their specimen
from Herm Island.* Kisso's description is vague, inadequate, and, as
pointed out first by Philippi (Enum. Moll. Sicil., vol. ii. p. 78), probably
inaccurate. Bergh and others have thought that it refers to Platydoris
argo. But since Alder and Hancock have given the name to a fully
described animal, which is possil)ly identical with Kisso's animal, it
would seem that their interpretation of the name must be regarded as
authoritative. After Alder and Hancock had assigned the name
D. testudinaria to an identifiable form, von Jhering; gave the name
Archidoris stellifera to Mediterranean specimens, which seem to me to
belong to the same species. His description appears to have been only
in MS., and publication dates from the memoires of Vayssiere, who uses
the same name. As will be seen from the notes here given, stellate
forms are found on the Britisli coast, and appear to be specifically the
same as the less ornate variety described by Alder and Hancock. It is
remarkable, however, that Vayssiere states that the mouth of his
specimens is armed with a chitinous ring. I could not discover this
structure in the specimen which he kindly sent to me.

Alder and Hancock, in the Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hid., I.e., expressed

the opinion that 1). testudinaria and D. planata. are distinct though

similar species. Subsequently Alder in Jeffrey's Conclwlogy (I.e.) came

round to the opposite view, and staled tliat an examination of further

specimens of difFerent sizes from the Clyde proved that D. jyloiata is

the young of I), testudinaria. It is extremely dillicult to form any

decided opinion on this question. The external characters are likely to

vary considerably at different periods of the animal's growth, and it

would appear that in D. testudinaria {stellifera) a labial armature may

or may not be developed. Vayssiere reports its presence, and Alder

and Hancock (Ann. and Mag. N. II., I.e.) say of D. testudinaria and

D. 2)lanata, " the character of the tongue is similar in each." On the

other hand, in a numl)cr of specimens from I'lymouth which I have

examined, I have found a decided labial armature in the small flat

individuals and none at all in the large plump ones. It is present in

the specimen of D. i)lanata from Alder and Hancock's collection at

Newciistle. On the whole I am inclined to think that there are two

separate forms which are very much alike in their younger stages.

• It is even possible tliat A. & H. may have obtained the specimens from Risso, or from
some one who knew the animal which he called D. testudinaria. They were writing about
Nudibranchs in 1841, but probably began collecting earlier.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 341

(1) D. plcDiata. This is a remarkably flat form, which appears not to
exceed an inch in length in British waters. The dorsal surface is
finely granulated, there is a distinct labial armature, and the radula
is decidedly of the type of Geitodoris, Bergh, that is to say, there are
two kinds of teeth, the inner teeth being of the ordinary hamate shape,
and the outer very thin and crowded together in sheaves. It is possible
that some specimens (about 50 mm. long) which I have received from the
Cape Verde Islands may be adults of this species. They resemble the
Plymouth specimens, except that they are much larger and were red in
life. The richer colour may perhaps be due to the climate.

(2) D. testudinaria. Tiiis is a plump form of considerable size
(60 mm.). The back is covered with flat tubercles, which are sometimes
arranged in a stellate pattern. In the specimens from Plymouth, which
1 have myself examined, there is no labial armature, but Vayssiere
states that it is present in the Mediterranean form, which is otherwise
undistinguishable. The radula is not unlike that of the last species,
but the differentiation of the teeth is less marked. The outer are
thinner than the inner ones, but the change is less abrupt, and tlie
thinner teeth are not gathered together in such distinct sheaves or
packets.

The names Platydoris testudinaria and Platydoris planata would seem
to be in any case incorrect, for none of the animals have the characters
of Platydoris (which include a peculiar hard consistency and an
armature of hooked scales on the reproductive organs). It is possible,
but not demonstrable, tliat the Doris testudinaria, of Ki.sso was a Platy-
doris; but, if so, it is neither tlie D. testiulinaria nor the D. planata of
Alder and Hancock.

Alder and Hancock's type specimen labelled " Doris testudinaria,
Herm," has been kindly lent me by the Council of the Hancock Museum,
Newcastle.

It is 30 mm. long, 23 broad, and 15 high. The mantle margin is
broken in many places, but it apparently covered the sides and the
foot entirely in its original condition. The general colour of the
animal is greyish yellow. Some of the dorsal tubercles are lighter than
the surrounding surface. There are some reddish spots on the under
side of the mantle.

The texture is soft, and the specimen is a little decayed. Tiie back
is covered with low flat warts of various sizes. No stellate arrange-
ment is visible. The branchial and rhinophorial pockets are surrounded
by tubercles which do not amount to valves. The brauchiic are
retracted within the pocket, and their number could not be ascertained.
The anterior part of the animal is much retracted, but the long linear
tentacles are clearly visible.

342 N0TE8 ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS.

The buccal parts have been extracted.

No further examination was made in order not to injure the unique
specimen.

I have also examined five specimens seen alive at Plymouth in April,
1905. They vary somewhat in external appearance, and may be
described separately.

A. One specimen, rather variable in shape, but flattish. When fully
stretched out and moving its length is 60 mm. and its breadth 32. It
is active in its motions. The main colour of the back is mottled pur-
plish brown of various shades, the deepest of which is almost black.
The general colour is lighter towards the margin, though here the
darker shades are more conspicuous by contrast. There are a few
irregular sandy-grey markings here and there, especially in front of the
rhinophores.and twelve sandy-yellow star-like figures arranged symmetri-
cally in four lines between the rhinophores and the branchial pocket.
The back is covered with fiat tubercles, very slightly prominent, and
more or less of the same size (not more than 1 mm. in breadth), except
those forming the centre of the stars, which are about twice as large as
the others. The tubercles forming the stars appear to be set in a stel-
late figure, but the pattern is due to pigment rather than to the arrange-
ment of the tubercles. The edge of the rhinophore pockets is set with
small tubercles. The rhinophores are elongate, with about fifteen per-
foliations. They are olive coloured, and the stalk is long compared
with the laminated part. The braucliial pocket is slightly raised and
tuberculate. The branchiaj are six, tripinnate, sandy yellow, with pur-
plish fiecks. The anal papilla is purplish, but the edge is crenulate
and distinctly margined with sandy yellow. The foot is grooved in
front and the upper lamina notched. The tentacles are cylindrical and
elongate, which makes the whole head look unlike that of A. tubcrcidata.
The under side is white, but in this and in all the specimens there are
a few purplish spots on the under side of the mantle, which is rather
ample and overhangs the foot all round.

B. In a second specimen of about the same size the characters are
exactly the same, but there are only four stellate figures on each side,
and tliey are less regular both in their formation and their arrange-
ment. The pockets of the rhinophores and the branchiae are very
distinctly crenulate and tuberculate.

C. Three similar but rather smaller specimens are paler in colour,
and the stellate figures are only imperfectly developed. The branchiae
are as many as seven or eight.

The internal characters of all the specimens are much the same.
The blood gland is large, double, purple or greyish. The central
nervous system is not quite as in A. tahcrciUata. Seen from the upper

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 343

side, the ganglia appear united in a horseshoe-shaped mass in which no
divisions are clearly distinguished. Seen from below, the division
between the cerebro-pleural and pedal ganglia is plain, but the cerebro-
pleural ganglia are not distinctly divided into two portions. The
common commissure is thick and very short.

The integuments, especially the tuberculate dorsal surface, are very
spiculous, and contain a dense mass of colourless rods, often slightly
bent, but not swollen in the middle, jointed, or branched.

No labial armature could be found, but on the labial cuticle in some
specimens were granular markings resembling grey dust, but not form-
ing rods or compact plates. The radula consists of about thirty rows,
and the number of teeth on each side of the rhachis does not appear to
much exceed forty as a maximum; but the whole radula is fragile and
difficult to extend. The teeth are transparent and colourless, longer
and thinner than in A. taherculata, and with narrower bases. Near the
rhachis (Fig. 2. a. b.) the teeth are low and with comparatively broad
bases ; but they increase in length and slenderness towards the outside
until the last two or three, which are shorter, but often somewhat
deformed (Fig. 2. f.). Teeth with abnormal lumps and projections
occur in all parts of the radula (Fig. 2. d.).

The oesophagus is narrow at first, but widens and enters the liver.
The stomach lies within the liver. The gall bladder is small and pear-
shaped. The intestine issues from the liver about the middle of its
dorsal surface, runs forward and then turns backward. The liver is of
a dull orange colour; the hermaphrodite gland, spread over it, is of a
dull opaque white.

The spermatotheca is large, greenish or bluish grey, and spherical.
The spermatocyst is small, white or orange-white, less distinctly
spherical, and sometimes pear-shaped. There is no prostate. The vas
deferens is very slender, long, and convoluted. The penis small, conical,
and unarmed. The duct seems to issue at the side of the tip.

Though this species is commonly confused with A. tuherculata, it
seems to differ in the following points : —

(1) The typical coloration is different, though it is very often imper-
fectly developed. 13ut there are nearly always purple spots on the
lower side of the mantle, which seem not to occur in A. tuberculata.

(2) The general form is flatter.

(3) The shape of the tentacles and anterior part of the foot is
markedly diO'erent.

(4) The tubercles are less prominent and of more equal size.

(5) The branchiie are stouter and less voluminous.

(6) The shape of the teeth is dilferent.

(7) The stomach is enclosed within the liver.

344 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCIIS.

For purposes of comparison I have examined a specimen of A. stelli-
fcra, most kindly sent me from Mar.seilles by Professor Vayssiere. It
is 31 mm. long, 16 broad, and 10 high, llattish and rather smootli, with
low even tubercles. The colour of the dorsal surface is dark olive-
brown of various shades ; tlie larger tubercles are yellowish, but the
stellate appearance is hardly visible. Tiie under side is pinkish, with
reddish brown dots on the lower surface of the mantle. The oral
tentacles are longish, conical, and somewhat flattened. The anterior
margin of the foot is grooved and perhaps notched, Ijut this is difficult
to decide. The edge of the rhinophore pockets is set with small incon-
spicuous tubercles. The branchias are eight ; the edge of the pocket is
tuberculate, much like the rest of the back, Init has no special tubercles
of its own. The formula of the radula is about 18 x 30.0.30 and the
shape of the teeth as described above for the Plymouth specimens.

Neither in this specimen, nor in those from Plymouth, could I find
any trace of the armature described by Professor Vayssiere (I.e.) as
" anneau chitineux mandibulaire, complet, assez large, offrant dans la
partie interne de petits et trus courts batonnets prismatiques." Noth-
ing was visible but a thick unarmed cuticle.

Vayssiere refers this form to Arehidoris, and 1 f(jlluw him ; but if the
external teeth are longer and thinner than the internal ones, and if, as
Vayssiere has found, a labial armature is sometimes present, it is clear
that the division between Arehidoris and Geitodoris is not so sharp as
might be supposed. It would be interesting to have statistics as to the
uniform presence or absence of the labial armature in various species.
There certainly seems to be ground for suspecting that in some species
of Arehidoris and Staurodoris it is generally absent, but occasionally
present, though not much developed. With reference to this and many
other organs, we have little information as to the effect of age and
growth on the external and internal characters of Nudil)ranchs.

GEITODORIS PLANATA (A. & H.).

(Alder and Hancock, Monograph, Plate VIII., and Part VII. p. 42. Eliot,
Proc. Mai. Society of Loudon, Sept., 1904, vol. vi. No. 3, pp. 180-1.)

In the paper cited above I have described specimens caught at
Plymouth, and considered in the Laboratory to be D. planata,
A. & H., and have also given my reasons for referring them to Geito-
doris. Since writing this 1 have examined two other preserved specimens
at Plymouth. The back is granulate, with some larger tubercles, and
also with some pits, which often give the u])per side a honeycombed
appearance. The mantle edge is broad, and on tiie under side veined
with anastomosing lines. The branchiae appear to be nine, and in small

NOTES OX SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 345

specimens are very small indeed and hardly visible. There is a distinct
labial armature formed of rods, and the radula consists of two
kinds of teeth. In the largest specimen the fornmla seemed to be
25 X 6 + 30.0.30 + 6, the six outermost teeth being long, very thin, and
compressed together so as to look almost like a single tooth. I have
also examined a specimen from Alder and Hancock's collection at
Newcastle labelled " Doris planata. W. R. Hughes. Sidmoutli." Tt is
only 5 mm. long and 4 broad, and entirely dried up, having unfortu-
nately not been kept in alcohol. As far as anything can be made out
under such unfavourable conditions, the external characters are much
as in Alder and Hancock's plate. The colour is yellowish, the back
granulated and pitted, the mantle edge very ample, the branchial
pocket large and round. There is a distinct yellow labial armature
composed of rods. As usual in these old specimens, the radula is
decomposed and in confusion ; but there are clearly visible (a) ordinary
hamate teeth ; (b) bundles of long, thin, almost shadowy, teeth. The
whole animal is very Hat.

Through the kindness of Mr. Crossland I have received from the Cape
Verde Islands several specimens which are possil)ly well-grown adults
of this form, and in any case are closely allied to it. The general
characters, particularly the tentacles, branchiie, labial armature, and
radula (with a formula amounting to at least 10 + 35.0.35+10) are
similar. The differences are: (I) the size (50 mm.); (2) the colour,
which was in life brilliant vermilion (though some individuals
were pale yellow), with numerous black specks apparently visible
only under a lens, whereas Alder and Hancock say that D. i)l((i^(fta
was reddish brown, with dark brown spots ; and (3) the texture of the
dorsal surface, which seems to be covered by a reticulate pattern, with
pits between the ridges and flat tubercles at their junctions. But age
and a warm climate may account for these diflerences. However, I
have thought it safer to describe the Cape Verde specimens under a
separate name as Geitodoris reticulata.

LAMELLIDORIS, A. .K; H.

A considerable number of species are found on the coasts of Great
liritain, and seem well characterized externally and by differences in
the radula. The Doris heaumonti of Farran {Nudihranchiatc Molluscs of
Ball/piahill, app. viii. to part ii. of Report on Fisheries of Ireland for
1901, p. 4) is, no doubt, LamclUdoris luteocincta (M. Sars), which must
thus be added to the British fauna.

L. lactea, L. qiictdri'macnlata, L. aiireopuncta, L. miniata, and L. olivacea,
described by Verrill from the Bermudas, are all very doubtful furnis,

346 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDir.RANCHS.

ami ill many cases it seems clear from the author's descriptions that
they do not possess the characters of Lameliidoris.

In identifying the specimens noticed below as L. ohlonga, L. depressa,
and L. 2>i(silla, 1 have been chiefly guided by the labels which they bear
in the collection at the Plymouth Marine Laboratory. I see no reason
to doubt these identifications, though it might be difficult to establish
them from an examination of preserved specimens only.

LAMELLIDORIS BILAIMELLATA (L.).

This common species has been fully described by Alder and Hancock
and IJergh. The back is covered with distinct, tall, and sometimes
clavate tubercles, not unlike those of Staurodoris verrucosa. The
tubercles at the side of the rhinophores are not conspicuous.

The inner teeth are large, hamate, smooth, and tapering at the tip.
The outer are plate-like, with a rudimentary and not very distinct hook.
Between the rows there is a series of ear-shaped folds on the rhachis.

LAMELLIDORIS OBLONGA (A. & H.).
(A. & H., Mon. of Brit. Nud., Fam. i., pi. 16, figs. 4-5.)

Three preserved specimens from Plymouth. It would appear that
this species is recognizable by its shape. Its measurements are roughly,
length, 8 mm.; breadth, 3'7 mm.; whereas L. hilarneUata measures about
12 mm. in length and 9 mm. in breadth. Tiie animal, as preserved,
is yellowish, and covered with low, flat tubercles on the dorsal surface.
The l)ranchite are very inconspicuous, and are not distinguishable from
the surrounding tubercles on a superficial examination. The openings
of the rhinophores are closed by two tubercles. The rhinophores are
exserted and very long. As preserved, the oral veil is remarkably
pointed, and the anterior margin of the foot follows its outline.

The buccal crop is large, and divided into two halves by a median
band. The radula is very fragile, and consists of twenty-two, thirty-
three, and forty-five rows respectively in the three specimens. The
inner tooth (Fig. 3. a.) has a broad base, and is divided into three parts
by constrictions. The denticulations on the uppermost part are very
fine, but clear. The outer tooth (Fig. 3. b.) bears a distinct hook.

LAMELLIDORIS DEPRESSA (A. & 11.),

One preserved specimen from Plymouth. The mantle margin is
wide, and the dorsal surface bears ])apillose tubercles and contains very
long spicules. The colour is yellowish, with a few black and brown
spots.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCIIS. 347

The rudula is small and hard to find. The inner tooth (Fig. 4. a.) is
squarish, with three small denticles (not one, as according to Alder and
Hancock). The outer tooth (Fig. 4. b.) is a squarish plate with a rudi-
mentary denticle.

LAMELLID0KI8 PU8ILLA.

(Ai.DER and Hancock, Mon. Brit. Nad., Fain, i., pi. 13.)
This little species seems to be characterized in life by its white

branchite and rhinophores.

The radula is somewhat as in L. ohlonga. The inner tooth (Fig. 5.)

lias a douljle convexity at the side, and a few ridges, which hardly

amount to denticles, near the tip.

PLEUROPHYLLIDIA.
PLEUROPHYLLIDIA LOVENl, BERGH.

(Hergh, Biilrag til en Monogr. of Plenrophyllidienie, 1866, p. 29; Id. Mai.
Bluffer, 1879, pp. 77-86. Jeffrey's Brit. ConrJiol, vol. v. pp. 17-18.)

Two specimens from Plymouth. I was informed that the animals
were reddish when alive.

The larger is .'35 mm. long and 2G mm. broad, tapering rather
suddenly at tlie tail. The colour is dull yellowish brown, with about
fifty rather lighter stripes on the back, of which nine are larger than
the others. The branchi;e are thin, and about twenty. The side
lamell.e al)Out thirty, very thick, and generally interrupted in the
middle.

The smaller specimen is much bent, but would be about 30 mm. long
if straightened out and 13 broad. The colour is pale yellowish brown,
with a sort of purple glazing in many places, and there are about thirty
stripes on the back.

The jaws l^ear five rows of denticles in one specimen and six or
seven in the other.

The formula for the radula is in the first 25 x 35.1.35, and in the
second 34 x 32.1.32. Tn both the median tooth bears seven denticles on
each side of the central cusp. The first lateral is larger than the rest,
and bears six or seven ratlier coarse denticles. In the larger specimen
the first twelve laterals are denticulate (generally with five to six
denticles) and the thirteenth very faintly so. The rest are smooth. In
the smaller specimen only eleven teeth are denticulate.

It would appear that tiie Pleurophyllidia found on the Britisii coast
is this species, and not P. lincata, as it is often <lescri1)ed. Bergh also
appears to have shown that the correct name of the Mediterranean
species is P. undulnf.a, not P. lineata, and the latter specific name should
be cancelled.

NEW SEKIES. — vol.. VII. NO. 3. Z

348 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUPIRRANCHS.

P. lovcni seem8 to differ from P. undulata in its colour, in having
fewer and thicker side lamelliu, and in its dentition. In P. undulata
the central tooth is much broader, and all the teeth, with the exception
of the last two or three in each row, are denticulate.

LOMANOTUS, YERANY, 1846.

(Alder and Hancock, Monograph, Fam. 3, genus 10 (under name of
Eumenis). Garstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, vol. i., 1889, pp. 185-9.
Beaumont, Proc. Royal Irish Acad., 1900, pp. 842-4.)

The members of this genus are not common, and large specimens are
distinctly rare, though small ones are not infrequent in some localities,
e.g. Plymouth. The body appears to be very delicate and easily torn,
and most authors report that their specimens were badly preserved.
The following species have been described.

1. Lomanotus genei, Verany. Catal, degli. anim. invert, di Genovce
e Nizza, 1846.

2. L. hancocJd, Norman. Ann. Mag. N. H., vol. xx., 1877, p. 518.

3. L. 2Jortlandicus, Thomps. Ann. Mag. N. H., 1860, vol. v. p. 50.

4. L. eisigii, Trinch. Bendic. Ace. Set. Fis. Mat., xxii. 3, 1883, pp. 92-4.

5. L. Jlavidus, A. & H., Monograph, Fam. 3, pi. 41.

6. L. marmoratus, A. & H., Monograph, Fam. 3, pi. 1.

7. L. varians, Garstang, I.e.

Of these names the last is proposed by Garstang for all the British
species (Z, marmoratus, L. Jlavidus, L. j)ortla7idicus, and L. hancocJci), on
the supposition that they are really one. But if that supposition is
correct, the right course would seem to be not to introduce a new name,
but to call all the forms by the earliest of the existing specific names.
L. varians may therefore be omitted from the list. The remaining six
forms may be divided into the large and the small. Of the large forms
L. genei has undoubted priority as a name, and it is unfortunate that
the authors of the remaining three large species, L. hancocki, L. port-
landicus, and L. eisigii, did not, in describing them, state definitely in
what points they considered them to differ from the typical species. It
seems certain that the number of processes on the frontal veil and on
the rhinophore sheaths differs in otherwise similar individuals and can-
not be made a specific character. L. portlandicus does not seem to be
distinguished from L. genei (I.e.) by any clear character. Norman states
tiiat the most marked character of his L. hancocki is " the small size of
the terminal, simple, conical process, which is projected beyond the
calyx-like sheath " of the rhinophores. But it is highly probable that
the rhinophores were of the usual type, and that the lower laminated
portion was merely hidden within the sheath. Trinchese (I.e.) has

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 349

given a somewhat detailed description of L. cisigii, from which it
appears that its most remarkable characters are : (1) that the hepatic
diverticula do not extend into the marginal papilhc; and (2) that the
two margins unite at the end of the Ixxly and form " una larga pinna
che e r organo principale del nuoto." But a similar organ is found in
the specimen described below, and is figured in some unpublished draw-
ings of L. iwrtlandicus made by Hancock, and preserved in the New-
castle Museum. Alder and Hancock, as well as Bergh, found the
hepatic diverticula in the papilla', but 1 could not demonstrate their
existence with certainty in the specimen which I examined. It is pos-
sible that dilferent specimens may vary in this respect, as do Dendro-
notus and Bornella exccpta. Trinchese also states that in the young
L. eisigii, " Ogni papilla conteneva un lobo epatico bene sviluppato."

The small species are L. marmoratus and L. Jlavidus, both British.
With regard to these the main question is, have they assumed their
adult and final form, or are they immature ? Trinchese states that the
young of L. eisigii differs markedly from the adult; and if we recognize
the possibility of modifications occurring during growth, it may be said
that the two small species present no characters either externally or in
the buccal parts which are incompatible with the idea that they are the
young of L. genet. On the other hand, if they are mature (on which
point the evidence is inconclusive), the differences in size and colour are,
no doubt, sufficient specific characters. A further question is whether
L. marmoratus and L. jlavidus are distinct forms. If they are adults,
they must certaiidy be regarded as separate species. But if they are
immature, then considering that L. jlavidus is smaller than L. mar-
moratus, and that Trinchese states that the young L. eisigii is seolidi-
form, it is probable that L. jlavidus is the youngest stage of the same
species. Alder and Hancock note the ;colidiform characters of the
type specimen.

As mentioned below. Alder and Hancock's published plates of
L. marmoraius are wrong in representing the dorsal margin as con-
tinuous with the oral veil, and the error does not occur in an earlier
drawing preserved at Newcastle.

I recognize provisionally three species : —

1. L. genei, Verany.

= L. portlandicus, Thomps.
L. hancocki, Norman.
L. eisigii, Trinchese.

2. L. marmoratus, A. & H.
r). L. jlavidus, A. & H.

It is, however, highly probable t,hat both of these latter will prove to
be young forms of the first.

350 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS.

LOMANOTUS GENEI, VEKANY.

(Hekgh, Beitr. zur Keniif. AeoJidiadnv, vi. pp. 5-8, and vii. G'2-3.
Vayssikke, Mull. Opisth. tie Marseille, part iii. 87-91. (Jamble, Ann.
Mag. N. //., scr. 6, vol. ix., 1892, p. 379.)

One large specimen from riymouth Sound, kindly given me by
Mr. W. I. Beaumont.

The colour of the preserved specimen is yellowish white suffused
with brown, which is deepest on the pericardium, rhinophores, oral veil,
mantle margin with papilla^ and on the tail. There are no white dots.
Some, but not all, of the papilla3 have colourless transparent tips.

The length is 26 mm., the breadth at most 8, and the height 9,
including the raised margin. This margin starts from the rhinophore
sheaths and is 2-3 mm. wide. It bears thirty-two papilhe on the right,
and thirty on the left side, and is bent into six undulations, three
upwards and three downwards. The largest papilhe are those in the
centre of these undulations and are about 4 mm. high ; the rest are
about half the size. The papilhe (Fig, 6) are distinctly sjjoon-shaped,
the convex surface being generally outside, but sometimes inside. At
the base of the larger papilla3 are two folds on the inside. The margin
is entire round the tail and forms a horizontal fin. The anus is 15 mm.
from the anterior end, and the genital orifices G mm., just behind the
rhinophores. The oral veil bears four distinct digitations, two on each
side, about 2 mm. long. The rhinophore sheaths are about 3 mm. high;
the right bears five digitations; the left, tiiough apparently uninjured,
has only one. The foot is produced into short pointed angles and
grooved. The upper lamina is much stronger and thicker than the
lower.

The jaws are yellow, rather soft and llexible, and much as described
by Bergh. The edges for some distance inwards are covered by a
mosaic of plates or scales with denticulate edges (Fig. 8.). The
masticatory process is very short.

The radula corresponds in general with the descriptions of Bergh and
Vayssiere. It consists of thirty-two rows. The teeth are large,
crowded, and yellow at the sides of the rows; smaller, spaced, and
colourless in the centre. In this specimen, and in all tiie smaller ones
observed, the radula has a great tendency to break and become con-
fused, and it seems impossible to spread it out evenly. It is hard to
say whether there is a central tooth or not, as the arrangement appears
to be not quite symmetrical. Down the rhachis run four to five irregular
and not quite straight rows of very irregularly shaped teeth (Fig. 7. a.),
bearing a central cusp and three to seven pointed denticles of various
sizes on either side. To the right and left of these teeth the rows be-

K0TE3 ON SOME B1UTI.SH NUDIBRANCHS. 35l

come more regular, and there come about ten colourless dagger-like
teeth (Fig. 7. b.), with from four to ten fairly regular denticles on
either side, the number of denticles increasing as the teeth are further
from the rhachis. After this the teeth, as one goes outwards, become
larger, yellower, hollowed, and somewhat spoon-shapeil (Fig. 7. c), bear-
ing on either side at least twenty-five denticles, which are shorter and
blunter than tliose of the middle teeth. The outermost teeth of all are
somewhat smaller.

The internal organs are not easy to unravel, all the tissues being very
thin, soft, and easily torn. The oesophagus leads into a round stomach,
which gives ofT branches (apparently two) at the sides, and is prolonged
posteriorly in a diverticulum reaching nearly to the end of the body.
On this lie the liver and the hermaphrodite gland, which are both
yellowish and difficult to separate from one another. The whole mass
is surrounded by a network of transparent tubes, which seem to repre-
sent the kidney. Tiie dorsal papilUe are hollow and communicate wilh
the interior of the body, but I could not satisfactorily demonstrate the
existence of branches of the liver in them (cf. what Trinchese says
about L. cisiffii). If such exist, they are represented by fiocculent
masses of no very definite shape, composed of reddish cells. The
mucus and albumen glands are large ; the ampulla of the hermaphro-
dite gland long and thick ; the vas deferens thinner and coiled ; the
penis conical and unarmed ; the spermatotheca small and roundish.

If any real distinction can be drawn between L. f/ev,ci and L. eisigii,
this animal should probably be referred to the latter in virtue of the
shape of the papilhe and the apparent absence of hepatic diverticula in
them. But I do not think that the two species are really distinct.

LOMANOTUS MARMORATUS, A. & H.

F'our living specimens (A) examined at Plymouth in April, 1905,
were about 9 mm. long and 2 mm. broad. The ground colour of the
living animals is yellowish white, but largely covered with irregular
markings of diderent siiades of brown and olive, and also with small
sandy dots. The colour is darkest at the sides and lighter in the centre
of the back. The tips of the cerata are whitish ; tlie hepatic diverti-
cula within them yellowish brown.

The foot is cleft, and indented in front with strongly hooked corners.
The veil is not large, with four processes, two on each side, which are
somewhat bulbous at the tip. The rhinopliorc shcatlis are rather tall
for the size of the animal, being about 2 mm. high, and bear four or
five processes, the number not being always the same on the right and
left sheaths. In one specimen one sheath is entirely smooth. The

352 NOTES ON SO.MK BIJITISH NUDIBHANGHft.

dorsal margin starts from the rliinopliore sheath ; it makes four not
very distinct undulations and bears about twenty-two papillie, most of
which, especially the taller ones, are carried vertically, though some of
the smaller ones point sidewards. The taller papilUe bear a distinct
bull) under the pointed tip, but in the smaller ones the bulb is less
developed. Four of the papilku are distinctly larger than the rest and,
roughly speaking, mark the divisions between the undulations. The
third of these larger papilhe is the tallest of all and is about 2 mm.
higii (Fig. 9. c).

Another specimen (B), which was about 7 mm. long when at rest and
8 mm. when crawling, was brownish white, with yellowish-brown mott-
lings down the centre of the back and deep purplish-brown mottlings
on the cerata. The other external characters arc much as in the
specimens already described, but the papillae are not so long and there
are only obscure indications of the subterminal bulb. The dorsal
margin is more clearly a web connecting the papilla;. The rhinophore
sheaths bear five processes each.

Three other specimens of about the same size were so macerated that
nothing could be done with them except to examine the buccal parts.

The jaws and radula are much the same in all eight specimens. The
jaws are not denticulate, but near the edge is a mosaic formed of tile-
like prominences denticulate on the anterior edge. The radula is very
irregular in appearance and could not be laid out straight in any
specimen. There is a wide naked rhachis bearing folds, and on each
side of the rhachis fifteen to twenty rows of teeth, each containing
eight to ten teeth on either side. More could not be made out with
certainty. The teeth are longer than in Alder and Hancock's and
Bergh's plates, and more uniform. They are dagger- shaped, but slightly
bent at the end, bearing at least twelve denticles on either side and
perhaps considerably more, but the denticles are hard to see, even with
a high power. The innermost are slightly shorter and stouter; the
outermost longer and thinner.

The animals are very delicate. They die in captivity without
apparent cause, and the body becomes decayed and macerated very
rapidly.

This form, especially the specimen called B, approaches the L. mar-
vioratus of Alder and Hancock sutticiently nearly to bear the name.
Their plate {Eumenis marmorata, Fam. 3, pi, 1. a.) contains one of the
few inaccuracies to be found in their works, inasmuch as it represents
the dorsal margin as continuous with the oral veil, not as starting from
the rhinophores. But in a preliminary study for the drawing preserved
in a bound volume of Alder's drawings, belonging to the Hancock
Museum at Newcustle-on-Tyne, the disposition of the parts i.s somewhat

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 353

indistinct, and it is quite probable that it was meant to represent the
dorsal margin as starting from the rhinophores. When this study was
copied for the plate as published, the artists themselves probably mis-
interpreted their earlier and rather indistinct drawing. But I do not
think that we should insist that tlie continuity of the dorsal margin
and oral veil is really a character of L. marmoratus, A. & H.

LOMANOTUS FLAVIDUS, A. Sz H.

A single small specimen examined alive at Plymouth resembled
Alder and Hancock's figure of this species. It is only 4 mm. long and
1 mm. broad. The general colour is pale buff, due to a multitude of
little specks. There are also white spots (particularly on the tops of
the cerata) and a few purplish-brown spots. At the sides of the head
in front of the rhinophores are two purplish-brown patches. The
rhinophore sheaths bear five processes, of which the one behind and
pointing outside is longer tliau the others. There are only about
twelve papilhe on each side. They are much as in Alder and Hancock's
plate — short, thick, and showing no signs of a bulb. Those in the
middle are the largest. They mostly have an irregular brown ring or
marking.

The animal is not like L. marmoratus superficially, but no difference
could be found in the buccal parts. The foot, veil, and other external
characters not mentioned above are also similar.

HANCOCKIA, GOSSP:.
= GOVIA, Trinchesk.

Bergii {System der Nudih. Gast., p. 1048) adopts Govia (Trinchese,
1886) as the name of this genus in preference to Hancoclcia (Gosse,
1877), apparently on the ground that Gosse's description is inadequate.
But though Gosse does not deal with the anatomy of the animal, his
description is amply sufficient for its identification. There can be no
reasonable doubt that his Hancockia dadylota is the animal described
below, and that it is generically and perhaps specifically the same as
the later Govia of Trinchese. The name is therefore entitled to stand.

The genus appears to be rare, and is recorded from the south of
England, Brest, and the Mediterranean. Four described species are
probably referable to it : Hancockia dactylota, Gosse ; Govia rubra,
Trinchese ; Govia viridis, Trinchese ;* and Doto nncinata, Hesse. In the
Jour, dc Conchyl., 1872, p. 34, Hesse described under this name a Nudi-
branch captured at Brest, but Garstang seems to have proved that it is
a Hancockia. Whether there is really more than one species is a

* References to the literature arc given on following i)age.

354 NOTES ON SOME IIKITISIE NUDIBRANCHS.

matter of some doubt. Perhaps Trinchese's two species are distinct,
and perhaps his Govia viridis is identical with liotli Doto uncinfita and
II((ncnckii( docti/lotc, so that the genus niny be tabuhitoil as follows: —

1. Ifaiicockia dadylota, Gosse, S. England.

2. //. uncinata (Hesse), Brest.

3. H. viridis (Trinchese), Mediterranean.

4. If. rubra (Trinchese), Mediterranean.

Hesse regarded his si)ecimen as a Doto, and I'ergh somewhat doubt-
fully refers the genus to the Dotonidie. It would seem to be inter-
mediate between that family and Lomanotus. Tiie narrow radula
indicates affinity to Doto and the true yEolids. The cerata show analo-
gies to those of Doto, though they have not their characteristic shape.
But the perfoliations on the rhinophores, the processes on the oral veil,
and the manner in which the cerata arise from the dorsal margin recall
the characters of Lomanotus rather than of Doto.

HANCOCKIA DACTYLOTA, GOSSE.

(GossE, "On Hancockia dactylota," Ann. Mag. Nat. Hixt., ser. 4, xx.,
1877, pp. 316-19. Gamblk, "On two rare British Nudibranchs, Lomanotus
genei and Tlancockia dactylota," ib., 6, ix., 1892, pp. 378-85. TiONonKSE,
" Ricorche anatom. sul gcnerc Govia," Metn. della R. accad. delle set. deW
ixiituto di Boloi/na, scr. 5, vii. pp. 183-91, 1886. BEROii, Si/stein der Nudib.
Gast., p. 1048, 1892, sub voce Govia.)

Two specimens labelled " I'lymouth district, Sept. '97 and '98."
They are of much the same size, one being rather more elongate than
the other. Measurements in millimetres : —

Length. Breadth. Height.

(1) 7 ... 1-2 ... 2

(2) 6 ... 1-5 ... 2

The colour is greyi.sh green, and the shape rather stifl' and rectan-
gular. The animals are not very well preserved either externally or
internally ; but a small specimen subsequently given me by Mr. Allen
proved to be in better condition and was sectioned.

The foot is truncate in front; no groove is visible on the anterior
margin ; the tail is not pointed beliind, and is slightly bifid.

The oral veil is smooth in the middle and curves inwards, but the
two sides are much expanded and each bears four digits, of which the
second from the inside is the longest. The rliinophore sheaths, which
are set on the dorsal margin, are about 1 mm. liinh ;ind 5 mm. broad,
straight, cylindrical, not expanded at the top, but divided into eight to
ten low lobes. The upper part of the rhinophores is a smooth column ; at
the base are a few obliquely vertical perfoliations. From the rhino-
phore sheaths runs backwards a not very distinct marginal ridge, on

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBKANCHS. 355

which are set five processes on the left side and four on the right. The
processes in the first pair are opposite one another. Then they gradu-
ally become alternate. They Ijear lol)CS with a rather irregular outline,
so that the whole process looks like a short, thick hranchial plume.
The first pair have eight lobes, four on each side, and are folded along
the median line, the concave surface being turned outwards. The
second, third, and fourth pairs are similarly folded, but bear only seven
loljes, three on each side and one terminal. The fifth process (found on
the left side only) has five lobes and is irregular in shape. The genital
orifices are close to one another, on the flank of the body, l)etween the
rhinophores and the first process. The vent is between the first and
second processes, close to the dorsal margin.

The nervous system is yellowish. The ganglia are hard to separate,
but as seen from above appear to be as described by Trinchese. The
cerebro-pleural ganglia are large and triangular, showing no sign of
division. The pedal ganglia, which are smaller, lie at their side on
a lower level. The buccal ganglia are large. The eyes are large and of
an intense bluish black.

The jaws bear a row of distinct but irregularly sha})ed denticles on
the masticatory process. Higher up on the jaw itself there seem to be
numerous projections near the edge. The radula resembles that of
Galvina, and consists of thirty-one rows of three teeth each. The
median teeth (PI. xi., Fig. 10. a.) are very strong and distinct, with
four well-developed denticles on each side of a large raised median
cusp. The laterals (Fig. 10. b.) are very thin and hard to see, but are
much as in Galvina, broad, but with a sharjjly pointed summit.

The animals being small and indifferently preserved, it was difficult
to make out the digestive system by ordinary dissection, and the follow-
ing details are derived almost entirely from the specimen which was
sectioned, A fairly long resophagus (PI. xii., Fig. 11. a.) leads from the
buccal mass to the stomach and gives rise about midway to a curved
diverticulum (Fig. 11. b.). The stomach (Fig. 11. c.) is roundish and
not very large. Yxoiw the top of it rises the intestine (Fig. 11. d.),
which sends out a tube to the anal papilla (Fig. 11. e.) on the riglit.
The anterior lower part of tiie stomach is prolonged into two diverticula
(Fig. 11. f.), wliich supply the first pair of cerata and then run straight
forward, terminating in the anterior part of the foot. 1'he termination is
trifid. Posteriorly the stomach gives rise to a long and fairly wide tul.ie
(Fig. 11. i.), which extends to the hinder part of the body and sends oft'
branches (Fig. 11. g.) to the cerata. These branches aie at first simi)le,
but before they enter the cerata they divide into as many ramifications
(Fig. 11. h.) as there are lobes to supply. These secondary ramifications
arise at different levels. At their termination ihey open externally by

356 NOTES ON ROMK BRITISH NI'DinRANCHS.

orifices (PI. xil., Fig. 18. e.) which appear to be cnidocysts. Tiiey consist of
a fairly broad tube, which is narrowed by u constriction when it reaches
the integuments and forms outside the constriction a cup-shaped aper-
ture. There are traces of similar openings on the anterior margin of
the foot ; but it is unusual to find cnidocysts in this position, and the
structure of the organ is not clear. Abundant mucous glands are
scattered over the whole surface of the body, and the mucus can be
seen under the microscope in the act of exuding.

The hermaphrodite gland (PI. xii., Fig. 12. 1, n.) is large and fills all the
posterior part of the body cavity with large yellowish packets. The
anterior genital mass is also well developed, but hardened and not well
preserved. No trace of armature was found, and the spermatotheca
appeared to be surrounded by the albumen gland.

DOTO, OKEN.

A considerable number of species have been referred to this genus,
but it is greatly in need of a revision based on a study of a large series
of living animals. The internal characters offer few points of difference,
and the external characters, such as coloration and the shape of the
rhinophore sheaths, are somewhat variable, and liable to be either dis-
torted or obliterated in preserved specimens. Bergh, in his System cler
Nudib. Gast., registers sixteen species, described chiefly by Alder and
Hancock, Hesse, and Trinchese. Of these it would appear that IK
arhuscida, Agassiz, and D. mmutf, Forbes, are jnere names. J), anstralis,
Angas, is perhaps a Melihc and not a Doto at all, and the later D. ocelli-
fcra of Simroth {Die Gasteropoclen dcr Plankton Expedition, 1895,
pp. 168-70) is of very doubtful affinities. The forms which probably
Ijelong to the genus may be enumerated as follows : —

1. Doto coronata (Gm.). 10. D. cinerea, Trin.

2. Z). /o?-mos«, Verrill. 11. D. pinnatijida Qlig.).

3. D. cusjndata, A. & H. = D. splendida, Trin.

4. D. fragilis (Forbes). 12. D. paulince, Trin.

5. D. crassicornis, M. Sars. 13. D. indica, Bergh.

6. D. costcc, Trin. 14. D. africana, Eliot.

7. D. cornalicc, Trin. 15. D. Jioridicola, Simroth.

8. D. rosea, Trin. perhaps = Z'o^t/Zr/ (.?)j7?/^»(a'«, Bergh.

9. D. aurea, Trin. 16. D. (inmdigera, Bergh.

DOTO PINNA'I'IKIDA (MoNT.), VAU. I'AI'ILLIFKKA.

Tliree specimens from i'lymoutii, nearly a centimetre long. Tlie
coloration, cerata, etc., seem typical of the species as described by Alder
and Hancock, but there are numerous papillae on the back, each with

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 357

a black spot at the tip ; and there are two or iu some places three rows
of such papillre on the sides. Tiie rhinophore sheaths are ample in
front, but slit behind, and bear two or three papillte (Fig. 14.). All
these papilla? are too much developed to be called tubercles, and are
half or even three-quarters of a millimetre in height. The anal
papilla is very large.

The buccal mass is very small and the radula minute, though it con-
tains more than 100 closely fitting teeth. The teeth bear at least three
denticles on each side of the central cusp and perhaps other accessory
denticles and ridges ; but it is diflicult to get a distinct view of any
tootli, even under the highest pinver.

This form is probably a variety of D. innnatifida with the tubercles
more developed. All the proportions of the animal are larger than
those described by A. & H., and it is possibly merely the normal adult
form.

BERGHIA CCERULESCENS (LAURILLARD).

The specimen preserved at Plymouth under this name is really
a Facelina coronata, and has neither the rhinophores nor the dentition
of Berghia. BcrgJiia should probably be removed from the list of the
British fauna, as there appears to be no other record of its occurrence.

The cerata are set in eight groups. At the interior end of several of
them (that is at the sides of the clear space in the middle of the back)
are a number of quite small tubercular papilhe, hardly half a millimetre
high, and similar ones are found here and there in the middle of the
rows. These tubercles probably represent cerata which have been
bitten off and are in process of reproduction. See Bergh, Bcitrdge zur
Kcnntniss der yEolidiaden, v. p. 826. Alder and Hancock mention that
the animals of this species (F. coronata) have the habit of eating one
another's cerata.

-ffiOLIDIELLA, BERGH.
EOLIS ANGULATA, A. & H.

I think that the Folis angulata of Alder and Hancock (Monogr.,
Fam. 3, pi. 23) is really referable to this genus, and merely a broad
and probably inunature specimen of yEolidtella glauca. Professor
Herdman kindly gave me a specimen from Port Erin iu the Isle of
Man which was identified liy him when alive as possessing the ex-
ternal characters of Eoli^i (ingidata. The preserved specimens also
si;enietl to have these characters, as far as they could be recognized,
except that the cerata were more numerous. When dissected it was
found to possess the jaws and characteristic radula of ^ulidiclla
glauca.

358 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIRKANCHS.

If this specimen is really Alder iiiid Hancock's Eolis angulata, I do
uot think that species can be separated from j^olididla t/lauca. As
shown in Alder and Ilancuck's plates the coloration and general appear-
ance are much the same, and it is noticeable that in both tlie rhinophores
are represented as showing indications of slight annulation. Since
A'o/?s augulatn was four lines long and yEolidieUa glauca nearly two
inches, difterences in shape and the numl)er of cerata cannot l)e
regarded as safe specific characteristics.

The anatomy of yEolididla (jhtiwa is described by Bergh in his
Beitr. zur K<nntn. dcr JEolidiaden, viii., 1885, pp. 24-8. The known
distribution of the species extends from Scandinavia to the Mediter-
ranean.

CORYPHELLA.

This genus consists of /Eolids, with a triseriate radula, somewhat
elongate bodies, and unperfoliated rhinophores. It is noticeable, how-
ever, that in several species the rhinophores show traces of rings
or wrinkles, or bear minute lumps. The details submitted below seem
to show that G. gracilis and C. smaragdina are varieties of one species.
C. heaumonti, now first described, offers many peculiarities, and almost
merits generic rank.

liergh in his System der Niidihranchiaten Gasteropoden recognizes
twenty-three species, of which several must be regarded as doulttful
(e.g. G. alderi, G. 2)n'>'vnla, C. semidecora, G. forelisi, G. occllata), since
the radula is unknown. To this list may be added : —

C. cooperi, Cockerell {Jour, of Mai, 1901, viii. 3, p. 85).

G. calif ornica, Bergh {Mai. Unt. in Semper' s Reiscn, vi. 1, 1904, p. 6).

G. sarsi, Friele {Bergen's Museums Aarhog, 1902, No. 3, p. 12).

Cockerell (/. of Malac., 1901, p. 121) considers Cooper's u:Eolis iodinea
to be a Gorijijhella, but Bergh refers it to Flahcllina. Verrill's Gorg-
phclla {?) pallida is somewhat doubtful.

CORYniELLA RUFI BRANCH I ALLS (.JOHN ST.).
(Alder and Hancock, Monog. of Brifish Nudih., Fam. 3, pi. 14.)

One living specimen, Plymouth, April, 1905. The animal is very
elongate, 15 mm. long and only 3 mm. broad. The foot is produced in
front into fairly long tentacular angles, which are very distinctly
grooved. The oral tentacles are 5 mm. or more long, and are carried
in a curved position. The rhinophores are 7 mm. long, straiglit, and
covered with rows of little lumps set in fairly regular rings.
There are about twenty-five rings, and about eiglit lumps in each.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIRRANCHS. 359

The cerata look less thick than in Alder and Hancock's plate.
They are slender and cylindrical, but often irregularly constricted near
the tips, as if injured. The last two are set medianly on the caudal
ridge. The anus is lateral, but high up. The tail not long.

The body is transparent and colourless, with only a very little opaque
white on the oral tentacles and rhinophores. The hepatic ramifications
within the cerata are of a bright, light scarlet, and somewhat irregular
iu outline. Above the scarlet is a broad opaque white ring, and above
that a pellucid point. There is a faint yellow tinge in the rhinophores
and down the centre of the back.

The jaws bear eight to nine rows of irregular denticles. The radula
consists of thirteen rows. The median tooth has a strong central cusp,
and seven rather long and thin denticles, curving slightly inwards.
The side teeth bear twelve longish slightly curved denticles. Alder
and Hancock {Tongues of the Eolidida') say that the apex of the side
teeth points outwards, but this did not seem to be the natural position
in the present specimen, though the teeth are easily displaced.

In spite of this and some other small points of difference, I think
this specimen must be referred to C. rujihranchialis. It can liardly be
C. pclluclda, which it also resembles, as tliat animal is said to have
smooth lateral teeth.

CORYPHELLA GRACILIS (A. & lb).

One living specimen, Plymouth, April, 1905, G mm. long, and ratlier
elongate. The body is of a not very transparent white, with a good
deal of opaque white, especially on the oral tentacles, rhinophores, and
tail. The cerata have opaque white pigment at the top, which some-
times, but not always, forms a distinct ring. The liepatic diverticula are
of a reddish orange. The anterior angles of the foot are produced, but
are not very long. The oral tentacles are distinctly longer than the
rhinophores, which are smooth. The cerata are rather thick and
elliptical, and are set iu four groups, containing on each side eight, five,
five, and three cerata respectively.

The radula consists of eleven teeth. Tiie central tooth bears four to
six (generally five) denticles on each side of the median cusp. The
laterals bear six denticles.

This appears lo Ite a fairly typical specimen of (■. gracilis. Alder
and Hancock say it has four denticles on the central tooth, Bergh that
it has five.

Another living specimen seen at Tlymouth at the same time was
9 mm. long and 2;") broad. It was very active, and fond of swimming
foot uppermost.

The tail is long ; the anterior angles of tlie foot are produced into

360 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS.

distinct l>ut short horns. The oral tentacles are moderately long, with
a few scattered opaque white dots. The rhinophores are long, wrinkled,
but not perfoliate, transparent and colourless, except that the tips are
covered with opaque wliite dots. The eyes are small, but black and
distinct. The cerata are set in five groups, composed on the right side
of three, four, two, four, three, and on the left of three, three, four, two,
three cerata respectively. These five groups are all seen to be distinct
when the animal is moving and stretched out. Otherwise the first and
second and the fourth and fifth a))pear to coalesce, though the third
always renuiins distinct. The general impression produced is that the
cerata are few and scattered irregularly. The innermost are the largest
and are rather swollen. The body is colourless and transparent. On
the tail is a line of irregular Ijright white spots. The yellowish-grey
hermaphrodite gland can be seen through the integuments. The
hepatic diverticula within the cerata consist of two elements, one bright
green, the other brownish yellow. As a rule the green predominates
and gives the general colour, but in some of the cerata the brown pig-
ment prevails.

The jaws are thin and colourless, with at least six rows of denticles.
The radula consists of thirteen rows. The central tooth has as a rule
four denticles on each side of the median cusp, but sometimes five, and
only once six. The laterals have the apex turned inwards and bear
five or six denticles.

A third specimen was dead when examined. Though much macerated
and mutilated, it appeared to have resembled the one just described
externally. The cerata were green with white tips. The radula con-
sisted of twelve rows. The central teeth have uniformly seven denti-
cles on each side of the median cusp. The laterals bear three to six
denticles. The tips of several laterals seem to point outwards.

According to Alder and Hancock, who created both species, C. gracilis
has orange-red cerata and four denticles on the central teeth, whereas
C. smariKjdinii has green cerata and seven denticles. The second of the
forms described above appears to be intermediate both in colour and
dentition between C. gracilis and smaragdina, and suggests that the
animals in which the green pigment predominates should be called
C. gracilis, var. smaragdina.

Vayssiere {liecherches sur les Moll. Opisth. dii Golfe dc Marseille, ii.
p. 76), regards C. laiulshurghii, C. rufihranchialis, 0. felluciday C. smarag-
dina, and C. gracilis as being all synonyms. This appears to me exces-
sive, as besides other characters the forms vary in their dentition. l>ut
it must be admitted that we require nmch more information to enable
us to judge how far the number of denticulations may vary within the
limits of one species.

NOTES ON SOME BKITISII NUDIBRANCHS. 361

CORYPHELLA LANDSBURGHII, ALDER & HANCOCK.

(Alder and Hancock, Monog. of British Nudih., Fam. 3, pi. 20. Trinciiese,
^olididce di Genova, ii., Tav. Ixii., Ixiv., Ixvi.-lxx. Beroh, Die Niidih:
gesammelt w'ihrend d. Falirten d. Willem Barents, j). 8.)

One living specimen, Plymouth, April, 1905. Very slender and
elongate, 7 mm. long and only about 1 mm. broad. Cerata nearly
2 mm. long; rhinophores 2'd mm. long. Foot produced into distinct
tentacular angles. Oral tentacles fairly long and slightly wrinkled ;
rhinophores longer and more distinctly wrinkled. They bear low rings
of rather irregular outline, but not perfoliations or knobs. The cerata
are set in eight short rows arranged as follows on each side : —

2
2
3

Three rows close together.

2]

o r Two rows close together.

2

2 Three distinct rows.
2

The body, rhinophores, and tentacles are of a clear amethyst, witli
which the orange-red ramifications of the liver within the cerata form
a striking contrast. The cerata bear a ring of opaque white below the
pellucid tips. The foot is whitish.

The jaws bear six to seven rows of denticles near the top, but the
number decreases lower down. Tiie radula consists of thirty rows.
The central tooth is rather broad and arched. It bears five denticles on
each side of the central cusp, which is not much larger than the rest.
The laterals are of a fair size, but somewhat difficult to see, as they are
quite colourless. They have a long apex and five to six small denticles.

This appears to be a fairly typical example of Alder and Hancock's
C. landfihurgliii. They do not mention that the rhinophores are
wrinkled, though it is indicated in their plate, and they describe tliem
as distinctly shorter than the oral tentacles, which is not the case here.

The most striking characteristic of this form is its strangely con-
trasted coloration. It is very doubtful if the specimen from Vardo
referred to this species with a query l)y Bergh (I.e.), really belongs to it.

CORYPHELLA BEAUMONTI, spec. nov.

Mr. W. T. Peaumont, to whom the species is dedicated, has kindly
furnished me witli the following notes on the living animal.

" Eolidfrom Barn Puol {Fli/moulh). Lengtli, 16 mm., but looks us if tlie

SG2 NOTES ON SOME r.lJTTISlI XITDIBRANCHS.

l)osterior jiart of the body had been lost, as it ends abru})tly only 3-4 mm.
behind tiie heart.* Tlie outline of the anterior end of the foot is like
Eolis nana, except that the sides are produced into small angular pro-
jections kept tucked in and consecpiently inconspicuous. Head nearly
as wide as the foot. The oral tentacles very minute; merely short pro-
cesses of angles of the oral veil. The rhinophores are long and smooth,
held erect with tips bent back. The eyes do not show. Papillie very
numerous and extremely long, slender and tapering to fine points, con-
stantly in motion, curling and uncurling, and when at rest convoluted.
A group of small papillae, api)arently three rows, is wholly in front of
the rhinophores on each side. Then a row on each side al)reast of
rliinophores. Another row between this and the next, which is abreast
of the anterior end of the heart. Then a row level with the posterior
end of the heart. The outer ends of the rows are not double.

" The colour of the body is red, tending to orange on the rhinophores,
but elsewhere more rosy. The colour seems to be situate in the super-
ficial tissues. The papillae are superficially fiesh-coloured. The hepatic
ccBca are in most of the papilhe rosy purple throughout, but in a few
pale greenish purple, except at the ti}), wiiich is rosy purple in all and
more deeply coloured than the rest of the organ. The cceca are slender,
especially at the distal ends, and much corrugated. The extreme tips
of the papilUe beyond the end of the coeca are yellowish flesh colour,
deeper than the superficial colour of the rest of the papillie."

I have examined two preserved specimens given me by Mr. Beaumont,
20 mm. and 14 mm. long respectively. The colour is dead white, not
very transparent. The hepatic diverticula are yellowish white and
corrugated. The external characters agree with Mr. Beaumont's
description. The front of the foot is broad and expanded, but the
tentacular angles are small and bent downwards and inwards. The
anterior margin is not grooved. Over the mouth is a l)road oral veil
(5'3 mm.) expanded into short tentacles (T? mm.) at the sides The
rhinophores are long (7'5 mm.), thin, not perfoliate, and placed close
togetlier on a slight prominence. There are three rows of cerata
distinctly in front of them. The cerata are set on eight narrow, curved
ridt'es, which are sinfjle and do not form horseshoes. The first three
rows are close together, the next three not far apart, but tlie last two
are more distant. In the perfect specimens the length of the cerata
obscures this arrangement. There are four to six cerata in each row.
The cerata in front of the rhinophores are short, cylindrical, and
2-4 nnii. long. The posterior cerata are very long; in the specimen,
which has a body 20 mm. loiig, they measure as much as 15 mm. and
are about 1 mm. broad at the base.

* Tlie speciineua here described are niiicli the same. — C. E.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 363

The jaws bear two or tliree rows of denticles. The radula is triseriate,
and consists of twenty and fourteen rows respectively in the two speci-
mens. The central tooth (Fig. 15. a.) has a strong central cusp, which
bends slightly downwards, and hence sometimes appears asymmetrical
when pressed Hat in a slide. On each side of it are a number of small
denticles of varying shape and size. The smallest number observed
was sixteen and the largest twenty-four. The laterals (Fig. 15. b.) are
also broad, with slightly lower cusps, and twenty to thirty accessory
denticles on the inner side. No denticles were visible on the outer side
of the laterals.

The penis, which is partially protruded in one specimen, is sickle-
shaped and very deeply grooved, consisting of a lamina folded down
the middle and probably capable of assuming a foliaceous expansion.
This part is unarmed, but the base of the penis and the end of the
spermatic duct bear numerous yellow cones (Fig. 16.) terminating in
a short bent appendage. They appear to be soft and not spiculous
or chitinous. The spermatotheca is large and spherical.

As this species has smooth rhinophores and the radula of Goryphella,
I provisionally refer it to that genus in order to avoid multiplying
genera. But in many of its characters — such as the shortness of the
oral tentacles, the length of the cerata, the position of some of the
cerata in front of the rhinophores, and the conformation of the penis —
it differs markedly from the described Coryphellie, and it may ultimately
prove better to make it the type of a new genus.

CRATENID^, BERGH.

(Behgh, MaJ. Unt. in Semper's Reise7i, Heft i., 1870, pp. 1-4, and Heft
xviii. pp. 1021-4. Beaumont, "Fauna and Flora of Valentia Harbour," in
Proc. Royal Irish Acad., 1900, pp. 834-8. Fkiele, " Molhisken der ersten
Nordmeerfahrt," Bergen^s Museums Aarhoij, 1902, No. 3, p. 9.)

As the autliors cited above ol)serve, Bergh's classification of this
group raises many difficulties in practice, on account of the minuteness
of the generic distinctions and the doubt whether the forms really
possess the characters which he attributes to them. He divides the sub-
family into five genera — Cuthona, GuthoneMa, Ci'atena, Jlervia, and
Phedilla. Of these the last named differs from the others in several
particulars. Hervia also may be set aside as characterized by the
corners of the foot being prolonged into tentacular processes. It is not
recorded from Ih'itish waters, though as the ha])itat of one species is the
Northern Atlantic it may some day be added to our fauna. The other
three genera, Cuthona, CuthoneU'a, and Gratena, are closely connected,
and to them must l)e added in my opinion Atuphorina. Bergh classes

NPW SEJIIES. — VOL. VIJ. NO. 3. 2 A

:-'G4 NOTES ON SOME r.KITlSll NTiPir.TtANCHS.

Amj)horina under the Galvinid.ne, which hardly form a natural sub-
family, the only character common to the component genera being that
the cerata arc more or less inflated. In Am,i)horina this feature is
not very marked, and its other characters ally it to Cratcna. The
tropical genera Zatteria, Myja, and Ennoia are also probably allied, but
need not be considered here.

With regard to nomenclature, Bergh appears to have proved that the
names Cavulina and Montagua must be rejected.

The animals which compose the four genera Craiena, Cuthona,
Cidhonclla, and Amphorina are small and inconspicuous, though often
beautifully coloured. The rhinophores are not perfoliate, the corners
of the foot are not developed into tentacular processes, and the radula
is uniseriate. There is an absence of any very striking characteristics
either internal or external. The most distinct genus is Am2)horina. It
lias slightly inflated cerata, a style on the penis, and a long tapering
radula containing from fifty to eighty teeth, which gradually increase in
size. The denticles on the teeth, particularly the median cusp, arise far
back, and hence have a peculiar elevated appearance. To this genus at
least the following species must, in my opinion, be referred : —
1. Amijhorina alhcrti, Quatrefages.

{2. A. cccrulca (Mtg.).

1 3. A. molios, Herdman.*

4. A. aurantiaca (A. & H.) = Cuthona aurantiaca.

5, A. olivacea (A. & H.) = Cratcna olivacea.

Perhaps Cratena viridis will prove to be an Amphorina, as may also
E. f/lottensis. In separating the other genera Bergh makes use of the
structure of the auditory capsule, which he says contains a single
otolith in Cuthona, but several otoconia in CuthoncUa and Cratena.
Beaumont, however, denies this, and reports the existence of single
otoliths in species classified by Bergh under Cratena (e.g. Cr. amcena).
In any case, the character is so minute and so dilUcult to determine
in preserved specimens that it seems undesirable to use it, unless
absolutely necessary. Setting aside possible differences in the auditory
capsule, it would appear that the only clear distinction between Cuthona
and Cratena formulated by Bergh is that the head is broad in the
former, but not in tiie latter. This character seems to be clear and
conspicuous, though, as it is merely a question of degree and develop-
ment, one may doubt if it is really of generic value. If it is accepted,
it would appear tliat the following are referable to Cuthona: —

1. Cuthona nana, A. & H,

2. C. jmmilio, Bergh (Sargasso Sea).

* I agree with Mr. Beaumont (I.e.) in thinking that the specific distinctness of this
species from A. cceruha is donhtful.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCIIS, 365

3. C. bicolor, Bergh (Japan).

4. C. peachii, A. & H. (see Beaumont, I.e.).

Uolis inornata, A. & H., and CuthoTut stinipsoni, Verrill (" Addns. to
Marine Fauna of N. America," in American J. of Sci. and Arts,yo\. xvii.
p. 314, 1879), possibly belong to this group, but are imperfectly de-
scribed, and the buccal parts unknown.

The genus CufJionella was founded by Bergh for a single specimen
obtained by the ChaUenf/er in tlie Faroii Channel. Like Cuthona it has
a broad head, but it differs from both Cuthona and Cratcna in having
the foot truncated in front, jaws armed with several series (not a single
series) of denticles, and the anus opening on the back, not on the side.
It will be seen that all these characters, except the last, are very slight.
Friele (I.e.) examined specimens from the North Atlantic which had
the general characters of the Cratenidce and a dorsal anus, but a rounded
foot and a rather irregular denticulation of the jaw. Not wishing to
create a new genus for these trifling deviations, he referred the form to
Cuthonella, the characteristic of which thus becomes the position of
the anus, which is dorsal, but somewhat to the right of the median
line.*

The genus thus contains —

1. Cuthonella ahyssicola, Bergii.

2. C. ferruginea., Friele.

3. C. herghi, Friele.

All from the North Atlantic, but not from British waters.

There remains the large genus Cratcna, in which can be included
most of tlie forms not assigned to Cuthona, Cuthonella, and Amphorina,
though some of the less-known species of this group, such as EoJis
northuiiibrica, present remarkable peculiarities. In Cratena the head is
not broad, the cerata are not inflated, and the anal pnpilla is on the side,
not on the back. The radula is generally (but not always) short and
not markedly tapering. The teeth bear a few (rarely more than ten)
denticles on each side of a central cu.sp which is often not prominent.
As a rule the penis is unarmed, but in some cases, for which it hardly
seems worth while to create a new genus, it bears a style. The follow-
ing species seem referable to this genus with more or less certainty : —

1. Cratena hirsuta, Bergh. Greenland.

2. Cr. olrikki (Morcii). Greenland.

3. Cr. pustidata (A. & II.).

4. Cr. amcena (A. & II.).

5. Cr.fructnosa, Bergh. Sargasso Sea.

* I understand tliis to l)c tlie case in Cuthonella abyssicola, \'\\t Bergh'a statements in tlie
Challenger licpurt, on ]>. 'J.\ and ji. 25, are not quite consistent.

3G6 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIRKANCIIS.

6. Cr. co7icinna (A. & H.).*

7. Cr. pilata (Gould). Nortli-West Atlantic.

8. Cr. hylgia, Bergli. riiilijjpines.

9. Cr. longibursa, Bergli. Pelew Islands.

10. Cr. stipata (A. & H.).

11. Cr. cavancce, Bergh. Chile.

12. Cr. jt)?m//rt, Bergh. Juan Fernandez.

13. Cr. cucullata, Bergh. Malay Archip.

Cr. viridis (Forbes) and Cr. f/lottensis are probaldy Aniphorinas, and it
seems difficult to separate Cratena gymnota (Gould) from Amphorina
aurantlaca. Cr. arenicohi (Forbes), Cr. veronica (Verrill), Cr. couchii
(Cocks), and Cr. jrurpiirascens (Fleming) are imperfec;tly described.
Cr. cingulata is placed by Alder in Jeffreys Conchology, vol. v. p. .53,
under Galvina, which implies that it has a triseriate radula. Cr. luguhris,
Bergh, is referred to this genus with a query by the author himself.

In Jeffrey's Conchology, vol. v. p. 45, etc., Alder distributes the
British forms between CiUhoiia and Cavolina. The former, which is
defined as having the branchia.* close set and a uuiseriate radula with
a central spine and lateral denticulations, includes C. peachii, C. nana,
C, stipata, C. angulata, C. inornata, C. concinna, C. olwacea, C a^irantiaca,
and C. pustulata. Cavolina, which is defined as having the branchiae
set in rather distant rows and a uniseriate denticulated radula with
the central spine a little prominent, includes C. couchii, C. avimna,
C. nortJmmhrica, C. arcnicola, C. glottensis, C. coerulea, C. viridis, and
C. purpurascens. Though something may be said for this division, it
ignores the existence of Ampliorina (Quatrefages, 1844), and the point
on which stress is laid — whether the branchiae are close set or in
distant rows — is often difficult to determine in preserved specimens, and
might be doubtful in li\ing ones.

In the above remarks 1 have merely considered how the described
species can be most naturally distributed among the described genera.
Whether those genera are valid and necessary is another question.
I doubt myself if Bergh's whole subfamily of. Cratenidre, including
Amphorina (but perhaps excluding Fhestil/a.) otters more than one good
generic type ; and if nature provides a great number of similar forms it
seems unscientific to separate them into many genera on the strength of
small points of difference. It is convenient, no doubt, to divide a large
genus into sections or subgenera, but to split it into several genera if
the differences between them are of less than ordinary generic value
obscures tlie real uniformity of tlie animals classified.

* Cr. concinna. Since writing the above I Iuivl' liad lui (ipportunity of exaniiuiug a
speeiineii of tliis s])ecies from tlie Menai Straits, given nie l»y Prof. Herdnian. The
character.s agree with A. k II. '.s ilcscription. No style was found on the penis. Tlic
teeth of the radula are remarkably long, narrow, and pointed.

NOTES ON SOME BrxITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 367

AMPHORINA AURANTIACA (A. & H.).

(Alder and Hancock, Mon. Brit. Nvd., Fam. 3, i)I. 27.
Beaumont, I.e., pp. 836-7.)

One living specimen examined at Plymouth, April, 1905. The
animal, which was active and seemed to resent being touched,
measured 8 mm. in length and 3"5 in breadth when extended.
Mr. Beaumont observes that specimens as highly coloured as Alder and
Hancock's plate are rare, and the present one was decidedly less
brilliant. The tentacles and rhinophores were colourless, the latter
with a faint red tinge. The body was colourless and transparent, with
very minute, hardly visible opaque white dots. Behind the black eyes
was a reddish spot, possibly caused by some internal organ showing
through the skin. The general effect of the cerata was that they were
reddish with white tips. The integuments of the cerata were colour-
less, as could be seen at the tips, where there is no liver ; below this
colourless tip was a broad band of opaque white, formed by an aggrega-
tion of minute dots. The hepatic diverticula were reddish brown.

The foot is expanded anteriorly into a disk, but there are no tenta-
cular angles. The tail does not project beyond the cerata behind. Tlie
rhinophores are somewhat longer than the tentacles. In the living
animal the cerata show no distinct arrangement in rows ; a bare space
is visible anteriorly behind the rhinophores ; further back the cerata
close over and hide the dorsal surface. When stripped off, the cerata
are seen to be arranged in ten rows, each containing two to four.

The jaws bear several series of minute denticles. The radula con-
sists of a single series of seventy-six teeth, tapering markedly in
breadth. They bear two or three main denticles (Fig. 17.) on each side
of the median cusp, and one or two secondary smaller denticles occa-
sionally and irregularly interposed between the main denticles. All the
denticles, especially the median cusp, arise unusually far back. Mr.
Beaumont states that the penis is armed with a style.

Verril in Proc. U. S. National Mus., iii., 1880, p. 390, observes that
Cuthona aurantiaca, A. & H., is very closely allied to Gratcna gymnota
(Gould), whicli lias been described by Bergh in Bcitrdge zur Kcnntniss
der ^olidiaden, viii., 1885, pj). 33-5. The dentition agrees exactly, but
the form and arrangement of the cerata are different, and Bergh found
no armature on the penis. It may therefore perliaps be well to keep
the forms provisionally distinct.

This form must, I think, be referred to Amjj/iorhia, for it has all the
main characters of that genus. The cerata are stout (see Alder and
Hancock), the penis is armed with a style (according to Beaumont), the
radula is tapering, and the denticles on the teeth arise far back. Loman

368 NOTKS ON ttOMK HKITLSII NUDIBUANCHS.

ill his jiaper Antefkenitu/ over twee voor dc ncdcrlandsche Faxma nieuwe
NtuUhrancJdnta, published in the Tijdschrift der Nedeiiandsche Dier-
kuiidifjr. Verccni(jing, 1893, p. 35, has already called the animal Ampho-
rina nurantiaca.

AMPIIUKIXA OLIVACEA (A. ."k \\.).

(Alder and Hancock, Man. Brit. Nad., Fam. 3, pi. 26.

]>EAUMONT, I.e., p. 834.)

One living specimen was seen at Plymouth in April, 1905, which
I eiiould have hesitated to identify with Alder and Hancock's E. olivacca
on account of the differences in tint and markings ; but Mr. Beaumont
considered it referable to this species, and stated that the coloration is
very varying. As the other characters of the animal proved to agree
with E. olivacca, I have no doubt he is correct.

The animal is only 4 ram. long, stoutly built, with a short tail. The
body colour is whitish ; the tentacle, the rhinophores, and the region
behind them are yellowish. There are no red markings, but the cerata
and body, especially the head, are sprinkled with conspicuous dots of
bright, opaque yellow. The tips of the cerata are whitish and the
hepatric diverticula are olive-coloured.

The front of the foot is slightly expanded into round lobes, but there
are no tentacular angles. The cerata are rather thick ; the l)ranches of
the liver within them are of loose and irregular shape. The cerata are
set in eight rows, fairly close together, containing three to four each.

The jaws bear a row of minute but distinct blunt denticals. The
radula tapers somewhat, but not conspicuously ; it consists of a single
series of fifty-three teeth, with six denticles on each side of the median
cusp (Fig. 18.). This cusp is elevated and rises further back than the
others. I found the verge armed with a hooked style (Fig. 19.) as
already described by Mr. Beaumont.

I think that this species, like Eolis aurantiaca, A. & H., must be
referred to Amphorina, for it has thick papilhe, a spine on the penis,
and a long somewhat tapering radula, in which the teeth iiave the
central cusp rising far back.

CRATENA AMCENA (A. & H.).

(Alder and Hancock, Mo7i. Brit. Nudib., Fam. 3, pi. 3.

Beaumont, I.e., p. 834.)

One living specimen, Plymouth, April, 1905. The animal when fully
extended is about 7 5 mm. long. The body is of a not very clear white,
with opaque white spots, especially on the head and tail. The angles of
the foot are rounded in front. The tentacles and rhinophores are as in

NOTKS ON SOME BRITISIt NUDIIBKANCHS. 369

Alder and Hancock's plate, spotted with white and witli a reddish-
brown band about a third of the way down. The cerata are spotted
with opaque white and brown and have white tips, below which is often,
but not always a distinct reddisli-brown ring ; they are carried as
represented by Alder and Hancock, but there are only five or at most
six groups, arranged as follows : —

1

4

4

4

4

3

The hepatic diverticula are not nearly as green as represented by
Alder and Hancock, but greyish brown with only a faint greenish tinge.

The jaws bear a single row of small but distinct blunt denticles.
The radula consists of a single series of seventeen teeth, not tapering con-
spicuously ; there are five denticles on each side of the central cusp,
which is not much higher than the rest. Beaumont found the verge to
be armed with a colourless spine, but I was unable to discover it.

If Cratcna and Amphorina are maintained as separate genera, it is
difficult to say to which this species should be referred. Beaumont
found that it had a single otolith and a style on the penis, characters
which belong to Amjyhorina ; but the cerata are not inflated, the radula
is short, and the denticulation of the teeth is not like that found in
Ampliorina . I therefore describe the animal, tliough with considerable
hesitation, as Cratena amoma.

CALMA, A. & H.

Much confusion has arisen about this genus, for later authors have not
paid sufficient attention to the statements made about it by Alder and
Hancock, and these statements, which are scattered in various parts of
the monograph, are not always plain if taken separately, tliough if taken
all together they are clear enough. Alder and Hancock described the
type species first in the letterpress to plate 22 (under the name
of Uolis gl(iucoidcs) as a very curious Eolis which will probably
constitute a new generic type, and pointed out the remarkable charac-
ters of the " gastro-hepatic vessel" and "the ovary." Tiieir language
about the radula in this passage is wanting in precision, but in the
letterpress to plate 47 {Tongves of the Eolidvla) they say that
the tongue is very slender, resembles a continuous band, and can only
be seen in profile. The figure clearly represents the tongue as I have
found it, a continuous chitinous ribbon in which the tcetli are fused

370

NOTES ON SOME liRlTlSlI NUDIBRANCMS.

together and only appear as minute serrulations. On page 21 of the
Appendix they create the genus Calma for Eolis ff lav coides, hut unfortu-
nately mention only the external characters and do not refer to the
anatomy.

Hence Trincliese, followed hy Bergh {Beit, zur Kenni. dcr JEolid.,
iii., 1870, pp. G43-7, and vii., 1882, pp. 61-4) and Vayssiere {Opisth. de
Marseille, ii., 1888, 84-8), regarded the genus as akin to Flabcllina, and
referred to it the JiJoiis cavolini of Verany.

Later {Rcndiconti Accad. Set. Fis. Mat. di NapoH, xx. 5, 1881, pp. 121-2,
and Mem. Ac. Sci. Istit. di Bologna, S. iv. T. x. pp. 57-61) Trinchese
described under the name of Forestia mirabilis a Mediterranean iEolid
having all the main characters of Alder and Hancock's Calma glaucoides
— the thread-like undivided radula, the broad, simple hepatic system,
and the hermaphrodite gland arranged along the two sides of the body.
Friele and Hansen had also {Bidrag til Kundshahen om dc nordskc
Nudibranchier, 1875, pp. 78-9) described another species from the
Nortliern Atlantic, calling it merely Bolts albicans, but indicating its
affinities to the genus Calma, A. & H. Bergh, in his System dcr Nudib.
Gastcropoden(i). 1025 and p. 1034) puts Bolis albicans under Forestia, and
makes the genus Ccdma consist of C. glaucoides, A. & H , and C. cavolini
(Verany).

There can, however, be little doubt that the really important charac-
ters of Calma are those mentioned above, and that the genus is equiva-
lent to tlie later (1881) Forestia. It will then contain three species,
j]. C. glaucoides, K. &, H. Atlantic.
' 2. C. albicans, Friele and Hans. Atlantic.
3. C. mirabilis (Trinchese). Mediterranean.

C. albicans appears closely allied to C. glaucoides. C. ■mirabilis differs
in having a few separate teeth, as well as the continuous chitinous band,
and it would seem that the groups of papilhii do not rise from a common
stalk.

It seems probaljlc that Calma cavolini does not belong to this genus.
It is regarded by Bergh and Vayssiere as related to Flabellina, from
which it difTers in having no perfoliations on the rhinophores. The
radula is not like that of Calma glaucoides, but has separate teeth of
the usual pattern. There is some doubt wliether it is triseriate or
uniseriate, the laterals being in any case very small. It would seem
that in some points tlie digestive and reproductive organs resemble
those of C. glaucoides, but neither Bergh nor Vayssiere suggest that it
resembles Forestia mirabilis. They had perhaps not seen Trinchese's
paper at the time they wrote. Whatever may be the true allinities of
the form, the diflerences in the buccal parts prevent its being referred
to Calma, and 1 would propose that it should be rebaptized Ccdmclla.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 371

I do not think tliat the inflated shape of tlie cerata and their
arrangement on low pedestals are really important characters in Cdlmn,
and would define the genus as at present known in the following way.

Animal llattish, cerata arranged in rows and sometimes rising from
a pedestal. No cnidocysts. Ehinophores simple. Corners of anterior
margin of foot prolonged into tentacular processes. Penis unarmed. Jaws
not denticulate. Eadula a continuous band not divided into separate
teeth and merely bearing serrulations on the upper surface. Digestive
system much simpler and less ramified than is usual in the ^olididse ;
kidney also simple and not ramified. Hermaphrodite gland symmetri-
cally arranged on the two sides of the body.

Though the anatomy of Galma is characterized by a certain simplicity,
this simplicity is no doubt not primitive, but secondarily acquired and
connected with the unusual diet of the animal, which feeds on the eggs
of fish. The nature of the food no doubt explains the degeneration of
the radula and perhaps also the absence of cnidocysts (see Grosvenor,
" On the Nematocysts of ^Eolids," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1903, vol. Ixxii. No. 486,
p. 469). Several of my specimens seemed to be gorged and distended
with gelatinous matter, and probably the creatures' habit of thus stuffing
themselves accounts for the breadth and simplicity of the alimentary
passages.

CALM A GLAUCOIDES, ALDER & HANCOCK

Seven specimens received from the Plymouth Laboratory. Two of them
resemble Alder and Hancock's figures more than do the others, which
are flatter and have swollen, almost ovate cerata. But no differences of
structure were found, and as all the specimens were identified at the
Laboratory with C. fjlaucoides, it is proljable that tliey were all alike
externally when alive.

The length varies from 10 to 4 and the breadtli from 4 to 2 mm.
The general colour is whitish or drab, but varies in detail, because the
transparent integuments allow the contents both of the body and of the
cerata to be seen. The broad digestive tract with its diverticula is
generally coloured a pale dull yellow, but contains here and there blackish
masses in the cerata as well as in the main alimentary tract. In two speci-
mens these black portions are so large that the general colour appears to
be bluish black. At the sides of the body between the cerata the white
follicles of the hermaphrodite gland are distinctly visible. The integu-
ments are generally brownish at the sides of the liody and at the bases
of the cerata.

The margin of the foot is expanded both in front and at the sides, so
as to be considerably wider than the head and body ; anteriorly the foot
is rounded, and is produced on each side into a short tentacular process,

372 NOTES ON SOME BKITISH NUDIRRANCHS.

which is ahiiost invisible in many specimens. The cerata are set in from
nine to twelve rows, the most conimoii munher heing ten. Each row
contains two or three cerata, more rarely four. Tlie stalk or common hase
on which they are set is not at all conspicuous, but when an attempt is
made to <letach them they come off in twos or threes, and not separately.
They are not at all caducous. Tn most specimens they are oblong-ovate
in shape; hut in two (as in Alder and Hancock's figures) thoy are
cylindrical. The tentacles and rhinophores are hoth small, without a
trace of perfoliations.

The jaws are thin, smooth, and colourless. The radula consists of a
colourless, continuous ribbon, l)ent into a roughly semicircular shape
(Fig. 20.), and bearing 60-100 denticulations like the teeth of a saw, and
gradually increasing in size.* No trace of any loose, detached teeth was
found. The oesophagus leads into a dilatation (Fig. 21. d.) of moderate
size, which may be called the stomach. From it extends a diverticulum
on either side which supplies two cerata. Posteriorly the stomach is
prolonged into a very wide sacculated gut (Fig. 21. a.), which extends to
the extreme end of the body and gives off simple diverticula, each of which
supplies a single group of cerata. These diverticula fill the cerata
entirely, and no cnidocysts were found. The contents of the digestive
tract, including the cerata, resemble hardened jelly, and are probably
composed of the eggs of fish, which the animal is said to eat. In this
jelly are embedded moderately hard l)lack lumps, detachable from their
surroundings and easily friable, which the jelly is not. As mentioned
above, in some specimens this black substance forms the major part of
the contents of the digestive tract.

The lobes of the hermaphrodite gland are white, and visible through
the dorsal integuments. They are composed of small pouches containing
ova, scattered rather irregularly round a larger and more elongate ])ouch
containing spermatozoa, and they alternate with the diverticula })roceed-
ing from the alimentary canal to the cerata. There is no armature on
the penis. The renal organ (PL xii., Fig. 22.) consists of a simple sac
with a few constrictions. It does not in my specimens extend as far
backwards as indicated by Hecht's figures {Contribution a I'dudc dcs
Nudibranches, Mem. Soc. Zool. de France, viii. 1895, pi. iv. figs. 47, 48),
but terminates soon after the commencement of the posterior third of
the body.

JANIDiE, BERGTI.

This family superficially resembles the true Solids, but offers several
differences of organization. Except in Madrclla, the radula is niulti-

* Below the row of denticulations (a) there can be seen under a high power three or
four series of niinule pits and projections (b).

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBEANCHS. 373

seriate, which would seem to be a more primitive arrangement than the
extremely narrow raduho of the ^^olids ; but the anal papilla is situated
near the end of the back in the median line, which seems to be an
instance of secondarily acquired symmetry. The digestive system offers
peculiarities of its own ; and the cerata, together with the hepatic
diverticula, extend in front of the rhinophores along the anterior margin.
There is generally a crest between the rhinophores.

Three British genera are known — Antiopella, Janolus, and Proctonotus.
The nomenclature of tlie first genus is confusing. Verany described it
as Janus in 1844, and this name is used by l>ergh, Trinchese, and
Vayssiere on the ground that it has priority over Antiojw, the name
used by Alder and Hancock in 1855. But the objection to the name Janus
(as pointed out by Alder and Hancock in the text fur plate 43) is that
it has been in use for a genus of Hymenoptera since 1835. But
Mr. Hoyle states (Journnl of Concholoji/, 1902, p. 214) that Antiopa is
in its turn invalid for a similar reason, namely, that it was used for a
genus of Diptera as early as 1800. He proposes to call the animal
Antiopella^ and it would seem that this name must stand, unless some
one proves that it also is preoccupied.

Antiopella has perfoliate rhinophores with a crest between them, and
jaws with denticulate edges. Only one species is properly authenticated,
A. cristata, which is recorded from the Mediterranean and Britisii
waters. Janus sanguineus, Angas, is somewhat doubtful. The plate
suggests that it may be an unusually red variety of Madrella ferru(jino.<n ,
which has also the habit mentioned by Angas of discharging a yellow
secretion which colours the water round it.

The genus Janolus was created by Bergh for a specimen obtained by
the Challenger, and differing from Antiopella in having a very broad
margin to the foot and remarkably large undenticulate jaws. Bergh has
since shown that Alder and Hancock's Antiopa hyalina belongs to this
group. A third species, Janolus coeruleopictus, Eliot, is recorded from
California; and a fourth, somewhat doubtful, species is described ])elow.

The genus Proctonotus was created by Alder and Hancock for two
specimens found near Dublin, and is also recorded from AVest Ireland
and Arran. The rhinophores are not perfoliate (though they bear
wrinkles and tubercles), and there is no crest between them. The
radula is broad and the jaws are not denticulate.

ANTIOPELLA CRISTATA (DKLLE CIIIAJE).

Four living specimens at Plymouth, April, 1905, the largest 30 mm.
long and 8 l)road. Alder and Hancock's figure of this species is not very
good, and that of Trinchese {yEolididoi del Porto di Genova, pi. 44) is in

374 NOTES ON SOMK lUMTlsH NUIITHII ANGUS.

some respects superior. The general colour is transparent white with
a faint yellowish tinn;e. The rhinophores and the crest between them
are very large and distinctly yellowish. On the back and sides of the
body and on the tips of the cerata are very vivid metallic spots which
appear blue in some lights and pink in others. There is a streak of the
same colour on the tail. The hepatic system is of a deep, rich brown,
and its ramifications can be seen clearly through the transparent skin.

Tlie cerata are very deciduous, and in these specimens many, or even
the majority, are quite small and tubercular. These are evidently new
growths replacing lost appendages.

JANOLUS HYALINUR (A. Aj H.).

(Alder and Hancock, Monog. Brit. Niulih., Fain. 3, pi. 44. Bergh, Mai.
Untersurh. in Sempcr's Reisen, vi. 1, }). 8.)

Two preserved specimens from Plymouth, one 8 mm. long, the other
only 4"3 mm. They agree as to external characters with Alder and
Hancock's description. The colour is yellowish, with traces of lighter
and darker mottlings. The cerata are crowded and irregularly set.
There are generally four to five in a transverse row. The innermost are
the largest and about 5 mm. high ; they decrease in size outwards, and
the outermost are mere tubercles. They bear knobs, as described by
Alder and Hancock. The anterior margin of the foot is somewhat un-
dulated, with a l)end inwards in the middle. It is not grooved in the
ordinary way, but the sides of the head are developed into lappets which
extend downwards towards the sides of the foot and form a ridge
parallel to them. There is a small fold round the head bearing two
distinct tentacles. The rhinophores bear irregular perfoliations which
do not go all round the club. The interrhinophorial crest is elongate.

The jaws are large and smooth, with no denticles. The radula consists
of fifteen rows varying from 11.1.11 to 13.1.13. The teeth are hamate
and increase in size from the rhachis outwards, the last but one being
the largest, and the outermost of all smaller (Fig. 23.). They bear
three to five (rarely seven) long ridge-like denticles, which are not
very small, but ditlicult to see on account of the extreme transparency
of the teeth. These denticles seem to have escaped the notice of both
Alder and Hancock (Tongues of the Eolididce) and Bergh, who describe
the teeth as smooth. The denticulation is probably varial)le.

Alder and Hancock's figures of this species {Monograph, pi. 44, figs.
8 to 12) are not good, ])ut much better unpublished drawings l)y
Hancock are preserved in the Newcastle Museum.

JANOLUS FLAGELLATUS, sp. 7iov.
One specimen from Plymoutii labelled "Aviio2y( hi/alina nr. Eddi/stonc

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIIJIJANCIIS. 375

25. vi. 97." As preserved, it is of a uniform dull- white colour, slightly
transparent on the back, but elsewhere opaque. The length is 15'5 mm.;
the breadth 8; the height to the top of the pericardium 7"5, but the
end of the body has burst open, and the hennaphrodite gland is pro-
truding. The foot is broad (as much as 9o mm. in one place), with
ample and undulated mantle margins. * It is notched in front, and con-
nected with the head by two very distinct intermediate fleshy plates.
Above them are two small but distinct tentacles, forming the extremi-
ties of a narrow oral veil. The rhinophores are straight, cylindrical,
moderately stout, and bear irregular but distinctly vertical perfoliations,
which often join one another or end abruptly before they reach the
summit. Between them is a very distinct crest, consisting of about ten
transverse perfoliations, which are themselves crinkled and again
perfoliate.

The only cerata preserved are minute, not more than 1 mm. high,
more numerous on the right than on the left, and set in one to two rows.
There are also several small cerata in front of the rhinophores. There
is no trace of larger cerata, but they have probably been lost and
replaced by young ones in the first stages of growth. The anus is
niedio-dorsal, set very far back, and cup-like. There appear to be a few
tubercles on the broad tail.

The genital orifices are about 5 mm. from the head and surrounded
by strong folds. The verge is exserted and extremely long. It consists
of a straight cylindrical column, not tapering, 4 mm. long, and bearing
at the end a Hagelliform appendage 5 mm. long, so that the whole organ
measures 9 mm.

The digestive organs are much compressed by the greatly developed
reproductive glands and are not very well preserved, but appear to
agree with Alder and Hancock's account of Antiopa cristata. The
oesophagus is short and opens into a large laminated stomach, from
which the intestine runs backwards and which receives the two
principal hepatic trunks. Owing to the cerata being minute and rudi-
mentary the course of the hepatic diverticula in them cannot be traced ;
but beneath the dorsal skin, and especially at the sides, there is a thick
network of tubes out of which the hepatic trunks seem to arise.

The central nervous system is like that described by Dergh for
Janolus australis, and the eyes have long connectives.

The buccal mass is large (5 mm. x 4 mm.) and yellowish white.
The jaws bright, deep orange, very thick and strong, as in Janolua
hyallnus. The radula consists of fifteen rows, with a maximum formula
of 20.1.20. The lateral teeth (Fig. 24. b.) are yellow, hamate, low, with
a large, broad ])ase. The median teeth (Fig. 24. a.) are snudl, with a low
inconspicuous ii(jul<. No denticulations could be seen.

376 NOTKS ON SOME BniTIRII NT'DTRRANCIIS.

The herina))hro(lite gland is very large, and fills the whole posterior
part of tlie body with lunaerous packets of yellowish-white follicles.
The anterior genital mass is enormous (10 mm. x 7 mm.) for the size of
the animal, and lioth the miicons and aUmmen glands are greatly
swollen. The si»erniatotheca is elliptical. The verge is as described
above; the canal follows the whole length of the flagellum to the
very end.

It would seem that tlie Hagelliform character of the verge distinguishes
this species from J. hualinus. No such formation is indicated in Bergh's
description of J. hyalinus, nor have I found it myself in that aninial.
Also there seem to be some differences in the radula ; and though the
shape of the cerata is unfortunately unknown, the general appearance
and dead-white colouring do not resemble J, hyalinus. But the species
is open to doubt unless conlirmed by other specimens.

ALDERIA, ALLMAN.

Three species of this genus have been descril)ed.

1. A. tiiudesta (Loven).

2. A. comosa, A. Da Costa. Naples {Ann. del Museo Zoologico, Napoli,

anno iv. 1864, p. 32, and pi. ii. 3).

3. A. harvardiensis (Agassiz). East coast of North America (see

Gould, Invertebrata of Massachusetts, 1870, pp. 254-5, pi. xvi.
226-8).

Alder and Hancock published some account of the anatomy of
A. modesta in their monograph, but only the external features of the
other two species are known, A. comosa is green, with numerous long
cerata, and the anal papilla lies behind the pericardium. It must be
regarded as very doubtful if A. harvardiensis is really distinct from
A. modesta, whicli differs in being darker, in having fewer and smaller
cerata, and, if Gould's figure may be trusted, in the more angular shape
of the head. lUit the description and the figure do not quite agree as
to the disposition of the cerata, and the colour of A. modesta is very
variable.

Alderia seems allied to Zimapontia, from which it differs chiefly in
having cerata and a much greater ramification of the hepatic system.
The lateral expansions of the foot n^uiind one of the wings of Elysia.

ALDElilA MODEiSTA, LOVEN.
(Aloku and Hancock, Monog., Genus 17, Fam. 3, pi. 41.)

I am indebted to Mr. W. I. Beaumont for several specimens of this
interesting form, labelled " Ardfry, County Galway, May 1904." In
some unpublisiied MSB. of Albany Hancock preserved in the Hancock

NOTES ON SO^fE BKITISII NUDIBRANCIIS. 377

Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne I have found the following notes on the
living animal : —

"The foot exhibited beautiful dendritic markings.* The glands in
the papillte are considerably branched. The animal yields a quantity
of mucus, has a strong sugar smell, and is sluggish in its motions. The
papilla; are remarkable for their rhythmical pulsations. They dilate and
contract simultaneously between thirty and sixty times a minute. The
contraction is very forcible, the posterior surface of the papill* being
most contracted. This pulsation has all the appearance of being con-
nected with the circulation. The papilke are much depressed when in
a state of contraction."

The colour of the preserved specimens varies from white to yellow,
with darker mottlings on the back and upper side of the cerata. The
variations in shade are considerable. Sometimes the ground colour is
yellowish and the mottlings light, leaving a general impression of
yellowish brown. Sometimes the mottlings are thick and dark and the
ground colour opaque white. The upper surface then appears to be
purplish black, with a few white markings.

The animals are stoutly built, the largest specimens measuring
5'5 mm. by about 3'5. In front the dorsal surface is bare, the cerata
being set only at the sides, but behind they close over the body. The
foot is white, broader than the body, with an expanded margin, but
rather straight in front. No anterior groove is visible.

At the sides there is a groove between the body and this margin, so
that the body, though narrower than the foot, partly overhangs it. On
this lateral projection of the body are set the cerata in three not
very regular longitudinal rows. As a rule only two rows are fully
developed, and the third, which consists of smaller cerata, has the
appearance of being crowded in. The total number of cerata on either
side does not appear to exceed fifteen, which is less than the number
shown in Alder and Hancock's plates. The cerata are somewhat ovate
in shape. Those behind are larger and more inflated than those in
front. They contain ramified hepatic diverticula which bear primary
and sometimes short secondary branches.

The head bears on each side a rounded prominence, but there are
neither rhinophores nor tentacles in the ordinary sense. The anus is
on a prominent papilla in the medio-dorsal line and nearly terminal.

There is no trace of jaws. The radula is ascoglossan and short,
containing five or six teeth in the ascending, and about as many in the
descending portion. In an irregular heap lie about seven teeth of
varying size, and with them a mass of minute spines, apjiarently repre-

* Due ajipareiitly lu tlic ramilied diverticula of tlie alinientiiry canal being seen through
the semi-transparent sole.

378 NOTES ON .SOMK IIRITISII NUDIBRANCIIS.

seating the first teeth. The iiuiture teeth (PI. xi., Fig. 25.) are hirge
and spoon-shaped. The outline is rather irregular, and there are
generally two more or less distinct projections on the back.

There is no crop attached to the buccal mass, but from it issues a thin
tube (Fig. 26. a.) which must apparently l)e regarded as equivalent to a
stomach as well as to an oesopliagus, at least in its posterior part, for
from it arises the intestine (PI. xii., Fig. 26. b.). This is a larger tube
which bends slightly to tlie right and then runs directly backwards at Hrst
on the right under the side of the pericardium and finally above the renal
organ to the anal papilla (Fig. 26. c). The thin tube issuing from the
buccal mass bears two folds inside. At its posterior extremity these
folds become more numerous, and the tube bends downwards and dilates
into a large stomach-like pouch (Fig. 26. e.). It is clear, however, that
the intestine does not issue from this pouch, but from the narrower
tube. It is probable that the animal lives on vegetable juices, and that
the two folds in the tube act as strainers and valves, establishing com-
munication alternately between the mouth and the pouch and between
the pouch and the intestine, only one line of communication being open
at a time. The pouch is prolonged anteriorly under the oesophagus and
divides into two diverticula (Fig. 26. d.) which enter the anterior lobes
of the foot. Posteriorly it extends almost to the end of the body and
gives off two sets of ramifying diverticula (Fig. 26. f.). The upper
diverticula (about four in numl>er) enter the cerata and are also ramified
in the body. The lower diverticula (also about four) extend downwards
through the hermaphrodite gland and do not enter the cerata, but their
ramifications witliin the body create the peculiar dendritic maikings
(Fig. 28. i.) visible througli tiie sole of the foot.

The central nervous system (PI. xi., Fig. 30.) forms a collar round the
oesophagus consisting of seven principal ganglia close to one another
and connected by very short commissures, the longest being that con-
necting the cerebral ganglia. They should probably be regarded as two
cerebral, two pedal, and three visceral ganglia. Connected with the
cerebral ganglia are two smaller ganglia, probably rhinophorial in
function and innervating the most sensitive part of the head, altliough
no external rhinophores are developed.

The hermaphrodite gland is large and ramified throughout the whole
lower part of the body, filling up the interstices between the other
organs. The ampulla and duct of the gland are short. After the bifur-
cation of the male and female branches (PI. xii., Fig. 27. b.) the former
runs to an orifice at the right anterior corner of the iiead. The vas
deferens (Fig. 27. d.) is not very long or much convoluted. A rather large
prostate (Fig. 27. c.) opens into it by several ducts. The penis is armed
with a rather long curved siiine which in some specimens at any rate

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCIIS. 379

points inwards when the organ is retracted. Shortly after the bifurca-
tion the female branch receives a long duct (Fig. 27, g.) into which open
the follicles of the albumen gland (Fig. 27. h.). This gland, like the
hermaphrodite gland, is extensively ramified, especially in the last fourth
of the body. Close to the entry of this duct and lying anteriorly is a pouch-
like diverticulum (Fig. 27. f.) which is probably a spermatotheca. No
second spermatotheca was found. The female branch here makes a sharp
turn and runs backwards nearly to the end of the body; it then doubles
on itself and runs forwards, opening anteriorly close to the male orifice.
All this section (Fig. 27. i.) of the female branch after the spermatotheca is
very much larger than the other parts and provided with remarkably
thick glandular walls. Tt should probably be regarded as the uterus
passing through the mucus gland. It is one of the largest and
most conspicuous organs in the animal, and when sections are cut it
generally expands and overlaps the heart and kidney.* This, however,
appears to be the result of the disturbance caused by the cut, and not
a natural arrangement. It is noticable that near the bifurcation of the
male and female branches there arises a coocum which extends anteriorly
and reaches the integument, but without forming any orifice. Pelseneer
states (Eecherches sur divers Opisthohranches, p. 62) that in Elysia the
second female orifice is developed later than the others and is not found
in young individuals. It is conceivable that this coecum in Alderia may
ultimately open externally.

The pericardium appears to be as usual and is medio-dorsal. The
renal organ (Fig. 28. k.) lies below it and is entire in the front, but the
posterior portion gives off ramifying tubes, some of which extend into
the cerata.

Blood lacunae are distributed throughout the body, including the foot.
The largest lie one on either side of the renal organ below the cerata,
into which they send up long diverticula; the main portion of these
diverticula lies on the posterior side of the cerata, which no doubt
accounts for the peculiar pulsation and contraction noticed by Alder
and Hancock in this part.

STILIGER BELLULUS (D'ORBIGNY).

) = CdlUojxaa hellula, n'OiiniONy. Mag. de Zool., 1837, pp. 12 to 14.

Stiliijer marim, Bergh. Mai. Unt. in Semper's Iteisen, Ileft iii, 1872, pp. 137,

144 ;/(^. Beit, zur Kennt. der ^olid., v. pp. 12 to 17.)

Bergh has published two detailed description of this species, which I
notice here merely to mention that it apparently ought to be called
St. hellulus and not St, marice.

* Tliis dislocation slltiis <lue to the elasticity and expansive power of the tissues which
form the walls of the uterus.

.NEW SEUIES. — Vl»L, VII. NO. 2 2B

380 NOTES ox SOME BRITISH XUDTHRANCHS.

The genus was created by Elirenberg (1831) for an animal found in
the Red Sea and having the same external characters as tliis species,
though the radula is unknown. Until the original Stiliger ornatus (not
modestns, as it is sometimes quoted) is re-examined, some doubt must
exist as to the identity of Calliopcea and Stilujer, though that identity is
highly probal)le.

in 1837 d'Orbigny gave the name of Calliojjcva bellula to a mollusc
whose external characters are quite recognizable from liis description, lu
1865 Meyer and Mobius {Fauna der Kieler Bucld) described an appar-
ently identical animal as EmUetonia maria', wrongly regarding it as an
-i^olid. Bergh refers both forms to Stiliger and brackets them together,
but gives the preference to Meyer and Mobius's name, although
d'Orbigny's name has undoubted priority if his species is admitted to be
a Stiliger.

Througli the kindness of Mr. Farran I have received three specimens
from liallynakil, Co. Galway. They are indifferently preserved, and
have lost some or all of the cerata. The best specimen is 7 mm. long
and has thirteen cerata remaining. They were apparently set in two
rows, and are of an ovoid shape. The posterior cerata of the inner row
are relatively very large (2 mm. high). The rhinophores are distinct
and white.

The ground colour is greyish white, with brownish or olive markings
on the cerata and body. The foot is greyish white without markings.
The opaque white internal organs, especially the hermaphrodite gland,
can be seen through the integuments.

The radula contains five teeth in the ascending and twelve in the
descending slightly spiral portion. They are as represented by Bergh,
but 80 transparent that they are seen only with difficulty.

The species is recorded from Kiel, West Ireland, the Atlantic coast
of France, and Trieste,

LIST OF FIGURES.
(Plates XL and XII.)

L Tiitonia alba. a. rliacliidiaii tootli ; b. first lateral ; c. second lateral ; d. e. f.
laterals from middle of lialf-row ; </. outermost tootli.

2. Archiihms test udi}uir{a. a. b. c. teeth from tlie inner j)art of the half-row ;

d. tootli with an abnormal projection ; e. f. teeth from the outer part of
the row.

3. Lamellidoris oblomja. a. inner tooth ; b. outei' ditto.

4. Lamellidoris dep-essa. a. inner tooth ; b. outer ditto.

NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCHS. 381

5. Lamellidoris pusilla. Inner tooth.

6. Lomanotus genei. A marginal jjapilla.

7. Lomanotus genei. Teeth, a. a. a. from the middle of the radula ; b. b. further

from the middle ; c. still further from the middle.

8. Lomanotus genei. Edge of jaw with denticulate scales.

9. Lomanotus marmoratus. a. b. teeth ; c. a large papilla.

10. Hancockia dactylota. A row from the radula. a. median tooth ; b. b. laterals.

11. (Plate XII.) Hancockia dactylota. Diagram of the digestive system. The

intestine and upper part of the stomach are drawn in yellow, the rest of
the digestive system in black. a. oesophagus ; b. b. diverticulum on
a'sophagus ; c. stomach; d. intestine; e. anus; /. /. anterior diverticula;
g.^-g.* branches supplying the cerata ; /*. secondary ramifications in the
cerata existing on all the main branches, but only draw n here ; i. pos-
terior prolongation of the stomach.

12. (Plate XII.) Hancockia dactylota. Transverse section through the anal papilla

and renal opening, a. intestine ; 6. stomach ; c. d. anterior diverticula ;
e. anal papilla ; /. kidney ; g. renal orifice ; h. heart ; i. blood lacunse ;
k. pericardium ; I. hermaphrodite gland ; m. duct of albumen gland ;
n. two lobes of hermaijhrodite gland.

13. (Plate XII.) Hancockia dactylota. A longitudinal section through one of the

cerata. a. the intestine running forward ; 6. (jcsophagus ; c. anterior liepatic
diverticulum ; d. d. branches of ditto within the cerata ; e. external orifice
of one of these branches and cnidopore (?) ; /. blood lacuna; ; g. kidney.

14. Doto yinnatifida, var. iiapillifira. A rhinophore sheath with papillae.

15. Coryphella beaumonti. a. central tooth ; b. lateral tooth.

16. Coryphella beaumonti. Cones from the penis.

17. Amphoriiia aurantiaca. Teeth.

18. Amphorina olivacea. a. a tooth.

19. Amphorina olivacea. End of penis with stylet.

20. Calma glaucoides. Radula. From a microphotograph.

21. Calma glaucoides. Diagram of digestive system, a. a. a. the gut and its

prolongations into the cerata ; b. integuments of body and cerata ; c. buccal
mass, § hermaphrodite gland ; d. stomachic dilatation.
22 Calma glaucoides Renal organ (shown in black) with the heart and pericar-
dium (shown in red), r. o. renal orifice ; vent, ventricle ; aur. auricle ;
pc. pericardium ; r. p. o. reno-pericardial orifice.

23. Janolus hyalinus. A tooth.

24. Janolus flagellatus. a. median tooth seen from side ; h. a lateral tooth.

25. Alderia modesta. A tooth.

26. Alderia modesta. Diagram of digestive system, a. oesophagus ; b. intestine ;

c. anal papilla ; d. d. anterior diverticula ; e. stomachic pouch ;/./. posterior
diverticula.

27. Alderia modesta. Diagram of reproductive system, a. ducts of hermaphro-

dite gland ; 6. bifurcation of the male and female branches ; c. prostate ;

d. vas deferens ; e. penis ; /. a pouch wliich is probably the spcrmatotheca ;
g. the duct of tlie albumen gland ; h. the albumen gland ; i. main channel
of the female organs, which should probably be regarded as the uterus pass-
ing through a mucus gland. The hermaphrodite portion of the organs is
coloured orange, the male portion bhick, and the female red. The arrow
indicates the \m\\l at which the section represented in Fig. 29 is cut.

f?82 NOTES ON SOME BRITISH NUDIBRANCIIS.

28. Alderia modesta. A longitudinal section cut slightly to the left of the median

line and not quite sagittal. It does not show the mouth and buccal mass
very distinctly, but gives a better view of the rest of the digestive tract
than is obtained by a median section, a. left side of mouth ; b. left side
of buccal mass ; c. left side of central nervous sy.stem ; d. cesophagus ;
e. tube with laminated walls running into the stomachic pouch ; /. point
where the intestine commences, the intestine runs somewhat to the right
but reappears for a moment at/^ ; y. stomachic pouch ; h. anterior diverticu-
lum of the pouch ; i. i. i- lateral diverticula in the foot and cerata ; j.
albumen gland ; k. renal organ ; I. uterus (the organ marked i. in Fig. 27),
which on being cut has expanded and spread dorsally at the expense of
the renal organ and pericardium ; m. portions of the hermaphrodite duct
containing masses of spermatozoa ; n. prostate. The remaining parts of
the drawing are mo-stly lobes of the hermaphrodite gland.

29. Alderia modesta. Transverse section cut at tliu jioint marked by an arrow in

Fig. 27. e. h. I. n. as in the longitudinal section (Fig. 28) ; /. the intestine
passing over to the right side ; i. i. latero-dorsal diverticula of h. ; m. a
prolongation of the hermaphrodite duct ; o. the female branch running for-
ward into a pouch (? spermatotheca) ; j^. ditto running backwards from the
pouch ; V. vas deferens ; s. one of the prostatic tubules entering into the
vas deferens.

30. Alderia modesta. Central nervous system, a. right cerebro-pleural ganglion ;

b. right pedal ganglion ; c. right visceral ganglion ; d. median visceral
ganglion ; e. left pedal ganglion ; /. left visceral ganglion ; y. left cerebro-
pleural ganglion.

[ 383 ]

First Report of the Council of the Marine Biological
Association of the United Kingdom on work
carried out in connection with the International
Fishery Investigations.*

To Sir Edward W. Hamilton, K.C.B., K.C.V.O.

Chair iiian of the North Sea Fisheries Investigation Committee.

Sir,

I am instructed by the Council of the Marine Biological
Association to submit for the information of the North Sea Fisheries
Investigation Committee the first lieport on work done in connection
with the International Investigation of North Sea Fisheries, dealing
chiefly with researches carried out during the years 1902 and 1903,
together with the detailed reports upon that work which have been
drawn up under the Council's direction by those members of the
scientific staff to whom the different sections of the investigations have
been entrusted.

The Council desire to report as follows : —

I.— General.

At the request of His Majesty's Government, the Council of the
Marine Biological Association undertook to conduct the scientific part
of the scheme of fishery investigation adopted by the International
Conference held at Christiauia in 1901 in the southern portion of the
area assigned to Great Britain, subject to such modifications as might
be introduced by the International Council subsequently established,
and in accordance with the general regulations of that Council.

The following is a list of members who have served on the Council
since the commencement of the investigations in 1902: —

President — Professor E. Kay Lankester, LL.D., F.R.S.

* Reiiiiiited from Internntio7ial Fishery Invcsliijations. First lirport on Fishery atid
Hydrographiad Investigations in the Xorth Sea and Adjacent Waters (Southern Area).
Conducted for His Majesty's Government by the Marine Biological Association of the United
Kingdom, 1902-1903. Presented to both Houses of Parliament by Command of His
Majesty. London : Printed for His Majesty's Stationery Oflice, 1905. Blue Book Cd. 2670.
Price 8s. 9rf.

384 INTERNATIONAI, FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

Members of Gomicil — Messrs. G. L. Alward, G. P. Bidder, G. C. Bourne,
Prof. T. W. Bridge, F.E.S. (joined 1904), Francis Darwin, F.R.S.,
Prof. J. B. Farmer, F.ll.S. (retired 1903), G. Herbert Fowler, S. F.
Hurnier, F.R.S., Prof. W. A. Herdnian, F.E.S., E. W. L. Holt (joined
1905), the late Prof. G. B. Howes, F.K.S., J. J. Lister, F.K.S., Huyh
Robert Mill, Prof. E. A. Mincbin, Prof, diaries Stewart, F.R.S. (retired
1904), Prof. D'Arcy W. Tbompson, C.B., R. N. Wolfenden, M.D.

Governors — Messrs. the late J. P. Thomasson, The Prime Warden of
the Worshipful Company of Fishmongers and E. L. Beckwith (represent-
ing the Fishmongers' Company), Prof. Sir J. Burdon Sanderson, Bart.,
F.R.S. (representing the University of Oxford), A. E. Shipley, F.R.S.
(representing the University of Cambridge), Professor W. F. R. Weldon,
F.R.S. (representing the British Association for the Advancement of
Science).

ffon. Treasurer — Mr. J. A. Travers (late Prime Warden of the
Worshipful Company of Fishmongers).

Secretary — Mr, E. J. Allen.

The section of t!ie international work which was undertaken by the
Marine Biological Association fell into two main divisions, (1) a survey
of the tishing grounds in the southern part of the North Sea, together
with an investigation of the life-histories of the principal food fishes
found upon them, and (2) an investigation of the physical conditions
and of the plankton or minute Hoating organisms of the waters of the
English Channel.

The following is a list of the scientific staff employeil by the Council
to carry out these investigations : —

Director and Secretary to the Council. — E. J. Allen, D.Sc.

Naturalist in cliarge of Fishery Investigations (who is also in charge
of North Sea Survey) — W. Garstang, M.A.

Assistant Naturalists for Fishes — H. M. Kyle, M.A., D.Sc. (until
April, 1903), F. Balfour Browne, B.A. (until January, 1903), W.
Wallace, D.Sc.

Assistant Naturalists for Invertebrates — C. Forster-Cooper, B.A. (until
August, 1903), R. A. Todd, B.Sc, J. 0. Borley, MA.

Assistant Natiuralist for Plankton — L. H. Gough, Ph.D.

Hydroyrapher — D. J. Matthews

Assistants — J. Potter, A T.. Ansell, G. T. Atkinson.

The Council desire to report that in their opinion the naturalists
entrusted with the different branches of the investigations have carried
out their duties witii eflficiency and success.

In order to undertake the necessary experimental work at sea, the
Council hired the steam trawler " Huxley," a vessel 115 feet long and of

INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 385

191 tons gross, for a period of three years from August 21 si, 1 002. Some
difificnUy was experienced in obtaining a vessel suitable for the work with
the funds available, l)ut the Council had the good fortune to be assisted
in the matter by one of its members, ]\Ir. G. P. Bidder, who purchased the
" Huxley " from her former owners and let her to the Association upon
very favourable terms. The alterations required to fit her for the work
of scientific exploration were made to the vessel, suitable cabins for the
use of the naturalists were built in the fish hold, and a small laboratory
was provided on deck. The " Huxley " made her first voyage to the
fishing grounds on November 1st, 1902. Since that time she has been
constantly employed in the North Sea and English Channel, and has
proved suitable and efficient for the work required of her.

To carry out the North Sea work adequately, the Council found it
necessary to establish a laboratory on the east coast of England. After
careful consideration, and in view of the area in which the investigations
were for the most part to be conducted, the port of Lowestoft was
selected as the one ottering the best facilities. Prenn'ses were hired near
the trawl-market and fitted out temporarily to suit the requirements of
the work. The laboratory work connected with the investigations in the
English Channel has been done in the Association's laboratory at
Plymouth, their steamer "Oithona" being used to make the observations
at sea during the summer months, whilst for the winter observations
the " Huxley " has come round from the North Sea.

The detailed memoirs prepared by the naturalists to whom the
carrying out of the ditterent portions of the investigations has been
assigned are printed in the present volume. These memoirs deal chieHy
with the work done during the first year of the commission of the
Association (1Q03), though certain special experiments carried out in
the second year (1904) also receive attention.

In considering the record of results contained in these memoirs, it is
first of all essential to remember that they deal witli operations under-
taken in connection with one portion only of an extensive scheme
of co-operative work. They must therefore be looked upon primarily
as a statement of observed facts, contributed to the common stock of
information which is being gradually brought together. For this reason
it has bet;n necessary to print the records of observations in considerable
detail and in a form which shall be as convenient as possible for the
use of (itlier workers, but until the work dont; in other countries
has been published in a similar way and the whole of the observations
have been duly co-ordinated and considered, it will not be [)ossible to
estimate the results derived from the international undertaking.

At the same time, considering the English work alone, as it is set
forth in the .series of special reports by the naturalists, the Council of

386 INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

the Association feel coutident that our knowledge of a number of the
most essential matters, upon a proper understanding of which any
attempts to improve the yield of the deep sea fisheries must in future
be based, has already been considerably extended, and they are not
without hope that at no distant date practical measures founded on
a rational appreciation of the problems involved may be undertaken
with certain profit to the fishing industry. Meanwhile the Council
draw attention to the following pohits raised in the special memoirs,
which in their opinion seem worthy of particular consideration.

II.— Fishery Investigations in the North Sea.

Experiments made by marking fishes, more especially Plaice, with
numbered labels and returning them to the sea, where they have
subsequently l)een recaptured by fishermen, have furnished much
information on three important subjects — the migrations of the fishes,
the growth of the fishes, and the intensity of the commercial fishing in
the North Sea. The experiments have shown that the larger Plaice are
capable of very extensive migrations in a comparatively short time.
The extent and variety of the possible journeys may be illustrated by
two instances. A I'laice, 33 centimetres (13 inches) long, liberated on
December 12th, 1903, on the Leman Ground, in the latitude of Lincoln-
shire, was recovered by a Hastings trawler off Winchilsea, in the
English Channel, on March 23rd, 1904, having travelled a minimum
distance of 175 miles in a little over three months, whilst another fish,
marked and liberated on August 12th, 1903, off the Lincolnshire coast,
near Mablethorpe, was recaptured in April, 1904, eight months after-
wards, in St. Andrew's Bay, having travelled 210 sea miles from the
point of liberation. Such extensive migrations, however, appear to be
confined chiefly to Plaice of larger size, the smaller fishes (below 8
inches) being seldom found to travel long distances at a rapid rate.
During the summer months there seemed to be a general tendency for
the Plaice on the shallow-water " nurseries " off the coast of Holland to
move into deeper waters towards the north and west, whilst the fish
marked in the southern bight of the North Sea showed a disposition to
move in a northerly direction. In the winter (1902-3 and 1903-4),
on the other hand, many of the larger fish (above 9 inches) moved
southwards from the Leman Ground and the nortli-west coast of
Holland towards the southern bight of the North Sea.

The intensity of commercial trawling in the North Sea is indicated
by the fact that out of 855 marked Plaice above 20 centimetres
(8 inches) in length liberated outside territorial limits the number
recaptured within twelve months yields a total of 21 per cent, whilst

INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 387

experiments on the Dogger Bank in the spring of 1904 resulted in the
recapture of more than 40 per cent of the Plaice exceeding 25 centi-
metres (10 inches) in less than twelve mouths. From this result it
seems clear that the total annual catch of the fishermen no longer forms
an insignificant proportion of the total stock of Plaice.

Trawling experiments in the area under investigation with an otter-
aud a beam-trawl of the ordinary commercial patterns have given
extensive information as to the distribution of fishes of different sizes,
and the results obtained, when combined with those of the marking
experiments, have done much towards furnishing a preliminary view of
the natural history of the fishes in the southern half of the North Sea,
and of the Plaice in particular, its distribution at different sizes, and
the seasonal movements which it undertakes.

A Series of experiments on the transplantation of small Plaice from
the inshore nurseries to the open waters of the Dogger Bank in the
middle of the North Sea, carried out in 1904, has thrown much new
light upon the condition of the fishing grounds. The increase of weight
of small plaice marked and transplanted in early spring from the
crowded inshore grounds to the Dogger Bank was found in the following
winter to be six times the normal increase of marked fishes of the same
size left on the inshore grounds. Such a result suggests that the central
grounds of the North Sea possess a larger food supply suitable for the
nourishment of the Plaice than is at present made use of, and that they
may therefore be capable of maintaining a much larger population
of Plaice than now exists upon them, whilst on the nursery grounds
owing to undue competition for the food available the Plaice are unable
to attain their maximum rate of growth. Whether transplantation on
a commercial scale from the small-fish grounds to the Dogger Bank or
other suitable localities would be a practical method of increasing the
total weight of Plaice available for capture in the North Sea is a
problem concerning wliicii further information and experiment will
be required. Quite apart from this question, such a result as that
already indicated is of the greatest significance for the proper under-
standing of the condition of the Plaice fishery and of the methods
proposed for improving it by the prevention of the capture of immature
fish.

Particular attention has been paid to the study of the age of fishes
of particular sizes and to their rate of growth. It has now been shown
that by an examination of the otoliths or car-stones a precise estimate
of the age of individual fishes can be arrived at, the ott)liths showing
alternate white and dark rings, the white rings formed in spring and
early summer, the dark in late summer and autumn. This method has
been applied in detail to a considerable number of Plaice from fishing

388 INTERNATIONAL FISIIEKY INVESTIGATIONS.

grounds in the North Sea and English Channel, and by its means it has
been possible to form an estimate C)f the aver.age rate of growth in
different localities, a rusult which has direct bearings on many practical
problems.

A large quantity of information has also been collected as to tlie food
of fishes of different species and at difl'erent stages of their growth npon
the various fishing grounds of the North Sea, the information being
derived in part from the examination of the food-contents of many of
the fishes captured in the trawl, and in part by an investigation of the
fishing grounds with special apparatus.

III.— Hydrographical and Plankton Investigations in the
English Channel.

Before the commencement of the International Investigations it had
been shown that the character of the water filling the North Sea varied
greatly from season to season and from place to place. A knowledge of
such changes was obviously of the first importance in seeking to under-
stand the migrations of the fishes and the fiuctuations of the fisheries.
The international programme therefore provided for a co-operative
study of these phenomena over the whole area under investigation. To
tiie English investigators was assigned the study of the waters of the
English Channel, which were important not only in connection with the
fisheries in the Channel itself, but also as constituting one of the sources
of origin of the waters of the North Sea.

It was arranged that simultaneous periodic cruises should be under-
taken by tlie difTereut co-operating countries, during which observations
should be maile at fixed stations scattered over the whole area, and
that these oljservations should be as far as possible supplemented by
others taken between the stations and in the intervals between the
cruises. There are three chief kinds of evidence which, when known
over an extended area, are capable of giving an indication of the course
of the prevailing currents, and the probable origin of the water at any
particular place. These are (1) the salinity of the water, (2) its tempera-
ture, and (o) the character of the plankton or minute fiouting organisms
which it contains. At each of the stations visited on the periodic
cruises, therefore, samples of the sea- water were collected at difl'erent
depths and brought to the laboratory, where their salinity was deter-
mined ; the temperature of the water at different depths was observed,
and samples of the plankton were collected for subsequent examination.
Intermediate samples were taken between the fixed stations, and frequent
meteorological observations were also made.

Four quarterly cruises, as arranged in the international programme,
were carried out in the English Channel in February, May, August, and

INTE'^NATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 389

November, 1903, siiniiltaneously willi similar cruises undertaken else-
where by other countries. Samples of the surface water wore obtained
from time to time in the periods between the quarterly cruises, chiefly
through the co-operation of officers of the mercantile marine.

Complete records of the observations made on the periodic cruises
have been sent to the Bureau of the International Council, and have
been published in the quarterly bulletins issued by that authority.*

The hydrographical observations during 1903 appear to show that the
direction of the flow of the waters of the English Channel was from west
to east, and that they were derived from a northerly current of about
35'6 per thousand salinity from the Bay of Biscay and from a southerly
current of about 35'2 per thousand salinity or less from the Irish Sea
and Bristol Channel. The meeting place of these waters may be roughly
fixed as south of the Scilly Islands in mid-channel, and it was generally
found that the salinity of the water increased as this point was passed
from west to east.

Owing to the varying salinity and teinperature of these two currents,
it has been found that at the entrance to the Channel the water is often
divided into distinct layers, whilst the changes of their relative velocity,
combined with the general drift up Channel, give rise to alternate areas
of liigb and low salinity which follow one another eastward. On the
line between the Isle of Wight and Cape BarHeur the salinity has been
low on all four cruises, a state of things due, in all probability, to the
amount of fresh water discharged from the Hampshire basin and
the Seine. The presence of denser water south of Beachy Head,
however, points to the occasional passage of a high salinity current
across this line.

It would appear that during the summer and early autumn of 1903
the Channel waters were derived largely from the Irish Sea, while
during the rest of the year the high-salinity water of the Bay of Biscay
preponderated.

The plankton observations show that a large proportion of the more
oceanic organisms found off the mouth of the Channel do not penetrate
for any considerable distance up Channel, even along a central axis, the
percentage of oceanic species having on each cruise fallen below 40 at
the stations on the line from the Isle of Wight to Cape BarHeur. When
compared with those taken by other countries in the southern part of
the North Sea, the observations indicate that conditions very similar to
those found in the southern part of the North Sea, between a line from
the Wash to Heligoland and the Straits of Dover e.xist in the eastern

* Bidlelin des Rtisultats acquifi pendant les Courses I'criocUqucs, Conseil Perv)ancnt
International pour V Exploration de la Mer. Ania-e 190"J-1903, Nos. 3 ct 4. AiiiiOe 1903-
1904, Nos 1 et 2.

390 INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

end of the English Channel (from the Isle of Wight to the Straits
of Dover).

The results both of the hydrographical and of the plankton work
suggest that during the period under investigation there was on the
whole a constant passage of water from the Channel into the southern
part of the Nortii Sea, but the rate at wbieh this passage took place
must have been very slow.

In conclusion, the Council of the Marine Bioloiiical Association
would take this opportunity of expressing their indebtedness to all who
have assisted them during the course of these investigations, to those
who have acted as their agents for the receipt of marked fish returned
by the fishermen at the different ports, and more especially to the
fishermen themselves, as well as to those olticers of the mercantile
marine who have supplied samples ol sea water and taken observations
of its temperature in different localities.

I am, Sir,

Your obedient Servant,

Marine Biological Laboratory, E. J. ALLEN,

Plymouth, Director and Secretary to the Council.

2 August, 1905.

List of Memoirs which accompany the above Report.

General Report on the Fishery Investigations. By Walter Garstang, M.A. pp. 1-12.

Rejwrt on Experirnents with Marked Fish during 1902-3. By Walter Garstang.
With 31 Detailed Tables, 2 Api)endice8, and 6 Charts, pp. 13-44.

Experiments in the Transplantation of Small Plaice to the Dogger Bank. By Walter
Gar.stanq. With 1 Chart, 2 Illustrations in Text, and 3 Detailed Tables pp.45-66.

Report on the Trawling Investigations, 1902-3, with especial reference to the distribution
of the Plaice. By Walter Garstang. With 6 Figures in the Text, 2 Appendices,
4 Detailed Tables, and 2 Charts, pp. 67-198.

Preliminary Investigations on the Age and Growth-Rate of Plaice. By William
Wallace, D.Sc. With Diagrams (Figs. 1-4) in Text, Tables A and B and I.-VII.
in Text, and Plate I. pp. 199-22G.

Rei^ort on the Food of Fishes collected during 1903. By R. A. Todd, B.Sc. pp. 227-288.

Report on the Physical Conditions in the English Channel, 1903. By Donald J.
Matthews. With 6 Plates, pp. 289-324.

Report on the Plankton, of the English Channel, 1 903. By Lewis H. Gouqh, Ph.D.
Witli 16 Charts and 7 Figures in the Text. pp. 325-377.

[ 391 ]

arine IBiological ^ssotiation of tljt %\\\M ^ingbom.

Report of the Council, 1904-5.

The Council and Officers.

Four ordinary meetings of the Council have been held during the
year, at which the average attendance has been ten. Committees of
the Council have visited the Laboratories at Plymouth and Lowestoft
and carried out a detailed examination of the work which is being done.
The thanks of the Council are again due to the Royal Society, in whose
rooms their meetings have been held.

The Council record with regret the death of the Eight Hon. the
Earl of Morley, a Vice-President of the Association, as well as that of
Professor G. B. Howes, f.r.s., a member of Council.

Professor T. W. Bridge, f.r.s., was elected a member of Council
to till a vacancy caused by the resignation of Professor Cliarles
Stewart, F.R.S.

The Laboratories.

No alterations of importance have been made to the buildings or
fittings at the Plymouth Laboratory, which continues to be maintained
in an efficient state. Particular attention has been paid to the rearing
of marine organisms under laboratory conditions, and a considerable
measure of success has been attained.

The building rented at Lowestoft is now becoming somewhat con-
gested, and if the amount of work to be done continues to grow,
additional accommodation will be necessary.

The Boats.

The Olthvnc lias this year undergone an extensive relit, a new
boiler and new decks iiaving been put in, in addition to general repairs.
She is now in first-class condition, and has been used extensively in
the English Channel and along the East Coast of England. Slie has
on two occasions made the voyage from Plymouth to Ushant and
Parson's Bank.

392 HEPOKT OF THE COUNCIL.

The collecting at Plymouth during the winter was done with
the sailing boat Anton Dohrn.

The work in the North Sea in connection with the International
Investigations has been again carried out by the Huxley.

The Staff.

Mr. S. Pace, who for the last three years has efficiently occupied the
post of Assistant Naturalist for Invertebrates at Plymouth, was
recently appointed Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory at
Millport on the Clyde, and is consequently leaving the service of the
Association. There have been no other changes in the staff.

Occupation of Tables.

The following Naturalists have occupied tables at the Laboratory
during the year : —

G. P. Bidder, m.a., C^ajubridge (Experiments fur determining bottom

currents).
E. T. Browne, m.a., London (Medusae).
A. D. Cotton, Kew (Algae).
Sir Charles Eliot, K.c.M.(i. (Nudibranchiata).
G. H. Grosvenor, m.a., Oxford (Nudibranchiata).
T. V. Hodgson, Plymouth (Pycnogonida).
J. J. Lister, f.r.s., Cambridge (Foraniinifera).
Prof, E. W. MacBride, f.r.s., Montreal (Echinoderma).
Mrs. S. Pace, Plymouth (Polyzoa).
J. Lloyd Williams, Bangor (Algae).

Six students attended a course of study in Marine Biology conducted
at the Laboratory during the Easter vacation by Mr. G. H. Grosvenor.

The Library.

The thanks of the Association are due for the followincj books and
current numljers of periodicals presented to the Library during the
past year: —

Academie Imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.
Allgemeine Fischerei-Zeitung.
American Mici'oscopical Society. Transactions.
American Museum of Natural History. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

American Philosophical Society. Proceedings.
Annaes de Sciencias Natiwaes.
Australian Museum. Records,
liorgens .Museum. Aarbog.

Hydrographical and Biological Investigations in Norwegian Fiords.

An Accouiit of the Crustacea of Norway, etc. ; by G. O. Sars.

Beruice Pauahi Bislioji Museum, Honolulu. Occasional Papers.

KKPOHT OF THE COUNCIL. 393

Board of Agriculture aud Fisheries. Annual Report of Proceedings under the

Salmon and Freshwater Fisheries Acts.

Annual Report of Proceedings under Acts relating to Sea Fisheries.

Report of Meeting of Fisheries Representatives.

Boston Society of Natural History. Proceedings.

Brighton Public Library, Museum and Art Galleries. Annual Report.

Bristol Naturalists Society. Proceedings.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report.

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. Cold Spring Harbor Monograjjlis.

Memoirs of Natural Sciences.

Science Bulletin.

Bryn Mawr College. Monographs', Reprint Series.

Bulletin Scientilique de la France et de le Belgi(|ue.

The Carnegie Institution. The Coral Siderastrea radians and its Postlarval

Development ; by J. E. Duerden.
The Waterlilies. A Monograph of the Genus Nymphaea ; l)y H. S.

Conard.
La Cellule.

College of Science, Tokyo. Journal.
Colombo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica.
Comit(5 flir Unterstiitzung der Kiisten-Bevolkerung des Russischeu Nordens.

Zoologische Studien im Barents-Meere . . . Vorliiufige Bericht.
The Commissioners of Fisheries, N. S. Wales. Report.

Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal of Conchology.
Conseil perm, internat jiour I'Exploration de la Mer. Bulletin des Resultata

acquis pendant les Courses Pt-rioditjues.

Puljlications de Circonstance.

Rapi)orts et Proces-Verbaux des Reunions.

Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru. Boletin.
Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt.

Skrifter.

Dept. of Agriculture, etc., Ireland. Reports.

Dept. of Marine and Fisheries, Canada. Annual Report.

Deutsche Zoologische Gcsellschaft. Verhandlungen.

Deutscher Fischerei Verein. Zeitschrift fiir Fischerei.

Deutscher Seefischerei Verein. Mitteilungen.

La F'euille des Jeunes Naturalistes.

Field Columbian Museum. Publications.

Imp. Fisheries Bureau, Tokyo. Journal.

Fisheries Society of Japan. Journal.

The F'isherman's Nautical Almanack ; by O. T. Olsen.

Fishery Board for Scotland. Annual Report.

The Fishing Gazette.

The Foreign Office. Report on the Fishing Trade of the Weser Seaports.

The Government Biologist, Cape of Good Hope. Marine Investigations in

South Africa.

Report.

Government Museum, Madras. Report.

International Catdogue of Scientilic Literature. Report.

R. Irish Academy. Proceedings.

Transactions.

Isle of Man Fish Hatchery. Third Annual Report.

Kommi.ssion zur \vi.s.senschaftli<;hen Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere, etc.
Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen.

394 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Koinniissionen for Hiivuiulersi/)gelser, Copenhagen. Meddelelser, .series Fiskeri,
Hydrograti, Plankton.

Skrifter.

Laboratoire Biologique de St. Petersbourg. Jiulletin.

Lanca.'sluiv Sea Fisherie.s Laboratory. Re]iort.

Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries. Superintendent's Report.

Leland Stanford Jr. University. Contributions to Biology from the Hopkins
Seaside Laboratory.

Liverpool Biological Society. Proceedings and Transactions.

Liverpool Marine Biology Committee. Annual Report.

Manchester Microscopical Society. Annual Rejiort and Transactions.

Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland. Annual Report.

Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Holl. Biological Bulletin.

Research Seminar.

Mededeelingen over Viescherij.

R. Microscopical Society. Journal.

Ministry of Marine, France. J'>ulletin de la Marine Marchande.

Le Mois Scientifique.

Musee du Congo. Annales.

Mus(ie d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Bulletin.

Mus^e Oceanographique de Monaco. Bulletin.

Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires. Anales.

Museo Nacional de Montevideo. Anales.

Museo Zoologico della R. Universita di Napoli. Annnario.

Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

Report.

The Museums Journal.

Natural History Association of Miramichi. Proceedings.

Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Basel. Verhandlungen.

Naturhistorischen Museum, Hamburg. Mitteilungen.

Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift.

New York Academy of Sciences. Annals.

New York Zoological Society. Bulletin.

Report.

New Zealand Institute. Transactions.

Norges Fiskeristyrel.se. Aarsberetning vedkommende Norges Fiskerier.

Northumberland Sea Fisheries Committee. Report on the Scientific Investi-
gations.

La Nuova Notarisia.

Oberlin College. The Wilson Bulletin.

Physiographiske Forening Christiania. Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne.

Plymouth Institution. Annual Rejtort and Transactions.

Plymouth Museum and Art Gallery. Annual Report.

Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. (Presented liy Prof. PI Ray
Lankester, F.11..S.)

Le Reveil Salicole Ostreicole et des Peches Maritimes, etc.

Rijksinstituut voor het Onderzoek der Zee. Jaarbock.

Uitkomsten van Meteorologische Waarnemingen.

Rousdon Observatory. Meteorological Observations.

Royal Society of London. Philosophical Transactions.

Proceedings.

Reports of the Evolution Committee.

Rej)orts of the Malaria Committee.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 395

Royal Society of Loudon. Report of the Sleeping Sicknes?* Coniniittee.

Report to the Government of Ceylon on the Pearl Oyster Fisheries of tlie

Gulf of Manaar.

Year-Book.

Royal Society of Victoria. Proceedings.

Scottish Microscopical Society. Proceedings.

Selskabet for de Norske Fiskeriers Fremme. Norsk Fiskeritidende.

Smithsonian Institution. Annual Report.

Special Bulletin.

Bulletin of the United States National Museum.

Proceedings of the United States Museum.

Sociedad Geografica de Lima. Boletin.
Societa di Naturalisti in Napoli. Bollettino.
Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Acta.

Meddelanden.

Societe Beige de CJcologie, etc. Bulletin.

Societe Centrale d'Aquiculture et de Peche. Bulletin.

Liste des Membres.

Society d'Oceanographie du (lolfe de Gascogne. Rapports presentes a I'Assem-

blee generale de Janvier 1904, et Compte Rendu du Punch Annuel.
Societe Imp. Russe de Pisciculture et de Peche. Messager de I'Industrie de la

Peche.

Revue Internationale de Peche et de Pisciculture

Vyestnik l{'il)opuiu'shlennostl.

Societe Zoologique de France. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

South African Museum. Annals.

Station de Pisciculture, etc., Toulouse. Bulletin.

Station de Recherches Maritimes, Ostend. Jets over Zeevaart.

Travaux de la Station de Recherches relative h la Peche Maritime k

Ostende.
Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademien.

Arkiv for Botanik.

Arkiv f(3r Zoologie.

Tokyo Imp. Museum. Proceedings of the Dept. of Natural History.

Tokyo Imp. University. Calendar.

A Treatise of Zoology ; edited by E. R. Lankester.

Tuft's College. Studies.

United States Commission of Fish. and Fisheries. Bulletin.

Report of the Commissioner.

Universidad de La Plata. Publicaciones.

University of California. Publications.

University of Iowa. Bulletin from the Laboratories of Natural History.

University of Pennsylvania. Bulletin.

Catalogue.

Provost's Report.

Contributions from the Botanical Laboratory.

Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory.

University of Toronto. Studies.

Kgl. Vetenskapri Sucieteten, Ui)sala. Nova Acta.

Zoological Society of Japan. Annotationes Zoologicre Japonensis.

Zoological Society of London. Ijist of the Fellows.

Proceedings.

Tran.sactions.

NEW SEUIES. — VOL. VII. No. 8. 2 0

396 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Zoological Society of London. Zoological Record.

Zoologische Museum, Berlin. Mitteilungen.

Zoologiske Museum, Copenhagen. The Danish Ingolf Expedition.

Dr. E. J. Allen. Beitriige zur Kenutnis der Sperniatogenese bei den

Colenteraten ; by W. M. Aders.
Mateiiaux relatifs k la faune des Polypes Hydraires des mers arctiques,

Part I. ; by A. Schydlowsky.

tjber die Theilung von Protohydra Leuckarti ; by W. M. Aders.

The Secretary, Danish Legation. Fiskeri-Beretning for Finansaaret, 1903-1904.
The Director, The Royal Gardens, Kew. American Hydroids, Part IL The

Sertularidse ; by C. C. Nutting.
Dr. S. F. Hariner and Mr. A. E, Shipley. The Cambridge Natural History,

Fishes, Ascidians, &c.
Mr. R. Q. Harrison. Catalogue of the Collection of Human Embryos in the

Anatomical Laboratory of the Johns Hopkins University. By F. P. Mall.
Honolulu Museum. Fauna Hawaiiensis.
The Secretary of State for the Colonies. Report of the Government Biologist,

Cape of Good Hope.
Owens College. The Alcyonaria of the Cape of Good Hope, Part IL ; by

S. J. Hickson.

The Alcyonaria of the Maldive.s, Part IIL ; by S. J. Hickson.

On the Bearing of Mendelian Principles of Heredity on current theories

of the Origin of Species ; by A. 1). Darbishire.
Rejjort on the Polyclad Tiirbellaria collected by Professor Herdman at

Ceylon in 1902 ; by F. F. Laidlaw.
The Stylasteriiia of the Siboga Expedition ; by S. J. Hickson and H. M.

England.
On the Supposed Antagonism of Mendelian to Biometric Theories of

Heredity ; by A. D. Darbishire.

Variations ; by S. J. Hickson.

Societe d'Oceanographie du Golfe de Gascogne. Les Cartes Litho-Biologiques

du Fond de la Mer ; by Manley-Bendall and C. Benard.

Les Courants de I'Atlantique nord et du Golfe de Gascogne ; by C. Benard.

Quehpies Essais sur les Liquides Conservateurs des Animaux et des

Organismes Marins ; by C. Benard and Manley-Bendall.

To the authors of the Memoirs mentioned below the thanks of the
Association are due for separate copies of their works presented to the
Library : —

Ashworth, J. H. and Annandale, N. Observations on some Aged Specimens
of Sagartia troglodytes, and on the Duration of Life in Coelenterates.

Baudouin, M. Le Lermcenicus Spratta', parasite de la Sardine en Vendee.

Browne, E. T. Hydromedusae [of the Maldives and Laccadives] with a Re-
vision of the Williadae and Petasidae.

Scyphomeduste [of the Maldives and Laccadives].

and Valleutin, R. On the Marine Fauna of the Isles of Scilly.

Chad wick, H. C. Report on the Crinuidea collected by Professor Herdman,
at Ceylon, in 1902.

Darbishire, A. D. On the Bearing of MendeliaJi Principles of Heredity on
current theories of the Origin of Species.

On the Supposed Antagonism of Mendelian to Biometric Theories of

Heredity.

Duncker, G. Ueber Asymmetric bei 'Gelasimus pugilator' Latr.

■ Junge Goldbutt {Pleuronedes platessa, L.) in der NeusUidter Bucht

Symmetrie und Asymmetrie bei bilateralen Thieren,

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 397

Eigeninaun, Carl H The Eyes of the Blind Vertebrates of North America. V.
Eliot, C. On the Doris planata of Alder and Hancock.

On some Nudibranchs from Ea.st Africa and Zanzibar. Parts III., IV.,

and V.
Fowler, G. H. Biscayan Plankton Collected during a Cruise of H.M.S.

" Research," 1900. Parts I., II., III.

Notes on the Anatinny of Qazelletta.

Notes on Rhabdopleura Normani, Allman.

Gardiner, J. S. Notes and Observations on the Distribution of the Larvae of

Marine Animals.
The Turl)inolid Corals of South Africa, with Notes on their Anatomy and

Variation.
Giard, A. Sur I'ethologie du Hareng des cotes du Boulonnais.

Sur une faunule caracteristique des sables a diatomees d'Ambleteuse.

Parts I., II., and III.

Rapport snr la Pr^tendue Nocivite des Huitres . . .

Sur la parthenogen^se artificielle par dessfechement physique.

Tonogamie ; la chose et le mot.

A propos des travaux de Miss Harriet Richardson sur les Bopyriens.

Gongh, L. H. Plankton, English Channel : November, 1903.

Plankton Animals and Plants.

Harrison, R. G. Neue Versuche und Beobachtungen iiber die Entwicklung der
periplieren Nerven der Wirbeltiere.

Hartmeyer, R. Ascidien von Mauritius.

Hickson, S. J. The Alcyonaria of the Maldives. Part III.

Hodgson, T. V. Preliminary Report of the Biological Collections of the " Dis-
covery."

On a new Pycnogonid from the South Polar Regions.

Scotia Collections. — On Decalopoda australis, Eiglits— an old Pycnogonid

rediscovered.
Hoyle, W. E. The Cephalopoda of the Maldive and Laccadive Is.
Krogh, A. On the Tension of Carbonic Acid in Natural Waters and especially

in the Sea.
The abnormal COo Percentage in the Air in Greenland, and the General

Relations between Atmospheric and Oceanic Carbonic Acid.
Lee, A. Bolles. La Structure du Spermatozoide de I'Helix pomatia.

L' Evolution du Spermatozoide de VHelix pomatia.

Lister, J. J. Astrosdera JVilleijana, the Type of a new Family of Sponges.

Contributions to the Life-IIistory of the Foraniinifera.

Ditto (abstract).

A po.ssible explanation of the quinqueloculine arrangement of the cham-
bers in the 3'oung of the microspheric forms of Trilucuiina and Biloculina.

Note on a (l Stomatopod) Metaiiauplius Larva.

On the Reproduction of Orbitolitcs.

A Visit to the Newly Emerged Falcon Island, Tonga Group, South

Pacific.

Notes on the Geology of the Tonga Islands.

and Fletcher, J. J. On the Condition of llie Median Portion of the

Vaginal Apparatus in the M ncropwluhi' .
MacFarland. A Preliminary Account of the Dorididas of Monterey Bay,

California.
Man, J. G. de. Ein neuer freilebender Rundwurm aus Patagonien. Flatus

(Pledoides) palaijo7iicus n. sp.
Moore, J. P. and Bu-sch, K. J. Sabellidaj and Serpulidao from Japan with

Descriptions of New Species of Spirorbis.

398 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Norman, A. M. Briti;»li Isopoda of the families j^fjidce, Cirolanidce, IdoteitUe,

and ArduHdce.

and Brady, G. S. British Land Isopoda. Second Supplement.

and Scott, T. Crustacea Copepoda new to Science from Devon and

Cornwall.
Osborn, H. F. Ornitliolestes Hermanni, a New Compsognathoid Dinosaur

from the Upper Jura.ssic.
Punnett, R. C. Merism and Sex in "Spinax niger."
Shipley, A. E. Cladorchis Watsoni (Conyngham), a Human Parasite from

Africa.

Notes on Parasites [from the Maldives and Laccadives].

and Hornell, J. The Parasites of the Pearl Oyster.

Smith, J. C. A Preliminary Contribution to the Protozoan Fauna of the Gulf

Biologic Station.
Synchseta Ijicornis : a new Kotifer from the brackish waters of Lake

Pontchartrain, Louisiana.
Stephens, J. A List of Irisli Ccclenterata, including the Ctenophora.
Storey, T. A. Tonus Rhythmus in Normal Human Muscle and in the Gastro-
cnemius of the Cat.

Trybom, F. Atgiirder for Fiskeriniiringen i Sverige ar 1903.

Biologiske Undersukningar 1901-1904.

Walker, A. 0. Report on the Amphipoda collected by Professor Herdman,

at Ceylon, in 1902.
"Worth, R. H. Hallsands and Start Bay.

General Work at the Plymouth Laboratory.

A report on the local distribution of the marine invertebrate fauna
occiiring in the neighbourhood of Plymouth, which has been in
preparation for several years, has now been published in the Journal of
tlie Association.

In the compilation of this report, the Director of the Laboratory
has been ably assisted by Mr. E., A. Todd and by Mr. S. Pace, as well
as by a large number of workers who have occupied tables in the
Laboratory from time to time. The Council desire to thank those
naturalists who have thus voluntarily assisted in this work.

The Director has continued to devote special attention to the
Polychsetes found at Plymouth, and in addition to the list contained in
the report above referred to, has published a paper on the anatomy of
Pcecilochcetus {Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci, vol. 48, 1904) and a description
of a new British Sabellarian, Pallasia murata, n. sp.

Mr. Pace has worked chiefly at Echinoderms and Molluscs, and has
published a paper on the local Cucumariidae in the Association's
Journal.

The exhiliit which, at the request of the British Koyal Commission,
was prepared by the Association for tlie St. Louis Exhibition, proved
very successful, and was awarded a Grand Prize, whilst a gold medal
was given for publications.

REPORT OF tup: COUNCIL. 399

The International Fisheries Investigations.

Section I.— NORTH SEA WORK.
A. W(3EK OF THE S.S. "HUXLEY."

Trawling Investigations. — The survey of the North Sea trawling
grounds has been steadily continued during the year. From June
1904 to the end of May 1905 the HilcIoj made 35 voyages, during
which 304 hauls of the large commercial trawls (otter and beam) were
taken, and the quantities and sizes of the fishes caught systematically
recorded.

From the commencement of the investigations 66 voyages have
been completed, and the results of 653 hauls with the large trawls
analysed and recorded.

The work of the Huxley was supplemented during July 1904 l)y a
series of investigations by the s.s. Oithonn in the shallower waters of
Bridlington Bay, the Wash, and the Thames estuary.

Fish Measured. — The investigation of the relative numbers of fishes
of different sizes on various fishing grounds in tlie North Sea and of
their seasonal distribution has been continued. In this connection
during the past year about 100,000 fishes have been measured on the
fishing grounds where they were caught, viz. 95,000 caught with the
large commercial trawls of the Hn.vlei/, and nearly 5,000 caught with
the smaller trawls of the Oithona and Hiixle//.

More than 210,000 fishes have been measured in this way since the
commencement of the investigations, as shown in detail in the
following table : —

I. — Commercial TraicU.

Voyages I-XXXI, 1902-4

XXXll-LVl, 1904-5

Totals
1 1. — Sm all Tra wis.

Voyages I-XXXI, 1902-4 .
XXXII-LVI, 1904-5
S.S. Oithona, July 1904

Totals
III. — Grand Totals .

Marking Experiments. — During the year 2,660 marked plaice have
been .set free in different parts of the North Sea, of which 187 have
already been recaptured.

Prior to June 1904, 2,455 marked plaice had been liberated, of which

Plaice. Haddock. Others.
3.5,061 8,388 64,165 ..
27,577 7,561 60,141 ..

Totals.
. 107,614
. 95,279

62,638

15,949 124,306 ..

. 202,893

1,813
215
843

764 ..

1 1,305 ..

2,400 ..

2,577
1,521
3,243

2,871

1 4,469 ..

7,341

65,509

1.5,950 128,775 ..

. 210,234

400 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

401 have since been recaptured, making a total of 5,115 liberated
and 588 recaptured up to date.

In the great majority of cases the fishermen have been able to give
trustworthy particulars concerning the date and locality of recapture,
and the fislies themselves have been forwarded to the laboratory at
Lowestoft for examination and measurement.

These experiments have been eminently successful in throwing light
upon the seasonal migrations of this species, and upon differences in the
rate of growth on different fishing grounds.

The experiments in the transplantation of small marked plaice from
the inshore grounds to the Dogger Bank, in the spring of 1904, which
were briefly referred to in the last annual report, have yielded results of
considerable scientific importance, and suggest the possibility of practical
applications. The average year's growth of small marked plaice, about
20 cm. (8 ins.) in length, on the coastal grounds of the southern and
eastern parts of the North Sea, has been found to be not more than
5 cm. (2 ins.) ; whereas on the Dogger Bank the average growth of
similar fishes has been found to be 15 cm. (6 ins.) in the same time. Tn
other words, small 8-inch plaice, weighing about 3 oz., which after a year's
growth on the coastal grounds become 10-inch fish, weighing 5^ oz., are
transformed in the same time into 14-inch fish weighing 1 lb. each, by
transplantation to the Dogger Bank.

As small plaice do not naturally occur upon the Bank, the problem
is raised whether the yield of plaice from the North Sea could not be
materially increased by the annual transplantation of large numbers of
such fish on a commercial scale from the coastal grounds to the Dogger
Bank.

Experiments in transplantation on a more extensive scale have been
carried out during the past few months in various parts of the English
area in order to provide additional information bearing upon this
subject.

The marking experiments during the past year have also been ex-
tended to a considerable number of other species, including Turbot,
Brill, Soles, Lemon Soles, Flounders, Dabs, and Cod.

Special Experiments. — While the investigations at sea have pro-
ceeded, in general, on the same lines as during the previous year,
increa.sed attention has been paid to special experiments upon par-
ticular problems. Among these may be mentioned : —

(i) Experiments on the vitality of trawl-caught plaice.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 401

(ii) Experiments on the proportion of small fishes vvhicli escape
through the meshes of the commercial trawl.

(iii) Investigations on the rough grounds unsuitable for commercial
trawling.

(iv) Collection of samples of bottom deposits.

(v) Experiments on bottom currents by means of Mr. Bidder's drift-
bottles.

(vi) Collection of fish-stomachs, for determining the food of fishes.

(vii) Collection of otoliths from trawled fish for investigations on
the age of fishes at diherent sizes.

B. LABORATOEY INVESTIGATIONS.

Age of Fishes. — Considerable progress has been made with the
otolith investigations. The growth-rate of the Plaice during the first
few years of its life has been definitely determined for several different
parts of the coast. The results show a substantial agreement over the
southern part of the North Sea, but a much more rapid growth in the
western part of the English Channel than in the former area. The
determination of the relation between age and size during the later
years is beset with difficulties connected with the existence of local
differences of growth on the offshore grounds, complicated by the
migrations of the fish. These points are being carefully investigated.
The method of study has been extended during the year to other
suitable species, especially the Cod.

Food of Fishes.— Records of the general fauna of the different
trawling grounds have been kept systematically, and have been
supplemented from time to time by the results of special hauls with
the dredge and other implements.

The contents of over 6,000 stomachs of fishes have been examined
and recorded in detail.

The age and food of all marked fishes recaptured has been regularly
recorded.

Bottom Deposits. — Samples of the sea-bottom from about 200
localities have been collected from time to time, and are under analysis
with the object of determining the influence of this factor on the
distribution of fishes and of the organisms upon which they feed.

C. FISHERMEN'S RECORDS.
The system of fishermen's trawling records has been continued
without interruption. Thrive or four Lowestoft and Ramsgate smacks,

402 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

and live or six Grimsby steam trawlers have been constantly engaged
in providing these supplementary records of individual hauls. The
number of returns provided by the fishermen during the past year
amounts to a total of nearly 7,000, as follows : —

Smacks ... 1,350 liauls.
Steamers ... 5,437 ,,
Total 6,787 „

Section II.— HYDROGRAPHIC AND PLANKTON WORK
IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

The quarterly hydrographic cruises required by the International
programme were made in the English Channel in August and November
1904, and in February and May 1905. The usual routine work was
carried out, and in addition current measurements were made with the
Ekman-Nansen current-meter on Station 2 (47 miles S.W. of the
Eddystone), in 50 fathoms, during the November and following cruises.

In addition to the observations made on the quarterly cruises, samples
of surface water and temperature records have been received every
fortnight from four steamers crossing the English Channel — from New-
haven to Caen, from Southampton to Havre and St. Malo, and from
Plymouth to the Channel Islands and St. Brieuc. These, together with
samples obtained from lightships, have made it possible to draw up
fortnightly surface charts for the Channel east of the line joining
Plymouth to Guernsey.

Since September 1904, samples have been collected over the North
Atlantic between Lat. 20° N. and Lat. 56° N. every noon by the kind-
ness of the captains of fifteen of the larger passenger steamers sailing
from English and Scotch ports.

In May 1904, water of 35-o0 7oo S. and over extended up the
Channel as far as the Isle of Wigiit. During the summer the salinity
gradually fell, and in July the highest value found on the Plymouth-
Guernsey line was 35-25 "j^^ S., which in August had diminished to
3500 7o„ S. During the cruise in this month, surface water as high
as 35-40 7ooS. was only found at one place — near Ushant, but this high-
salinity water extended west as an undercurrent to Parson's Bank, and
thence north nearly to mid-Channel.

The salinity remained low, with only slight variations, until the
first week in October, when water of 35-30 7oo S. was found for a short
time between Plymouth and Guernsey. A decline then set in until

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 403

November 16th, when 35-30 °/ooS. again appeared on the Plymouth-
Guernsey line. During the cruise in November, a narrow tongue of
surface water of 3540 7ooS. and over was found stretching north from
Ushant to near mid-Channel, when it took a sharp turn to the west.
This apparent movement from east to west, against the general Channel
drift, was due to a sheet of fresher water entering from the west and
nearly covering a broad layer of denser water which extended at the
bottom from Ushant at least as far as Parson's Bank.

About the middle of December the flow of high-salinity water in-
creased, and during the first week in January 1905, water of 35-407ooS.
appeared in the Channel between Plymouth and Guernsey for the first
time since February 1904. In February there was a slight fall here,
but the presence of water of 35-50 "/.w S., or possibly 35-60 7onS., a few
miles to the west showed that the Atlantic How was still increasing,
displacing the whole of the fresher water from surface to bottom.
This flow reached its maximum towards the end of February with
water of 35-59 "/ooS., between Plymouth and Guernsey, though it had
not fallen below 35-40 7..o S- at the end of April. The samples collected
since that date have not been worked out. The general results show
an increased Atlantic flow during the first few months of 1905.

The specific gravity of various samples collected in the North
Atlantic between Lat. 56° N. and Lat. 20" N. has been determined
directly, and so far no reason has been found for doubting the accuracy
of the ratio of total halogens to specific gravity as given by Knudsen's
Tables. These experiments are still in progress.

The results of the two years of hydrographic work which have now
been carried out show that the western portion of the English Channel
is sometimes filled with warm Atlantic water of high density entering
from the south, whilst at other times the water is of low density,
being derived chiefiy from the Bristol Channel and St. George's Channel,
and in the case of the coastal waters being diluted to a certain extent
with river water. Occasionally water of both kinds may be found as
distinct layers — the water of high salinity usually forming the bottom
layer. These changes take place somewhat irregularly and vary in
dififerent seasons and from year to year. It seems clear that such
changes must have a fundamental influence on all problems connec-
ted with the life-history and distribution of the organisms inhabiting
the area — including the food fishes.

Samples of Plankton were collected at each station on the t(tur

404 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL

quarterly cruises in the English Channel, whilst regular samples at
weekly and fortnightly intervals have been obtained off Plymouth,
between Plymouth and the Channel Islands, and from different light-
ships ofi' the English and Irish coasts. The principal species found in
these samples have been identified, and tables showing the results for
the stations worked on the Channel cruises have been published in the
Bulletin of the International Council for the study of the sea.

The Plankton observations in 1904-5 have confirmed the conclusion
arrived at from the work of the preceding year, that the proportion of
oceanic to neritic species decreases in the English Channel very
regularly from west to east. At the same time it has been found that
the absolute number of oceanic as well as the absolute number of
neritic species is highest in the western basin of the Channel,
decreasing both towards the open ocean in the west and towards the
meridian of the Isle of Wight in the east. It is suggested that this
rise in the number of species, in a region where newly-arrived Atlantic
water meets water which has been lying over a shallow bottom and has
received the outflow of rivers, may be due to an increase of soluble
food-substances which are necessary for the development of various
organisms.

Published Memoirs.

The following papers, either wholly or in part the outcome of work
done at the Laboratory, have been published elsewhere than in the
Journal of the Association : —

AiiiiEN, E. J. Tht Anatomy of Poicilochmtus. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol.
xlviii., 11)04, PI). 79-152.

Dannevig, H. C. On the First Successful Experiment vith Importation of European
Sea Fishes to Ansircdian Waters. Fisheries of New South Wales. Annual Report
for 1902. II.

MiNCHiN, E. A. The Characters and Synonymy of the British Spiecies of Sponges of
the Genus Leccosolknia. Proceed. Zool. Soc, Loud. 1904, vol ii., pp. 349-96.

Eliot, Sir C. N. E. On the Doris planata of Alder and Hancock. Proceed.
Malacol. Soc, vol. vi., 1904, j.p. 180, 181.

Eliot, Sir C. N. E. Notes on tmo Rare British Nndibranchs, Hero Formosa rar.
ARBOREBCKNs Kvd Stauropohis maculata. Proceed. Malacol. Soc, vol. vi., 1905,
pp. 239-43.

Handles, W. 1>. Some Observations on the Anatomy and Affinities of the Trochidae,
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xlviii., 1904, pp. 33-78

Woodcock, H. M. On Cystobia irregularis {Minch.) and Allied " Neogamous"
Gregarines. Arch. Zool. Expdr et Gen. Notes et Revue, 1904, No. 8.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

405

Donations and Receipts.

The receipts for the year for the ordinary work of the Association
incUide the grants from His Majesty's Treasury (£1,000) and tlie
Worshipful Company of Fishmongers (£400), Special Donations
(£55), Annual Subscriptions (£108), Kent of Tables in the Laboratory
(£19), Sale of Specimens (£322), Admission to the Tank Eoom (£133).

Vice-Presidents, Officers, and Council.

The following is the list of gentlemen proposed by the Council for
election for the year 1905-6 : —

Presidoit.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, LL.D., F.R.S.

Vice-Preside7its.

The Duke of Abercorn, K.G., C.B.
Tlie p]arl of St. Germans.
The Earl of Ducie, F.R.S.
Lord AvEBURY, F.R.S.

Lord TWEEDMOUTH, P.O.

Lord Walsingham, F.R.S.

The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, M.P.,
F.R.S.

Tlie Higlit Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, M.P.

Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.

Sir ]MicHAEL Foster, K.C.B., M.P.,
F.R.S.

A. C. L. GiJNTHER, Esq., F.R.S.

Sir John Murray, F.R.S.

Prof. Alfred Newton, F.R.S.

Rev. Canon Norman, D.C.L., F.R.S.

Rear-Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton,
K.C.B., F.R.S.

Members of Council.

G. L. Alward, Esq.

G. P. Bidder, E.sq.

G. C. Bourne, Esq.

Prof. T. W. Bridge, F.R.S.

F. Darwin, Esq., F.R.S.

G. Herbert Fowler, Esq.
S. F. Harmer, Esq., F.R.S.

Prof. W. A. Herdman, F.R.S.

E. W. L. Holt, Esq.

J. J. Lister, Esq., F.R.S.

H. R. Mill, Esq.

Prof. E. A. Minchin.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, C.B.

R. N. Wolfenden, Esq., M.D.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travkrs, Esq.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

The following Governors are also members of the Council : —

The Prime Warden of the Fish- Prof. Sir J. Burdon Sanderson, Bart.,

mongers' Company. I F.R.S. (Oxford University).

E. L. Beckwith, E.sq. (Fishmongers' A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S. (Cambridge

Company). I University).

Prof. W. F. R. Wbldon, F.R.S. (British Association).

[ 406 ]

gr. Statement of Receipts and Expenditure

& s. d. £ s. d.

To Balance from last year, being Cash at Bank and in
hand, viz. : —

On Plant, Repairs and Renewal Fnnd Account 116 10 8

Donations to P'nnd for Repair of ss. Oithona re-
ceived last year 271 0 0

387 10 8
i«ss Amount overpaid on General Account 283 6 2 104 4 6

„ Current Income : —

H.M. Treasury ' 1,000 0 0

Fishmonf^ers' Company (half-year's payment) 200 0 0

Annual Subscriptions 103 2 0

Rentof Tables 19 4 0

Interest on Investment 9 10 5 1,336 16 5

„ Extraordinary Receipts: —

T. n. Riches, Donation to Fund for Repair of ss.

Oithona 50 0 0

The late G. Brebner, per E. A. Batters 5 0 0

British Royal Commission, for Repayment of Balance
of Expenses in connection with Exhibit at St.
Louis Exhibition 120 17 11

Ditto for Sale of Exhibit, including Specimens 100 0 0

Amount realized by Sale of £500 Forth Bridge Rail-
way 4 % Guaranteed Stock 582 0 6 857 18 5

„ Balance, being amount due to Bankers 146 9 1

Zess Cash in hand 20 19 4 125 9 9

(NoTF..— This liability is exclusive of the amount of
£100 due to Mr. G. P. IJidiler in respect of advance made
last y«ar, and of the amount held to he necessary as a
Plant, Uepairs, and lienewals Fund wliich, with £2.) added
during the year, should stand at £1U 10s. 8J.]

£2,424 9 1

Examined and found correct,

(Signed) Edwin Watkrhouse, F.C.A. R. Norris Wolfenden.

G. Herbert Fowi,er. L. W. Byrne.

7.1th June, 1905.

[ 407 ]

for the Year ending 31st May, 1905.

Cr.

By Current Exix-uditure : —
Salaries and Wages —

Director

Natural ist

Director's Assistant

Wages

Travel 1 ing Expenses

Library

Journal — Printing and Illustrating

Less Sales of Journal

Buildings and I'ulilic Tank Room —

Gas, Water, Coal, etc

Stocking Tanks, Feeding, etc

Maintenance and Renewals

Rent of Land, Rates, Taxes, and Insurance

Zei'5 Admissions to Tank Room

Laboratory, Boats, and Sundry Exjjenses —

Stationer}', Office Printing, Postages, etc

Glass, Chemicals, and Apparatus £99 9 10

Zess Sales 44 2 3

Purchase of Specimens

Maintenance and Renewals of Boats,

Nets, Gear, etc £292 18 7

iessSales 79 6 10

Coal and Water for Steamer

Insurance of Steamer (two years)

Less Sales of Specimens, etc. (including £50 from
International Investigations Commission for use of
ss. Oithona)

Bank Interest

„ Extraordinary Ex])enditure : —

Cost of New Boiler and Repairs to ss. Oithona, less
£15 received for Sale of Old Boiler

[Note. — This expenditure has been met as to £321 by
special donation, and as to £525 18s. Ocf. by part proceeds
of bale of Investment, per coiitia.]

£

200 0 0

250 0 0

150 0 0

418 It) 3

159 18 0
18 16 0

s. d.

110 1 1

31 7 1

53 16 8

17 5 8

212 10 6

133 18 5

152 11 3

55 7 7

29 14 4

213 11 9

89 16 6

44 0 9

685 2 2

372 0 4

1,018 16 3

44 17 1

79 2 0

141 2 0

78 12 1

213 1 10
1 19 4

1,577 10 7
846 18 6

£2,424 9 1

[ 408 ]

Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom.

LIST

OF

31ST MAY, 1906.

I.— Governors.

The British Association for the Advancement of Science, Burlington

House, W. £500

The University of Oxford £500

The University of Cambridge £500

The Worshipful Company of Clothworkers, 41, Mincing Lane, E.G. £500

The Worshipful Company of Fishmongers, London Bridge, E.G. £7705

Bayly, Robert (the late) £1000

Bayly, John (the late) £600

Thomasson, J. P. (the late) £970

G. P. Bidder, Esq., Gavendish Garner, Gamhridge £800

II. — Founders.

• Member of Council. f Vice-President. X President.

1884 The Corporation of the City of London £210

1884 The Worshipful Company of Mercers, Mercers' Hall, Cheafside £341 5s.

1884 The Worshipful Company of Goldsmiths, Goldsmiths' Hall, E.G. £100

1884 The Royal Microscopical Society, 20, Hanover Square, W. £100

1884 ^\\Q 'Koy dl'iioc\QtY,BxLrUngton House, Piccadilly, W. £350

1884 The Zoological Society, 3, Hanover Square, W. £100

1884 Bulteel, Thos., Radford, Plymouth £100

1884 Burdett-Coutts, W. L. A. Bartlett, 1, Stratton Street, Piccadilly, W.... £100
1884 Crisp, Frank, LL.B., B.A., Treas. Linn. Soc, 17, Throgmorton

Avenue, E.G. £100

1884 Daubeny, Captain Giles A., TJie Vicarage, Tottington, Bury, Lanes. ... £100

1884 Eddy, J. Ray, The Grange, Garleton, Skipton £100

1884 Gassiott, John P. (the late) £100

X1884 Lankester, Prof. E. Ray, F.R.S., British Museum (Natural History),

South Kensington, S.W. £100

1884 The Rt. Hon. Lord Masham (the late) £100

1684 Moseley, Prof. H. N., F.R.S. (the late) £100

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MbMBEKS. 409

f]884 The Rt. Hon. Lord Avebury, F.R.S., High Elms, Bromley, Kent £100

1884 Poulton, Prof. Edward B., M.A., F.R.S., Wykeham House, Oxford ... £100

1884 Roiaaiics, G. J., LL.D., F R.S. (the late) £100

1884 Worth ington, James (the late) £100

1885 Derby, the late Earl of £100

1887 Weldoii, Prof. W. F. R., F.R.8. (the late) £100

1888 Bury, Henry, M.A., Mayficld House, Farnhum, Surrey £100

1888 The Worsliipful Comijany of Drapers, Drapers' Hall, E.G. £.315

1889 The Worshipful Company of Grocers, Poultry, E.G. £120

1889 Thompson, Sir Henry, Bart, (the late) £110

1889 Revelstoke, The late Lord £100

1890 Riches, T. H., B.A., KitwelU, Shenley, Herts £230

1902 Gurney, R., Itujham Old Hall, Stalham, Norfolk £100

III.— Members.

Ann. signifies that the Member is liable to an Annual Subscription of One Guinea.

C. signifies that he has paid a Composition Fee of Fifteen Guineas in lieu of Annual

Subscription.

1897 Adams, W. R., 16, Belle Vue Mansions, Devonshire Road, Forest Hill,

London Ann.

1900 Aders, W. M., Zeitonn, Cairo, Egypt Ann.

1884 Alger, W. H., 8, The Esplanade, Plymouth C.

*1895 Allen, E. J., D.Sc, The Laboratory, Plymouth Ann.

*1889 Ahvard, G. L , Enfield Villa, Humberstone Avenue, JValtham, Giimsby Ann.

1892 Assheton, R., M.A., Riversdale, Granchester, Cambridge £20

1904 AHalo, F. G., 14, TFestover Villas, Bournemouth Ann.

1884 Bailey, Charles, M.Sc, F.L.S., Atherstone House, North Drive, St. Aiine's-

on-the-Sea Ann.

1902 Baker, R. J., Glen View, Mannamead, Plymouth Ann.

1884 BaUonv, 'Prof. Bayley, F.R.S., Royal Botanic Gardens, Edinburgh C.

1884 Bayliss, W. Maddock, D.Sc, F.R.S., St. Guthberts, West Heath Road,

Hampstead Ann.

1884 Bayly, 'Miss, Seven Trees, Phjmouth £50

1884 Bayly, Miss Anna, Seven Trees, Plymouth £50

1884 Beaumont, W. L, B.A., Tlie Laboratory, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Beck, Conrad, 68, Coni/ttW, .B.G'. C.

*1889 Beckwith, E. L., The Knoll, Eastbourne Ann.

1887 Beddard, F. E., F.R.S., Zoological Society's Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W. Ann.
1884 Beddington, Alfred H., 8, Cornwall Terrace, Regent's Park, N.W. C.

1897 Bedford, Mrs., 326, Camden Road, London, N Ann.

1903 Bidder, H. P'., 10, Queen's Gate Gardens, London, S.W Ann.

1893 Bles, A. J. S., Palm House, Higher Broughton, Manchester Ann.

*1884 Bourne, Gilbert C, M.A., Savile House, Mansfield Road, Oxford Ann.

1898 Bowles, Col. Henry, Forty Hall, Enfield Ann.

*1895 Bridge, Prof. T. W., D.Sc, F.R.S., University of Birmingham Ann.

1902 Brighton Corporation, Town Clerk, Towrt HftW, .Brtr//i/o?i Ann.

1886 Brooksbank, Mrs. M., Leigh Place, Godstone, Surrey C.

1884 Brown, Arthur W. \V.,62, Carlisle Mansions, Carlisle Place, London, S. W. C.

410 LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS.

1893 Browne, Edward T., B.A., 141, Uxhddije Road, W. Anu.

1884 Buckton, G. B., Weycomhe, Hasleimre Ann.

1896 Bulstrode, H. T., M D., 4, The Manswis, Earl's Court, S.W. Ann.

1 889 Barnard, Robert, 3, Hillsborough, Plymouth Ann.

1897 Byrne, L. W., B.A., 7 New Square, Lincoln''^ Inn, London, W.O. Ann.

1887 Caldwell, W. H., Birnam, Chaucer Road, Cambridge C.

1904 Carter, J. M., Winters Hill, Cookham Dene, Berks Ann.

tl884 Chamberlain, Ht. Hon. J., M.P., 40, Prince's Gardens, S.JV. Ann.

1884 Christy, Thomas Howard, 199, Bramhall Lane, Stockport G.

1887 Clarke, Rt. Hon. Sir E., K.C., 5, Essex Court, Temple, E.C £25

1884 Clay, Dr. R. H., Windsor Villas, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Clerk, Major-General H., F.R.S., '' Mountfield," 5, UjyjJer Maze Hill,

St. Leonards-on-Sea, Sussex £21

1886 Co&tes and Co., So%dhside Street, Plymouth G.

1885 Collier Bros., Old Town Street, Plymouth C.

1900 Cooper, W. F., B.A., Ashlyns Hall, Berkhamsted Ann.

*1885 Darwin, Francis, F.R.S., 13, Madingley Road, Cambridge G.

1885 Darwin, W. E., Ridgemount, Bansdt, Southampton £20

1884 Dewick, Rev. E. S., M.A., F.G.S., 26, Oxford Square, Hyde Park, W. ... G.

1885 Dixey, F, A., M.A. Oxon., Wadham College, Oxford £26 5s. and Ann.

1906 D'Morgan, W. C, c/o H. S. King & Co., 9, Pall Mall, London Ann.

1890 Driesch, Hans, Ph.D., Philosopheniveg 5, Heidelberg, Germany C.

tl889 Ducie,TheRt. Hon. the Earlof,F.R.S., TortimrthCourt,Falfield,R.S.O. £50 15s.

1884 Dunning, J. W., 4, Talbot Square, London, W. £26 5s.

1884 Dyer, Sir W. T. Thiselton,M.A.,K.C.M.G.,F.R.S., The Ferm, Witcombe,

Gloucester G.

1898 Eliot, Sir C. N. E., K.C.M.G., C.B., Endcliffe Holt, Endcliffe Crescent,

Sheffield Ann.

1891 Ellis, Hon. Evelyn, Rosenais, Datchet, Windsor G.

1893 Enys, John Davies, Enys, Penryii, Cornwall Ann.

1884 Evans, Sir John, D.C.L., F.Ji.S.,Nash Mills, Hemel Hempstead £20

1885 Ewart, Prof. J. Cossar, M.D., University, Edinburgh £25

1894 Ferrier, David, M.A., M.D., F.R.S., 34, Cavendish Square, W. Anu.

1884 Fison, Sir Frederick W., Bart., 64, Pont Street, London, S.W. G.

1897 Foster, Richard, Windsworth, Looe, R.S.O Ann.

*1885 Fowler, G. Herbert, B.A., Ph.D., 58, Bedford Gardens, London, W. ... Ann.
1 884 Fox, George H., Wodehouse Place, Falmouth Ann.

1886 Freeman, F. F., Abbotsfield, Tavistock, S. Devon G.

1884 Fry, George, F.L.S., Carlin Brae, Bermick-on-Tioeed £21

1892 Galton, F., F.R.S., 42, Rutland Gate, S.W. Ann.

1885 Gaskell, W. H., F.R.S., The Uplands, Shelford, Cambridge C.

1899 Gardiner, Dr. Edw. G., Woods Hole, Mass., U.S.A G.

1897 Qibbs, Hon. Henry, 10, Lennox Gardens, S.W. Ann.

1901 Giles, Col. G. M., Byfield, Mannamead, Plymouth C.

1885 Gordon, Rev. J. M., St. John's Vicarage, Redhill, Surrey Ann.

1884 Grove, E., Norlington, Preston, Brighton Anu.

1899 Guinness, Hon. Rupert, Elveden, Thetford £35 1 5s.

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 411

tl884 Giinther, Dr. Albert, F.R.S., 2, Lichfield Road, Keio Gardens Ann_

1900 Gurney, E., Sprowston Hall, Norwich Ann.

1884 Halliburton, Prof. W. D., M.D., F.R.S., Church Cottage, 17, Marylebom

Road, London, W. Ann.

1884 Hannah, Robert, 82, Addison Road, Kensington, W. C.

*1885 Harmer, S. F., D.Sc, F.R.S., King's College, Cambridge C.

1889 'ilsiXv&y,T.Yi., Cattedoivn, Plymouth Ann.

1888 Haselwood, J. E., 3, Lennox Place, Brighton C.

1884 Haslam, Miss E. Rosa, Ravenswood, Bolton £20

1884 Head, J. Merrick, F.R.G.S., J.P , Pennsylvania Castle, Isle of Portland,

Dorset Ann.

1884 'H.ea\:)e, Waiter, Hey roun, Chaucer Road, Cambridge C.

*1884 Herdman, Prof. W. A., F.R.S., The University, Liverpool Ann.

1884 Herscbel, Col. J., R.E., F.R.S., Observatory House, Slough, Berks C.

1889 Heywood, Mrs. E. S., Light Oaks, Manchester C.

1884 Hicksou, Prof. Sydney J., M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Ellesmere House,

Wilensloio Road, Withington, Manchester Ann.

1897 E.odgion,T. v., bi, Kitigsley Road, Plymouth Ann.

1884 Holdsworth, E. W. H., F.L.S., F.Z.S., Lucerne House, Dartmouth Ann.

♦1905 Holt, E. W. L , 15 Castle Aveiiue, Clontarf, Dublin Ann.

1884 Hudleston, W. H., M.A., F.R.S., 8, Stanhope Gardens, South Kensing-

ton, S.JF. Ann.

1891 Indian Museum, Calcutta Ann.

1888 Inskip, Capt. G. H., R.N., 22, Torrington Place, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Jackson. ^Y. Hatchett, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., Pen JVartha, Weston-super-

Mare Ann.

1893 Jago, Edward, Coldrenick, Liskeard, Cormvall Ann.

1887 Jago-Trelawny, Major-Gen., F.R.G.S., Coldrenick, Liskeard G.

1899 Kent, W. Saville, F.L.S., Belsito, Milford-on-Sea, Hants Ann.

1897 Lanchester, W. F., B.A., The Knott, Lady Margaret Road, Cambridge... C.

1885 Langley, Prof. J. N., F.R.S., Trinity College, Cambridge C.

*1895 Lister, J. J., M.A., F.R.S, St. John's College, Cambridge Ann.

1888 Lope-s, The Rt. Hon. Sir Massey, Bart., Maristoiv, Roborough, South

Devon Ann.

1885 Macalister, Prof. A., F.R.S., St. John's College, Cambridge Ann.

1884 MacAndrew, James J., Lukesland, Ivybridge, South Devon Ann.

1900 Macfie, J. W. Scott, Rowton Hall, Chester C.

1884 Mackrell, John, High Trees, Clapham Common, S.W. C.

1886 MacMunn, Charles A., M.D., Oak Leigh, Wolverhampton Ann.

1902 Major, Surgeon H. G. T., 24, Beech House Road, Croydon C.

1889 Makovski, Stanislaus, Snfi'rons Corner, Eastbourne Ann.

1885 Marr, J. E., M.A., F.R.S., St. John's College, Cambridge C.

1902 Martin, C. H., The Hill, Abergavenny Ann.

1906 Masterman, A. T., D.Sc, Board of Agriculture atid Fishenes, Delahay

Street, London, S.Jy Ann.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VII. NO. ;J. 2 D

412 LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS.

1884 Mcliitosli, Prof. W. C, F.R.S., Nevay Park, Meiyle, N.B 0.

1884 Michael, AUtcrt 1)., Cado(jan Mdnsions, Sloane Square, SJF. G.

♦1903 Mill, H. R., D.Sc, 62, Camden Square, London, N.W. Ann.

*1899 Miuchin, Prof. E. A., University Colkye, London, W.C. Ann.

1905 Mitchell, P. Chcalmers, D.Sc, F.R.S., Secretary Zoological Society,

3 Hanover Square, London, W. Ann.

1885 UQCSitia.,Y.'R.,^,Connaught Place, W. C.

1886 Mond, Ludwig, F.R.S., 20, Avenue Road, Regent's Park, N.W. G.

tl896 Murray, Sir John, K.C.B., F.R.S., Challemjer Lodge, Wardie, Edinburgh Ann.

tl884 Newton, Prof, Alfred, M.A., F.R.S., Magdalen College, Cambridge £20

tl884 Norman, Rev. A. M., M.A., D.C.L., F.KS., Tlie Red House, Berkhamsted,

Herts Ann.

1885 Phillip.^;, Chas. D. F., M.D., 10, Henrietta Street, Cavendish Square, W. C.

1887 Phipson, Mrs., Dasak Bungalow, Nasik Road, Deccan, India Ann.

1886 Power, Henry, C.B., F.R.C.S., 37a, Great Cumberland Place, TV. Ann.

1885 Pritchard, Prof. Urban, Combe Hurst, Nutley Terrace, Hampstead Ann.

1884 Pye-Smith, P. H., M.D., 48, Brook Street, W. C.

1893 Quintin, St. W. H., Scampstone Hall, Rillington, Yorks Ann.

1884 Ralli, Mrs. Stephen £30

1885 Ransom, W. B., The Pavement, Nottingham C.

1888 Rawlings, Edward, A'if/imo)i(^ //oHse, Wimbledon Common Ann.

1892 Robinson, Miss M., University College, London, W.C. Ann.

1892 Riiffer, M. A., M.D., Conseil Sanitaire, Maritime et Quarentenaire, Alexan-

dria, Egypt Ann.

1897 Sandeman, H. ]J., 4, Elliot Terrace, I'lymoath Ann.

1888 Scharft', Robert F., Ph.D., Science and Art Museum, Dublin Ann.

1901 Schiller, F. W., 9, Carlton Road, Blackheath, London, S.E Ann.

1884 Sclater, P. L., F.R.S., Odiham Priory, Winvhfield, Hants Ann.

1884 Sclater, W. L., The Museum, Cape Town Ann.

1885 Scott, D. H., M.A., Pli.D., F.R.S., Old Palace, Richmond, Surrey C.

1903 Scott, S. D., Neuich House, Bath Road, CJieltenluxm Ann.

1884 Sedgwick, A., M.A., F.R.S., Trinity College, Cambridge C.

1888 Serpen, E. W., 19, Hill Park Crescent, Plymouth £50

1900 Sexton, L. E., 17, Collimjs Park, Higher Compton, Plymouth Ann.

1904 Shaw, Joseph, Brxjanston Sq uare, London, W. £ 1 3

1885 Sheldon, Miss Lilian, TJie Murmurs, E.cmo nth Ann.

♦1884 Shipley, Arthur E., M.A., F.R.S., Christ's College, Cambridge C.

1886 Shore, T. W., '^l.D., Heathjleld, Alleyn Park, Dulmch, London, S.E. ... Ann.

1894 Simpson, F. C, J. P., Maypool, Churston Ferrers, R.S.O Ann.

1 885 Sinclair, F. G., Friday Hill, Chingford, Essex C.

1891 Sinclair, William F., 102, Cheyue Walk, Chelsea, S.W C.

1884 Skinners, the Worsliipful Company of, Skinners' Hall, E.G. £42

.1889 Slade, Commander E. J. Warre, Phcenice Farm, Great Bookham, Surrey C.

1893 Horhy, U. C, LL.T>., F.E.ii., Broomfield, Sheffield Ann.

1888 Spencer, Prof.W. Baldwin, M.A , F.R.S., Universityof Victoria, Melbourne Ann.

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 413

1884 Stewart, Prof. Chas., F.R.S., Royal College of Surgeons, Lincoln's Inn

Fields,W.O. Ann.

1897 Straker, J., L.L.M., F.Z.S., Oxford and Cambridge Club, S.TV. C.

1884 Sutherland, The Duke of, Stafford House, St. Javies', S.W. G.

1894 Sykes, E. R., 4, Gh-axfs Inn Place, Gray's Inn, London Ann.

1894 Thomas, W. F., Bishopshalt, Hillingdon, Middlesex Ann.

*1899 Thompson, Prof. D'Arcy W., C.B., University College, Dundee Ann.

1890 Thompson, Sir H. F., Bart., 19, Kensington Gardens, London, W. Ann.

1884 Thornycroft, Sir John I., F.R.S., Eyot Villa, Chiswick Mall Ann.

1888 Thurston, Edgar, Government Central Museum, Egmore, Madras Ann.

1903 Torquay Xatural History Society, Torquay Ann.

*1897 Travers, .J. A., Tortington House, Arundel Ann.

1 891 V^aughan, Henry, 325, High Holborn, London C.

1884 Venning, Mrs., 3, IFingfield Villas, Stoke, Devonport £50

1884 Walker, Alfred O., Ulcombe Place, Maidstone Ann.

1884 Walker, P. F., 36, Prince's Gardens, S.W. Ann.

+ 1884 Walsingham, The Rt. Hon. Lord, F.R.S., Merton Hall, Thetford £20

1906 Waterhouse, N. E., 3, Fredericks Place, Old Jewry, London, E.C. Ann.

1891 Wildy, A. G., 14, Buckingham Street, Adelphi, London, W.C Ann.

1900 Willey, A., D.Sc, Government Museum, Colombo, Ceylon Ann.

1 884 Wilson, Scott B. , Heather Bank, Weybridge Heath C.

*1900 Wolfenden, R. N., M.D., 76, TVimpole Street, Cavendish Square, London, W. Ann.

1905 Woolf, M. Yeatman, Wimpole House, Wimpole Street, London, W. ... Ann.

1898 Worth, R. H., 42, George Street, Plymouth Ann.

1905 Yearsley, Macleod, 10, Upper Wimpole Street, London, W Ann.

IV.— Associate Members.

19U1) Bignell, G. C, F.E.S., The Ferns, Home Park Road, Saltash, Cornwall.

1889 Caux, J. W. de, Great Yarmouth.

1889 Dannevig, Capt. G. M., Arendal, Norway.

1904 Donnison, F., Deep Sea Fishing Co., Boston.

1904 Edwards, W. C., Mercantile Marine Office, St. Andretc's Dock, Hull.

1904 Freeth, A. J., Fish Quay, North Shields.

1904 Hurrell, H. E., 25, Regent Street, Yarmouth.

1904 Inskip, H. E., Capt., R.N., Harbour Master's Office, Ramsgate.

1904 Johnson, A., Fishmongers' Company, Billingsgate Markd, London, E.C.

1889 Ohsen, 0. T., F.L.S., F.R.(4.S., Fii^h Dock Road, Great Grimsby.

1904 Patterson, Arthur, Ibis House, Great Yarmouth.

1889 Ridge, B. J., Neidyn, Penzance.

1901 Sanders, W. J., St. Elmo, Brixham.

1889 Shrubsole, W. H., 19, Vancovier Road, Catford, London.

1889 Sincl, Joseph, 8, Spriwjfield Cottages, Springfield Road, Jersey, C.I.

1890 Spencer, R. L., L. and N.W. ])ep6t, Guernsey.
1890 Wells, W., The Aquarium, Brighton.

OBJECTS

OF THE

Ularine ^liologital ^ssociatran of tlje Slnifeb |Ungbom,

THE ASSOCIATIOX was founded at a Meeting called for the purpose in March, 1884,
and held in the Rooms of the Royal Society of London.

The late Professor Huxley, at tliat time President of the Royal Society, took the chair,
and amongst the speakers in support of the project were the late Duke of Argyll, the
late Sir Lyox Pl.vyfair, Lord Avebuky, Sir Joiix Hookeu, the late Dr. Caupf,nter, Dr.
GuxTHER, tlie late Lord Dalhousie, the late Professor Moseley, the late Mr. Romanes,
and Professor Laxkesteu.

The Association owes its existence and its present satisfactory condition to a comhina-
tion of scientific naturalists, and of gentlemen who, from philanthropic or practical reasons,
are specially interested in the great sea fisheries of the United Kingdom. It is universally
admitted that our knowledge of the habits and conditions of life of sea fishes is very small,
an<l insufficient to enahle either the practical fisherman or the Legislature to take measures
calculated to ensure to the country the greatest return from the "hai'vest of the sea."
Naturalists are, on the other hand, anxious to push further our knowledge of marine life
and its conditions. Hence the Association has erected at Plymouth a thoroughly efficient
Laboratory, where naturalists may study the histoiy of marine animals and plants in general,
and where, in particular, researches on food-fishes and molluscs may be carried out with the
best appliances.

The Laboratory and its fittings were completed in June, 1888, at a cost of some £12,000.
Since that time investigations, practical and scientific, have been constantly pursued at
Plymouth. Practical investigations upon matters connected with sea-fishing are carried on
under the direction of the Council ; in addition, naturalists from England and from abroad
have come to the Laboratory, to carry on their own independent researches, and have made
valuable additions to zoological and botanical science, at the expense of a small rent for the
use of a working tal)le in the Laboratory and other appliances. The number of naturalists
who can be employed by the Association in special investigations on fishery questions, and
definitely retained for the purpose of carrying on those researches throughout the year,
nmst depend on the funds subscribed by private individuals and public bodies for the
purpose. The first charges on the revenue of the Association are the working of the sea-
water circulation in the tanks, stocking the tanks with fish and feeding the latter, the
payment of servants and fishermen, the hire and maintenance of fishing-boats, and the
salary of the Resident Director and Stafi". At the commencement of this number will be
found the names of the gentlemen on the staff.

In the summer of 1902 the Association was commissioned by His Majesty's Government
to carry out in the southern British area the scheme of International Fishery Investigations
adopted by the Conference of European Powers which met at Christiania in 1901. lu
connection with this work a laboratory has been opened at Lowestoft.

The purpose of the Association is to aid at the same time both science and industry. It
is national in character and constitution, and its affairs are conducted by a representative
Council, by an Honorary Secretary and an Honorary Treasurer, without any charge upon
its funds, so that the whole of the subscriptions and donations received are devoted
absolutely to the support of the Laboratory and the prosecution of researches by aid of
its appliances. The reader is referred to page 4 of the Cover for information as to
membership of the Association.

CONTENTS OF NEW SERIES, Vol. VII., No. 3.

PAGE

1. Professor W. F. R. Weldox, f.r.s. . . ... 331

2. Notes on some British Ncdibraxchs. By 0. Eliot. Jnth Plates

XL and XII. . . . . ... 333

3. First Report of the Council of the Marine Biological Associa-

tion OF THE United Kingdom on work carried out in
connection with the International Fishery Investigations . 383

4. Report of the Council, 1904-1905 . . ... 391
Balance Sheet, 1904-1905 . . . ... 406

5. List of Governors, Founders, and Members. Z\d May, 1906 . 408

NOTICE.

Tlie Council of the Marine Biological Association wish it to be understood that
they do not accept responsibility for statements published in this Journal except-
ing when those statements are contained in an official report of the Council.

TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP.

£ s. d.
Annual Members .... per annum 110

Life Members . . . Composition Fee 15 15 0

Founders . . . . . . 100 0 0

Governors . . . ... 500 0 0

Members of the Association have the following rights and privileges : they elect
annually the Officers and Council ; they receive the Journal of the Association free
by post ; they are admitted to view the Laboratory at Plymouth, and may introduce
friends with them ; they have the first claim to rent a place in the Laboratory for
research, with use of tanks, boats, «S:c, ; and have access to the books in the Library
at Plymouth.

All correspondence should be addressed to the Director, The Laboratory,
Plymouth.

JUA. ai 'iri

New Series.— Vol. VII., No. 4— issued July, 1906.]

[Price 6d.

3fournal

OF THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

OF

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

wV-

THE PLYMOUTH LABORATORY.

^

PLYMOUTH

PRINTED FOR THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION BY \V. BRENUON & SON, LTD.,

AND

PUBLISHED BY THE ASSOCIATION AT ITS OFFICES ON THE CITADEL HILL.

SENT FREK BY POST TO ALL MEMBKR8 OF THF. MAKINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :
ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION FOU MEMBERSHIP, ONE GUINEA.

Agents in London: — Messrs. DuLAU k Co., 37, Soho Square, W.

PATRON.

HIS MAJESTY THP: KING.

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL.

President.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, ll.d., f.r.s.

Vice-Preside7Hs.

The Duke of Auercoun, k.o., c.b.
The Duke of Bedford, k.g.
The Earl of St. CIsujians.
The Earl of DuciE, f.r.s.
Lord Avebury, f.r s.

Lord TWEEDMOUTH, p.c.

Lord Walsingham. f.r.s.
The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, m.p.,
f.r.s.

The Right Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, M.p.
Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.
Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., f.r.s.
A. C. L. GuNTHER, Esq., f.r.s.
Sir John Murray, f.r.s.
Prof. Alfred Newton, f.r.s.
Rev. Canon Norman, d.c.l., f.r.s.
Edwin Waterhouse, Esq.

G. L. AlW'ARD, Esq.

Prof. T. W. Bridge, d.sc, f.r.s.

F. Darwin, Esq., f.r.s.
Sir Charles Eliot, k.c.m.q.

G. Herbert Fowler, Estj., ph.d.
J. Stanley Gardiner, Esq., m.a.

G. P. Bidder, Esq., m.a.

Sir Richard B. Martin, Bart. (Prime
Warden of the Fishmongers' Com-
pany).

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'
Company).

COUNCIL.
Elected Members.

S. F. Harmrr, Esq., Sc.D., f.r.s.
E. W. L. Holt, E.?(i.
J. J. Lister, Esq., f.r.s.
H. R. Mill, Esq., D.Sc.

Prof. E. A. MiNCHIN, M.A.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, c.b.
R. N. Wolfenden, Esq., m.d.

Governors.

I G. C. Bourne, Esq., d.Sc. (Oxford

University).
A. E. Shipley, Esq., f.r.s. (Cambridge

University).
Prof. W. A. Herdman, d.Sc, f.r.s,

(Briti.sh Association).

Chairman of Council.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., f.r.s.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, Esq., Tortington, Arundel.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., d.Sc, The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

PERMANENT STAFF.
Director — E. J. Allen, E.sq., D.Sc. '

Naturalist in charge of Fishery Investigations.
W. GaRSTANG, Esq., M.A , D.Sc.

Assistant Naturalist — L. R. Crawshay, Es(i., m.a.

Assistant Naturalists for the International Investiyations —
W. Wallace, Esq., d.sc j J. 0. Borley, Esq., m.a.

R. A. Todd, E.sq., d.sc I W. Byorave, E.sq., b.a.

A. E. Hefford, E.sfj., b.sc.

Hydrographer {International Investigations) — 1). J. Matthews, Esq.

JUl 31 13^6

[ 415 ]

Jarinc ^giological ^ssonation of tjjc %h\M |iingbom.

Report of the Council, 1905-6.

The Council and Officers.

The Council have met on five occasions during the year, and the
average attendance at the meetings has been ten. The meetings
have been held in the Eooms of the lloyal Society, and the Council
have again to express their thanks to the Koyal Society for their
hospitality.

Committees of the Council, as in previous years, have visited the
Laboratories at Plymouth and Lowestoft and inspected the work which
is being carried on.

The Council have to record with regret the deaths of Sir J. Burdon
Sanderson, Bart., f.r.s., the representative of the University of Oxford
on the Council ; of Rear-Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton, k.c.b., f.r.s., a
Vice-President of the Association ; and of Professor W. P, R. Weldon,
F.R.S., a Member of Council since 1888.

The Laboratories.

A somewhat simpler system of circulating the sea water through the
tanks at the Plymouth Laboratory with a new pattern of pump has
been in operation during the greater part of the year and has proved
successful. It is hoped that some saving in the expenses for repairs
will result. Experiments on the rearing of marine organisms under
laboratory conditions have been continued with success.

For the North Sea work in connexion with the International Fishery
Investigations, new and larger premises have been rented at Lowestoft,
which allow of the researches being carried on with much greater con-
venience than in the old establishment.

NKW SERIES. — vol,. VII. Nil. 1. .iri.v, 190<>. 2K

416 KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

The Boats.

The Association's steamer Oitlwna continues to work successfully in
the English Channel, and is in excellent condition both as regards
efficiency and seaworthiness. The sailing boat Anton Dohrn, which
carries on the collecting work during the winter, is also in good repair.

The steam trawler Hu^vley, which was chartered from Mr. G. P.
Bidder in the iirst instance for a period of three years, has been
retained for the further period of two years, during which the Associa-
tion has been asked l)y His Majesty's Government to continue the
International Investigations. Mr. Bidder has, with great generosity,
undertaken to return to the Association each year, for the purposes of
the investigations, the sum of £500 from the amount due to him for
the hire of the vessel.

The Staff.

Mr. L. K. Crawshay, m.a., has been appointed Assistant Naturalist
for Invertebrates at the Plymouth Laboratory in succession to Mr. S.
Pace, who has become Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory at
Millport. Mr. A. E. Hefford has been appointed an additional assistant
on the Lowestoft staff.

Occupation of Tables.

The following Naturalists have occupied tables at the Laboratory
during the year : —

E. T. Browne, m.a., London (Medusoe).

G. E. BuLLEN, St. Albans (Ilydrozoa and Plankton).

A. D. Cotton, Kew (Algae).

W. De Morgan, London (Crustacea).

Sir Charles Eliot, k.c.m.g. (Nudibrancliiata).

R. Elm hirst, Leeds (Nudibrancliiata).

Col. G. M. Giles, Plymouth (Anatomy of Insects).

G. H. Grosvenor, B.A., O.xford (General Zoology).

F. W. Headlev, Haileybury (General Zoology).

C. G. Hewitt, b.Sc, Manchester (Isopoda).
T. V. Hodgson, Plymouth (Pycnogonida).

J. J. Lister, f.r.s., Cambridge (Foraminifera).
Keith Lucas, m.a., Cambridge (Physiology of Tunicata).
Prof. E. W. MacBride, f.r.s., Montreal (Echinoderma).
Miss M. Robinson, London (Crustacea).

D. J. Scourfield, Birmingham (Crustacea).
C. Shearer, d.Sc, Cambridge (Polychaita).

J. Stuart Thomson, Cape Town (Crustacea).
J. Llotd Williams, 13angor (Algae).

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 417

Twelve students attended a course of study in Marine Biology-
conducted at the Laboratory during the Easter vacation by Mr. G. H,
Grosvenor.

General Work at the Plymouth Laboratory.

A commencement has been made in extending the investigations on
the distribution of the fauna, which have been previously carried on in
the immediate neighbourhood of Plymouth, to the deeper waters of the
English Channel, and it is hoped during the coming year still further
to enlarge the area the fauna of which is being mapped out. Mr. L. R.
Crawshay is now associated with the Director in these researches.

Great attention has been paid to perfecting the methods of rearing
marine organisms under laboratory conditions, and very promising pro-
gress has been made in this direction. A report upon the experiments
which have been carried out will, it is expected, be published during
the coming year.

With the assistance of special donations given for the purpose by
Dr. G. H. Fowler and Mr. J. J. Lister, an investigation has been com-
menced into the food of the migratory fishes, especially the mackerel
and pilchard, frequenting the mouth of the English Channel, with a
view to ascertaining what relation exists between changes of the
temperature and density of the sea water or of the floating organisms
which it contains, and the fluctuations in the movements of these fishes
from season to season and from year to year. Mr. G. E. Bullen has
been engaged at somewliat irregular intervals in this work ; but although
promising progress has been made, the investigation is much hampered
owing to the fact that the funds available do not permit of his being
continuously employed upon it.

Regular collections are being made of young fishes found in the
western part of the Channel, for which purpose a young-fish trawl on
the Danish pattern has been constructed, and has been found very
efficient.

Mr. T. V. Hodgson has occupied a table in the Laboratory throughout
the year, for the purpose of working out material which he collected
on the British Antarctic Expedition.

A collection of specimens illustrating the development and rate of
growth of fishes, and containing a collection of marine invertebrates,
has been sent to the Oceanographical Exhibition at Marseilles.

The supply of marine animals and plants for museums and for

418 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

teaching purposes has considerably increased during the last two or
three years; and although the collection, identification, and preservation
of the specimens absorb a great deal of time and attention, which is
by no means adequately compensated for by the amount of money
received from the sale of the specimens, the work in itself appears to
be of sufficient importance to justify the Association in continuing it,
more particularly as it makes regular and constant collecting necessary
and is some assistance to the general finances.

The Library.

The thanks of the Association are due for the following books and

current numbers of periodicals presented to the Library during the

past year: —

Academie Imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.
American Microscopical Society. Transactions.
American Museiun of Natural History. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

Eeport.

American Philosophical Society. Proceedings.
Australian Museum. Records.
Bergens Museum. Aarbog.

An Account of the Crustacea of Norway, etc. ; by G. 0. Sars.

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Occasional Papers.

Board of Agriculture and Fisheries. Annual Report of Proceedings under the

Salmon and Freshwater Fisheries Acts.

Annual Report of Proceedings under Acts relating to Sea Fisheries.

Report of Meeting of Fisheries Representatives.

Bristol Museum and Art Gallery. Reports of Committee.

Bristol Naturalists Society. Proceedings.

The British Museum. Catalogue of Madrcporarian Corals in the British

Museum. Vol. V.
Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. Cold Spring Harbor Monogra^jhs.

Science Bulletin.

Bryn Mawr College. Monographs, Reprint Series.

Bulletin Scientifique de la France et de le Belgique.

The Carnegie Institution. Publications.

La Cellule.

Ceylon Marine Biological Laboratory. Report.

College of Science, Tokyo. Journal.

College voor de Zeevisscherijen. Verslag van den Staat der Nederlandsche

Zeevisscherijen. 1904.
Colombo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica.
The Commissioners of Fisheries, N. S. Wales. Report.

Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal of Conchology.
Conseil perm, internat. pour I'Exploration de la Mer. Bulletin des Resultats

acquis pendant les Cour.ses Periodiques.

Publications de Circonstance.

Rapports et Procfe.s-Verbaux des Reunions.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 419

Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru. Boletin.

Danish Biological Station. Report to the Board of Agriculture.

Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt.

Skrifter.

Dept. of Agriculture, etc., Ireland. Reports.

Dept. of Marine and Fisheries, Canada. Annual Rejjort.

Deutsche Zoologische Gesellschaft. Vei-handlungen.

Deutscher Fischerei Verein. Zeitschrift fur Fischerei.

Deutscher Seefischerei Verein. Mitteilungen.

La Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes.

Field Columbian Museum. Publications.

Imp. Fisheries Bureau, Tokyo. Journal.

Fisheries Society of Japan. Journal.

The Fisherman's Nautical Almanack ; by 0. T. Olsen.

Fishery Board for Scotland. Annual Report.

The Fishing Gazette.

The Government Biologist, Cape of Good Hope. Report.

Government Museum, Madras. Report.

Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletin.

Illustrations of the Zoology of the Royal Indian Marine Survey ship Investigator.

Internationale Meeresforchung. Die Beteiligung Deutsclilands au der Inter-

nationalen Meeresforchung. Jahresbericht.
R. Irish Academy. Proceedings.

Transactions.

Italy. Ministero di Agricoltura, Industria e Commercio. Annali di Agricoltura.

Johns Hopkins University Circulars.

Kaiserliche Marine. Deutsche Seewarte. Virteljahrskarte fiir die Nordsee

und Ostsee.
Kommission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere, etc.

Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen.
Kommissionen for Havundersogelser, Copenhagen. Meddelelser, series Fiskeri,

Hydrografi, Plankton.

Skrifter.

Laboratoire Biologique de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.

Lancashire Sea Fisheries Laboratory. Report.

Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries. Superintendent's Report.

Leicester Corporation Museum and Art Gallery. Report.

Liverpool Biological Society. Proceedings and Transactions.

Liverpool Marine Biology Committee. Annual Report.

Manchester Microscopical Society. Annual Report and Transactions.

Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland. Annual Report.

Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods HoU. Biological Bulletin.

Mededeelingeu over Visscherij.

Meteorological Office. Monthly Pilot Charts, North Atlantic and Mediterranean.

The Beaufort Scale of Wind Force.

R. Microscopical Society. Journal.

Le Mois Scientifique.

Montpellier : I'Universite. Travaux de I'lnstitut de Zoologie de TUniversite

de Montpellier et de la Station Zoologi([ue de C'ette.
Mus(ie du Congo. Annales.
Musde d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Bulletin.
Musee Oceanograpliique de Monaco. Bulletin.
Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires. Anales.

420 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Mnseo Nacional de Montevideo. Anales.

Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College. Bulletiu.

Memoirs.

Report.

The Museums Journal.

Naturforschende Gesellscliaft in Basel. Verliandlungen.
Naturhistorischen Museum, Hamburg. Mittheilungen.
Neapel. Mittheilungen aus der Zoologischen Station.
Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijd.schrift.
New York Academy of Sciences. Annals.

Memoirs.

New York Zoological Society. Bulletin.

Report.

New Zealand Institute. Transactions.

Nikolsk. Aus der Fischzuchtanstalt.

Norges Fiskeristyrelse. Aarsberetning vedkommende Norges Fiskerier.

Kgl. Norske Videnskabers Selskabs. Skrifter.

North Sea Fisheries Investigation Committee. Report of Fishery Board for

Scotland.

Report of Marine Biological Association.

North Sea Fishery Investigations. Report of British Delegates.

La Nuova Notarisia.

Oberlin College. The Wilson Bulletin.

Physiograiihiske Forening. Christiania. Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne.

Plyniuuth Institution. Annual Report and Transactions.

Plymouth Museum and Art Gallery. Annual Report.

Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. (Presented by Prof. E. Ray

Lankester, f.k.s.)
Queensland Museum. Annals.

Rijksinstituut voor het Onderzoek der Zee. Helder. Jaarboek.
The Royal Commission. St. Louis International Exhibition, 1904. British

Section.
Royal Society of Edinburgh. Proceedings.

Transactions.

itoyal Society of London. Pliilosophical Transactions.

Proceedings.

Reports of Commission for Investigation of Mediterranean Fever.

Report of the Sleeping Sickness Committee.

Report to the Government of Ceylon on the Pearl Oyster Fisheries of the

Gulf of jManaar.

Year- Book.

Royal Society of Victoria. Proceedings.

Selskabet for de Norske Fiskeriers Fremme. Norsk Fi.skeritidende.

Smithsonian Institution. Annual Report.

Bulletin of the United States National Museum.

Proceedings of the United States Museum.

Sociedad Geogratica de Lima. Boletin.
Sociedad Scientifica de Sao Paulo. Revista.
Socicta di Naturalisti in Napoli. BoUettino.
Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Acta.

Meddelanden.

Societe Beige de G(5ologie, etc. Bulletin.

Soci(5te Ceutrale d'Aq[uiculture et de Peche. Bulletin.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 421

Societe d'Oceanographie du Golfe de Gascogne. Rai)ports.

Societe Suisse de Peche et Pisciculture. Bulletin.

Societe Imp. Russe de Pisciculture et de Peche. Vyestnik ll'ibopoiu'slilennosti.

Societe Zoologique de France. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

South African Museum. Annals.

Station Aquicole de Boulogne-sur-Mer. Annales.

Station de Pisciculture, etc., Toulouse. Bulletin.

Svenska Hydrografisk Biologiska Kommissioners. Skrifter.

Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademieu.

Arkiv for Botanik.

Arkiv for Zoologie.

Tuft's College. Studies.

United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries. Bulletin.

Report of the Commissioner.

United States National Herbarium. Contributions.

University of California. Publications. Zoology, Physiology, Botany.

University of Pennsylvania. Provost's Report.

Contributions from tlie Zoological Laboratory.

University of Toronto. Studies.

Kgl. Vetenskaps Societeten, Upsala. Nova Acta.

Welsh Museum of Natural History, Arts, and Antiquities. Report.

Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse einer Zoologischen Expedition nach den Baikal

See.
Zoological Society of Japan. Annotationes Zoologicse Japonenses.
Zoological Society of London. List of the Fellows.

Proceedings.

Transactions.

The Secretary, Danish Legation. Fiskeri-Beretning, 1904-1905.

The Director, the Royal Gardens, Kew. Nouvelles Archives du Museum

d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris.

Proceedings of the Washington Academy of Sciences.

The Foreign Office. Developpement de la Sole ; Fabre-Domergue and Bietrix.
Marshall Li])rary, Owens College, Manchester. The Digestive Organs of the

Alcyonaria and their relation to the Mesogloeal cell plexus ; by Edith M.

Pratt.

■ Micro-organisms associated with Disease ; by S. J. Hickson.

Note on the Buccal Pits of Peripatus ; by C. G. Hewitt.

On the Isolation of the Infecting Organism (" Zoochlorella ") of Convoluta

roscoffensis ; by F. Keeble and F. W. Gamble.
Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland. The Naturalist of

Cuml)rae ; by T. R. Stebbiiig.

The Journal of Conchology. Vol. VIII, No. 4.

Bathy-Orographical Map of the Clyde Basin, prepared for the British

Association Meeting, 1901.
Mrs. Robertson and the Marine Biological Association of llie West of Scotland.

On Pisidiiim fontinale and I'lanorbis complanatus, two fresh-water shells

new to Scotland, and Helix villosa, a land shell new to Britain ; by David

Robertson.
The Fauna of Scotland, with special reference to Clydesdale and the

422 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Western district. Fresh- and brackish-water Ostracoda ; by David

Robertson.
Mrs. Robertson and the Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland.

Anii)hii)oda and Isopoda of tlie Firth of Clyde and West of Scotland ; by

David Robertson.

Notes on the Common Limpet ; I13' David Robertson.

On Saxicava rugosa, a bivalve mollusc showing an iinusual mode of repair ;

by David Robertson.
Jottings from my note-book on Pennatula phosphorca, Lin., Virgularia

mirabilis, Lam., and Paronaria qnadranrjularis ; by David Robertson.

Notice of thirteen Cumacea from the Firth of Clyde ; by David Robertson.

Jottings from my note-book on Lima hiajis, Gmel. ; l)y David Robertson.

A list of the Alga) of Lamlash Bay, Arran, collected during September,

1894 ; by David Robertson.
Proceedings and Transactions of the Natural History Society of Glasgow.

Vols. I-V, New Series.

To iho authors of the Memoirs mentioned below the thanks of the
Association are due for separate copies of their works presented to the
Library : —

Allen, A. W. Some Notes on the Life History of Margaritifera panasesae.
Breitfuss, L. Skizze des Seegewerbes an der Murmankiiste.
Browne, E. T. A Report on the Medusae found in the Firth of Clvde (1901-
1902).

Notes on the Pelagic Faima of the Firth of Clyde (1901-1902).

On the Freshwater Medusa Limnocnida tanganicae and its occurrence in

the River Niger.

Report on the Medusae (Hydromedusae, Scyphomedusae, and Ctenophora)

collected by Prof. Herdman at Ceylon in 1902,
and Vallentin, R. On the Marine Fauna of the Isles of Scilly.

Bruce, W. S. Some Results of the Scottish National Antarctic Exjjedition.
Collet, L. W. Les Concretions phosphatees de I'Agulhas Bank. Avec Une

Note sur la Glaucouis qu'elles contiennent. Par Gabriel W. Lee.
Crossland, C. The Oecology and Deposits of the Cape Verde Marine Fauna.
Danton, L. Notes Ichtyologiques.
Darbishire, A. 1). Professor Lang's Breeding Experiments with Helix hortensis

and H. nemoralis.
Driesch, Hans. Altes und Neues zur Entwicklungsphysiologie des jungeu

Asteridenkeimes.

Skizzen zur Restitutionslehre.

tiller das Mesenchym von unharmonisch zusammengesetzten Keinien der

Echiniden.

Zur Cytologic parthenogenetischer Larven von Strongylocentrotus.

Duncker, G. Uber Regeneration des Schwanzendes bei Syngnathiden.
Edwards, C. L. The Floating Laboratory of I\Iarine Biology of Trinity College.
Eliot, C. Nudibranchs from the Indo-Pacilic : I, Notes on a Collection dredged

near Karachi and jMaskat.
Nudibranchs and Tectibranchs from the Indo-Pacific ; IL, Notes on

Lophocercus, Lobiger, Haminaca and Newnesia.

and Cockerel], T. D. A. Notes on a Collection of Californian Nudibranchs.

Notes on Two Rare British Nudibranchs, Hero formosa, var. arborescens,

and Staurodoris niaculata.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 423

Eliot, C. On some Nudibranchs from the Pacific, including a new genus,

Ghromodoriddla.

On some Nudibranchs from East Africa and Zanzibar. Part VI.

On the Dnris -plnnnta of Alder and Hancock.

The Nudibrauchiata of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.

Farran, G. P. Report on the Opisthobranchiate Mollusca collected by

Professor Herdman, at Ceylon, in 1902.
Fowler, Q. II. Biscayan Plankton collected during a cruise of H.M.S. Research,

1900.
Giard, Alfred. La Poecilogonie.
Les tendances actuelles de la Morphologic et ses rapports avec les autres

Sciences.

Sur la pretendue nocivite des Huitres.

Hadley, P. B. Preliminary Report on the Changes in Form and Color in the

successive stages of the American Lobster.
Harmer, S. F. The Pterobranchia of the Siboga E.\pedition, with an account

of other species.
Herdman, W. A. Presidential Address to Linnsean Society. 1905.
Hodgson, T. V. Decalopoda and Colossendeis.
Holt, E. W. L., and Tatter.sall, W. M. Biscayan Plankton collected during a

cruise of H.M.S. Research, 1900. Part V. Schizopoda.
Report on the Schizoiwds collected by Mr. George Murray, F.R.S., during

the cruise of the Oceana in 1898.
Hovey, E. 0. The Grande Soufricre of Guadeloupe.
Janet, C. Anatomic de la tete du Lasius niger. 1905.

Description du Materiel d'une petite Installation Scientifique. Part I.

Observations sur les Fournies. 1904.

Keeble, F., and Gamble, F. W. The Colour-Physiology of Higher Crustacea.

Part III.
Kiajr, Hans. Om Tromsijsundets fiske. En oversigt over deres udbredelse og

biologi.
Kofoid, C. A. A Self-Closing Water Bucket for Plankton Investigations.
Craspedotella, A New Genus of the Cystoflagellata, an Example of

Convergence.
Dinoflagellata of the San Diego Region. I. On Heterodinium, a New

Genus of the Peridinidae.

Some New Tintinnidae from the Plankton of the San Diego Region.

Korotneft", A. Zoologische Expedition nach den Baikal-See.

Moore, J. P. A new species of Sea Mouse {Aphrodita hastata) from Eastern

Massachusetts.
New species of Polychaeta from the North Pacific, chielly from Alaskan

waters. Five new species of Pseudopotamilla from the Pacific Coast of

North America.
Nathansohn, A. Vertikale Wasserl)ewegung und c|uautitative Verteilung des

Planktons im Meere.
Nobre, A. Mollusques et Brachiopods du Portugal.
Norman, A. M. A new Ileterotanais and a new Eurydice, genera of Isopoda.

Greenlandic Polyzoa.

Irish Crustacea. Ostracoda.

Museum Normanianum, III. Crustacea.

Notes on the Natural Hi-story of East Finmark.

On Oucuraaria Montayui (Fleming) and its Synonymy.

424 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Norman, A. i\I. Revised Nomenclature of the species described in Bate and
Westwood's " British Sessile-eyed Crustacea."

Olsen, O. T. A proposal to easily identify the Nationality of Fishing Vessels.

Paulmier, F. C. Higher Crustacea of New York City.

Mrs. Robertson. Protozoa (Foraminifera).

Schepotieff, A. Zur Organisation von Cephalodiscus.

Scott, T. A Report on the Free-swimming Crustacea found in the Firth of
Clyde, 1901 to 1902.

Shipley, A. E., and Hornell, J. Furtlier Report on Parasites found in connec-
tion with the Pearl Oyster Fishery at Ceylon.

Shipley, A. E. Notes on a Collection of Parasites belonging to the Museum of
University College, Dundee.

On Ento-Parasites from the Zoological Garileiis, London, and elsewhere.

The Effects of Metazoan Parasites on their Hosts.

o . . . o

Try bom, Filip. Atgarder for Fiskerinaringen i Sverige ar 1904.
Wolfenden, R. N. Plankton Studies. Preliminary Notes upon new or
interesting species. Part I. Copepoda.

The International Fisheries Investigations.

The following is a summary of the work done and of the conclusions

arrived at by the scientific staff working under the direction of the

Council.

Section I.— NORTH SEA WORK.

A. WOKK OF THE S.S. "HUXLEY."

Trawling Investigations. — With the exception of a period of two
months during the past winter, when the boat was laid up at Grimsby,
the survey of the North Sea trawling grounds within the English area
has made continuous progress. From June, 1905, to the end of May,
1906, the Huxley made nineteen fishing voyages, during which 2-l:0
hauls of the large commercial trawls were taken, and the quantities,
sizes, and weights of the fishes caught systematically recorded.

From the commencement of the investigations seventy-five voyages
liave been completed, and the results of 89o hauls with the large trawls
analysed and recorded.

Towards the close of 1905 the work accomplished during the previous
three years was carefully reviewed, and a programme drawn up for the
conduct of the investigations during tlie current year with the object
of checking results obtained at corresponding seasons on the more
important grounds in previous years, and of filling up gaps in the more
complete series of data. Tlie revised programme has been closely
adhered to during the past half-year.

It is believed that the data are already sufficiently numerous and
consistent to throw much light on the normal characteristics of the fish

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 425

populations on the more important grounds, as well as upon the more
important seasonal changes in such characteristics ; and a series of
summary reports is in course of preparation for submission to H.M.
Government during the current year as each is completed.

Fish Measured. — As a rough indication of the material obtained
upon these voyages, it may be stated that more than 88,000 measure-
ments of fish, representative of the total catch on almost every occa-
sion, were made and recorded at sea during the past year, in addition
to other work.

Nearly 300,000 fishes have been measured in this way since the

commencement of the investigations, as shown in detail in the following

table : —

Plaice. Haddock. Others. Totals.

1902-5. Voyages I-LAa . . 65,509 15,950 128,775 ... 210,234

1905-6. „ LVII-LXXV 24,954 10,755 52,885 ... 88,594

Totals 90,463 26,705 181,660 ... 298,828

Marking Experiments. — During the past year 2042 marked plaice
have been set free.

To the end of June, 1905, 5115 marked plaice had been liberated, of
which 1224 have since been recaptured, yielding a percentage of 23*9
per cent.

More than 7000 marked plaice have thus been set free up to date.

The data yielded by these experiments are now sufficiently numerous
to yield valuable indications of the main differences in the annual
rate of growth of plaice in various parts of the English area. In certain
areas they also show the progressive rate of growth from month to
month. In addition to these results the experiments have thrown a
continually increasing light on the seasonal migrations of the fish, the
intensity of fishing in different areas, and upon differences in the rate
of growth and habits of the two sexes ; they add thus to our knowledge
of the life history of this species in matters of considerable importance.

Transplantation experiments have been carried out during the spring
months of 1905 and 1906 in order to check the results already reported
as having been obtained during 1904.

The results of these experiments indicate that the rate of growth
on the Dogger Bank is always markedly higher than on the coastal
grounds south of 54° N. lat., though subject to variation in actual
amount from year to year. Experiments have been carried out during
the present year in order to determine whether this urea of rapid

426 REI'OKT OF THE COUNCIL.

growth is continuous between the Dogger Bank and the coastal grounds
north of Flamborough Head.

Other experiments have also been devised, and are being carried
out to test whether the still smaller year-old fish of a length of two
to four inches can be profitably transplanted to these depleted waters.

Special Experiments. — The special investigations enumerated in
the last annual report have been continued. Further reference to the
more extensive of these experiments is made in the next section.

B. LABOEATOliY INVESTIGATIONS.

Age of Fishes. — The material which has been accumulated for
studying the age of plaice at different sizes on the various fishing
grounds consists of more than 12,000 otolitlis, of which nearly 8000
have been collected from measured fish caught on board the Huxley
during the past year.

Much time has been spent upon the study of this material, and a
report upon the data acquired up to the end of 1905 is now in prepara-
tion. The results attained by this method have been of great value in
throwing light upon the distribution of the various age-groups of
plaice, the rate of growth in different regions, the age of the two sexes
at first maturity, and similar problems.

In consequence of the relation which has been found to exist between
depth and distance from shore on the one hand and the size of plaice at
a given age on the other, and in view of the irregular character of the
ground off the English coast, a continuous series of hauls of the trawl
was carried out in May, 1905, on a line from the Leman Ground to the
Dutch coast (which represents apparently the main axis of the off-shore
migrations of plaice in the southern part of the North Sea), and the
otoliths of all the plaice caught were extracted.

This experiment was repeated in September last, and again in May
of the current year, the collections yielding from 2000 to 3000 otoliths
on each occasion.

The results of these experiments have furnished a standard by
which to estimate the value of results obtained from samples in isolated
localities.

Food of Fishes. — The material collected bearing upon this point
amounts now to about 10,000 stomachs of fish, the contents of which
have been systematically recorded. During the past year the food of

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 427

useful species has been more extensively studied with respect to the
size of the fish — the specimens being preserved and examined according
to size-groups differing by 5 cm. or 10 cm. In this way progressive
changes have been shown in the feeding -habits of various species as
growth advances.

Certain seasonal changes have also been shown. The plaice during
the winter months have been found to abstain from feeding to a very
large extent. Thus the percentage of stomachs of this species found
empty has been found to vary from 99 per cent in November to 57 per
cent in February, although during the rest of the year the average
is less than 5 per cent.

Bottom Fauna. — The invertebrates trawled or dredged on the
various expeditions prior to 1906 have been identified and recorded
with the exception of a few sponges and ascidians. The total number
of hauls examined amounts to 1129, of which 769 were hauls of the
large trawls and 360 special collections with small dredges and trawls.

A beginning has been made in summarizing these data by means of
distribution -charts for the various species, the main object in view
being the delimitation, as far as possible, of definitely characterized
natural areas. The North Sea lends itself well to this work, as the
variety of species is relatively small, and a considerable portion of these
show fairly definite limits of distribution and centres of abundance.

Bottom Deposits. — Out of 260 samples collected, nearly all (217)
have now been graded, with the object of showing the relative propor-
tion of fine and coarse particles in the deposits of different areas. For
this purpose the samples are shaken through sieves of successively finer
meshes, from 15 mm. to 0"5 nmi. in diameter. A striking result of
this sifting is the predominance of fine sand and its uniformity of
character over large areas of the North Sea.

Herring Investigations. — In consequence of resolutions passed by
the International Council in 1905, increased attention has been paid
to the herring, and samples of this fish have been examined at Lowes-
toft during the past year at intervals of about a month or six weeks in
accordance with a prescribed scheme. Each sample consists of 100 fish,
the locality of capture of which is known ; and the characters of each
fish are separately recorded as regards (1) length, (2) number of verte-
brae, (3) degree of maturity, and (4) amount of fat. The samples

428 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

examined up to the present time have shown a high degree of
uniformity as regards the number of vertebra3, which is held to be
the best single index of racial peculiarities.

C. FISHEEMEN'S RECORDS.

These have been continued on the same lines as hitherto. The
number of returns provided by the fishermen during the past year
amounts to a total exceeding 5000, as under: —

Smacks ... 1403 hauls.
Steamers ... 4006 „

Total 5409

Section II.— HYDROGRAPHIC AND PLANKTON WORK
IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

During the past twelve months the quarterly cruises have been
carried out as usual, and a short extra cruise covering the south-
western stations was made in September, 1905. Samples have also
been obtained from lightships, from steamers crossing the English
Channel, and from Atlantic liners.

The most strongly marked feature of the period has been: (1) a great
increase in the strength of the Gulf Stream off the south of New-
foundland in the summer of 1905, shown not only by the analyses of
the samples from this region, but also by actual observations by ofhcers
of liners ; and (2) a rise in the salinity of the Bristol Channel and the
western part of the English Channel, which was almost certainly con-
nected with, if not due to, the increased velocity of the Gulf Stream.

During the period under consideration the conditions have varied
considerably, but at no time has there been observed any important
division into layers of different density.

During the May cruise the larger part of the water in the western
half of the Channel was as high as 35-4 7co S., reaching 35-5 7oo S. a
short distance west of Ushant, and 35-6 7oo S. in the Bay of Biscay
just beyond the limits of the cruises. The 35-5 7oo isohaline, as shown
by samples analysed at Plymouth and at Copenhagen, ran in an
irregular course round the west coast of Ireland nearly to the latitude
of the Orkney Islands.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 429

During the summer the distribution of salinity altered in such a way
that the saltest water found during the May cruise was close to the
coasts of Devon and Cornwall instead of in mid-channel, an abnormal
condition which continued, with slight modification, until the end of
the year. The broad tongue of 35-5 7oo S. off the west coasts of Ireland
and Scotland was almost unchanged, though its northern extremity had
retreated slightly. At the same time the salinity south of Ireland had
risen to 36"0 7oo S. as far north as latitude 50° N. It would appear,
however, that the water of 35"4 °/„„ S. now in the English Channel had
entered from the west rather than from the Bay of Biscay; this con-
clusion is somewhat doubtful, as the samples taken in the Bristol
Channel by various vessels do not agree very well among themselves,
though it is confirmed to a certain extent by the presence in the
plankton, as described below, of a large number of Pteropods of a
species which is common off the west of Ireland, though known u\ the
Bay of Biscay.

The extra hydrographic cruise in September, 1905, over the south-
western stations (Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5), did not show any important
change, the highest salinity, 35-39 7oo. being found at Station 4 (55
miles west of Ushant). The high salinity water under the Cornish
coast appears in the meantime to have been moving slowly eastward,
keeping to the north side of the Channel and at the same time becoming
slightly fresher. During the last half of September it was on the line
joining the Needles to Cape La Hague, and three weeks later it was
observed a short distance east of the Isle of Wight. In November,
1905, the salinity of the Channel as a whole was high, reaching
35*3 Voo ill the narrows between the Isle of Wight and Cape Barfleur
and as far east as Beachy Head. Advantage was taken of the fine
weather to extend the cruise further west than usual, and an extra
station was worked at 47° 46' N., 7° 50' W., in 170 fathoms. The
salinity was 35*57 7c<. ^t this station and 35'52 7oo at Station 4.

During December and January the salinity of the Channel continued
to rise, and at the beginning of February, 1906, water of 35'4 7oo S.
was found between Southampton and Havre, a decidedly high figure
for the position.

The February cruise was carried out during the latter half of the
month, and showed that water of 35*3 7oo S. filled nearly the whole
length of the Channel, with the exception of a narrow band of

430 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

35'2 7oo S. running across Channel south of the Start. The saltest
water, 35'4 7oo S., was found at Station 4 (see above) and extended
north-east nearly to Station 2 (47 miles S.W. of the Eddystone).
As usual, a southerly current of comparatively fresh water from the
Irish Sea was found reaching nearly to the mid-channel line south of
the Scilly Islands. During March the salinity of the western half of
the Channel fell, and that of the eastern part rose, reaching 35"4 on
the Newhaven-Caen line in April.

As in the previous year samples of plankton have been regularly
collected on the quarterly cruises, and as far as practicable in the
intervals between the cruises. The records of the species found on
each cruise are published in the Bulletin of the International Council.

A paper by Dr. Gough on the distribution and migrations of the
Siphonophore, Muggicea atlantica, in 1904, has also been published by
the International Council. From this paper it appears that a shoal of
Muggirea entered the English Channel in April from the south-west,
the species being first observed off Usliant. It then spread eastward
into the Channel as far as Portland, where it was found in August, and
also northwards, being taken off the Land's End in the beginning of
June. It was found in the Irish Sea in August, and subsequently
along the south coast of Ireland as far west as Fastnet, and on the
west coast as far north as Galway Bay.

The plankton during the summer and autumn of 1905 was char-
acterized by the appearance in the English Channel of a vast swarm of
Pteropods, Limacina retroversa, Fleming. These Pteropods were first
observed on the south coast of Ireland and entered the Channel from
the north-west. They thus appeared to spread in a direction opposite
to that taken by Muggicea in the preceding year. Limacina retroversa
is a species which is seldom met with in the Cliannel, being more com-
monly found in more northern waters. Its appearance in the Channel
is therefore of interest, as it suggests a liow of water from a more
northerly direction than usual, a suggestion which is supported by the
results of the hydrographic work. In company with the Limacina,
other northerly species were observed, for example Clione limacina and
lihizosolenia hebetata.

REPOET OF THE COUNCIL. 431

Published Memoirs.

The following papers, either wholly or in part the outcome of work
done at the Laboratory, have been published elsewhere than in the
Journal of the Association : —

Chubb, G. C. — Hie Growth of the Oocyte in Antedon : a Morphological Study in Cell-
Metabolism. Proceed. Roy. Soc, B. 519, 1906, pp. 384-7.

GouGH, L. H. — On the Distribution a7id the Migrations of Muggiaea atlantica,
Cunningham, in the English Channel, the Irish Sea, and off the South and West Coasts
of Ireland in 1904. Conseil Perm. Internat. pour I'Explor. d. 1. Mer. Publications
de Circonstance, No. 29, 1905, pp. 1-13.

Hill, M. D. — Notes on the Maturation of the Ovum of Alcyonium digitatum.
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 49, 1905, pp. 493-519.

MacBride, E. W. — Report on the Work done during the Occupation of the British
Association Table at Plymouth, June, WOB. {Development of Ophiothrix fragilis.)
Report Brit. Assn. South Africa, 1905, pp. 183-5.

Norman, A. M. On Cucumaria Montagui, Fleming. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
Ser. 7, Vol. XVI., 1905, pp. 352-9.

Norman, A. M., and Scott, T. The Crustacea of Devon and Cornwall. London,
1906, pp. 1-232.

Schmidt, Johs. The Pelagic Post-larval Stages of the Atlantic Species of Gadus.
Meddel. Komm. Havunders. Fiskeri., Bd. I, Nr. 4.

Williams, J. Ll. Studies in the Dictyotaceae. iii., Tlie Periodicity of the Sexual
Cells in Dictyota dichotoma. Annals of Botany, vol. xix., 1905, pp. 531-60.

Woodcock, H. M. The Life-Cycle of " Cystobia " irregularis (Minch.), together
with Observations on other " Neogamous " Gregarines. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 50,
1906, pp. 1-100.

Woodland, W. Studies in Spicule Formation. Parts I-IV. Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., vol. 49, 1905, pp. 231-325 and pp. 533-59.

Donations and Receipts.

The receipts for the year for the ordinary work of the Association
include the grants from His Majesty's Treasury (£1000) and the
Worshipful Company of Fishmongers (£400), Special Donations
(£525), Annual Subscriptions (£102), Kent of Tables in the Laboratory
(£42), Sale of Specimens (£393), Admission to the Tank Room (£126).

NEW SEKIES. — VOL. YII. NO. 4. 2 F

432

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Vice-Presidents, Officers, and Council.

The following is the list of gentlemen proposed by the Council for
election for the year 1906-7 : —

Presideyit,
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, LL.D., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.

The Duke of Abercorn, K.G., C.B.
The Duke of Bedford, K.G.
The Earl of St. Germans.
The Earl of DuciE, F.R.S.
Lord AvEBURY, F.R.S.

Lord TWEEDMOUTH, P.O.

Lord Walsingham, F.R.S.

The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, M.P.,
F.R.S.

The Right Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, M.P.
Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.
Sir Michael Foster, K.C.B., F.R.S.
A. C. L. GiJNTHER, Esq., F.R.S.
Sir John Murray, F.R.S.
Prof. Alfred Newton, F.R.S.
Rev. Canon Norman, D.C.L., F.R.S.
Edwin Waterhouse, Esq.

Members of Council.

G. L. Alward, Esq.

Prof. T. W. Bridge, D.Sc, F.R.S.

F. Darwin, Esq., F.R.S.

Sir Charles Eliot, K.C.M.G.

G. Herbert Fowler, Esq., Ph.D.
J. Stanley Gardiner, Esq., M.A.
S. F. Harmer, Esq., Sc.D., F.R.S.

E. W. L. Holt, Esq.

J. J. Lister, Esq., F.R.S.

H. R. Mill, Esq., D.Sc.

Prof. E. A. Minchin, M.A.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, C.B.

R. N. Wolfenden, Esq., M.D.

Cliairman of Council.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travkrs, Esq.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., D.Sc, The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

The following Governors are also members of the Council :-

G. P. Bidder, Esq., M.A.

Sir Richard B. Martin, Bart. (Prime

Warden of the Fi.shmongers'

Company).
E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'

Company).

G. C. Bourne, Esq., D.Sc. (Oxford

University).
A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S. (Cambridge

University).
Prof. W. A. Herdman, D.Sc, F.R.S.

(British Association).

[ 434 ]

gr. Statemerit of Receipts and Payments

£ s. d. £ s. d.

To Ciirrent Income : —

H.M. Treasury 1,000 0 0

Fishnioiigers' Company 400 0 0

Annual Subscriptions 101 16 0

Rentof Tables 42 2 0 1,543 18 0

„ Extraordinary Receipts: —

G. P. Bidder, Special Donation 500 0 0

Dr. G. H. Fowler do. 25 0 0 525 0 0

,, Balance : —

General Account 304 18 0

Zcss Repairs and Renewals Account 133 12 2

Overdraft at Bank 171 5 10

Xess Cash in hand 20 4 0 151 110

[Note. — This liability is exclusive of the amount of

£100 referred to in the last statement.]

£2,219 19 10

Examined and found correct,

(Signed) N. E. Waterhouse, A.C.A. E. A. Minchin.

L. W. Bykne, Geo. P. Biddeii.

26th June, 1906.

[ ^35 ]

for the Year ending ^\st May, 1906.

Cr.

£ s. d. £ s. (7.

By Balance from last year, being amount due to Bankers ... 146 9 1

i«ss Cash in hand 20 19 4 125 9 9

,, Current Expenditure : —
Salaries and Wages —

Director 200 0 0

Naturalist (International Fishery Investigations) ... 250 0 0

Director's Assistant 150 0 0

Wages (including cost of preparing Marseilles E.Khibit) 574 9 1 1,174 9 1

Travelling Expenses 54 4 0

Library 80 0 2

Journal 3 5 0

83 5 2
iess Sales of Journal 3 8 1 79 17 1

Buildings and Public Tank Room —

Gas, Water, and Coal 88 18 0

Stocking Tanks, Feeding, etc 29 17 10

Maintenance and Renewals 84 18 5

Do. Repairs and Renewals Account... 32 18 6

Rent of Laud, Rates, Taxes, and Insurance 17 6 11

253 19 8
Zess Admissions to Tank Room 126 12 3 127 7 5

Laboratory, Boats, and Sundry Expenses —

Stationery, Office Expenses, Printing, etc 112 18 7

Glass, Chemicals, and Apparatus (in-
cluding purchases on account of
Marseilles E.xhibit) £19115 8

ifss Sales 30 3 6 16112 2

Purchase of Specimens 37 17 5

Maintenance and Renewal of Boats,

Nets, Gear, etc £250 12 4

iess Sales 105 1 3 145 11 1

Coal and Water for Steamer 118 8 11

Insurance of Steamer 22 19 6

599 7 8
Less Sales of Specimens, etc. (including £50 from
International Investigations Commission for use of

ss. Oithona) 443 7 0 156 0 8

Bank Interest 2 11 10

„ Extraordinary Expenditure : — 1,719 19 10

Contribution towards the expenses of the International

Fishery Investigations 500 0 0

£2,219 19 10

2F2

[ 436 ]

Notes and Memoranda.

Diporula verrucosa, C. Peach, ofif Plymouth.

The type, and hitherto only recorded British specimen (Hinck's British
Polyzoa, p. 220, PL XXXII. Figs. 1, 2), was procured by Peach in
Lantivet Bay, When at the Biological Laboratory in 1889, I found a
second example among material brought in by the dredger from deep
water. The specimen is finer than the type, measuring 1'4 inches high
and 1*3 inches wide. The proportionately great width is caused by
a very obtuse angle of the first division of the stem ; subsequently the
branches are again dichotomously divided, and at their tips are
the beginning of new divisions. A. M. Nokman.

Hancockia eudactylota, Gosse.

In writing of the genus Hancockia in this Journal (vol. vii.. No. 3,
June, 1906, pp. 353-6), I have inadvertently followed foreign
zoologists in calling the species described by Gosse, H. dadylota. The
name given by Gosse was, however, H. eudactylota (see Ann. and Mag.
of Nat. Hist., XX., 1887, p. 316). C. Eliot.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association.

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888. Price Is.

New Series (Eoyal 8vo).

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 plates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899-1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., Nos. 1, 2, and 3.

Separate numbers (generally 4 to one volume), in wrappers, 3s. Gd. ; to Members, 2s. 8d.

London Agents: Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37 Soho Square, W.

Cloth 4(0, 150 pp., 18 plates (12 coloured).

A TREATISE ON THE COMMON SOLE.

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.R.S.E.,

Late Fellow of University College, Oxford; Naturalist to the Association.

Price to Members, 20s. ; to Non-Members, 25s.

Medium 8vo, 368 pages. 159 Illustrations arid two Maps. Price Is. 6d. net.

(Macmillan <t Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Prepared expressly for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries,

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMERLY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ;
NATURALIST ON THE STAFF OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION.

SMitI) Preface bp
E. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA.

BULLETIN

DES RESULTATS ACQUIS PENDANT LES COURSES PERIODIQUES.

Published Quarterly. Price per Volume of Four Numbers,

18 Kroner (£1).

RAPPORTS ET PROCES-VERBAUX DES REUNIONS.

Vol. I., 1902-3. Kr. 6.

Vol. II., 1903-4. Kr. 4.

Vol. III., 1902-4 (General Eeport). Kr. 15.

Vol. IV., 1904-5. Kr. 4.

PUBLICATIONS DE OIRCONSTANCE.

No. 1. . C. G. Joh. Petersen: How to Distinguish between Mature and Im-
mature Plaice throughout the Year. A Preliminary Communication.
8 pp. 1 pi. July, 1903. Kr. 1.

No. 2. Martin Knudsen : On the Standard-Water used in the Hydro-
graphical Research until July, 1903. 9 pp. July, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 3. Die Literatur der zehn wichtigsten Nutzfische der Nordsee. In
monographischer Darstellung. 112 s., 10 T; August, 1903. Kr. 3,

The Literature of the Ten Principal Food Fishes of the North Sea.
In the form of compendious monographs. 108 pp. 10 pi. August,
1903. Kr. 3.

Nos. 4-5. Martin Knudsen : Ueber den Gebrauch von Stickstoffbestim-
mungen in der Hydrographie.

Gefrierpunkttabelle fur Meerwasser.

Zusaminen 13 s. September, 1903. Kr. 0.75.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. 6. Harry M. Kyle : On a New Form of Trawl Net, designed to fish in
midwater as well as on tlie ground. Preliminary notice. 8 pp.
November, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 7. P. J. van Breemen : Ueber das Vorkommen von Oithona nana
Giesbr. in der Nordsee. (Aus dem niederlaendischen Institut fur
Meeresforschung.) 24 s. Mit einer Karte. November, 1903. Kr. 1.

Nos. 8-9. T. Wemyss Fulton: On the Spawning of tlie Cod {Gadus
morrhua L.) in Autumn in the North Sea. With a Chart.

A New Mark for Fish.

Together, 14 pp. March, 1904. Kr. 1.

No. 10. G. 0. Sars : On a New (Planktonic) Species of the Genus Apherusa.
4 pp. 1 pi. March, 1904. Kr. 0.50.

No. 11. Martin Knudsen : o-, Tabelle, Anhang zu den 1901 herausgege-
benen h^^drographischen Tabellen. 23 pp. May, 1904. Kr. 0.75.

No. 12. Catalogue des poissons du nord de I'Europe, avec les noms
vulgaires dont on se sert dans les langues de cette region. 76 pp. June,
1904. Kr. 1.

No. 13a. Die Ostsee-Fischerei in ihrer jetzigen Lage. (Erster Teil.)

I. Uebersicht tiber die Seefischerei in den diinischen Gewaessern innerhalb

Skagens. Im Auftrag von Dr. C. G. Job. Petersen bearbeitet von
Andreas Otterstrom.

II. Uebersicht ueber die Seefischerei Schwedens an den slid — und cistlichen

Kuesten dieses Landes. Bearbeitet von Dr. Filip Trybom und Alf.
Wollebsek. Together, 59 pp. 6 pi. June, 1904. Kr. 1.50.

No. 14. E. van Everdingen und C. H. Wind: Oberfliiclientemperatur-
messungen in der Nordsee. (Vorliiufige Mitteilung.) 10 pp. 1 pi.
July, 1904. Kr. 1.

No. 15. Sigurd Stenius : Ein Versuch zur Untersuchung der hydro-
graphischen Veriinderungen in der nordlichen Ostsee sowie im
hnnischen und im ])ottnischen Meerbusen. (Vorliiufige Mitteilung.)
7 s. 5 t.

No. 16. Graphische Berechnung von <t, aus t und o-^. 1 s.

PUBLIGATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. 17. A. J. Robertson: Scottish Hydrographic Research during 1903. 6 pp.

No. 18. J, W. Sandstrom : Einfluss des Windes auf die Dichte und die
Bewegung des Meereswassers. 6 s.

No. 19. B. Helland-Hansen : Zur Ozeanograiohie des Nordmeeres. Resume
eiues am 22. Juli gehaltenen Vortrags. Mit 8 s. 3 fig.

No. 20. E. Ruppin : Ueber die Oxydierbarkeit des Meerwassers durch
Kaliumpermaiiganat. 9 s.
(No. 15-20. Ensemble 37 pp. 5 pi. et 3 tig. October, 1904. Kr. 1.50.)

No. 21. Charles J. J. Fox : On the Determination of the Atmospheric
Gases Dissolved in Sea-Water. (Communications du Laboratoire
central a Christiania No. 1.) 24 pp. 1 pi. 4 fig. March, 1905. Kr. 1.

No, 22. D. Damas : Notes biologiques sur les Copepodes de la mer
norvegienne. 24 pp. 1 carte. April, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 23. V. Walfrid Ekman : On the use of Insulated Water-Bottles and
Reversing Thermometers. (Communications du Laboratoire central a
Christiania No. 2.) 28 pp. 2 pi. 8 fig. April, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 24, V. Walfrid Ekman .- Kurze Beschreibung eines Propell-Strom-
messers. (Communications du Laboratoire central a Christiania No. 3.)
4 s. It.

No. 25. 0, Pettersson : Beschreibung des Bifilar-Strommessers. 6 s. It.

No. 26. A. M. van Rosendaal und C. H. Wind : Prlifung von Strom-
messern und Strommessungsversuche in der Nordsee. 10 s. 2 t.
(No. 24-26. Zusammen 20 s. 4 t. July, 1905. Kr. 1.50.)

No. 27. V. Walfrid Ekman : An Apparatus for the Collection of Bottom-
Samples. (Communications du Laboratoire central <\ Christiania No. 4.)
6 pp. 5 fig. August, 1905. Kr. 0.50,

No. 28. Bericht liber die Anstalten zur Vermehrung des Lachses und der
Meerforellen in den Fliissen der Ostsee. Im Auftrage der Kommission
C 1, unter Mitwirkung von Prof. Dr. 0. von Grimm (Russland), von
dem deutschen Seefischerei-Verein (General-Sekretiir Prof. Dr. H.
Henking) (Deutschland) und von Fischereikonsulent Chr, Levinsen
(Danemark), bearbeitet von dem Geschaftsfiihrer Dr. Fil. Trybom.
34 s, November, 1905. Kr. 0.75.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. 29. L. H. Gough : On the Distribution and the Migrations of
Muggiaea atlantica, Cunningham, in the English Cliannel, the Irish
Sea, and off the South and West Coasts of Ireland, in 190i. 13 pp.
3 charts. 2 fig. November, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 30. Rolf J. Witting : Kurze Beschreibung eines elektriseh registrier-
enden Strommessers. 8 s. Textfig.

No. 31. Etliches iiber Strommessung. lis.

No. 30-31. Zusammon 19 s. November, 1905. Kr, 0.75.

No. 32. Charles Atwood Kofoid : A Self-closing Water-bucket for Plankton
Investigations. 10 pp. 4 fig. December, 1905. Kr. 0.50.

No. 33. Catalogue des espi^ces de plantes et d'animaux observees dans le
Plankton recueilli pendant les expeditions periodiques depuis le mois
d'aoiit 1902 jusqu'au mois de mai 1905. 122 pp. February, 1906. Kr. 2.

No. 34. Fridtjof Nansen : Methods for Measuring Direction and Velocity
of Currents in the Sea. With an Appendix by Dr. V. Walfrid Ekman.
42 pp. 2 pi. and 31 fig. February, 1906.

Published on behalf of the International Council

BY

ANDR. FRED. HOST ET FILS,
COPENHAGEN.

OB CTE OTS

UK TUB

Parine biological Association of tjje ^Initeb Jxingbom.

THE ASSOCIATION was founded at a Meeting called for the purpose in March, 1884,
and held in the Rooms of the Royal Society of London.

The late Professor Huxley, at that time President of the Royal Society, took the chair,
and amongst the speakers in support of the project were the late Duke of Argyll, the
late Sir Lyon Playfaik, Lord Avebury, Sir Joh x Hooker, the late Dr. Carpenter, Dr.
GuxTHER, the late Lord Dalhoi'sie, the late Professor Moseley, the late Mr. Romane.s,
and Professor Lankester.

The Association owes its existence and its present satisfactory condition to a comldna-
tion of scientific naturalists, and of gentlemen who, from i)hilanthropic or practical reasons,
are specially interested in the great sea fisheries of the United Kingdom. It is universally
admitted that our knowledge of the habits and conditions of life of sea fishes is very small,
and insufficient to enable either the practical fisherman or the Legislature to take measures
calculated to ensure to the country the greatest return from the "harvest of the sea."
Naturalists are, on the other hand, anxious to push further our knowledge of marine life
and its conditions. Hence the Association has erected at Plymouth a thoroughly efficient
Laboratory, where naturalists may study the history of marine animals and plants in general,
and where, in particular, researches on food-fishes and molluscs may be carried out with the
best appliances.

The Laboratory and its fittings were completed in June, 1888, at a cost of some £12,000.
Since that time investigations, practical and scientific, have been constantly pursued at
Plymouth. Practical investigations upon matters connected with sea-fishing are carried oh
under the direction of the Council ; in addition, naturalists from England and from abroad
have come to the Laboratory, to carry on their own independent researches, and have made
valualile additions to zoological anil botanical science, at the expense of a small rent for the
use of a working table in the Laboratory and other appliances. The number of naturalists
who can be employed by the Association in special investigations on fishery questions, and
definitely retained for the purpose of carrying on those researches throughout the year,
must depend on the funds subscribed by private individuals and public bodies for the
purpose. The first charges on the revenue of the Association are the working of the sea-
water circulation in the tanks, stocking the tanks with fish and feeding the latter, the
payment of servants and fishermen, the hire and maintenance of fishing-boats, and the
salary of the Resident Director and Staff. At the commencement of this number will be
found the names of the gentlemen on the staff.

In the summer of 1902 the Association was commissioned by His Majesty's Government
to carry out in the southern British area the scheme of International Fishery Investigations
adopted by the Conference of European Powers which met at Christiania in 1901. In
connection with this work a laboratory has been ojiened at Lowestoft.

The purpose of the Association is to aid at the same time lioth science and industry. It
is national in character and constitution, and its atfairs are conducte<i by a representiitive
Council, by an Honorary Secretary and an Honorary Treasurer, without any charge upon
its funds, so that the whole of tlie subscriptions and donations received are devoted
absolutely to the support of the Laboratory and the prosecution of researches by aiil of
its appliances. The reader is referred to page 4 of the Cover for information as to
membership of the Association.

CONTENTS OF NEW SERIES, Vol. VII, No. 4.

PAGE

1. Report of the Council, 1905-1906 . . ... 415
Balance Sheet, 1905-1906 . . . ... 434

2. Notes and Memoranda . . . ... 436

NOTICE.

The Council of the Marine Biological Association wish it to be understood that
they do not accept responsibility for statements puUi.shed in this Journal except-
ing when those statements are contained in an official report of the Council.

TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP.

£ s. d.

Annual Members .... per annum 110

Life Members . . . Composition Fee 15 15 0

Founders , . . . . , 100 0 0

Governors . . . . . . 500 0 0

Members of the Association have the following rights and privileges : they elect
annually the Officers and Council ; they receive the Journal of the Association free
by post ; they are admitted to view the Laboratory at Plymouth, and may introduce
friends Avith them ; they have the first claim to rent a place in the Laboratory for
research, with use of tanks, boats, &c. ; and have access to the books in the Librar
at Plymouth,

All correspondence should be addressed to the Director, The Laboratory,
Plymouth.

New Series.— Vol. VII., No. 5— issued October, 1906.] [Price One Shilling.

journal

OF THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

OF

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

«3^^jfe,

■-^^

. .r!^?'-':".- ---■•-■• XNi^rr'-' '^- "s.-r-fe^^-'-i-

■^*^^^.:M^-

— **^^T^'*- r^-._ : S;------ ■ 'TIS, ^^-^^--^t'^r-'*'^ ^^^isdSi^

^

i?^*:?

THE PLYMOUTH LABORATOUY.

i-.

PLYMOUTH:

PRINTBD FOR THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION BY \\ . BRENDON & SON, LTD.,

AND

PUBLISHED BY THE ASSOCIATION AT ITS OFFICES ON THE CITADEL HILL.

SENT FREE BY POST TO ALL MEMBERS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATMN :
ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION FOR MEMBERSHIP, ONE GUINEA.

Agents in London :— Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37, Soho Square, W.

PATRON.

HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL.

President.
Prof. E. Ray Laxkester, ll.d., f.r.s.

Vice-Presidents.

The Duke of Ahercorn, k.g., c.b.
The Duke of Bedford, k.(;.
The Earl of St. Germans.
The Earl of Dl'cie, f.u.s.

Lord AVEBURY, F.R s.
Lord TWEEDMOUTH, P.C.

Lord "Walsingham, f.r.s.

The Eight Hon. A. J, Balfour, m.p.,

F.R.S.

The Right Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, M.P.
Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.
Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., f.r.s.

A. C. L. GiJNTHER, Esq., F.R.S.

Sir John Murray, f.r.s.
Prof. Alfred Newton, f.r.s.
Rev. Canon Norman, d.c.l., f.r.s.
Edwin Waterhouse, Esq.

G. L. Alward, Eyq.

Prof. T. W. Bridge, d.sc, f.r.s.

F. Darwin, Esq., f.r.s.
Sir Charles Eliot, k.c.m.g.

G. Herbert Fowler, Esq., ph.d.
J. Stanley Gardiner, Esq., m.a

G. P. Bidder, Esq., m.a.

Sir Richard B. Martin, Bart. (Prime
Warden of the Fishmongers' Com-
pany).

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'
Company).

COUNCIL.
Elected Members.

S. F. Harmer, Esq., Sc.d., f.r.s.
E. W. L. Holt, Esq.
J. J. Lister, Esq., f.r.s.
H. R. Mill, Esq., d.sc
Prof. E. A. Minchin, m.a.
Prof. DArcy W. Thompson, c.b.

R. N. WOLFENDEN, Esq., m.d.

Governors,

Prof. G. C. Bourne, d.Sc. (Oxford
University).

A. E. Shipley, Esq., d.Sc, f.r.s. (Cam-
bridge LTniversity).

Prof. W. A. Herdman, d.Sc, f.r.s.
(British Association).

Ghairman of Gonnril.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., d.Sc, f.r.s.

Ho7i. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, Esq., Tortington, Arundel.

Hon. Secretary,
E. J. Allen, Esq., d.Sc, The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

PERMANENT STAFF.
Director — E. J. Allen, Es(;[., d.Sc.

Naturalist in charge of Fishery Investirjatioiis.
W. GaRSTANG, Esq., M.A., D.Sc.

Assistant Naturalist — L. R. Crawshay, Esq., m.a.

Assistant Naturalists for the International Investigations —
AV. Wallace, Esq., d.sc. j J. 0. Borley', Esq., m.a.

11. A. Todd, Esq., n.sc | W. Bygrave, Esq., b.a.

A. E. Hefford, Esq., b.sc.

Hydroyrai^her {International Investigations)— T). J. Matthews, Esq.

[ ^37 ]

Some Results of the International Fishery
Investigations.

By
Jas. Johnstone.

It is always an unsatisfactory task to attempt to summarize the results
of an extensive piece of scientific work while this is still in progress.
The conclusions made during the course of a series of researches are
necessarily tentative ones, and subject to more or less modification when
the work comes to an end. Even the main facts elicited during the
investigation do not at the time present themselves in their real
proportions. One fails to appreciate the importance of some, and may
be tempted to give emphasis to others which do not possess the
significance assigned to them. Such considerations aj)ply with special
force to the following sketch of the main results apparent so far from
the work of the International Fishery Investigations in the Northern
European seas. Nine countries — Britain, Belgium, Denmark, Germany,
Finland, The Netherlands, Norway, Eussia, and Sweden — are engaged
in these researches. Each country has its own staff of scientific men
(and women); its own exploring vessels and laboratories; and its
own publications.* Controlling and supervising all this work is the
International Council, operating through the Bureau at Copenhagen, and
the Central Laboratory at Christiania.

Common plans and programmes of work were arranged by the Council
at the outset of the investigations and at various times since then ; but
while this is the case, each country is still at liberty to " fight for its
own iiand." It will easily be seen then that the co-ordination of the

* For the English reader the following are the most important publications : —

The Rapports et Procis-verbaux of the Couneil, especially vol. iii.

The English Blue l)ook3. Fishery and Ilydrographic Investigations iit. the North Sea and
adjacent regions (cd. 2612, 1905 ; and cd. 2(570, 1905). North Sea Fishery Investigations,
Reports and Correspondence , vol. i. (cil. 2966, 1905). (Vol. ii. of this Blue book is identical
with Rapports et Procis-verbaiix, vol. iii.)

The Bulletin des Rcsultats (if the Council.

The I'ablications de Circonstancc of the Council.

The Danish Mcddelelser fra Kommissioncn for Ilavicndensogelser (in English).

The (Jerman Beteiligung Deutschlands an den Internationalen Mecrcsforschung.

The Journal of the Marine Biological Association.

There are of course other publications, but the above are the most noteworthy and
generally interesting.

NEW SERIES. VOL. VII. NO. 5. OCTOBER, 1906. 2 G

438 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

numerous researches, and the discussion of the results obtained in
relation to each other, must be a task of considerable difficulty, and
indeed cannot properly be undertaken until the conclusion of the series
of investigations. It is most necessary that the reader should bear
this in mind in following the present account of the International
Fishery Investigations.

The International Fishery researches fall under three main categories:

(1) the hydrographic work, which deals with physical investigation on
the constitution ami movements of the water in our northern seas ;

(2) the purely biological work both strictly zoological and bionomical ;
and (3) fishery investigations consisting of the fishery experiments
involving the use of conmiercial and research fishing gear, and of
statistical studies. I will take these main lines of research in the
above order.

The Hydrographical Investigations.

I think it necessary to give a very short account of the topography
of the sea bottom in the area under investigation, though our know-
ledge of this was obtained previous to the inception of the International
Fisheries work, and has not been materially changed in the course of
this. It is well known that the British Isles are situated on a sub-
marine plateau which forms part of the European " Continental Shelf."
If an imaginary line be drawn in this area so as to connect all points
where the sea is 100 fathoms in depth, it will be found that the British
Islands are included within it. Such a line will enclose an area which
includes a considerable portion of the Atlantic to the west of Ireland
and Scotland, the Irish Sea, the English Channel, and the North Sea
with the exception of a deep depression which skirts the coasts of
Norway and Sweden. Over the greater part of this area the sea is
less than 300 feet in depth, and with the exception of two or three
isolated " deeps " is everywhere less than 600 feet in depth.

From the north of Scotland, and extending in a north-westerly
direction, is a submarine ridge which connects together the British
submarine plateau with the plateaux on which are situated the Faeroe
Isles and Iceland. Between Greenland and Iceland, and between
Iceland and the Faeroe Isles, are extensive banks over which the
sea is from 200 to 300 fathoms in depth. Then joining the Faeroes to
the British plateau is a narrow ridge — the Wyville-Thomson Ridge.
To the north-east of this ridge the sea bottom rapidly sinks down,
forming a channel of over 500 fathoms in depth, deepening to form the
Norwegian sea, with a maximum depth of nearly 2000 fathoms. On the
south-west side of the ridge the sea bottom as rapidly sinks down into
the abysses of the Atlantic Ocean. The Wyville-Thomson Eidge

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 439

forms the " waterslied " between two deep-water basins differing con-
spicuously from each other. On the top of the ridge the water may
have a bottom temperature of 2° C. On the southern shapes it is
washed by water with a relatively high temperature, 6° C. to 10° C, and
even down to a depth of 700 metres the temperature may be as high
as 6°. On the other hand, the temperature falls rapidly as we
descend the northern slopes towards the Norwegian sea, until we find
in the deeps of the latter a mass of sea water the temperature of which
is, with one exception, lower than anywhere else in the oceans of the
earth. In the deepest part of the Norwegian sea the temperature of
the water is l°-3 C. below the freezing point of fresh water.

Over practically the whole of the liritish and North Sea plateau, on
the Norwegian coastal banks, the Faeroese and Icelandic banks, the
Baltic and the coastal banks in the Barentz Sea, commercial fishing is
carried on. Though the tendency is always for the extension of trawl
and line fishing into deeper water, yet tiie greater part of the Norwegian
sea is not fished over. Still this extensive area is most interesting from
the point of view of the investigator, and many fishing experiments
have been made therein.

This then is the nature of the area over whicii the International
Fishery Investigations are being carried on. The accompanying Chart
(Fig. 1) shows how it has been divided up so as to apportion the
work between the various countries participating in the scheme of
research.

Hydrographic investigations have for their aim the determination of
the physical characters of the sea water in the different regions of the
extensive area mentioned above. The physical characters to which
I allude are : (1) the temperature ; (2) the salinity, that is, the weight
of solid saline matter contained in 1000 grammes of sea water ; and
(3) the nature and abundance of the gases (oxygen, nitrogen, carbonic
acid, sulphuretted hydrogen, etc.) dissolved in it. Other characters are
from time to time of importance, but the hydrographic condition of
any portion of sea water is usually defined by its temperature and
salinity, and the determination of these are the essentials of marine
hydrographic research. Not only do these characters vary from time
to time in the same region — both temperature and salinity are, for
instance, different in the water covering the Dogger ISank in winter
and summer — but they may vary with the locality. The water on the
Dogger may be physically very different from that present in the
Faeroe-Shetland channel or in tlie Cattegat. The determination, then,
of both temperature and salinity, simultaneously over the whole area,
at periodical times, is the obligatory hydrographic work at present
carried on by the International Fishery organization.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 441

A good deal of scientific work of this kind was carried on, botli hy
the Scandinavian hydrograpliers and by the Scottish Fishery Board,
prior to the beginning of the International Investigations. There was,
for instance, a notable expedition in 1893, in the course of which results
of some value were obtained ; and, both in Norway and Sweden,
frequent investigations, by vessels equipped for the purpose or by
commercial vessels, have been made. T refer, of course, to hydrogra])hic
work in the North European area. It is well known that such research
always formed a prominent part of the work of the great exploring
voyages. But much of the research carried on in this part of North
European waters is now known to be faulty ; and the results obtained
cannot be utilized for comparison with those now being procured by
the International organization. Methods were faulty in the past —
particularly the methods of obtaining water samples and temperatures
from deep-water levels or from the sea bottom. Even the determina-
tion of the salinity of the sample was not always carried out with
accuracy. It was not until the creation of the International organization
that co-ordination became possible. It was essential that the work should
be carried on under the supervision of a central authority, and that large
numbers of observations should simultaneously be made over a very
extensive area. It was further essential for strict accuracy that water
samples should be obtained and temperatures observed by instruments
of identical pattern. When the International scheme was initiated in 1902
all these things became practicable. The region under investigation was
divided into a number of sub-areas, one or more of which were allotted
to each of the participating countries. In each of these sub-areas lines
were marked out traversing significant portions of the sea area, and on
each line were laid down a number of "stations." A station is a
stopping-place for the exploring vessel at which observations are made.
On reaching the station an ordinary sounding is made and a sample of
water from the surface of the sea is taken, part of which is reserved
for analysis. The temperature of the sea surface being determined, a
series of hydrographic soundings is then made.

Not the least creditable achievement of the International Fisheries
researches is the perfection of the water-bottle. In the latest form of
this instrument, which was designed l)y l*rofessors Pettersson and
Nansen, we have an almost perfect means of collecting samples of water
from the sea bottom or at any other depth, and at tlic same time
determining the temperature of this water in situ. The water-bottle
in principle consists of a central chamber, in which is tixed a delicate
deep-sea thermometer. Bound this central chamber are a number
of concentric cylinders of ebonite and brass. Tlie bottle is lowered in
an open condition, and when the rec^uired depth has been attained it is

442 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

closed by moans of a " niossenger," wliieh slides down the line carrying
Uie bottle. Both central and concentric cbambers are then filled
with the water present at the deptii to which the instrument is
lowered ; the thermometer registers the temperature of this water in
the central chamber, and this being surrounded by three or four
concentric shells of water, boat is only very slowly conducted in either
direction through these water walls. In hauling the water-bottle the
temperature does not, therefore, appreciably rise. These soundings
are made for a number of depths, for instance, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 metres,
and the temperatures of these separate water strata are so obtained.

Each exploring vessel makes one such cruise at regular intervals, and
the cruises over all the International area are made as nearly as possible
at the same time. At least one cruise is made quarterly, and the
months selected are February, May, August, and November. On the
return of the vessel to her base, the water samples collected are sent
ashore for analysis, and the salinity at least is determined. What is
actually done is to estimate the percentage of clilorine (or rather total
halogens) present by precii)itating these substances, according to various
methods, by nitrate of silver. The total solids in solution are then
calculated from the values obtained in the analyses by means of hydro-
graphic tables. The highest degree of accuracy is necessary, and this
has only been made possible by means of check analyses made by the
Central Laboratory, under the control of the International Council.
The principal functions of this institution are the supply of the
instruments of research, the preparation of "standard" sea water for
checking the analyses made by the various national laboratories, and
the preparation of the hydrographic tables.

The results obtained — salinities, temperatures, etc. — are then sent to
the Bureau of the International Council to be published in the Bulletin
des Ri'suUats. The values are marked on charts of the areas under
investigation, so tiiat synoptical representations of tlie hydrographic
condition of the sea are prepared. Such charts of temperatures and
salinities, prepared for successive years or portions of a year, are pictorial
representations of the circulation of the waters of tlie North Atlantic
seas.

The inmiediate cause of these water movements in the North European
area is the Gulf Stream circulation. It is now generally known, though
one may still find it stated otherwise in the textbooks, that the actual
(lulf Stream does not at any time reach the shores of the British
Islands. Issuing from the Gulf of IMexico, this great current forms a
closed eddy in the North Atlantic Ocean, and its waters circulate round
a portion of that sen, cliaracterized by the presence of floating seaweed
and a peculiar fauna. Tiiis is the "Sargasso Sea." In 1889 the limits

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 443

I

of the Gulf Stream eddy were investigated.* The water of 36 and
37 salinity touched the Azores in March of that year, but not the
coasts of Africa or Europe. Between these coasts and the stream
was water of less salinity than 36. In November a great exten-
sion of the eddy had taken place, and in tlmt month it had actually
touched the coasts of Africa and Southern Europe. With this extension
of heavy and relatively warm sub-tropical water had also occurred an
extension of the area containing sub-tropical microscopic drifting
organisms. In March of the following year the limits of the Gulf
Stream eddy had again contracted.

The Gulf Stream circulation, though it never actually reaches our
northern latitudes, thus undergoes a periodic expansion and contraction.
Now analogous to these gigantic annual pulsations there occur hydro-
graphic events in the seas of Northern Europe. A periodic flooding
of the North Sea, the Skagerak, the Norwegian sea, and even the
remote Barentz Sea, with water of Atlantic origin, occurs annually in
such a manner as to render it an undoubted fact that the oceanic
circulation in these regions is dependent on that of the Gulf Stream,
and ultimately on the equatorial current. In some way or other a
great stream or drift takes origin in the Gulf Stream eddy and invades
our northern seas. This is the " European stream." It is sometimes
said that it is the result of the propulsion of surface water by the
prevailing south-westerly cyclonic storms which reach our latitudes.
This may be so, but the cause of the Norwegian stream is more prob-
ably a complex thermo-dynamical one. Anyhow, there is a continual
drift of relatively warm and dense water from the south-west towards
Northern Europe. Just as the Gulf Stream eddy pulsates, so does this
drift of water become augmented or contracted. And with these
augmentations and contractions of the European stream are correlated
changes in the barometric pressure and temperature of the atmosphere,
and in the prevailing fisheries of the regions into which it penetrates.

The chartf (Fig. 2) reproduced on page 444 illustrates the distribution
of the European stream in August, 1890. This chart was constructed from
observations made prior to the beginning of the International Investiga-
tions, and the results obtained since 1902 indicate that the distrilmtion
of the stream in 1S9G was rather abnormal. A glance at the chart,
however, will illustrate what may perhaps be regarded as the maximum
flooding of the European seas by Atlantic water. The stream has
invaded the Icelandic coastal regions, and has penetrated into the
Denmark strait between Iceland and Greenland. Impinging on the

* Cleve, Ekman, and Pettcrsson, Variations annuellea (h Vcau dc surface dc Vocean
atlnntiqxie.

t I'eteiiiianii's MitUicilungen, 1000, Ilcft i. u. ii. ; .sec also Rajtpts. et Proc.-rcrh.,
vol. iii., l^Oft, p. 4.

444 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS,

western coasts of the British Tsles, the stream divides, part passing
through the English Oliannel into the North Sea. Then flowing north,
it is shown filHng up Itolh th(> Tcoliuul-Faeroo and the Faeroe-Shetland
channels. The International researches have shown that tliis dis-
tril)ution is cpiite unusual ; as a very general rule the Atlantic stream
passes hetween the Faeroes and Scotland only, and to a very slight

Surface chart, August -1896

Atlantic water

Arctic water ['i^::\^;;:v Coastal and bank water

Fk;. 2.

extent through the other channel. It should be noted tliat the whole
of the oceanic basin from surface to bottom south of the Iceland-
Scotland ridge is filled with Atlantic water. lUit the effect of the
stream washing on the ridge is such that the flow of Atlantic water
is interrupted, and north of the ridge this warm and dense water lies
only on the surface. After passing over this ridge the stream, which
is now the "Norwegian branch of the European stream," is deflected
to the east, and we see that it rounds the north of Scotland and enters
the North Sea.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 445

Great nttention lias heen directed to the flow of the European stream
on the Wyville-Thomson liidge, and the investigations made since 1902
by the Scottish hydrographers in this region have sliown that the
conditions here are very complicated. Not only have we to con.sider
the fluctuations of the Atlantic stream itself, but we have also to
consider the influence exerted on the flow of the current by the North
Polar stream. In the chart this is represented by the broken oblique
lines. The Polar stream, which consists of cold and relatively light
Arctic water flowing to the south, is broken into two sub-streams.
One of these, the G-reenlandic stream, is an ice-bearing one, and flows
through the Denmark strait. The other, which does not usually carry
ice, is the east Icelandic Polar stream, and flows south past ihe east
coast of that island. This stream attains its maximum volume in
spring, and it may then obstruct the flow of Atlantic water north of
the Faeroe-Shetland channel and so cause this to enter the North Sea
in increased volume. In the winter, when the flow of Arctic water
southwards is at its minimum, the passage northwards of Atlantic
water is facilitated. Not only does the varying intensity of the Polar
stream aflect the northerly passage of Atlantic water, but we have also
to deal with an undercurrent of Arctic water which flows beneath the
Atlantic water in an opposite direction, and also with an outflowing
stream of brackish water from the Baltic, which also exerts its influence
on the intensity of the Norwegian stream. Altogether the hydro-
graphic conditions in the Faeroe-Shetland channel are very complex,
and it has been, and is still, a task of much difliculty to unravel the
course of the currents in this locality.

After passing the Faeroes the Norwegian stream flows on to the
north-east, covering a variable area of the surface of the Norwegian
sea with water which is warmer and Salter than that which lies beneath.
Passing the meridian 25° E. it then rounds North Cape and enters
the Barentz Sea, The Pussian hydrographers have investigated the
physical conditions of this area with great success,* and have shown
that this North Cape current of Atlantic water and its ramiflcations
possess boundaries as constant geographically as those of rivers.
Annually the remote Barentz Sea is invaded by a heat wave, the result
of the seasonal fluctuation of the Norwegian stream. The cold season
or winter of this sea is in June. Beginning in that month is the inflow
of Atlantic water, which attains its maximum intensity in November.
In the interval between June and November the temperature of the
bottom water in the Barentz Sea has been raised from V C. to about
6° C, and corresponding variations in the salinity of the water have

• Oceanographische Studien u. d. Jlavfiut:: Afrrr. I'otciiiunn's Mittheilungcn, 1904,
p. 46. Alao Iluppls. cl I'roc.-verb., vol. iii., 1905, i\ 3.

446 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

been observed. 'I'heii in November the intiow of the genial Atlantic
water ceases and the I'.arentz Sea is again invaded by the cold Arctic
water of the Polar basin.

In the North Sea similar variations in the nature and origin of the
water present have been observed. A good deal of attention was paid
to this question even before the initiation of the International In-
vestigations, but since 1902 our knowledge of these variations has been

Salinity of
Surface-water,
AogUBt, 1903

Fig. 3.

considerably increased. The efTect of the seasonal fluctuations in the
volume of the Norwegian stream is well sliown by the investigations of
the Scottish, Danish, and Dutch sections of the organization, and will
easily be understood l)y a glance at the charts,* which illustrate the
hydrographic condition of the surface of the North Sea in 1903 and
1904. Fig. 3 represents the conditions in August, 1903, and it will be
seen that by far the greater portion of the area is covered with water
of 34 to 35 per 1000 salinity. This may l)e called North Sea water.

• A. J. Robertson, Fishery and Hijdrographical Invcstiyations in the North Sea and
adjacent regions, p. 55, 1905 (cd. 2012).

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 447

Theu to the eastward there is a wide edging of water which is less salt,
containing less than 34 parts of solid matter per 1000. This is
Bank water, and results from the fusion of North Sea water with
the fresh water from continental rivers and from the outHowinfj
Baltic stream. In this month Atlantic water is seen to be present in
the north-west part of the North Sea ; that is, the Norwegian stream
has begun to flow round the north of Scotland, and covers the deeper
part of the North Sea, north of the Dogger Bank.

Salinity of
Surface-water,
lanoarv. 1904

Fig. 4.

So far there is no indication of the entrance of Atlantic water into
the North Sea area from the southern entrance. This, however, is
represented in Fig. 4, which shows the conditions oljtaining in January,
1904. Here we see that the northerly tongue of Atlantic water pro-
ceeding from the Faeroe-Shetland channel has become much larger and
now covers quite an extensive area of the sea. Towards the south
Atlantic water is also entering through the Straits of Dover, and these
north and south influxes of salt water are apparently approximating to
each other. In the next chart (Fig. 5), which represents the conditions

448 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAT. FISHEUV INVESTIGATIONS.

in Mareli, 1004, a fuiUier development of tlie Atlantic flooding has
taken place. Both the northern and southern tongues have become
largely augmented, and Atlantic water now covers quite a considerable
fraction of the North Sea area. The iniliix of water from the European
stream into the North Sea therefore begins in August, gathers force
during the winter, and attains a maximum in early spring. From
thence onwards the flooding diminishes.

The work of the Swedish hydrographers, carried out under the

Fig. 5.

International organization, in the Skagerak, and that of the Danes in
the Cattegat and the Belts, show that the same ebb and flow of Atlantic
water can be felt in those seas. " During the autumn," says Petters.son,*
" a heat wave from the Skagerak penetrates into the Baltic." From
August until November Atlantic water accumulates in the deep layers
of the Skagerak. In August this is overlain by surface water of low
salinity and a relatively high temperature. Wlien in November this
accumulation of salt water has reached its maximum, both of volume

* Rappls. et Proc-verh., vol. iii., lOOG, p. 8.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTEHNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 449

and temperature, it lies beneath surface water which is now much
colder than that at the bottom. The effect of this flooding of the
deeper regions of the Skagerak with warm dense water is that an
undercurrent of relatively warm Bank water is set up, and this passes
through the Cattegat and the Belt seas into the Baltic proper, where it
displaces the colder water which had accumulated during the previous
winter. In most years this undercurrent of warm Bank water may
pass as far into the Baltic as east of Bornholm.

Finally, the hydrographic observations made in the English Channel
by the Marine Biological Association* show that the same periodic
flooding by warm and dense Atlantic water takes place in this area.
In the Channel, on account of the rapid and complicated tidal streams
and the contracted sea area, the conditions are more complex and
difticult of investigation. We have here to deal with two contributory
sources of water: (1) a current of relatively low salinity which flows
southwards from the Irish Sea ; and (2) Atlantic water which flows
northwards from the Bay of Biscay. The conditions are still further
complicated by the presence of coastal water. A general drift of water
up Channel has been observed, and successive areas of low and high
salinity water may pass to the east. During tlie summer and early
winter of 1903 the low salinity water of the Irish Sea predominated,
but in the winter the Channel was largely filled with Atlantic water
flowing past Ushant in a north-easterly direction.

The main results which already appear from a study of the hydro-
graphic work of the International Fisheries research organization are
these : (1) the flooding of the seas of Northern Europe by a stream of
comparative!}^ warm and heavy Atlantic water which takes origin in
the Gulf Stream circulation ; and (2) the periodicity of this Atlantic
drift. Once a year the area covered by the gigantic Gulf Stream swirl
expands and contracts, and once a year, but a little later, the continual
northerly flow from the Atlantic to Britain and Northern Europe also
is augmented and diminished. It is in the remoter parts of the area
invaded by the European stream that the pulsations of the latter can
most easily be felt. In tlie English Channel, the North Sea, the
Cattegat and Baltic, the shores of Iceland, and tbe Barentz Sea, the
annual heat wave set up by the replacement of tlie colder and fresher
waters of those seas by the warmer and Salter waters of the Atlantic
has now been observed and studied.

The efforts of the International organization are now being con-
centrated, so far as hydrographic research goes, on the study of the

* Mattliews, Report {No. 2, Southern Area) Fishery and Hydrographic Investigations in
tlie North Sea and cu/juceut rcyiu/is, I'JOo, [>. '.iS'J (cd. ".^670).

450 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

varying periodicity of the Atlantic flood and ebb. We have seen that
the Gulf Stream circulation is itself periodic in that its intensity is
greatest in November and least in March. But that the period of greatest
intensity varies slightly from year to year is now tolerably certain,
though this problem has by no means received the attention it deserves.
So also with the appearance of the Atlantic stream in the ultimate seas
of Northern Europe ; on the whole an annual periodicity has been
observed. Year after year the Atlantic Hooding occurs at much the
same time : the temperature of the water rises, and the salinity
increases in such a manner as to eliminate the possibility that these
changes are due to local climatic influences, and to render it certain
now that they are due to a great oceanic water circulation affecting at
nearly the same times areas far apart from each other. But there are
perturbations.

The study of these perturbations belongs to the future, but already
there are evidences of regular disturbances in the periodic ebb and flow
of the Atlantic current. In thirty-nine years' records of the temperature
of the atmosphere in the central part of Sweden, and that of the sea off"
the coast of Norway during the cold seasons, a two-yearly period is
clearly apparent. Both in the air and in the sea maximum and
minimum temperatures occur with great regularity every two years.
This is the phenomenon known to meteorologists as that of the "odd
and even years." As a rule, the " even " years of the last thirty have
had more temperate winters than the " odd " ones. That this observa-
tion applies equally to the temperature of the sea indicates that the
cause of the biennial periodicity of the air temperature is a hydro-
gra})hic one. In addition to this smaller perturbation we can obtain
elusive glimpses of other larger disturbances — secular variations due
probably to cosmical causes — in the regularity of the yearly flow of the
European stream. Biological phenomena afford indications of these
larger irregularities. Since the year 859 the a])pearance of winter
herrings in the Skagerak has been recorded, and it is observed* that
the fishery has returned with intervals of, on the whole, 111 years.

Both climatic changes and changes in the abundance of the fisheries
are thus connected with hydrographic phenomena. One of the most
valuable means of research to the meteorologists of the future will be
hydrographic investigation, and for the rational study of the fisheries
this line of research will prove no less useful. Already it is beyond
doubt that hydrographical and biological phenomena are closely related,
and the work of the next few years is likely to furnish further instances
of this connexion.

* Pettersson, Eappts. et Procis-verb. , vol. iii., 190fi, pp. 13-19.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 451

Biological Investigations.

The results of the strictly biological investigations carried out under
the auspices of the International organization are less novel than those
hydrographical results to which we have already referred. Sea fisheries
research, both in Great Britain and on the continent of Europe, has in
the past been largely concentrated on the elucidation of the life
histories of fishes and other edible marine animals. Beginning in 1865
with G. 0. Sars' classical investigation of the spawning of the coil on
the fishing grounds off the Lofoten Islands, this work was developed at
first principally by Mclntosli and the St. Andrews school of zoologists;
and when fisheries investigation received official sanction and support
in this country, it was very actively pursued in Scotland by the
naturalists of the Fishery Board, and afterwards in England by the
Marine Biological Association. AVhen in 1902 the International
Investigations were commenced a very considerable store of knowledge
of this branch of fishery science already existed,* and subsequent work
in the countries participating in these researches has been devoted
to filling up lacuucC in those results and in synthesizing the investiga-
tions by the adoption of methods of research on a larger scale than
was previously possible and by new forms of apparatus.

It is unnecessary to recapitulate here the main features of our know-
ledge of the life histories of northern fishes.f The reader will
remember that the great majority of North European food fishes
reproduce during a limited period of the year — three months or so, some
time betwee-u the end of the year and midsummer — the precise dates
and durations of these breeding seasons depending both on the species
of fish and on the localities under consideration. The exact incidence
of the breeding season is not constant from year to year, but varies,
and one of the main results of the International hydrographic investiga-
tions has been to associate the onset and duration of the breedint;
season with the hydrographic condition of the portion of the sea
considered. Generally speaking, the majority of British food fishes
spawn during the months March to June.

The eggs produced by these fishes are now fairly well known, though,
of course, our knowledge on this point is not quite exhaustive. Most
fish eggs belong to the pelagic type — that is, they are lighter than sea
water of normal constitution and fioat at or near the surface. But the

* This ha3 been admirably summarized by P. P. C. Hoek in No. 3 of the Publications
de Circonstancc, Auf:;u.st, 1903.

t See also Cuuiiin^'haurs Marketable Marine Fishes, 1896 ; Holt's Account of the
Grimsby Tj-awl Fishery dnihUahvil by the Marine Biolo^'ical Association); and Mcintosh
and Masterman's Life Histories of the British Murine Food Fishes, isy?.

452 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

eggs of the herring are of the demersal type, and when spawned by
the parent sink to the sea bottom, where they adhere to whatever
objects with wliich they come into contact. Upon tliis difference
depend differences in the further distribution and development of the
two classes of eggs. The pelagic eggs are drifted anywhere in the
upper layers of the sea, according to the force and direction of the sur-
face drift of the water, whether the latter be due to tidal streams, to
the influence of prevailing or exceptional winds, or to the larger
movements of sea water which we have been considering as hydro-
graphic events. These passive migrations carry pelagic fish eggs from
the regions inhabited by the parent fishes at the spawning seasons into
others where the conditions influencing their further development may
be very different, and it is in respect of this influence upon fish eggs
and their development that hydrographic investigation may be ex-
pected in the near future to be of much service to the fishery
investigators. Demersal eggs, on the other hand, being deposited in
the regions chosen by the parent fishes, and at the bottom of the sea,
where hydrographic changes are less violent, are assured of more
constant conditions for their development. It is probably because of
these facts that the great summer herring fishery of the East British
coast waters is so constant in its appearance and duration ; and to them
is due also the well - marked variations which herring exhibit in
different parts of this extensive area. " llaces " of herring, if such
really exist, are probably due to the fact that the various herring shoals
frequent the same sea areas from year to year, and that their eggs
develop in the regions where deposited.

The development of the eggs of the various species of food fishes, and
the subsequent life history of the larvae, which hatch out after a fort-
night or so of incubation, have been worked out in considerable detail in
the past. The tracing out of the development of the embryo and
larva was a task of no great difficulty, and could easily be carried out at
the marine laboratories, even at the small ones, with no great wealth of
apparatus. All that was necessary was to procure the fertilized eggs of
the species to be investigated. This was usually done by " stripping "
mature fishes, that is, by expressing the ripe eggs and spermatozoa
from the reproductive organs and then keeping the eggs and larvae
in running sea water in small tanks and patiently studying tlie changes
taking place during the developmental period. So we find in the
literature, Englisli, Danish, Norwegian, and German, detailed descrip-
tions of the life history of most edible fishes during the first few weeks
of life. Comparatively little has been added to this literature by
the International investigations of the last four or five years. It is
with regard to the further life history of the fish that most recent

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 453

work has been concerned. After the hatching of the larva from the
egg there is a period of growth of which little is known. Some
weeks after hatching the "metamorphosis" of the larva is effected.
The little fish now takes on the shape of the adult, and gradually
assumes the habits and food of the latter. During the period of
juveuescence the life history must be studied in the sea itself, and the
growth and migrations observed in specimens taken in the most diverse
localities by means of special fishing apparatus. Neither the com-
mercial nets of the fishing fleet nor the older dredges or " townets " of
the naturalists afford any assistance in these investigations. Altogether
new fishing apparatus have had to be devised, and it has been necessary
to carry out researches far out at sea, in regions where fishery work
was, under the older methods, usually quite impracticable.

Such investigations have been carried out by the naturalists of
the Danish, Norwegian, and German sections of the International
organization by means of specially designed fishing apparatus. The
" Scherbrutnetz " was designed by Ehrenbaum and Strodtmann,*
of the Heligoland Biological Station, for the capture of larval fishes.
This instrument is a very large townet with a square opening. The
special feature of the apparatus is the " sheering-board," a large board
attached to the lower edge of the mouth of the net, and inclinable at
any angle ; by means of this contrivance, which acts in the same way
as the otter-board of the commercial otter-trawl, the net can be towed at
any desired depth. The " young-fish trawl " of Tetersenf is a still more
effective instrument, which is constructed on the principle of the large
otter- trawl, and is able to fish at the sea bottom or at any depth from
the surface. The net, being composed of material with a very fine mesh,
is adapted to catch very small fishes.

The invention and use of these two forms of fishing apparatus are so
important for the investigation of the pelagic or young free-swimming
stages of edible fishes that one might almost say that their application
begins a new era in fisheries research. The older surface townet
captured pelagic larval fishes only in very small numbers, and it was
always difficult to use this instrument with much success at the bottom
or at intermediate sea levels. We know now that results obtained by
the use of ordinary townets in the past were totally misleading so far as
affording reliable information as to the distribution and abundance of
young stages of sea fishes. Joh. Schmidt,'): for instance, gives a record of a
haul of the young-fish trawl taken from the Danish investigation steamer
Thor off the coast of Iceland, at a depth of 79 metres (about 40 fathoms),

* Wissensch. Meeresuntersuch. , Hd. i., Abteilumgen Helgoland.

t Skrifler af Kommissionfur Ilavuncrsogelsen, Nr. 1, 190-4.

X Meddelcher Komm. Havundcrsijgelser, Ser. Fiskeri, Bd. i. No. 4, 1905.

NEW SERIES. VOL. VII. No. 5. 2 H

454 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

which ill thirty minutos captured aliout seven thousand speciuiens of
young stages of pelagic and bottom-living fishes, belonging to twenty-
two dillerent species. We are assured that this haul is " far from being
the richest in individuals made by the Thor." No method of investigation
practised in the past afTorded this wealth of material. Not only are
naturalists nowadays in possession of a means of research enabling them
to obtain rich stores of material for the study of the developmental
histories of fishes, but they are also able to form reliable estimates of
the wealth of fish life in the sea at early stages, and to trace with some
probability the migrations of the larva; and young fishes. The first
results of the study of developmental histories of fishes made by the
help of those fishing apparatus are published in the Danish Meddddser.
In the paper already referred to Joh. Schmidt gives the first instalment
of a study of the free-swimming post-larval stciges of the fishes of the
North Atlantic belonging to the genus Gadus. This monograph
includes the cod, coal-fish, whiting, haddock, pollock, and other less
known gadoid fishes, and in it the author attempts, for the first time, a
systematic description of the characters of the post-larval fishes at
dillerent stages. It is well known that the recognition of young fishes
in their very early life is a task of much difficulty, and some con-
siderable degree of uncertainty has always attended the identification of
nearly allied fishes, such as the cod, haddock, and whiting, in the stages
following the metamorphosis, and before the little fish assumes the well-
known characters of the adult. V>y making a systematic study of the
colour markings of the young fishes, which, it should be remembered,
are quite different from those of the adult, Schmidt has been able to
classify the post-larval fishes of the cod family in much the same way as
the adults have been treated. The identification of these young fishes
has therefore been greatly facilitated for future observers. Making use
of material collected also by the young-fish trawl of the Thor, Schmidt*
has also given us by far the most complete accounts of the life histories
of the halibut and torsk (or tusk) in the literature. The description of
the series of stages of the halibut is particularly welcome, since the
development of this fish is more obscure than that of any other of the
fiat-fishes. Again, the early stages of the long rough dab, a fish
relatively common off the east coast of Britain, have been studied by
Petersen, and our knowledge materially advanced, f

But by far the most important contribution to our knowledge of the
early life histories of edible fishes is the discovery by Schmidt and
Petersen! of the spawning place of the European fresh-water eel. The

Meddelelscr Kovnn. llavundcrsog., Bd. i. Fiskeii, Nrs. 3 and 8, 1904-5.
t Meddelelscr Komm. Ilavundersocj., Fiskeri, Bd. i. Kr. 1, 1904.
X Ibid., Fiskeri, Bd. i. Nrs. 5, 6, 1905.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTEKNATIOKAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 455

early development of both the fresh-water eel and the conger-eel has
always been very imperfectly known. It is now well known that the
peculiar flat, ribbon-like, and transparent fishes called " Leptocephali "
are the young stages of the fresh-water eels. Leptocephali are very
rarely found on the coasts of Britain or Northern Europe ; the few finds
that have been made are all recorded in the literature. Nevertheless,
every year in the spring and summer enormous numbers of small flat
eels of varying degrees of transparency are found all along British and
continental coasts. These young eels, or " elvers," are the transformed
Leptocephali returning from the sea into the rivers. When the eel
approaches maturity it descends the rivers to the sea, assuming as it
does so a peculiar coloration, or " bridal dress." In the sea it becomes
mature, spawns, and the larva which develops becomes, at an unknown
time after the hatching of the egg, the Leptocephalus. Before the
latter larva reaches the coasts it undergoes metamorphosis and becomes
the " elver." So much has long been known, but the further questions
— the character of the eggs, their development and hatching, the
development of the larvae, the place and time of spawning, and the
duration of the embryonic and larval periods — all have been profound
mysteries. The Leptocephalus is, in fact, the first stage in the develop-
ment of the eel; that is well known. Of the earlier stages we know
next to nothing. What we do know is due to the investigations of
Grassi and Eaffaele in the Mediterranean, and may be summed up by
saying that the eel spawns in relatively deep and warm water some dis-
tance from the land.

But this lack of knowledge of the spawning habits and development
of the eels (both fresh-water and marine forms) is due, without doubt,
to our hitherto very imperfect methods of investigation. Given the
right form of fishing apparatus and some considerable range in the area
over which this is used, and there is no doubt that all stages of the eel,
from the developing egg to the Leptocephalus, should be found in
abundance. This occurred to Petersen in connexion with the use of
the small- fish trawL " The Leptocephali," he says, " will surely be
found, I thought, if we seek them in the right time, place, and
manner." During a trip to the Faeroe Isles and Iceland in 1904 the
Thor had to pass through warm and deep Atlantic water, and on fishing
at a station* south-west from tlie Faeroe Isles on May 22nd, 1904, a
single Leptocephalus was taken in the young-fish trawl. In 1905
Schmidt again succeeded in finding "great quantities of Lcptoccpliahis
hrevirostris in the depths of the Atlantic"! Considered both as a con-
tribution to the natural history of the eel, and as a fact which is likely

♦ 61° 21' N. ; 19° 59' W.

t Meddelelser Komm. Havundersog., Fiskeri, Bd. i. Nr. 5, 1905, \k 5.

456 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

to be of advantage for the direction of the continental eel fisheries, the
importance of this discovery can hardly be over-estimated. We now
know that the lack of success which has attended the innumerable
attempts to find Leptocephali in shallow in-shore waters, and even in
restricted sea areas, like the Baltic, the Cattegat, the North Sea, or the
Irish Sea, is due to the fact that these larvse do not frequent those
waters, and that the rare captures which are recorded in the literature
are those of individuals the development of which has for some reason
or other been greatly retarded. There is no longer any doubt that the
eel does not spawn in fresh water, but must emigrate to the open sea
before it can reproduce. If it is hindered from making this migra-
tion it will die without spawning. Further, the fish spawns in deep
and relatively warm water in the open Atlantic, north-west and west
from Scotland. To reach this region the parents must pass through the
Baltic if they have been living in some of the great continental rivers,
and most of the North European fresh-water eels must make a very
lengthy spawning migration, in the course of which they traverse the
North Sea, the Irish Channel, or the English Channel before they
attain the conditions necessary for the maturation of the reproductive
organs. It will readily be seen that a complete knowledge of these
migration paths and seasons, such as no doubt will soon be obtained by
following up these observations, must prove of great importance, not
only for the development of more rational methods of fishing, but also
for the elaboration of useful legislation regulating the fishery.

Following up Schmidt's discovery of Leptocephali in the Atlantic,
Johausen has materially added to our knowledge of the life history of
the eel in its " elver " stages. It is well known that the elvers, which
are the metamorpliosed Leptocephali, ascend the rivers from the sea
in immense numbers in the spring of the year. But our knowledge
of the elvers in the sea itself has hitherto been very scanty. Again
the explanation is that they were not looked for in the proper time and
manner. The young metamorphosed eels are pelagic at night, that is,
they swim at some distance from the bottom in intermediate depths.
During the day, on the other hand, they live on the sea bottom. In
the sea the elvers are almost colourless, though they differ greatly from
the leptocephaline stages. A smoky-brown pigment first appears on
the tip of the tail and on the head. As the transformation from the
Leptocephalus to the elver stages proceeds this pigment gradually
invades the rest of the body. At the same time the peculiar ribbon-
like form of the Leptocephalus is lost ; the little fish becomes thicker
from side to side and less deep from back to belly. Curiously enough,
too, it becomes actually shorter from head to tail. The almost colour-
* Mcdd. Komm. JIavtmdersog., Fiskeri, Bd. i. Nr. 6, 1905.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 457

less elvers which have appeared m the sea off the coasts in the early
spring become gradually transformed, and by the middle of summer
they have taken on the form and colour of the adult eel, and have
begun to grow again after the first decrease in length which accom-
panies the larval transformation.

This is hardly the time to say anything about the researches on the
distribution and abundance of the pelagic stages of very young fry
of the marine food fishes. Many observations have been made, and
are actively being prosecuted, by the Danish and Norwegian naturalists
on the staff of the International organization, which have for their
object a complete knowledge of what becomes of the multitude of fry
which are hatched out in our seas during the spawning periods. An
essential part of such investigations is, however, the comparison from
year to year of the records obtained, and we must wait for some time
before conclusions of value have been made. Leaving aside the case
of the herring, we may say that the pelagic fry of almost any marine
food fish do not remain in the place where they are born. Xearly
all fishes shed their eggs into the sea, and these are then drifted about
from place to place at the mercy of the winds, tides, and currents.
Even when the young fishes or larva3 hatch out from the eggs they are
still among the feeblest creatures which exist in the sea, and with little
or no powers of locomotion of their own, they are carried about over
extensive sea areas. What becomes of them during these pelagic
stages ? The larva} are not always present in those parts of the sea
where the parents are numerous and vice versa* Petersen, for instance
notes as remarkable that the young stages of the witch and lemon sole
are abundant in the open sea off the coasts of Denmark, but " do not
at all occur in the veritable Danish waters" inside the Skagen, that
is, in the restricted seas of the Danish islands. Nevertheless, both of
the adult fishes are present in these narrow seas in considerable
numbers, and the witch is the object of a very considerable fishery
in the Cattegat. Again, the same authorf notices that there may be
great differences between the larvte of fishes taken in the open sea and
larvte of the same forms taken in in-shore waters. These differences
apply to the size of the fry and to their coloration. Do these differ-
ences represent the variations between identical fish species taken in
different sea areas? It has long been known that such "races" do
exist. Henicke, for instance, has shown that the herring captured off
different parts of the British and continental coasts present such differ-
ences as, in his opinion, are sufficient to justify the view that distinct
races of herring are met with in different areas. Cunningham and
others have concluded that different races or varieties of plaice exist

• Medd. Komm. ffaviindersog., Fiskeri, Bd. i. Nr. 1, p. 12, 1904. t Ibid.

458 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTEKNATIONAL FISIIEUY INVESTIGATIOXS.

ill llie North Sea and adjacent waters, from the notable differences
in the size at which spawning first occnrs in the fish taken from these
fishing grounds. Garstang has made observations of varieties among
mackerel, and Dannevig and others have also shown tlial distinct races
of cod exist. Are these variable characters of the same species of fishes
inhabiting different seas transmitted to the larvio, and can they be
recognized in these stages ? This is only one of the questions which
a far-reaching investigation of the distribution of the fry of fishes may
be expected to solve in the near future.

The life history of the Plaice.

When the International Fishery Investigations were begun, particular
attention was directed to the detailed study of a few food fishes — the
plaice, cod, and herring. All these are of great economic importance :
the plaice to the North Sea Fisheries of England, Denmark, and
Germany ; the cod to the Norwegians ; and the herring to the Scottish.
We may note at the outset that the problems of the distribution and
migrations of the herring are intimately connected with those of the
hydrography of the sea, and in the correlation of the latter researches with
the statistics of the herring fisheries, the old problem of herring migra-
tion is likely to receive solution. "We are much inclined to believe
that the great summer herring fisliery comes and goes with this annual
ebb and How [that of the Atlantic stream in the North Sea], and much
of our recent hydrographic work, since the date of that with which the
present volume deals, has been directed to the study of this important
subject."*

The problem of the plaice fishery, that is, the investigation of the
life history of that fish with reference to the utility of legislative
restrictions on the fisheries, has, however, been approached in quite
a different way. The question of extreme interest to the English and
continental plaice fishermen is whether or not a size limit would be of
advantage to the industry. It has been proposed over and over again in
this country to render it illegal by statute to land or sell a plaice which
is below a certain size. With respect to the most suitable size limit
very different opinions have been expressed. In official quarters, a
minimum size of 8 inches of length has been favoured. Fishery
investigators and some of those engaged in the fish trades have
advocated higher size limits than 8 inches, and the merits of tliese
various proposals have been very frequently discussed. Both scientific
and economic questions are to be considered in any attempt which may

* D'Ai'oy W. Thoiu]isoii, Fishery and Hydrographical Investigations in the North Sea, etc.,
(cd 2G12), 1905, p. v.

SOME KESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. -ioO

be made to elaborate legislation of this nature. Into the latter
questions we cannot enter here, although it is evident that they are
at least of equal importance to the scientific issues involved. But
at any rate, no one would recommend general discussion of the question
apart from far-reaching and patient investigation of the natural history
of the plaice in the sea at every stage of its life. In the investigation
of the latter question, so far as it has been carried out, three main lines
have been followed by those engaged in the International Fishery
Investigations: (1) the distribution of the plaice on the various fishing
grounds, with respect to the size and age of the fish present from month
to month throughout the year ; (2) the migrations of the fishes ; and
(3) the food of the plaice. Other lines of investigation have been
followed, but in the main attention has been focussed on those indicated
above. The distribution has been studied by means of fishing experi-
ments, that is, numerous hauls with trawl and other nets made by the
exploring steamers on tlie fishing grounds frequented by the commercial
vessels, and statistically by means of a study of the results of the
fishery by the fishing fleets themselves and by the examination of
samples of fish caught by the trawlers and examined in detail after-
wards. The fishery experiments have been made by the various
scientific vessels and naturalists of the national staffs, while the
statistical work has been mainly carried out by the Bureau of the
International Council and by the English Board of Agriculture and
Fisheries.

Now the method of fishing experiments is, of course, of limited
application, and conclusions derived from such results must be
cautiously made. Like all scientific methods which depend on the
examination of "samples," it is open to the objection that the sample
may not really represent the general conditions. Such objections, for
instance, would apply to thermometric or barometric charts representing
the meteorological conditions of an extensive land and sea area at
a given time. That is, the readings of the instruments, while true for
the immediate area, might differ notably from those which would be
obtained in an adjacent area where no readings had been made. The
results obtained by fishing with a trawl net on twelve days in the year
could not be compared, with any degree of certainty, with the results
obtained by fishing with the same trawl on the twelve corres})oiuling
days of the following year in the same place. That is to say, so many
accidental circumstances might iuQuence the nature and amount of the
catches made Ity the net that it would l)e risky to conclude that fisli
were more or less numerous at the given place in one year than in
the other. But though sucli limitations must be imposed on the useful-
ness of fishery experiments, it is nevertheless the case that these are

460 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

essential if we wish to understand ihe conditions of the sea fisheries.
If we wish to know, for instance, whether small plaice are more
ahundant near the shore than in the ofluig, or whether they are more
abundant in shallow than in deep water, or whether the plaice near the
shore are larger or smaller than those off-shore, or what is the pre-
dominant kind of fish present from time to time on any part of the
sea bottom ; in all these, and in many other cases, it is only by
making experiments with nets of different forms that we can obtain the
desired information.

Such fishery experiments, made chiefly by means of the large com-
mercial otter-trawl net, have been carried out by both the British and
continental exploring vessels. It would be unprofitable at the present
time to attempt to make exliaustive analyses of the results obtained.
These are still incomplete — indeed, the results of the Scottish experi-
ments are not yet published. It is when the results of the five years'
experiments are collected that they can most usefully be discussed.
But while this is the case, some results of interest are already apparent.
The English fishery experiments show that small plaice are much more
abundant in the shallow waters near the land than in the deeper
w'aters off-shore. Plaice of less than 8 inches in total length were, as a
rule, restricted to a strip of sea lying between the laud and the
10-fathom line. There they were relatively very abundant. On the
shallow grounds off the coasts of Holland they were much more
abundant than in corresponding depths of sea near the English coasts.
On the " Eastern Grounds," that is, the shallow-water area off the
islands of the Zuider-Zee, off Heligoland and the coast of Denmark,
some distance from the land, the English steamer Huxley took average
catches of from 180 to 2500 plaice of this size per hour of trawling.* On
the fishing grounds of the same depths off the English coasts the Huxley
never took more than 65 plaice per hour. Again, medium-sized
plaice 10-12 inches long " were altogether absent on many of the
English in-shore grounds " ; but on the fishing grounds well off the
land, in fact, over the greater part of the southern part of the North
Sea, south of latitude 53° 30', in what may be called the Flemish
Bight, these plaice formed an extensive portion of the catch. A legal
size limit, if this should be adopted on an international scale, could not
be greater than 12 inches if trawling for plaice were to continue on
these grounds. Up to 12 inches in length the plaice is very generally
an immature fish, that is, it has not yet produced spawn. The pre-
dominant plaice population of the southern part of the North Sea is
therefore an immature one.

Mature plaice in the North Sea are very generally fishes of over

* Garstang, Fishery and Hydrographical Invatigations, etc. (cd. 2670), 1905, p. 102.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 461

14 inches in total length. This is tlie average size, for the male fish
when they first become sexually mature are smaller (one inch or more)
than the females. Such fish spawn in the spring. It was formerly
believed that during the spawning season plaice became crowded
together on certain " spawning grounds." The trawling experiments
of the Huxlci/ lent little support to this belief, though there are certain
indications that spawning migrations do occur. Such mature fish are
not distributed everywhere over the fishing grounds. The ITuxley found
that they did not occur, or only very exceptionally, in the shallow
waters within the 10-fathom line. On tlie other hand, they were
relatively abundant on the Dogger Bank, and here and there in the
deeper parts of the North Sea well off the shore.

All fishery experiments made by the International naturalists agree
in this respect, that on the eastern side of the North Sea, off the coasts
of Holland and Denmark, in what has been called the Heligoland
Bight, we have a predominant small plaice population. There is further
agreement as to a general law of the distribution of this fish : that the
deeper the water the larger the fish. This, of course, only applies to
fishing grounds where the water is less than 50 fathoms in depth. It is
safe to say that plaice are absent altogether, or at least very scarce, on
sea bottoms of this depth. Indeed, outside the 20-fathom line the fish
is very scarce. It is most abundant near the shore, and becomes less
abundant as the water gets deeper. The general law that the plaice in-
creases in size as the water becomes deeper is nowhere stated so clearly as
by Eedeke.* This naturalist has analysed the results of the fishing ex-
periments of the Dutch exploring steamer Wodan, made off' the coast of
Holland from the Hook to the Zuider-Zee. The distribution of the plaice
of different sizes so constantly depends on the depth that Eedeke has
drawn lines on the chart which lie terms " isomegalins." Each
isomegalin is a line drawn approximately parallel to the coast. The
isomegalin I bounds a narrow strip of sea in which only plaice of one
to two years in age, and less than 10 centimetres (4 inches) in length,
are to be found. Outside this, and parallel to it, is the isomegalin II,
between which and the line I are only plaice of over two and less than
three years of age, and from 10 to 15 centimetres (4 to six inches) in
length. Outside isomegalin II is the line III, which again forms the
outer limit of plaice of from three to four years of age and from 6 to 8
inches in length. The general law of distribution is stated by Bedeke
in these words: "Tlic distribution of the plaice thus appears to be a
function of its size, and is so uniform that one can almost say the
plaice are so many centimetres long when tlie depth in which they arc
taken is so many metres."

* liappts. d Vroc-vcrh, vol. iii., i;t05. Distrilmtion of tlip plaice on tlic Dutch coast.-

462 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

Such a " law," however it may apply to the conditions off the coast
of Holland, is much too definite to apply to other localities. It is
altogether incorrect when applied to some areas off the coasts of
Britain. It is too often forgotten that all these statements of distribu-
tion are made with respect to areas where a long-continued fishery for
plaice has been carried on, and where the influence of man as fisherman
is continually exerted in reducing the numbers of large plaice. Large
fish are more easy to catch, and must necessarily be fewer than smaller
fishes ; again, the fisliery is, roughly speaking, most intense near the
land, and decreases in intensity as we proceed further out to sea. Tliis in-
fluence of fishing must operate in bringing about, to some extent at least,
the distribution of plaice with size varying according to the depth of the
sea. It is far otherwise in the few regions which are natural " plaice
grounds," and where the law prohibits trawling. There, instead of
a distribution such as is indicated above, we may find that plaice of all
sizes and ages are living together on the same restricted portion of sea
bottom.

The determination of the age of a plaice has been arrived at by
means of two methods. One is that of Petersen, and depends on the
analysis of an extensive catch of plaice according to the sizes of the fish.
If, say, some thousands of plaice captured on the same (restricted)
fishing ground be individually measured, it will be seen that there are
far more fishes of certain sizes than those of the intermediate sizes.
Such a method of estimating the ages of tlie fishes forming a single
catch cannot be easily understood without an example, and the diagram*
(Fig. 6), which is based on a catch made by the Marine Biological
Association off Mablethorpe, will make the reasoning clear. The figures
on the vertical line represent the numbers of plaice taken, and those on
the horizontal line represent the sizes of the fish. At the point of the
curve marked 0 a line drawn horizontally shows that about 360 plaice
were captured, which had an average length of about 5| centimetres
(a little over 2 inches) ; at the point I about 85 plaice were taken with
an average length of 10 centimetres (4 inches); then at the point II
60 plaice were captured with an average length of 15 centimetres
(6 inches). That is to say, in this catch three predominant sizes of
plaice were present, 2 inches, 4 inches, and 6 inches. In fact we have
three groups or " schools " of fish, each of which resulted from a
different year's spawning. The Group 0 consists of fish less than one
year of age, Group I of fishes over one but less than two, and Group II
of plaice over two but less than three years of age.

The other method of determining age is that of otolith examination.

* Wallace, Fishery and llydrographical Investigations, etc., Southern Area (cd. 2670),
1905, I). 208, tig. 4.

SOME KESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 463

The otoliths are the hard, calcareous stones which are found in the ears
of all animals, but which are unusually large in bony fishes. The method
was elaborated a number of years ago. It depends on the fact that the
growth of the ear-stone or otolith is not regular, but varies from season
to season. So also with the bones of the fish, as for instance the
vertebraj. If the otolith be examined, even with the naked eye, it will
be seen to be built up of concentric layers. Every year a new layer is
added to those already laid down, and by counting the number of
concentric rings in tlie otolith, or vertebra, the number of years of age
of the fish can be determined. Up to the fifth year of life both

N' OF Plaice
360

520

260

240

200

I 2 A 4 S 6 7 S 9 10 II 12 13 14 IS 16 )7 Id 19 20 21 22 23 Cm

Fig. 6.

methods are reliable, but after this period the results are somewhat
uncertain. By the application of these two methods, particularly the
first, results have been obtained in all the countries participating in the
International Investigations, and the plaice of diflerent localities are
now being investigated, not only with respect to their abundance
according to the deptli of w^ater, but also with regard to size and age.

A third method of age determination is a direct one, and depends on
the marking and liberation of a plaice, and its subsequent recapture.
This brings us to the consideration of the fish-marking experiments
which have now been carried out on a very extensive scale in Sweden,
Denmark, Germany, Holland, and England. This method of investiga-
tion is, of course, an old one, and was practised in Scotland by the

464 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

Fishery Board, and in America by the Fish Commission, many years
ago. It is only since the inception of the International Investigations,
however, that it has been carried out on a scale adequate to the
furnishing of reliable and useful results.

Various methods of marking the fish (usually plaice), so as to identify
it afterwards, have been practised. In Petersen's method (the one now
mostly adopted), a stout silver wire is pushed through the body of the
fish just underneath the dorsal fin. One end of this wire passes
through a bone button and is looped ; the button is on the lower side of
the fish. The other end passes through a hole in a brass disk and is
also looped ; the brass disk is on the upper side of the fish and bears a
number. Experience has shown that this label can be attached to the
plaice in the manner described without permanent damage, and appar-
ently without permanent discomfort to the fish. The living fish, being
measured and marked, is then put back into the sea, the size and place
of liberation being recorded. Most careful arrangements have to be
made for the return of marked fishes recaptured by the fishermen, and
rewards are paid for these. In Great Britain the reward varies from
Is. 6d. to 2s. Obviously success depends on the return of marked fishes
recaptured by the fishing vessels, and while the proportion returned is
most gratifying, it is still the case that many recaptured marked fishes
must escape recognition and return. The first published summary of
the results of all the plaice-marking experiments carried on by the
various national staffs is given below.

No

. of plaice mai

rked

No.

of plaice re-

up

to 31st December,

covered u

p to

1903.

30th June,

1904.

Percentage,

Sweden

. 1178

101

8%

Denmark

. 1220

387

• 29 %

Germany

. 1919

157

B%

Holland

. 459

12

3%

England

. 1463

286

. 17%

Total

. 6239

943

. 14%

The " percentage " is the proportion of marked fish recovered within
twelve months after the date of liberation.

Of course, these returns are very incomplete. A large number of
fishes have been marked and subsequently recovered since the end of
1903, but at the present time the figures are not easily available, and
the results have not been collated. The above statement applies to the
fish-marking experiments carried on by the naturalists attached to the
staff of the International organization. But in addition to these
experiments, a large number of plaice and other fishes have been

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 465

marked and liberated (according to the International methods) by the
Irish Fishery Branch of the Board of Agriculture and Technical In-
struction, and by the Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries Committee,
both experiments being carried out chiefly in the Irish Sea.

The plaice-marking experiments were designed to give information on
the following subjects : —

1. The migrations of the fishes.

2. The rate of growth of plaice in different localities.

3. The intensity of fishing.

An obvious objection has frequently been made to the validity of
results deduced from such experiments, and is this : the operation of
marking injures the fish, and tlie continuous attachment of a label
or mark to the body reduces to some extent its vitality, so that it is
probable that the results, whether migrations or rate of growth,
obtained from the marked fishes do not represent those changes under-
gone by unmarked fislies. The force of the conclusions depends on the
assumption that a marked fish behaves normally, and this is questioned.
The objection, which is an a priori one, probably has some force, but the
general opinion of those who have had experience of fish-marking
experiments is that the operation, if carried out carefully, has little or
no influence on the health or habits of the fishes dealt with.

The migrations of the marked plaice are naturally the most interest-
ing of the results obtained from these experiments. In stating the
more prominent facts observed, one cannot, however, be too cautious.
Only the results of one complete year's experiments have so far been
tabulated and discussed, and it is most essential that these should be
confirmed by the further experiments that have already been made. A
plaice is an animal possessed both of volition and intelligence, and its
movements in the sea must be expected to be at times of an entirely
capricious nature. It is only by the study of results of extensive and
repeated experiments that one can hope to eliminate such accidental or
capricious migration results, and obtain an expression of the average
movements of large numbers of fishes. Bearing this in mind, we may
state the results at present apparent. Young plaice — that is, fishes up
to 8 inches in length — do not migrate to any marked extent. These
fish remain on the shallow-water areas immediately adjacent to the
places where the first year of their life has been spent. Any one who
observes attentively the shallow pools which have been left by the
receding ebb tide on almost any of the extensive sandy flats on the
coasts of England will be able to see numbers of small plaice and other
flat-fishes there during the months of June or July. At that time these
little fishes have just recently completed their metamorphosis from the

46G SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

larviil to the post-larval stages, and arc little larger than one's thumb-
nail. As they grow they gradually move further out into deeper water,
but for this first year of their life and the next one they do not travel
very far from the shore on which they may first be found. After they
have entered on the third year of life, however, their more lengthy
migrations begin. These are iniluenced to a very great extent by the
nature of the sea area in which they find themselves. Thus the results
obtained by the Danish naturalists* show that the plaice marked and
liberated off the coast of JJenmark travelled for the most part along
the shallow water adjacent to the coast (Chart X) or, when liberated,
migrated inwards toward the shore. But other fishes travelled out-
wards into deep water. There is little doubt that these movements
depend to some extent on the season. Off the Danish North Sea coast
there is a distinct tendency for plaice to move from deep water towards
the shore during April, May, and June, but later in the summer they
appear to move off-shore again into deeper water and to spread over a
somewhat wide area.

In the case of the English experiments carried out in the southern
part of the North Sea, the change of the migration path according to
the season is also displayed. In the charts giving synoptic representa-
tions of the experimentsf this is well shown. South of latitude
53° 30' in the North Sea, it may be said that plaice for the most part
travel to the south during the winter and to the north during the
summer. This applies to the larger fishes dealt with. The smaller
fishes hardly travel at all. Sometimes, in the case of the larger fishes,
the distance travelled is very considerable. Thus one plaice of 13
inches in length, liberated in December, 1903, in tlie middle of the
North Sea, nearly in the latitude of Grimsby, was found about three
months later in the English Channel, having travelled in the interval a
minimum distance of 175 miles. Other instances are recorded of lona
migrations made by marked plaice, and generally it may be said tliat
the larger fishes travel further and more rapidly than the smaller ones,
and in addition frequent deeper water. I'ut we meet with puzzling
exceptions to this general rule. Thus a medium-sized plaice liberated
by the Lancashire naturalists in the preserved waters of the south coast
of Scotland was found in the same place nearly two years afterwards,
having in the interval probably not left the bay in which it was first
found.

To deduce the rate of growth from marking experiments is a simple
matter. The fish being marked and measured is again measured when

* See charts X-XII, Meddelelsen Komm. Tfavundersog. , Fiskeri, Bd. i. Nr. 2, 1905.
t Garstaiig and Borley, Fishery aiid Hydrographical Invcsligalions in the North Sea, etc.,
Southern Area (cd. 2670), 1905.

SOME KESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 407

recaptured, and the difference in length is the growth during the
interval. As might be expected, there are considerable diflerences in
the average results so obtained. It now appears, from a discussion of
these experiments and others, that no average growth rate can be laid
down which applies to all plaice in the British and continental fishery
area. Some of these differences are summarized by Garstang.* On the
Horn lieef grounds, off the coast of Denmark, the greatest rate of
growth indicated by plaice in the course of a single year was about
5 centimetres (about 2 inches). On the other hand, certain plaice
caught on these grounds, and on the east coast of England, and then
transplanted to the Dogger Bank, showed a much greater increase in
length. In the case of some of these plaice, the growth in one year
was as much as 14 centimetres (nearly 5 inches). Analogous difl'erences
in the rate at which plaice grow are met with in very many of the
experiments made.

The intensity of fishing on any fishing ground can be deduced from
these marking experiments. If we capture (say) 1000 fishes and
mark and liberate them on the ground from which they were taken,
then the proportion of these 1000 fishes which are recaptured within
one year from the date at which they were liberated is an indica-
tion of the degree to which this ground has been exploited by the
fishermen in the course of the year. For the 1000 marked fishes
may reasonably be assumed to have spread uniformly over the
fishing ground in question ; and if the fishermen capture (say) 250 of
them during the year, there seems no escape from the conclusion that
they have also captured 25 per cent of all the plaice, of the same range
of sizes as the marked fishes, which were originally present on the
ground. Of course, such deductions must be made very cautiously and
must depend on the consideration of fairly large numbers of fishes.
But, remembering this, it is certain that in this method we have a fairly
satisfactory means of ascertaining how far fishermen reduce tlie fish
population of a fishing ground, in the course of their ordinary operations.
There is only one other way of obtaining this information : by a con-
sideration of the number of eggs of the species of fish considered which
are produced on the ground during the spawning season, and this
method is very unreliable. Nevertheless, such an estimate, made by
A^ictor Hensen in the case of the West Baltic cod and plaice fisheries in
1895,f agrees very well with the average results of the fish-marking
experiments. Naturally the intensity of fishing on the various grounds
varies very greatly. + On the fishing grounds of the North Sea, Skagerak,

* Eappis. et Proc.-verb., vol. iii., 1905, app. H, p. 14.

t See Jenkins, Trans. Liverpool Biol. Sue, vol. xv. p. 312, 1901.

X See Garstang, Rajypts. et Proc.-verb., vol. iii. app. H, p. 10, 1905.

468 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

and Cuttcgat it varies from 4 to 56 per cent. We may reasonably
conclude, eliminating exceptional circumstances, that the intensity of
plaice fishing on the North Sea fishing grounds varies from 10 to 25
per cent. That is to say, that man, for his own use, removes annually
from the sea from one-tenth to one-quarter of all the marketable plaice
which are annually produced by the natural reproduction and growth
of the species.

How significant these results are from the point of view of the regula-
tion of the plaice fishery and its further exploitation and improvement
will easily be seen. The question now arises how far this process of ex-
ploitation of the (say) plaice population of our seas can go on without
progressive impoverishment of the fishing grounds. There must be some
limit up to which these fishing grounds can be depleted without under-
going injury; that is, without making them less productive in the future.
To discover this limit is the aim of this portion of fishery investigation,
and it then remains for the Governments concerned so to legislate that
it should not be exceeded. In no way can this knowledge of the
extent to which the resources of the sea can be strained be attained
than by scientific investigation on the lines indicated and by the
careful consideration of reliable commercial statistics. When the Inter-
national Investigations are completed and thoroughly discussed we
may hope for much more knowledge of the conditions of this problem
than we at present possess.

Then in the result that plaice are so very variable in growth we have
a factor of no less significance for the legislators.

When we find that the growth rate of plaice on a fishing ground
is small, we usually find that the number of small plaice present on
that ground is unusually large. There is, in fact, this relation between
abundance of plaice and their size, that the more numerous the fish are
on a certain ground the more slowly they grow. It is a question of
the available amount of food for the fishes that we have to consider.
Where the number of mouths is small there is all the more food for
them and the fishes grow quickly ; on the other hand, where the
population is large and the stock of food not proportionately large, the
fishes are less well nourished and they grow slowly. How significant
this question is when the protection of immature plaice (and other
fishes) is being considered is very apparent. In the past the protection
of immature fishes per sc has been considered as of undoubted value
for the fisheries.* Now we must remember that to " protect " by
legislative restrictions the immature fishes of particular fishing grounds

* In sjiite of tlie declared opinion of Huxley, who deprecated such legislation if
incautiously embarked upon (Li/e and Letters of Thomas Henry Huxley, vol. ii. p. 234,
1900).

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 469

may be positively detrimental to the industry generally. The lesson
that such investigations of crowded fishing grounds, with large numbers
of small plaice growing slowly, teach is the necessity for trans-
plantation. Long ago Petersen pointed this out in the case of the
Limfjord plaice fisheries, and the International Investigations point
this advice more clearly. Garstang, in a remarkable series of experi-
ments carried on on tlie effect of transplanting plaice from overcrowded
to less frequented grounds, has shown how useful such measures might
conceivably be.* It was observed, as we have seen, that plaice on the
" small-fish (irounds " off the coast of Denmark or off the east coast
of England grew slowly in comparison with plaice on the more open
and less crowded grounds on the Dogger Bank. A number of plaice
were therefore captured on these grounds and taken across to the
Dogger, where they were marked and liberated. The growth rates of
the fishes on the latter locality could then be compared with the same
growth rates on the localities from which the fish were originally taken,
and which had been determined by other experiments. About 40 per
cent of tlie fishes transplanted to the Dogger were subsequently re-
captured, and these showed a remarkably higher rate of growth than
obtained on their original localities. Whereas on the Horn Eeef
grounds — a good example of a crowded plaice ground — the fish increased
in length about If inch in the course of a year, tlic same fishes on
the Dogger added about 5 inches to their length in the same period.

Whether such transplantation operations could be carried out on
a really large scale, and would be productive of such results as would
ijistify the expenditure of public money on this work, is a question
which is discussed at some length by Mr. Garstang. The practical
difficulties attending such work are of course very great, and one can
see that considerable organization of methods would be required.
Conspicuous commercial success has attended similar operations carried
out by the Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries Committee ;f but the
practical details of the transplanting operations, which in this case
concerned mussels, were of course much more easily dealt with.

The life histori/ of the Cod.'l

With respect to the natural history of the cod, we find that the
investigations are still very incomplete, A very considerable amount
of material for the study of the life history of this fish has been
collected by the Norwegian, Danish, and English research vessels, but

* Garstang, Fishery and Hydrographical Invcsticjations in the North Sea, etc. , Southern
Area, p. 4.'), 1905.

t See Scott and Baxter, liejwrt Lancashire Sea Fisheries Laboratory for 1905.
X Iljort and Petersen, Rapjds. d Proc.-verb., vol. iii. 1905, app. G.

NEW SEKIES. VOL. VII, NO, 5. 2 I

470 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

we are still far from knowing enough to enable us to follow out the
habits and wanderings of this important food fish. One may con-
fidently expect, however, that the result of the International Investiga-
tions will be to make clear the principal features in the life liistory
of this fish. The following account is based on the work so far
published : —

The cod has not the same importance for the fisheries of Britain as
for those of Norway. Over the whole North Sea the fish occurs and
is caught, but it only forms a part of the general catches of the fisliery
fleets. In Norway, however, it is the fishery, and the cod has for the
fisheries naturalists of that country a degree of importance which has
justified considerable research. The great cod fishery in Norway is that
which is followed in the spring of the year on the coastal banks from
Lofoten to Tromso. The line-fishery there for spawning cod, the
" Skrei " fishery, sometimes obtains great dimensions. In the spring
of the year the adult fish frequent the coastal banks in great shoals.
They are found almost exclusively on these grounds. At this time they
are spawning, and it is when the fish are most numerous that the
pelagic eggs at the surface of the sea are also present in greatest
abundance. Tiie Norwegian research vessel, for instance, took as many
as 5800 cod on 17,800 hooks in one day, and during the entire spawning
season of the same year about one and a half million of cod were
caught by the entire fishing lleet. Experimental fishing operations
were carried on over a wide area, but the fish were restricted to a
comparatively small ground. On the Lofoten fishing grounds the
Norwegian naturalists found that the characteristic spawning size
of the fish was about 28 inches. In the North Sea the cod spawns
when about the same size. On the other hand, very different conditions
obtain in the Cattegat. Petersen found considerable numbers of cod
spawning there when no larger than about 12 inches.

On most cod grounds investigated the early part of the year to the
spring is the period when spawning takes place. In the Lofoten fisheries
the spring is the spawning season, and the same is the case in the North
Sea. In the Cattegat, spawning takes place earlier in the year. In the
Irish Sea cod spawn in the spring. But a remarkable exception to this
general behaviour of the cod was first demonstrated by Fulton,* who
found when fishing from the Scottish International research steamer
GoldsecJcer that cod might spawn in the North Sea in the autumn. In
August of 1903 both fertilized and developing cod eggs were found in
the townets, and ripe and mature cod were taken in the trawl. The
discovery was quite novel. Hitherto an autumn spawning was only
known in the case of herring, and the well-known spring and autumn
* Publications de Circonstance, No. 8, 1904.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 471

or winter and summer herring spawning has been explained by
assuming the existence of two " races " of fish, one spawning in the
spring and the other in the autumn. Whether or not such is also the
case with the cod must be left for future investigation.

On the Lofoten cod fishing grounds, as in the North Sea, the cod
frequents the coastal shallow water when about to spawn. The striking
figures given by Hjort in the paper quoted show that the eggs were present
in extraordinary abundance on the surface of the sea over these banks.
In the waters of the channels between the banks much smaller numbers
of eggs were taken out at sea, and generally over the surface of the open
Norwegian sea the cod eggs were most scanty, or altogether absent. Just
where the spawning fish were present on the bottom, there the resulting
eggs were found. The eggs were very slowly distributed over the sea
area, so slowly that in the meantime incubation had proceeded and
resulted in the hatching of the pelagic fry. Many fishery experiments
were made by the Norwegians to determine the range of distribution
of the cod fry of different stages and at different seasons, and these
results are very interesting. Hjort's Fig, 6 in the paper referred to
shows this in a striking manner. The area over which the eggs were

O CO

distributed extended but little out to sea from the banks. Outside this
again, but a little later in the year (June and July), were to be found
the young cod, at this period up to about 1 inch in length. Then in
August to September the area over which the fry was distributed had
greatly increased. Young cod up to about 3| inches in length were
found in the Norwegian sea as far from land as 120 nautical miles.
During the interval between spawning in March and April and
September, the cod fry had slowly drifted off-shore and to the north.
All this time they were pelagic in habit — that is, they were found near
the surface of the sea — but when attaining this length they began to seek
the bottom. This habit differs greatly from that of the young cod in
the North Sea. There the pelagic mode of existence is abandoned, and
the little fish seek the bottom when little over 1 inch in length.

Hydrograpiiic conditions in the sea are most probably the causes of
these differences in the habits of the cod. The dispersal of the eggs
and young fishes is due to surface-drifts and currents. The assumption
of tlie bottom-living habit of the young cod is no doubt also dependent
on the temperature, among other conditions. Thus over the greater
part of the northern North Sea area young cod are hardly ever found
at the sea bottom. There a bottom temperature of G"-?" 0. holds good
all the year round. With regard to the distribution of the cod in
its first year of life, a great amount of material has been collected
by the International exploring steamers, and when this is fully worked
out we may expect to possess a very complete knowledge of the manner

472 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

in which hydrofrraphic conditions inlluencc the distribution of the fish
over the North European area.

Statistical Investigations.

If a knovvledcre of the life histories of the edible fishes is essential
for the proper control of the sea-fishing industry, an exhaustive know-
ledge of the statistics of the fisheries is no less indispensable. Fishery
authorities, recognizing the value of statistical knowledge, have almost
invariably created organizations for obtaining this information, and one
may say that the success of these has been proportional to the experi-
ence of the authority. Thus in Scotland, where a strong fishery
board has now existed for nearly a century, a system of collecting
fishery statistics has slowly been evolved and is probably the most
perfect in existence. In England, on the other hand, where the fishery
authorities are of much more recent origin, statistical knowledge of the
industry is still very imperfect. IJy the statistics of the fisheries has
usually been understood a knowledge of the quantities and values of the
marketable fishes sent to the public markets from month to month
throughout the year ; with also a knowledge of the numbers of fisher-
men and of the fishing vessels belonging to various classes. Such is the
statistical information relating to the sea-fishing industry which is
published in the official documents of the authorities. As the industry
has developed and the need for legislation become apparent, it has
gradually become evident that such information is far from being
adequate.

Official fishery statistics have in fact been based almost entirely on the
material landed on our shores, without regard to the places and methods
where, and by means of which, this material was obtained, and it is very
evident that such information affords only an imperfect view of the
operations of the fishing vessels. An exhaustive system of statistical
information would inform us where the fishing vessels had been fishing
from day to day throughout the year; what methods they had em-
ployed ; what proportion of the time of their voyages had been spent
on actual fishing operations ; what kinds and quantities of fisli tliey had
caught, and on what particular fishing grounds these had been captured.
Then we ought also to possess exhaustive knowledge of the iKrsonncl of
the industry, as well as that of the kinds, tonnage, value, etc., of the
vessels employed. Such statistics of the fishing industry have not,
so far, been furnished by any fishery authority. But even if we did
possess them, they would be inadequate for a proper understanding
of the conditions of the industry. The figures relating to the quantities
of fish captured and landed would be based on the working of certain

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTEllNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 473

kinds of fishing apparatus — trawls, lines, drift nets, etc. These are
designed to capture only certain kinds and sizes of fishes, and it is
these that would be represented in the returns. What the trawl, for
instance, captured that was not utilized would not be represented
in the statistics. Then the condition of the fishes, as regards spawning
or characteristic food, for instance, would not appear. We must re-
member also that commercial fishing apparatus would not give us any
knowledge of the fish population of the sea in general. The capture of
anything whatever, except those animals which are to be placed on the
market, is not desired, and the fishing nets are constructed with this
object. To know the condition of the fishing grounds, we must employ
other methods in addition to the study of the commercial products of
fi.shery. That is to say, exploring vessels equipped with other fishing
apparatus than those used by the fishing fieets must be employed, and
the statistics obtained by these vessels should supplement the commercial
figures.

Here we trench on the purely scientific investigations of the fisheries,
and, indeed, there is no real dividing line between these two depart-
ments of research. They nmst be followed in conjunction, the one
supplementing the other. When the International Investigations were
devised this was recognized, and the synthesis of both statistical and
purely scientific researches, the two being controlled by the same
authority and carried out by the same organization, was elaborated.
A large portion of the results of the investigation published so far
consists therefore of statistical studies and discussions,

A very good example of the scientific study of fishery statistics is
furnished by Henking's paper* dealing with the statistical material of
the Deutschen See-Fischerei-Verein. The latter body is a private fishery
research society, which, however, enjoys imperial recognition and patron-
age, and a considerable financial support from German state funds.
In the course of the years 1902-5, the See-Fischerei-Verein organized a
system of collecting statistics from German steam fishing vessels. Not
only does the information given to the society contain the quantities
and kinds of fish caught, but it also gives the regions of the North Sea
exploited by these vessels. In the year 1904 this system of statistical
collection had been completed, so that the See-Fischerei-Verein now
obtains the results of the fishing operations of the entire fieet of
German fishing steamers.

Henking divides the North Sea into two areas: (1) the northern
North Sea area, which comprises the Great Fisher Bank, the Long
Forties, and the portion of the North Sea plateau which lies to the

* llappis. et Proc.-vcrb., vol. iv., 1905, upp. F. See alao Bdheiligung Deutschlanda an
den Internationalen Untersuchungen, lid. i.

474 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

north of the grounds mentioned, as far to the west as Scotland ; and
(2) the southern North Sea area, which comprises the banks in the
German Bight. Then we have in addition (3) the region of the
Skagerak. The catches of the steamers are expressed as average
numbers of pounds of fish caught per steamer per day. These average
catches are studied from month to month. Curves are also given by
Henking which show clearly how the fishing varies from month to
month throughout the year. The result of such analyses of the catches
is the defining of " Fishery Periods," which are periods of time during
which some particular fish is abundant on a certain ground. Such fishery
periods are of course familiar things, and one need not give as instances
more than the well-known herring fishery periods of the east coast of
Britain or the cod fishery periods of the Norwegian Lofoten Banks.
A fishery period is caused by the immigration of great numbers of
fishes into relatively restricted areas. Then begins the commercial
fishery, which ends with the emigration of the fishes from the fishing
ground in question. When the regular variations in the amount of
fishes brought from the (known) fishing grounds are studied from month
to month, it is seen that the existence of such fishery periods applies to
almost every kind of edible fish studied. These fiuctuations in the
abundance of fish on the different grounds from time to time through-
out the year are due to real migrations of the fishes; either to their
migration to different fishing grounds or to their dispersal through the
upper layers of the sea, where they are without the reach of the trawl.
" In view of the considerable material which forms the basis of our
review, it can hardly be considered that the fiuctuations in the curve of
the catches is referable to the captains of the boats wishing to
avoid the capture of certain species at certain periods of the year ; there
remains no other possibility, therefore, than that the number of fish in
front of the trawl has actually varied."*

Into Henking's details of the migrations of food fishes in the North
Sea we cannot of course enter, and the reader is referred to the charts of
results. These curves when plotted for different regions of the North
Sea and Skagerak show that extensive movements of fishes go on.
The hake, for instance, is such a migratory fish. For the first three or
four months it is hardly at all taken in the North Sea or Skagerak.
Then it appears " in ever-increasing numbers, perhaps with the inflow
of Atlantic water." The shoals spread over the northern North Sea
and appear in dense masses in the Skagerak in June. .In that month
the fish is relatively scarce in the southern North Sea. Then later in
the year, August to September, when the fish has become less abundant
in the Skagerak, it increases in abundance in the northern North Sea

* Henking, loc. cit., p. 18.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 475

area, indicating the emigration southwards of the shoals previously
present in the Skagerak.

Such a mass of statistical data provides only a " representative
sample " of the fishing carried on over the region investigated by
Henking. Even though the study professes to deal with the catches
made by all the German fishing steamers, it must be remembered that
these form only a portion of the whole fishing fleet exploiting this
area. Obviously such a method of studying the operations and results
of the fishing vessels can be wholly satisfactory only when all the
vessels, steam trawlers, liners, and smacks, can be made to furnish
returns of their catches, stating the quantities and kinds of fishes
caught, the areas of capture, and the duration of the fishing. If we
could obtain this information, and have it worked up under the direc-
tion of an International Fishery Board, we should then be in possession
of knowledge of incalculable value for the regulation of the industry.

But a scheme of statistical collection of such nature and magnitude
is apparently Utopian only, when we consider the present organization
and resources of official fishery authorities. The next best method is
that which has been followed by some of the organizations in con-
nexion with the International Fisheries Council. Since it is impossible
to obtain figures representing the fishing results of all the North
European vessels, we have to be content with results which represent
the fishing of large and important fleets having their head-quarters at
various fishing centres. If a large number of vessels which fish over a
wide area can be induced to furnish the results of their fishing, then we
possess a series of data which may be taken to represent the fishing
carried on by all the fleets. The larger the number of vessels supply-
ing returns, the more reliable, of course, are the conclusions made.
Such is the method of studying the fluctuations of the fisheries on the
more important fishing grounds which was first suggested by Fulton in
his well-known paper in the Eeport of the Scottish Fishery Board
for 1901 ; and which has been adopted by Eedeke for the Dutch North
Sea trawlers, by Henking for the German steam fishing vessels ; and
which may be studied at its best in the Eeports on the fishing results
of the Aberdeen fishing fleets by U'Arcy Thompson and Fulton.*
Since 1901 the Scottish Fishery Board has collected such statistics, and
when the International fishery researches began the figures obtained
were dealt with by the International Council in connexion with the
other investigations.

At the present time nearly all the steam liners, about two-thirds of

• See D'Arcy Thompson, "Aberdeen Trawling Statistics" ; Fulton, " Distrilmtion and
Seasonal Abundance of Flat-tishes in the North Sea " ; Fishery and Uydrographic Investiga-
tions in the North Sea (cd. 2612), 1905.

476 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

the steam trawlers, aud a number of the sailing trawlers landing
catches at Aberdeen furnish voluntary returns as to the places where
they have been fishing, the number of hours fishing, the number of hauls
of the trawl and number of lines shot. The quantities of fish landed
by these vessels at Aberdeen, with respect to the market grouping in
sizes, are obtained by the officers of the Fishery Board. The figures so
obtained are collected and discussed by the statistical clerks and others
on the staff of the Scottish section of the International organization.
No details of individual catches are published, only abstracts, and the
statistics themselves are made public long after the actual fishing has
taken place. There can be no commercial use made of the information
given by the masters of the vessels by their rivals in trade : an important
consideration, since the information is voluntary and can be withheld.*

In dealing with the figures of fish captured by the Aberdeen fieets,
Fulton refers the catches to the areas in the North Sea in which they
were made. For this purpose the North Sea north of parallel 50° N.
and E. of meridian 6° W. is divided up into forty- eight squares,
each of which corresponds to one degree in latitude and two in longitude.
When a vessel returns to port, her master informs the collectors of
statistics wliat course he has steered on his voyage out from port, where
he has fished, aud the number of hours trawling on each ground or the
number of lines shot (if he is a liner). The results of the voyage, when
tabulated by the statistical clerks, show for the trawling fleet during
January (for instance) the average quantities of each kind of fish taken
per 100 hours trawling on each of the numbered areas, or the average
quantities of fish taken per 100 lines shot.

By this method a very great mass of information has been accumu-
lated and published by the International organization. Fulton's paper
already referred to deals with the flat-fishes taken by the Aberdeen traw-
lers— turbot, brill, halibut, witch, megrim, lemon-dab, plaice, and dab_
The abundance and fluctuations of each of these fishes on the northern
North Sea grounds from month to month are studied with reference to
particular fishing areas. The fluctuations are represented by tables and
charts showing graphically the variations on particular areas throughout
the year. Into the details of this most interesting study we cannot, of
course, enter ; only one or two of the main conclusions can be alluded
to here. A result that appears persistently throughout the discussion

* It is therefore erroneous to state (see, for instance, tlie House of Lords debate, 25tli
June, 1906) that we liave by tlie publication of these figures handed over information to
German hsliernien whicii is made use of to our detriment. Even if these iigures could
suj)i)ly such information, one can liardly imagine that the German fishing industry is so
well organized that trawl owners or fishing-lioat masters study English scientific
journals ; any more than that English or Scotch owners or masters study, for instance, the
German Milthcilungen dcs Dcutschen See-Fischcrci Verein ; or that state hshery intel-
ligence departments exist in either country which study this information and supply it
to the fishing industry.

»-l-

SOME EESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 477

of these statistics is the "complementary fluctuations" among different
flat-fishes inhabiting the same ground. In the case of one particular fish
the abundance varies, of course, with the season ; but the periods of the
year at which a fish is most abundant differ for many of the species
considered. In one area considered, for instance, megrim were most
abundant about May, plaice in April and September, witches in June
and July, halibut in April, and lemon-dabs in September. Thus the
scarcity of one species was compensated for by the abundance of
one or more others, so that on any one fishing ground the general abun-
dance of all the flat-fishes was maintained throughout the year at
roughly the same level. In the case of nearly every one of the fishes
studied the fluctuations from month to month exhibited undoubted
regularities. It was nearly always possible to deduce that on each
fishing ground there was one month during which each species of fish
was present in greatest abundance. This maximum in each case corre-
sponds with the spawning season and indicates an aggregation of the
fishes on particular areas for the purposes of reproduction. Following
this spawning maximum of abundance, the period of which, of course,
varies with each kind of fish, is a period of relative scarcity. Then
occurs a secondary maximum some time in the autumn, when the fish
is again abundant, though usually not so abundant as in the spring or
summer spawning maximum. Then in the winter there is often
another period of relative scarcity. These remarks apply to the study
of the fishes present on each particular fishing area throughout
the year. How the abundance of each kind of fish is dis-
tributed throughout all the separate fishing areas may be seen by
considering the charts of the fishing grounds published by D'Arcy
Thompson in the paper referred to above. These show for each month
in the year the average amounts of cod, ling, saithe, hake, haddock, and
whiting caught on each area per 100 hours trawling by the Aberdeen
trawling fleet. Their charts simplify greatly the study of the statistical
data. The variations in fish abundance displayed by them are interest-
ing and well worth study by the reader.

The aim of the master of a fishing vessel is, of course, to get as much
fish as possible. Therefore he does not always frequent the same
grounds, but fishes from place to place over the North Sea, following
the fish shoals, getting varying catches on the various grounds. At one
time one kind of fish may predominate, during another month other
kinds. Long experience, and many fruitful or fruitless experiments,
have taught liini where and when to expect good catches. If this
practical knowledge of the fishermen could be systematized, sifted from
error, and recorded, we should possess a knowledge of the seasonal
fluctuations and migrations of the fishes which, supplemented by the

478 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

knowledge of their life histories slowly acquired by the naturalist,
would provide the material for the legislators. Bearing this in mind,
the reader will see how valuable would be a knowledge of the places
where the fishing fleets have worked from month to month throughout
the year, for when considered along with the statistics of the fishes
caught by them, this information would show us how the vessels had
been following the fish from fishing ground to fishing ground. In
Thompson's paper, already referred to, a beginning has been made of the
collection of information of this kind. The twelve beautiful charts* of
the northern North Sea which are contained in this paper show from
month to month the positions of the Aberdeen trawling and lining
fleets. These show how the fishing vessels move from place to place,
sometimes aggregated on a relatively small area, at other times widely
dispersed. It is the migrations of the fishes forming the objects of the
fisheries that are the cause of these movements of the fishing fleets,
and the latter are, to some extent, a representation of the former.

I will refer to only one more statistical study made by the Inter-
national organization. The reader will find in volume iii. of Bcvpports
ct Procts-verhaux a comprehensive survey of the fishery statistics of
the various participating countries, which will show him how very
deficient our knowledge of the economics of the industry is, and how
great is the need for the co-ordination of the statistical bureaux of the
North European fishing countries and for improvement in the means
of collection. If as one result of the International Investigations a
central statistical office could be instituted, which would receive,
collate, discuss, and publish the statistics of the North Sea fisheries,
a store of knowledge of incalculable value to the fishing industry would
gradually be accumulated. When the International Investigations began,
the most prominent question, in this country at least, was that involving
the effects of capture of small plaice on the so-called eastern grounds
of the North Sea. The material for the treatment of this question did
not then exist, and its acquisition was one of the aims of the Inter-
national Fisheries Council. In 1904 the various Governments con-
cerned began systematically to collect statistics of the sizes of plaice
landed by their fishing fleets. In volume iv. of the Rapports et Prods-
vcrhaux the first results of this work are published, though previously
the English Board of Agriculture and Fisheries had instituted such
investigations with reference to the Immature Fish Bill then before
Parliament.! In the paper J referred to is contained a summary of the

* U'Arcy Thompson, Fishery and Hydrograiihical Investigations in the North Sea (cd,
2612), 1905, p. 352.

t See Archer, Jiejwrt of the Committee on Sea Fisheries Bill (H.L.), 1904.

J Kyle, "First report on the statistical luaterial received by the Bureau regarding the
quantities of small plaice landed in the various countries," Jiuppis. et Froc.-verb., vol. iv.,
1905, app. (J.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 479

returns made by England, Holland, Germany, Denmark, and Belgium
with regard to the quantities of small plaice landed in these countries.
These returns are, of course, very imperfect, but the result giving the
proportion of small plaice to the total quantity landed is probably
approximately correct. About 2h per cent of the plaice landed in
Holland and about 1 per cent of the plaice landed in England were
under 8 inches in length, an estimate which does not greatly encourage
the pessimistic view held in various quarters as to the detrimental effect
of steam-trawling upon the plaice population of the North Sea.

The connexion between Hydrographic and Biological
Phenomena in the Sea.

We have seen that there is a well-marked periodicity in the
hydrographic changes taking place in the sea. When the temperature
and salinity of the sea water are regularly determined, it is found that
the variations are not irregular or casual ones, but are repeated with a
certain amount of regularity from year to year. At any one place in
the seas of Northern Europe the temperature of the water gradually
rises from a minimum some time in the winter or spring, to a maximum
in the summer or autumn ; and so also with the quantity of salt in the
water ; this too varies with more or less regularity, though the maxima
and minima may not correspond with those of temperature. Then we
have also seen that there is an analogous periodicity in the fisheries of
the same area. These are not carried on with perfect regularity all the
year round. At certain times in the year different fisheries are pre-
dominant. For any one fishing area there are seasons in the year which
are characterized by the abundance of a certain kind of fish. Herring
fisheries, cod fisheries, sole fisheries, and others have their seasons,
which are repeated from year to year with a certain uniformity.
Leaving aside for a moment the commercial fisheries, we find that the
same periodicity of occurrence and abundance also obtains with the
microscopic life of the sea. The waters of the sea always contain a
certain amount of drifting microscopic life, bacteria, diatoms, protozoa,
coelenterates, and the eggs and larval forms of the larger animals living
at the sea bottom or swimming about in the water. If the occurrence
and abundance of this jJ^ankton are studied throughout tlie year, it will
be found that it too is not always the same, neither in nature nor
quantity. There is a more or less regular sequence of forms of aninud
or vegetable life, each of which has its maximum and minimum of
abundance. Further, if the reproduction of any animal or plant in the
sea is studied, it will be found that the breeding season is periodic, and
occurs with very great regularity from year to year at about the same

480 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

time. All these changing phenomena — the temperature and salinity of
the sea water, the occurrence and abundance of different planktonic
species, and the reproductive phases of all animals and plants in the sea
— occur from year to year with a certain periodicity. The later direc-
tion of fisheries research has been to correlate them and to find out how
the one phenomenon depends on the other. More precisely, one of the
main objects of the International Fishery Investigation has been to
determine in what manner hydrographic changes in the sea are con-
nected with the productivity of the various commercial fisheries.

In all cases plankton observations have been carried on simul-
taneously with the hydrographic work. The plankton investigations
consist of periodical fishing of the sea over wide areas, and both at the
surface and at deeper levels, with fine-meshed silk nets, so designed as
to catch all but the very smallest organisms in the water. As a rule,
these plankton observations have been so carried out as to secure only
samples of the kinds of species in the sea, but in some of the countries
quantitative observations have been made ; that is, the " townets " are
designed to filter a known quantity of water, so that if the numbers of
individuals of each species caught are determined, it can be estimated
how many organisms of each species were present in a certain bulk of
sea water ; for instance, in a column of water one square metre in
section and extending from the bottom of the sea up to the surface.
These quantitative plankton observations are the most laborious which
have been included in the International programme, and the results
obtained so far are not yet fully worked out and discussed. In the ordin-
ary plankton investigations, only the kinds and relative abundance of the
various organisms present have been determined. These qualitative
plankton observations have two main objects : (1) to ascertain the
sequence of occurrence and abundance of planktonic organisms. Among
these are, of course, the eggs and young stages of fishes, and the
determination of the occurrence and abundance of these from place
to place, or time to time, has obviously the utmost importance in the
study of the life histories of the fishes. Then (2) the plankton
observations are also of use in confirming the results of the hydro-
graphic researches. The main object of the latter is to ascertain the
movements of bodies of water of different origins, by a consideration of
their temperatures and salinities. But oceanic streams and currents have
also characteristic plankton organisms, and the recognition of the latter
is of material value in the determination of the origin of the current.

In any part of the sea of our coasts there is a regular sequence in the
occurrence of the organisms of the plankton. It would be quite impos-
sible to give this in detail for the various regions investigated by the
International steamers. Speaking quite generally, we should find such

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 481

a general scheme as the following : At the beginning of the year there
is little variety in the composition of the plankton, and it is relatively
scanty in amount. But towards March and April it becomes astonish-
ingly rich and abundant. Diatoms are present in great quantity, and
we have the eggs and larvae of the fishes which are then spawning. A
little later on the larvee of hosts of invertebrate animals appear, and
towards the summer these and the fish eggs and larvre begin to decrease.
About this time also the diatoms occur in least abundance. Cojlenter-
ates, medusie, siphonophores, medusoid forms of hydrozoa, and protozoa
such as Noctihica and Ccratium occur in great abundance. Then in the
autumn there is again a luxuriance of diatoms, these organisms attain-
ing their second yearly maximum of abundance, which, however, is
usually less than the spring maximum. As winter approaches, the
plankton again becomes less varied and abundant.

Then we have " swarms " of organisms appearing in the plankton.
Over restricted areas of sea one kind of organism may be present
almost exclusively, and this swarm may drift over a large extent of sea.
Many such instances are recorded in the International publications.
Even if the usual varied plankton is found, we may be able to trace the
(passive) migration of certain characteristic constituents from place to
place. An excellent example of this is to be found in the distribution
of the jellyfish Muggiccn in the w^aters of the English Channel and Irish
Sea in 1904. The plankton observations made by the Marine Biological
Association in that year* show that a shoal of these animals coming up
from the Bay of Biscay reached the English Channel about April.
Dividing, one part of this shoal entered the Channel, and by the begin-
ning of September had travelled as far east as Portland, after which
month it gradually retreated to the west. The other part of the shoal
rounded Land's End, and by the end of September had gone as far north
as Cardigan Bay and South Arklow. About this time a southerly drift
of water from the Irish Sea had begun to divide the shoal, and part was
driven to the south and west coasts of Ireland. By the end of Novem-
ber the shoal had reached far up the west coast of Ireland, and was
observed in Galway Bay.

Now the distribution of this shoal of animals depended on three
things : (1) the true drift of Atlantic water towards our shores, (2) the
superficial drift of the water duo to winds, and (3) the reproduction of
the animals. Probably the large hydrographic phenomena which we
have already considered had not much to do with the migration of the
shoal. l)Ut in another plankton study carried out by the International
vessels f we have a clearer instance of the conveyance of the plankton

* See Goii,!:,'h, Pnhlirations ric Circonstance, No. 29, 1905.

t See Dainas, " Notes biologiques sur les Copepodes de la mer iiorvegienne," Publications
de Circonstance.

482 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

by the great oceanic streams. In the Norwegian sea occur enormous
numbers of the copepod crustacean Calanus Jininarchicus. This animal
has its home in the colder sub- Arctic regions, and does not, like so
many other planktonic organisms, reach the Norwegian sea from the
Atlantic. In the spring of the year the adults are brought to the south
by the current which flows to the south-east of Jan Mayen and Iceland
— the East Icelandic Polar stream. Eeaching the region of the Faeroe-
Iceland channel, spawning takes place, and the young are then carried
to the north along the coasts of Norway by the Atlantic north-flowing
stream. In these waters the young calani, living among immense
quantities of diatoms, peridinians, and other forms of plankton life,
grow and form the great shoals of Calanus jininarchicus which charac-
terize these waters. It is the salt water of the Atlantic stream which,
to some extent at least, favours the spread of this crustacean.

The precise manner in which changes in temperature and salinity
affect the abundance of planktonic organisms is, of course, very
obscure. In many cases the connexion is doubtless an indirect one.
We know that in the sea the larger animals prey upon the smaller, and
that the ultimate food organisms are the diatoms (and other organisms
with a similar method of nutrition). That is to say, every living animal
in the sea depends, in the long run, on the diatoms, which form the
"pastures of the sea." A cod, for instance, may feed on dabs and
hermit crabs (it may feed on anything, but we take these as favourite
foods). Now the dab will feed on shellfish, and the hermit crab on
(say) small fishes or worms. The shellfish will feed on diatoms (among
other things), and the small fish and worms perhaps on microcrustacea,
and the latter on diatoms. Every chain of food animals in this sense
terminates in the diatoms. If then it can be shown that these
organisms are closely affected by hydrographic changes in the sea, we
make a distinct step in proving the dependence of many biological
phenomena on hydrographic ones. Now we are still far from possessing
all the data necessary for proving this connexion, but I may refer to a
most stimulating paper by Brandt,* which goes a long way in providing
the information required. In the periodical cruises of the German
International research vessel Poseidon samples of sea water were
collected, and these were subsequently examined by the German
chemists working under the International organization for the quantities
of ultimate food-stuifs contained in them. The ultimate food-stuffs are
nitrogen compounds (ammonia, nitrites, and nitrates), silicic acid, plios-
phates, and some other substances. It is upon these that diatoms (and
consequently all other life in the sea) depend. The amount of nitrogen,
in the above form, in the sea is very small (not more than about 0'2

• Brandt, Rajjpts. et Proc.-vcrb., vol. iii. app. D, 1905.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 483

parts in one million parts of sea water). It is small because it is
continually being utilized as food by the diatoms ; otherwise, being
continually added to the sea by the decomposition of dead animals and
plants, and by drainage from the land, the former would gradually
become poisoned by it. The German analyses have shown that this
small proportion of fixed nitrogen is not constant. Silica (which is
required for the skeletons of the diatoms) and phosphates (which are
similarly required for other organisms) are also present in correspond-
ingly small and variable amounts.

Now it is of extreme interest to find that the amount of these
ultimate food substances present in the sea is greatest just before the
time when the maximum abundance of diatoms occurs, and is least
about the time of the minimum. This applies more particularly to the
German determinations of silica, but no doubt is also true of the
nitrogen compounds. In the winter these food-stuffs have been greatly
stored up. Tlien in the spring, under the influence of the rise in tem-
perature of the sea and the increased intensity of the sunlight, an
immense diatom reproduction takes place. The result of this is again
to reduce the proportion of the food-stuffs, and as a consequence we
have the summer minimum of diatom abundance. Further accumula-
tion of the food-stuffs during this period of relative sterility leads to the
autumn diatom maximum. Probably denitrifying bacteria play a not
inconsiderable role in producing these variable proportions of nitrates
present in the sea. It is known that bacteria exist in the sea which
have the power of reducing nitrates to nitrites, the latter to ammonia,
and ammonia to free nitrogen. In the latter form nitrogen is, of course,
unavailable as food for diatoms. Now it has been shown that these
denitrifying bacteria are more active at a high than at a low tempera-
ture. In the summer, then, they act on the fixed nitrogen present in
the sea and render this unavailable as food for diatoms. In the colder
season they are less active, and fixed nitrogen accumulates. It is a
surprising thing that the plankton is less abundant in warmer tropical
seas, in spite of a higher temperature and better light, than in colder
sub-Arctic waters. The explanation lies probably in the more intense
action of denitrifying bacteria in those warm waters, whereby the food-
stuffs for the plankton are reduced.

Such considerations suggest the close connexion between the lowly
organized plankton organisms and hydrographic phenomena. But can
the same connexion be shown to exist between changes in temperature
and salinity of sea water, and the changes in the abundance of such
highly organized animals as our food-tishes ? These connexions are
more difficult to establish. The changing abundance of fishes on tlie
fishing grounds is expressed in our imjjcrfect statistical systems, and

484 SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

these in the past have lent tliemselves badly to investigations of this
kind. The official returns of fish landed were almost entirely useless,
and it was necessary for the fishery research organizations to so organize
returns of fish caught as to show the connexions we speak of. Such
investigations as those of Fulton and Henking were alone suitable.

Nevertheless, the dependence of fish migrations on hydrographic
changes in the sea was always a priori probable. For a fish in the sea
the water is just such a medium as the atmosphere is for a migratory
bird ; atid if we recognize that climatic changes were the main factors
in determining the breeding seasons and migrations of birds, it was
surely probable that changes in temperature, etc., in the sea affected the
breeding seasons and migrations of fishes. We know how very
intimately the period of incubation of a fish egg is determined by the
temperature of the water in which it develops ; and how the spawning
periods themselves are variable with the temperature of the sea. It
was just as reasonable to assume that fisli migrations were also in-
fluenced by temperature at least. The International investigations are
slowly accumulating instances of these connexions. Some such
connexions were established before the beginning of these researches,
but others are coming to light. Long ago Mobius and Heincke divided
the fishes visiting the Baltic into " north fishes " and " south fishes."
The north fishes have their homes in the Norwegian sea and the waters
surrounding Iceland and Faeroe. The south fishes come from the
temperate Atlantic. Mobius and Heincke noticed that the north fishes
only visited the Cattegat during the first part of the year, and the
south fishes during the latter part. Afterwards, when the hydrographic
periodicity of the waters of the Skagerak, Cattegat, and Baltic was
demonstrated, these migrations were correlated with the ebb and flow of
the Atlantic stream. We have seen that during the latter part of the
year warm Atlantic water accumulates in the depths of the Skagerak
and sets up a warm undercurrent into the Baltic, which is at a
maximum about the end of the year. The south fishes appear and
travel with this undercurrent, which sets up changes in the fishery
biology of the Baltic. Thus in the German fishery cruises of December,
1903, plaice and other flat-fishes, many of them spawning, were found
in the southern Baltic in this warm undercurrent. On the other hand,
flat-fishes were hardly at all found in this part of the Baltic in June
and July, at which time the bottom was covered by the water of the
cold undercurrent from the Skagerak, which enters the Cattegat in
spring. The hake is a typical south fish, and we have seen that its
capture in the North Sea is very inconstant and indicates a definite
migration. In the latter area it arrives towards the end of summer
with the incoming Atlantic stream ; then it is relatively abundant.
In the winter it disappears again.

SOME RESULTS OF THE INTERNATIONAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS. 485

Again, in the Barentz Sea the fisheries depend on the Atlantic flood-
ing. This was shown by the Paissian Fishery Commission in 1902.
Two kinds of water enter this area. In the winter water from the
Atlantic stream enters it, rounding North Cape. With the entrance
of this occurs a " vast immigration of food fishes," which have the
character of south fishes, and fishing is then productive. In the spring
this Atlantic stream subsides and Arctic water takes its place. The
fisheries then cease, but still at this time the Atlantic stream is flowing
past North Cape, and cod are still caught in quantity.

The bottom of the North Sea is a submarine plateau, which towards
the north slopes down to the depths of the Norwegian sea. On this
northern slope Atlantic water may be found at all times of the year,
but at varying depths, according as the incoming stream waxes and
wanes. On the bottom is cold Arctic water, and separating this from
the overlying Atlantic water is a mixed layer, which contains relatively
large quantities of fish, such as the ling and halibut. The Swedish
fishermen set long lines on the portion of this slope towards Shetland.
In the summer the mixed layer of water is nearer to the surface than
in the winter, when the Atlantic stream is gathering volume. Just
as this mixed-water stratum is nearer or further from the surface, so
the fishermen move about so as to find it. In summer, when it is near
the surface, they set their lines near Shetland in about 75-100 fathoms.
In autumn, when the growing Atlantic stream forces down the signifi-
cant water layer further from the surface, they are obliged to go further
north, that is, down the North Sea slope, in order to find it. The lines
are then set at depths of 150-200 fathoms.

The connexion of the herring migrations with the hydrographic
changes is now quite certain, though much research is still necessary.
There is no doubt that the great summer herring fishery of the east
coasts of Britain hangs, in some way, on the periodic flooding of the
North Sea with Atlantic waters. The case of the winter herring fishery
oft' the coasts of Sweden is, however, a clearer case of the connexion
of hydrographic and fishery phenomena. The winter herring is a north
fish, and does not inhabit Atlantic water, but rather the mixed " I5ank
water " of lower salinity. In the great herring years it has been found
that the Atlantic water lay at considerable depths beneath the surface,
and that on this warm dense water was a layer of Bank water which
covered the coastal shoals and entered the fjords. In this layer the
herring was always found. In December, 1896, there was an unusual
flooding of the Skagerak with Atlantic water. The level of this had
reached so high that only a thin layer of Bank water remained. In
this year the winter herring fishery was a failure.

Much has been done by the International researches to establish

NEW SEKIES. vol,. VII. NO. 5. 2 K

486 SOME RESULTS OF THE TXTEKNATIOXAL FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS.

the connexion of the cod fisheries with the hydrographic changes. In
the winter of 1902-3 the Atlantic stream in the Norwegian sea
attained its niaxinmm much later than usual. That is, the stream
had a greater volume than usual in this winter, and much more warm
Atlantic water entered the northern ocean than in previous years.
Many climatic phenomena accompanied this greater accumulation of
warm water; the ice border everywhere receded to the north and east.
Barometric depressions and cyclonic storms were more numerous than
usual, and the weather was wild and stormy. Biological phenomena
were also occasioned ; Atlantic plankton was found as far north as
70° N., even among the drifting ice floes near Jan Mayen. The spawn-
ing period of the cod was greatly postponed, and the Lofoten cod
fishery (which depends on spawning fish) was delayed for two months,
and was a partial failure. The winter herring fisheries at Bergen and
in the Skagerak also failed.

Quite recently too Schmidt has made some interesting observations
on the cod fisheries off the coasts of Iceland. The island is surrounded
by cold Arctic water, but on the south the Atlantic stream approaches
it and flows, as the Irminger Current, along the north-west coasts. The
cod spawns at the south of Iceland in the border region of the warm
Atlantic stream and the cold littoral water, and the eggs are only found
where the temperature of the water is over 5° C. Having spawned, the
cod go west and north-west, following the Atlantic stream, and in
the summer there is a general movement of cod, herring, and fish fry
along the north and east coasts of Iceland; the fisheries take the same
course, always in the border region of the Atlantic and Arctic waters.

More instances of hydrographic-biological phenomena might be quoted
from the International publications, but we have noticed the more
striking cases. The question why this connexion exists must be left
for future investigation, and will certainly only be solved by very
laborious researches. One wonders that the minute differences of
salinity such as exist in tlie sea, and the comparatively small temperature
differences, should affect so notably the migrations of fishes. It is
perhaps a possible explanation that it is the food of the fishes that is
affected in some such manner as we have discussed in relation to
the varying abundance of diatoms in the plankton, but it is also
probable that the metabolic processes of the fishes themselves are affected
by even these small variations in the watery medium in which they live.
After all, climatic differences affecting ourselves are sometimes very
subtle, and when expressed by the readings of meteorological instru-
ments are just as small as those which we have been considering.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association.

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888. Price Is.

New Series (Royal 8vo).

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 plates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899-1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Separate numbers (generally 4 to one volume), in wrappers, 3s. 6d. ; to Members, 2s. 8d.

London Agents: Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37 Solio Square, W.

Cloth 4(0, 150 pp., 18 plates (12 coloicred).

A TREATISE ON THE COMMON SOLE.

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.R.S.E.,

Late Fellow of University College, Oxford ; Naturalist to the Association.

Price to Members, 20.5. ; to Non-Members, 25s.

Medium 8fo, ?>%% pages. 159 Illustrations and two Ma^ys. Price 7s. 6d. net.

{Macmillan & Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Prepared expressly for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries,

BY

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMERLY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ;
NATURALIST ON THE STAFF OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION.

m\\\\i Preface bp
E. RAY LANKP:STEK, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA.

' BULLETIT^r

DES RESULTATS ACQUIS PENDANT LES COURSES PERIODIQUES.

Published Quarterly. Price per Volume of Four Numbers,

18 Kroner (£1).

RAPPORTS ET PROCES-VERBAUX DES REUNIONS.

Vol. I., 1902-3. Kr. 6.

Vol. II., 1903-4. Kr. 4.

Vol. III., 1902-4 (General Report). Kr. 15.

Vol. IV., 1904-5. Kr. 4.

PUBLICATIONS DE CIRCONSTANCE.

No. 1. C. G. Joh. Petersen: How to Distinguish between Mcature and Im-
mature Plaice throughout the Year. A Preliminary Communication.
8 pp. 1 pi. July, 1903. Kr. 1.

No. 2. Martin Knudsen : On the Standard- Water used in the Hydro-
graphical Research until July, 1903. 9 pp. July, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 3. Die Literatur der zehn wichtigsten Nutzfische der Nordsee. In
monographischer Darstellung. 112 s., 10 T; August, 1903. Kr. 3.

The Literature of the Ten Principal Food Fishes of the North Sea.
In the form of compendious monographs. 108 pp. 10 pi. August,
1903. Kr. 3.

Nos. 4-5. Martin Knudsen : Ueber den Gebrauch von Stickstoffbestim-
mungen in der Ilydrographie. .

Gefrierpunkttabelle fiir Meerwasser.

Zusammen 13 s. September, 1903. Kr. 0.75.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. 6. Harry M. Kyle : On a NeAv Form of Trawl Net, designed to fish in
midwater as well as on the ground. Preliminary notice. 8 pp.
November, 1903. Kr. 0.50.

No. 7. P. J. van Breemen : Ueber das Vorkommen von Oithona nana
Giesbr. in der Nordsee. (Aus dem niederlaendischen Institut flir
Meeresforschung.) 24 s. Mit einer Karte. November, 1903. Kr. 1.

Nos. 8-9. T. Wemyss Fulton: On the Spawning of the Cod {Gadus
morrhua L.) in Autumn in the North Sea. With a Chart.

A New Mark for Fish.

Together, U pp. March, 1904. Kr. 1.

No. 10. G. 0. Sars; On a New (Planktonic) Species of the Gqwus ApTierusa.
4 pp. 1 pi. March, 1904. Kr. 0.50.

No. 11. Martin Knudsen : o-^ Tabelle, Anhang zu den 1901 herausgege-
benen hydrographischen Tabellen. 23 pp. May, 1904. Kr. 0.75.

No. 12. Catalogue des poissons du nord de I'Europe, avec les noms
vulgaires dont on se sert dans les langues de cette region. 76 pp. June,
1904. Kr. 1. »

No. 13a. Die Ostsee-Fischerei in ihrcr jetzigen Lage. (Erster Teil.)

I. Uebersicht liber die Seefischerei in den danischen Gewaessern innerhalb

Skagens. Im Auftrag von Dr. C. G. Joh. Petersen bearbeitet von
Andreas Otterstrom.

II. Uebersicht ueber die Seefischerei Schwedens an den slid — und cistlichen

Kuesten dieses Landes. Bearbeitet von Dr. Filip Trybom und Alf.
Wollebsek. Together, 59 pp. 6 pi. June, 1904. Kr. 1.50.

No. 14. E. van Everdingen und C. H. Wind: Oberfliichentemperatur-
messungen in der Nordsee. (Vorliiufige Mitteilung.) 10 pp. 1 pi.
July, 1904. Kr. 1.

No. 15. Sigurd Stenius : Ein Versuch zur Untersuchung der hydro-
grapliischen Veriinderungen in der ndrdlichen Ostsee sowic im
finnischen und im bottnischen Meerbusen. (Vorliiufige Mitteilung.)
7 s. 5 t.

No. 16. Graphische Berechnung von a-, aus t und cr^. 1 s.

rUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. 17. A. J. Robertson: Scottish Ilydrographic Research during 1903. 6 pp.

No. 18. J. W. Sandstrom : Einfluss des "Windes auf die Diclite und die
Bewegung des Meereswassers. 6 s.

No. 19. B. Helland-Hansen : Zur Ozeanographie des Nordmeeres. Resume
eines am 22. Juli gehaltenen Vortrags. Mit 8 s. 3 fig.

No. 20. E. Ruppin : Ueber die Oxydierbarkeit des Meerwassers durch
Kaliumpermanganat. 9 s.

(No. 15-20. Ensemble 37 pp. 5 pi. et 3 fig. October, 1904. Kr. 1.50.)

No. 21. Charles J. J. Fox : On the Determination of the Atmospheric
Gases Dissolved in Sea- Water. (Communications du Laboratoire
central a Christiania No. 1.) 24 pp. 1 pi. 4 fig. March, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 22. D. Damas : Notes biologiques sur les Copepodes de la mer
norvegienne. 24 pp. 1 carte. April, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 23. V. Walfrid Ekman : On the use of Insulated Water-Bottles and
Reversing Thermometers. (Communications du Laboratoire central a
Christiania No. 2.) 28 pp. 2 pi. 8 fig. April, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 24. V. Walfrid Ekman .• Kurze Beschreibung eines Propell-Strom-
messers. (Communications du Laboratoire central a Christiania No. 3.)
4 s. 1 t.

No. 25. 0. Pettersson : Beschreibung des Bifilar-Strommessers. 6 s. It.

No. 26. A. M. van Rosendaal und C. H. Wind : Priifung von Strom-
messern und Strommessungsversuche in der Nordsee. 10 s. 2 t.

(No. 24-26. Zusammen 20 s. 4 t. July, 1905. Kr. 1.50.)

No. 27. V. Walfrid Ekman : An Apparatus for the Collection of ]»ottom-
Samples. (Communications du Laboratoire central a Christiania No. 4.)
6 pp. 5 fig. August, 1905. Kr. 0.50,

No. 28. Bericht liber die Anstalten zur Vermehruug des Lachses und der
Meerforellen in den Fliissen der Ostsee. Im Auftrage der Kommission
C 1, unter Mitwirkung von Prof. Dr. 0. von Grimm (Russland), von
dem deutschen Seefischerei-Verein (General-Sekretiir Prof. Dr. H.
Henking) (Deutschland) und von Fischereikonsulent Chr. Levinsen
(Diinemark), bearbeitet von dem Geschiiftsfiihrer Dr. Fil. Trybom.
34 s. November, 1905. Kr. 0.75.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL COUNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA— continued.

No. 29. L. H. Gough. : On the Distribution and the Migrations of
Muggiaea aflantica, Cunningham, in the English Channel, the Irish
Sea, and off the South and West Coasts of Ireland, in 1904. 13 pp.
3 charts. 2 fig. November, 1905. Kr. 1.

No. 30. Rolf J. Witting : Ivurze Beschreibung eines elektrisch registrier-
enden Strommessers. 8 s. Textfig.

No. 31. Etliches liber Strommessung. lis.

No. 30-31. Zusammcn 19 s. November, 1905. Kr. 0.75.

No. 32. Charles Atwood Kofoid : A Self-closing Water-bucket for Plankton
Investigations. 10 pp. 4 fig. December, 1905. Kr. 0.50.

No. 33. Catalogue des especes de plantes et d'animaux observ^es dans le
Plankton recueilli pendant les expeditions periodiques depuis le mois
d'aout 1902 jusqu'au mois de mai 1905. 122 pp. February, 1906. Kr. 2.

No. 34. Fridtjof Nansen : Methods for Measuring Direction and Velocity
of Currents in the Sea. With an Appendix by Dr. V. Walfrid Ekman.
42 pp. 2 pi. and 31 fig. February, 1906.

Published on behalf of the International Council

BY

ANDR. FRED. HOST ET FILS,
COPENHAGEN.

OB J"E OTS

OF THE

IJlarinc ^lioloqital Association of tijc ^tuitcb iUngboiiu

T'HE ASSOCIATIOX was founded at a Meeting called for the purpose in March, 1884,
-*- and held in the Koonis of the Royal Society of London.

The late Professor HrxLKY, at that time President of the Royal Society, took the chair,
and amongst the speakers in support of the project were the late Duke of Augyll, the
late Sir Lyon Pi.ayfaiu, Lord Avebury, Sir John Hooker, the late Dr. Carpenter, Dr.
GuxTiiER, the late Lord Dalhousie, the late Professor Moseley, the late Mr. Romanes,
and Professor Lankester.

The Association owes its existence and its present satisfactory condition to a condona-
tion of scientific naturalists, and of gentlemen who, from philanthropic or practical reasons,
are specially interested in the great sea fisheries of the United King<lom. It is universally
admitted tliat our knowledge of the habits and conditions of life of sea fislies is very small,
and insufficient to enahle either the practical tishermau or the Legislature to take measures
calculated to ensure to the country the greatest return from the "harvest of the sea."
Naturalists are, on the other hand, anxious to push further our knowledge of marine life
and its conditions. Hence the Association has erected at Plymouth a thoroughly efficient
Laboratory, where naturalists may study the history of marine animals and jjlants in general,
and where, in particular, researches on food-lishes and molluscs may be carried out with the
best appliances.

The Lal)oratory and its fittings were completed in June, 1S88, at a cost of some £12,000.
Since that time investigations, practical and scientific, have been constantly pursued at
Plymouth. Practical investigations upon matters connected with sea-fishing are carried on
under tiie direction of the Council; in addition, naturalists from England and from abroad
have come to the Laboratory, to carry on their own independent researches, and have made
valuable additions to zoological ami botanical science, at the exi)ense of a small rent for the
use of a working table in the Laljoratory and other appliances. The number of naturalists
who can be employed by the Association in special investigations on fishery questions, and
definitel}'' retained for the purpose of carrying on tliose researches throughout the year,
must depend on the funds subscrilied by private individuals and public bodies for the
purpose. The first charges on the revenue of the Association are the working of the sea-
water circulation in the tanks, stocking the tanks with fish and feeding the latter, the
payment of servants and fishermen, the hire and maintenance of fishing-boats, and the
salar}' of the Resident Director and Staff. At the commencement of this number will be
found tlie names of the gentlemen on the staff.

In the summer of 1902 the Association was commissioned by His Majesty's Government
to carry out in tiie southern British area the scheme of International Fishery Investigations
adopted by the Conference of European Powers which met at Christiania in 1901. In
connection with this work a laboratory has been opened at Lowestoft.

The purpose of tlie Association is to aid at the same time both science and industry. It
is national in character and constitution, and its affairs are conducted by a representative
Council, by an Honorary Secretary and an Honorary Treasurer, without any charge upon
its funds, so tliat llii- whole of the subscriptions and donations received are devoted
absolutely to the supjiort of the Laboratory and the prosecution of researches by aid of
its ap])liances. Tlie reader is referred to page 4 of the Cover for information as to
membership of the Association.

CONTENTS OF NEW SERIES, Vol. VII. , No. 5.

PACE

1. Some Results of the International Fishery Investigations.

By Jas. Johnstone. With six Figures . ... 437

NOTICE.

The Council of the Marine Biological Association wish it to be understood that
they do not accept responsibility for statements published in this Journal except-
ing when those statements are contained in an official report of the Council.

£ s.

d.

. per annum

1 1

0

Composition Fee

15 15

0

.

100 0

0

.

500 0

0

TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP.

Annual Members
Life jMembers
Founders
Governors

Members of the Association have the following rights and privileges : they elect
annually the Officers and Council ; they receive the Journal of the Association free
by post ; they are admitted to view the Laboratory at Plymouth, and may introduce
friends with them ; thej- have the first claim to rent a place in the Laboratory for
research, with use of tanks, boats, &c. ; and liave access to the books in the Library
at Plymouth.

All correspondence should be addressed to the Director, The Laboratory,
Plymouth.

[ 487 ]

GENERAL INDEX.

A.

Acartia Claud, 136, 137.
j^gisthus, 137.

— atlanticus, 122.

— mucronatus, 122.
j^olidiella, 357.

JEtidcus tcnuirnstris, n. sp., 116, 117.
Age of Gadidfe, 1.
Alcyonaria, of Plymouth, 202.
Alderiuy 376.

— modesta, 376.

Allen, E, J. — "Pallasia murata, n. sp. :
a new British Sabellarian," 299.
Amallophora, 120.

— brevicornis, 137.

— mafjna, 136.

Amphineura, of Plymoutli, 2G7.
Aniphipoda, of Plymouth, 238.
Amphorina, 364.

— aurantiaca, 367.

— olivacea, 368.
Anomalocera, 137.

— patersoni, 140.

Anthomedusse, of Plymouth, 187.
Antiopella, 373.

— cristata, 373.

Archiannelida, of Plymouth, 219.
Archidoris, 336.

— stellifera, 339.

— testudinaria, 339.

— tubercukda, 339.
ArietcUus, 123.

Atlantic, Copepoda of North, 110.
Augaptilus, distribution of, i5.5, 137.

— Jiligerus, 122.

— gibbus, n. sp., 122.

— glacialis, 135.

— longicaudatus, 135.

NEW SERIES. VOL. VII.

NO. fi.

Augaptilus magnus, n. sp., 122.

— megalurus, 122.

— palumboi, 135.

— zetesios, 122.

B.

Balance Sheet, 1903-4, 326.

Balance Sheet, 1904-5, 406.
Balance Sheet, 1905-6, 434.
Berghia carulescens, 357.
Brachyura, of Plymouth, 254.
Bradzidius urmatns, 136, 137.
Branchiopoda, of Plymouth, 233.
Bryaxis breviconiis, 137.
Bryozoa, of Plymouth, 259.

C.
Calanus finmarchicus, distribution of,
126, 137.

— helgolandicus, 126.

— hyperboreus, 113.

— princeps, 113.

— tenuicornis, 130.

— vulgaris, 126.
Calliopcra belluh, 379.
Calma, 369.

— glaucoides, 371.
Calocalanus, 126.
Candace, distribution of, 130.

— norvegica, 130.

— pedinata, 137.

— truncata, 130.
Candacio rotunda, n. .sp., 118.
Cavolina, 366.
Centropages hamatus, 137.

— typicus, 137.

Cephalopoda, of Plymouth, 294.
Cha3tognatha, of Plymouth, 233.

2L

488

GENERAL INDEX.

CInridiua, 131.

— armatiis, identity of, 115, 131.

— brevispimis, 114, 131.

— obtHsifrovf!, 117, 131, 132, 137.

— poppei, 131.

— tenuispinus, identity of, 114, 131.

— vanhoffeni, n. sp., 117.
Cirripedi.-i, of Plymouth, 237.
Cod, growth of, 103.

Copepoda, of the North Atlantic and
the Faroe Channel, 110.

— of Plymouth, 234.

— dichotomous branching of tail setae,

126.

— horizontal distribution of, 126.

— vertical range of, in the N. Atlantic,

140.
Coryphella, 358.

— beaumonti, n. sp., 361.

— (iracilis, 359.

— lands!) nr[ihii, 361

— rufibrancltiulis, 358.
Cratenidcc, 363.
Cratena, 365.

— amceiia, 368.
CtenocalanuR, 137.

— vanus, 125, 130.
Ctenophora, of Plymouth, 206.
Cucumaria montagui, 305.

— Normani, n. sp., 305.

— saxicola, 305.
Cumacea, of Plymouth, 245.
Guthona, 364.
Cutho7iella, 365.

D.

Discomedusaj, of Plymouth, 201.
noris, 336.

— beaumonti, 345.

— j)lanata, 339, 341.

— testudinaria, 339, 341.
Doto, 357.

— pinnatifida, var. papilHfe7-a, 356.

— uncinaia, 353.

E.
Echinoderma, of Plymouth, 206.
Edinosoma (Micro-sctella) atlantica, 136,

137.
Eels, scales cf, 103.
Eliot, C— "Notes on some Briti.'^h

Nudibranchs," 333.

Eolis atigulata, 357.

— glaucoides, 369.
Encalanus, distribution of, 127.

— atlanticus, n. sp., 113.

— attenuatus, 127.

— crassus, 127, 137.

— elongatus, 113, 137.

— elongafufi, 1 27.
Erichceta, distribution of, 132.

— acuta, 133.

— armata, identity of, 115.

— barbata, 133, 135, 137.

— gigas, 133.

— glacialis, 133, 134, 137.

— hessii, 133.
— - marina, 132.

— norvcgim, 126, 133, 134, 137.
Euchirella, distribution of, 128.

— bella, 126, 129.

— carinata, 115, 128.

— curticuuda, 129.

— cxuticauda, var. atlantica, 116.

— pulchra, 129.

— rostrata, 128, 137.
Etimenis marmorata, 352.

F.

Faroe Channel, Copepoda of, 110.

Faroella multiserrata, n. gen., n. sp.,
117, 137.

Fauna, marine invertebrate, of Ply-
mouth, 155.

Foraminifera, of Plymouth, 174.

Forestia, 370.

G.

Gadida?, growth of scales, 1.
Gadus ccglrfmus, scales an index of age,
101.

— callarius, scales an index of age, 103.

— merlangus, scales an index of age, 85.

— mimitus, scales an index of age, 79.

— pollaclmis, scales an index of age, 58.
Gcetanus, distribution of, 132.
Gcetanus armiger, 114, 132.

— atlanticus, 132.

— candani, 114, 132.

— major, n. sp., 114, 132, 137.

— miles, 114.

Gaidius, distribution of, 132,

— major, 114, 131, 137.

— j)ungens, 114, 131, 137.

GENEIIAL INDEX.

489

Gaidius tenuisinnuK, identity of, 131.
Geitodoris planata, 344.

— reticulata, 345.
Gepliyrea, of Plymouth, 233.
Govia, 353.

H.

Haddock, growth of, 101.
Haloptilus, distribution of, 135, 137.

— acutifrons, 135.

— longicornis, 135.
Hancockia, 353.

— dactylota, 354.
Heterorhabdus abyssali.i, 130.

— grandis, n. sj)., 120, 130.

— longicornis, 121, 124, 130.

— major, 121.

— norvegicus, 130, 137.

— viper a, 130.

— zetesios, identity of, 124, 130.
Heteroi'habida3, distribution of, 130.
Hirudinea, of Plymouth, 233.

I.

International Fishery Investigations.
First Report of the Council of
the Marine Biological Associa-
tion on work carried out, 383.

International Fishery Investigations,
"Some Results of the Inter-
national Fishery Investigations."
By J. Johnstone, 437.

Isopoda, of Plymouth, 242.

J.
Janidce, 372.

Janolus, 373.

— flagellatus, n sp., 374.

— hyalimis, 374.

Johnstone, J. " Some Results of the
International Fishery Investi-
gations," 437.

Lamellidoris, 345.

— aureopuncta, 345.

— bilaniellata, 346.

— depressa, 34G.

— lactea, 345.

— luteocincta, 345.

— miniata, 345.

— oblonga, 346.

Lamellidoris olivacea, 345.

— pusilla, 347.

— quadrimaculata, 345.
Leptomedusae, of Plymouth, 193.
Leptostraca, of Plymouth, 237.

List of Governors, Founders, and Mem-
bers, 1st March, 1904, 147.

List of Governors, Founders, and Mem-
bers, 31st May, 1906, 408.

Lomanotus, 348.

— eisigii, 349, 351.

— flavidus, 353.

— genei, 350.

— hancocki, 349.

— marmoratus, 351.

— portlandicus, 349.
Longipedia coronata, 140,
Lophothrix, 120.

— securifrons, n. sp., 120.
Lucicutia, distribution of, 136, 137.

— atlantica, n. sp., 121.

— clausi, 121.

— flavicornis, 121, 136.

— grandis, n. sp., 121.

— longiserrata, 121.

— magjia, 121, 122.

M.

Macrura, of Plymouth, 249.
Megacalanus princeps, n. gen., n.sp., 112.
Members, list of, 147.
Metridia, distribution of, 136.

— brevicauda, 136.

— longa, 136, 137.

— Incens, 136, 137.

— normani, 125, 136.

— venusta, 124.
Microsetella atlantica, 136.
Myzostomaria, of Plymouth, 233.

N.

Nemertini, of Plymouth, 215.

New genera, Faroella, 117 ; Megaca-
lanus, 112 ; Paraugaptilus, 123;
Pseudcetideus, 115.

New species, jEtideits temiirostris, 116 ;
Augaptilus gibbus, 122 ; Augap-
tilus magnus, 122 ; Candacia ro-
tunda, \\^ ; Chiridiuarauhiiffnii,
117 ; Coryphella bcaumonti, 3GI ;
Cucumaria Normani, 309 ; Euca-
lamis atlanticus, 113 ; Faroella

490

CrEXEKAL INDEX.

(n. gen.) midtiscmita, 117 ;
Givtanus major, 114 ; Hetero-
rJiabdus grandis, 120 ; Janolns
Jlagellatus, 374 ; Lophothrix se-
aLrifrons, 120 ; Lucicutia atlan-
fica, 121 J Lucicutia grandix, 121 ;
Megaccdanus (n. gen.) princeps,
112 ; Pallasia murata, 299 ;
Paraugaptilus (n. gen,) buchani,
123; Pseudcdideus armatus, 115;
Scolecithrix atlnnticus, 120 ; Sco-
lecithrix similis, 119 ; Spinocala-
nus magnus, 118 ; Xanthocalanus
atlanticus, 119 ; Xanthocalanus
cristattis, 119 ; Xanthocalanus
subagilis, 118.

North Atlantic, Copepoda of, 110.

"Notes on Some British Nudibranchs."
By C. Eliot. 333.

Nudibraiichiata, of Plynioutli, 277.

O.
OitlioJia, distribution of, 136.

— plumifera, 136.

— similis, 136, 137.
Oligochteta, of Plymouth, 233.
Oncea, distribution of, 136.

— conifera, 136, 137.
Ostracoda, of Plymouth, 234.

P.

Pace, S., "Note on two species of
Cucumaria from Plymouth,
hitherto confused as G. Montagui
(Fleming) : G. Normani, n. sp.,
and C. saxicola, Brady and
Robertson," 305.

Pallasia murata, n. sp., 299.

Paracalcuius aculeatus, 126, 130.

— parvus, distribution of, 129, 137.
ParaxujaptiUis buclmni, n. gen., n. s]).,

123.
Pelecypoda, of Plymouth, 285.
Phaenna, 137.
Phyllopus bidentatus, 124.
Platydoris argo, 340.
Pleuromamma, distribution of, 128.

— abdominalis, 128, 137.

— (djyssalis, 128.

— robusta, 128, 137.
Pleurophyllidia, 347.

— lineata, 347.

Pleuyophyllidiii lorem, 347.

— undulata, 347.

Plymouth, marine invertebrate fauna

of, 155.
Pollack, growth of, 58.
Polycha;ta, of Plymouth, 219.
Poor Cod, growth of, 79.
Porifera, of Plymouth, 185.
Proctonotus, 373.

Prosobranchiata, of Plymouth, 268.
Pseuda'tideus armatus, n. gen., n. sjj.,

115, 132, 137.
Pseudocalanns armatus, identity of, 117.

— elongatus, 137.
Pseudocyclopia giesbrechti, 122.
Pulmonata, marine species at Plymouth,

285.
Pycnogonida, of Plymouth, 258.

E.

Report of the Council, 1903-4, 310;
1904 5, 391 ; 1905-6, 415.

Rhincahinus, distribution (jf, 128.

— cornutus, 128.

— nasutus, 128, 137.

S.
Sabellarian, new British, 299.
Scales, periodic growth of, in Gadida}, 1.
Scaphopoda, of Plymouth, 285.
Schizopoda, of Plymouth, 245.
Scolecithrichina, genera of, 120.
Scolecithrix, 1 20.

— atlanticus, n. sp., 120.

— dancF, 126.

— yniuor, 119, 136, 137.

— similis, n. sp., 119, 137.
Siphonojjhora, of Plymouth, 201.
S2nnocalanus magnus, n. sj:)., 118.
Staurodoris, 336.

— verrucosa, 337.

— verrucosa, var. mollis, 338.
Stauromedusse, of Plymouth, 201.
Stiliger bellulus, 379.

— maricc, 379.
Stomatopoda, of Plymouth, 245.

T.

Tectibranchiata, of Plymouth, 276.
Thomson, J. Stuart, "The Periodic

Growth of Scales in Gadidoe as

an Index of Age," 1.

GENERAL INDEX.

491

TraehymedusEe, of Plyiaoulh, 200.

Tritoyiia, 334.

— alba, 335.

Tunicata, of Plymouth, 295.

Turbellaria, of Plymouth, 211.

U.

Undeuchceia major, 126.

W.

Weldon, Prof. W. F. K. 01)iLuary

Notice, 331.
Whiting, growth of, 85.

Wolfendcn, R. Norris, "Notes on the
Copepoda of the North Atlantic
Sea and the Faroe Channel," 110.

Worth, R. H., on the Foraminifera of
the Plymouth area, 174.

X.

Xaiithocalanus agilis, 119.

— atlanticus, n. sp., 119.

— borealis, 119.

— cristatus, n. sp., 119.

— subagilis, n. sp., 118.

Z.

Zoantliaria of Plymouth, 203.

[ 493 ]

INDEX

TO

PLYMOUTH MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA

pp. 155-298.
^Synonyms are printed in Italics.)

Acantliocliites fascicularis, 268.
Acanthodoris pilosa, 284.
Acartia Clausi, 235.

— loiigiremis, 235.
Achajus Cranchi, 255.
Acholoe astericola, 222.
Acma'a viiginea, 268.
Acrorhynclms caledonicup, 212.
Action tornatilis, 276.
Acteonia corrugata, 278.
Actinia equina, 203.

— meseinhryanthcmum = K. equina, 203.
Actinoloba dianthus = 'Metr\dium senilis

204.
Adamsia palliata, 204.

— polypus, 205.
Adeorbis subcarinatus, 271.
iEgiros punctilucens, 283.
^Eolidella Alderi, 278.

— glauca, 278.
^olidia papillosa, 278.
Aetea anguina, 259.

— n*ctu, 259.
Agalmopsis Sarsi, 201.
Agastra caliculata, 193.

— niira, 199.
Aglaoplicnia Helleri, 197.

— niyriopliyllum, 198.

— pluma, 198.

— tubulifera, 198.

Aiptasia C'ouchi, 205.
Alcyoniuni digitatuni, 202.
Alcyonidium gelatinosum, 266.

— glome ra turn, 202.

— hirsutum, 266.

— mytili, 266.

— palmatum, 202.

— parasiticuni, 266.
Alijheus ruber, 250.
Alvania cancellata, 270.

— reticulata, 270.
Amaroucium albicans, 297.

— Nordmanni, 297.

— punctum, 297.
Amathia lendigera, 266.
Amblyosyllis spectal)ilis, 220.
Ammodiscus gordialis, 176.

— incertus, 176.

— echinata, 259.
Animotrypane aulogaater, 230.
Anipelisca spinipes, 238.

— tenuicornis, 238.
Anipbicoryne fulx, 182.
Aiuphicteis curvipalea, 230,
.(l?«/>/i?V/o<(t.9=Echinocardiuni, 21 1.
Aniphilochus manudens, 239.
Aniphiloclioidcs odoiitony.\, 239.
Anipliineina dinenia, 191.
Anipliiporus Ijioculatus, 217.

— dissimulans, 216.

— lactifloreus, 216.

494

INDEX TiJ PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Amphiporus pulcher, 216.
Amphithoe rubricata, 241.
AmpViitrite gracilis, 228.
— • Johiistoiii, 229.
Amphiura Chiajii, 2U9.

— elegans, 209.

— filifomiis, 209.
Ainpliorina cterulea, 279.
Aiiapagurus lajvis, 253.
Anaplodactylus petiolatus, 258.
Anchialis agilis, 246.
Ancula cristata, 285.
Anemonia sulcata, 203.
Anomalocera Patersoiii, 235.
Anomia epliippium, 285.

— 2:)atelliformis, 286.
Aiitedon bifida, 207.

— rosacea = A. bifida, 2u7.
Antennularia anteiinina, 197.

— ramosa, 197.

Anthea cereu.5 = Anemonia sulcata,

203.
Anthura gracilis, 242.
A^itiojM = Antio})e\\si, 281.
Antiopella cristata, 281.

— liyalina, 281.
Anurella — 'M.olgula., 295.
Aonides oxycephala, 227.
Aora gracilis, 240.
Aplianostonia diversicolor, 211.

— elegans, 211.
Apherusa bispinosa, 239.
Aphrodita aculeata, 220.
Aplidium zostericola, 297.
Aplysia punctata, 277.
Aporrhais pes-pelecani, 274.
Apseudes Latreillei, 242.

— talpa, 242.

^rcf( = Barbatia, 286.
Area tetragona, 286.
Archidi.stoma aggregatuni, 297.
Archidori.s flanimea, 282.

— (gen. ?) maculata, 282.

— tuberculata, 283.
ylrdMrMS= Astacilla, 244.
Arctus ursus, 252.
Arenicola ecaudata, 231.

— Grubei, 230.

— marina, 230.
Aricia Cuvieri, 227.
Artemis = Doainia., 290.
Ascidia depressa, 296,

Ascidia nienlula, 296.

— venosa, 296.
yl,s'adzV( = Ascidiella, 296.
Ascidiella aspersa, 296.

— scabra, 296.
Astacilla intermedia, 244.

— longicornis, 244.

Astacus (/«??i?)iar!(s = Homarus vulgaris,
251.

Astarte sulcata, 288.

Asterias ff wranfiac us = Astropecten ir-
regularis, 207.

Asterias glacialis, 208.

— rubens, 208.
Asterina gibbosa, 207.
Asterope Marlae, 234.
Astropecten irregularis, 207.
Atelecyclus heterodon = A. septemdeu-

tatus, 257.
Atelecyclus septemdentatus, 257.
Athanas nitescens, 250.
Audouinia tentaculata, 228.
Aurelia aurita, 202.
Autolytus pictus, 220.

— rubropunctatus, 220.
Automolos horridus, 214.

— opbioceijhalus, 214.

— unipunctatus, 214.

Aviada tarentina = Pteria hirundo, 286.
.(4a;Mms = Thyasira, 288.

B.

Balanus Ijalauoides, 237.

— crenatus, 237.

— perforatus, 237.

— spongicola, 237.
Barbatia lactea, 286.
Barnea parva, 293.
Batliynectes longipes, 257.
Bathyporeia pelagica, 238.
Beroe cucuniis, 206.
Bergliia can'ulescens, 278.
Bicellaria ciliata, 260.
Biloculina depressa, 174.

— elongata, 174.

— ringens, 174.

— ringens, var. carinata = B. depressa,

174.

— ringens, var. ^jator/onica = B.'elougata,

174.

— tubulosa, 174.
Bispira volutacoruis, 232,

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

495

Bittium reticulatuin, 273.
Bolina infundibulum, 206.
Bolivina senariensis, 179.

— difFormis, 178.

— dilatata, 179.

— punctata, 178.

— te.Ktilaroides, 178.
Bopyrus Squillarum, 245.
Botrylloides rubruni, 298.

— violaceus, 298.

Bo ufjain villia = Margelis, 192.
Bougainvillia ramosa, 189.
Bowerbankia caudata, 267.

— imbricata, 267.

— pustulosa, 267.
Brachystomia aiiibigua, 273.
Branchiomma vesiculosum, 231.
Buccinum undatuiu, 274.
Bugula avicularia, 260.

~ flabellata, 260.

— plumosa, 260.

— turbinata, 260.
Bulimina aculeata, 178.

— elegans, 178.

— elegans, vai-. exilis^ 178.

— elegantissinia, 178.

— marginata, 178.

— pupoides, 177.

— pupoides, var. ':o?)iju?-es.s«= Virgulina

schreibersiana, 178.

— pupoides, var. marginata = 'R. margi-

nata, 178.

— pujwides, var. spinulosa = B. aculeata,

178.

— scabra (arenacea) = Verneulinapoly-

stropha, 177.
5uW« = Haminea, 276.
Bulla Cr anchi = Roxa.nm utriculus, 276
Bullinella cylindracea, 276.
Bunodes = Ch[Uma.cth coronata, 204.
Bunodes Balli, 205.

— geiuniacea, 205.
Brysophlebs Graffi, 212.

— intermedia, 212.

C.
Caberea Boryi, 259.
CaDciim glabruni, 274.

— imporforatum, 274.

— trachea = C. imperforatum, 274.
Calanus finmarchicus, 234.
Calliostoma granulatum, 269.

Callio-stoma striatum, 269.

— zizypliinus, 269.
Callochiton lasvis, 268.
Calma glaucoides, 280.
Calocaris ^lacandreee, 252.
Calycella fastigiata, 195.

— syringa, 195.
Calyptraja cliinensis, 272.
Gampanularia = Agastra, 1 93.
Campanularia angulata, 193.

— flexuosa, 193.

— Hincksi, 194.

— neglecta, 194.

— verticillata, 194.

— volubilis, 194
Campauulina repens, 194.

Campanulina re^jen.s- = Phialidium cym-

baloideuni Hydroid, 200.
Cancer iiagurus, 256.
Capitella capitata, 230.
Caprella acanthifera, 242.

— a'quilibra, 242.

— linearis, 242.

— tuberculata, 242.
Capulus hungaricus, 271.
Carcinus msenas, 257.
Cardium cchinatum, 291.

— edule, 291.

— (Lsevicardiuni) norvegicum, 291.
Carinella anmdata = C. superba, 215.
Carinella annulata, 215.

— aragoi=C. annulata, 215.

— linearis, 215.

— McIntoshii=C. annulata, 215.

— polymorplia, 215.

— superba, 215.
Caryopliyllia Sniitlii, 205.
Cassidulina Bradyi, 179.

— crassa, 179.

— ohtusa = Q. crassa, 179.
Castalia punctata, 220.
Cavolina aniccna, 278.

— aurantia, 279.

— olivacea, 279.
Cellaria fistulo.sa, 261.

— Johnstoni = 0. salicornoido!?, 261.

— salicornoides, 261.

— sinuosa, 261.
Cellepora avicularis, 264.

— CosUizii, 264.

— dichotoma, 264.

— pumicosa, 264.

496

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Callepova ramuloisa, 264.
Centropage.s typicus, 235.
Cephalothrix bioculata, 215.

— linearis, 216.
Ceratia proxima, 271.
Cerebratulus fuscu.s, 219.

— marginatus = C. pantheriuus, 219.

— pantlierinus, 219.
Cereu.s peduiiculatus, 204.
Ceriantluis Lloydi, 203.
Cerithiopsis tuberciilaris, 273.
C'l'/rithi uin = Biti'n\m, 273.

— adversum = Tniovis perver.«a, 273
Chaetopterus variopedatus, 228.
Clialiiia oculata, 180.
Clieii'ocratus Sundewalli, 240.
Chelura terebrans, 241.
Ghemnitzia rufa = Pyrgostelis inter-

rupta, 273.
Clierapliilus nanus, 251.

— trispinosiis, 251.
C7u'<on = Acantliochites, 2G8.

— =Callochiton, 268.

— = Craspedochihis cinereus, 268.

— aseWu.s = Cras23edochilus onyx, 268.
Chitonactis coronata, 204.
Chondractinia digitata, 204.
("horizopora Brongniarti, 262.
Chry.saora isosceles, 201.
Chthanialus stellatu.s, 237.
Cingula semistriata, 27 1 .

— trii'asciata, 271.
Ciona intestinalis, 296.
Circe = Gouldia, 291.
Circinalium concrescens, 298.
Cirolana liirtipes, 243.
Clatlirina coriacea, 185.

— lacunosa, 185.
Clatliurella linearis, 275.

— purpurea, 275.

— reticulata, 275.

Clava (sp. 1) leptostyla, 187.

— multicornis, 187.

— squamata, 187.
ClavelinaJepadiforniis, 297.
Cliona celata, 186.
Clitellio arenarius, 233.

ater, 233.

Clytia Johnstoni, 193.
Cochlodesma ])rietenuc, 293.
Colpodaspis pusilla, 277.

Conilera cjdindracea, 243.
Convoluta flavibacillum, 212.

— papadoxa, 212.

— .salien.s, 211.

Ooppinea are^a = Laf oiia, 194.
Coppinea arcta, 195.
Corbula gibba, 292.

— nucleus = C. gibba, 292.

— rosea = C. gibba, 292.
Corella larvseformis, 295.

— parallelogramma, 296.
Cornuspira foliacea, 176.

— involven.s, 176.
Corophium Bonelii, 241.

— crassicorne, 241.
Corycaeus anglicus, 236.

— venustus, 236.
Corymorpha nutans, 190.
Corynactis viridis, 205.
Coryne vaginata, 188.
Coryphella gracilis, 280.

— gracilis, var. = C. smaragdina, 280.

— Landsburgi, 280.

— lineata, 280,

— rufibrancliialis, 280.

— smaragdina, 280.
Corystes cassivelaunus, 258.
C/rangfon = Cheraphilus trispinosus, 251.

— =Egeon, 251.

— =Pontopliilus, 251.

— Allmanni, 250.

— 6isjMnostts = Cherapliilus nanus, 251.

— viilgaris, 250.
Craspedochilus cinereus, 268.

— onyx, 268.
Cratena viridis, 279.

Gribella oculata = Henricia .-aiiguino-

lenta, 208.
Cribrilina tigularis, 261.

— punctata, 261.

— radiata, 262.
Crisia aculeata, 264.

— cornuta, 265.

— denticulata, 265.
• — eburnea, 265.

— geniculata, 265.

— ramosa, 265.

Gristcllaria calcar (tiipica) = C rotulata,

181.
Cristellaria crepidula, 181.

— italica, 182.

— rotulata, 181.

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

497

Cristellaria subarcuatiUa = C. crepidula,
181.

— vortex, 181.
Cryptocelis alba, 214.
Cryptothir Balani, 245.
Cucumaria brunnea, 206.

— Hyndmani, 206.

— Normani, 206.

— 2)entactes = C. saxicola, 206.

— Planci = C. Normani, 206.

— saxicola, 206.
Ciiltellus pellucidns, 292.
Cuspidella costata, 195.

— grand is, 195.
Cuthona Peaclii, 278.
Cyanea capillata, 201.

— Lamarcki, 201.
Cyclopina littoralis, 236.
Cycloporus papillosus, 214.
(7y/if/in« = Bullinella, 276.

— =Volviilella, 276.

— truncata = Tonvdimn truncatula, 276.
CylindrcGcium dilatatuni, 267.
Cylindrostoma elongatum, 214.

— inerme, 213.

— quadrioculatum, 213.
Cylista undata, 204.

— viduata, 204.

Cynthia limacina = Fovhese\\a, tessalata,

295.
Ci/p-fea = Trivia, 272.
Cyprina islandica, 288.
Cytseandra areolata, 192.
Cythere emaciata, 234.

— oblonga, 234.

— quadridentata, 234.

— runcinata, 234.
Cijtherea= Meretrix, 290.

D.

Daschone Bombyx, 231.
Dasmysis longicornis, 249.
De/rrt7iaa = Clathurella, 275.

— =Mangilia, 275.

Delagia r/ircf o^^fcri = Hypophorella ex-

pansa, 267.
Dendronotus arborescem = D. f rondosus,

282.

— frondosus, 282.

Dentalina suiarcitata = Nodosaria com-
munis, 181.
Dentalium entalis, 285.

Depastrum cyathiforme, 201.
Dexamine spinosa, 239.
Diastopora obelia, 265.

— patina, 265.

— sarniensis, 265.

— suborbicularis, 265.
Diastylis Bradyi, 245.

— Isevis, 245.

— Rathkei, 245.

— rostrata = 'D. la^vis, 245.
Diazona violacea, 297.
Dinopliilus tseniatus, 219.
Diogenes varians, 253.
Diplodonta rotundata, 288.
Dipliasia atteimata, 196

— pinaster, 196.

— pinnata, 196.

— rosacea, 196.

■ — tamarisca, 196.

Diphyllidia lineata = Pleurophyllidia

Loveni, 282.
Dipurcna lialterata, 191.

— ophiogaster, 191.
Discorbina Bertlieloti, 183.

— globularis, 183.

— orbicularis, 183.

— parisiensis, 183.

— rosacea, 183.
Distaplia rosea, 297.
Dodecaceria concharuni, 228.
Doliolum nationalis, 298.

— tritonis = 'D. nationalis, 298.
Donax a7iatinus = 'D. vittatus, 289

— politus = D. variegatus, 289.

— variegatus, 289.

— vittatus, 289.
Dondersia = ^Myzomenia, 267.
Donovania minima, 274.
Dom =Acanthodoris, 284.

— =Arcliidoris, 282.

— =:Jorunna, 283.

— = Lamellidoris, 284.

— =Platydoris, 283.

— =Ilostanga, 283.
Dosinia exolcta, 290.
Doto coronata, 281.

— fragilis, 281.

— pinnatifida, 282.
Drepanopliorus spectabilis, 217.
Dromia vulgaris, 254.

Dryope crenatipalmata^Ximcoldk crena-
tipalma, 241.

408

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Dnjope irrorata = Unicola crenatipalma,

241.
Dynameiie rubra, 243.

E,
Ebalia Bryeri = Y.. tumefacta, 254.
Ebalia Cranclii, 254,

— Pennanti = E. tuberosa, 2-)4.

— tuberosa, 254.

— tumefacta, 254.
Echhiocardiuin cordatuin, 211.

— Havescens, 211.

— pennatifiduin, 211.
Echinocyamu.« pu.sillus, 210.
Echinu.s acutns, 210.

— esculeutus, 210.

— miliaris, 210.

Ectinosoma atlanticnm = Micru.'stella

norvegica, 236.
Ecto})leura Dumoitieri, 191.
Ed\vard.sia Beautempsi, 203.

— carnea, 203.
Egeon fasciatus, 251.

— Rcnlptus, 251.
£Mo»e = Moscliites, 295.
Eloactis Mazeli, 203.
Elysia viridis, 278.
Emarginula coiiica, 268.

— ti.'^sura, 268.

— Miilleri = E. fissma, 268.

— retiadata = 'E. fissura, 268.

— rosea ='E. conica, 268.
Embletonia pulchra, 279.
Enriis ensis, 292.

— siliqua, 292.
Enterostonia austriacuin, 213.

— fiiigaliannm, 213.
Entoxolenia = hiigit\\'d, 179, IfcO.

— globosa, var. lineata = L-dgi'.ivd liUL-ala,

180.

— marginata, var, lagenoiiles = Ijagii\vA

lagenoidos, 181.

— imirginata, var. qmidrata — Lageua

quad rata, 181.

— squamosa, var. hexagona = Lagena

hexagoiia, 180.
£ofe = .Eolidella, 278.

— = Amiiliorina, 279.

— =^olidia, 278.

— =Calma, 280.

— =Cavoliiia, 279.

— =Coryphella, 280.

EoKs = Cratena, 279.

— =Cuthona, 278.

— =Facelina, 280.

— Farrani = Gai\vma, picta, 279.

— =Galvina, 279.

— pc<a = Gal vina picta, 279.
Epliesia gracili-s, 227.
Epizoaiithus Couclii, 203.

— incru.statu.s, 203.
Erato Isevis, 272.
Erichthonius abditus, 241.
Erythrops elegans, 247.

— 2)ygm(/'a = E. elegan.s, 247.
Escharoides (juincuncialis, 262.
Eteone picta, 224.
Euchilota pilosella, 199.
Eucratea chelata, 259.
Eudendrium alljum, 189.

— capillare, 189.
Eudendrium ranu-um, 189.

— ramosuin, 189.
Eudorella truncatula, 245.
Eulalia aurea, 223.

— Claparedei, 223.

— pallida, 223.

— obtecta, 223.

— ornata, 223.

— punctifera, 223.

— viridis, 223.

— Eulima (Leiostraca) bilimiata, 274.

— clistorta, auctt. nee Deshaye.s = E. iu-

curva, 273.

— (Leiostraca) glabra, 274.

— incurva, 273.

— polita, 273.

— subulata = E. (Leiostraca) glabra, 274.
Eumargarita grtenlaudica, 269.
Euuemertes echinoderma, 210.

— gracilis, 216.

— Nee.si, 216.
Eunice Harassi, 225.
Eunicella Cavolini, 202.
Eimoa nodosa, 221.
Eupagurus Bernhardu-s, 253.

— cuanensis, 253.

— Prideau.xi, 253.

— sculptimanus, 253.
Euphrosyne foliosa, 222.
Euphy.sa aurata, 191.
Eupolia curta, 218.
Eurylepta cornuta, 215.
Euryonome aspera, 255.

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

490

Euterpe acutifron?, 236.

— gracilis = E. acutifrons, 236.
Eutima insignis, 200.
Evadne Nordmanni, 233.
Evarne impar, 222.

F.

Facelina coronata, 280.
^ Drummondi, 280.

— punctata, 280.
Favorinus albus, 280.
Fecampia erythrocepliala, 213.
Filograna iiuplexa, 232.
Fissurella grseca, 269.

— reticulata = Y. grseca, 269.
Fhistra papyracea, 260.

— (?) .securifrons, 260.
Flustrella liispida, 266.
Forbesella tessellata, 295.
Fovia affinis, 214.
Fragariuni elegans, 298.
Fritillaria Ijorealis, 298.

Fusus island icus = Tvitonoh\sns gracilis,

274.

G.

Galatliea dispersa, 252.

— intermedia, 252.

— squamifera, 252.

— strigosa, 252.
Galeodina carinata, 271.
Galvina cingulata, 279.

— exigua, 279.

— picta, 279.

— tricolor, 280.

( Jammarella brevicaudata, 240.

( Janiniaropsis erythrophthalma, 240.

Gammarus campy lop.s, 240.

— locusta, 240.

— marinus, 240.
Gari costulata, 291.

— (Psammocola) depressa, 292.

— ferroensis, 292.

— tellinella, 292.
Garveia nutans, 189.
Gastrochiena dubia, 293.

— modiolina^G. dubia, 293.
Gas^rosaccus = Haplostylus, 246.
Gastrosiiccus sanctu.s, 246.
Gattiola = Amblyosylli-s, 220.
Gattyana cirrosa, 221.
Ge&ta=Upogebia, 252.
Gemmnria = Zanclea, 1 88.

Gemmaria implexa, 192.
Gepliyra Dohrni, 205.
(Ter!/onm= Liriautha, 200.
Gibbula cineraria, 269.

— magus, 269.

— tumida, 269.

— umbilicata, 269.
Globigerina bulloides, 182.

— iuflata, 182.
Glycera convoluta, 226.

— gigantea, 226.

— lapidum, 226.
Glycimeris glycimeris, 286.
Gnathia maxillaris, 242.
Goniada maculata, 226.
Goniodoris castanea, 284.

— nodosa, 284.

Gonoplax angulata = G. rbomboides,258.
Gonoplax rlioniboides, 258.
Gonothyroea Lovdni, 194.
Gould ia minima, 291.
Grantia = Sycoi\, 185.

— ciliaia = Sycon corouatum, 185.
Gyge Galathese, 245.

Gyrator hermaphroditus, 212.

H.

Halcarapa chrysantliellum, 203.
Halecium Beani, 195.

— lialecinum, 195.

— labrosum, 196.

— tenellum. 196.
Halichondria panicea, 186.
Haliclystus auricula, 201.
Halipbysema tumanowiczii, 176.
Halisarca Dujardini, 186.
Haliokema Lankesteri, 196.
Halosydna gelatinosa, 222.
Hamiuea hydatis, 276.
Hancockia eudactylota, 282.
Haplopliragmium canariense, 176.

— fontinense, 176.

— globigeriniforme, 176.
Haplostylus Xormani, 246.
Harmotlioti areolaUi, 222.

— imbricata, 221.

— lunulata, 221.

— setosissima, 221.

— spinifera, 221.
Helcion pellucida, 268.
Hemimysis Lamornaj, 247.
Henricia sanguinolenta, 208.

500

INDEX TO TLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Hermrca bifida, 277.

— dendiitica, 277.
Herniione liystrix, 221.
Hero formosa, 281.
Heterocordyle Conybearei, 190.
Heteromysis formosa, 246.
Hippulijte = Sinrontocariiis, 250.
Hipijolyte fascigera, 250.

— varians, 250.

— viridis, 250.
Hippothoa distans, 263.

— divaricata, 263.

— flagellum = 'H.. distans, 263.
Histriobdella liomari, 219.
Holotlmria nigra, 207.
Homarus vulgaris, 251.
Hyala vitrea, 271.
Hyalinoecia tubicola, 225.
Hyas araneus, 255.

— coarctatus, 255.
Hypocodon prolifer, 191.
Hydractinia echinata, 187.
Hydrallmania falcata, 197.
Hydrobia itfoa; = Paludestrina stagnalis,

271.
Hydroides norvegica, 232.
Hymeniacidon sanguineum, 186.

— s«6ere« = Snberites domuncula, 186.
Hyperia galba, 238.
Hypophorella expansa, 267.
Hyporhynclms armatus, 212.

— pencillatus, 213.

I.

Ifkilia = ldalma, 285.

Idalina (Idaliella) aspersa, 285.

Idothea baltica, 243.

— emarginata, 244.

— linearis, 244.

— neglecta, 244.

— 2Jarallela = I. prismatica, 244.

— pelagica, 244.

— prismatica, 244.

— tricuspidata = l. baltica, 243.
Inachus dorsettensis, 255.

— durynchus, 255.
Iphimedia minuta, 239.

— obesa, 239.
Ipliinoe trispinosa, 245.
Irene pellucida, 200.
Ischyrocerus minutus, 241.
Isias clavipes, 235.

Isodidya = Tvfigo!i'ia, 186.

— dissimilis = Tvagosia polypoides, 186.

Jaera albifrons = J. marina, 244.
Jsera marina, 244.
Janira maculosa, 244.
Jorunna Jolmstoni, 283.

K.

Kefersteinia cirrata, 220.
Kellia suborbicularis, 288.

L.

Labidocera WoUastoni, 235.
Lachesia = Dono\iinia, 274.
Lacuna divaricata, 270.

— pallidula, 270.

— parva, 270.

— puteolus = Ij. parva, 270.

— vi7icta = L. divaricata, 270.
Lafoea dumosa, 194.

— fruticosa, 195.
Lagena apieulata, 179.

— aspersa, 180.

— botelliformis, 179.

— clavata, 179.

— distoma, 180.

— globosa, 179.

— gracilis, 1 80.

— gracillima, 179.

— hexagona, 180.

— hispida, 180.

— Isevis, 179.

— lagenoides, 181.

— lineata, 180.

— margin ata, 180.

— marginata, var. ornata, 180.

— orbignyana, 181.

— quadrata, 181.

— semistriata, 180.

— squamosa, 180.

— striata, 180.

— sulcata, 180.

— sulcata, var. interrupta, 180.

— trigono-marginata, 180.

— vulgaris = h. lyevis, 179.

— vulgaris, var. clavata = L. clavata, 1 79.

— vulgaris, var. gracilis = L. gracilis, 1 80.

— vulgaris, var. substriata — L. striata,

180.

Lagenipora social is, 261.

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

501

Lagisca extenuata, 221.

— floccosa, 221.

— rarispina, 221.
Lamellaria perspicua, 272.

— tentaculata = L. perspicua, 272.
Lamellidoris aspersa, 284.

— bilamellata, 284.

— depressa, 284.

— oblonga, 284.

— pusilla, 284.

— sparsa, 284.
Lanice conchilega, 229.
Lar Sabellarum, 188.

Lar Sabellarum = Willia stellata hy-

droid, 192.
Lasa?a rubra, 289.
Leander serratus, 249.

— squilla, 249.
Lepas anatifera, 237.
Lepidonotus clava, 221.

— squaniatus, 221.
Lepralia foliacea, 2G2.

— Pallasiana, 262.

— pertu-sa, 262.
Leptolabis luciensis, 186.
Leptoniysis gracilis, 247.

— liiigvura, 247.

— mediterranea, 247.
Lepton squamosum, 289.
Leptoplana drasbachensis, 214.

— fallax, 214.

— tremellaris, 214.
Leuconia bidentata, 285.
Leucosoleiiia botryoides, 185,

— complicata, 185.

— variabilis, 185.
Leucothoe spinicarpa, 239.
Lichenopora hispida, 266.
Ligia oceanica, 244.
Lima hians, 287.

— Loscombi, 288.

— subauriculata, 288.
Limapontia capitata, 278.

— nigra = L. capitata, 278.
Limnoria lignorum, 243.
Limopsis aurila, 286.
Lineus bilineatus, 218.

— gesserensis, 218.

— lacteus, 218.

— longissimus, 218.

— marinus = Ij. longissimus, 218.

— obscurus = Jj. gesserensis, 218.

Liriautha appendiculata, 200.
Littorina littorea, 270.

— neritoides, 270.

— obtusata, 270.

— rudis, 270.
Lizzia blond ina, 192.
Loimia medusa, 229.
Loligo Forbesi, 294.

— Marmora^, 294.

— media, 294.
Lomanotus marmoratus, 281 .

— jDortlandicus, 281.
Longipedia Scotti, 236.
Lucernaria = Depastrum, 201.

— campanulata, 201.
Lucina borealis, 288.

— spinifera, 288.
Lucinopsis undata, 290.
Luidia Sarsi, 207.
Lumbriconereis impatiens, 226.

— Latreillei, 226.
Lutraria elliptica, 290.
Lyonsia norvegica, 293.
Lysianax (Lysianassa) Costtc, 238.
Lysidice ninetta, 225.

M.

Maclovia giga7itea = M. iricolor, 226.

— iricolor, 226.
Macoma balthica, 289.
Macromysis flexuosa, 248.

— inermis, 248.
Macropodia egyptia, 254.

— longirostris, 254.

— rostratus, 255.
Macropsis Slabberi, 249.
Macrorliynchus croceus, 212.

— helgolandicus, 212.

— Naegeli, 212.
Mactra stultorum, 289.
Madra = Spisula, 290.
Moera grossimaua, 240.

— Othonis, 240.

— semiserrata, 240.
Magalia perarmata, 220.
Magelona papilicornis, 228.
Maia squinado, 255.
Malacobdella grossa, 217.
Malmgrenia castanea, 222.
Mangilia attenuata, 275.

— (Bellardiella) gracilis, 275.

— nebula, 275.

502

INDEX TO I'LYMOUTII FAUNA.

Manzonia costata, 271.
Margolis autunnialis, 192.

— Leila, 192.

— britaniiica, 192.

— piincipis, 192.
Margelliuin octoinuictatum, 192.
Mavijimlla = Evi\to, 272.
Marphysa Belli, 225.

sanguinea, 225.

Meganicera = MxTa. semiserrata, 240.
ilfe^a ?)!j)Ms = Leucouia, 285.
Melinna adriatica, 230.
]Melita gladiusa, 240.

— obtusata, 240.

— palinata, 240.
Menibranipora aurita, 2C0.

— catenularia, 200.

— curvirostris, 260.

— Dumerili, 260.

— Flemingi, 260.

— flustioides, 260.

— imbellis, 261.

— Lacroixi, 261.

— lineata, 261.

— membranacea, 261.

— pilosa, 261.

— Rosselii, 261.

— nitida, 262.
Meretrix chione, 290.
Merona cornucopia), 187.
Mesostoma neapolitauiim, 212.
Metridiiim senilis, 204.
Micrella rufa, 218.
Micropora coriacea, 261.
Microporella ciliata, 262.

— impressa, 262.

— Malusii, 262.

— violacea, 262.
Microsetella norvegica, 2.36.
Microstoma groenlandicum, 212.
Micriira aurantiaca, 218.

— ca7idida = ^L lactea, 218.

— fasciolata, 218.

— lactea, 218.

— purpurea, 2 1 8.
Miliolina agglutinans, 176.

— bicornis, 175.

— bicornis, var. elegans, 175.

— boueana, 175.

— circularis, 175.

— oblonga, 175.

— secans, 175.

Miliolina seniinuluni, 175.

— semiitulum, var. oblonga = M. ob-

longa, 175.

— seminulum, var. disciformis = M.

secans, 175.

— sub rotunda, 175.

— tricarinata, 175.

— trigonula, 175.
Mitrocomella fulva, 199.
Modiolaria mannorata, 286.
Molgula oculata, 295.

— simplex, 295.
Monoculodes carinatus, 239.
Monodonta crassa, 269.
Monophorum striatum, 214.
Monoporus rul>ropunctatus, 211.
Monotus albus, 214.
Monotus fuscus, 214.

— lineatus, 214.
Montacuta = Tellim ya, 288.

— substriata, 288.
Morchellioides Alderi, 298.
Morchellium argus, 297.
Moschites cirrosa, 295.
Mucronella cocciuea, 263.

— Peachi, 263.

— variolosa, 263.

— ventricosa, 263.
Muggioea atlandica, 201.
Munna Khiyeri, 244.
M!nY':c = Ocinebra, 274.
Mya truncata, 292.
Myrianida/asa'rt^a = M. pinnigera, 220.

— pinnigera, 220.
Myriotliela phrygia, 188.
Mysidopsis angusta, 247.

— gibbosa, 247.
Mysis = Dasymysi?, 249.

— =Hemim}'sis, 247.

— =Neomysis, 249.

— = Schistomysis, 248.
il/?//77!(.f = Vol.sella, 286.
Mytilus edulis, 286.
Myxicola infundibulum, 232.
Myzomenia banyulensis, 267.
Myzostonium cirriferum, 233.

N.
NtE-sa bidentata, 243.
Nassa incrassata, 275.

— reticulata, 275.

Xatica (Lunatia) Alderi, 272.

INDEX TO TLYMOUTH FAUNA.

503

Natica (Lunatia) catena, 272.
Nebalia bipe*, 237.
Nematonereis unicorni.?, 225.
Nemertopsis flavida, 216.

— tenuis, 216.
Neomysis vulgaris, 249.
Nethys caeca, 225.

— cirrosa, 225.

— Hombeigi, 225.
Nereis cultrifera, 224.

— diversicolor, 224.

— Dumerilli, 224.

— fucata, 224.

— irrorata, 224.

— longissima, 224.

— pelagica, 224.
Nerine cirratulus, 227.

— coniocephala, 227.

— foliosa — 'N. coniocephala, 227.
Nerocila neapolitaiia, 243.
Nicolea zo.stericola, 229.

Nika edulis, 251.
Nodosaria calomorplia. 181.

— com munis, 181.

— pyrula, 181.

— scalaris, 181.

Nonionina harlecanu = 'S. mnbilicatula,
184.

— depressula, 184.

— ie/fct'j/.su = Haplophragiuium laiiari-

ense, 176.

— scapha, 184.

— .stelligera, 184.

— turgida, 184,

— umbilicatula, 184.
Notomastus latericeus, 230.

— rubicund us, 230.
Nucula nitida, 285.

— nucleus, 285.
Nyctiphancs Couchi, 245.
Nymphon gallicuni, 258.

— gracile, 259.

— rubruni, 259.

O.
Obi'laria gelatinosa, 193.
Ohelia = OheUiia, 193.
Obelia dichotonia, 193.

— geniculata, 193.

— longis.sima, 193.
~ lucifera, 199.

— nigra, 199.

NEW SERIES. vol,. VII. N(J. 5.

Ocinebra erinacea, 274.
Oc7i us = Cucuniaria, 206.
Odopjts = Polypus vulgaris, 295.
Octorchis Gegenbauri, 200.
Odontosyllis ctenostoma, 219.

— fulgurans, 219.

— gibba, 220.

Orfos^o?>w« = Turbonilla, 273.

— pallida = Brachystomia anibigua, 273.

Oerstedia dorsalis, 217.

— immutabilis, 217.

— nigra, 217.
Oikopleura dioica, 298.
Oithona plumifera, 236.

— similis, 236.

Oligocladus sauguinolentus, 215.
Oncaea niediterranea, 236.

— minuta, 236.

— subtilis, 236.
Onoba striata, 271.
Onuphis coucliilega, 225.
Opercularella hi.spida, 194.

— lacerata, 194.
Oi)liiactis Balli, 209.
Opluocnida Inachiata, 209.
Opldocoma (iranulata = 0. nigra, 2(i9.

— nigra, 209.

— ro.sH7(/ = Ophiothrix fragilis, 210.
Ophiopsila aranea, 209.
Opliiothrix fragilis, 210.
Ophiura albida, 208.

— ciliaris, 208.
Oi)lu'y()trocha puerilis, 226.
Orbulina universa, 182.
Orchestia littorea, 238.

— niediterranea, 238.
Orchoniene Batei, 238.
Orchonienella ciliata = 0. nana, 238.

nana, 238.
Oscanius membranaceus, 277.
Ostrea edulis, 287.
Otina uti-s 285.
Ovula (Simuia) patula, 272.
Owenia fusiforinis, 228.
Oxypolia beaumontiana, 218.

P.
Pachydrilus sp., 233.
Pa«7tint.'; = Anapagurus, 253.

— =Eupagurus, 253.

— Forbesi = Eupagurus .sculptimauus,

253.

2M

504

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Patemon = Leander, 249.

— = Palaimonetes, 249.
Palmnonetes varians, 249.
Palinurus vulgari.s, 252.
Palio Lessoni, 283.
Pallasia luurata, 232.
I'allene breviro.^tris, 258.
raliuicellaria Skenoi, 263.
Palniipe.s membrcmaceus = P. placenta,

207.

— placenta, 207.
Paludestrina stagnalis, 271.
Pandalus annulicornis = P. Montagui,

249.

— brevirostris, 250

— Montagui, 249.

Pandora obtusa = 'P. inccquivalvis, 293.

— insequivalvis, 293.

— rostrata — 'P. ina3quivalvis, 293.
Paracalanu.s parvus, 234.

Paractiu>< mutabilis, n. sp. = Ophryo-

trocha puerilis, 226.
Paraphellia expansa, 204.
Parapontella brevicornis, 235.
Paratheniisto oblivia, 238.
Paratylus Swammerdami, 239.
Pariambus typicus, 241.
Patella vulgata, 268.
Patellina corrugata, 183.
Pecten niaximus, 287.

— (^Equipecten) opercularis, 287.

— (Hinnites) puaio, 287.

— (Palliolum) tigerinus, 287.

— (Chlamys) varius, 287.
Pectinaria (Amphictene) auricoma, 230.

— (Lagis) Koreni, 230.
Pectiinctdns = G\\c'micvis, 286.
Pedicillina cernua, 267.

— gracilis, 267.
Perigonimus repeus, 189, 191.

— serpens, 189.
Perophora Listeri, 297.
Petalostoma minutuni, 233.
Phallusia mamillata, 296.
Phascolion strombi, 233.
Phasianella puUus, 270.
Phialidium buskianum, 200.

— cymbaloideum, 200.

— temporarium, 200.
Philine aperta, 276.

— catena, 276.

— punctata, 276.

Philine scabra, 276.
Fhilomedcs interpuncta, 234.
Pholadidea loscombiana, 293.

— 2Mpyracea = 'P. loscombiana, 293.
Pholas dactylus, 293.

— j)arva = BaTnea, parva, 293.
Pholoci minuta, 222.
Phoronis liippocrepia, 233.
Phoxichilus spinosus, 258.
Phtisica marina, 241.
Phylactella collaris, 263.
Phyllodoce laminosa, 223.

— maculata, 223.

— Paretti, 224.

— rubiginosa, 223.
Pilumnus liirtellus, 256.
Pinna fragilis, 287.

— rudis = 'P. fragilis, 287.
Pinnotheres pisum, 258.
Pirimela denticulata, 256.
Pisa biaculeata, 255.

— Gibbsi=V. biaculeata, 255.
Plagiostoma caudatum, 213.

— dioicum, 213.

— elongatuni, 213.

— Girardi, 213.

— Koreni, 213.

— pseudomaculatum, 213.

— sagitta, 213.

— siphonophoruHi, :il3.

— vittatum, 213.
Planorbulina mediterranensis, 183.

— vidgaris — V. mediterranensis, 183.
Platydoris (gen. ?) testudinaria, 283.
Platyonichus ?iasw<ws = Portunnius, 257.
Pleurobranchia pileus, 206.
Pleurobranchus plumula, 277.

— = Oscanius, 277.
Pleurophyllidia Loveni, 282.
Pleurotoma = Mangilia, 275.
Plumularia Alleni, 198.

— Catharina, 198.

— echinulata, 198.

— frutescens, 198.

— halecoides, 198.

— pinnata, 199.

— setacea, 199.

— similis, 199.
Podocerus falcatus, 241.
Podocoryne carnea, 187, 192.
Podon intermedins, 234.

— Leuckarti, 234.

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

50i

Poecilochsetus serpens, 228,
Polybius Henslowi, 257.
Polycarpa pomai'ia, 295.
Polijcera Lessonii = Fa\io Lessoni, 283.

— ocellata = Palio Lessoni, 283.
Polycera quadrilineata, 283.
Polycirrus aurantiacus, 229.

— caliendrum, 229.
Polydora caeca, 228.

— ciliata, 227.

— flava, 227.

— hoplura, 228.

Polygordius (apogon Mcintosh), 219
Polymastia mamillaris, 186.
Polymnia nebulosa, 229.

— nesidensis, 229.
Polymorpliina compressa, 182.

— Gibba, 182.

— lac tea, 182.

— ladea, var. oblonga = F. oblonga, 182.

— oblonga, 182.
Polynoe scolopendrina, 222.
Polyoplithalmus pictns, 230.
Polypus vulgaris, 295.
Polystomella arctica, 185.

— crispa, 184.

— macella, 184.

— striatopunctata, 185.

— subnudosa, 184.

— umbilicaluta=V . striatopunctata, 185.
Pomatoceros triqueter, 232.
Pontobdella muricata, 233.
Pontophilus spinosus, 251.

Porania pul villus, 207.
Porcellana longicornis, 254.

— platycheles, 254.
Porella concinna, 262.
Poro/n'ffl = Lassea, 289.
Portumnus biguttatus, 257.
Portunus arcuatus, 256.

— corrugatus, 256.

— depurator, 256.

— holsatus, 257.

— marmoreus, 257.

— puber, 257.

— pusillus, 257.

Port (t7ius = Bathynectes, 257.
Potamilla incerta, 232.

— renifonnis, 231.

— Torelli, 231.
Promesostonia agile, 212.

— marmoratum, 212.

Promesostoma ovoideuni, 212.

— solea, 212.

Proneomenia — Rliopalonienia, 267.
Proporus venenosus, 211.
Prostlieceroeus vittatus, 214.
Prosthiostomum sipliunculus, 215.
Protella pliasnia, 241.
Protodiilus Leuckarti, 219.
Protula tubularia, 232.
Provortex affinis, 213.

— balticus, 213.

— rubrobacillus, 213.
Proxenetes cochlear, 212.

— flabellifer, 212.
Psammobia = Gavi, 291.
Pseudocalanus elongatus, 235.
Pseudocuma cercaria, 245.
Pseudorhynchus bifidus, 212.
Pteria hirundo, 286.
Pterocirrus niacroceros, 223.
Pulvinulina Menardii, 183.

— repanda, 183.
Purpura lapillus, 275.
Pycnoclavella aurilucens, 297.
Pycnogonuni littorale, 258.
Pyrgonia anglicum, 237.
Pyrgostelis interrupta, 273.

R.

Rliizostoma octopus, 202.
Rhopalomenia Aglaophenice, 267.
Rhyncophora bispinosum, 263.
Rhynchopora = Rliy ncliozoon, 263.
Rissoa — Ceratia, 27 1 .

— =Cingula, 271.

— =Hyala, 271.

— =Manzonia, 271.

— =Onoba, 271.

— Peanu = Alvania reticulata, 270.

— calathus = Alvsmia reticulata,270.

— cingillus = C'ingi\\a, trifasciata, 271.

— cr en 111 at a = A\va.nia cancellata, 270.

— Za6msa = Zippora membranacea, 271.

— striatula = Ga.\eod'ma carinata, 271.
Rissoia parva, 270.

Rocinela damnoniensis, 242.

— Dunierili, 243.
Rossia macrosoma, 294.
Ro.stang coccinea, 283.
Rotalia Beccarii, 184.

— nitida, 184.
iiote^inff = Nonionina, 184.

506

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Rotalina = Trochammina, 176.

— co?ica?)iera<a = Discorbina globularis,

183.

— mrtmz7to = Discoil3ina rosacea, 183.
Roxauia utricuhis, 276.

Runoina coronata, 277.

— Ha7icock'i=K. coronata, 277.

S.
Sabella pavonina, 231.
Sabellaria alveoUta, 232.

— spinulo.sa, 232.
Saccopsis Alleni, 236.
Sacculina Carcini, 237.
Sagartia = Cylista, 204.

— bellis = Ceve\\s pedunculatus, 204.
Sagartia miniata, 204.

— nivea, 204.

— 2)arasit ica = Adamsia polypus, 205.
■ — troglodytes = Cylista, undata, 204.
Sagilta bipunctata, 233.

Halpa democratica-mucronata = ^. muc-
ronata, 298.

— fuwiformis, 298.

— mucronata, 298.

— runcinata-fusiformis — ^. fusiformLs,

298.
Saphenia mirabilis, 200.
Sarcodictyon catenata, 202.
Sarsia exiniia, 190.

— gemmifera, 190.

— prolifera, 191.

— tubulosa, 191.
Saxicava arctica, 292.

— rugosa, 293.
Scala clathratula, 273.

— clathrus, 273.

— Turtoni, 273.
,?caZan« = Scala, 273.

— com7Jiunis = Scala clathrus, 273.
Scalibregma inflatum, 231.
Scalisetosus assimilis, 222.

— cominunis, 222.
Scalpellum vulgare, 237.
Scaphander lignarius, 276,
Schistomysis arenosa, 248.

— ornata, 248.

— Parkeri, 248.

— spiritus, 248.
Schizoporella armata, 263.

— auriculata, 263.

— Cecilii, 264.

Schizoporella cristata, 264.

— Hyalina, 264.

— Johnstoni, 264.

— linearis, 264.

— sim,plex = 'S). Johnstoni, 264.

— spinifera, 264.

— unicornis, 264.
Scliizotheca lissa, 264.
Scleroclieilus minutus, 231.
Scololepis fuliginosa, var. macroclmta

major = ii. vulgaris, 227.

— Giardi, 227.

— vulgaris, 227.
Scoloplos armiger, 227.
Scrobicularia piperata = S. plana, 289.

— plana, 289.
Scrupocellaria reptans, 259.

— scrupea, 259.

— scruposa, 259.

ScyUitriis ardus = Arctws ursus, 252.
Sepia elegans, 294.

— officinalis, 294.
Sepiola atlantica, 294.

— scandica, 294.
Serpula vermicularis, 232.
Sertularella Gayi, 196.

— polyzonias, 196.
Sertularia abietina, 196.

— argeutea, 197.

— cupressina, 197.

— operculata, 197.

— pumila, 197.

Siphonostoma (Flabelligera) affinis,231.
Siriella armata, 246.

— Clausi, 246.

— crassipes = Q. jaltensis, 246.

— jaltensis, 246.
Skenea planorbis, 271.
Sniittia cheilostoma, 263.

— Landsborovii, 263.

— trispinosa, 263.
Solaster papposus, 208.
Solecurtus antiquatus, 292.

— ca7ulidus = S. scopula, 292.

— scopula, 292.
SoZen = Cultellus, 292.

— =Ensis, 292.
Solen vagina, 292.
Solniaris coronanthe, 200.
Spatangus purpureus, 211.
Spharodoruyn 2^enjwhts = Ephesia graci-
lis, 227.

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

507

Sphseroidina dehiscent, 182.
Spliseroma curtuni, 243.

— serratum, 243.
Sphsorosyllis ovigira, 220.
Spirillina = Cornuspira, 1 7G.

— armacea = Ainniodiscus incertus,176.
Spirillina margaritifera, 182.

— vivipara, 182.

^inroloculina depressa = ^. limbata, 174.

— depressa, var. rotHndata = S. planu-

lata, 174.

— excavata, 174.

— fragilissima, 174.

— limbata, 174.

— planulata, 174.

— tenuiseptata, 174,
Spirontocaris Cranclii, 250.
Sijirorbis borealis, 232.
Spisula elliptica, 290.

— solida, 290.
Squilla Desmaresti, 245.
Stauridium productum, 188.
Staurocophalus ciliatiis, 226.

— pallidas, 226.

— rubrovitlatus, 226.
Steenstrupia rubra = Corymorpha Me-
dusa, 190.

Steenstrupia rubra, 191.
Stenorynchns j^halangium = 'Macro'podia,
rostratus, 255.

— temnrostris = Macropodia longiros-

tris, 254.
Stenotlioe marina, 239.

— monoculoides, 239.

— seto.-;a, 239.
Sthenelais lioa, 222.
Stiliger belhilus, 277.
Stomatopora granulata, 266.

— Johnstoni, 266.

— major, 266.
Styelojjsis grossularia, 295.
Stylaroides (Trophonia) plumosa, 231.
Stylochoplana maciilata, 214.
Stylostonium variabile, 215.
Suberites dorauncula, 186.

Sycon compressum, 185.

— coronatum, 185.

Syllis (Ehlersia) cornuta, 219.

— gracilis, 219.
Synapta digitata, 206.

— inhaerens, 206.

%Hcori/jie = Sar3ia liydroid, 190.

Syncoryne eximia, 188.

— (sp. ?) gravata, 188.

T.
Talitrus locusta, 238.
Tanais tomentosus, 242.
Tapes aureus, 291.

— decussatus, 291.

— pullastra, 291.

— virgiueus, 291.

Tealia cras.<MVornts = Urticina felina,205.
Tellimya ferruginosa, 288.
Tellina crassa, 289.

— donacina, 289.

— fabula, 289.

— incarnata = T. squalida, 289.

— solidula = MAComa. balthica, 289.

— squalida, 289.
Temora longicornis, 235.
Terebella lapidaria, 229.
Terebellides Stroemi, 229.
Teredo naval is, 293.
Tergipes despoctus, 279.
Tethya lyncurium, 186.
Tetrastemma ambiguum, 217.

— candidum, 217.

— ceplialophorum, 217.

— Jlavidum = 'NemiiTto'ps\s llavida, 216.

— flnvidum, var. ion^mmitm = Nemer-

topsis tenuis, 216.

— melanoceplialum, 217.

— vermiculatum, 217.
Textularia agglutinans, 177.

— agglutinans, var. porrecta, 177.

— cuneiformis, var. conica = T. troclius,

177.

— gramen, 177.

— trochus, 177.

— sagittula, 177.

— variabilis, var. difformis = Bolivina

difformis, 178.

— variabilis, var. Icevigata = Bolivina

textilaroides, 178.

— variabilis, var. .s2)rt</m?a(a = Bolivina

dilatata, 179.
Thalassema neptuni, 233.
Thalestris mysis, 236.
Thanma7itias = 0heha, 199.
Thecacera pennigera, 283.
Thelepus setosus, 229.
Tlioe sphyrodeta, 205.
Thracia fragili.s, 293.

508

INDEX TO PLYMOUTH FAUNA.

Thracia phaseolina = T. f ragilis, 293.

— pubescens, 293.
Tliuiaria articulata, 197.
Thyasira flexnosa, 288.
Thyone fusus, 206.

Thysano2)oda='Nyct\Y)ha.n(is Couclii, 245.
Tiara pileata, 191.

Tiaropsis multicirrata, 199.
Todaropsis Eblanse, 294.
Tomopteris helgolandica, 224.
Tornatina mamillata, 276.

— truncatula, 276.

Tragosia infundibuliformis, 186.

— polypoides, 186.
Tricliydra pudica, 195.
Triforis perversa, 273.
Triopa clavigera, 283.
Triticella Boecki, 267.
Tritonia Hombergi, 282.

— (Candiella) lineata, 282.

— (Candiella) plebeia, 282.
Tritonofusus gracilis, 274.
Trivia europsea, 272.
Trochammiiia inflata, 177.

— ocliracea, 176.
2Voc/nts = Calliostoma, 269.

— =Gibbula, 269.

— lineatus ='Monodonta crassa, 269.

— iindidatus = 'Euma,Tga.rita, Groenlan-

dica, 269.
Trophon muricatus, 275.
Truncatulina lobatula, 183.
Trypanosyllis zebra, 220.
Tryphosa nana = T. Sarsi, 238.
Tryphosa Sarsi, 238.
Tubiclava lucerna, 187.

— =Merona, 187.
Tubularia(Thaninocuidia)humilis, 190.

— indivisa, 190.

— (Thamnocnidia) larynx, 190.
Tubilipora liliacea, 265.

— phalangea, 266.

— plumosa, 266.
Turbonilla lactea, 273.
Turritella communis, 274.

— terehra = T. communis, 274.

Typosyllis alternosetosa, 219.

— prolifera, 219.

U.

Umbonula verrucosa, 262.
Unciola crenatipalma, 241.
Upogebia stellata, 252.
Z/ras^f r = Asterias rubens, 208.
Urticina felina, 205.
XJtriculus = Tornatina, 276.
Uvigerina angulosa, 182.

V.

Yelutina laevigata, 272.
Venus (Ventricola) casina, 290.

— (Clausinella) fasciata, 290.

— (Chamelsea) gallina, 290.

— (Timoclea) ovata, 290.

— striatula = Y. (Chamelaea) gallina,

290.

— (Ventricola) verrucosa, 290.
Verneuilina polystroplia, 177.
Verruca Stroemia, 237.
FirSms = Hippolyte, 250.
Virgularia miralnli;?, 202.
Virgulina schreibersiana, 178.
Vulsella barljata, 286.

— phaseolina, 286.
Volvulella acuminata, 276.
Vorticeros auriculatum, 213.

— luteum, 213.

W.

Willia stellata, 192.

X.

Xantho florida=:X. incisus, 256.

— hydrophilus, 256.

— incisus, 256.

— rivulosa = X. hydrophilus, 256.

Z.

Zanclea implexa, 188.
Zanclea = Gemmaria, 1 92.
Zippora membranacea, 271.

WII.I.IAM nREN'DON AND SON", LTD.
IKINTERS, I'LYMOUTH

Plate I.

I

L.G.

%';

//<

_ C

_ S.L.G

W.L.G

2

».L.O.—

Vy.V..C ^li-

C

s.\..c

W.U.C

y

§mr':..;4.

4

S.L.G

~^^i$$=^

W.L.G.
W.I.

__ S.L.G

■Jdtini. Mar. lihil. Assov., VoL VII., y<i. I.

Plate II.

C.

S.I.

W.I.

S.2

.".'''> --.-^^s^

\

•^ A

c

W.I.

W2

JiiKriK M^iif. Biol. Aasoc, To/. I'll., Xo. 1.

Plate III

\

: W.Z

1

C

W.I.

W.2.

v^ W.5.

'.Si'^ir^

Jourii. M<ir. Jtiol. ^Issor., ViJ. ill Xo. 1.

ml'

^liliii!

mM

■ : ; I'

|;.. ;. '

■ ..• ■ ■;■. : ,. ' '-! ■

,1. ,

■&A

\

JoKin. M(tf. Biol. Assoc, Vol. ]'/f., X<i. i.

Plate V.

l^i^^^^^S^..

^:^:

mw

•j^

jfc^

"^Is^l^

s^^

W.I

^^

c

WJ.

W.2
W.3

2

Jointi. Miir. li'iiil. .Issue., ]'iil. I'lr., Xo. 1.

Plate VI.

_ C

W.I.

S.2

I

w.

W.2.

W.3.
W 4.

Jotini. Mar. B'uiJ. Axuoc, Vol. VIT., Xo. 1.

Plate VII.

W.I.

jonrn. Mar. Biol. .Issor., ]'id. TIL, Xo. 1.

I

Plate Viii.

^---^ W.I.

W.2

W.I.

W.2.
5.3.

Juiini. Mar. Biol Asuoc, ]'ol. III., iVo. }.

Jontn. iSu. DIol. Amoc, Vol. Vlt., Ko. I. PUt« IX.

Journ.Mar.Biol.AssocYol.VII.

mm^^ //

t \ ■■. » / •-

A \

r^i

3

V

" 7 ■ i

^
f

1

i

fi&.:.

^

^.^

!

^'/^

&:t^

Pl.X

"^^^-^r-^' %'Ji

^

wcf'

lA,Jr>tV

5

V,

•J^

K W. Sexton del

West, Newman lith London.

PALLASIA MURATA n.sp.

Jourrv.Mar. Biol. Assoc. Vol. VII.

la.

West.Newman hth

Fig? 1-10. 14-21, 23-26, 30.

Jourrv.Mar.Biol. Assoc. Vol. VII.

Plate XII.

d--'

h, »

T.J.E.del.

Fig? 11-13, 2S, 86-29

■West^Newlciai: chromo,

■^9

3-11111 If in

3 2044 093 366 763

Date Due

Stf — -^-1^09

^«B^^